Delta Ia-Mds CP2000 Um en 20200901

Delta Fan / Pump Vector Control Drive - CP2000 Series User Manual
Industrial Automation Headquarters

Delta Electronics, Inc.
Taoyuan Technology Center
No.18, Xinglong Rd., Taoyuan District,
Taoyuan City 33068, Taiwan
TEL: 886-3-362-6301 / FAX: 886-3-371-6301
Asia EMEA
Delta Electronics (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. Headquarters: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
No.182 Minyu Rd., Pudong Shanghai, P.R.C. Sales: Sales.IA.EMEA@deltaww.com
Post code : 201209 Marketing: Marketing.IA.EMEA@deltaww.com
TEL: 86-21-6872-3988 / FAX: 86-21-6872-3996 Technical Support: iatechnicalsupport@deltaww.com
Customer Service: 400-820-9595 Customer Support: Customer-Support@deltaww.com
Service: Service.IA.emea@deltaww.com
Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc. TEL: +31(0)40 800 3800
Tokyo Office
Industrial Automation Sales Department BENELUX: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
2-1-14 Shibadaimon, Minato-ku De Witbogt 20, 5652 AG Eindhoven, The Netherlands
Tokyo, Japan 105-0012 Mail: Sales.IA.Benelux@deltaww.com
TEL: 81-3-5733-1155 / FAX: 81-3-5733-1255 TEL: +31(0)40 800 3800
DACH: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.

Delta Electronics (Korea), Inc.
Coesterweg 45, D-59494 Soest, Germany
Seoul Office
Mail: Sales.IA.DACH@deltaww.com
1511, 219, Gasan Digital 1-Ro., Geumcheon-gu,
TEL: +49(0)2921 987 0
Seoul, 08501 South Korea
TEL: 82-2-515-5305 / FAX: 82-2-515-5302 France: Delta Electronics (France) S.A.
ZI du bois Challand 2, 15 rue des Pyrénées,
Delta Energy Systems (Singapore) Pte Ltd. Lisses, 91090 Evry Cedex, France
4 Kaki Bukit Avenue 1, #05-04, Singapore 417939 Mail: Sales.IA.FR@deltaww.com
TEL: 65-6747-5155 / FAX: 65-6744-9228 TEL: +33(0)1 69 77 82 60
Delta Electronics (India) Pvt. Ltd. Iberia: Delta Electronics Solutions (Spain) S.L.U
Plot No.43, Sector 35, HSIIDC Gurgaon,
PIN 122001, Haryana, India
TEL: 91-124-4874900 / FAX : 91-124-4874945
Ctra. De Villaverde a Vallecas, 265 1º Dcha Ed.
Hormigueras – P.I. de Vallecas 28031 Madrid
TEL: +34(0)91 223 74 20
Delta Fan/Pump Vector
Delta Electronics (Thailand) PCL.
909 Soi 9, Moo 4, Bangpoo Industrial Estate (E.P.Z),
Pattana 1 Rd., T.Phraksa, A.Muang,
Carrer Llacuna 166, 08018 Barcelona, Spain
Mail: Sales.IA.Iberia@deltaww.com Control Drive
Italy: Delta Electronics (Italy) S.r.l.
CP2000 Series
Samutprakarn 10280, Thailand Ufficio di Milano Via Senigallia 18/2 20161 Milano (MI)
TEL: 66-2709-2800 / FAX : 662-709-2827 Piazza Grazioli 18 00186 Roma Italy
Mail: Sales.IA.Italy@deltaww.com
Delta Energy Systems (Australia) Pty Ltd. TEL: +39 02 64672538
User Manual
Unit 20-21/45 Normanby Rd., Notting Hill Vic 3168, Australia
TEL: 61-3-9543-3720 Russia: Delta Energy System LLC
Vereyskaya Plaza II, office 112 Vereyskaya str.
Americas 17 121357 Moscow Russia
Mail: Sales.IA.RU@deltaww.com
Delta Electronics (Americas) Ltd.
TEL: +7 495 644 3240
Raleigh Office
P.O. Box 12173, 5101 Davis Drive, Turkey: Delta Greentech Elektronik San. Ltd. Sti. (Turkey)
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, U.S.A. Şerifali Mah. Hendem Cad. Kule Sok. No:16-A
TEL: 1-919-767-3813 / FAX: 1-919-767-3969 34775 Ümraniye – İstanbul
Mail: Sales.IA.Turkey@deltaww.com
Delta Greentech (Brasil) S/A TEL: + 90 216 499 9910
São Paulo Office
Rua Itapeva, 26 – 3˚ Andar - Bela Vista GCC: Delta Energy Systems AG (Dubai BR)
CEP: 01332-000 – São Paulo – SP - Brasil P.O. Box 185668, Gate 7, 3rd Floor, Hamarain Centre
TEL: 55-11-3530-8642 / 55-11-3530-8640 Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Mail: Sales.IA.MEA@deltaww.com
Delta Electronics International Mexico S.A. de C.V. TEL: +971(0)4 2690148
Mexico Office
Vía Dr. Gustavo Baz No. 2160, Colonia La Loma, Egypt + North Africa: Delta Electronics
54060 Tlalnepantla Estado de Mexico 511 Cairo Business Plaza, North 90 street,
TEL: 52-55-2628-3015 #3050/3052 New Cairo, Cairo, Egypt
Mail: Sales.IA.MEA@deltaww.com
*We reserve the right to change the information in this manual without prior notice.
w w w. d e l t a w w. c o m
DELTA_IA-MDS_CP2000_UM_EN_20200901
Copyright notice
©Delta Electronics, Inc. All rights reserved.
All information contained in this user manual is the exclusive property of Delta Electronics Inc.
(hereinafter referred to as "Delta ") and is protected by copyright law and all other laws. Delta retains the
exclusive rights of this user manual in accordance with the copyright law and all other laws. No parts in
this manual may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, translated or used in any other ways without
the prior consent of Delta.
Limitation of Liability
The contents of this user manual are only for the use of the AC motor drives manufactured by Delta. Except
as defined in special mandatory laws, Delta provides this user manual “as is” and does not offer any kind
of warranty through this user manual for using the product, either express or implied, including but not
limited to the following: (i) this product will meet your needs or expectations; (ii) the information contained
in the product is current and correct; (iii) the product does not infringe any rights of any other person. You
shall bear your own risk to use this product.
In no event shall Delta, its subsidiaries, affiliates, managers, employees, agents, partners and licensors
be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, derivative or consequential damages ( including but
not limited to the damages for loss of profits, goodwill, use or other intangible losses) unless the laws
contains special mandatory provisions to the contrary.
Delta reserves the right to make changes to the user manual and the products described in the user
manual without prior notice and afterwards.
PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY.
 Disconnect AC input power before connecting any wiring to the AC motor drive.
 Even if the power has been turned off, a charge may still remain in the DC-link
capacitors with hazardous voltages before the POWER LED is OFF. Do NOT touch the
DANGER
internal circuits and components.
 There are highly sensitive MOS components on the printed circuit boards. These
components are especially sensitive to static electricity. Take anti-static measure before
touching these components or the circuit boards.
 Never modify the internal components or wiring.
 Ground the AC motor drive by using the ground terminal. The grounding method must
comply with the laws of the country where the AC motor drive is to be installed.
 Do NOT install the AC motor drive in a location with high temperature, direct sunlight or
inflammable materials or gases.
 Never connect the AC motor drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 directly to the
AC mains circuit power supply.
CAU TION
 After finishing the wiring of the AC motor drive, check if U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 are
short-circuited to ground with a multimeter. Do NOT power the drive if short circuits occur.
Eliminate the short circuits before the drive is powered.
 The rated voltage of power system to install motor drives is listed below. Ensure that the
installation voltage is in the correct range when installing a motor drive.
1. For 230V models, the range is between 170–264V.
 Refer to the table below for short circuit rating:
Model (Power) Short circuit rating
230V / 460V 100 kA
575V (2–20HP) 5 kA
690V (25–50HP) 5 kA
690V (60–175HP) 10 kA
690V (215–335HP) 18 kA
690V (425–600HP) 30 kA
690V (745–850HP) 42 kA
 Only qualified persons are allowed to install, wire and maintain the AC motor drives.
 Even if the three-phase AC motor is stopped, a charge with hazardous voltages may still
remain in the main circuit terminals of the AC motor drive.
 The performance of electrolytic capacitor will degrade if it is not charged for a long time. It
is recommended to charge the drive which is stored in no charge condition every 2 years
for 3–4 hours to restore the performance of electrolytic capacitor in the motor drive. Note:
When power up the motor drive, use adjustable AC power source (ex. AC
autotransformer) to charge the drive at 70%–80% of rated voltage for 30 minutes (do not
run the motor drive). Then charge the drive at 100% of rated voltage for an hour (do not
run the motor drive). By doing these, restore the performance of electrolytic capacitor
before starting to run the motor drive. Do NOT run the motor drive at 100% rated voltage
right away.
 Pay attention to the following precautions when transporting and installing this package
(including wooden crate and wood stave)
1. If you need to deworm the wooden crate, do NOT use fumigation or you will damage
the drive. Any damage to the drive caused by using fumigation voids the warranty.
I
2. Use other methods, such as heat treatment or any other non-fumigation treatment, to
deworm the wood packaging material.
3. If you use heat treatment to deworm, leave the packaging materials in an environment
of over 56°C for a minimum of thirty minutes.
 Connect the drive to a three-phase three-wire or three-phase four-wire Wye system to
comply with UL standards.
 If the motor drive generates leakage current over AC 3.5 mA or over DC 10 mA on a
grounding conductor, compliance with local grounding regulations or IEC61800-5-1
standard is the minimum requirement for grounding.
NOTE
The content of this manual may be revised without prior notice. Please consult our distributors or download
the latest version at http://www.deltaww.com/iadownload_acmotordrive
II
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................1-1
1-1 Nameplate Information…..................................................................................................1-2

1-2 Model Name………….......................................................................................................1-3
1-3 Serial Number.................................................................................................................1-3
1-4 Apply After Service by Mobile Device………………………………………………...…….1-4
1-5 RFI Jumper…..................................................................................................................1-5
1-6 Dimensions.....................................................................................................................1-8
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION ..................................................................................................................2-1
2-1 Mounting Clearance..........................................................................................................2-2

2-2 Air Flow and Power Dissipation...........................................................................................2-5
CHAPTER 3 UNPACKING ........................................................................................................................3-1
3-1 Unpacking.........................................................................................................................3-2
3-2 The Lifting Hook..............................................................................................................3-25
CHAPTER 4 WIRING ................................................................................................................................4-1
4-1 System Wiring Diagram...................................................................................................4-3

4-2 Wiring....................................................................................................................4-4
CHAPTER 5 MAIN CIRCUIT TERMINALS .............................................................................................5-1
5-1 Main Circuit Diagram.........................................................................................................5-4

5-2 Specifications of Main Circuit Terminals.............................................................................5-7
CHPATER 6 CONTROL TERMINALS ......................................................................................................6-1
6-1 Remove the Cover for Wiring…………………………………………………………………6-4

6-2 Specifications of Control Terminal........................................................................................6-8
6-3 Remove the Terminal Block..............................................................................................6-11
CHAPTER 7 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ................................................................................................7-1
7-1 All Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives................................................7-2
7-2 Magnetic Contactor / Air Circuit Breaker and Non-fuse Circuit Breaker....................................7-8
7-3 Fuse Specification Chart ....................................................................................................7-13
7-4 AC / DC Reactor..............................................................................................................7-15
7-5 Zero Phase Reactor.........................................................................................................7-63
7-6 EMC Filter.......................................................................................................................7-66
III
7-7 Panel Mounting...............................................................................................................7-79
7-8 Conduit Box Kit...............................................................................................................7-81
7-9 Fan Kit.........................................................................................................................7-96
7-10 Flange Mounting Kit ....................................................................................................7-114
7-11 Power Terminal Kit………………………………………………………………………..……7-129
7-12 USB/RS-485 Communication Interface IFD6530….........................................................7-131
CHAPTER 8 OPTION CARDS ..................................................................................................................8-1
8-1 Option Card Installation......................................................................................................8-2

8-2 EMC-D42A -- Extension card for 4-point digital input / 2-point digital input.................................8-11
8-3 EMC-D611A -- Extension card for 6-point digital input (110VAC input voltage)................................8-11
8-4 EMC-R6AA -- Relay output extension card (6-point N.O. output contact)......................................8-11
8-5 EMC-BPS01 -- +24V power card..................................................................................................8-12
8-6 EMC-A22A -- Extension card for 2-point analog input/ 2-point analog output……………….……..8-13
8-7 CMC-PD01 -- Communication card, PROFIBUS DP ...................................................8-15
8-8 CMC-DN01 -- Communication card, DeviceNet ......................................................8-17
8-9 CMC-EIP01 -- Communication card, EtherNet/IP .................................................8-20
8-10 CMC-PN01 -- Communication card, PROFINET ..............................................8-24
8-11 eZVFD-CC -- Communication card, BACnet Ethernet/BACnet IP ......................8-28
8-12 EMC-COP01 -- Communication card, CANopen ..............................................8-32
8-13 Delta Standard Fieldbus Cables………………………………………………………8-33
CHAPTER 9 SPECIFICATION ..................................................................................................................9-1
9-1 230V Models…………………………………...........................................................................9-2

9-2 460V Models…………………………………...........................................................................9-3
9-3 575V Models………………………………………………………………………………..….…...….9-5
9-4 690V Models……………………………………………………………….………………..…………9-6
9-5 Environment for Operation, Storage and Transportation………………………….........................9-9
9-6 Specification for Operation Temperature and Protection Level…….......................................9-10
9-7 Derating Curve for Ambient Temperature, Altitude and Carrier Frequency….............................9-11
9-8 Efficiency Curve……………………………………………………………………………………..9-18
CHAPTER 10 DIGITAL KEYPAD ...........................................................................................................10-1
10-1 Descriptions of Digital Keypad ………………………………….............................................10-2

10-2 Function of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01.............................................................................10-5
10-3 TPEditor Installation Instruction ....................................................................................10-25
10-4 Fault Code Description of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01.......................................................10-34
10-5 Unsupported Functions when using TPEditor on KPC-CC01 Keypad………………10-39
CHAPTER 11 SUMMARY OF PARAMETERS ....................................................................................... 11-1
IV
CHAPTER 12 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETER SETTINGS ................................................................12-1
12-1 Description of Parameter Settings ……................................................................... 12.1-00-1

00 Drive Parameters…………………………………………………………………………...12.1-00-1
01 Basic Parameters……………………………………………………………………….….12.1-01-1
02 Digital Input / Output Parameters………………………………………………………….12.1-02-1
03 Analog Input / Output Parameters………………………………………………………12.1-03-1
04 Multi-stage Speed Parameters………………………………………………………..…..12.1-04-1
05 Motor Parameters……………………………………………………………………….….12.1-05-1
06 Protection Parameters……………………………………………………………………..12.1-06-1
07 Special Parameters………………………………………………………………………..12.1-07-1
08 High-function PID Parameters…………………………………………………………….12.1-08-1
09 Communication Parameters………………………………………………………….……12.1-09-1
10 Feedback Control Parameters……………………………………………………………12.1-10-1
11 Advanced Parameters………………………………………………………………….…12.1-11-1
12 Pump Parameters……………………………………………………………………...…..12.1-12-1
13 Application Parameters by Industry…………………………………………………….12.1-13-1
14 Extension Card Parameter………………………………..…………………………….12.1-14-1
12-2 Adjustment & Application............................................................................................ 12.2-1
CHAPTER 13 WARNING CODES ..........................................................................................................13-1
CHAPTER 14 FAULT CODES AND DESCRIPTIONS............................................................................14-1
CHAPTER 15 CANOPEN OVERVIEW ...................................................................................................15-1
15-1 CANopen Overview……………………............................................................................15-3

15-2 Wiring for CANopen……………………….........................................................................15-6
15-3 CANopen Communication Interface Description.……………............................................15-7
15-4 CANopen Supporting Index ……..................................................................................15-15
15-5 CANopen Fault Codes ………………………..................................................................15-21
15-6 CANopen LED Function……………..............................................................................15-29
CHAPTER 16 PLC FUNCTION APPLICATIONS ...................................................................................16-1
16-1 PLC Summary……………………....................................................................................16-2

16-2 Notes Before PLC Use……………………........................................................................16-3
16-3 Turn On…………….......................………….....................................................................16-5
16-4 Basic Principles of PLC Ladder Diagrams......................................................................16-15
16-5 Various PLC Device Functions………………..................................................................16-26
16-6 Introduction to the Command Window..........................................................................16-41
16-7 Error Display and Handling.........................................................................................16-130
V
16-8 CANopen Master Control Applications........................................................................16-131
16-9 Explanation Of Various PLC Mode Controls (speed, torque, homing, and position)...........16-143
16-10 Internal Communications Main Node Control..............................................................16-145
16-11 Modbus Remote IO Control Applications (use MODRW)...........................................16-149
16-12 Calendar Function……………………………………………………………………………..16-156
CHAPTER 17 INTRODUCTION TO BACnet…………………………………………………….….17-1
CHAPTER 18 SAFE TORQUE OFF FUNCTION……………………………………………………….18-1
18-1 The Drive Safety Function Failure Rate……………………………………………………………18-2

18-2 Safe Torque Off Terminal Function Description…………………………………………………...18-2
18-3 Wiring Diagram……………………………………………………………………………………….18-3
18-4 Parameters……………………………………………………………………………………………18-5
18-5 Operating Sequence Description…………………………………………………...………………18-6
18-6 New Error Code for STO Function………………………………………………………..………..18-8
APPENDIX A. REVISION HISTORY…………………………………………………..………………………..A-1
Issued Edition: 01
Firmware Version: V2.07
(Refer to Parameter 00-06 on the product to get the firmware version.)
Issued Date: 2020/09
VI
Chapter 1 IntroductionCP2000
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-1 Nameplate Information
1-2 Model Name
1-3 Serial Number
1-4 Apply After Service by Mobile Device
1-5 RFI Jumper
1-6 Dimensions
1-1
Receiving and Inspection

After receiving the AC motor drive, check for the following:
1. Inspect the unit after unpacking to ensure that it was not damaged during shipment. Make sure that
the part number printed on the package matches the part number indicated on the nameplate.
2. Make sure that the mains voltage is within the range indicated on the nameplate. Install the AC motor
drive according to the instructions in this manual.
3. Before applying power, make sure that all devices, including mains power, motor, control board and
digital keypad, are connected correctly.
4. When wiring the AC motor drive, make sure that the wiring of input terminals “R/L1, S/L2, T/L3” and
output terminals “U/T1, V/T2, W/T3” are correct to prevent damage to the drive.
5. When power is applied, use the digital keypad (KPC-CC01) to select the language and set
parameters. When executing a trial run, begin with a low speed and then gradually increase the
speed to the desired speed.
1-1 Nameplate Information:
Figure 1-1
1-2
1-2 Model Name:
1-3 Serial Number:
1-3
1-4 Apply After Service by Mobile Device

1-4-1 Location of Service Link Label
Frame A–H
Service link label (Service Label) is pasted on the area as the drawing below shows:
Figure 1-2
1-4-2 Service Link Label
Figure 1-3
Scan QR Code to apply

1. Find the QR code sticker (as shown above).
2. Use a smartphone to run a QR Code reader APP.
3. Point your camera at the QR Code. Hold your camera steady until the QR code comes into focus.
4. Access the Delta After Service website.
5. Fill your information into the column marked with an orange star.
6. Enter the CAPTCHA and click “Submit” to complete the application.
Cannot find the QR Code?
1. Open a web browser on your computer or smart phone.
2. Enter https://service.deltaww.com/ia/repair in browser address bar and press the Enter key.
3. Fill your information into the columns marked with an orange star.
4. Enter the CAPTCHA and click “Submit” to complete the application.
1-4
1-5 RFI Jumper

(1) The driver contains Varistor / MOVs that are connected from phase-to-phase and from
phase-to-ground to prevent the drive from unexpected stop or damage caused by mains surges or
voltage spikes. Because the Varistors / MOVs from phase-to-ground are connected to ground with the
RFI jumper, removing the RFI jumper disables the protection.
(2) In the models with a built-in EMC filter, the RFI jumper connects the filter capacitors to ground to form
a return path for high frequency noise in order to isolate the noise from contaminating the mains
power. Removing the RFI jumper strongly reduces the effect of the built-in EMC filter. Although a
single drive complies with the international standards for leakage current, an installation with several
drives with built-in EMC filter can trigger the RCD. Removing the RFI jumper helps, but the EMC
performance of each drive would be no longer guaranteed.
Frame A–C
Screw Torque: 8–10 kg-cm / [6.9–8.7 lb -in.] / [0.8–1.0 Nm]
Loosen the screw and remove the MOV-PLATE. Fasten the screws back to the original position after
MOV-PLATE is removed.
Figure 1-4 Figure 1-5
Frame D0–H
Remove the MOV-PLATE by hands, no screws need to be loosen
Figure 1-6
1-5
Isolating main power from ground:

When the power distribution system for the drive is a floating ground system (IT Systems) or an
asymmetric ground system (Corner Grounded TN Systems), you must remove the RFI jumper. Removing
the RFI Jumper disconnects the internal capacitors from ground to avoid damaging the internal circuits
and to reduce the ground leakage current.
Important points regarding ground connection

 To ensure the safety of personnel, proper operation, and to reduce electromagnetic radiation, you
must properly ground the motor and drive during installation.
 The diameter of the grounding cables must comply with the local safety regulations.
 You must connect the shielded cable to the motor drive’s ground to meet safety regulations.
 Only use the shielded cables as the ground for equipment when the aforementioned points are met.
 When installing multiple drives, do not connect the grounds of the drives in series but connect each
drive to ground. The following pictures show the correct and wrong ways to connect the grounds.
Pay particular attention to the following points:

 Do not remove the RFI jumper while the power is on.
 Removing the RFI jumper also cuts the capacitor conductivily of the surge absorber to ground and the
built-in EMC filter capacitors. Compliance with the EMC specifications is no longer guaranteed.
 Do not remove the RFI jumper if the mains power is a symmetrical grounded power system in order to
maintain the efficiency for EMC circuit.
 Remove the RFI jumper when conducting high voltage tests. When conducting a high voltage test to
the entire facility, disconnect the mains power and the motor if the leakage current is too high.
Floating Ground System (IT Systems)

A floating ground system is also called an IT system, an ungrounded system, or a high impedance /
resistance (greater than 30 Ω) grounded system.
 Remove the RFI jumper to disconnect the ground cable from the internal filter capacitor and surge
absorber.
 In situations where EMC is required, check for excess electromagnetic radiation affecting nearby
low-voltage circuits. In some situations, the adapter and cable naturally provide enough suppression.
If in doubt, install an extra electrostatic shielded cable on the power supply side between the main
circuit and the control terminals to increase shielding.
 Do not install an external RFI / EMC filter. The external EMC filter passes through a filter capacitor and
connects power input to the ground. This is very dangerous and damages the motor drive.
1-6
Asymmetric Ground System (Corner Grounded TN Systems)

Caution: Do not remove the RFI jumper while power to the input terminal of the drive is ON.
In the following four situations, you must remove the RFI jumper. This is to prevent the system from
grounding through the RFI and filter capacitors and damaging the drive.
You must remove the RFI jumper for an asymmetric ground system
1. Grounding at a corner in a triangle configuration 2. Grounding at a midpoint in a polygonal
L1 configuration
L1
L2
L2
L3 L3
3. Grounding at one end in a single-phase 4. No stable neutral grounding in a three-phase
configuration autotransformer configuration
L1
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
N L3
You can use the RFI jumper for a symmetrical grounding power system
In a situation with a symmetrical grounding power L1
system, you can use the RFI jumper to maintain

the effect of the built-in EMC filter and surge
absorber. For example, the diagram on the right is
a symmetrical grounding power system.
L2
L3
Figure 1-13
1-7
1-6 Dimensions
Frame A
VFD007CP23A-21; VFD015CP23A-21; VFD022CP23A-21; VFD037CP23A-21; VFD055CP23A-21;

VFD007CP43A-21; VFD015CP43B-21; VFD022CP43B-21; VFD037CP43B-21; VFD040CP43A-21;
VFD055CP43B-21; VFD075CP43B-21; VFD007CP4EA-21; VFD015CP4EB-21; VFD022CP4EB-21;
VFD037CP4EB-21; VFD040CP4EA-21; VFD055CP4EB-21; VFD075CP4EB-21; VFD015CP53A-21;
VFD022CP53A-21; VFD037CP53A-21
See Detail A
See Detail B
Detail A (Mounting Hole)
Detail B (Mounting Hole)
Figure 1-14
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 H1 D1* S1 Φ1 Φ2 Φ3
130.0 250.0 170.0 116.0 236.0 45.8 6.2 22.2 34.0 28.0
A
[5.12] [9.84] [6.69] [4.57] [9.29] [1.80] [0.24] [0.87] [1.34] [1.10]
D1*: Flange mounting
1-8
Frame B
VFD075CP23A-21; VFD110CP23A-21; VFD150CP23A-21; VFD110CP43B-21; VFD150CP43B-21;

VFD185CP43B-21; VFD110CP4EB-21; VFD150CP4EB-21; VFD185CP4EB-21; VFD055CP53A-21;
VFD075CP53A-21; VFD110CP53A-21; VFD150CP53A-21
See
See Detail
Detail AA
See Detail
See DetailB B
Detail
DetailAA(Mounting Hole)
(Mounting Hole)
Detail
DetailBB(Mounting Hole)
(Mounting Hole)
Figure 1-15
Unit: mm [inch]
190.0 320.0 190.0 173.0 303.0 77.9 8.5 22.2 34.0 43.8
B
[7.48] [12.60] [7.48] [6.81] [11.93] [3.07] [0.33] [0.87] [1.34] [1.72]
1-9
Frame C
VFD185CP23A-21; VFD220CP23A-21; VFD300CP23A-21; VFD220CP43A-21; VFD300CP43B-21;

VFD370CP43B-21; VFD220CP4EA-21; VFD300CP4EB-21; VFD370CP4EB-21; VFD185CP63A-21;
See Detail
See Detail A A
See Detail
See Detail B B
Detail A A(Mounting
Detail Hole)
(Mounting Hole)
Detail B (Mounting
Detail Hole)
B (Mounting Hole)
Figure 1-16
Unit: mm [inch]
250.0 400.0 210.0 231.0 381.0 92.9 8.5 22.2 34.0 50.0
C [9.84] [15.75] [8.27] [9.09] [15.00] [3.66] [0.33] [0.87] [1.34] [1.97]
1-10
Frame D
D0-1: VFD450CP43S-00; VFD550CP43S-00
D
W SEE
See DETAIL
Detail A A D1
W1 D2
H1
H2
H3
S2
See DETAIL
SEE Detail B B
S1 S1
DETAIL
Detail AA DETAIL
Detail B B
(MOUNTING HOLE) (MOUNTING HOLE)
(Mounting Hole) (Mounting Hole)
Figure 1-17
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H1 D W1 H2 H3 D1* D2 S1 S2
280.0 500.0 255.0 235.0 475.0 442.0 94.2 16.0 11.0 18.0
D0-1
[11.02] [19.69] [10.04] [9.25] [18.70] [17.40] [3.71] [0.63] [0.43] [0.71]
1-11
Frame D
D0-2: VFD450CP43S-21; VFD550CP43S-21

D
W SEE
SeeDETAIL
Detail AA D1
W1 D2
H1
H2
H3
H
S2
SeeDETAIL
SEE Detail BB
2 3 3 2
1 1
S1 S1
DETAIL
Detail AA DETAIL
Detail BB
(MOUNTING HOLE) (MOUNTING HOLE)
Figure 1-18
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 H1 H2 H3 D1* D2 S1 S2 Φ1 Φ2 Φ3
280.0 614.4 255.0 235.0 500.0 475.0 442.0 94.2 16.0 11.0 18.0 62.7 34.0 22.0
D0-2
[11.02] [24.19] [10.04] [9.25] [19.69] [18.70] [17.40] [3.71] [0.63] [0.43] [0.71] [2.47] [1.34] [0.87]
1-12
Frame D
D1: VFD370CP23A-00; VFD450CP23A-00; VFD750CP43B-00; VFD900CP43A-00; VFD450CP63A-00;

VFD550CP63A-00
D
W SeeDETAIL
SEE Detail A
A D1
W1 D2
H1
H2
H3
S2
SeeDETAIL
SEE DetailBB
S1 S1
DETAIL A DETAIL B
Detail A
(MOUNTING HOLE)
Detail B
(MOUNTING HOLE)
Figure 1-19
Unit: mm [inch]
330.0 275.0 285.0 550.0 525.0 492.0 107.2 16.0 11.0 18.0
D1 - - - -
[12.99] [10.83] [11.22] [21.65] [20.67] [19.37] [4.22] [0.63] [0.43] [0.71]
1-13
Frame D
D2: VFD370CP23A-21; VFD450CP23A-21; VFD750CP43B-21; VFD900CP43A-21; VFD450CP63A-21;

VFD550CP63A-21
D
W SeeDETAIL
SEE DetailAA D1
W1 D2
H1
H2
H3
H
S2
SeeDETAIL
SEE DetailBB
1 1
3 3
2 2
S1 S1
DETAIL A DETAIL B
Detail AHOLE)
(MOUNTING Detail BHOLE)
(MOUNTING
Figure 1-20
Unit: mm [inch]
330.0 688.3 275.0 285.0 550.0 525.0 492.0 107.2 16.0 11.0 18.0 76.2 34.0 22.0
D2
[12.99] [27.10] [10.83] [11.22] [21.65] [20.67] [19.37] [4.22] [0.63] [0.43] [0.71] [3.00] [1.34] [0.87]
1-14
Frame E
E1: VFD550CP23A-00; VFD750CP23A-00; VFD900CP23A-00; VFD1100CP43A-00; VFD1320CP43B-00;

VFD750CP63A-00; VFD900CP63A-00; VFD1100CP63A-00; VFD1320CP63A-00
W D
W1 See
Se DetaililAA
e Deta D1
H1
H2
H3
See
Se Detail ilBB
e Deta
DDetail
etai lAA D etai lBB
Detail
(Mou ntin gHole)
(Mounting Hol e) (Mou ntin gHole)
(Mounting Hol e)
Figure 1-21
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 H1 H2 H3 D1* D2 S1/S2 S3 Φ1 Φ2 Φ3
370.0 300.0 335.0 589.0 560.0 528.0 143.0 18.0 13.0 18.0
E1 - - - -
[14.57] [11.81] [13.19] [23.19] [22.05] [20.80] [5.63] [0.71] [0.51] [0.71]
1-15
Frame E
E2: VFD550CP23A-21; VFD750CP23A-21; VFD900CP23A-21; VFD1100CP43A-21; VFD1320CP43B-21;

W D
W1 See Detail A D1
H1
H2
H3
H
See Detail B
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
Detail A Detail B
Figure 1-22
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 H1 H2 H3 D1* D2 S1, S2 S3 Φ1 Φ2 Φ3
370.0 715.8 300.0 335.0 589.0 560.0 528.0 143.0 18.0 13.0 18.0 22.0 34.0 92.0
E2
[14.57] [28.18] [11.81] [13.19 [23.19] [22.05] [20.80] [5.63] [0.71] [0.51] [0.71] [0.87] [1.34] [3.62]
1-16
Frame F
F1: VFD1600CP43A-00; VFD1850CP43B-00; VFD1600CP63A-00; VFD2000CP63A-00
W D
W1 D1
Seee Detail
Se DetaAil A
H1
H2
H3
Se e Deta
See DetaililBB S3 D2
S1
S2
De tailAA(Mounting
Detail (Moun ting H ole )
Hole)
S1
De tail BB(Mounting
Detail (Mou ntinHole)
g Hol e)
Figure 1-23
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 H1 H2 H3 D1* D2 S1 S2 S3
420.0 300.0 380.0 800.0 770.0 717.0 124.0 18.0 13.0 25.0 18.0
F1 -
[16.54] [11.81] [14.96] [31.50] [30.32] [28.23] [4.88] [0.71] [0.51] [0.98] [0.71]
Frame Φ1 Φ2 Φ3
F1 - - -
1-17
Frame F
F2: VFD1600CP43A-21; VFD1850CP43B-21; VFD1600CP63A-21; VFD2000CP63A-21
W D
W1 D1
See
Se e Detail
Deta ilA A
H1
H2
H3
H
Se
Seee Detail
Deta ilBB S3 D2
S1
2
2
1
1
3
3
2
S2
Deta il A
Detail (Mo unti ng
A (Mounting Ho le)
Hole)
S1
D etai l BB (Mo
Detail unti ng
(Mounting Hol e)
Hole)
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 H1 H2 H3 D1* D2 S1 S2 S3
420.0 940.0 300.0 380.0 800.0 770.0 717.0 124.0 18.0 13.0 25.0 18.0
F2
[16.54] [37.00] [11.81] [14.96] [31.50] [30.32] [28.23] [4.88] [0.71] [0.51] [0.98] [0.71]
Frame Φ1 Φ2 Φ3
92.0 35.0 22.0
F2
[3.62] [1.38] [0.87]
1-18
Frame G
G1: VFD2000CP43A-00; VFD2200CP43A-00; VFD2500CP43A-00; VFD2800CP43A-00;

VFD2500CP63A-00; VFD3150CP63A-00
W D
W1 See
See De tailAA
Detail
H2
H1
H3
S3
See
See De tailBB
Detail
Deta il A
Detail A Deta
Detailil B
B
(Moun ting H ole ) (Mou ntin g Hol e)
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 H1 H2 H3 S1 S2 S3 Φ1 Φ2 Φ3
500.0 397.0 440.0 1000.0 963.0 913.6 13.0 26.5 27.0
G1 - - - -
[19.69] [15.63] [217.32] [39.37] [37.91] [35.97] [0.51] [1.04] [1.06]
1-19
Frame G
G2: VFD2000CP43A-21; VFD2200CP43A-21; VFD2500CP43A-21; VFD2800CP43A-21;

VFD2500CP63A-21; VFD3150CP63A-21
W D
W1
See Detail A
H3
H2
H1
H
S3
See Detail B
Detail A Detail B
Figure 1-26
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 H1 H2 H3 S1 S2 S3 Φ1 Φ2 Φ3
500.0 1240.2 397.0 440.0 1000.0 963.0 913.6 13.0 26.5 27.0 22.0 34.0 117.5
G2
[19.69] [48.83] [15.63] [217.32] [39.37] [37.91] [35.97] [0.51] [1.04] [1.06] [0.87] [1.34] [4.63]
1-20
Frame H
H1: VFD3150CP43A-00; VFD3550CP43A-00; VFD4000CP43A-00; VFD5000CP43A-00;

VFD5600CP43A-00; VFD6300CP43A-00
See Detail A
See Detail B
Detail A Detail B
Figure 1-27
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W H D W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 H1 H2 H3 H4
700.0 1435.0 398.0 630.0 290.0 1403.0 1346.6
H1 - - - - - -
[27.56] [56.5] [15.67] [24.8] [11.42] [55.24] [53.02]
Frame H5 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 S1 S2 S3 Φ1 Φ2 Φ3
45.0 13.0 26.5 25.0
H1 - - - - - - - - -
[1.77] [0.51] [1.04] [0.98]
1-21
Frame H
H2: VFD3150CP43C-00; VFD3550CP43C-00; VFD4000CP43C-00; VFD5000CP43C-00
See Detail A
Side fixing baffle plate Side fixing baffle plate

See Detail B
Detail A Detail B
Figure 1-28
Unit: mm [inch]
700.0 1745.0 404.0 630.0 500.0 630.0 760.0 800.0 1729.0 1701.6
H2 - - -
[27.56] [68.70] [15.90] [24.8] [19.69]- [24.80] [29.92] [31.5] [68.07] [66.99]
51.0 38.0 65.0 204.0 68.0 137.0 13.0 26.5 25.0
H2 - - - -
[2.00] [1.50] [2.56] [8.03] [2.68] [5.40] [0.51] [1.04] [0.98]
1-22
Frame H
H3: VFD3150CP43C-21; VFD3550CP43C-21; VFD4000CP43C-21; VFD5000CP43C-21;

VFD5600CP43C-21; VFD6300CP43C-21
See Detail A
Side fixing baffle plate Side fixing baffle plate

See Detail B
Detail A Detail B
Figure 1-29
Unit：mm [inch]
700.0 1745.0 404.0 630.0 500.0 630.0 760.0 800.0 1729.0 1701.6
H3 - - -
[27.56] [68.70] [15.91] [24.80] [19.69] [24.80] [29.92] [31.5] [68.07] [66.99]
51.0 38.0 65.0 204.0 68.0 137.0 13.0 26.5 25.0 22.0 34.0 117.5
H3 -
[2.00] [1.50] [2.56] [8.03] [2.68] [5.40] [0.51] [1.04] [0.98] [0.87] [1.34] [4.63]
1-23
690V
Frame H
H1: VFD4000CP63A-00; VFD4500CP63A-00; VFD5600CP63A-00; VFD6300CP63A-00
D
W SeeDETAIL
SEE DetailAA D1
H2
H3
H1
H
W2
W1 S4
SEE DETAIL B
See Detail B
S2
S3
S2
S1
Detail A Detail B
DETAIL A DETAIL B
(MountingHOLE)
(MOUNTING Hole) (Mounting HOLE)
(MOUNTING Hole)
Figure 1-30
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W W1 W2 H H1 H2 H3 D D1 S1 S2 S3 S4
700.0 630.0 290.0 1435.0 1389.0 1346.6 1375.0 398.0 45.0 26.5 13.0 14.0 25.0
H1
[27.56] [24.80] [11.42] [56.50] [54.68] [53.02] [54.13] [15.67] [1.77] [1.04] [0.51] [0.55] [0.98]
1-24
690V
Frame H
H2: VFD4000CP63A-21; VFD4500CP63A-21; VFD5600CP63A-21; VFD6300CP63A-21

W
D
W1 SeeDetail
See DetailA A D1
S4
H
H1
H3
H3
H2
W2
See
See Detail
Detail B B S2
3
1
2
3
1
2
1 1
S3
D3
D5
3 S5
3
S1
D3
D4
Detail A Detail B
D2
W3 DETAIL A DETAIL B
(MountingHOLE)
(MOUNTING Hole) (MountingHOLE)
(MOUNTING Hole)
W4
W5
Figure 1-31
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame W W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 H H1 H2 H3 D D1 D2
700.0 630.0 800.0 500.0 630.0 760.0 1745.0 1715.0 74.5 137.0 404.0 51.0 68.0
H2
[27.56] [24.80] [31.50] [19.69] [24.80] [29.92] [68.70] [67.52] [2.93] [5.39] [15.91] [2.01] [2.68]
Frame D3 D4 D5 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 Φ1 Φ2 Φ3
137.0 103.0 204.0 26.5 13.0 14.0 25.0 13.0 22.0 34.0 117.50
H2
[5.39] [4.06] [8.03] [1.04] [0.51] [0.55] [0.98] [0.51] [0.87] [1.34] [4.63]
1-25
Digital Keypad
KPC-CC01
Figure 1-32
1-26
Chapter 2 InstallationCP2000
Chapter 2 Installation
2-1 Mounting Clearance
2-2 Airflow and Power Dissipation
2-1
2-1 Mounting Clearance

 Prevent fiber particles, scraps of paper, shredded wood, sawdust, metal particles, etc. from adhering
to the heat sink.
 Install the AC motor drive in a metal cabinet. When installing one drive below another one, use a
metal separator between the AC motor drives to prevent mutual heating and to prevent the risk of fire
accident.
 Install the AC motor drive in Pollution Degree 2 environments only:
Normally only nonconductive pollution occurs and temporary conductivity caused by condensation is
expected.
The appearances shown in the following figures are for reference only. The actual motor drives may look
different.
Airflow direction: (Blue arrow) Inflow (Red arrow) Outflow (Black) Distance
Single drive installation (Frame A–H) Side-by-side horizontal installation (Frame A–C)
Multiple drives, single side-by-side

horizontal installation (Frame G, H)
Figure 2-3
Multiple drives, side-by-side

installation (Frame D0, D, E, F)
Install metal separator between the
drives.
Figure 2-4
2-2
Multiple drives side-by-side vertical installation

Ta: Frame A–G Ta*: Frame H
When installing one AC motor drive below another one (top-bottom installation), use a metal separator
between the drives to prevent mutual heating. The temperature measured at the fan’s inflow side must
be lower than the temperature measured at the operation side. If the fan’s inflow temperature is higher,
use a thicker or larger size of metal separator. Operation temperature is the temperature measured at
50 mm away from the fan’s inflow side (as shown in the figure below).
(Frame A–C)
Figure 2-5
(Frame D0–G)
Install metal separator between the drives.
Figure 2-6
Minimum mounting clearance

Frame A [mm] B [mm] C [mm] D [mm]
A–C 60 30 10 0
D0–F 100 50 - 0
G 200 100 - 0
H 350 0 0 200 (Ta = Ta* = 50°C)
H 350 0 0 100 (Ta = Ta* = 40°C)
Table 2-1
2-3
NOTE
The minimum mounting clearances A–D stated in the table above apply to AC motor drives installation. Failing to
follow the minimum mounting clearances may cause the fan to malfunction and heat dissipation problems.
VFD007CP23A-21; VFD007CP43A/4EA-21; VFD015CP23A-21; VFD015CP43B/4EB-21;

VFD022CP23A-21; VFD022CP43B/4EB-21; VFD037CP23A-21; VFD037CP43B/4EB-21;
Frame A
VFD040CP43A/4EA-21; VFD055CP23A-21; VFD055CP43B/4EB-21; VFD075CP43B/4EB-21;
VFD075CP23A-21; VFD110CP23A-21; VFD110CP43B/4EB -21; VFD150CP23A-21;
Frame B VFD150CP43B/4EB-21; VFD185CP43B/4EB-21; VFD055CP53A-21; VFD075CP53A-21;
VFD185CP23A-21; VFD220CP23A-21; VFD220CP43A/4EA -21; VFD300CP23A-21;
Frame C VFD300CP43B/4EB-21; VFD370CP43B/4EB-21; VFD185CP63A-21; VFD220CP63A-21;
Frame D0 VFD450CP43S-00; VFD550CP43S-00; VFD450CP43S-21; VFD550CP43S-21
VFD370CP23A-00/23A-21; VFD450CP23A-00/23A-21; VFD750CP43B-00/43B-21;
Frame D
VFD900CP43A-00/43A-21; VFD450CP63A-00/63A-21; VFD550CP63A-00/63A-21
VFD550CP23A-00/23A-21; VFD750CP23A-00/23A-21; VFD900CP23A-00/23A-21;
Frame E VFD1100CP43A-00/43A-21; VFD1320CP43B-00/43B-21; VFD750CP63A-00/63A-21;
VFD1600CP43A-00/43A-21; VFD1850CP43B-00/43B-21; VFD1600CP63A-00/63A-21;
Frame F
VFD2000CP63A-00/63A-21
VFD2000CP43A-00/43A-21; VFD2200CP43A-00/43A-21; VFD2500CP43A-00/43A-21;
Frame G
VFD3150CP43A-00/43C-00/43C-21; VFD3550CP43A-00/43C-00/43C-21;
VFD4000CP43A-00/43C-00/43C-21; VFD5000CP43A-00/43C-00/43C-21;
Frame H
VFD5600CP43A-00/43C-21; VFD6300CP43A-00/43C-21; VFD4000CP63A-00/63A-21;
Table 2-2
NOT E
※ The mounting clearance stated in the figure is for installing the drive in an
open area. To install the drive in a confined space (such as cabinet or
electric box), follow the following rules: (1) Keep the minimum mounting
clearances. (2) Install a ventilation equipment or an air conditioner to keep
surrounding temperature lower than operation temperature. (3) Refer to
parameter setting and set up Pr.00-16, Pr.00-17, and Pr.06-55.
※ The table below shows the heat dissipation and the required air volume
when installing a single drive in a confined space. When installing multiple
drives, the required air volume shall be multiplied by the number of the
drives.
※ Refer to the table below (Airflow Rate for Cooling) for ventilation
equipment design and selection.
※ Refer to the table below (Power Dissipation for AC Motor Drive) for air
conditioner design and selection.
※ Different control mode affects the derating. See Pr.06-55 for more
information.
Figure 2-7
※ Ambient temperature derating curve shows the derating status in different
temperature in relation to different protection level.
※ Refer to Section 9-7 for ambient temperature derating curve and derating
curves under different control modes.
※ If UL Type 1 models need side-by-side installation, remove the top cover
for Frame A–C. Do NOT install the conduit box for Frame D and above.
2-4
2-2 Airflow and Power Dissipation

Power Dissipation for
Airflow Rate for Cooling
AC Motor Drive
Model No. Flow Rate (Unit: cfm) Flow Rate (Unit: m3/hr) Power Dissipation (Unit: watt)
Loss External
External Internal Total External Internal Total Internal Total
(Heat Sink)
VFD007CP23A-21 - - - - - - 40 31 71
VFD015CP23A-21 - - - - - - 61 39 100
VFD022CP23A-21 14 - 14 24 - 24 81 45 126
VFD037CP23A-21 14 - 14 24 - 24 127 57 184
VFD055CP23A-21 10 - 10 17 - 17 158 93 251
VFD075CP23A-21 40 14 54 68 24 92 291 101 392
VFD110CP23A-21 66 14 80 112 24 136 403 162 565
VFD150CP23A-21 58 14 73 99 24 124 570 157 727
VFD185CP23A-21 166 12 178 282 20 302 622 218 840
VFD220CP23A-21 166 12 178 282 20 302 777 197 974
VFD300CP23A-21 146 12 158 248 20 268 878 222 1100
VFD370CP23A-00/
179 30 209 304 51 355 1271 311 1582
VFD370CP23A-21
VFD450CP23A-00/
179 30 209 304 51 355 1550 335 1885
VFD450CP23A-21
VFD550CP23A-00/
228 73 301 387 124 511 1762 489 2251
VFD550CP23A-21
VFD750CP23A-00/
228 73 301 387 124 511 2020 574 2594
VFD750CP23A-21
VFD900CP23A-00/
246 73 319 418 124 542 2442 584 3026
VFD900CP23A-21
VFD007CP43A/
- - - - - - 35 32 67
VFD007CP4EA-21
VFD015CP43B/
- - - - - - 48 39 87
VFD015CP4EB-21
VFD022CP43B/
- - - - - - 64 52 116
VFD022CP4EB-21
VFD037CP43B/
14 - 14 24 - 24 103 77 180
VFD037CP4EB-21
VFD040CP43A/
10 - 10 17 - 17 124 81 205
VFD040CP4EA-21
VFD055CP43B/
10 - 10 17 - 17 142 116 258
VFD055CP4EB-21
VFD075CP43B/
10 - 10 17 - 17 205 129 334
VFD075CP4EB-21
VFD110CP43B/
40 14 54 68 24 92 291 175 466
VFD110CP4EB-21
VFD150CP43B/
66 14 80 112 24 136 376 190 566
VFD150CP4EB-21
VFD185CP43B/
58 14 73 99 24 124 396 210 606
VFD185CP4EB-21
VFD220CP43A/
99 21 120 168 36 204 455 358 813
VFD220CP4EA-21
VFD300CP43B/
99 21 120 168 36 204 586 410 996
VFD300CP4EB-21
VFD370CP43B/
126 21 147 214 36 250 778 422 1200
VFD370CP4EB-21
VFD450CP43S-00/
179 30 209 304 51 355 1056 459 1515
VFD450CP43S-21
VFD550CP43S-00/
179 30 209 304 51 355 1163 669 1832
VFD550CP43S-21
VFD750CP43B-00/
179 30 209 304 51 355 1407 712 2119
VFD750CP43B-21
VFD900CP43A-00/
186 30 216 316 51 367 1787 955 2742
VFD900CP43A-21
VFD1100CP43A-00/
257 73 330 437 124 561 2112 1084 3196
VFD1100CP43A-21
VFD1320CP43B-00/
223 73 296 379 124 503 2597 1220 3817
VFD1320CP43B-21
2-5

AC Motor Drive
Loss External
(Heat Sink)
VFD1600CP43A-00/
224 112 336 381 190 571 3269 1235 4504
VFD1600CP43A-21
VFD1850CP43B-00/
289 112 401 491 190 681 3814 1570 5384
VFD1850CP43B-21
VFD2000CP43A-00/
454 771 5741
VFD2000CP43A-21
VFD2200CP43A-00/
454 771 6358
VFD2200CP43A-21
VFD2500CP43A-00/
454 771 6662
VFD2500CP43A-21
VFD2800CP43A-00/
454 771 7325
VFD2800CP43A-21
VFD3150CP43A-00/
VFD3150CP43C-00/ 769 1307 8513
VFD3150CP43C-21
VFD3550CP43A-00/
VFD3550CP43C-00/ 769 1307 9440
VFD3550CP43C-21
VFD4000CP43A-00/
VFD4000CP43C-00/ 769 1307 10642
VFD4000CP43C-21
VFD5000CP43A-00/
VFD5000CP43C-00/ 769 1307 13364
VFD5000CP43C-21
VFD5600CP43A-00/
952.9 1618.9 14350
VFD5600CP43C-21
VFD6300CP43A-00/
952.9 1618.9 16150
VFD6300CP43C-21
VFD015CP53A-21 - - - - - - 39.5 13.0 53
VFD022CP53A-21 - - - - - - 55.0 22.0 77
VFD037CP53A-21 0.006 - 0.006 13.6 - 13.6 86.8 42.7 130
VFD055CP53A-21 0.019 0.007 0.026 40.0 14.5 54.5 124.6 67.9 193
VFD075CP53A-21 0.019 0.007 0.026 40.0 14.5 54.5 143.5 119.0 263
VFD110CP53A-21 0.019 0.007 0.026 40.0 14.5 54.5 222.2 162.8 385
VFD150CP53A-21 0.019 0.007 0.026 40.0 14.5 54.5 308.5 216.5 525
VFD185CP63A-21 90.0 21.3 111.4 153.0 36.2 189.2 317.5 145.0 462.5
VFD220CP63A-21 90.0 21.3 111.4 153.0 36.2 189.2 408.2 141.8 550.0
VFD300CP63A-21 90.0 21.3 111.4 153.0 36.2 189.2 492.7 257.3 750.0
VFD370CP63A-21 89.0 21.3 110.3 151.2 36.2 187.5 641.6 283.4 925.0
VFD450CP63A-00/21 175.9 36.4 212.3 298.8 61.8 360.6 718.2 406.8 1125.0
VFD550CP63A-00/21 175.9 36.4 212.3 298.8 61.8 360.6 890.1 484.9 1375.0
VFD750CP63A-00/21 264.6 90.6 355.2 449.6 153.9 603.5 1356.0 519.0 1875.0
VFD900CP63A-00/21 264.6 90.6 355.2 449.6 153.9 603.5 1652.8 597.2 2250.0
VFD1100CP63A-00/21 264.6 90.6 355.2 449.6 153.9 603.5 1960.3 789.7 2750.0
VFD1320CP63A-00/21 264.6 90.6 355.2 449.6 153.9 603.5 2230.8 1069.2 3300.0
VFD1600CP63A-00/21 248.1 135.3 383.4 421.6 229.9 651.4 2627.3 1372.7 4000.0
VFD2000CP63A-00/21 248.1 135.3 383.4 421.6 229.9 651.4 3415.0 1585.0 5000.0
VFD2500CP63A-00/21 409.7 696.0 4751.7 1498.3 6250.0
VFD3150CP63A-00/21 409.7 696.0 5695.4 2179.6 7875.0
VFD4000CP63A-00/21 563.0 956.4 6796.2 3203.8 10000.0
VFD4500CP63A-00/21 952.9 1618.9 7313.6 3936.4 11250.0
VFD5600CP63A-00/21 952.9 1618.9 9553.4 4446.6 14000.0
VFD6300CP63A-00/21 952.9 1618.9 11042.4 4707.6 15750.0
2-6

AC Motor Drive
Loss External
(Heat Sink)
※ The required airflow shown in the table is for installing single drive in a ※ The heat dissipation shown in
confined space. the table is for installing single
※ When installing multiple drives, the required air volume should be the drive in a confined space.
required air volume for single drive × the number of the drives. ※ When installing multiple drives,
volume of heat dissipation
should be the heat dissipated for
single drive × the number of the
drives.
※ Heat dissipation for each model
is calculated by rated voltage,
current and default carrier.
Table 2-3
2-7
[The page intentionally left blank]
2-8
Chapter 3 UnpackingCP2000
Chapter 3 Unpacking
3-1 Unpacking
3-2 The Lifting Hook
3-1
The AC motor drive should be kept in the shipping carton or crate before installation. In order to retain the
warranty coverage, the AC motor drive should be stored properly when it is not to be used for an extended
period of time.
3-1 Unpacking
Follow these steps to unpack the AC motor drive:
Frame D (carton version)

Unpacking 1 (VFDXXXCPXX-00) Unpacking 2 (VFDXXXCPXXX-21)
Cut the three pieces of packaging strap off. Cut the three pieces of packaging strap off.
Remove the top cover, take out the EPEs and the Remove the top cover, take out the EPEs, rubber
manual, and then loosen the four screws. and the manual, and then loosen the six screws.
3-2
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now
ready for installation. ready for installation.
3-3
Frame D (crate version)

Unpacking 1 (VFDXXXCPXXX-00) Unpacking 2 (VFDXXXCPXXX-21)
Loosen the 12 screws to open the top cover of the Loosen the 16 screws at the four corners of the
crate. crate, and then remove the iron plates.
Take out the EPEs and the manual. Remove the top cover, take out the EPEs, rubber
and the manual.
Figure 3-8
Loosen the eight screws fasten the drive on the

pallet, and then remove the wood plate.
Figure 3-12
Figure 3-9
3-4
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now Loosen the ten screws fasten the drive on the
ready for installation. pallet, and then remove the wood plate.
Figure 3-13
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now

Figure 3-10
ready for installation.
Figure 3-14
3-5
Frame E
Loosen the 16 screws at the four corners of the Loosen the 16 screws at the four corners of the
crate, and then remove the iron plates. crate, and then remove the iron plates.
manual. and the manual.

Loosen the eight screws fasten the drive on the Loosen the ten screws fasten the drive on the
pallet, and then remove the wood plate. pallet, and then remove the wood plates and the
conduit box.
3-6
3-7
Frame F
Remove the six buckles fixed on the crate with a Remove the six buckles fixed on the crate with a
flat-head screwdriver, see the figure below. flat-head screwdriver, see the figure below.
6 5 6
5
4
4
1
1 2
2
Figure 3-23 3 Figure 3-27
3
Loosen the five screws fasten the drive on the Loosen the five screws fasten the drive on the
pallet, see the figure below. pallet, and then remove the wood plates and the
conduit box.
5
4 9
8
3 wood plate2 7
6
2 5
wood plate1 4
1 3
2
1
3-8
ready for installation ready for installation.

.
3-9
Frame G
Unpacking 1 (VFDXXXXCPXXA-00) Unpacking 2 (VFDXXXXCPXXA-21)
Remove the six buckles fixed on the crate with a Remove the six buckles fixed on the crate with a
flat-head screwdriver, see the figure below. flat-head screwdriver, see the figure below.
4 4
5 5
6 6
1 1
2
2
3 Figure 3-31 Figure 3-35
3

Loosen the five screws fasten the drive on the Loosen the 12 screws fasten the drive on the
pallet, see the figure below. pallet, and then remove the wood plates and the
3 conduit box.
4
5 3
11 5 4
6
7
12 98
1 10 wood plate1
wood plate2 1
wood plate3
wood plate5
2 wood plate4 2
3-10
3-11
Frame H
Unpacking 1 (VFDXXXXCPXXA-00) Unpacking 2 (VFDXXXXCPXXC-00)
Remove the eight buckles fixed on the crate with Remove the eight buckles fixed on the crate with
a flat-head screwdriver, see the figure below. a flat-head screwdriver, see the figure below.
Remove the top cover, take out the EPEs and the Remove the top cover, take out the EPEs and the
manual. manual.

Loosen the six screws fasten the drive on the Loosen the six screws fasten the drive on the
pallet, and then remove six metal washers and six pallet, and then remove six metal washers and six
plastic washers. See the figure below. plastic washers. See the figure below.
3-12
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now Loosen the six M6 screws and the iron plates
ready for installation. (see the figure below). You can use the removed
screws and iron plates to fix the drive from
outside.
This description is how to fix the drive from the

outside. You can skip to the next step if it is not
necessary.
Loosen the eight M8 screws, and then use these
eight M8 screws to fix the iron plates (removed at
the last step) to the drive, see the figure below.
Torque: 150–180 kg-cm / [130.20–156.24 lb-in.] /
[14.7–17.6 Nm]
Figure 3-47
Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now

ready for installation.
Figure 3-48
3-13
Frame H
Unpacking 3 (VFDXXXXCPXXC-21)
Remove the eight buckles fixed on the crate with a flat-head screwdriver, see the figure below.
Figure 3-49
Remove the top cover, take out the EPEs and the manual.
Figure 3-50
Loosen the six screws fasten the drive on the pallet, and then remove six metal washers and six plastic
washers. See the figure below.
Figure 3-51
3-14
Loosen the six M6 screws and the iron plates (see the figure below). You can use the removed screws
and iron plates to fix the drive from the outside.
Figure 3-52
Fix the drive from the inside Fix the drive from the outside
Loosen the 18 M6 screws and remove the covers Loosen the eight M8 screws, and then use these
(see the figure 3-54). After fixing the drive and the eight M8 screws to fix the iron plates (removed at
cover for cables (see the figure 3-53), fasten the the last step) to the drive, see the figure below.
other covers back (see the figure 3-54) Torque: 150–180 kg-cm / [130.20–156.24 lb-in.] /
Torque: 35–45 kg-cm / [30.38–39.06 lb-in.] / [14.7–17.6 Nm]
[3.4–4.4 Nm]
Figure 3-53
Cover for cables (use M12 screws)
Figure 3-56
Figure 3-54
3-15
Fasten the six M6 screws back, see the figure Fasten the six M6 screws back, see the figure
below. below.
Torque: 35–45 kg-cm / [30.8–39.06 lb-in] /
[3.4–4.4 Nm]

Lift the drive by hooking the lifting hole. It is now ready for installation.
Figure 3-58
3-16
690V Frame H
Unpacking 1 (VFDXXXXCP63A-00)
Figure 3-59
Figure 3-60
Figure 3-61
3-17
Figure 3-62
3-18
690V Frame H
Unpacking 2 (VFDXXXXCP63A-21)
Figure 3-63
Figure 3-64
Figure 3-65
3-19
Loosen the six M6 screws and the iron plates (see the figure below). You can use the removed screws
and iron plates to fix the drive from the outside.
Figure 3-66
Fix the drive from the inside. Fix the drive from the outside.
Loosen the 18 M6 screws and remove the covers Loosen the eight M8 screws, and then use these
(see the figure 3-68). After fixing the drive and the eight M8 screws to fix the iron plates (removed at
cover for cables (see the figure 3-67), fasten the the last step) to the drive, see the figure below.
other covers back (see the figure 3-68) Torque: 150–180 kg-cm / [130.20–156.24 lb-in.] /
Torque: 35–45 kg-cm / [30.38–39.06 lb-in.] / [14.7–17.6 Nm]
[3.4–4.4 Nm]
Figure 3-67
Cover for cables (use M12 screws)
Figure 3-70
Figure 3-68
3-20
Fasten the six M6 screws back, see the figure Fasten the six M6 screws back, see the figure
below. below.
Figure 3-72
3-21
Frame H: Fix the drive
H1: VFDXXXXCPXXA-00
Screw M12*6
Torque: 340–420 kg-cm / [295.1–364.6 lb-in.] /
[33.3–41.2 Nm]
Figure 3-73
H2: VFDXXXXCPXXC-00
Fix the drive from the inside

Screw M12*8
Torque: 340–420 kg-cm / [295.1–364.6 lb-in.] /
[33.3–41.2 Nm]
Fix the drive from the inside
Figure 3-74
3-22
H3：VFDXXXXCPXXC-21
Fix the drive from the outside

Screw M12*8
Torque: 340–420 kg-cm / [295.1–364.6 lb-in.] /
[33.3–41.2 Nm]
Figure 3-75
H1: VFDXXXXCP63A-00
Screw M12*6
Torque: 340–420 kg-cm / [295.1–364.6 lb-in.] /
[33.3–41.2 Nm]
Figure 3-76
3-23
H2: VFDXXXXCP63A-21

Screw M12*8
Torque: 340–420 kg-cm / [295.1–364.6 lb-in.] /
[33.3–41.2 Nm]
Figure 3-77
3-24
3-2 The Lifting Hook

The arrows indicate the location of the lifting holes of frame D to H, as shown in figure below:
Frame D0
Applicable models:
D0
D0
VFD450CP43S-00; VFD550CP43S-00;
VFD450CP43S-21; VFD550CP43S-21
Figure 3-78
Frame D
Applicable models:
D
D
VFD370CP23A-00; VFD450CP23A-00;
VFD750CP43B-00; VFD900CP43A-00;
VFD450CP63A-00; VFD550CP63A-00;
VFD370CP23A-21; VFD450CP23A-21;
VFD750CP43B-21; VFD900CP43A-21;
Figure 3-79
Frame E
E
E
Applicable models:
VFD550CP23A-00; VFD750CP23A-00;
VFD900CP23A-00; VFD1100CP43A-00;
VFD1320CP43B-00; VFD750CP63A-00;
VFD900CP63A-00; VFD1100CP63A-00;
VFD1320CP63A-00; VFD550CP23A-21;
VFD750CP23A-21; VFD900CP23A-21;
VFD1100CP43A-21; VFD1320CP43B-21;
VFD750CP63A-21; VFD900CP63A-21;
VFD1100CP63A-21; VFD1320CP63A-21
Figure 3-80
3-25
Frame F
Applicable models: FF
VFD1600CP43A-00; VFD1850CP43B-00;
VFD1600CP63A-00; VFD2000CP63A-00;
VFD1600CP43A-21; VFD1850CP43B-21;
VFD1600CP63A-21; VFD2000CP63A-21
Figure 3-81
Frame G
Applicable models: GG
VFD2000CP43A-00; VFD2200CP43A-00;
VFD2500CP43A-00; VFD2800CP43A-00;
VFD2500CP63A-00; VFD3150CP63A-00;
VFD2000CP43A-21; VFD2200CP43A-21;
VFD2500CP43A-21; VFD2800CP43A-21;
VFD2500CP63A-21; VFD3150CP63A-21
Figure 3-82
Frame H H
Applicable models:
VFD3150CP43A-00; VFD3550CP43A-00;
VFD4000CP43A-00; VFD5000CP43A-00;
VFD5600CP43A-00; VFD6300CP43A-00;
VFD3150CP43C-00; VFD3550CP43C-00;
VFD4000CP43C-00; VFD5000CP43C-00;
VFD3150CP43C-21; VFD3550CP43C-21;
VFD4000CP43C-21; VFD5000CP43C-21;
VFD5600CP43C-21; VFD6300CP43C-21;
VFD4000CP63A-00; VFD4500CP63A-00;
VFD5600CP63A-00; VFD6300CP63A-00
Figure 3-83
3-26
690V Frame H2
Applicable models:
VFD4000CP63A-21; VFD4500CP63A-21;
VFD5600CP63A-21; VFD6300CP63A-21
Figure 3-84
3-27
Ensure the lifting hook properly goes through the Ensure the angle between the lifting holes and the
lifting hole, as shown in the following diagram. lifting device is within the specification, as shown
in the following figure.
Applicable to Frame D0–E
Applicable to Frame D0–E
Figure 3-85
Applicable to Frame F–H
Figure 3-87
Applicable to Frame F–H, 690V Frame H3

Following drawing is only for demonstration, it may
be slightly different with the machine you have.
Figure 3-86
Figure 3-88
3-28
Weight
VFDXXX X C XX A V FD XXX X C XX E
VFDXXXXCPXXS-00: 27 kg / [59.5 lbs]
27 kg(59.5 Ibs.) VFDXXXXCPXXS-21:
29 kg(63. 929 kg / [63.9 lbs]
Ibs.)
D0
VFDXXXCPXXX-00: 37.6 kg / [82.9 lbs] VFDXXXCPXXX-21: 40 kg / [88.2 lbs]

VFDXXXCP63A-00: 39.0
37. 6 kg(82.9 kg / [86.0 lbs]
Ibs.) VFDXXXCP63A-21:
40 kg(88.41.1
2 Ibs.kg
) / [91.3 lbs]
VFDXXXCPXXX-00: 63.6 kg / [140.2 lbs] VFDXXXCPXXX-21: 66 kg / [145.5 lbs]

VFDXXXCP63A-00: 61.0 kg / [134.5 lbs] VFDXXXCP63A-21: 63.4 kg )/ [139.8 lbs]
63. 6 kg(140. 2 Ibs.) 66 kg(145. 5 Ibs.
E X

VFDXXXCPXXX-00: 85 kg / [187.2 lbs] VFDXXXCPXXX-21: 88 kg / [193.8 lbs]
VFDXXXCP63A-00:
85kg(187.88.0 kg / [194.0 lbs]
2 Ibs.) VFDXXXCP63A-21: 91.0 Ikg
88kg(193.8 bs./ )[200.7 lbs]

VFDXXXCPXXX-00: 130 kg / [286.5 lbs] VFDXXXCPXXX-21: 138 kg / [303.9 lbs]
VFDXXXCP63A-00:
130kg(286. 5135.0
Ibs.) kg / [297.6 lbs] VFDXXXCP63A-21: 143.09 kg / [315.3 lbs]
138k g(303. Ibs.)
3-29
VFDXXXXCP43A-00: 244 kg / [537.9 lbs]

VFD5600CP43A-00,
VFD2800 VFD6300CP43A-00:
C43A; VFD31 270 C43A;
50C4 3A; VFD 3550 kg / [595.2 lbs] 0C43 A
VFD450
VFDXXXXCP63A-00: 243.0 kg / [535.7 lbs]
235k g(51 8.1 Ibs)
H1
Figure 3-99
VFD28 00C4 3E-1; VFD3 150C 43E-1 ; VFD3550 C43E-1; VFD450 0C43 E-1
VFDXXXXCP43C-00: 260 kg / [573.2 lbs]
257kg(566.6 Ibs)
H2
Figure 3-100
VFDXXXXCP63A-21: 251.0 kg / [553.5 lbs]
Figure 3-101
VFD28 00C4 3E; VFD269

VFDXXXXCP43C-21: 3150C
kg /43E; VFD355
[593.0 lbs] 0C43 E; VFD4 500C 43E
257kg(566.6 Ibs) VFD6300CP43C-21: 295 kg / [650.4 lbs]
VFD5600CP43C-21,
H3
Figure 3-102
3-30
Chapter 4 WiringCP2000
Chapter 4 Wiring
4-1 System Wiring Diagram
4-2 Wiring
4-1
After removing the front cover, please check if the power and control terminals are clearly noted.
Please read following precautions to avoid wiring mistakes.
 It is crucial to cut off the AC motor drive power before any wiring installation are
made. A charge may still remain in the DC BUS capacitors with hazardous voltages
even if the power has been turned off. Therefore, it is suggested for users to
measure the remaining voltage by DC voltage meter before wiring. For your
personnel safety, please do not perform any wiring before the voltage drops to a
safe level < 25 VDC. Wiring installation with remaining voltage condition may cause
sparks and short circuit.
 Only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drives is allowed to perform
installation, wiring and commissioning. Make sure the power is turned off before
wiring to prevent electric shock.
 Make sure that power is only applied to the R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 terminals. Failure
to comply may result in damage to the equipment. The voltage and current should
lie within the range as indicated on the nameplate (Chapter 1-1 Nameplate
Information).
 All the units must be grounded directly to a common ground terminal to prevent
lightning strike or electric shock.
 Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent
sparks which is made by the loose screws due to vibration.
 When wiring, please choose the wires with specification that complies with local
regulation for your personnel safety.
 Check following items after finishing the wiring:
1. Are all connections correct?
2. Any loosen wires?
3. Any short-circuits between the terminals or to ground?
4-2
4-1 System Wiring Diagram
Power input Please refer to Chapter 9 Specification Table in

terminal user manual for detail.
There may be a large inrush current during power

NFB or fuse on. Refer to 7-2 NFB to select a suitable NFB or
7-3 Fuse Specification Chart.
Switching the power ON/OFF before the

Electromagnetic
magnetic contactor more than 1 x per hour can
contactor
cause damage to the drive.
When the mains power capacity is > 500 kVA or

when the drive is preceded by a capacitor bank,
the instantaneous peaks voltages and current may
AC reactor destroy the drive. In that case it is recommended
(input terminal) to install an AC input reactor which will also
improve the power factor and harmonics. The
cable between reactor and drive should be < 10 m.
Please refer to Chapter 7-4.
Used to reduce radiated emission, especially in

environments with audio devices, and reduce
Zero-phase
input and output side interference.
reactor
The effective range is AM band to 10 MHz.
Can be used to reduce electromagnetic

EMC filter interference.
Brake module & Used to shorten the deceleration time of the

Brake resistor motor.
(BR) Please refer to Chapter 7-1.
The wiring length of the motor will affect switching

AC reactor
current peaks. It is recommended to install an AC
(output
output reactor when the motor wiring length
terminal)
exceeds the value listed in Chapter 7-4.
Figure 4-1
T
NOTE Please refer to Chapter 4-2 Wiring Table 4-1
Diagram for detailed wiring information.
4-3
4-2 Wiring
Figure 4-2
Figure 4-3
*1 Please refer to Chapter 7-1 for brake units and resistors selection
4-4
Figure 4-4
*1 Please refer to Chapter 7-1 for brake units and resistors selection
NOTE When wiring for 12 Pulse Input, please strictly follow above wiring diagram.
4-5
Figure 4-5
4-6
4-2-1 SINK (NPN) / SOURCE (PNP) Mode
4-7
[This page intentionally left bank.]
4-8
Chapter 5 Main Circuit TerminalsCP2000
Chapter 5 Main Circuit Terminals
5-1 Main Circuit Diagram
5-2 Specifications of Main Circuit Terminals
5-1
 Tighten the screws in the main circuit terminal to prevent sparks caused by screws
loosened due to vibration.
 If necessary, use an inductive filter only at the motor output terminals U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3 of the AC motor drive. Do NOT use phase-compensation capacitors or L-C
(Inductance-Capacitance) or R-C (Resistance-Capacitance), unless approved by
Delta.
 DO NOT connect phase-compensation capacitors or surge absorbers at the output
terminals of AC motor drives.
 DO NOT connect brake resistors directly to [+1, -], [+2, -], [+1/DC+, -/DC-] to prevent
damage to the drive or to the brake resistors.
 Ensure proper insulation of the main circuit wiring in accordance with the relevant
safety regulations.
Main input power terminals
 Do not connect three-phase model to one-phase power. R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3 have no
phase-sequence requirement; they can be connected in any sequence.
 Add a magnetic contactor (MC) to the power input wiring to cut off power quickly and
reduce malfunctions when the AC motor drive protection function activates. Both ends
of the MC should have an R-C surge absorber.
 Use voltage and current within the specification in Chapter 09. Refer to Chapter 09
Specifications for details.
 When using a general GFCI (Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter), select a current sensor
with sensitivity of 200 mA or above, and its operation time should not be less than 0.1
second to avoid nuisance tripping.
 Use shield wire or conduit for the power wiring and ground the two ends of the
shielding or tube.
 Do NOT run and stop the AC motor drives by turning the power ON and OFF. Run and
stop the AC motor drives by sending the RUN and STOP commands through the
control terminals or the keypad. If you still need to run and stop the AC motor drives by
turning the power ON and OFF, do so no more often than ONCE per hour.
 To comply with UL standards, connect the drive to a three-phase three-wire or
three-phase four-wire Wye system type of mains power system.
Output terminals for the main circuit
 Use well-insulated motors to prevent any electric leakage from motors.
 When the AC drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 are connected to the motor
terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 respectively, the motor rotates counterclockwise (as
viewed on the shaft end of the motor, refer to the pointed direction in the figure below)
when a forward operation command is received. To permanently reverse the direction
of motor rotation, exchange any two of the motor leads.
Figure 5-1
5-2
Terminals for connecting DC reactor, external brake resistor and DC circuit

 Use the terminals, as shown in Figure 5-2, to connect a DC reactor to improve the
power factor. A jumper is connected to these terminals at the factory. Remove that
jumper before connecting to a DC reactor.
Figure 5-2
 Install and external brake resistor for applications in frequent deceleration to stop,
short deceleration time (such as high frequency operation and heavy load operation),
too low braking torque, or increased braking torque.
Figure 5-3
 For Frame A, B and C, connect the external brake resistor to B1 and B2 terminals of
the AC motor drives.
 For those models without built-in brake resistor, connect external brake unit and brake
resistor (both of them are optional) to increase brake torque.
 When the terminals +1, +2 and - are not used, leave the terminals open.
 When connecting DC+ and DC- in common DC bus applications, refer to Section 5-1
(Main Circuit Terminal) for the wiring terminal specification and the wire gauge
information.
 Refer to the VFDB manual for more information on wire gauge when installing the
brake unit.
5-3
5-1 Main Circuit Diagram
Figure 5-4
Figure 5-5
Figure 5-6
*1 Refer to Section 7-1 for brake units and resistors selection
5-4
Figure 5-7
*1 Refer to Section 7-1 for brake units and resistors selection

Note: When wiring for 12 Pulse Input, strictly follow the wiring diagram above.
NOTE
 If the wiring between motor drive and motor is over 75 meters, please refer to Section 7-4 Specifications of limits
for motor cable length.
 Remove the short circuit plate of Frame G and H if 12 pulse is implemented. Before implementing 12 pulse,
consult Delta for more detail.
Fasten the screw after the copper is removed.

Screw torque: 100–110 kg-cm / [86.8–95.5 lb-in.] / [9.8–10.8 Nm]
Detail A
See
Detail A
Figure 5-8
5-5
Terminals Descriptions
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 AC line input terminals 3-phase
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 AC drive output terminals for connecting 3-phase induction motor
Applicable to frame A–C
+1, +2 Connections for DC reactor to improve the power factor. It needs to remove the
jumper for installation.
Connections for brake module (VFDB series)
(for 230V models: ≤ 22 kW, built-in brake module)
+1/DC+, -/DC- (for 460V models: ≤ 30 kW, built-in brake module)
(for 690V models: ≤ 37 kW, built-in brake module)
Common DC bus
B1, B2 Connections for brake resistor (optional)
Earth connection, please comply with local regulations.
5-6
5-2 Specifications of Main Circuit Terminals

 Use the specified ring lug for main circuit terminal wiring.
See figure 5-9 and figure 5-10 for ring lug specifications. For other types of wiring, use the wires that
comply with the local regulations.
 After crimping the wire to the ring lug (must be UL and CSA approved R/C (YDPU2)), install heat
shrink tubing rated at a minimum of 600VAC insulation over the live part. Refer to figure 5-10 below.
Dimensions of Ring Lug

The part number of the ring lugs (produced by K.S. Terminals Inc.) in the table below are for reference
only. You can buy other ring lugs of your choice to match with different frame sizes.
A B C D d2 E F W t
Frame AWG Kit P/N
(MAX) (MAX) (MIN) (MAX) (MIN) (MIN) (MIN) (MAX) (MAX)
16
RNBL2-4
14
A 12 20 5 5.5 9 4.3 8 5.5 10 1.5
RNBL5-4
10
8 RNBS8-4
8 RNBM8-5
B 6 RNB14-5 28.0 7.0 7.5 14.0 5.2 13.0 12.0 14.0 1.5
4 RNBS22-5
6 RNB14-8
4 RNB22-8
C 40 12 12.5 22 8.3 13 12.5 24 2.5
2 RNBS38-8
1/0 RNB60-8
4 RNB22-8
44.0 13.0 10.0 15.0 8.3 13.0 17.0 26.0 3.0
2 RNBS38-8
D0
1/0 SQNBS60-8
40.0 11.0 10.0 23.0 8.3 13.0 14.0* 24.0 4.5
2/0 SQNBS80-8
4 RNB22-8
2 RNBS38-8
1/0 RNB60-8
2/0 RNB70-8
D 50.0 16.0 10.0 27.0 8.3 13.0 14.0 28.0 6.0
3/0 RNB80-8
4/0 SQNBS100-8
250MCM SQNBS150-8
300MCM SQNBS150-8
4/0 RNB100-8
3/0 RNB80-8
E 53.0 16.0 17.0 26.5 8.4 13.0 17.0 31.0 5.0
2/0 RNB70-8
1/0 RNB60-8
3/0 RNB80-8
F 4/0 SQNBS100-8 55.0 15.0 10.0 27.0 8.3 13.0 17.5 31.0 6.0
300MCM SQNBS150-8
5-7
A B C D d2 E F W t
Frame AWG Kit P/N
(MAX) (MAX) (MIN) (MAX) (MIN) (MIN) (MIN) (MAX) (MAX)
1/0 SQNB60-6
2/0
SQNBS80-8
3/0 54 15.5 18 26.5 8.2 13 18 31 3.5
4/0 SQNBS100-8
G
250MCM SQNBS150-8
300MCM SQNBS180-12
400MCM 70 21 27 32.7 12.2 13 27 42 4.0
SQNBS200-12
500MCM
3/0 SQNBS80-8
4/0 SQNBS100-8
250MCM 54 15.5 18 26.5 8.2 13 18 31 3.5
300MCM SQNBS150-8
H
350MCM
400MCM SQNBS200-12
500MCM SQNBS200-12 70.0 21.0 27.0 32.7 12.2 13.0 27.0 42.0 4.5
600MCM SQNBS325-12
*F (MAX.) = 16.5 Unit: mm
*AWG: Refer to the table below for the wire size specification for models in each frame.
5-8
Frame A
-/DC- +2/DC+ +1/DC+ B1 B2
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3

 If you install at Ta 50°C environment, use copper wires that have a voltage rating 600V and are
temperature resistant to 75°C or 90°C.
 If you install at Ta 50°C above environment, use copper wires that have a voltage rating 600V and
are temperature resistant to 90°C or above.
 To be UL installation compliant, you must use copper wires when installing. The wire gauge is based
on a temperature resistant of 75°C, in accordance with UL requirements and recommendations.
Do not reduce the wire gauge when using higher-temperature resistant wire.
Main Circuit Terminals

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, B1, Terminal
B2, -/DC-, +2/DC+, +1/DC+
Model Name Screw Screw
Max. Wire Spec. and Spec. and
Min. Wire Gauge Max. Wire Gauge Min. Wire Gauge
Gauge Torque Torque
(±10%) (±10%)
VFD007CP23A-21 2.5 mm2 [14 AWG] 2.5 mm2 [14 AWG] 2.5 mm2 [14 AWG]
VFD015CP23A-21 2
4.0 mm [12 AWG] 4.0 mm2 [12 AWG] 4.0 mm2 [12 AWG]
VFD055CP23A-21 2
VFD015CP43B-21 2
VFD022CP43B-21 2.5 mm2 [14 AWG] 2.5 mm2 [14 AWG] 2.5 mm2 [14 AWG]
VFD037CP43B-21 6.0 mm2 [10 AWG] 6.0 mm2 [10 AWG] 6.0 mm2 [10 AWG]
VFD040CP43A-21 2
6.0 mm [10 AWG] M4 6.0 mm2 [10 AWG] 6.0 mm2 [10 AWG] M4
VFD055CP43B-21 2 2 2 2
10 mm 10.0 mm [8 AWG] 20kg-cm 10.0 mm [8 AWG] 10.0 mm [8 AWG] 20kg-cm
VFD075CP43B-21 [8 AWG] 10.0 mm2 [8 AWG] [17.4lb-in.] 10.0 mm2 [8 AWG] 10.0 mm2 [8 AWG] [17.4lb-in.]
VFD007CP4EA-21 1.5 mm2 [16 AWG] [1.96Nm] 2.5 mm2 [14 AWG] 2.5 mm2 [14 AWG] [1.96Nm]
VFD015CP4EB-21 1.5 mm2 [16 AWG] 2.5 mm2 [14 AWG] 2.5 mm2 [14 AWG]
VFD022CP4EB-21 2
VFD040CP4EA-21 6.0 mm2 [10 AWG] 6.0 mm2 [10 AWG] 6.0 mm2 [10 AWG]
VFD055CP4EB-21 2
VFD015CP53A-21 2
5-9
Frame B
-/DC- +2/DC+ +1/DC+ B1 B2
 For VFD150CP23A-21 model: If you install at Ta 30°C above environment, use copper wires that
have a voltage rating 600V and are temperature resistant to 90°C or above.
 Wire fix to pole +2/DC+ and +1/DC+: 45 kg-cm / [39.0 lb-in] / [4.42 Nm] (±10%)

B2, -/DC-, +2/DC+, +1/DC+
Gauge Torque Torque
(±10%) (±10%)
VFD075CP23A-21 16 mm2 [6 AWG] 16 mm2 [6 AWG] 16 mm2 [6 AWG]
VFD110CP43B-21 2
10 mm [8 AWG] 2
10 mm [8 AWG] 10 mm2 [8 AWG]
VFD150CP43B-21 16 mm2 [6 AWG] 16 mm2 [6 AWG] 16 mm2 [6 AWG]
M5 M5
VFD185CP43B-21 2
25 mm [4 AWG] 2
25 mm [4 AWG] 16 mm2 [6 AWG]
25 mm2 35kg-cm 35kg-cm
VFD110CP4EB-21 10 mm2 [8 AWG] 10 mm2 [8 AWG] 10 mm2 [8 AWG]
[4 AWG] [30.4lb-in.] [30.4lb-in.]
[3.43Nm] [3.43Nm]
VFD185CP4EB-21 2
25 mm [4 AWG] 25 mm2 [4 AWG] 2
25 mm [4 AWG]
VFD055CP53A-21 2
6 mm [10 AWG] 2
6 mm [10 AWG] 6 mm2 [10 AWG]
VFD110CP53A-21 2
10 mm [8 AWG] 2
10 mm [8 AWG] 10 mm2 [8 AWG]
5-10
Frame C
-/DC- +2/DC+ +1/DC+ B1 B2
 If you install at Ta 50°C above environment, use copper wires that have a voltage rating 600V and are
temperature resistant to 90°C or above.
 For VFD220CP23A-21 model, if you install at Ta 40°C above environment, use copper wires that
 For VFD300CP23A-21 model, if you install at Ta 30°C above environment, use copper wires that
 Wire fix to pole +2/DC+ and +1/DC+: 90 kg-cm / [78.2 lb-in] / [8.83 Nm] (±10%)

Model Name B2, -/DC-, +2/DC+, +1/DC+
Screw Spec. Screw Spec.
Max. Wire
Min. Wire Gauge and Torque Max. Wire Gauge Min. Wire Gauge and Torque
Gauge
(±10%) (±10%)
VFD185CP23A -21 50 mm2 [1/0 AWG] 50 mm2 [1/0 AWG] 25 mm2 [4 AWG]
VFD220CP23A-21 2
50 mm [1/0 AWG] 50 mm2 [1/0 AWG] 25 mm2 [4 AWG]
VFD300CP23A-21 50 mm2 [1/0 AWG] 50 mm2 [1/0 AWG] 25 mm2 [4 AWG]
VFD220CP43A-21 2
25 mm [4 AWG] 25 mm2 [4 AWG] 16 mm2 [6 AWG]
VFD300CP43B-21 35 mm2 [2 AWG] 35 mm2 [2 AWG] 16 mm2 [6 AWG]
M8 M8
VFD370CP43B-21 50 mm2 [1/0 AWG] 50 mm2 [1/0 AWG] 25 mm2 [4 AWG]
50 mm2 80kg-cm 80kg-cm
VFD220CP4EA-21 25 mm2 [4 AWG] 25 mm2 [4 AWG] 16 mm2 [6 AWG]
[1/0 AWG] [69.4lb-in.] [69.4lb-in.]
[7.84Nm] [7.84Nm]
VFD370CP4EB-21 2
50 mm [1/0 AWG] 2 2
50 mm [1/0 AWG] 25 mm [4 AWG]
VFD185CP63A-21 2
10 mm [8 AWG] 10 mm2 [8 AWG] 10 mm2 [8 AWG]
VFD300CP63A-21 2
25 mm [4 AWG] 2
25 mm [4 AWG] 16 mm2 [6 AWG]
5-11
Frame D0
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 +1/DC+ -/DC- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
 If you install at Ta 50°C ( for 460V model names with last digit -00) / 40°C (for 460V model names with
last digit -21) environment, use copper wires that have a voltage rating 600V and are temperature
resistant to 75°C or 90°C.
 If you install at Ta 50°C ( for 460V model names with last digit -00) / 40°C (for 460V model names with
last digit -21) above environment, use copper wires that have a voltage rating 600V and are
temperature resistant to 90°C or above.
 For VFD550CP43S-00 model: If you install at Ta 45°C above environment, use copper wires that

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, -/DC-, Terminal
+1/DC+
Model Name
Max. Wire Max. Wire Min. Wire
Min. Wire Gauge and Torque and Torque
Gauge Gauge Gauge
(±10%) (±10%)
VFD450CP43S-00 70 mm2 [2/0 AWG] M8 M8
VFD550CP43S-00 70 mm2 70 mm2 [2/0 AWG] 80kg-cm 35mm2 25mm2 80kg-cm
VFD450CP43S-21 [2/0 AWG] 50 mm2 [1 AWG] [69.4lb-in.] [2AWG] [4AWG] [69.4lb-in.]
VFD550CP43S-21 70 mm2 [2/0 AWG] [7.84Nm] [7.84Nm]
5-12
Frame D
 If you install at Ta 50°C ( for 230V / 460V model names with last digit -00; for 690V model names end
with 63A-00) / 40°C (for 230V / 460V model names with last digit -21; for 690V model names end with
63A-21) environment, use copper wires that have a voltage rating 600V and are temperature resistant
to 75°C or 90°C.
63A-21) above environment, use copper wires that have a voltage rating 600V and are temperature
resistant to 90°C or above.
 For VFD450CP23A-00 and VFD900CP43A-00 models: If you install at Ta 45°C above environment,
use copper wires that have a voltage rating 600V and are temperature resistant to 90°C or above.
 For VFD450CP23A-21 and VFD900CP43A-21 models: If you install at Ta 30°C above environment,
use copper wires that have a voltage rating 600V and are temperature resistant to 90°C or above.

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, DC-, Terminal
DC+/+1, +2/B1, B2
Gauge Torque Torque
(±10%) (±10%)
VFD370CP23A-00 120 mm2 [250 MCM] 120 mm2 [250 MCM] 70 mm2 [2/0 AWG]
VFD450CP23A-00 150 mm2 2
150 mm [300 MCM] 150 mm2 [300 MCM] 95 mm2 [3/0 AWG]
VFD750CP43B-00 [300 MCM] 120 mm2 [250 MCM] 120 mm2 [250 MCM] 70 mm2 [2/0 AWG]
VFD900CP43A-00 150 mm2 [300 MCM] 150 mm2 [300 MCM] 95 mm2 [3/0 AWG]
VFD370CP23A-21 2
120 mm [4/0 AWG] M8 120 mm2 [4/0 AWG] 70 mm2 [2/0 AWG] M8
VFD450CP23A-21 120 mm2 2
120 mm [4/0 AWG] 180kg-cm 2 2
120 mm [4/0 AWG] 70 mm [2/0 AWG] 180kg-cm
VFD750CP43B-21 [4/0 AWG] 120 mm2 [4/0 AWG] [156.2lb-in.] 120 mm2 [4/0 AWG] 70 mm2 [2/0 AWG] [156.2lb-in.]
VFD900CP43A-21 120 mm2 [4/0 AWG] [17.65Nm] 120 mm2 [4/0 AWG] 70 mm2 [2/0 AWG] [17.65Nm]
VFD550CP63A-00 150 mm2 2
35 mm [2 AWG] 2
35 mm [2 AWG] 16 mm2 [6 AWG]
VFD450CP63A-21 [300 MCM] 35 mm2 [2 AWG] 35 mm2 [2 AWG] 16 mm2 [6 AWG]
5-13
Frame E
63A-21) environment, use copper wires that have a voltage rating 600V and are temperature resistant
to 75°C or 90°C.
 For VFD900CP23A-00 model: If you install at Ta 40°C above environment, use copper wires that have
a voltage rating 600V and are temperature resistant to 90°C or above.
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, +1/DC+, Terminal
-/DC-
Gauge Torque Torque
(±10%) (±10%)
VFD550CP23A-00 95mm2*2 [3/0 AWG*2] 95 mm2*2 [3/0 AWG*2] 95mm2*1 [3/0 AWG*1]
2
VFD750CP23A-00 120mm *2 [4/0 AWG*2] 120mm2*2 [4/0 AWG*2] 120 mm2*1 [4/0 AWG*1]
VFD900CP23A-00 120mm2*2 [4/0AWG*2] 120 mm2*2 [4/0AWG*2] 120 mm2*1 [4/0AWG*1]
VFD1100CP43A-00 95mm2*2 [3/0 AWG*2] 95 mm2*2 [3/0 AWG*2] 95 mm2*1 [3/0 AWG*1]
2
VFD1320CP43A-00 120mm *2 [4/0 AWG*2] 120mm2*2 [4/0 AWG*2] 120 mm2*1 [4/0 AWG*1]
2
VFD750CP43A-21 95mm *2 [3/0 AWG*2] 95 mm2*2 [3/0 AWG*2] 95 mm2*1 [3/0 AWG*1]
VFD900CP43A-21 120mm2*2 [4/0AWG*2] M8 120 mm2*2 [4/0AWG*2] 120 mm2*1 [4/0AWG*1] M8
VFD1100CP23A-21 120 mm *2 70mm2*2 [2/0 AWG*2]
2
180kg-cm 70 mm2*2 [2/0 AWG*2] 70 mm2*1 [2/0 AWG*1] 180kg-cm
VFD1320CP43A-21 [4/0 AWG*2] 95mm2*2 [3/0 AWG*2] [156.2lb-in.] 95 mm2*2 [3/0 AWG*2] 95 mm2*1 [3/0 AWG*1] [156.2lb-in.]
VFD750CP63A-00 25mm2*2 [4 AWG*2] [17.65Nm] 25 mm2*2 [4 AWG*2] 25 mm2*1 [4 AWG*1] [17.76Nm]
VFD900CP63A-00 35mm2*2 [2 AWG*2] 35 mm2*2 [2 AWG*2] 35 mm2*1 [2 AWG*1]
2
VFD750CP63A-21 25mm *2 [4 AWG*2] 25 mm2*2 [4 AWG*2] 25 mm2*1 [4 AWG*1]
2
VFD1320CP63A-21 50mm *2 [1/0 AWG*2] 50 mm *2 [1/0 AWG*2] 50 mm2*1 [1/0 AWG*1]
2
5-14
Frame F
 If you install at Ta 50°C ( for 460V model names with last digit -00; for 690V model names end with
63A-00) / 40°C (for 460V model names with last digit -21; for 690V model names end with 63A-21)
environment, use copper wires that have a voltage rating 600V and are temperature resistant to 75°C
or 90°C.
above environment, use copper wires that have a voltage rating 600V and are temperature resistant to
90°C or above.
 For VFD1850CP43B-21 model: If you install at Ta 45°C above environment, use copper wires that
 For VFD1850CP43B-21 model: If you install at Ta 30°C above environment, use copper wires that
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, -/DC-, Terminal
+1/DC+
Gauge Torque Torque
(±10%) (±10%)
150mm2*2
VFD1600CP43A-00 150mm2*2 [300 MCM*2] 150mm2*1 [300 MCM*1]
150mm2*2 [300 MCM*2]
[300MCM*2] 150mm2*2
VFD1850CP43B-00 150mm2*2 [300 MCM*2] 150mm2*1 [300MCM*1]
[300MCM*2]
120mm2*2
VFD1600CP43A-21 2*2 120mm2*2 [4/0 AWG*2] 120mm2*1 [4/0AWG*1]
120mm [4/0AWG*2]
[4/0AWG*2] M8 120mm2*2 M8
VFD1850CP43B-21 120mm2*2 [4/0 AWG*2] 120mm2*1 [4/0AWG*1]
180kg-cm [4/0AWG*2] 180kg-cm
[156.2lb-in.] 70mm2*2 [156.2lb-in.]
VFD1600CP63A-00 70mm2*2 [2/0 AWG*2] 70mm2*1 [2/0 AWG*1]
[17.65Nm] [2/0 AWG*2] [17.76Nm]
95mm2*2
VFD2000CP63A-00 2*2 95mm2*2 [3/0 AWG*2] 95mm2*1 [3/0 AWG*1]
150mm [3/0 AWG*2]
[300MCM*2] 70mm2*2
VFD1600CP63A-21 70mm2*2 [2/0 AWG*2] 70mm2*1[2/0 AWG*1]
[2/0 AWG*2]
95mm2*2
VFD2000CP63A-21 95mm2*2 [3/0 AWG*2] 95mm2*1 [3/0 AWG*1]
[3/0 AWG*2]
5-15
Frame G
R/L11 R/L12 S/L21 S/L22 T/L31 T/L32 +1/D C+ -/DC- U/T1 V/T 2 W/T3
environment, use copper wires that have a voltage rating 600V and are temperature resistant to 75°C
or 90°C.
above environment, use copper wires that have a voltage rating 600V and are temperature resistant to
90°C or above.
 For VFD2200CP43A-00 and VFD2500CP43A-00 models (Terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, -/DC- and
+1/DC+): If you install at Ta 45°C above environment, use copper wires that have a voltage rating 600V
and are temperature resistant to 90°C or above.
 For VFD2800CP43A-00 model (Terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, -/DC- and +1/DC+): If you install at Ta 40
°C above environment, use copper wires that have a voltage rating 600V and are temperature resistant
to 90°C or above.
 To be UL installation compliant, you must use copper wires when installing. The wire gauge is based on
a temperature resistant of 75°C, in accordance with UL requirements and recommendations.

R/L11, R/L12, S/L21, S/L22, T/L31, T/L32 Terminal
Gauge Torque Torque
(±10%) (±10%)
VFD2000CP43A-00 70mm2*4 [2/0AWG*4] 70mm2*4 [2/0AWG*4] 70mm2*2 [2/0AWG*2]
VFD2800CP43A-00 120mm2*4 120mm2*4 [4/0AWG*4] 120mm2*4 [4/0AWG*4] 120mm2*2 [4/0AWG*2]
VFD2000CP43A-21 [250MCM*4] 50mm2*4 [1/0AWG*4] M8 50mm2*4 [1/0AWG*4] 50mm2*2 [1/0AWG*2] M8
VFD2200CP43A-21 70mm2*4 [2/0AWG*4] 180kg-cm 70mm2*4 [2/0AWG*4] 70mm2*2 [2/0AWG*2] 180kg-cm
VFD2500CP43A-21 70mm2*4 [2/0AWG*4] [156.2lb-in.] 70mm2*4 [2/0AWG*4] 70mm2*2 [2/0AWG*2] [156.2lb-in.]
VFD2800CP43A-21 95mm2*4 [3/0AWG*4] [17.65Nm] 95mm2*4 [3/0AWG*4] 95mm2*2 [3/0AWG*2] [17.65Nm]
VFD3150CP63A-00 150mm2*4 50mm2*4 [1/0AWG*4] 50mm2*4 [1/0AWG*4] 50mm2*2 [1/0AWG*2]
VFD2500CP63A-21 [300MCM*4] 50mm2*4 [1/0AWG*4] 50mm2*4 [1/0AWG*4] 50mm2*2 [1/0AWG*2]
5-16

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, +1/DC+, -/DC- Terminal
Gauge Torque Torque
(±10%) (±10%)
240mm2*2
VFD2000CP43A-00 240mm2*2 [400MCM*2] 240mm2*1 [400MCM*1]
[400MCM*2]
240mm2*2
[500MCM*2]
240mm2*2
[500MCM*2]
240mm2*2
[500MCM*2]
150mm2*2
[300MCM*2]
M12 240mm2*2 M8
240mm2*2 408kg-cm [400MCM*2] 180kg-cm
[500MCM*2] [354.1lb-in.] 240mm2*2
VFD2500CP43A-21 240mm2*2 [500MCM*2] 240mm2*1 [500MCM*1] [156.2lb-in.]
[39.98Nm] [500MCM*2]
[17.65Nm]
240mm2*2
[500MCM*2]
120mm2*2
[250MCM*2]
150mm2*2
[350MCM*2]
120mm2*2
[250MCM*2]
150mm2*2
[350MCM*2]
5-17
Frame H
R/L11 R/L12 S/L21 S/L22 T/L31 T/L32 +1/DC + -/DC - U/T1 V/T2 W/T 3
 If you install at Ta 50°C ( for 460V model names with last digit A-00 / C-00; for 690V model names
end with 63A-00) / 40°C (for 460V model names with last digit C-21; for 690V model names end with
63A-21) environment, use copper wires that have a voltage rating 600V and are temperature
resistant to 75°C or 90°C.
 If you install at Ta 50°C ( for 460V model names with last digit A-00 / C-00; for 690V model names
end with 63A-00) / 40°C (for 460V model names with last digit C-21; for 690V model names end with
 For VFD4000CP43A-00 and VFD4000CP43C-00 models: If you install at Ta 40 ° C above
environment, use copper wires that have a voltage rating 600V and are temperature resistant to 90°
C or above.
 For VFD5000CP43A-00, VFD5000CP43C-00 and VFD5000CP43C-21 models: If you install at Ta 30
°C above environment, use copper wires that have a voltage rating 600V and are temperature
R/L11, R/L12, S/L21, S/L22, T/L31, T/L32, U/T1, Terminal
V/T2, W/T3, +1/DC+, -/DC-
Model Name
Max. Wire
Min. Wire Gauge and Torque Max. Wire Gauge Min. Wire Gauge and Torque
Gauge
(±10%) (±10%)
VFD3150CP43A-00 150mm2*4 [300MCM*4] 150mm2*4 [300MCM*4] 150mm2*2 [300MCM*2]
VFD3150CP43C-00 150mm2*4 [300MCM*4] 150mm2*4 [300MCM*4] 150mm2*2 [300MCM*2]
VFD3150CP43C-21 120mm2*4 [4/0AWG*4] M8 120mm2*4 [4/0AWG*4] 120mm2*2 [4/0AWG*2] M8
VFD3550CP43C-21 185mm2*4 120mm2*4 [250MCM*4] 180kg-cm 120mm2*4 [250MCM*4] 120mm2*2 [250MCM*2] 180kg-cm
VFD4000CP43C-21 [350MCM*4] 150mm2*4 [300MCM*4] [156.2lb-in.] 150mm2*4 [300MCM*4] 150mm2*2 [300MCM*2] [156.2lb-in.]
VFD5000CP43C-21 185mm2*4 [350MCM*4] [17.65Nm] 185mm2*4 [350MCM*4] 185mm2*2 [350MCM*2] [17.65Nm]
5-18
Frame H
+1/DC+ -/DC-
R/L11 R/L12 S/L21 S/L22 T/L31 T/L32 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
 If you install at Ta 50°C (model names with last digit A-00) / 40°C (models names with last digit C-21)
environment, use copper wires that have a voltage rating 600V and are temperature resistant to 70°
C or 90°C.
 If you install at Ta 50°C (model names with last digit A-00) / 40°C (models names with last digit C-21)
above environment, use copper wires that have a voltage rating 600V and are temperature resistant
to 90°C or above.

R/L11, R/L12, S/L21, S/L22, T/L31, T/L32, Terminal
Model Name U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, +1/DC+, -/DC-
Max. Wire Max. Wire
Min. Wire Gauge and Torque Min. Wire Gauge and Torque
Gauge Gauge
(±10%) (±10%)
240mm2*4
300mm2*4 [500MCM*4]
[600MCM*4] 2 M12 300mm2*4 M8
VFD6300CP43A-00 300mm *4 [600MCM*4] 300mm2*2 [600MCM*2]
408kg-cm [600MCM*4] 180kg-cm
[354.1lb-in.] 240mm2*4 [156.2lb-in.]
VFD5600CP43C-21 240mm2*4 [500MCM*4] 240mm2*2 [500MCM*2]
240mm2*4 [39.98Nm] [500MCM*4] [17.65Nm]
[500MCM*4] 2 240mm2*4
VFD6300CP43C-21 240mm *4 [500MCM*4] 240mm2*2 [500MCM*2]
[500MCM*4]
5-19
[This page intentionally left blank]
5-20
Chapter 6 Control TerminalsCP2000
Chapter 6 Control Terminals
6-1 Remove the Cover for Wiring
6-2 Specifications of Control Terminal
6-3 Remove the Terminal Block
6-1
Analog input terminals (AVI1, AVI2, ACI, ACM)

 Analog input signals are easily affected by external noise. Use shielded wiring and
keep it as short as possible (< 20 m) with proper grounding. If the noise is inductive,
connecting the shield to the ACM terminal can reduce interference.
 Use twisted-pair wire for weak analog signals.
 If the analog input signals are affected by noise from the AC motor drive, connect a
capacitor and a ferrite core as shown in Figure 6-1.
Figure 6-1
Contact input terminals (FWD, REV, MI1–MI8, COM)

 The “COM” terminal is a common terminal of the photo-coupler in all the wiring
methods.
6-2
 When the photo coupler uses the internal power supply, the switch connection for Sink
and Source modes shows as Figure 6-2 and Figure 6-3:
MI-DCM: Sink mode
MI-+24V: Source mode
 When the photo coupler uses the external power supply, remove the short-circuit cable
between +24V and COM terminals. The switch connection for Sink and Source modes
shows as Figure 6-4 and Figure 6-5:
The “+” of 24V connecting to “COM: Sink mode
The “-“ of 24V connecting to COM: Source mode
6-3
6-1 Remove the Cover for Wiring

Remove the top cover before wiring the multi-function input and output terminals,
NOTE The drive appearances shown in the figures are for reference only, a real drive may look different.
Frame A & B
Applicable models:
VFD007CP43A-21; VFD015CP43B-21; VFD022CP43B-21; VFD037CP43B-21; VFD040CP43A-21;
VFD055CP43B-21; VFD075CP43B-21; VFD007CP4EA-21; VFD015CP4EB-21; VFD022CP4EB-21;
VFD037CP4EB-21; VFD040CP4EB-21; VFD055CP4EB-21; VFD075CP4EB-21; VFD015CP53A-21;
VFD110CP43B-21; VFD150CP43B-21; VFD185CP43B-21; VFD110CP4EB-21; VFD150CP4EB-21;
VFD185CP4EB-21; VFD055CP53A-21; VFD075CP53A-21; VFD110CP53A-21; VFD150CP53A-21
Screw torque: 12–15 kg-cm / [10.4–13 lb-in.] / [1.2–1.5 Nm]

Loosen the screw and press the tabs on both sides to remove the cover.
Figure 6-6
Frame C
Applicable models:
VFD370CP43B-21; VFD220CP4EA-21; VFD300CP4EB-21; VFD370CP4EB-21; VFD185CP63A-21;

Loosen the screws and press the tabs on both sides to remove the cover.
Figure 6-7
6-4
Frame D0 & D
Applicable models:
VFD450CP43S-00; VFD550CP43S-00; VFD450CP43S-21; VFD550CP43S-21; VFD370CP23A-00/-21;
VFD450CP23A-00/-21; VFD750CP43B-00/-21; VFD900CP43A-00/-21; VFD450CP63A-00/-21;
VFD550CP63A-00/-21

To remove the cover, lift it slightly and pull outward.
Loosen the screws and press the tabs on both sides to remove the cover.
Figure 6-8
Frame E
Applicable models:
VFD550CP23A-00/-21; VFD750CP23A-00/-21; VFD900CP23A-00/-21; VFD1100CP43A-00/-21;
VFD1320CP43B-00/-21; VFD750CP63A-00/-21; VFD900CP63A-00/-21; VFD1100CP63A-00/-21;
VFD1320CP63B-21

To remove the cover, lift it slightly and pull outward.
Figure 6-9
6-5
Frame F
Applicable models:
VFD1600CP43A-00/-21; VFD1850CP43B-00/-21; VFD1600CP63A-00/-21; VFD2000CP63A-00/-21

To remove the cover, lift it slightly and pull outward
Figure 6-10
Frame G
Applicable models:
VFD2000CP43A-00/-21; VFD2200CP43A-00/-21; VFD2500CP43A-00/-21; VFD2800CP43A-00/-21;
VFD2500CP63A-00/-21; VFD3150CP63A-00/-21

Figure 6-11
6-6
Frame H
Applicable models:
VFD6300CP43A-00; VFD3150CP43C-00/-21; VFD3550CP43C-00/-21; VFD4000CP43C-00/-21;
VFD5000CP43C-00/-21; VFD5600CP43C-21; VFD6300CP43C-21

Figure 6-12
690V Frame H
Applicable models:
VFD4000CP63A-00/-21; VFD4500CP63A-00/-21; VFD5600CP63A-00/-21; VFD6300CP63A-00/-21

Figure 6-13
6-7
6-2 Specifications of Control Terminal
Figure 6-14
Terminal Stripping Maximum Minimum

Group Conductor Torque (±10%)
Function Length [mm] Wire Gauge Wire Gauge
5 kg-cm
Solid
Relay Ⓐ 4–5 [4.3 lb-in]
Strand [0.49 Nm]
Solid 8 kg-cm
Control 1.5 mm2 0.2 mm2
Ⓑ [6.9 lb-in]
board Strand [16 AWG] [26 AWG]
[0.78 Nm]
6–7
Solid 2 kg-cm
Control
Ⓒ [1.7 lb-in]
board Strand [0.20 Nm]
Wiring precautions:
 In the figure above, the default for STO1, STO2, +24V and SCM1, SCM2, DCM are short circuit.
The +24V from section Ⓒ of above figure is for STO only, and cannot be used for other
purposes. The default for +24V-COM is short circuit and SINK mode (NPN); please refer to
Section 4 Wiring for more detail.
 Tighten the wiring with slotted screwdriver:
Ⓐ Ⓑ is 3.5 mm (wide) x 0.6 mm (thick); Ⓒ is 2.5 mm (wide) x 0.4 mm (thick)
 When wiring bare wires, ensure that they are perfectly arranged to go through the wiring holes.
Terminals Terminal Function Default (NPN mode)
Digital control signal common
+24V +24V  5% 200mA
(Source)
COM Digital control signal common (Sink) Common for multi-function input terminals
FWD-DCM:
FWD Forward-Stop command ON forward running
OFF deceleration to stop
REV-DCM:
REV Reverse-Stop command ON reverse running
OFF deceleration to stop
6-8

Refer to Pr.02-01–02-08 to program the multi-function inputs
MI1–MI8.
Source Mode
MI1 ON: activation voltage ≥ 11 VDC
| Multi-function input 1–8 OFF: cut-off voltage ≤ 5 VDC
MI8 Sink Mode
ON: the activation voltage ≤ 13 VDC
OFF: cut-off current voltage ≥ 19 VDC
The internal resistance is 3.6 kΩ.
DCM Digital frequency signal common Digital frequency signal common
RA1 Multi-function relay output 1 (N.O.) a Resistive Load:

3 A (N.O.) / 3 A (N.C.) 250 VAC
5 A (N.O.) / 3 A (N.C.) 30 VDC
RB1 Multi-function relay output 1 (N.C.) b Inductive Load (COS 0.4):
1.2 A (N.O) / 1.2 A (N.C.) 250 VAC
Various kinds of monitor signals output, e.g. operation,
RC1 Multi-function relay common frequency reached, overload indication, etc.
RA2 Multi-function relay output 2 (N.O.) a Resistive Load:

3 A (N.O.) / 250 VAC
RC2 Multi-function relay common 5 A (N.O.) / 30 VDC
Inductive Load (COS 0.4):
RA3 Multi-function relay output 3 (N.O.) a 1.2 A (N.O.) / 250 VAC
Various kinds of monitor signals output, e.g. operation,
RC3 Multi-function relay common frequency reached, overload indication, etc.
+10V Potentiometer power supply Analog frequency setting: +10 VDC 20 mA

Analog voltage input
Impedance: 20 kΩ
Range: 0–20 mA / 4–20 mA / 0–10 V = 0–Max. Output
AVI1
Frequency (Pr.01-00)
AVI1 switch, default is 0–10 V
Figure 6-16
Analog current input
Impedance: 250 Ω
Range: 0–20 mA / 4–20 mA / 0–10 V = 0–Max. Output
ACI
ACI Switch, default is 4–20 mA
Figure 6-17
6-9

Auxiliary analog voltage input
Impedance: 20 kΩ
AVI2
Range: 0–10 VDC = 0–Max. Output Frequency (Pr.01-00)
Figure 6-18
Multi-function analog voltage output
AFM1
0–10 V Max. output current 2 mA, Max. load 5 kΩ
0–20 mA Max. load 500 Ω
Output current: 20 mA max
Resolution: 0–10 V corresponds to Max. operation frequency
Range: 0–10 V  4–20 mA
AFM2
AFM1/ AFM2 Switch, default is 0–10 V
Figure 6-19
ACM Analog Signal Common Common for analog terminals
STO1 Default setting is shorted
SCM1 Power removal safety function for EN ISO 13849 and IEC 61508
STO2 When STO1–SCM1; STO2–SCM2 is activated, the voltage of STO1–SCM1 / STO2–SCM2 must be
≥ 11 VDC, the internal resistance for STO1–SCM1 / STO2–SCM2 is 3.6 kΩ
SCM2
Note: Refer to Section 18 Safe Torque Off Function.
SG+ Modbus RS-485
SG- Note: Refer to Section 12 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETER SETTINGS group 09
SGND Communication Parameters for more information.
PIN 1, 2, 7, 8 : Reserved PIN 3, 6: SGND
RJ45
PIN 4: SG- PIN 5: SG+
NOTE: Wire size of analog control signals: 0.75 mm2 [18 AWG] with shielded wire
6-10
6-3 Remove the Terminal Block

1. Loosen the screws by screwdriver. (As shown in figure below).
Screw torque: 6–8 kg-cm / [5.2–6.9 lb-in] / [0.59–0.78 Nm]
Figure 6-19
2. Remove the control board by pulling it out for a distance 6–8 cm (as 1 in the figure) then lift the control
board upward (as 2 in the figure).
Figure 6-20
6-11
6-12
Chapter 7 Optional AccessoriesCP2000
Chapter 7 Optional Accessories
7-1 Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drive
7-2 Magnetic Contactor / Air Circuit Breaker and Non-fuse Circuit
Breaker
7-3 Fuse Specification Chart
7-4 AC / DC Reactor
7-5 Zero Phase Reactor
7-6 EMC Filter
7-7 Panel Mounting (MKC-KPPK)
7-8 Conduit Box Kit
7-9 Fan Kit
7-10 Flange Mounting Kit
7-11 Power Terminal Kit
7-12 USB/RS-485 Communication Interface IF6530
7-1
The optional accessories listed in this chapter are available upon request. Installing additional
accessories to your drive can substantially improve the drive’s performance. Select accessories
according to your needs or contact your local distributor for suggestions.
7-1 Brake Resistors and Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives

230V Model
Applicable
125% Braking Torque 10%ED *1 Max. Braking Torque *2
Motor
Braking Brake Brake Resistor for Each Brake Resistor Value Total Min. Max. Total Peak
HP kW Torque Unit Unit *3 Spec. for Each Braking Resistor Braking Power
[kg-m] VFDB *4 P/N Q’ty Usage AC Motor Drive Current [A] Value [Ω] Current [A] [kW]
1 0.7 0.5 - BR080W200 1 - 80W 200Ω 1.9 63.3 6 2.3
2 1.5 0.5 - BR080W200 1 - 80W 200Ω 1.9 63.3 6 2.3
3 2.2 1.0 - BR200W091 1 - 200W 91Ω 4.2 47.5 8 3.0
5 3.7 1.5 - BR300W070 1 - 300W 70Ω 5.4 38.0 10 3.8
7.5 5.5 2.5 - BR400W040 1 - 400W 40Ω 9.5 19.0 20 7.6
10 7.5 3.7 - BR1K0W020 1 - 1000W 20Ω 19 14.6 26 9.9
15 11 5.1 - BR1K0W020 1 - 1000W 20Ω 19 14.6 26 9.9
20 15 7.4 - BR1K5W013 1 - 1500W 13Ω 29 12.6 29 11.0
25 18 10.2 - BR1K0W4P3 2 2 in series 2000W 8.6Ω 44 8.3 46 17.5
50 37 20.3 2015*2 BR1K0W5P1 2 2 in series 4000W 5.1Ω 75 4.8 80 30.4
60 45 25 2022*2 BR1K2W3P9 2 2 in series 4800W 3.9Ω 97 3.2 120 45.6
125 90 50.8 2022*4 BR1K2W3P9 2 2 in series 9600W 2Ω 190 1.6 240 91.2
Table 7-1
460V Model
Applicable
125%Braking Torque 10%ED *1 Max. Braking Torque *2
Motor
1 0.7 0.5 - BR080W750 1 - 80W 750Ω 1 190.0 4 3.0
2 1.5 0.5 - BR080W750 1 - 80W 750Ω 1 190.0 4 3.0
3 2.2 1.0 - BR200W360 1 - 200W 360Ω 2.1 126.7 6 4.6
5 3.7 1.5 - BR300W250 1 - 300W 250Ω 3 108.6 7 5.3
5.5 4.0 2.5 - BR400W150 1 - 400W 150Ω 5.1 84.4 9 6.8
7.5 5.5 2.7 - BR1K0W075 1 - 1000W 75Ω 10.2 54.3 14 10.6
10 7.5 3.7 - BR1K0W075 1 - 1000W 75Ω 10.2 54.3 14 10.6
15 11 5.1 - BR1K0W075 1 - 1000W 75Ω 10.2 47.5 16 12.2
20 15 7.4 - BR1K5W043 1 - 1500W 43Ω 17.6 42.2 18 13.7
25 18 10.2 - BR1K0W016 2 2 in series 2000W 32Ω 24 26.2 29 22.0
30 22 12.2 - BR1K0W016 2 2 in series 2000W 32Ω 24 23.0 33 25.1
40 30 14.9 - BR1K5W013 2 2 in series 3000W 26Ω 29 23.0 33 25.1
2 parallel,
50 37 20.3 - BR1K0W016 4 4000W 16Ω 47.5 14.1 54 41.0
2 in series
2 parallel,
60 45 25 4045*1 BR1K2W015 4 4800W 15Ω 50 12.7 60 45.6
2 in series
2 parallel,
75 55 30.5 4045*1 BR1K5W013 4 6000W 13Ω 59 12.7 60 45.6
2 in series
100 75 37.2 4030*2 BR1K0W5P1 4 4 series 8000W 10.2Ω 76 9.5 80 60.8
2 parallel,
125 90 50.8 4045*2 BR1K2W015 4 9600W 7.5Ω 100 6.3 120 91.2
2 in series
2 parallel,
150 110 60.9 4045*2 BR1K5W013 4 12000W 6.5Ω 117 6.3 120 91.2
2 in series
5 parallel,
175 132 74.5 4110*1 BR1K2W015 10 12000W 6Ω 126 6.0 126 95.8
2 in series
6 parallel,
215 160 89.4 4160*1 BR1K5W012 12 18000W 4Ω 190 4.0 190 144.4
2 in series
7-2
Applicable
Motor
[kg-m] VFDB * 4 P/N Q’ty Usage AC Motor Drive Current [A] Value [Ω] Current [A] [kW]
6 parallel,
250 185 108.3 4160*1 BR1K5W012 12 18000W 4Ω 190 4.0 190 144.4
2 in series
6 parallel,
270 200 108.3 4185*1 BR1K5W012 12 18000W 4Ω 190 4.0 190 144.4
2 in series
7 parallel,
300 220 125.2 4185*1 BR1K5W012 14 21000W 3.4Ω 225 3.4 225 172.0
2 in series
5 parallel,
340 250 135.4 4110*2 BR1K2W015 10 24000W 3Ω 252 3.0 252 191.5
2 in series
5 parallel,
375 280 148.9 4110*2 BR1K2W015 10 24000W 3Ω 252 3.0 252 191.5
2 in series
6 parallel,
425 315 189.6 4160*2 BR1K5W012 12 36000W 2Ω 380 2.0 380 288.8
2 in series
6 parallel,
475 355 213.3 4160*2 BR1K5W012 12 36000W 2Ω 380 2.0 380 288.8
2 in series
7 parallel,
536 400 240.3 4185*2 BR1K5W012 14 42000W 1.7Ω 450 1.7 450 344.2
2 in series
6 parallel,
675 500 304.7 4185*3 BR1K5W012 12 54000W 1.3Ω 600 1.1 675 513.0
2 in series
7 parallel,
745 560 379.1 4185*3 BR1K5W012 14 63000W 1.1Ω 675 1.1 675 513.0
2 in series
6 parallel,
850 630 426.5 4160*4 BR1K5W012 12 72000W 1.0Ω 760 1.0 760 577.6
2 in series
Table 7-2
575V Model
Applicable
Motor [kW]
ND LD Torque Unit Unit *3 Spec. for Each Braking Resistor Braking Power
0.75 1.5 0.5 - BR080W750 1 - 80W 750Ω 1.2 280.0 4 4.5
1.5 2.2 1 - BR200W360 1 - 200W 360Ω 2.6 186.7 6 6.7
2.2 3.7 1.5 - BR300W400 1 - 300W 400Ω 2.3 160.0 7 7.8
3.7 5.5 2.5 - BR500W100 1 - 500W 100Ω 9.2 93.3 12 13.4
5.5 7.5 3.7 - BR750W140 1 - 750W 140Ω 6.6 80.0 14 15.7
7.5 11 5.1 - BR1K0W075 1 - 1000W 75Ω 12.3 70.0 16 17.9
11 15 7.4 - BR1K1W091 1 - 1100W 91Ω 10.1 62.2 18 20.2

Table 7-3
690V Model
Applicable
125%Braking Torque 10%ED *1 Max. Braking Torque*2
Motor [kW]
LD ND Torque Unit Unit *3 Spec. for Each Braking Resistor Braking Power
[kg-m] VFDB*4 P/N Q’ty Usage AC Motor Drive Current [A] Value [Ω] Current [A] [kW]
18.5 15 10.2 - BR1K0W039 2 2 in series 2000W 78Ω 14.4 58.9 19 21.3
22 18.5 12.5 - BR1K2W033 2 2 in series 2400W 66Ω 17.0 58.9 19 21.3
30 22 14.9 - BR1K5W027 2 2 in series 3000W 54Ω 20.7 43.1 26 29.1
37 30 20.3 - BR1K2W015 3 3 in series 3600W 45Ω 24.9 43.1 26 29.1

2 parallel,
45 37 25 6055*1 BR1K2W033 4 4800W 33Ω 33.9 24.3 46 51.5
2 in series
2 parallel,
55 45 30.5 6055*1 BR1K5W027 4 6000W 27Ω 41.5 24.3 46 51.5
2 in series
3 parallel,
75 55 37.2 6110*1 BR1K2W033 6 7200W 22Ω 50.9 12.2 92 103.0
2 in series
3 parallel,
90 75 50.8 6110*1 BR1K5W027 6 9000W 18Ω 62.2 12.2 92 103.0
2 in series
7-3
Applicable
125%Braking Torque 10%ED *1 Max. Braking Torque*2
Motor [kW]
LD ND Torque Unit Unit *3 Spec. for Each Braking Resistor Braking Power
[kg-m] VFDB*4 P/N Q’ty Usage AC Motor Drive Current [A] Value [Ω] Current [A] [kW]
4 parallel,
110 90 60.9 6110*1 BR1K5W027 8 12000W 13.5Ω 83.0 12.2 92 103.0
2 in series
4 parallel,
132 110 74.5 6160*1 BR1K2W015 12 14400W 11.3Ω 99.6 8.2 136 152.3
3 in series
5 parallel,
160 132 89.4 6160*1 BR1K5W027 10 15000W 10.8Ω 103.7 8.2 136 152.3
2 in series
6 parallel,
200 160 108.3 6200*1 BR1K5W027 12 18000W 9.0Ω 124.4 6.9 162 181.4
2 in series
4 parallel,
250 200 135.4 6110*2 BR1K5W027 8 24000W 6.8Ω 165.9 6.1 184 206.1
2 in series
5 parallel,
315 250 169.3 6160*2 BR1K5W027 10 30000W 5.4Ω 207.4 4.1 272 304.6
2 in series
6 parallel,
400 315 213.3 6200*2 BR1K5W027 12 36000W 4.5Ω 248.9 3.5 324 362.9
2 in series
7 parallel,
450 355 240.3 6200*2 BR1K5W027 14 42000W 3.9Ω 290.4 3.5 324 362.9
2 in series
6 parallel,
560 450 304.7 6200*3 BR1K5W027 12 54000W 3.0Ω 373.3 2.3 486 544.3
2 in series
6 parallel,
630 630 426.5 6200*4 BR1K5W027 12 72000W 2.3Ω 497.8 1.7 648 725.8
2 in series
Table 7-4
*1 Calculation for 125% braking toque: (kW) × 125% × 0.8; where 0.8 is motor efficiency.
Because of the limited resistor power, the longest operation time for 10%ED is 10 seconds (ON: 10 sec. / OFF: 90 sec.).
*2 Refer to Chapter 7 “Brake Module and Brake Resistors” in the application manual for “Operation Duration & ED” vs. “Braking
Current”.
*3 For heat dissipation, a resistors of 400 W or lower should be fixed to the frame and maintain the surface temperature below
250°C; a resistor of 1000 W and above should maintain the surface temperature below 350°C. (If the surface temperature is
higher than the temperature limit, install extra cooling or increase the size of the resistor.)
*4 The calculation of the brake resistor is based on a four-pole motor (1800 rpm). Refer to VFDB series Braking Module
Instruction for more details on brake resistor.
NOTE
1. Specification and Appearance of Brake Resistors
1-1 Wire wound resistors: For 1000 W and above, refer to the following appearance of wire wound resistor
(Figure 7-1) and its model and specification comparison table (Table 7-5) for details.
H
F
G
L
E
A
B
Figure 7-1
C
7-4
Models and Specifications Comparison Table of Wire Wound Resistors: Unit: mm
Table 7-5
1-2 Aluminum housed resistors: For below 1000 W, refer to the following appearance of aluminum-housed
resistor (Figure 7-2) and its model and specification comparison table (Table 7-6) for details.
L1
L2
W
A
L 1 6A WG, 1. 31 8 M M2
L3
H
1 2.0
Figure 7-2
Unit: mm
Table 7-6
2. Select the resistance value, power and brake usage (ED %) according to Delta rules.
Definition for Brake Usage ED%
Figure 7-3
For safety, install a thermal overload relay (O.L) between the brake unit and the brake resistor in conjunction
with the magnetic contactor (MC) before the drive for additional protection. The thermal overload relay protects
the brake resistor from damage due to frequent or continuous braking. Under such circumstances, turn off the
power to prevent damage to the brake resistor, brake unit and drive. NOTE: Never use it to disconnect the
brake resistor.
7-5
Figure 7-4
3. Any damage to the drive or other equipment caused by using brake resistors and brake modules that are not
provided by Delta voids the warranty.
4. Consider environmental safety factors when installing the brake resistors. If you use the minimum resistance
value, consult local dealers for the power calculation.
5. When using more than two brake units, the equivalent resistor value of the parallel brake unit cannot be less
than the value in the column “Min. Resistor Value (Ω)”. Read the wiring information in the brake unit instruction
sheet thoroughly prior to operation. Visit the following links to get the instruction sheets for the wiring in the
brake unit:
 VFDB2015 / 2022 / 4030 / 4045 / 5055 Braking Modules Instruction Sheet
http://www.deltaww.com/filecenter/Products/download/06/060101/Option/DELTA_IA-MDS_VFDB_I_EN_
20070719.pdf
 VFDB4110 / 4160 / 4185 Braking Modules Instruction Sheet
http://www.deltaww.com/filecenter/Products/download/06/060101/Option/DELTA_IA-MDS_VFDB4110-41
60-4185_I_EN_20101011.pdf
 VFDB6055 / 6110 / 6160 / 6200 Braking Modules Instruction Sheet
http://www.deltaww.com/filecenter/Products/download/06/060101/Option/DELTA_IA-MDS_VFDB6055-61
10-6160-6200_I_TSE_20121030.pdf
6. The selection tables are for normal usage. If the AC motor drive requires frequent braking, increase the Watts
by two to three times.
7. Thermal Overload Relay (TOR), for 230V / 460V / 690V models:
Thermal overload relay selection is based on its overload capacity. A standard braking capacity of the CP2000
is 10% ED (Tripping time = 10 s). As shown in the figure below, a 460V, 110 kw CP2000 requires the thermal
relay to take 260% overload capacity for 10 seconds (hot starting) and the braking current is 126 A. In this case,
select a thermal overload relay rated at 50 A. The property of each thermal relay may vary among different
manufacturers. Carefully read the specification before using it.
7-6
Figure 7-5
7-7
7-2 Magnetic Contactor / Air Circuit Breaker and Non-fuse Circuit Breaker
Magnetic Contactor (MC) and Air Circuit Breaker (ACB)
It is recommended the surrounding temperature for MC should be ≥ 60°C and that for ACB should be
≥ 50°C. In the meanwhile, consider temperature derating for components with ON/OFF switch in
accordance with the ambient temperature of the on-site distribution panel.
230V Model
Light Duty Output Light Duty Input MC/ACB Selection
Frame Model
Current [A] Current [A] [A]
VFD007CP23A-21 5 6.4 11
VFD015CP23A-21 7.5 9.6 18
A VFD022CP23A-21 10 15 22
VFD037CP23A-21 15 22 40
VFD055CP23A-21 21 25 40
VFD075CP23A-21 31 34 55
B VFD110CP23A-21 46 51 85
VFD150CP23A-21 61 67 105
VFD185CP23A-21 75 83 130
C VFD220CP23A-21 90 99 150
VFD300CP23A-21 105 116 185
VFD370CP23A-00/21 146 146 225

D
VFD450CP23A-00/21 180 180 265
VFD550CP23A-00/21 215 215 330
E VFD750CP23A-00/21 276 276 400
VFD900CP23A-00/21 322 322 500

Table 7-7
460V Model
Frame Model
VFD007CP43A-21 3.0 4.3 7
VFD015CP43B-21 4.2 6.0 9
VFD022CP43B-21 5.5 8.1 12
A VFD037CP43B-21 8.5 12.4 22
VFD040CP43A-21 10.5 16 32
VFD055CP43B-21 13 20 32
VFD075CP43B-21 18 22 40
VFD110CP43B-21 24 26 40
B VFD150CP43B-21 32 35 55
VFD185CP43B-21 38 42 65
VFD220CP43A-21 45 50 75
C VFD300CP43B-21 60 66 105
VFD370CP43B-21 73 80 130
7-8

Frame Model
VFD450CP43S-21 91 91 150
D0
VFD550CP43S-21 110 110 185
VFD750CP43B-00/21 150 150 265

D
VFD900CP43A-00/21 180 180 265
VFD1100CP43A-00/21 220 220 330

E
VFD1320CP43B-00/21 260 260 400
VFD1600CP43A-00/21 310 310 500

F
VFD1850CP43B-00/21 370 370 630
VFD2000CP43A-00/21 395 395 800
VFD2200CP43A-00/21 460 460 800

G
VFD2500CP43A-00/21 481 481 800
VFD2800CP43A-00/21 530 530 800
VFD3150CP43A-00/C-00/C-21 616 616 1000
VFD3550CP43A-00/C-00/C-21 683 683 1000
VFD4000CP43A-00/C-00/C-21 770 770 1250

H
VFD5000CP43A-00/C-00/C-21 930 930 1600
VFD5600CP43A-00/C-21 1094 1094 2000
VFD6300CP43A-00/C-21 1212 1212 2000

Table7-8
575V Model
Frame Model
VFD015CP53A-21 3 3.8 9
A VFD022CP53A-21 4.3 5.4 12
VFD037CP53A-21 6.7 10.4 18
VFD055CP53A-21 9.9 14.9 32
VFD075CP53A-21 12.1 16.9 32

B
VFD110CP53A-21 18.7 21.3 40
VFD150CP53A-21 24.2 26.3 50

Table 7-9
690V Model
Frame Model
VFD185CP63A-21 24 29 50
VFD220CP63A-21 30 36 65
C
VFD300CP63A-21 36 43 75
VFD370CP63A-21 45 54 100
VFD450CP63A-00/A-21 54 65 130
D
VFD550CP63A-00/A-21 67 81 150
VFD750CP63A-00/A-21 86 84 150
E VFD900CP63A-00/A-21 104 102 185
VFD1100CP63A-00/A-21 125 122 225
7-9

Frame Model
E VFD1320CP63A-00/A-21 150 147 265
VFD1600CP63A-00/A-21 180 178 330

F
VFD2000CP63A-00/A-21 220 217 400
VFD2500CP63A-00/A-21 290 292 630

G
VFD3150CP63A-00/A-21 350 353 630
VFD4000CP63A-00/A-21 430 454 800
VFD4500CP63A-00/A-21 465 469 800

H
VFD5600CP63A-00/A-21 590 595 1000
VFD6300CP63A-00/A-21 675 681 1250
Table 7-10
7-10
Non-fuse Circuit Breaker

Comply with the UL standard: Per UL 508, paragraph 45.8.4, part a,
The rated current of the non-fuse circuit breaker should be 1.6–2.6 times (575V / 690V models: 2–4
times) the drive’s rated input current.
230V / Three-phase 460V / Three-phase
Breaker Rated Input Breaker Rated Input
Model Recommended Model Recommended
Current [A] Current [A]
VFD007CP23A-21 15 VFD007CP43A-21/4EA-21 10
VFD015CP23A-21 20 VFD015CP43B-21/4EB-21 10
VFD022CP23A-21 30 VFD022CP43B-21/4EB-21 15
VFD037CP23A-21 40 VFD040CP43A-21/4EA-21 25
VFD055CP23A-21 50 VFD037CP43B-21/4EB-21 30
VFD075CP23A-21 60 VFD055CP43B-21/4EB-21 40
VFD110CP23A-21 100 VFD075CP43B-21/4EB-21 40
VFD150CP23A-21 125 VFD110CP43B-21/4EB-21 50
VFD185CP23A-21 150 VFD150CP43B-21/4EB-21 60
VFD220CP23A-21 200 VFD185CP43B-21/4EB-21 75
VFD300CP23A-21 225 VFD220CP43A-21/4EA-21 100
VFD370CP23A-00/23A-21 250 VFD300CP43B-21/4EB-21 125
VFD450CP23A-00/23A-21 300 VFD370CP43B-21/4EB-21 150
VFD550CP23A-00/23A-21 400 VFD450CP43S-00/43S-21 175
VFD750CP23A-00/23A-21 450 VFD550CP43S-00/43S-21 250
VFD900CP23A-00/23A-21 600 VFD750CP43B-00/43B-21 300
Table 7-11 VFD900CP43A-00/43A-21 300
VFD1100CP43A-00/43A-21 400
VFD1320CP43B-00/43B-21 500
VFD1600CP43A-00/43A-21 600
VFD1850CP43B-00/43B-21 600
VFD2000CP43A-0043A/-21 800
VFD2200CP43A-00/43A-21 800
VFD2500CP43A-00/43A-21 1000
VFD2800CP43A-00/43A-21 1000
VFD3150CP43A-00/43C-00/43C-21 1200
VFD3550CP43A-00/43C-00/43C-21 1350
VFD4000CP43A-00/43C-00/43C-21 1500
VFD5000CP43A-00/43C-00/43C-21 2000
VFD5600CP43A-00/43C-21 2000
VFD6300CP43A-00/43C-21 2000
Table 7-12
7-11
575V / Three-phase 690V / Three-phase

Breaker Rated Input Breaker Rated Input
Model Recommended Model Recommended
Current [A] Current [A]
VFD015CP53A-21 7 VFD185CP63A-21 60
VFD022CP53A-21 10 VFD220CP63A-21 70
VFD037CP53A-21 15 VFD300CP63A-21 80
VFD055CP53A-21 25 VFD370CP63A-21 100
VFD075CP53A-21 32 VFD450CP63A-00/-21 100
VFD110CP53A-21 50 VFD550CP63A-00/-21 125
VFD150CP53A-21 63 VFD750CP63A-00/-21 175
Table 7-13 VFD900CP63A-00/-21 200
VFD1100CP63A-00/-21 250
VFD1320CP63A-00/-21 300
VFD1600CP63A-00/-21 350
VFD2000CP63A-00/-21 400
VFD2500CP63A-00/-21 450
VFD3150CP63A-00/-21 500
VFD4000CP63A-00/-21 700
VFD4500CP63A-00/-21 800
VFD5600CP63A-00/-21 1250
VFD6300CP63A-00/-21 1400
Table 7-14
7-12
7-3 Fuse Specification Chart

 Fuse specifications lower than the table below are allowed.
 For installation in the United States, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the
National Electrical Code (NEC) and any applicable local codes. Use UL classified fuses to fulfill this
requirement.
 For installation in Canada, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with Canadian
Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes. Use UL classified fuses to fulfill this requirement.
Input Current I [A] Line Fuse
230V Model
Normal Duty Light Duty I [A] Bussmann P/N
VFD007CP23A-21 3.9 6.4 15 JJN-15
VFD015CP23A-21 6.4 9.6 20 JJN-20
VFD022CP23A-21 12 15 30 JJN-30
VFD037CP23A-21 16 22 40 JJN-40
VFD055CP23A-21 20 25 50 JJN-50
VFD075CP23A-21 28 35 60 JJN-60
VFD110CP23A-21 36 50 100 JJN-100
VFD150CP23A-21 52 65 125 JJN-125
VFD185CP23A-21 72 83 150 JJN-150
VFD220CP23A-21 83 100 200 JJN-200
VFD300CP23A-21 99 116 225 JJN-225
VFD370CP23A-00/23A-21 124 146 250 JJN-250
VFD450CP23A-00/23A-21 143 180 300 JJN-300
VFD550CP23A-00/23A-21 171 215 400 JJN-400
VFD750CP23A-00/23A-21 206 276 450 JJN-450
VFD900CP23A-00/23A-21 245 322 600 JJN-600
Table 7-15
460V Model
VFD007CP43A-21/4EA-21 3.5 4.3 10 JJS-10
VFD015CP43B-21/4EB-21 4.3 6.0 10 JJS-10
VFD022CP43B-21/4EB-21 5.9 8.1 15 JJS-15
VFD040CP43A-21/4EA-21 8.7 12.4 25 JJS-20
VFD037CP43B-21/4EB-21 14 16 30 JJS-20
VFD055CP43B-21/4EB-21 15.5 20 40 JJS-30
VFD075CP43B-21/4EB-21 17 22 40 JJS-40
VFD110CP43B-21/4EB-21 20 26 50 JJS-50
VFD150CP43B-21/4EB-21 26 35 60 JJS-60
VFD185CP43B-21/4EB-21 35 42 75 JJS-75
VFD220CP43A-21/4EA-21 40 50 100 JJS-100
VFD300CP43B-21/4EB-21 47 66 125 JJS-125
VFD370CP43B-21/4EB-21 63 80 150 JJS-150
VFD450CP43S-00/43S-21 74 91 175 JJS-175
VFD550CP43S-00/43S-21 101 110 250 JJS-250
VFD750CP43B-00/43B-21 114 150 300 JJS-300
VFD900CP43A-00/43-21 157 180 300 JJS-300
VFD1100CP43A-00/43A-21 167 220 400 JJS-400
VFD1320CP43B-00/43B-21 207 260 500 JJS-500
VFD1600CP43A-00/43A-21 240 310 600 JJS-600
VFD1850CP43B-00/43B-21 300 370 600 JJS-600
VFD2000CP43A-00/43A-21 300 395 800 JJS-800
VFD2200CP43A-00/43A-21 380 460 800 JJS-800
VFD2500CP43A-00/43A-21 390 481 1000 KTU-1000
VFD2800CP43A-00/43A-21 400 530 1000 KTU-1000
VFD3150CP43A-00/43C-00/43C-21 494 616 1200 KTU-1200
VFD3550CP43A-00/43C-00/43C-21 555 683 1350 KTU-1350
VFD4000CP43A-00/43C-00/43C-21 625 770 1500 KTU-1500
VFD5000CP43A-00/43C-00/43C-21 * 866 930 1600 170M6019
VFD5600CP43A-00/43C-21 930 1094 2000 170M6021
VFD6300CP43A-00/43C-21 1094 1212 2000 170C6021
*VFD5000CP43A-00/43C-00/43C-21 models are not UL certified. Table 7-16
7-13

575V Model
Normal Duty Light Duty I [A] Bussmann P/N Vendor
VFD015CP53A-21 3.1 3.8 7 KLKD007.T Littelfuse
VFD055CP53A-21 12.3 14.9 25 25ET Bussmann
VFD075CP53A-21 15 16.9 32 32ET Bussmann
VFD110CP53A-21 18 21.3 50 50FE Bussmann
VFD150CP53A-21 22.8 26.3 63 63FE Bussmann
Table 7-17

690V Model
VFD185CP63A-21 24 29 60 JJS-60
VFD220CP63A-21 29 36 70 JJS-70
VFD300CP63A-21 36 43 80 JJS-80
VFD370CP63A-21 43 54 100 JJS-100
VFD450CP63A-00/-21 54 65 100 JJS-100
VFD550CP63A-00/-21 65 81 125 JJS-125
VFD750CP63A-00/-21 66 84 175 JJS-175
VFD900CP63A-00/-21 84 102 200 JJS-200
VFD1100CP63A-00/-21 102 122 250 JJS-250
VFD1320CP63A-00/-21 122 147 300 JJS-300
VFD1600CP63A-00/-21 148 178 350 JJS-350
VFD2000CP63A-00/-21 178 217 400 JJS-400
VFD2500CP63A-00/-21 222 292 450 170M4063
VFD3150CP63A-00/-21 292 353 500 170M6058
VFD4000CP63A-00/-21 353 454 700 170M6061
VFD4500CP63A-00/-21 388 469 800 170M6062
VFD5600CP63A-00/-21 504 595 1250 170M6066
VFD6300CP63A-00/-21 681 681 1400 170M6067
Table 7-18
7-14
7-4 AC / DC Reactor
AC Input Reactor
Installing an AC reactor on the input side of an AC motor drive can increase line impedance, improve
the power factor, reduce input current, increase system capacity, and reduce interference generated from
the motor drive. It also reduces momentary voltage surges or abnormal current spikes from the mains
power, further protecting the drive. For example, when the main power capacity is higher than 500 kVA, or
when using a phase-compensation capacitor, momentary voltage and current spikes may damage the AC
motor drive’s internal circuit. An AC reactor on the input side of the AC motor drive protects it by
suppressing surges.
Installation
Install an AC input reactor in series between the main power and the three input phases R S T, as
shown in the figure below:
Figure 7-6
Wiring of AC input reactor
Following table shows the standard AC reactors specification of Delta CP2000
200V–230V, 50 / 60 Hz, Light Duty

Rated Saturation 3% 5% Built-in Heat
Input AC Reactor
Model kW HP Current Current Reactor Reactor DC Dissipation
Delta Part #
(Arms) (Arms) (mH) (mH) Reactor (W)
VFD007CP23A-21 0.75 1 5 6 2.536 4.227 No DR005A0254 21
VFD015CP23A-21 1.5 2 7.5 9 1.585 2.642 No DR008A0159 37
VFD022CP23A-21 2.2 3 10 12 1.152 1.92 No DR011A0115 38
VFD037CP23A-21 3.7 5 15 18 0.746 1.243 No DR017AP746 40
VFD055CP23A-21 5.5 7.5 21 25.2 0.507 0.845 No DR025AP507 61
VFD075CP23A-21 7.5 10 31 37.2 0.38 0.633 No DR033AP320 60
VFD110CP23A-21 11 15 46 55.2 0.26 0.433 No DR049AP215 70
VFD150CP23A-21 15 20 61 73.2 0.196 0.327 No DR065AP162 83
VFD185CP23A-21 18.5 25 75 90 0.169 0.282 No DR075AP170 150
VFD220CP23A-21 22 30 90 108 0.141 0.235 No DR090AP141 120
VFD300CP23A-21 30 40 105 126 0.12 0.2 No DR105AP106 150
VFD370CP23A-00
37 50 146 175.2 0.087 0.145 Yes DR146AP087 110
VFD370CP23A-21
VFD450CP23A-00
45 60 180 216 0.07 0.117 Yes DR180AP070 120
VFD450CP23A-21
VFD550CP23A-00
55 75 215 258 0.059 0.098 Yes DR215AP059 150
VFD550CP23A-21
7-15

Input AC Reactor
Delta Part #
VFD750CP23A-00
75 100 276 331.2 0.049 0.082 Yes DR276AP049 200
VFD750CP23A-21
VFD900CP23A-00
90 125 322 386.4 0.037 0.062 Yes DR346AP037 240
VFD900CP23A-21
Note: The above heat dissipation is calculated based on AC reactor’s rated current, the actual dissipation varies with the
operation current.
Table 7-19
200V–230V, 50 / 60 Hz, Normal Duty
Input AC Reactor
Delta Part #
VFD007CP23A-21 0.75 1 4.6 7.36 2.536 4.227 No DR005A0254 21
VFD015CP23A-21 1.5 2 5 8 2.536 4.227 No DR005A0254 21
VFD022CP23A-21 2.2 3 8 12.8 1.585 2.642 No DR008A0159 37
VFD037CP23A-21 3.7 5 11 17.6 1.152 1.92 No DR011A0115 38
VFD055CP23A-21 5.5 7.5 17 27.2 0.746 1.243 No DR017AP746 40
VFD075CP23A-21 7.5 10 25 40 0.507 0.845 No DR025AP507 61
VFD110CP23A-21 11 15 33 52.8 0.38 0.633 No DR033AP320 60
VFD150CP23A-21 15 20 49 78.4 0.26 0.433 No DR049AP215 70
VFD185CP23A-21 18.5 25 65 104 0.196 0.327 No DR065AP162 83
VFD220CP23A-21 22 30 75 120 0.169 0.282 No DR075AP170 150
VFD300CP23A-21 30 40 90 144 0.141 0.235 No DR090AP141 120
VFD370CP23A-00
37 50 120 192 0.12 0.2 Yes DR105AP106 150
VFD370CP23A-21
VFD450CP23A-00
45 60 146 233.6 0.087 0.145 Yes DR146AP087 110
VFD450CP23A-21
VFD550CP23A-00
55 75 180 288 0.07 0.117 Yes DR180AP070 120
VFD550CP23A-21
VFD750CP23A-00
75 100 215 344 0.059 0.098 Yes DR215AP059 150
VFD750CP23A-21
VFD900CP23A-00
90 125 255 408 0.049 0.082 Yes DR276AP049 200
VFD900CP23A-21
Note: The above heat dissipation is calculated based on AC reactor’s rated current, the actual dissipation varies with the
operation current.
Table 7-20
380V–460V, 50 / 60 Hz, Light Duty

Input AC Reactor
Delta Part #
VFD007CP43A-21
0.75 1 3 3.6 8.102 13.503 No DR003A0810 20
VFD007CP4EA-21
VFD015CP43B-21
1.5 2 4.2 5.04 6.077 10.128 No DR004A0607 21
VFD015CP4EB-21
VFD022CP43B-21
2.2 3 5.5 6.6 4.05 6.75 No DR006A0405 31
VFD022CP4EB-21
VFD037CP43B-21
3.7 5 8.5 10.2 2.7 4.5 No DR009A0270 40
VFD037CP4EB-21
VFD040CP43A-21
4 5 10.5 12.6 2.315 3.858 No DR010A0231 50
VFD040CP4EA-21
7-16

Input AC Reactor
Delta Part #
VFD055CP43B-21
5.5 7.5 13 15.6 2.025 3.375 No DR012A0202 50
VFD055CP4EB-21
VFD075CP43B-21
7.5 10 18 21.6 1.35 2.25 No DR018A0117 54
VFD075CP4EB-21
VFD110CP43B-21
11 15 24 28.8 1.01 1.683 No DR024AP881 60
VFD110CP4EB-21
VFD150CP43B-21
15 20 32 38.4 0.76 1.267 No DR032AP660 80
VFD150CP4EB-21
VFD185CP43B-21
18.5 25 38 45.6 0.639 1.065 No DR038AP639 85
VFD185CP4EB-21
VFD220CP43A-21
22 30 45 54 0.541 0.902 No DR045AP541 95
VFD220CP4EA-21
VFD300CP43B-21
30 40 60 72 0.405 0.675 No DR060AP405 100
VFD300CP4EB-21
VFD370CP43B-21
37 50 73 87.6 0.334 0.557 No DR073AP334 115
VFD370CP4EB-21
VFD450CP43S-00
45 60 91 109.2 0.267 0.445 Yes DR091AP267 130
VFD450CP43S-21
VFD550CP43S-00
55 75 110 132 0.221 0.368 Yes DR110AP221 150
VFD550CP43S-21
VFD750CP43B-00
75 100 150 180 0.162 0.27 Yes DR150AP162 170
VFD750CP43B-21
VFD900CP43A-00
90 125 180 216 0.135 0.225 Yes DR180AP135 190
VFD900CP43A-21
VFD1100CP43A-00
110 150 220 264 0.11 0.183 Yes DR220AP110 230
VFD1100CP43A-21
VFD1320CP43B-00
132 175 260 312 0.098 0.163 Yes DR260AP098 280
VFD1320CP43B-21
VFD1600CP43A-00
160 215 310 372 0.078 0.13 Yes DR310AP078 300
VFD1600CP43A-21
VFD1850CP43B-00
185 250 370 444 0.066 0.11 Yes DR370AP066 340
VFD1850CP43B-21
VFD2000CP43A-00
200 270 395 474 0.061 0.1 Yes DR460AP054*1 400
VFD2000CP43A-21
VFD2200CP43A-00
220 300 460 552 0.054 0.09 Yes DR460AP054 400
VFD2200CP43A-21
VFD2500CP43A-00
250 340 481 578 0.052 0.086 Yes DR550AP044*1 430
VFD2500CP43A-21
VFD2800CP43A-00
280 375 530 636 0.044 0.073 Yes DR550AP044 430
VFD2800CP43A-21
VFD3150CP43A-00
VFD3150CP43C-00 315 420 616 739.2 0.039 0.065 Yes DR616AP039 450
VFD3150CP43C-21
VFD3550CP43A-00
VFD3550CP43C-00 355 475 683 819.6 0.036 0.06 Yes DR683AP036 480
VFD3550CP43C-21
VFD4000CP43A-00
VFD4000CP43C-00 400 530 770 924 0.028 0.047 Yes DR866AP028 610
VFD4000CP43C-21
7-17

Input AC Reactor
Delta Part #
VFD5000CP43A-00
VFD5000CP43C-00 500 930 912 1094.4 0.028 0.043 Yes DR866AP028 610
VFD5000CP43C-21
VFD5600CP43A-00
560 750 1094 1318.2 0.022 0.037 Yes
VFD5600CP43C-21
Contact Delta
VFD6300CP43A-00
630 850 1212 1454.4 0.020 0.033 Yes
VFD6300CP43C-21
*Note 1: The inductance value for the above applications of Delta’s reactors will be closer, but less than 3%.
Note 2: The above heat dissipation is calculated based on AC reactor’s rated current; the actual dissipation varies with the
operation current.
Table 7-21
Input AC Reactor
Delta Part #
VFD007CP43A-21
0.75 1 2.8 4.48 9.058 15.097 No DR003A0810*1 20
VFD007CP4EA-21
VFD015CP43B-21
1.5 2 3 4.8 8.102 13.503 No DR003A0810 20
VFD015CP4EB-21
VFD022CP43B-21
2.2 3 4 6.4 6.077 10.128 No DR004A0607 21
VFD022CP4EB-21
VFD037CP43B-21
3.7 5 6 9.6 4.05 6.75 No DR006A0405 31
VFD037CP4EB-21
VFD040CP43A-21
4 5 9 14.4 2.7 4.5 No DR009A0270 40
VFD040CP4EA-21
VFD055CP43B-21
5.5 7.5 10.5 16.8 2.315 3.858 No DR010A0231 50
VFD055CP4EB-21
VFD075CP43B-21
7.5 10 12 19.2 2.025 3.375 No DR012A0202 50
VFD075CP4EB-21
VFD110CP43B-21
11 15 18 28.8 1.35 2.25 No DR018A0117 54
VFD110CP4EB-21
VFD150CP43B-21
15 20 24 38.4 1.01 1.683 No DR024AP881 60
VFD150CP4EB-21
VFD185CP43B-21
18.5 25 32 51.2 0.76 1.267 No DR032AP660 80
VFD185CP4EB-21
VFD220CP43A-21
22 30 38 60.8 0.639 1.065 No DR038AP639 85
VFD220CP4EA-21
VFD300CP43B-21
30 40 45 72 0.541 0.902 No DR045AP541 95
VFD300CP4EB-21
VFD370CP43B-21
37 50 60 96 0.405 0.675 No DR060AP405 100
VFD370CP4EB-21
VFD450CP43S-00
45 60 73 116.8 0.334 0.557 Yes DR073AP334 115
VFD450CP43S-21
VFD550CP43S-00
55 75 91 145.6 0.267 0.445 Yes DR091AP267 130
VFD550CP43S-21
VFD750CP43B-00
75 100 110 176 0.221 0.368 Yes DR110AP221 150
VFD750CP43B-21
VFD900CP43A-00
90 125 150 240 0.162 0.27 Yes DR150AP162 170
VFD900CP43A-21
7-18

Input AC Reactor
Delta Part #
VFD1100CP43A-00
110 150 180 288 0.135 0.225 Yes DR180AP135 190
VFD1100CP43A-21
VFD1320CP43B-00
132 175 220 352 0.11 0.183 Yes DR220AP110 230
VFD1320CP43B-21
VFD1600CP43A-00
160 215 260 416 0.098 0.163 Yes DR260AP098 280
VFD1600CP43A-21
VFD1850CP43B-00
185 250 310 496 0.078 0.13 Yes DR310AP078 300
VFD1850CP43B-21
VFD2000CP43A-00
200 270 335 536 0.072 0.12 Yes DR370AP066*1 340
VFD2000CP43A-21
VFD2200CP43A-00
220 300 370 592 0.066 0.11 Yes DR370AP066 340
VFD2200CP43A-21
VFD2500CP43A-00
250 340 415 664 0.058 0.10 Yes DR460AP054*1 400
VFD2500CP43A-21
VFD2800CP43A-00
280 375 460 736 0.054 0.09 Yes DR460AP054 400
VFD2800CP43A-21
VFD3150CP43A-00
VFD3150CP43C-00 315 420 550 880 0.044 0.073 Yes DR550AP044 430
VFD3150CP43C-21
VFD3550CP43A-00
VFD3550CP43C-00 355 475 616 985.6 0.039 0.065 Yes DR616AP039 450
VFD3550CP43C-21
VFD4000CP43A-00
VFD4000CP43C-00 400 530 683 1092.8 0.036 0.06 Yes DR683AP036 480
VFD4000CP43C-21
VFD5000CP43A-00
VFD5000CP43C-00 500 930 866 1385.6 0.028 0.047 Yes DR866AP028 610
VFD5000CP43C-21
VFD5600CP43A-00
560 750 930 1488 0.026 0.043 Yes
VFD5600CP43C-21
Contact Delta
VFD6300CP43A-00
630 850 1094 1750.4 0.022 0.037 Yes
VFD6300CP43C-21
operation current.
Table 7-22
575 V, 50 / 60 Hz, Three-phase

Rated Current (Arms) Saturation 3% Reactor (mH) 5% Reactor (mH)
Model kW HP Current
Normal Duty Light Duty Normal Duty Light Duty Normal Duty Light Duty
(Arms)
VFD015CP53A-21 1.5 2 2.5 3 4.2 10.567 8.806 17.612 14.677
VFD022CP53A-21 2.2 3 3.6 4.3 5.9 7.338 6.144 12.230 10.239
VFD037CP53A-21 3.7 5 5.5 6.7 9.1 4.803 3.943 8.005 6.572
VFD055CP53A-21 5.5 7.5 8.2 9.9 13.7 3.222 2.668 5.369 4.447
VFD075CP53A-21 7.5 10 10 12.1 16.5 2.642 2.183 4.403 3.639
VFD110CP53A-21 11 15 15.5 18.7 25.7 1.704 1.413 2.841 2.355
VFD150CP53A-21 15 20 20 24.2 33.3 1.321 1.092 2.201 1.819
Table 7-23
7-19
690V, 50 / 60 Hz, Three-phase

Rated Current Saturation Current 3% Impedance 5% Impedance
(Arms) (Arms) (mH) (mH)
Model kW HP Normal
Normal Light Normal Light Light Normal Light
Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty
VFD185CP63A-21 18.5 25 20 24 30.0 28.8 1.902 1.585 3.170 2.642
VFD220CP63A-21 22 30 24 30 36.0 36.0 1.585 1.268 2.642 2.113
VFD300CP63A-21 30 40 30 36 45.0 43.2 1.268 1.057 2.113 1.761
VFD370CP63A-21 37 50 36 45 54.0 54.0 1.057 0.845 1.761 1.409
VFD450CP63A-00/-21 45 60 45 54 67.5 64.8 0.845 0.704 1.409 1.174
VFD550CP63A-00/-21 55 75 54 67 81.0 80.4 0.704 0.568 1.174 0.946
VFD750CP63A-00/-21 75 100 67 86 100.5 103.2 0.568 0.442 0.946 0.737
VFD900CP63A-00/-21 90 125 86 104 129.0 124.8 0.442 0.366 0.737 0.610
VFD1100CP63A-00/-21 110 150 104 125 156.0 150.0 0.366 0.304 0.610 0.507
VFD1320CP63A-00/-21 132 175 125 150 187.5 180.0 0.304 0.254 0.507 0.423
VFD1600CP63A-00/-21 160 215 150 180 225.0 216.0 0.254 0.211 0.423 0.352
VFD2000CP63A-00/-21 200 270 180 220 270.0 264.0 0.211 0.173 0.352 0.288
VFD2500CP63A-00/-21 250 335 220 290 330.0 348.0 0.173 0.131 0.288 0.219
VFD3150CP63A-00/-21 315 425 290 350 435.0 420.0 0.131 0.109 0.219 0.181
VFD4000CP63A-00/-21 400 530 350 430 525.0 516.0 0.109 0.088 0.181 0.147
VFD4500CP63A-00/-21 450 600 385 465 577.5 558.0 0.099 0.082 0.165 0.136
VFD5600CP63A-00/-21 560 745 465 590 697.5 708.0 0.082 0.064 0.136 0.107
VFD6300CP63A-00/-21 630 850 675 675 1012.5 810.0 0.056 0.056 0.094 0.094
Table 7-24
7-20
AC input reactor dimension and specification:
Marking
PE bolt
Tightening torque: 6.1–8.2 kg-cm / [5.3–7.1 lb-in.] / [0.6–0.8 Nm] Tightening torque: F Nm
Figure 7-7
Unit: mm
Input AC reactor
A B C D1*D2 E G1 G2 PE D
Delta part #
DR005A0254 100 115 65 6*9 45 60 40 M4
DR008A0159 100 115 65 6*9 45 60 40 M4
DR011A0115 130 135 95 6*12 60 80.5 60 M4
DR017AP746 130 135 100 6*12 65 80.5 60 M4
Table 7-25
7-21
Installing screw M5
PE screw
Tightening torque: F Nm
Figure 7-8
Unit: mm
Input AC reactor
A B C D1*D2 H G1 G2 PE D
Delta part #
DR025AP215 130 195 100 6*12 65 80.5 60 M4
DR033AP163 130 195 100 6*12 65 80.5 60 M4
DR049AP163 160 200 125 6*12 90 107 75 M4
Table 7-26
7-22
Installing screw M6
PE M6
Tightening torque: 3 ± 1.5 Nm
Figure 7-9
Unit: mm
Input AC reactor
Dimensions
Delta part #
DR065AP162 Refer to the diagram above
Table 7-27
7-23
Terminals: 4 mm2
Tightening torque: 8.2–10.2 kg-cm /
[7.1–8.9 lb-in] / [0.8–1.0 Nm]
PE M8 x 23
Figure 7-10
Unit: mm
Input AC reactor
Dimensions
Delta part #
Table 7-28
7-24
Terminals 4 mm2
Tightening torque: 0.8–1.0 Nm
PE bolt
PE M8x23
Figure 7-11
Unit: mm
Input AC reactor
Dimensions
Delta part #
Table 7-29
7-25
Terminals: 4 mm2
[7.1–8.9 lb-in] / [0.8–1.0 Nm]
PE M8 x 23
Figure 7-12
Unit: mm
Input AC reactor
Dimensions
Delta part #
Table 7-30
7-26
Terminals: 4 mm2
Tightening torque:
6.1–8.2 kg-cm / [5.3–7.1 lb-in] /
[0.6–0.8 Nm]
PE M8 x 23
Figure 7-13
Unit: mm
Input AC reactor
Dimensions
Delta part #
Table 7-31
7-27
Terminals: 4 mm2
Tightening torque:
6.1–8.2 kg-cm / [5.3–7.1 lb-in] / [0.6–0.8 Nm]
PE M8 x 23
Figure 7-14
Unit: mm
Input AC reactor
Dimensions
Delta part #
Table 7-32
7-28
Terminals: 4 mm2
Tightening torque:
6.1–8.2 kg-cm / [5.3–7.1 lb-in] / [0.6–0.8 Nm]
PE M8 x 23
Figure 7-15
Unit: mm
Input AC reactor
Dimensions
Delta part #
Table 7-33
7-29
Terminals: 4 mm2
Tightening torque:
6.1–8.2 kg-cm / [5.3–7.1 lb-in] /
[0.6–0.8 Nm]
PE M8 x 23
Figure 7-16
Unit: mm
Input AC reactor
Dimensions
Delta part #
Table 7-34
7-30
Terminals: 4 mm2
Tightening torque:
6.1–8.2 kg-cm / [5.3–7.1 lb-in] / [0.6–0.8 Nm]
PE M8 x 23
Figure 7-17
Unit: mm
Input AC reactor
Dimensions
Delta part #
Table 7-35
7-31
PE MD
Tightening torque: 6.1–8.2 kg-cm / Tightening torque: F Nm
[5.3–7.1 lb-in] / [0.6–0.8 Nm]
Figure 7-18
Unit: mm
Input AC reactor
Delta part #
DR003A0810 100 125 65 6*9 43 60 40 M4
DR004A0607 100 125 65 6*9 43 60 40 M4
DR006A0405 130 15 95 6*12 60 80.5 60 M4
DR009A0270 160 160 105 6*12 75 107 75 M4
DR010A0231 160 160 115 6*12 90 107 75 M4
DR012A0202 160 160 115 6*12 90 107 75 M4
DR018A0117 160 160 115 6*12 90 107 75 M4
Table 7-36
7-32
Installing screw M5
PE MD
Tightening torque: F Nm
Figure 7-19
Unit: mm
Input AC reactor
Delta part #
DR024AP881 160 175 115 6*12 90 107 75 M4
DR032AP660 195 200 145 6*12 115 122 85 M6
DR038AP639 190 200 145 6*12 115 122 85 M6
DR045AP541 190 200 145 6*12 115 122 85 M6
Table 7-37
7-33
Installing screw M6
PE M6
Figure 7-20
Unit: mm
Input AC reactor
Dimensions
Delta part #
Table 7-38
7-34
Terminals: 4 mm2
[7.1–8.9 lb-in] / [0.8–1.0 Nm]
PE M8 x 23
Figure 7-21
Unit: mm
Input AC reactor
A A1 B B1 B2 C D D1*D2 E C1 G1 G2 H
Delta part #
DR073AP334 228 240 215 40 170 133 8.5 7*13 152 75 176 200 97
DR091AP267 228 240 245 40 195 133 8.8 7*13 152 90 176 200 97
DR110AP221 228 240 245 40 195 138 8.5 7*13 152 75 176 200 102
Table 7-39
7-35
Terminals: 4 mm2
[7.1–8.9 lb-in] / [0.8–1.0 Nm]
PE M8 x 23
Figure 7-22
Unit: mm
Input AC reactor
A A1 B B1 B2 C C1 D D1*D2 F G1 G2 H M*T
Delta part #
DR150AP162 240 250 245 40 200 151 105 9 11*18 160 190 220 125 20*3
DR180AP135 240 250 245 40 200 151 105 9 11*18 160 190 220 125 20*3
DR220AP110 264 270 275 50 230 151 105 9 10*18 176 200 230 106 30*3
DR260AP098 264 270 285 50 240 151 105 9 10*18 176 200 230 106 30*3
DR310AP078 300 300 345 55 295 153 105 9 10*18 200 224 260 113 30*3
DR370AP066 300 300 345 55 295 158 120 9 10*18 200 224 260 118 50*4
Table 7-40
7-36
PE M8 x 23
Tightening torque:
6 ± 0.3 Nm
Terminals: 4 mm2
[7.1–8.9 lb-in] / [0.8–1.0 Nm]
Figure 7-23
Unit: mm
Input AC reactor
A A1 B B1 B2 C C1 D1*D2 E G1 G2 H M*T
Delta part #
DR460AP054 300 300 425 95 355 220 170 11*21 200 240 300 190 50*4
DR550AP044 300 300 445 95 375 220 170 11*21 200 240 300 190 50*4
DR616AP039 360 360 465 105 385 252 190 11*21 240 246 316 220 50*5
DR683AP036 360 360 465 105 385 252 195 11*21 240 246 316 220 50*5
DR866AP028 360 360 520 105 435 272 200 11*21 240 246 316 240 60*6
Table 7-41
7-37
DC Reactor
A DC reactor can also increase line impedance, improve the power factor, reduce input current,
increase system power, and reduce interference generated from the motor drive. A DC reactor stabilizes
the DC bus voltage. Compared with an AC input reactor, a DC reactor is in smaller size, lower price, and
lower voltage drop (lower power dissipation)
Installation
Install a DC reactor between terminals +2/DC+ and +1/DC+. Remove the jumper, as shown in the
figure below, before installing a DC reactor.
Figure 7-24
Wiring of DC reactor
Specifications of DC reactors (standard item)

The following table shows the specifications of DC reactors (standard items) for Delta CP2000 series
products.
200V–230V, 50 / 60 Hz
Saturation
Rated Current DC Reactor DC Reactor
Current
(Arms) (mH) Delta Part #
Model kW HP (Arms)
Normal Light Normal Light Normal Light
Normal Duty Light Duty
Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty Duty
VFD007CP23A-21 0.75 1 4.6 5 7.36 6 6.366 5.857 DR005D0585* DR005D0585
VFD015CP23A-21 1.5 2 5 7.5 8 9 5.857 3.66 DR005D0585 DR008D0366
VFD022CP23A-21 2.2 3 8 10 12.8 12 3.66 2.662 DR008D0366 DR011D0266
VFD037CP23A-21 3.7 5 11 15 17.6 18 2.662 1.722 DR011D0266 DR017D0172
VFD055CP23A-21 5.5 7.5 17 21 27.2 25.2 1.722 1.172 DR017D0172 DR025D0117
VFD075CP23A-21 7.5 10 25 31 40 37.2 1.172 0.851 DR025D0117 DR033DP851
VFD110CP23A-21 11 15 33 46 52.8 55.2 0.851 0.574 DR033DP851 DR049DP574
VFD150CP23A-21 15 20 49 61 78.4 73.2 0.574 0.432 DR049DP574 DR065DP432
VFD185CP23A-21 18.5 25 65 75 104 90 0.432 0.391 DR065DP432 DR075DP391
VFD220CP23A-21 22 30 75 90 120 108 0.391 0.325 DR075DP391 DR090DP325
VFD300CP23A-21 30 40 90 105 144 126 0.325 0.244 DR090DP325 Contact Delta
*Note 1: Use with DR005D0585, but the inductance value will be 3% short.
Table 7-42
7-38
380V–460V, 50 / 60 Hz
Saturation
Rated Current DC Reactor DC Reactor
Current
(Arms) (mH) Delta Part #
Model kW HP (Arms)
Normal Light Normal Light Normal Light
Normal Duty Light Duty
VFD007CP43A-21/4EA-21 0.75 1 2.8 3 4.48 3.6 20.918 18.709 DR003D1870* DR003D1870
VFD015CP43B-21/4EB-21 1.5 2 3 4.2 4.8 5.04 18.709 14.031 DR003D1870 DR004D1403
VFD022CP43B-21/4EB-21 2.2 3 4 5.5 6.4 6.6 14.031 9.355 DR004D1403 DR006D0935
VFD037CP43B-21/4EB-21 3.7 5 6 8.5 9.6 10.2 9.355 6.236 DR006D0935 DR009D0623
VFD040CP43A-21/4EA-21 4 5 9 10.5 14.4 12.6 6.236 5.345 DR009D0623 DR010D0534
VFD055CP43B-21/4EB-21 5.5 7.5 10.5 13 16.8 15.6 5.345 4.677 DR010D0534 DR012D0467
VFD075CP43B-21/4EB-21 7.5 10 12 18 19.2 21.6 4.677 3.119 DR012D0467 DR018D0311
VFD110CP43B-21/4EB-21 11 15 18 24 28.8 28.8 3.119 2.338 DR018D0311 DR024D0233
VFD150CP43B-21/4EB-21 15 20 24 32 38.4 38.4 2.338 1.754 DR024D0233 DR032D0175
VFD185CP43B-21/4EB-21 18.5 25 32 38 51.2 45.6 1.754 1.477 DR032D0175 DR038D0147
VFD220CP43A-21/4EA-21 22 30 38 45 60.8 54 1.477 1.247 DR038D0147 DR045D0124
VFD300CP43B-21/4EB-21 30 40 45 60 72 72 1.247 0.935 DR045D0124 DR060DP935
VFD370CP43B-21/4EB-21 37 50 60 73 96 87.6 0.935 0.768 DR060DP935 Contact Delta
*Note 1: Use with DR003D1870, but the inductance value will be 3% short.
Table 7-43
575 V, 50 / 60 Hz, Three-phase

Rated Current (Arms) Saturation DC Reactor (mH)
Model kW HP Current
Normal Duty Light Duty Normal Duty Light Duty
(Arms)
VFD015CP53A-21 1.5 2 2.5 3 4.2 29.284 24.404
VFD022CP53A-21 2.2 3 3.6 4.3 5.9 20.336 17.027
VFD037CP53A-21 3.7 5 5.5 6.7 9.1 13.310 10.927
VFD055CP53A-21 5.5 7.5 8.2 9.9 13.7 8.929 7.394
VFD075CP53A-21 7.5 10 10 12.1 16.5 7.322 6.050
VFD110CP53A-21 11 15 15.5 18.7 25.7 4.722 3.916
VFD150CP53A-21 15 20 20 24.2 33.3 3.661 3.026

Table 7-44

Rated Current (Arms) Saturation Current (Arms) DC Reactor (mH)
Model kW HP Normal Light Normal Light Normal Light
VFD185CP63A-21 18.5 25 20 24 30.0 28.8 4.392 3.660
VFD220CP63A-21 22 30 24 30 36.0 36.0 3.660 2.928
VFD300CP63A-21 30 40 30 36 45.0 43.2 2.928 2.441
VFD370CP63A-21 37 50 36 45 54.0 54.0 2.441 1.951
VFD450CP63A-00/-21 45 60 45 54 67.5 64.8 1.951 1.626
VFD550CP63A-00/-21 55 75 54 67 81.0 80.4 1.626 1.312
VFD750CP63A-00/-21 75 100 67 86 100.5 103.2 1.312 1.021
VFD900CP63A-00/-21 90 125 86 104 129.0 124.8 1.021 0.845
VFD1100CP63A-00/-21 110 150 104 125 156.0 150.0 0.845 0.702
VFD1320CP63A-00/-21 132 175 125 150 187.5 180.0 0.702 0.587
VFD1600CP63A-00/-21 160 215 150 180 225.0 216.0 0.587 0.487
7-39
Rated Current (Arms) Saturation Current (Arms) DC Reactor (mH)

Model kW HP Normal Light Normal Light Normal Light
VFD2000CP63A-00/-21 200 270 180 220 270.0 264.0 0.487 0.400
VFD2500CP63A-00/-21 250 335 220 290 330.0 348.0 0.400 0.303
VFD3150CP63A-00/-21 315 425 290 350 435.0 420.0 0.303 0.252
VFD4000CP63A-00/-21 400 530 350 430 525.0 516.0 0.252 0.203
VFD4500CP63A-00/-21 450 600 385 465 577.5 558.0 0.229 0.189
VFD5600CP63A-00/-21 560 745 465 590 697.5 708.0 0.189 0.148
VFD6300CP63A-00/-21 630 850 675 675 1012.5 810.0 0.129 0.129
Table 7-45
7-40
DC reactor dimension and specification:
R
D
B
Figure 7-25
DC reactor A B C D E
Dimensions [mm]
Delta part # [mm) [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
DR005D0585 79 78 112 64 ± 2 56 ± 2 9.5*5.5
DR008D0366 79 78 112 64 ± 2 56 ± 2 9.5*5.5
DR011D0266 79 92 112 64 ± 2 69.5 ± 2 9.5*5.5
DR017D0172 79 112 112 64 ± 2 89.5 ± 2 9.5*5.5
DR025D0117 99 105 128 79 ± 2 82.5 ± 2 9.5*5.5
DR033DP851 117 110 156 95 ± 2 87 ± 2 10*6.5
DR049DP574 117 120 157 95 ± 2 97 ± 2 10*6.5
DR065DP432 117 140 157 95 ± 2 116.5 ± 2 10*6.5
DR075DP391 136 135 178 111 ± 2 112 ± 2 10*6.5
DR090DP325 136 135 179 111 ± 2 112 ± 2 10*6.5
DR003D1870 79 78 112 64 ± 2 56 ± 2 9.5*5.5
DR004D1403 79 92 112 64 ± 2 69.5 ± 2 9.5*5.5
DR006D0935 79 92 112 64 ± 2 69.5 ± 2 9.5*5.5
DR009D0623 79 112 112 64 ± 2 89.5 ± 2 9.5*5.5
DR010D0534 99 93 128 79 ± 2 70 ± 2 9.5*5.5
DR012D0467 99 105 128 79 ± 2 82.5 ± 2 9.5*5.5
DR018D0311 117 110 144 95 ± 2 87 ± 2 10*6.5
DR024D0233 117 120 144 95 ± 2 97 ± 2 10*6.5
DR032D0175 117 140 157 95 ± 2 116.5 ± 2 10*6.5
DR038D0147 136 135 172 111 ± 2 112 ± 2 10*6.5
DR045D0124 136 135 173 111 ± 2 112 ± 2 10*6.5
DR060DP935 136 150 173 111 ± 2 127 ± 2 10*6.5
Table 7-46
7-41
The table below shows the THDi specification when using Delta’s drives to work with AC/DC reactors:
Models without Built-in DC Reactor Models with Built-in DC Reactor
Current No Input
Harmonic No AC/DC 3% Input AC 5% Input AC 4% DC 3% Input AC 5% Input AC
AC
Reactor Reactor Reactor Reactor Reactor Reactor
Reactor
5th 73.3% 38.5% 30.8% 25.5% 31.16% 27.01% 25.5%
7th 52.74% 15.3% 9.4% 18.6% 23.18% 9.54% 8.75%
11th 7.28% 7.1% 6.13% 7.14% 8.6% 4.5% 4.2%
13th 0.4% 3.75% 3.15% 0.48% 7.9% 0.22% 0.17%
THDi 91% 43.6% 34.33% 38.2% 42.28% 30.5% 28.4%
The THDi specification listed here may be slightly different from the actual THDi, depending on the installation
Note
and environmental conditions (wires, motors).
Table 7-47
AC Output Reactor
When using drives in long wiring output application, ground fault (GFF), over-current (oc) and motor
over-voltage (ov) often occur. GFF and OC cause errors due to the drive’s self-protective mechanism;
over-voltage damages motor insulation.
The excessive length of the output wires makes the grounded stray capacitance too large, increase
the three-phase output common mode current, and the reflected wave of the long wires makes the motor
dv / dt and the motor terminal voltage too high. Thus, installing a reactor on the drive’s output side can
increase the high-frequency impedance to reduce the dv / dt and terminal voltage to protect the motor.
Installation
Install an AC output reactor in series between the three output phases U V W and the motor, as
shown in the figure below:
Wiring of AC output reactor Figure 7-26
7-42
Specifications of AC output reactors (standard item)

Following tables show the standard AC output reactors specification of Delta CP2000:
200V–230V, 50 / 60 Hz, Light Duty

Rated Saturation 3% 5% Output AC Heat
Built-in
Model kW HP Current Current Reactor Reactor Reactor Delta Dissipation
DC Reactor
(Arms) (Arms) (mH) (mH) Part # (W)
VFD007CP23A-21 0.75 1 5 6 2.536 4.227 No DR005L0254 15
VFD015CP23A-21 1.5 2 7.5 9 1.585 2.642 No DR008L0159 30
VFD022CP23A-21 2.2 3 10 12 1.152 1.92 No DR011L0115 33
VFD037CP23A-21 3.7 5 15 18 0.746 1.243 No DR017LP746 34
VFD055CP23A-21 5.5 7.5 21 25.2 0.507 0.845 No DR025LP507 50
VFD075CP23A-21 7.5 10 31 37.2 0.38 0.633 No DR033LP320 50
VFD110CP23A-21 11 15 46 55.2 0.26 0.433 No DR049LP215 62
VFD150CP23A-21 15 20 61 73.2 0.196 0.327 No DR065LP162 70
VFD185CP23A-21 18.5 25 75 90 0.169 0.282 No DR075LP170 80
VFD220CP23A-21 22 30 90 108 0.141 0.235 No DR090LP141 80
VFD300CP23A-21 30 40 105 126 0.12 0.2 No DR105LP106 95
VFD370CP23A-00
37 50 146 175.2 0.087 0.145 Yes DR146LP087 110
VFD370CP23A-21
VFD450CP23A-00
45 60 180 216 0.07 0.117 Yes DR180LP070 125
VFD450CP23A-21
VFD550CP23A-00
55 75 215 258 0.059 0.098 Yes DR215LP059 150
VFD550CP23A-21
VFD750CP23A-00
75 100 276 331.2 0.049 0.082 Yes DR276LP049 210
VFD750CP23A-21
VFD900CP23A-00
90 125 322 386.4 0.037 0.062 Yes DR346LP037 220
VFD900CP23A-21
Table 7-48

Built-in
DC Reactor
VFD007CP23A-21 0.75 1 4.6 7.36 2.536 4.227 No DR005L0254 15
VFD015CP23A-21 1.5 2 5 8 2.536 4.227 No DR005L0254 15
VFD022CP23A-21 2.2 3 8 12.8 1.585 2.642 No DR008L0159 30
VFD037CP23A-21 3.7 5 11 17.6 1.152 1.92 No DR011L0115 33
VFD055CP23A-21 5.5 7.5 17 27.2 0.746 1.243 No DR017LP746 34
VFD075CP23A-21 7.5 10 25 40 0.507 0.845 No DR025LP507 50
VFD110CP23A-21 11 15 33 52.8 0.38 0.633 No DR033LP320 50
VFD150CP23A-21 15 20 49 78.4 0.26 0.433 No DR049LP215 62
VFD185CP23A-21 18.5 25 65 104 0.196 0.327 No DR065LP162 70
VFD220CP23A-21 22 30 75 120 0.169 0.282 No DR075LP170 80
VFD300CP23A-21 30 40 90 144 0.141 0.235 No DR090LP141 80
VFD370CP23A-00
37 50 120 192 0.12 0.2 Yes DR105LP106 95
VFD370CP23A-21
VFD450CP23A-00
45 60 146 233.6 0.087 0.145 Yes DR146LP087 110
VFD450CP23A-21
VFD550CP23A-00
55 75 180 288 0.07 0.117 Yes DR180LP070 125
VFD550CP23A-21
VFD750CP23A-00
75 100 215 344 0.059 0.098 Yes DR215LP059 150
VFD750CP23A-21
VFD900CP23A-00
90 125 255 408 0.049 0.082 Yes DR276LP049 210
VFD900CP23A-21
Table 7-49
7-43
380V–460V, 50 / 60 Hz, Light Duty

Built-in
DC Reactor
VFD007CP43A-21
0.75 1 3 3.6 8.102 13.503 No DR003L0810 13
VFD007CP4EA-21
VFD015CP43B-21
1.5 2 4.2 5.04 6.077 10.128 No DR004L0607 18
VFD015CP4EB-21
VFD022CP43B-21
2.2 3 5.5 6.6 4.050 6.75 No DR006L0405 22
VFD022CP4EB-21
VFD037CP43B-21
3.7 5 8.5 10.2 2.700 4.5 No DR009L0270 35
VFD037CP4EB-21
VFD040CP43A-21
4 5 10.5 12.6 2.315 3.858 No DR010L0231 40
VFD040CP4EA-21
VFD055CP43B-21
5.5 7.5 13 15.6 2.025 3.375 No DR012L0202 45
VFD055CP4EB-21
VFD075CP43B-21
7.5 10 18 21.6 1.35 2.25 No DR018L0117 48
VFD075CP4EB-21
VFD110CP43B-21
11 15 24 28.8 1.01 1.683 No DR024LP881 52
VFD110CP4EB-21
VFD150CP43B-21
15 20 32 38.4 0.76 1.267 No DR032LP660 66
VFD150CP4EB-21
VFD185CP43B-21
18.5 25 38 45.6 0.639 1.065 No DR038LP639 70
VFD185CP4EB-21
VFD220CP43A-21
22 30 45 54 0.541 0.902 No DR045LP541 85
VFD220CP4EA-21
VFD300CP43B-21
30 40 60 72 0.405 0.675 No DR060LP405 85
VFD300CP4EB-21
VFD370CP43B-21
37 50 73 87.6 0.334 0.557 No DR073LP334 110
VFD370CP4EB-21
VFD450CP43S-00
45 60 91 109.2 0.267 0.445 Yes DR091LP267 130
VFD450CP43S-21
VFD550CP43S-00
55 75 110 132 0.221 0.368 Yes DR110LP221 150
VFD550CP43S-21
VFD750CP43B-00
75 100 150 180 0.162 0.27 Yes DR150LP162 175
VFD750CP43B-21
VFD900CP43A-00
90 125 180 216 0.135 0.225 Yes DR180LP135 195
VFD900CP43A-21
VFD1100CP43A-00
110 150 220 264 0.110 0.183 Yes DR220LP110 235
VFD1100CP43A-21
VFD1320CP43B-00
132 175 260 312 0.098 0.163 Yes DR260LP098 285
VFD1320CP43B-21
VFD1600CP43A-00
160 215 310 372 0.078 0.13 Yes DR310LP078 300
VFD1600CP43A-21
VFD1850CP43B-00
185 250 370 444 0.066 0.11 Yes DR370LP066 345
VFD1850CP43B-21
VFD2000CP43A-00
200 270 395 474 0.061 0.1 Yes DR370LP066*1 410
VFD2000CP43A-21
VFD2200CP43A-00
220 300 460 552 0.054 0.09 Yes DR460LP054 410
VFD2200CP43A-21
VFD2500CP43A-00
250 340 481 578 0.052 0.086 Yes DR460LP054*1 440
VFD2500CP43A-21
7-44

Built-in
DC Reactor
VFD2800CP43A-00
280 375 530 636 0.044 0.073 Yes DR550LP044 440
VFD2800CP43A-21
VFD3150CP43A-00
VFD3150CP43C-00 315 420 616 739.2 0.039 0.065 Yes DR616LP039 465
VFD3150CP43C-21
VFD3550CP43A-00
VFD3550CP43C-00 355 475 683 819.6 0.036 0.06 Yes DR683LP036 495
VFD3550CP43C-21
VFD4000CP43A-00
VFD4000CP43C-00 400 530 770 924 0.028 0.047 Yes DR866LP028 600
VFD4000CP43C-21
VFD5000CP43A-00
VFD5000CP43C-00 500 675 912 1094.4 0.028 0.047 Yes DR866LP028 600
VFD5000CP43C-21
VFD5600CP43A-00
560 650 1094 1318.2 0.022 0.037 Yes
VFD5600CP43C-21
Contact Delta
VFD6300CP43A-00
630 760 1212 1454.4 0.020 0.033 Yes
VFD6300CP43C-21
operation current.
Table 7-50

Built-in
DC Reactor
VFD007CP43A-21
0.75 1 2.8 4.48 9.058 15.097 No DR003L0810*1 13
VFD007CP4EA-21
VFD015CP43B-21
1.5 2 3 4.8 8.102 13.503 No DR003L0810 13
VFD015CP4EB-21
VFD022CP43B-21
2.2 3 4 6.4 6.077 10.128 No DR004L0607 18
VFD022CP4EB-21
VFD037CP43B-21
3.7 5 6 9.6 4.050 6.75 No DR006L0405 22
VFD037CP4EB-21
VFD040CP43A-21
4 5 9 14.4 2.700 4.5 No DR009L0270 35
VFD040CP4EA-21
VFD055CP43B-21
5.5 7.5 10.5 16.8 2.315 3.858 No DR010L0231 40
VFD055CP4EB-21
VFD075CP43B-21
7.5 10 12 19.2 2.025 3.375 No DR012L0202 45
VFD075CP4EB-21
VFD110CP43B-21
11 15 18 28.8 1.35 2.25 No DR018L0117 48
VFD110CP4EB-21
VFD150CP43B-21
15 20 24 38.4 1.01 1.683 No DR024LP881 52
VFD150CP4EB-21
VFD185CP43B-21
18.5 25 32 51.2 0.76 1.267 No DR032LP660 66
VFD185CP4EB-21
VFD220CP43A-21
22 30 38 60.8 0.639 1.065 No DR038LP639 70
VFD220CP4EA-21
VFD300CP43B-21
30 40 45 72 0.541 0.902 No DR045LP541 85
VFD300CP4EB-21
7-45

Built-in
DC Reactor
VFD370CP43B-21
37 50 60 96 0.405 0.675 No DR060LP405 85
VFD370CP4EB-21
VFD450CP43S-00
45 60 73 116.8 0.334 0.557 Yes DR073LP334 110
VFD450CP43S-21
VFD550CP43S-00
55 75 91 145.6 0.267 0.445 Yes DR091LP267 130
VFD550CP43S-21
VFD750CP43B-00
75 100 110 176 0.221 0.368 Yes DR110LP221 150
VFD750CP43B-21
VFD900CP43A-00
90 125 150 240 0.162 0.27 Yes DR150LP162 175
VFD900CP43A-21
VFD1100CP43A-00
110 150 180 288 0.135 0.225 Yes DR180LP135 195
VFD1100CP43A-21
VFD1320CP43B-00
132 175 220 352 0.110 0.183 Yes DR220LP110 235
VFD1320CP43B-21
VFD1600CP43A-00
160 215 260 416 0.098 0.163 Yes DR260LP098 285
VFD1600CP43A-21
VFD1850CP43B-00
185 250 310 496 0.078 0.13 Yes DR310LP078 300
VFD1850CP43B-21
VFD2000CP43A-00
200 270 335 536 0.072 0.12 Yes DR370LP066*1 345
VFD2000CP43A-21
VFD2200CP43A-00
220 300 370 592 0.066 0.11 Yes DR370LP066 345
VFD2200CP43A-21
VFD2500CP43A-00
250 340 415 664 0.058 0.10 Yes DR460LP054*1 410
VFD2500CP43A-21
VFD2800CP43A-00
280 375 460 736 0.054 0.09 Yes DR460LP054 410
VFD2800CP43A-21
VFD3150CP43A-00
VFD3150CP43C-00 315 420 550 880 0.044 0.073 Yes DR550LP044 440
VFD3150CP43C-21
VFD3550CP43A-00
VFD3550CP43C-00 355 475 616 985.6 0.039 0.065 Yes DR616LP039 465
VFD3550CP43C-21
VFD4000CP43A-00
VFD4000CP43C-00 400 530 683 1092.8 0.036 0.06 Yes DR683LP036 495
VFD4000CP43C-21
VFD5000CP43A-00
VFD5000CP43C-00 500 675 866 1385.6 0.028 0.047 Yes DR866LP028 600
VFD5000CP43C-21
VFD5600CP43A-00
560 650 930 1488 0.026 0.043 Yes
VFD5600CP43C-21
Contact Delta
VFD6300CP43A-00
630 760 1094 1750.4 0.022 0.037 Yes
VFD6300CP43C-21
operation current.
Table 7-51
7-46

Rated Current (Arms) Saturation 3% Reactor (mH) 5% Reactor (mH)
Model kW HP Normal Current Normal Normal
Light Duty (Arms) Light Duty Light Duty
Duty Duty Duty
VFD015CP53A-21 1.5 2 2.5 3 4.2 10.567 8.806 17.612 14.677
VFD022CP53A-21 2.2 3 3.6 4.3 5.9 7.338 6.144 12.230 10.239
VFD037CP53A-21 3.7 5 5.5 6.7 9.1 4.803 3.943 8.005 6.572
VFD055CP53A-21 5.5 7.5 8.2 9.9 13.7 3.222 2.668 5.369 4.447
VFD075CP53A-21 7.5 10 10 12.1 16.5 2.642 2.183 4.403 3.639
VFD110CP53A-21 11 15 15.5 18.7 25.7 1.704 1.413 2.841 2.355
VFD150CP53A-21 15 20 20 24.2 33.3 1.321 1.092 2.201 1.819
Table 7-52
Rated Current Saturation Current 3% Reactor 5% Reactor
Model kW HP (Arms) (Arms) (mH) (mH)

Normal Normal Normal Normal
Light Duty Light Duty Light Duty Light Duty
Duty Duty Duty Duty
VFD185CP63A-21 18.5 25 20 24 30.0 28.8 1.902 1.585 3.170 2.642
VFD220CP63A-21 22 30 24 30 36.0 36.0 1.585 1.268 2.642 2.113
VFD300CP63A-21 30 40 30 36 45.0 43.2 1.268 1.057 2.113 1.761
VFD370CP63A-21 37 50 36 45 54.0 54.0 1.057 0.845 1.761 1.409
VFD450CP63A-00/-21 45 60 45 54 67.5 64.8 0.845 0.704 1.409 1.174
VFD550CP63A-00/-21 55 75 54 67 81.0 80.4 0.704 0.568 1.174 0.946
VFD750CP63A-00/-21 75 100 67 86 100.5 103.2 0.568 0.442 0.946 0.737
VFD900CP63A-00/-21 90 125 86 104 129.0 124.8 0.442 0.366 0.737 0.610
VFD1100CP63A-00/-21 110 150 104 125 156.0 150.0 0.366 0.304 0.610 0.507
VFD1320CP63A-00/-21 132 175 125 150 187.5 180.0 0.304 0.254 0.507 0.423
VFD1600CP63A-00/-21 160 215 150 180 225.0 216.0 0.254 0.211 0.423 0.352
VFD2000CP63A-00/-21 200 270 180 220 270.0 264.0 0.211 0.173 0.352 0.288
VFD2500CP63A-00/-21 250 335 220 290 330.0 348.0 0.173 0.131 0.288 0.219
VFD3150CP63A-00/-21 315 425 290 350 435.0 420.0 0.131 0.109 0.219 0.181
VFD4000CP63A-00/-21 400 530 350 430 525.0 516.0 0.109 0.088 0.181 0.147
VFD4500CP63A-00/-21 450 600 385 465 577.5 558.0 0.099 0.082 0.165 0.136
VFD5600CP63A-00/-21 560 745 465 590 697.5 708.0 0.082 0.064 0.136 0.107
VFD6300CP63A-00/-21 630 850 675 675 1012.5 810.0 0.056 0.056 0.094 0.094
Table 7-53
7-47
AC output reactor dimensions and specification:
PE Screw
Torque: 10.2–12.3 kg-cm / [8.9–10.6 lb-in] /
Torque: 6.1–8.2 kg-cm / [5.3–7.1 lb-in] / [0.6–0.8 Nm] [1.0–1.2 Nm]
Screw length must

not interfere with
the mounting holes
Figure 7-27
Unit: mm
Output AC Reactor
A B C D1*D2 E G1 G2 PE D
Delta Part #
DR005L0254 96 110 70 6*9 42 60 40 M4
DR008L0159 120 135 96 6*12 60 80.5 60 M4
DR011L0115 120 135 96 6*12 60 80.5 60 M4
DR017LP746 120 135 105 6*12 65 80.5 60 M4
DR025LP507 150 160 120 6*12 88 107 75 M4
DR033LP320 150 160 120 6*12 88 107 75 M4
Table 7-54
7-48
Terminals: 16 mm2
Screw length must

not interfere with the
mounting holes
Figure 7-28
Unit: mm
Output AC Reactor
A B C D1*D2 H G G1 Q M PE D
Delta Part #
DR049LP215 180 205 175 6*12 115 85 122 16 1.2–1.4 M4
DR065LP162 180 215 185 6*12 115 85 122 35 2.5–3.0 M4
Table 7-55
7-49
Figure 7-29
Unit: mm
Output AC Reactor
A A1 B B1 B2 C C1 D1*D2 E G1 H M*T
Delta Part #
DR075LP170 240 228 215 44 170 151 100 7*13 152 176 85 20*3
DR090LP141 240 228 215 44 170 151 100 7*13 152 176 85 20*3
DR105LP106 240 228 215 44 170 165 110 7*13 152 176 97 20*3
DR146LP087 240 228 240 45 202 165 110 7*13 152 176 97 30*3
DR180LP070 250 240 250 46 205 175 110 11*18 160 190 124 30*5
DR215LP059 250 240 275 51 226 180 120 11*18 160 190 124 30*5
Table 7-56
7-50
Figure 7-30
Unit: mm
Output AC Reactor
A A1 B B1 B2 C C1 D1*D2 E H M*T
Delta Part #
DR276LP049 270 260 320 50 265 200 140 10*18 176 106 30*5
DR346LP037 270 265 340 50 285 200 140 10*18 176 106 30*5
Table 7-57
7-51
PE screw
Torque: 10.2–12.3 kg-cm / [8.9–10.6 lb-in] /
Torque: 6.1–8.2 kg-cm / [5.3–7.1 lb-in] / [0.6–0.8 Nm]
[1.0–1.2 Nm]
Screw length must

mounting holes
Figure 7-31
Unit: mm
Output AC Reactor
Delta Part #
DR003L0810 96 115 65 6*9 42 60 40 M4
DR004L0607 120 135 95 6*12 60 80.5 60 M4
DR006L0405 120 135 95 6*12 60 80.5 60 M4
DR009L0270 150 160 100 6*12 74 107 75 M4
DR010L0231 150 160 115 6*12 88 107 75 M4
DR012L0202 150 160 115 6*12 88 107 75 M4
DR018L0117 150 160 115 6*12 88 107 75 M4
DR024LP881 150 160 115 6*12 88 107 75 M4
DR032LP660 180 190 145 6*12 114 122 85 M6
Table 7-58
7-52
Terminals: 16 mm2
Screw length must

mounting holes
Figure 7-32
Unit: mm
Output AC Reactor
Delta Part #
DR038LP639 180 205 170 6*12 115 85 122 M4
DR045LP541 235 245 155 7*13 85 / 176 M6
Table 7-59
7-53
Figure 7-33
Unit: mm
Output AC Reactor
Delta Part #
DR060LP405 240 228 215 44 170 163 110 7*13 152 176 97 20*3
DR073LP334 250 235 235 44 186 174 115 11*18 160 190 124 20*3
DR091LP267 250 240 235 44 186 174 115 11*18 160 190 124 20*3
DR110LP221 270 260 245 50 192 175 115 10*18 176 200 106 20*3
Table 7-60
7-54
Figure 7-34
Unit: mm
Output AC Reactor
A A1 B B1 B2 C C1 D1*D2 E G1 G2 H M*T
Delta Part #
DR150LP162 270 264 265 51 208 192 125 10*18 176 200 / 118 30*3
DR180LP135 300 295 310 55 246 195 125 11*22 200 230 190 142 30*3
DR220LP110 300 298 310 57 248 210 140 11*22 200 230 190 142 30*5
DR260LP098 300 295 330 56 270 227 140 11*22 200 230 190 160 30*5
DR310LP078 300 298 350 54 288 233 145 11*22 200 230 190 160 30*5
DR370LP066 300 298 350 54 289 268 170 11*22 200 230 190 185 40*5
Table 7-61
7-55
Figure 7-35
Unit: mm
Output AC Reactor
Delta Part #
DR460LP054 360 355 510 106 401 346 215 12*20 240 240 240 50*5
DR550LP044 360 355 510 106 401 358 220 12*20 240 240 250 50*5
DR616LP039 360 355 510 110 401 376 230 12*20 240 240 270 50*8
DR683LP036 360 355 510 110 401 396 240 12*20 240 240 290 50*8
DR866LP028 410 418 570 120 464 402 245 12*20 280 280 290 50*8
Table 7-62
7-56
Motor Cable Length
1. Consequence of leakage current on the motor

If the cable length is too long, the stray capacitance between cables increases an may cause
leakage current. In this case, it activates the over-current protection, increases leakage current, or
may affect the current display. The worst case is that it may damage the AC motor drive. If more than
one motor is connected to one AC motor drive, the total wiring length should be the sum of the wiring
length from AC motor drive to each motor.
For the 460V models AC motor drives, when you install an overload thermal relay between the
drive and the motor to protect the motor from overheating, the connecting cable must be shorter than
50m, however, an overload thermal relay malfunction may still occur. To prevent the malfunction,
install an output reactor (optional) to the drive or lower the carrier frequency setting (see Pr.00-17
Carrier Frequency).
2. Consequence of the surge voltage on the motor

When a motor is driven by a PWM-type AC motor drive, the motor terminals experience surge
voltages (dv/dt) due to power transistor conversion of AC motor drive. When the motor cable is very
long (especially for the 460V models), surge voltages (dv/dt) may damage the motor insulation and
bearing. To prevent this, follow these rules:
a. Use a motor with enhanced insulation.
b. Reduce the cable length between the AC motor drive and motor to suggested values.
c. Connect an output reactor (optional) to the output terminals of the AC motor drive.
Refer to the following tables for the suggested motor shielded cable length. For drive models < 490V,
use a motor with a rated voltage ≤ 500 VAC and an insulation level ≥ 1.35 kV in accordance with IEC
60034-17.
Rated Current Without an AC Output
With an AC Output Reactor
(Arms) Reactor
230V
kW HP Shielded Shielded
Model Normal Light Duty Non-shielded Non-shielded
Cable Cable
Duty (ND) (LD) Cable [meter] Cable [meter]
[meter] [meter]
VFD007CP23A-21 0.75 1 4.6 5 50 75 75 115
VFD015CP23A-21 1.5 2 5 7.5 50 75 75 115
VFD022CP23A-21 2.2 3 8 10 50 75 75 115
VFD037CP23A-21 3.7 5 11 15 50 75 75 115
VFD055CP23A-21 5.5 7.5 17 21 100 150 150 225
VFD075CP23A-21 7.5 10 25 31 100 150 150 225
VFD110CP23A-21 11 15 33 46 100 150 150 225
VFD150CP23A-21 15 20 49 61 100 150 150 225
VFD185CP23A-21 18.5 25 65 75 100 150 150 225
VFD220CP23A-21 22 30 75 90 100 150 150 225
VFD300CP23A-21 30 40 90 120 100 150 150 225
VFD370CP23A-00/-21 37 50 120 146 100 150 150 225
VFD450CP23A-00/-21 45 60 146 180 150 225 225 325
VFD550CP23A-00/-21 55 75 180 215 150 225 225 325
VFD750CP23A-00/-21 75 100 215 276 150 225 225 325
VFD900CP23A-00/-21 90 125 255 322 150 225 225 325
Table 7-63
7-57
Rated Current Without an AC Output

With an AC Output Reactor
(Arms) Reactor
460V
kW HP Normal Shielded Shielded
Model Light Duty Non-shielded Non-shielded
Duty Cable Cable
(LD) Cable [meter] Cable [meter]
(ND) [meter] [meter]
VFD007CP43A-21/4EA-21 0.75 1 1.7 3 50 75 75 115
VFD015CP43B-21/4EB-21 1.5 2 3 4.2 50 75 75 115
VFD022CP43B-21/4EB-21 2.2 3 4 5.5 50 75 75 115
VFD037CP43B-21/4EB-21 3.7 5 6 8.5 50 75 75 115
VFD040CP43A-21/4EA-21 4 5 9 10.5 50 75 75 115
VFD055CP43B-21/4EB-21 5.5 7.5 10.5 13 50 75 75 115
VFD075CP43B-21/4EB-21 7.5 10 12 18 100 150 150 225
VFD110CP43B-21/4EB-21 11 15 18 24 100 150 150 225
VFD150CP43B-21/4EB-21 15 20 24 32 100 150 150 225
VFD185CP43B-21/4EB-21 18.5 25 32 38 100 150 150 225
VFD220CP43A-21/4EA-21 22 30 38 45 100 150 150 225
VFD300CP43B-21/4EB-21 30 40 45 60 100 150 150 225
VFD370CP43B-21/4EB-21 37 50 60 73 100 150 150 225
VFD450CP43S-00/43S-21 45 60 73 91 150 225 225 325
VFD550CP43S-00/43S-21 55 75 91 110 150 225 225 325
VFD750CP43B-00/43B-21 75 100 110 150 150 225 225 325
VFD900CP43A-00/43A-21 90 125 150 180 150 225 225 325
VFD1100CP43A-00/43A-21 110 150 180 220 150 225 225 325
VFD1320CP43B-00/43B-21 132 175 220 260 150 225 225 325
VFD1600CP43A-00/43A-21 160 215 260 310 150 225 225 325
VFD1850CP43B-00/43B-21 185 250 310 370 150 225 225 325
VFD2000CP43A-00/43A-21 200 270 335 395 150 225 225 325
VFD2200CP43A-00/43A-21 220 300 370 460 150 225 225 325
VFD2500CP43A-00/43A-21 250 340 415 481 150 225 225 325
VFD2800CP43A-00/43A-21 280 375 460 530 150 225 225 325
VFD3150CP43A-00/
315 420 550 616 150 225 225 325
VFD3150CP43C-00/-21
VFD3550CP43A-00/
355 475 616 683 150 225 225 325
VFD3550CP43C-00/-21
VFD4000CP43A-00/
400 536 683 770 150 225 225 325
VFD4000CP43C-00/-21
VFD5000CP43A-00/
500 675 866 912 150 225 225 325
VFD5000CP43C-00/-21
VFD5600CP43A-00/43C-21 560 650 930 1094 150 225 225 325
VFD6300CP43A-00/43C-21 630 750 1094 1212 150 225 225 325
Table 7-64
Rated current Without an AC Output Reactor With an AC Output Reactor

575V
kW HP (Arms) Shielded Cable Non-shielded Shielded Cable Non-shielded
Model
Normal Duty [meter] cable [meter] [meter] cable [meter]
VFD015CP53A-21 0.75 1 2.5 35 30 45 20
VFD022CP53A-21 1.5 2 3.6 35 30 45 20
VFD037CP53A-21 2.2 3 5.5 35 30 45 20
VFD055CP53A-21 3.7 5 8.2 35 30 45 20
VFD075CP53A-21 5.5 7.5 10 35 30 45 20
VFD110CP53A-21 7.5 10 15.5 35 30 45 20
VFD150CP53A-21 11 15 20 35 30 45 20
Table 7-65
7-58
Rated current Without an AC output reactor With an AC output reactor

690V Model kW HP (Arms) Shielded Cable Non-shielded Shielded Non-shielded
Normal Duty [meter] cable [meter] Cable [meter] cable [meter]
VFD185CP63A-21 18.5 25 20 20 35 30 45
VFD220CP63A-21 22 30 24 20 35 30 45
VFD300CP63A-21 30 40 30 20 35 45 60
VFD370CP63A-21 37 50 36 20 45 60 75
VFD450CP63A-00/21 45 60 45 20 45 60 75
VFD550CP63A-00/21 55 75 54 20 45 60 100
VFD750CP63A-00/21 75 100 67 20 45 60 100
VFD900CP63A-00/21 90 125 86 20 45 75 100
VFD1100CP63A-00/21 110 150 104 20 45 75 100
VFD1320CP63A-00/21 132 175 125 20 45 75 100
VFD1600CP63A-00/21 160 215 150 20 45 90 100
VFD2000CP63A-00/21 200 270 180 20 45 90 100
VFD2500CP63A-00/21 250 335 220 20 45 90 100
VFD3150CP63A-00/21 315 425 290 20 45 90 100
VFD4000CP63A-00/21 400 530 350 20 45 90 100
VFD4500CP63A-00/21 450 600 385 20 45 90 100
VFD5600CP63A-00/21 560 745 465 20 45 75 90
VFD6300CP63A-00/21 630 850 675 20 45 75 90
※ 690V output motor cable length needs to comply with IEC 60034-25. Table 7-66
Requirements on insulation level of Curve B motor
Figure 7-36
The tr is defined as:
Figure 7-37
7-59
Sine-wave filter
When there is longer cable length connected between the motor drive and the motor, the damping
leads to high frequency resonator, and makes impedance matching poor to enlarge the voltage
reflection. This phenomenon will generate twice-input voltage in the motor side, which will easily make
motor voltage overshoot to damage insulation.
To prevent this, installing sine-wave filter can transform PWM output voltage to smooth and
low-ripple sin wave, and motor cable length can be longer than 1000 meters.
Installation
Sine-wave filter is serially connected between motor drive UVW output side and motor, which is
shown as below:
AC motor drive
Wiring of non-shielded cable Figure 7-39
AC motor drive
Wiring of shielded cable
Wiring of shielded cable Figure 7-40
7-60
Following table shows the sine-wave filter specification of Delta CP2000

200V–230V, 50 / 60 Hz
Rated Current Output Cable
230V (Arms) Suggested Sine-wave Length
kW HP Filter Part # (Shielded or
Model Normal Light
Duty Duty Non-shielded)
VFD007CP23A-21 0.75 1 4.6 5 B84143V0006R227 1000
VFD015CP23A21 1.5 2 5 7.5 B84143V0011R227 1000
VFD022CP23A-21 2.2 3 8 10 B84143V0011R227 1000
VFD037CP23A-21 3.7 5 11 15 B84143V0025R227 1000
VFD055CP23A-21 5.5 7.5 17 21 B84143V0025R227 1000
VFD075CP23A-21 7.5 10 25 31 B84143V0033R227 1000
VFD110CP23A-21 11 15 33 46 B84143V0050R227 1000
VFD150CP23A-21 15 20 49 61 B84143V0066R227 1000
VFD185CP23A-21 18.5 25 65 75 B84143V0075R227 1000
VFD220CP23A-21 22 30 75 90 B84143V0095R227 1000
VFD300CP23A-21 30 40 90 105 B84143V0132R227 1000
VFD370CP23A-00/-21 37 50 120 146 B84143V0180R227 1000
VFD450CP23A-00/-21 45 60 146 180 B84143V0180R227 1000
VFD550CP23A-00/-21 55 75 180 215 B84143V0250R227 1000
VFD750CP23A-00/-21 75 100 215 276 B84143V0320R227 1000
VFD900CP23A-00/-21 90 125 255 322 Non-available 1000
Table 7-67
380V–460V, 50 / 60 Hz
Rated Current
460V Output Cable Length
(Arms) Suggested Sine-wave
kW HP (Shielded or
Model Normal Light Filter Part #
Non-shielded)
Duty Duty
VFD007CP43A-021/4EA-21 0.75 1 2.8 3 B84143V0004R227 1000
VFD015CP43B-21/4EB-21 1.5 2 3 4.2 B84143V0006R227 1000
VFD022CP43B-21/4EB-21 2.2 3 4 5.5 B84143V0006R227 1000
VFD037CP43B-21/4EB-21 3.7 5 6 8.5 B84143V0011R227 1000
VFD040CP43A-21/4EA-21 4 5 9 10.5 B84143V0011R227 1000
VFD055CP43B-21/4EB-21 5.5 7.5 10.5 13 B84143V0016R227 1000
VFD075CP43B-21/4EB-21 7.5 10 12 18 B84143V0025R227 1000
VFD110CP43B-21/4EB-21 11 15 18 24 B84143V0025R227 1000
VFD150CP43B-21/4EB-21 15 20 24 32 B84143V0033R227 1000
VFD185CP43B-21/4EB-21 18.5 25 32 38 B84143V0050R227 1000
VFD220CP43A-21/4EA-21 22 30 38 45 B84143V0050R227 1000
VFD300CP43B-21/4EB-21 30 40 45 60 B84143V0066R227 1000
VFD370CP43B-21/4EB-21 37 50 60 73 B84143V0075R227 1000
VFD450CP43S-00/43S-21 45 60 73 91 B84143V0095R227 1000
VFD550CP43S-00/43S-21 55 75 91 110 B84143V0132R227 1000
VFD750CP43B-00/43B-21 75 100 110 150 B84143V0180R227 1000
VFD900CP43A-00/43A-21 90 125 150 180 B84143V0180R227 1000
7-61
Rated Current
460V Output Cable Length
(Arms) Suggested Sine-wave
kW HP (Shielded or
Model Normal Light Filter Part #
Non-shielded)
Duty Duty
VFD1100CP43A-00/43A-21 110 150 180 220 B84143V0250R227 1000
VFD1320CP43B-00/43B-21 132 175 220 260 B84143V0320R227 1000
VFD1600CP43A-00/43A-21 160 215 260 310 B84143V0320R227 1000
VFD1850CP43B-00/43B-21 185 250 310 370 Non-available
VFD2000CP43A-00/43A-21 200 270 335 395 Non-available
VFD3150CP43A-00/
315 420 550 616 Non-available
VFD3150CP43C-00/-21
VFD3550CP43A-00/
VFD3550CP43C-00/-21
VFD4000CP43A-00/
VFD4000CP43C-00/-21
VFD5000CP43A-00/
VFD5000CP43C-00/-21
VFD5600CP43A-00/43C-21 560 650 930 1294 Non-available
VFD6300CP43A-00/43C-21 630 750 1094 1212 Non-available
Table 7-68
Click on this URL for more information

Sine-wave output filters
http://en.tdk.eu/inf/30/db/emc_2014/B84143V_R227.pdf
B84143V0004R227 IR:4A, Sine-wave output filters for 3-phase systems

Table 7-69
7-62
7-5 Zero Phase Reactors

Reactor Wiring
Recommended Wire Size Qty Corresponding motor drives
model (Note) Method
VFD007CP23A-21; VFD007CP43A/4EA-21;
VFD015CP23A-21; VFD015CP43B/4EB-21;
RF008X00A VFD022CP23A-21;VFD022CP43B/4EB-21;
or ≤ 8 AWG ≤ 8.37 mm2 Diagram A 1 VFD037CP23A-21; VFD037CP43B/4EB-21;
RF008X00N
VFD040CP43A/4EA-21; VFD055CP23A-21;
VFD055CP43B/4EB-21; VFD075CP43B/4EB-21;
VFD075CP23A-21; VFD110CP23A-21;
RF004X00A VFD110CP43B/4EB-21; VFD150CP23A-21;
or ≤ 4 AWG ≤ 21.15 mm2 Diagram A 1 VFD150CP43B/4EB-21; VFD185CP43B/4EB-21;
RF004X00N
VFD055CP53A-21; VFD075CP53A-21; VFD110CP53A-21;
VFD150CP53A-21
VFD185CP23A-21; VFD220CP23A-21;
VFD220CP43A/4EA-21; VFD300CP23A-21;
VFD300CP43B/4EB-21; VFD370CP43B/4EB-21;
RF002X00A VFD185CP63A-21; VFD220CP63A-21; VFD300CP63A-21;
or ≤ 2 AWG ≤ 33.62 mm2 Diagram A 1
RF410X00N VFD370CP63A-21; VFD370CP23A-00/23A-21;
VFD450CP23A-00/23A-21; VFD750CP43B-00/43B-21;
VFD900CP43A-00/43A-21; VFD450CP63A-00;
VFD450CP43S-00; VFD550CP43S-00; VFD450CP43S-21;
VFD550CP43S-21;
VFD550CP23A-00/23A-21; VFD750CP23A-00/23A-21;
VFD900CP23A-00/23A-21; VFD1100CP43A-00/43A-21;
VFD1320CP43B-00/43B-21; VFD750CP63A-00;
VFD900CP63A-00; VFD1100CP63A-00;
VFD1320CP63A-00; VFD750CP63A-21; VFD900CP63A-21;
VFD1100CP63A-21; VFD1320CP63A-21;
VFD1600CP43A-00/43A-21; VFD1850CP43B-00/43B-21;
VFD1600CP63A-00; VFD2000CP63A-00;
RF300X00A VFD1600CP63A-21; VFD2000CP63A-21;
or ≤ 300 MCM ≤ 152 mm2 Diagram A 1 VFD2000CP43A-00/43A-21;
RF300X00N
VFD2200CP43A-00/43A-21;
VFD2500CP43A-00/43A-21; VFD2800CP43A-00/43A-21;
VFD2500CP63A-00; VFD3150CP63A-00;
VFD2500CP63A-21; VFD3150CP63A-21;
VFD3150CP43A-00/43C-00/43C-21;
VFD3550CP43A-00/43C-00/43C-21;
VFD4000CP43A-00/43C-00/43C-21; VFD4000CP63A-00;
VFD4500CP63A-00; VFD5600CP63A-00;
VFD6300CP63A-00; VFD4000CP63A-21;
VFD4500CP63A-21; VFD5600CP63A-21;
VFD6300CP63A-21
*575V insulated power cable Table 7-70
7-63
G
B
C
D F
A E
Unit: mm [inch]
Model A B C D E F G[Ø] Torque
98 73 36.5 29 56.5 86 5.5
RF008X00A < 10 kgf/cm2
[3.858] [2.874] [1.437] [1.142] [2.224] [3.386] [0.217]
110 87.5 43.5 36 53 96 5.5
RF004X00A < 10 kgf/cm2
[4.331] [3.445] [1.713] [1.417] [2.087] [3.780] [0.217]
Table 7-71
G
B
H
C
D E
Unit: mm [inch]
Model A B C D E F G[Ø] H Torque
200 172.5 90 78 55.5 184 5.5 22
RF002X00A <45 kgf/cm2
[7.874] [6.791] [3.543] [3.071] [2.185] [7.244] [0.217] [0.866]
Table 7-72
Unit: mm [inch]
Model A B C D E F G[Ø] H I
241 217[ 114 155 42 220 6.5 7.0 20
RF300X00A
[9.488] 8.543] [4.488] [6.102] [1.654] [8.661] [0.256] [0.276] [0.787]
Table 7-73
7-64
Figure 7-43
Model A B C Application
RF008X00N 22.5 43.1 18.5 Motor cable
RF004X00N 36.3 53.5 23.4 Motor cable
RF410X00N 108.1 70 30.3 Motor cable
RF300X00N 166.9 123.9 30.5 Motor cable
RF026X00N 10.7 17.8 8.0 Signal cable
RF020X00N 17.5 27.3 12.3 Signal cable
Table 7-74
Diagram A
Put all wires through at least one core without winding.

Zero Phase Reactor
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 V/T1 MOTOR
T/L3 W/T1
Note 1: The table above gives approximate wire size for the zero phase reactors, but the selection is ultimately
governed by the type and diameter of cable fitted i.e. the cable must fit through the center hole of zero
phase reactors.
Note 2: Only the phase conductors should pass through, not the earth core or screen.
Note 3: When using long motor output cables, an output zero phase reactor may be required to reduce radiated
emissions from the cable.
7-65
7-6 EMC Filter

Following table is the external EMC filter of CP2000 series. User can choose corresponding zero
phase reactor and suitable shielded cable length in accord to required noise emission and
electromagnetic interference level to achieve the best configuration to suppress the electromagnetic
interference. When the application does not consider RE interference and only needs CE to comply with
C2 or C1, there is no need to install zero phase reactor on the input side.
230V / 460V Model

CE Cable Radiation
Input Zero Phase* Reactor
Applicable EMC Carrier Length Emission
Frame Model Current
Filter Input Side Output Side Frequency default carrier frequency
[A]
(R/S/T) (U/V/W) C1 C2 EN61800-3
VFD007CP23A 6.4
VFD015CP23A 9.6
EMF021A23A
A VFD022CP23A 15 RF008X00A RF008X00A
VFD037CP23A 22
≤ 8 kHz
VFD055CP23A 25
VFD075CP23A 35 EMF056A23A
B VFD110CP23A 50 RF004X00A RF004X00A
VFD150CP23A 65
VFD185CP23A 83 KMF3100A
C VFD220CP23A 100
VFD300CP23A 116 N/A RF002X00A ≤ 6 kHz
B84143D0150R127
VFD370CP23A 146
D
VFD450CP23A 180
B84143B0250S020
VFD550CP23A 215
E VFD750CP23A 276 N/A RF300X00A ≤ 4 kHz
B84143B0400S020 50 m 100 m C2
VFD900CP23A 322
VFD007CP43A 4.3
VFD015CP43B 6
EMF014A43A
VFD022CP43B 8.1
≤ 8 kHz
A VFD037CP43B 12.4 RF008X00A RF008X00A
VFD040CP43A 16
VFD055CP43B 20
VFD075CP43B 22 EMF039A43A
VFD110CP43B 26
≤ 8 kHz
B VFD150CP43B 35 RF004X00A RF004X00A
VFD185CP43B 42
VFD220CP43A 50 KMF370A
C VFD300CP43B 66
N/A RF002X00A ≤ 6 kHz
VFD370CP43B 80
B84143D0150R127
D0 VFD450CP43S 91
D0 VFD550CP43S 110
B84143D0150R127 ≤ 6 kHz
VFD750CP43B 150 N/A RF002X00A
D
VFD900CP43A 180
B84143D0200R127
VFD1100CP43A 220
E
VFD1320CP43B 260
VFD1600CP43A 310
F MIF3400B
VFD1850CP43B 370
VFD2000CP43A 395 50 m 100 m Pass
VFD2200CP43A 460 ≤ 4 kHz
G N/A RF300X00A
VFD2500CP43A 481
VFD2800CP43A 530
MIF3800
VFD3150CP43A 616
VFD3550CP43A 683
VFD4000CP43A 770
VFD5000CP43A 930 B84143B1000S020
H
VFD5600CP43A-00 1094
VFD5600CP43C-21 1094
B84143B1600S020 Contact Delta for more information
VFD6300CP43A-00 1212
VFD6300CP43C-21 1212
Table 7-75
7-66
460V Model
Conducted Radiation
CP2000 Zero Phase Reactor
Emission Emission
Rated Applicable EMC Carrier Output Shielded
Input Filter Input Side Output Side Freq. Cable Length
Frame Model EN61800-3
Current (R/S/T) (U/V/W)
EN618000-3 C2
[A]
VFD450CP43S 91
D0 B84143B0120R110 N/A *C2
VFD550CP43S 110 ≤ 6 kHz 25 m
VFD750CP43B 150 N/A
D B84143B0180S020 *C3
VFD900CP43A 180
VFD1100CP43A 220 B84143B0250S020
E
VFD1320CP43B 260 B84143B0320S020 B64290L0084X830
≤ 4 kHz
VFD1600CP43A 310
F
VFD1850CP43B 370 B84143B0400S020
RF300X00A C2
VFD2000CP43A 395
or
VFD2200CP43A 460 RF300X00N 13 m
G
VFD2500CP43A 481 B84143B0600S020
VFD2800CP43A 530
VFD3150CP43A 616 ≤ 2 kHz
VFD3550CP43A 683
B84143B1000S020 *C3
VFD4000CP43A 770
VFD5000CP43A 930
VFD5600CP43A-0
1094
H 0
VFD4500CP43C-2
1094
1
VFD6300CP43A-0
1212
0
VFD6300CP43C-2
1212
1
*For radiated emission, the drive needs to be placed inside a cabinet. Table 7-76
Radiation
CP2000 Zero Phase Reactor Conducted Emission
Emission
Rated Applicable EMC Carrier Output Shielded
Input Filter Input Side Output Side Freq. Cable Length
Frame Model EN61800-3
Current (R/S/T) (U/V/W)
EN618000-3 C3
[A]
VFD450CP43S 91
D0 B84143A0120R105 C3
VFD550CP43S 110 ≤ 6 kHz
VFD750CP43B 150
D B84143B0180S080 *C3
VFD900CP43A 180
VFD1100CP43A 220 B84143B0250S080
E 150 m
VFD1320CP43B 260 B84143B0320S080
VFD1600CP43A 310
F B84143B0400S080 N/A N/A
VFD1850CP43B 370
VFD2200CP43A 460 ≤ 4 kHz
G B84143B0600S080 C3
VFD2800CP43A 530
VFD3150CP43A 616
VFD3550CP43A 683
B84143B1000S080 100 m
VFD4000CP43A 770
VFD5000CP43A 930
H
VFD5600CP43A-00 1094
VFD4500CP43C-21 1094
VFD6300CP43A-00 1212
VFD6300CP43C-21 1212
*For radiated emission, the drive needs to be placed inside a cabinet. Table 7-77
7-67
575V / 690V Model

Input CE Cable Length Radiation Emission
Zero Phase*
Frame Model Current Applicable EMC Filter default carrier frequency
Reactor
[A] C1 C2 EN61800-3
VFD022CP53A-21 5.4 EMF008A63A
A
VFD037CP53A-21 10.4 EMF014A63A
VFD055CP53A-21 14.9
RF008X00A
VFD075CP53A-21 16.9
B EMF027A63A
VFD110CP53A-21 21.3
VFD150CP53A-21 26.3
VFD185CP63A-21 29
VFD220CP63A-21 36
C
VFD300CP63A-21 43
VFD370CP63A-21 54 B84143A0050R021 RF002X00A
50 m 100 m C2
VFD450CP63A-00
54
VFD450CP63A-21
D
VFD550CP63A-00
67
VFD550CP63A-21
VFD750CP63A-00
84
VFD750CP63A-21
B84143A0120R021
VFD900CP63A-00
102
VFD900CP63A-21
E
VFD1100CP63A-00
122
VFD1100CP63A-21
B84143B0150S021 RF300X00A
VFD1320CP63A-00
147
VFD1320CP63A-21
VFD1600CP63A-00
178
VFD1600CP63A-21
F B84143B0250S021
VFD2000CP63A-00
217
VFD2000CP63A-21
VFD2500CP63A-00
292
VFD2500CP63A-21
G B84143B0400S021
VFD3150CP63A-00
353
VFD3150CP63A-21
VFD4000CP63A-00
454
VFD4000CP63A-21
H B84143B0600S021 RF300X00A 50 m 100 m C2
VFD4500CP63A-00
469
VFD4500CP63A-21
VFD5600CP63A-00
595 B84143B0600S021
VFD5600CP63A-21
H
VFD6300CP63A-00
681 B84143B1000S021
VFD6300CP63A-21
* For Frame A–C: On both input and output side, a zero phase reactor is required to be wired to the motor drive. Table 7-78
There should be in total 2 zero phase reactors.
For Frame D–H: Only one zero phase reactor is required to be wired on the output side of the motor drive.
7-68
EMC Filter Dimension

EMC filter model name: EMF021A23A; EMF014A43A
Figure 7-45
7-69
EMC filter model name: EMF018A43A
Figure 7-46
7-70
EMC filter model name: EMF056A23A; EMF039A43A
Figure 7-47
7-71
EMC filter model name: KMF370A; KMF3100A
Figure 7-48
7-72
EMC filter model name: B84143D0150R127
Figure 7-49
7-73
EMC filter model name: B84143D0200R127
Figure 7-50
7-74
EMC filter model name: B84143B0250S020
Figure 7-51
Figure 7-52
7-75
Figure 7-53
Figure 7-54
Unit: mm
7-76
The table below is the suggested shielded cable length for drive models with built-in EMC filters. You can
choose the corresponding shielded cable length according to the required noise emission and
electromagnetic interference level.
Comply with EMC (IEC 61800-3) Comply with EMC (IEC 61800-3)
EMC built-in model Rated current Class C3 Class C2
(ND)
Frame Model Shielded cable length Fc Shielded cable length Fc
VFD007CP4EA-21 3.5
VFD015CP4EB-21 4.3
VFD022CP4EB-21 5.9
A
VFD037CP4EB-21 8.7
VFD040CP4EA-21 14 ≤ 8 kHz ≤ 8 kHz
VFD055CP4EB-21 15.5
VFD075CP4EB-21 17 30 m 10 m
VFD110CP4EB -21 20
B VFD150CP4EB -21 26
VFD185CP4EB -21 35
VFD220CP4EA -21 40
≤ 6 kHz ≤ 6 kHz
C VFD300CP4EB -21 47
VFD370CP4EB-21 63
Table 7-79
* To prevent increment of wires parasitic capacitance and leakage current due to excessive cable length, which causes
overheating of the built-in EMC filters, the shielded cable length for Frame A should not be longer than 30 m, and that for Frame
B, C should not be longer than 50 m.
EMC Filter Installation

All electrical equipment (including AC motor drives) generate high or low frequency noise that
interferes with peripheral equipment by radiation or conduction when during operation. Correctly install an
EMC filter can eliminate much interference. It is recommended to use DELTA EMC filter to have the best
interference elimination performance.
We assure that it can comply with the following rules when the AC motor drive and EMC filter are
both installed and wired according to user manual:
 EN61000-6-4
 EN61800-3: 1996
 EN55011 (1991) Class A Group 1 (1st Environment, restricted distribution)
General precaution
To ensure the EMC filter maximizes the effect of suppressing the interference of AC motor drive, the
installation and wiring of AC motor drive should follow the user manual. In addition, be sure to observe the
following precautions:
1. Install the EMC filter and AC motor drive on the same metal plate.
2. Install the AC motor drive on footprint EMC filter or install the EMC filter as close as possible to the AC
motor drive.
3. Wire as short as possible.
4. Ground the metal plate.
5. The cover of EMC filter and AC motor drive or grounding should be fixed on the metal plate and the
contact area should be as large as possible.
7-77
Choose suitable motor cable and precautions

Improper installation and choice of motor cable affects the performance of EMC filter. Be sure to
observe the following precautions when selecting motor cable.
1. Use the cable with shielding (double shielding is the best).

2. The shielding on both ends of the motor cable should be grounded with the minimum length and
maximum contact area.
3. Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with the plate and shielding.
Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with
the plate and shielding.
saddle the plate with grounding
Figure 1
Saddle on both ends
Saddle on one end
Figure 2
7-78
7-7 Panel Mounting (MKC-KPPK)

For MKC-KPPK model, you can choose wall mounting or embedded mounting, the protection level is IP66.
Applicable to the digital keypads (KPC-CC01).
Wall Mounting Embedded Mounting
Accessories*1 Accessories*2
Screw *4–M4*p 0.7 *L8mm

Screw *4–M4*p 0.7 *L8mm
Torque: 10-12 kg–cm / [8.7–10.4 lb-in.] /
Torque: 10–12 kg-cm / [8.7–10.4 lb-in.] /
[1.0–1.2 Nm]
[1.0–1.2 Nm]
Panel cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch] Panel cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch]
Normal cutout dimension

Panel
1.2 mm 1.6 mm 2.0 mm
thickness
A 66.4 [2.614]
B 110.2 [4.339] 111.3 [4.382] 112.5 [4.429]
*Deviation: ±0.15 mm /±0.0059 inch
Table 7-80
Cutout dimension (Waterproof level: IP66)

Panel
1.2 mm 1.6 mm 2.0 mm
thickness
A 66.4 [2.614]
B 110.8 [4.362]
*Deviation: ±0.15 mm /±0.0059 inch
Table 7-81
7-79
Wall Mounting Embedded Mounting
7-80
7-8 Conduit Box Kit

 Appearance
Conduit box kit is optional For VFDXXXCPXXA-XX (Frame D and above) and VFDXXXCP43S-XX,
the protection level is IP20 / NEMA1 / UL TYPE1 after installation.
Frame D0
Applicable models:
VFD450CP43S-00, VFD550CP43S-00, VFD450CP43S-21, VFD550CP43S-21
Model number『MKC-D0N1CB』
ITEM Description Qty.
1 Screw M5*0.8*10L 4
2 Bushing Rubber 28 2
5 Conduit box cover 1
6 Conduit box base 1
Table 7-82
Frame D
Applicable models:
VFD370CP23A-00, VFD450CP23A-00, VFD750CP43B-00, VFD900CP43A-00, VFD370CP23A-21,
VFD450CP23A-21, VFD750CP43B-21, VFD900CP43A-21, VFD450CP63A-00, VFD550CP63A-00,
VFD450CP63A-21, VFD550CP63A-21
Model number『MKC-DN1CB』
1 Screw M5*0.8*10L 4
Table 7-83
Frame E
Applicable models:
VFD550CP23A-00, VFD750CP23A-00, VFD900CP23A-00, VFD1100CP43A-00, VFD1320CP43B-00,
VFD550CP23A-21, VFD750CP23A-21, VFD900CP23A-21, VFD1100CP43A-21, VFD1320CP43B-21,
VFD750CP63A-00, VFD900CP63A-00, VFD1100CP63A-00, VFD1320CP63A-00, VFD750CP63A-21,
VFD900CP63A-21, VFD1100CP63A-21, VFD1320CP63A-21
Model number『MKC-EN1CB』
1 Screw M5*0.8*10L 6
Table 7-84
7-81
Frame F
Applicable models:
VFD1600CP43A-00, VFD1850CP43B-00, VFD1600CP43A-21, VFD1850CP43B-21, VFD1600CP63A-00,
VFD2000CP63A-00, VFD1600CP63A-21, VFD2000CP63A-21
Model number『MKC-FN1CB』
1 Screw M5*0.8*10L 8
Table 7-85
Frame G
Applicable models:
VFD2500CP63A-21, VFD3150CP63A-21
型號『MKC-GN1CB』
1 Screw M5*0.8*10L 12
Table 7-86
7-82
Frame H
Applicable models:
VFD6300CP43A-00, VFD3150CP43C-00, VFD3550CP43C-00, VFD4000CP43C-00, VFD5000CP43C-00,
VFD3150CP43C-21, VFD3550CP43C-21, VFD4000CP43C-21, VFD5000CP43C-21, VFD5600CP43C-21,
VFD6300CP43C-21, VFD4000CP63A-00, VFD4500CP63A-00, VFD5600CP63A-00, VFD6300CP63A-00,
VFD4000CP63A-21, VFD4500CP63A-21, VFD5600CP63A-21, VFD6300CP63A-21
Model number『MKC-HN1CB』
ITEM 1
1 Screw M6*1.0*25L 8
ITEM 2
2 Screw M8*1.25*30L 3 ITEM 3
ITEM 14
3 NUT M8 4 ITEM 4
4 NUT M10 4
8 Conduit box cover 1 1
9 Conduit box cover 2 2 ITEM 6
ITEM 5
10 Conduit box cover 3 2 ITEM 5
11 Conduit box cover 4 2
ITEM 6
12 Conduit box base 1 ITEM 5
13 Accessories 1 2 ITEM 5
14 Accessories 2 1
Table 7-87
ITEM 7
ITEM 7
ITEM 10
ITEM 7
ITEM 10
ITEM 9 ITEM 7
ITEM 13
ITEM 12
ITEM 11
ITEM 11
ITEM 8
ITEM 9
ITEM 13
7-83
 Conduit Box Installation

Frame D0
1. Loosen the cover screws and press the tabs on each side of the cover to remove the cover, as shown in the
following figure. Screw torque: 12–15 kg-cm / [10.4–13 Ib-in.] / [1.2–1.5 Nm]
2. Remove the 5 screws shown in the following figure. Screw torque: 24–26 kg-cm / [20.8–22.6 Ib-in.] /
[2.4–2.5 Nm]
3. Install the conduit box by fasten the 5 screws shown in the following figure. Screw torque: 24–26 kg-cm /
[20.8–22.6 Ib-in.] / [2.4–2.5 Nm]
4. Fasten the 2 screws shown in the following figure. Screw torque: 12–15 kg-cm / [10.4–13 Ib-in.] / [1.2–1.5 Nm]
7-84
Frame D
2. Remove the 5 screws shown in the following figure. Screw torque: 24–26 kg-cm / [20.8–22.6 Ib-in.] /
[2.4–2.5 Nm]
3. Install the conduit box by fasten the 5 screws shown in the following figure.
Screw torque: 24–26 kg-cm / [20.8–22.6 Ib-in.] / [2.4–2.5 Nm]
7-85
Frame E
1. Loosen the 4 cover screws and lift the cover; Screw torque: 12–15 kg-cm / [10.4–13 Ib-in.] / [1.2–1.5 Nm]
2. Fasten the 6 screws shown in the following figure and place the cover back to the original position. Screw
torque: 24–26 kg-cm / [20.8–22.6 Ib-in.] / [2.4–2.5 Nm]
7-86
Frame F
1
2
2. Install the conduit box by fastens the 4 screws, as shown in the following figure.
Screw torque: 24–26 kg-cm / [20.8–22.6 Ib-in.] / [2.4–2.5 Nm]
3. Install the conduit box by fasten all the screws shown in the following figure
Screw 9–12 torque: 12–15 kg-cm / [10.4–13 Ib-in.] / [1.2–1.5 Nm]
Screw 13–16 torque: 24–26 kg-cm / [20.8–22.6 Ib-in.] / [2.4–2.5 Nm]
12
15
9
10
13
14
16
11
7-87
Frame G
1. On the conduit box, loosen 7 of the cover screws and remove the cover.
Screw torque: 24–26 kg-cm / [20.8–22.6 Ib-in.] / [2.4–2.5 Nm].
2. On the drive, loosen 4 of the cover screws and press the tabs on each side of the cover to remove the cover,
as shown in the following figure. Screw torque: 12–15 kg-cm / [10.4–13 Ib-in.] / [1.2–1.5 Nm]
1
2
3 Remove the top cover and loosen the screws.

M5 Screw torque: 24–26 kg-cm / [20.8–22.6 Ib-in.] / [2.4–2.5 Nm]
M8 Screw torque: 100–120 kg-cm / [86.7–104.1 Ib-in.] / [9.8–11.8 Nm]
4 Install the conduit box by fastening all the screws shown in the following figure.
M5 Screw torque: 24–26 kg-cm / [20.8–22.6 Ib-in] / [2.4–2.5 Nm]
M8 Screw torque: 100–120 kg-cm / [86.7–104.1 Ib-in] / [9.8–11.8 Nm]
7-88
5. Fasten all the screws. Screw torque: 24–26 kg-cm / [20.8–22.6 Ib-in.] / [2.4–2.5 Nm]
6. Place the cover back to the top and fasten the screws (as shown in the figure).
Screw torque: 12–15 kg-cm / [10.4–13 Ib-in.] / [1.2–1.5 Nm]
7-89
Frame H
Assembly for Frame H3 (Conduit Box Kit)
1. Loosen the screws and remove the cover of conduit box H3 as preparation.
2. Loosen the screws as below figure shown.
7-90
3. Fasten the M6 screws to locations shown in below figure.

4. Install the conduit box by fasten all the screws shown in the following figure
Screw 1–6: M6 screw torque: 55–65 kg-cm / [47.7–56.4 Ib-in] / [5.4–6.4 Nm]
7 8 9
3 6
2 5
1 4
14
15
16
10 11 12 13 17
3
7
2
12
7-91
5. Fasten the 3 covers and screws, which are loosen from step1, to the original location.
6. Installation complete.
7-92
Assembly for Frame H2 (Straight Stand)

1. Loosen the 3 screws and remove the cover of conduit box.
2. Remove the 4 covers of conduit box, and fasten the loosen screws back to the original location.
Screw torque: 100–110 kg-cm / [86.7–95.4 Ib-in] / [9.8–10.8 Nm]
3. Remove the parts and screws as below figure shown.
7-93
4. Fasten the M6 screws to locations shown in below figure.

5. Install conduit box and accessories by fasten all the screws shown in the following figure.
Screws 1–6: M6 screw torque: 55–65 kg-cm / [47.7–56.4 Ib-in] / [5.4–6.4 Nm]
7 8 9
3 6
2 5
1 4
14
15
10 11 12 13 16
17
3
7
2
12
7-94
6. Installation complete.
7-95
7-9 Fan Kit

 Appearance of the fan kit
NOTE: The fan does not support hot swap function. For replacement, turn the power off before replacing the fan.
Frame A Heat sink Fan Model『MKC-AFKM』
Applicable Model
VFD022CP23A-21; VFD037CP23A-21;
VFD055CP23A-21; VFD022CP43B-21;
VFD022CP4EB-21; VFD037CP43B-21;
VFD037CP4EB-21; VFD040CP43A-21;
VFD040CP4EA-21; VFD055CP43B-21;
Frame A Heat sink Fan Model『MKCB-AFKM2』
Applicable Model
VFD075CP43B-21; VFD075CP4EB-21
Frame B Heat sink Fan Model『MKC-BFKM1』
Applicable Model
VFD075CP23A-21; VFD110CP43B-21;
VFD075CP53A-21; VFD110CP53A-21;
VFD150CP53A-21
Frame B Heat sink Fan Model 『MKC-BFKM2』

『MKC-BFKM3』
Applicable Model
MKC-BFKM2:
VFD110CP23A-21; VFD150CP43B-21;
VFD185CP4EB-21
MKC-BFKM3:
VFD150CP23A-21
(The MKC-BFKM2 and MKC-BFKM 3 have the same shape)
7-96
Frame B Capacitor Fan Model 『MKC-BFKB』
Applicable Model
VFD075CP23A-21; VFD110CP23A-21;
VFD110CP43B-21; VFD110CP4EB-21;
VFD150CP23A-21; VFD150CP43B-21;
VFD075CP53A-21; VFD110CP53A-21;
VFD150CP53A-21
Frame C Capacitor Fan Model 『MKC-CFKB1』
Applicable Model
VFD185CP23A-21; VFD220CP23A-21;
VFD300CP23A-21; VFD185CP63A-21;
VFD220CP63A-21; VFD300CP63A-21;
VFD370CP63A-21
Frame C Capacitor Fan Model 『MKC-CFKB2』
Applicable Model
VFD220CP43A-21; VFD220CP4EA-21;
Frame C Heat sink Fan 『MKC-CFKM』
Following Models use one set of MKC-CFKM:

VFD220CP43A-21; VFD220CP4EA-21;
VFD370CP43B-21
Following Models use two sets of MKC-CFKM:

VFD185CP23A-21; VFD220CP23A-21;
VFD300CP23A-21; VFD370CP4EB-21
7-97
Frame C Heat sink Fan Model Capacitor Fan Model

『MKC-CFKM1』『MKC-CFKB3』
Applicable Model
VFD185CP63A-21; VFD220CP63A-21;
Frame D0 Heat sink Fan Model Capacitor Fan Model

『MKC-D0FKM』『MKC-DFKB』
Applicable Model
VFD450CP43S-00; VFD450CP43S-21;
VFD550CP43S-00; VFD550CP43S-21
Frame D Heat sink Fan Model Capacitor Fan Model

『MKC-DFKM』『MKC-DFKB』
Applicable Model
VFD370CP23A-00; VFD370CP23A-21;
VFD450CP23A-00; VFD450CP23A-21;
VFD750CP43B-00; VFD750CP43B-21;
VFD900CP43A-00; VFD900CP43A-21;
VFD450CP63A-00; VFD450CP63A-21;
Frame E Heat sink Fan Model 『MKC-EFKM1』
Applicable Model
VFD550CP23A-00; VFD550CP23A-21;
7-98
Frame E Heat sink Fan Model『MKC-EFKM2』
Applicable Model
VFD900CP23A-00; VFD900CP23A-21;
VFD1100CP43A-00; VFD1100CP43A-21;
VFD1320CP43B-00; VFD1320CP43B-21
Frame E Fan Model 『MKC-EFKM3』
Applicable Model
VFD750CP63A-00; VFD750CP63A-21;
VFD900CP63A-00; VFD900CP63A-21;
VFD1100CP63A-00; VFD1100CP63A-21;
VFD1320CP63A-00; VFD1320CP63A-21
Frame E Capacitor Fan Model 『MKC-EFKB』
Applicable Model
VFD550CP23A-00; VFD550CP23A-21;
VFD750CP23A-00; VFD750CP23A-21;
VFD900CP23A-00; VFD900CP23A-21;
VFD1100CP43A-00; VFD1100CP43A-21;
VFD1320CP43B-00; VFD1320CP43B-21;
VFD900CP63A-00; VFD900CP63A-21;
VFD1100CP63A-00; VFD1100CP63A-21;
VFD1320CP63A-00; VFD1320CP63A-21
Frame F Heat sink Fan Model 『MKC-FFKM』
Applicable Model
VFD1600CP43A-00; VFD1600CP43A-21;
VFD1850CP43B-00; VFD1850CP43B-21;
VFD1600CP63A-00; VFD1600CP63A-21;
VFD2000CP63A-00; VFD2000CP63A-21
7-99
Frame F Capacitor Fan Model 『MKC-FFKB』
Applicable Model
VFD1600CP43A-00; VFD1600CP43A-21;
VFD1850CP43B-00; VFD1850CP43B-21;
VFD1600CP63A-00; VFD1600CP63A-21;
VFD2000CP63A-00; VFD2000CP63A-21
Frame G Heat sink Fan Model 『MKC-GFKM』
Applicable Model
VFD2000CP43A-00; VFD2000CP43A-21;
VFD2200CP43A-00; VFD2200CP43A-21;
VFD2500CP43A-00; VFD2500CP43A-21;
VFD2800CP43A-00; VFD2800CP43A-21;
VFD2500CP63A-00; VFD2500CP63A-21;
VFD3150CP63A-00; VFD3150CP63A-21
Frame H Heat sink Fan Model 『MKC-HFKM』
Applicable Model
Following models use two sets of MKC-HFKM:

VFD3150CP43A-00; VFD3150CP43C-00;
VFD3150CP43C-21; VFD3550CP43A-00;
VFD3550CP43C-00; VFD3550CP43C-21;
VFD4000CP43A-00; VFD4000CP43C-00;
VFD4000CP43C-21
Frame H Heat sink Fan Model 『MKCHS-HFKM』
Applicable Model
Following models use three sets of MKCHS-HFKM:

VFD5000CP43A-00; VFD5000CP43C-00;
VFD5000CP43C-21; VFD5600CP43A-00;
VFD5600CP43C-21; VFD6300CP43A-00;
VFD6300CP43C-21
7-100
Frame H Heat sink Fan Model 『MKC-HFKM1』
Applicable Model
Following models use two sets of MKC-HFKM1:

VFD4000CP63A-00; VFD4000CP63A-21
Following models use three sets of MKC-HFKM1:

VFD4500CP63A-00; VFD4500CP63A-21;
VFD5600CP63A-00; VFD5600CP63A-21;
VFD6300CP63A-00; VFD6300CP63A-21
7-101
 Fan Removal
Frame A
Model『MKC-AFKM』: Heat Sink Fan
Applicable model
VFD022CP23A-21; VFD037CP23A-21; VFD055CP23A-21; VFD022CP43B-21; VFD022CP4EB-21;
VFD037CP43B-21; VFD037CP4EB-21; VFD040CP43A-21; VFD040CP4EA-21; VFD055CP43B-21;
VFD055CP4EB-21; VFD015CP53A-21; VFD022CP53A-21; VFD037CP53A-21
Model『MKCB-AFKM2』: Heat Sink Fan

Applicable model
1. Refer to Figure 1, press the tabs on both side of the 2. Disconnect the power terminal before removing the
fan to successfully remove the fan. fan. (As shown below.)
Figure 1
Figure 2
Frame B
Model『MKC-BFKM1』Heat Sink Fan
Applicable model
VFD075CP23A-21; VFD110CP43B-21; VFD110CP4EB-21; VFD055CP53A-21; VFD075CP53A-21;

Applicable model
VFD110CP23A-21; VFD150CP43B-21; VFD150CP4EB-21; VFD185CP43B-21; VFD185CP4EB-21

Applicable model
VFD150CP23A-21
1. Refer to Figure 1, press the tabs on both side of the 2. Disconnect the power terminal before removing the
fan to successfully remove the fan. fan. (As shown below.)
Figure 1 Figure 2
7-102
Frame B
Model『MKC-BFKB』Capacitor Fan
Applicable model
VFD075CP23A-21; VFD110CP23A-21; VFD110CP43B-21; VFD110CP4EB-21; VFD150CP23A-21;
VFD150CP43B-21; VFD150CP4EB-21; VFD185CP43B-21; VFD185CP4EB-21; VFD055CP53A-21;
Disconnect fan power and pull out the fan by using flathead screwdriver. (As shown in the larger picture)
Disconnect fan power and pull out the

fan by flathead screwdriver
Pay attention to direction of the

latch during the installation
Frame C
Model『MKC-CFKM』Heat Sink Fan
Applicable model
Single fan kit applicable models (only fan kit 1 is required to be installed):
VFD220CP43A-21; VFD220CP4EA-21; VFD300CP43B-21; VFD300CP4EB-21; VFD370CP43B-21;
Dual fan kit applicable models (both fan kit 1 and 2 are required to be installed):
VFD185CP23A-21; VFD220CP23A-21; VFD300CP23A-21; VFD370CP4EB-21
Model『MKC-CFKM1』Heat Sink Fan

Applicable model
1. (As shown Figure 1) Before removing the fan, remove the cover by using a slotted screwdriver.
Figure 1
7-103
2. (As shown in Figure 2), remove the power connector, loosen the screw and remove the fan kit. When installing
the fan kit, have the label on the fan kit facing inside of the motor drive.
Screw’s torque: 10–12 kg-cm / [8.7–10.4 lb-in.] / [1.0–1.2 Nm]
Figure 2
Frame C
Model『MKC-CFKB1』Capacitor Fan
Applicable model
Applicable model
VFD220CP43A-21; VFD220CP4EA-21; VFD300CP43B-21; VFD300CP4EB-21; VFD370CP43B-21;
VFD370CP4EB-21
Applicable model
Disconnect fan power and pull out the fan by using flathead screwdriver. (As shown in the larger picture)
Disconnect fan power and pull out the

fan by flathead screwdriver
Pay attention to direction of the

latch during the installation.
Figure 1
7-104
Frame D0
Model『MKC-DFKB』Capacitor Fan
Applicable model
VFD450CP43S-00; VFD450CP43S-21; VFD550CP43S-00; VFD550CP43S-21
1. Loosen screw 1 and screw 2, press the tabs on the 2. (Figure 2) Loosen screw 3, press the tabs on the
right and left to remove the cover, follow the right and the left to remove the cover. Screw 3
direction the arrows indicate. Press on top of digital Torque: 6–8 kg-cm / [5.2–6.9 lb-in.] / [0.6–0.8 Nm]
keypad to properly remove it. Screw 1, 2 Torque:
12–15 kg-cm / [10.4–13 lb-in.] / [1.2–1.5 Nm]
3
1
2
Figure 1 Figure 2
3. Loosen screw 4 (figure 3) and disconnect fan power and pull out the fan. (As shown in the enlarged picture 3)
Screw 4 Torque: 10–12 kg-cm / [8.7–10.4 lb-in.] / [1.0–1.2 Nm]
Figure 3
Frame D0
Model『MKC-D0FKM』Heat Sink Fan
Applicable model
1. Loosen the screw and remove the fan kit. Screw torque: 24–26 kg-cm / [20.8–22.6 lb-in. / [2.4–2.5 Nm]
1
2
3
4
Figure 1
7-105
Frame D
Model『MKC-DFKB』Capacitor Fan
Applicable model
VFD750CP43B-21; VFD900CP43A-00; VFD900CP43A-21; VFD450CP63A-00; VFD450CP63A-21;
1. Loosen screw 1 and screw 2, press the tab on the 2. (Figure 2) Loosen screw 3, press the tab on the right
right and the left to remove the cover, follow the and the left to remove the cover.
direction the arrows indicate. Press on top of digital Screw 3, 4 Torque: 6–8 kg-cm / [5.2–6.9 lb-in.] /
keypad to properly remove it. Screw 1, 2 Torque: [0.6–0.8 Nm]
12–15 kg-cm / [10.4–13 lb-in.] / [1.2–1.5 Nm]
4
3
1
2
Figure 2
Figure 1
3. Loosen screw 5 (figure 3) and disconnect fan power and pull out the fan. (As shown in the enlarged picture 3)
Screw 5 Torque: 10–12 kg-cm / [8.6–10.4 lb-in.] / [1.0–1.2 Nm]
Figure 3
Frame D
Model『MKC-DFKM』Heat Sink Fan
Applicable model
1. Loosen the screw and remove the fan kit. Screw torque: 24–26 kg-cm / [20.8–22.6 lb-in.] / [2.4–2.5 Nm]
1
2
3
4
Figure 1
7-106
Frame E
Applicable models for MKC-EFKM1:
VFD550CP23A-00; VFD550CP23A-21; VFD750CP23-00; VFD750CP23A-21

VFD1320CP43B-21

Applicable models for MKC-EFKB:

VFD1320CP63A-21
Model『MKC-EFKM1』Heat Sink Fan Model『MKC-EFKM2 / MKC-EFKM3』Heat Sink Fan
1. Loosen screw 1–4 (figure 1) and disconnect fan 1. Loosen screw 1–4 (figure 2) and disconnect fan
power and pull out the fan. (As shown in the power and pull out the fan. (As shown in the
enlarged picture 1) Screw1–4 Torque: 24–26 kg-cm enlarged picture 2) Screw1–4 Torque: 24–26 kg-cm
/ [20.8–22.6 lb-in.] / [2.4–2.5 Nm] / [20.8–22.6 lb-in.] / [2.4–2.5 Nm]
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
Figure 1 Figure 2
Model『MKC-EFKB』: Heat Sink Fan
1. Loosen screw 1–2 and disconnect fan power and pull out the fan. (As shown in the enlarged picture 3)
Screw1–2 Torque: 24–26 kg-cm / [20.8–22.6 lb-in] / [2.4–2.5 Nm]
Figure 3
7-107
Frame F
Applicable model
VFD1600CP43A-00; VFD1600CP43A-21; VFD1850CP43B-00; VFD1850CP43B-21; VFD1600CP63A-00;
Fan model『MKC-FFKM』Heat Sink Fan
1. Loosen the screws and plug out the power of fan before removing it (figure 1). Screw torque: 24–26 kg-cm /
[20.8–22.6 Ib-in.] / [2.4–2.5 Nm]
Figure 1
Fan model 『MKC-FFKB』Capacitor Fan
1. Loosen the screw (figure 1) and remove the cover. 2. Loosen the screw (figure 2) and remove the cover.
Screw torque: 12–15 kg-cm / [10.4–13 Ib-in.] / Screw torque: 24–26 kg-cm / [20.8–22.6 Ib-in.] /
[1.2–1.5 Nm] [2.4–2.5 Nm]
7
Figure 1 Figure 2
3. Loosen the screws and remove the fan. (figure 3 and figure 4)
11
10
9
11
10
9
Figure 3 Figure 4
7-108
Frame G
Fan model『MKC-GFKM』Heat Sink Fan
Applicable model
VFD3150CP63A-00; VFD3150CP63A-21
1. Loosen the screw (figure 1) and remove the cover. 2. For 1–8 shown in the figure 2: Loosen the screws
Screw torque: 12–15 kg-cm / [10.4–13.1 Ib-in.] / Screw M6 torque: 35–40 kg-cm / [30.4–34.7 Ib-in.] /
[1.2–1.5 Nm] [3.4–3.9 Nm]
3. For 9–10 shown in the figure 2: Loosen the screws
and remove the cover. Screw M4 torque: 14–16
kg-cm / [12.2–13.9 Ib-in.] / [1.4–1.6 Nm]
Figure 1 Figure 2
4. Loosen screw 1–3 and remove the protective ring (as 5. Lift the fan by putting your finger through the protective
shown in figure 3) Screw torque: 14–16 kg-cm / holes, as indicates in 1 and 2 on the figure 4.
[12.2–13.9 Ib-in.] / [1.4–1.6 Nm]
.
Figure 3 Figure 4
5. If you are switching new fan on old AC motor drive, 6. Add cable model 3864483201 to connect the power
follow the steps below: board and fan connector. (The cable 3864483201
Loosen screws 1–5, remove the cover (as shown in goes with the fan as accessory.)
figure below). M4 screw torque: 14–16 kg-cm /
[12.2–13.9 lb-in] / [1.4–1.6 Nm]
Cable 3864483201
Figure 5 Figure 6
7-109
Frame H
Fan model『MKC-HFKM』Heat Sink Fan
Applicable model
VFD3150CP43A-00; VFD3150CP43C-00; VFD3150CP43C-21; VFD3550CP43A-00; VFD3550CP43C-00;
VFD3550CP43C-21; VFD4000CP43A-00; VFD4000CP43C-00; VFD4000CP43C-21; VFD5000CP43A-00;
VFD5000CP43C-00; VFD5000CP43C-21; VFD5600CP43A-00; VFD5600CP43C-21; VFD6300CP43A-00;
VFD6300CP43C-21
1. Loosen the screw 1–4 and remove the top cover 2. Loosen the screw 5–12 and remove the top cover
(figure 1). Screw torque: 14–16 kg-cm / [12.2–13.9 (figure 2). Screw torque: 24–26 kg-cm / [20.8–22.6
lb-in] / [1.4–1.6 Nm] lb-in] / [2.4–2.5 Nm]
3
1
Figure 1 Figure 2
3. Press the latch to disconnect fan power (as shown in 4. Loosen the screw 13–18 and remove the fan.
the enlarged picture of figure 3). Screw torque: 24–26 kg-cm / [20.8–22.6 lb-in] /
[2.4–2.5 Nm] (as shown in figure 4)
15
15 14
14
13 13
18
17 18
16
17
16
Make sure the power is

properly disconnected
Pay attention to before removal.
the direction of
the latch
Figure 3 Figure 4
7-110
Frame H
Fan model『MKCHS-HFKM』Heat Sink Fan
Applicable model
Following models use three sets of MKCHS-HFKM:
VFD5000CP43A-00; VFD5000CP43C-00; VFD5000CP43C-21; VFD5600CP43A-00; VFD5600CP43C-21;
VFD6300CP43A-00; VFD6300CP43C-21
1. Loosen the screw 1–4 and remove the top cover 2. Loosen the screw 5–12 and remove the top cover
(figure 1) Screw torque: 14–16 kg-cm / [12.2–13.9 (figure 2). Screw torque: 24–26kg-cm / [20.8–22.6
Ib-in.] / [1.4–1.6 Nm] Ib-in.] / [2.4–2.5 Nm]
7
8
9
10
11
12
4 5
3 6
1
Figure 1
Figure 2
3. Press the latch to disconnect fan power, and cut the cable tie
Figure 3
4. Loosen the screw 13–24 and remove the fan.
Figure 4
7-111
Fan model『MKC-HFKM1』Heat Sink Fan

Applicable model
Following models use two sets of MKC-HFKM1:
VFD4000CP63A-00; VFD4000CP63A-21
1. Loosen the screw 1–4 and remove the top cover 2. Loosen the screw and remove the top cover (figure
(figure 1) Screw torque: 14–16 kg-cm / [12.2–13.9 2). Screw torque: 24–26kg-cm / [20.8–22.6 Ib-in.] /
Ib-in.] / [1.4–1.6 Nm] [2.4–2.5 Nm]
Figure 1 Figure 2
3. Disconnect the fan (figure 3). 4. Loosen the screw 1–4 (as shown below) and remove
the fan. Make sure fan power is disconnected before
removal. Screw torque: 24–26kg-cm / [20.8–22.6
Ib-in.] / [2.4–2.5 Nm]
Figure 3 Figure 4
7-112
Fan model『MKC-HFKM1』Heat Sink Fan

Applicable model
Following models use three sets of MKC-HFKM1:
VFD6300CP63A-21
1. Loosen the screw 1–4 and remove the top cover 2. Loosen the screw and remove the top cover (figure
(figure 1) Screw torque: 14–16 kg-cm / [12.2–13.9 2). Screw torque: 24–26kg-cm / [20.8–22.6 Ib-in.] /
Ib-in.] / [1.4–1.6 Nm] [2.4–2.5 Nm]
Figure 1 Figure 2
3. Disconnect the fan (figure 3). 4. Loosen the screw 1–6 (as shown below) and remove
the fan. Make sure fan power is disconnected before
removal. Screw torque: 24–26kg-cm / [20.8–22.6
Ib-in.] / [2.4–2.5 Nm]
Figure 3 Figure 4
7-113
7-10 Flange Mounting Kit

Applicable Models, Frame A–F
Frame A
『MKC-AFM1』
Applicable model
VFD022CP23A-21; VFD022CP43B-21; VFD022CP4EB-21; VFD037CP23A-21; VFD015CP53A-21;
Screw 1 *4
M3*P 0.5; L=6mm
Screw 2*8
M6*P 1.0; L=16mm
Accessories 1*1 Accessories 2*2 Accessories 3*2
『MKC-AFM』
Applicable model
VFD007CP4EA-21; VFD015CP23A-21; VFD015CP43B-21; VFD015CP4EB-21; VFD022CP23A-21;
VFD037CP43B-21; VFD037CP4EB-21; VFD055CP23A-21; VFD040CP43A-21; VFD040CP4EA-21;
VFD055CP43B-21; VFD055CP4EB-21; VFD075CP43B-21; VFD075CP4EB-21
Screw *8
M6*P 1.0; L=16mm
Accessory 2*2 Accessory 3*2
Cutout dimension Unit : mm [inch]

153.2 [6.03]
116.0 [4.57] 18.6 [0.73]
280.0 [11.02]
296.0 [11.65]
8.0 [0.31]
7-114
『MKC-AFM1』Installation
1. Install accessory 1 by fastening 4 of the screw 1(M3) (figure 1). Screw torque: 6–8 kg-cm / [5.21–6.94 Ib-in.] /
[0.6–0.8 Nm]
Figure 1
2. Install accessory 2&3 by fastening 2 of the screw 2 (M6) (figure 2). Screw torque: 25–30 kg-cm / [21.7–26 Ib-in.]
/ [2.5–2.9 Nm]
Figure 2
3. Install accessory 2&3 by fastening 2 of the screw 2(M6) (figure 3). Screw torque: 25–30 kg-cm / [21.7–26 Ib-in.]
/ [2.5–2.9 Nm]
Figure 3
4. Plate installation, place 4 of the screw 2 (M6) (figure 4) through accessory 2&3 and the plate then fasten the
screws. Screw torque: 25–30 kg-cm / [21.7–26 Ib-in.] / [2.5–2.9 Nm]
Figure 4
7-115
『MKC-AFM』 Installation
1. Install accessory 2 & 3 by fastening 2 of the screw 2 (M6). Screw torque: 25–30 kg-cm / [21.7–26 Ib-in.] / [2.5–2.9
Nm] (figure 1)
Figure 1
2. Install accessory 2 & 3 by fastening 2 of the screw 2 (M6). Screw torque: 25–30 kg-cm / [21.7–26 Ib-in.] /
[2.5–2.9 Nm] (figure 2)
Figure 2
3. Plate installation, place 4 of the screw *4 (M6) through accessory 2&3 and the plate, then fasten the screws.
Screw torque: 25–30 kg-cm / [21.7–26 Ib-in.] / [2.5–2.9 Nm] (figure 3)
Figure 3
7-116
Frame B
『MKC-BFM』
Applicable model
VFD075CP23A-21; VFD110CP23A-21; VFD110CP43B-21; VFD110CP4EB-21; VFD150CP23A-21;
Screw 1 *4–M8*P 1.25;

Screw 2*6–M6*P 1.0
7-117
246.8[9.72]
173.0 [6.81] 36.9 [1.45]
184.5[7.26]
350.0 [13.78]
369.0[14.53]
10.4 [0.41] 226.0[8.90]

9.5 [0.37]
7-118
『MKC-BFM』Installation
1. Install accessory 1& 2 by fastening 4 of the screw 1 (M8). Screw torque: 40–45 kg-cm / [34.7–39.0 Ib-in.] /
[3.9–4.4 Nm] (As shown in the following figure)
2. Plate installation, place 6 of the screw 2 (M6) through accessory 1&2 and the plate, then fasten the screws.
Screw torque: 25–30 kg-cm / [21.7–26 Ib-in.] / [2.5–2.9 Nm] (As shown in the following figure)
7-119
Frame C
『MKC-CFM』
Applicable model
VFD185CP23A-21; VFD220CP23A-21; VFD220CP43A-21; VFD220CP4EA-21; VFD300CP23A-21;
Screw 1*4 ~ M8*P 1.25;

Screw 2*8 ~ M6*P 1.0
Cut out dimension Unit : mm [inch]
286.0 [11.26]
258.0 [10.16]
231.0 [9.09]
402.0 [15.83]
430.0 [16.93]
140.0 [5.51]
M6*1.0 (8X) or
6.5 [ 0.26] (8X)
7-120
306.0 [12.05]
231.0 [9.09] 37.5 [1.48]
155.5 [6.12]
430.0 [16.93]
451.0 [17.76]
140.0 [5.51]
10.0 [0.39] 286.0 [11.26]

10.5 [0.41]
7-121
『MKC-CFM』Installation
1. Install accessory 1 & 2 by fastening 4 of the screw 1 (M8). Screw torque: 50–55 kg-cm / [43.4–47.7 Ib-in.] /
[4.9–5.4 Nm] (As shown in the following figure)
2. Plate installation, place 8 of the screw 2 (M6) through Accessory 1&2 and the plate, then fasten the screws.
Screw torque: 25–30 kg-cm / [21.7–26 Ib-in.] / [2.5–2.9 Nm] (As shown in the following figure)
7-122
Frame D0
Applicable model
Cutout dimension Unit: mm [inch]
M10*P1.5(4X)
OR 11.0[0.43](4X)
7-123
Frame D
Applicable model
M10*P1.5(4X)
OR 11.0[0.43](4X)
7-124
Frame E
Applicable model
VFD1100CP63A-21; VFD1320CP63A-00
7-125
Frame D0 & D & E Installation

1. Loosen 8 screws and remove Fixture 2 (as shown in 2. Loosen 10 screws and remove Fixture 1 (as shown
the following figure). in the following figure).
3. Fasten 4 screws (as shown in the following figure). 4. Fasten 5 screws (as shown in the following figure).
Screw torque: 30–32 kg-cm / [26.0–27.8 Ib-in.] / Screw torque: 30–32 kg-cm / [26.0–27.8 Ib-in.] /
[2.9–3.1 Nm] [2.9–3.1 Nm]
5. Fasten 4 screws (as shown in the following figure). 6. Fasten 5 screws (as shown in the following figure).
Screw torque: 24–26 kg-cm / [20.8–22.6 Ib-in.] / Screw torque: 24–26 kg-cm / [20.8–22.6 Ib-in.] /
[2.4–2.5 Nm] [2.4–2.5 Nm]
7. Place 4 screws (M10) through Fixture 1&2 and the plate then fasten the screws. (as shown in the following
figure)
Frame D0/D M10*4 Screw torque: 200–240 kg-cm / [173.6–208.3 Ib-in.] / [19.6–23.5 Nm]
Frame E M12*4 Screw torque: 300–400 kg-cm / [260–347 Ib-in.] / [29.4–39.2 Nm]
7-126
Frame F Installation
Applicable model
VFD1600CP43A-00; VFD1600CP43A-21; VFD1850CP43B-00; VFD1850CP43B-21; VFD1600CP63A-00;

M12*P1.75(4X)
OR 13.0[0.51](4X)
7-127
Frame F
1. Loosen 12 screws and remove Fixture 2. 2. Loosen 12 screws and remove Fixture 2.
Screw torque: 24–26 kg-cm / [20.8–22.6 Ib-in.] /
[2.4–2.5 Nm]
1
6
5 1
6
4 5
12 3
2
7
8
12 4
FIXTURE 2 3
9 7 2
10 8
11 FIXTURE2
9
10
11
3. Loosen screw 13–26 and remove Fixture 1. 4. Install Fixture 1 by fasten screw 13–26
Screw torque: 24–26 kg-cm / [20.8–22.6 Ib-in.] /
[2.4–2.5 Nm]
13
19
18 13
19
17
18
20 17
16
26 20
14
26
15 16
25 14
25 15
24
24
FIXTURE1
FIXTURE1
23
21 23
21
22 22
5. Place 4 of the M12 screws through Fixture 1&2 and plate then fasten the screws.
Screw torque: 300–400 kg-cm / [260–347 Ib-in.] / [29.4–39.2 Nm]
Screws M12*4
7-128
7-11 Power Terminal Kit

『MKC-PTCG』 (Applicable for Frame G models-VFDXXXCPXXA)
Applicable model
VFD2000CP43A-00/-21; VFD2200CP43A-00/-21; VFD2500CP43A-00/-21; VFD2800CP43A-00/-21; VFD2500CP63A-00/-21;
VFD3150CP63A-00/-21
(The MKC-PTCG is optional for the above models, after installation, the 12 pulse will be 6 pulse.)
Accessories Diagram of power terminal connection
Item Description Q’ty M12 Torque: 408 kg-cm / [354.1 lb-in] / [39.98 Nm]
1 Copper Assy. 3
1.1 Copper 3
1.2 Screw M12*25L 6
1.3 Spring 6
1.4 Washer 6
1.5 Nuts 6
『MKC-PTCG』Installation
1. Loosen the 4 screws on the cover, as shown in the following figure. Screw Torque: 12–15 kg-cm / [10.4–13
lb-in] / [1.2–1.5 Nm]
2. Remove the 5 screws from the FR4 board, as shown in the following figure. (The FR4 board is not needed
after the installation of the power terminal kit). Screw Torque: 12–15 kg-cm / [10.4–13 lb-in] / [1.2–1.5 Nm]
FR4 Board
7-129
3. Loosen the upper M8 nuts (1–6) with a sleeve wrench (12mm of the sleeve). M8 Torque: 90 kg / [78.1 lb-in] /
[8.8 Nm]
4. Install the 3pcs copper assy., as shown in the following figure 1. Fasten the upper M8 nuts (1–6) with a sleeve
wrench (12 mm of the sleeve), as shown in the figure 2 below.
M8 Torque: 180 kg-cm / [156.2 lb-in] / [17.65 Nm]
Figure 1 Figure 2
Copper Assy. Installation complete
Figure 3
5. Put the cover back and fasten the screws as shown in the figure below. Screw Torque: 12–15 kg-cm /
[10.4–13 lb-in] / [1.2–1.5 Nm]
7-130
7-12 USB/RS-485 Communication Interface IFD6530

Warning
 Please thoroughly read this instruction sheet before installation and putting it into use.
 The content of this instruction sheet and the driver file may be revised without prior notice. Please
consult our distributors or download the most updated instruction/driver version.
Introduction
IFD6530 is a convenient RS-485-to-USB converter, which does not require external power-supply and
complex setting process. It supports baud rate from 75 to 115.2 kbps and auto switching direction of data
transmission. In addition, it adopts RJ45 in RS-485 connector for users to wire conveniently. And its tiny dimension,
handy use of plug-and-play and hot-swap provide more conveniences for connecting all DELTA IABG products to
your PC.
Applicable Models: All DELTA IABG products.
(Application & Dimension)
Specifications
Power supply No external power is needed
Power consumption 1.5 W
Isolated voltage 2,500 VDC

75 Kbps, 150 Kbps, 300 Kbps, 600 Kbps, 1,200 Kbps, 2,400 Kbps, 4,800 Kbps, 9,600
Baud rate
Kbps, 19,200 Kbps, 38,400 Kbps, 57,600 Kbps, 115,200 Kbps
RS-485 connector RJ45
USB connector A type (plug)
Compatibility Full compliance with USB V2.0 specification
Max. cable length RS-485 Communication Port: 100 m
Support RS-485 half-duplex transmission

Figure 7-88
7-131
 RJ45
PIN Description PIN Description
1 Reserved 5 SG+
2 Reserved 6 GND
3 GND 7 Reserved
4 SG- 8 +9V
Preparations before Driver Installation

Extract the driver file (IFD6530_Drivers.exe) by following steps. Download the driver file (IFD6530_Drivers.exe) at
www.deltaww.com/iadownload_acmotordrive/IFD6530_Drivers.
NOTE DO NOT connect IFD6530 to PC before extracting the driver file.
STEP 1 STEP 2
STEP 3 STEP 4
STEP 5
You should have a folder marked SiLabs under drive C. c:\ SiLabs
7-132
Driver Installation
After connecting IFD6530 to PC, please install driver by following steps.
7-133
LED Display
1. Steady Green LED ON: power is ON.
2. Blinking orange LED: data is transmitting.
7-134
Chapter 8 Option CardsCP2000
Chapter 8 Option Cards
8-1 Option Card Installation
8-2 EMC-D42A -- Extension card for 4-point digital input / 2-point digital input
8-3 EMC-D611A -- Extension card for 6-point digital input (110VAC input voltage)
8-4 EMC-R6AA -- Relay output extension card (6-point N.O. output contact)
8-5 EMC-BPS01 -- +24V power card
8-6 EMC-A22A -- Extension card for 2-point analog input / 2-point analog output
8-7 CMC-PD01 -- Communication card, PROFIBUS DP
8-8 CMC-DN01 -- Communication card, DeviceNet
8-9 CMC-EIP01 -- Communication card, EtherNet/IP
8-10 CMC-PN01 -- Communication card, PROFINET
8-11 eZVFD-CC -- Communication card, BACnet Ethernet / BACnet IP
8-12 EMC-COP01 -- Communication card, CANopen
8-13 Delta Standard Fieldbus Cables
8-1
 Select applicable option cards for your drive or contact local distributor for suggestion.
 To prevent damage to the drive during installation, remove the digital keypad and the cover before
wiring. Refer to the following instruction.
 The option card does not support hot swap function. Turn the power off before installing or removing
the option card.
8-1 Option Card Installation

8-1-1 Remove the top cover
Frame A–C
Screw Torque: 8–10 kg-cm / [6.9–8.7 lb-in.] / [0.8–1.0 Nm]
Frame D0
Frame D
8-2
Frame E
Screw Torque: 12–15 kg-cm / [10.4–13 lb-in.] / [1.2–1.5 Nm]
Frame F
Frame G
8-3
Frame H
8-1-2 Option Card Installation Location

1 RJ45 (Socket) for digital keypad KPC-CC01
Refer to Section 10 for more details on digital keypad.
○
1 Refer to Section 10 for more details on optional accessory
Slot 3 RJ45 extension cable.
○
3
2 Communication extension card (Slot 1)
Slot 2 CMC-PD01; CMC-DN01; CMC-EIP01; EMC-COP01;
○
4
Slot 1
○
2
CMC-PN01
3 I/O & Relay extension card (Slot 3)
EMC-D42A; EMC-D611A; EMC-A22A; EMC-R6AA;
EMC-BPS01
4 PG Card (Slot 2)
※CP2000 do not support PG card.
Screws Specification for optional card terminals:

Wire gauge 0.2–0.5 mm2 [26–20 AWG ]
EMC-D42A; EMC-D611A; EMC-BPS01
Torque 5 kg-cm / [4.4 Ib-in.] / [0.5 Nm]
Wire gauge 0.2–0.5 mm2 [26–20 AWG ]
EMC-R6AA
Torque 8 kg-cm / [7 Ib-in.] / [0.8 Nm]
Wire gauge 0.2–4 mm2 [24–12 AWG]
EMC-A22A
Torque 5 kg-cm / [4.4 lb-in] / [0.5 Nm]
8-4
Communication extension card (Slot 1)

CMC-PD01 CMC-DN01
CMC-EIP01 EMC-COP01
CMC-PN01
8-5
I/O / Relay extension card & 24V Power extension card (Slot 3)
EMC-D42A EMC-R6AA
EMC-BPS01 EMC-D611A
EMC-A22A
8-6
8-1-3 Install and Uninstall of Extension Cards

8-1-3-1 Installation
Communication card: EMC-COP01, CMC-EIP01, CMC-DN01, CMC-PD01, CMC-PN01
8-7
I/O & Relay Card: EMC-D42A, EMC-D611A, EMC-R6AA, EMC-BPS01, EMC-A22A
8-8
8-1-3-2 Disconnect the extension card
Communication Card: EMC-COP01, CMC-EIP01, CMC-DN01, CMC-PD01, CMC-PN01
8-9
I/O & Relay Card: EMC-D42A, EMC-D611A, EMC-R6AA, EMC-BPS01, EMC-A22A
8-10
8-2 EMC-D42A -- Extension card for 4-point digital input / 2-point digital input
Common for Multi-function input terminals
COM Select SINK (NPN) / SOURCE (PNP) in J1 jumper / external power
supply
Refer to Pr.02-26–Pr.02-29 to program the multi-function inputs
MI10–MI13.
Internal power is applied from terminal E24: +24 VDC ± 5% 200 mA,
MI10–MI13 5W
External power +24 VDC: max. voltage 30 VDC, min. voltage 19 VDC
ON: the activation current is 6.0 mA
OFF: leakage current tolerance is 10 μA
I/O Extension Multi-function output terminals (photocoupler)
Card The AC motor drive releases various monitor signals, such as drive
in operation, frequency attained and overload indication, via
transistor (open collector).
MO10–MO11
MO10
MO11
MXM
Common for multi-function output terminals MO10, MO11 (photo
MXM coupler)
Max 48 VDC 50 mA
8-3 EMC-D611A -- Extension card for 6-point digital input (110VAC input voltage)
AC AC power Common for multi-function input terminal (Neutral)
Refer to Pr.02-26–Pr.02-31 for multi-function input selection
Input voltage: 100–130 VAC
I/O Extension
Input frequency: 47–63 Hz
Card
MI10–MI15 Input impedance: 27 kΩ
Terminal response time:
ON: 10 ms
OFF: 20 ms
8-4 EMC-R6AA
Refer to Pr.02-36–Pr.02-41 for multi-function relay selection
Resistive load:
3 A (N.O.) / 250 VAC
Relay Extension 5 A (N.O.) / 30 VDC
RA10–RA15
Card Inductive load (COS 0.4)
RC10–RC15
1.2 A (N.O.) / 250 VAC
2.0 A (N.O.) / 30 VDC
It is used to output each monitor signal, such as drive is in
operation, frequency attained or overload indication.
8-11
8-5 EMC-BPS01 -- +24V power card

Input power: 24 V ± 5%
Maximum input current: 0.5 A
Note:
Do not connect drive control terminal GND directly to the
EMC-BPS01 input terminal GND.
Function: When the drive is only powered by EMC-BPS01, the
communication can be assured and support all communication
External Power
24V cards and following functions:
Supply
GND Parameters read and write
Keypad can be displayed
Keypad button can be operated (except RUN)
Analog input is effective
Multi-input (FWD, REV, MI1–MI8) needs external power supply to
operate
Following functions are not supported：
Relay output (including extension card), PG card, PLC function
8-12
8-6 EMC-A22A -- Extension card for 2-point analog input / 2-point analog output
8-6-1 Product File
1. Screw fixing hole

2. Positioning hole
3. POWER indicator
4. Switch
5. Fool-proof groove
6. Terminal block
7. AC motor drive connection
port
8-6-2 Terminal Specification

Refer to Pr.14-00–Pr.14-01 for function selection (input), and
Pr.14-18–Pr.14-19 for mode selection.
There are two sets of AI port, SSW3 (AI10) and SSW4 (AI11), which can be
switched to Voltage or Current mode.
Voltage mode: Input 0–10 V
Current mode: Input 0–20 mA / 4–20 mA
Analog voltage frequency
command
Impedance: 20 kΩ
Range: 0–10 V = 0–Max. Output Frequency
AI10, AI11
(Pr.01-00)
Switch: AI10 / AI11 Switch, default 0–10 V
Analog I/O
Extension Card
Analog current frequency
command Impedance: 250 Ω
Range: 0–20 mA / 4–20 mA = 0–Max. Output
Switch: AI10 / AI11 Switch, default 0–10 V
Refer to Pr.14-12–Pr.14-13 for function selection (output), and

Pr.14-36–Pr.14-37 for mode selection.
There are two sets of AO port, SSW1 (AO10) and SSW2 (AO11), which can
AO10, AO11
be switched to Voltage or Current mode.
Voltage mode: Output 0–10 V
Current mode: Output 0–20 mA / 4–20 mA
8-13
Multi-function analog AVO:

output 0–10 V Max. output current 2 mA, Max. load 5 kΩ
Resolution: 0–10 V corresponds to Max.
operation frequency
Switch: AO10 / AO11 Switch, default 0–10 V
ACO:
0–20 mA Max. Load 500 Ω
Resolution: 0–20 mA / 4–20 mA corresponds to
Max. operation frequency
Switch: AO10 / AO11 Switch, default 0–10 V
ACM Analog Signal Common Common for analog terminals
8-14
8-7 CMC-PD01 -- Communication card, PROFIBUS DP
8-7-1 Features
1. Supports PZD control data exchange.
2. Supports PKW polling AC motor drive parameters.
3. Supports user diagnosis function.
4. Auto-detects baud rates; supports Max. 12 Mbps.
8-7-2 Product Profile
1. NET indicator
2. POWER indicator
3. Positioning hole
port
5. PROFIBUS DP connection
port
8-7-3 Specifications
PROFIBUS DP Connector
Interface DB9 connector
Transmission method High-speed RS-485
Transmission cable Shielded twisted pair cable
Electrical isolation 500 VDC
Communication
Message type Cyclic data exchange
Module name CMC-PD01
GSD document DELA08DB.GSD
Company ID 08DB (HEX)
Serial transmission 9.6 Kbps; 19.2 Kbps; 93.75 Kbps; 187.5 Kbps; 500 Kbps; 1.5 Mbps; 3 Mbps;
speed supported
(auto-detection) 6 Mbps; 12 Mbps (bit /per second)
Electrical Specification
Power supply voltage 5 VDC (supplied by AC motor drive)
Insulation voltage 500 VDC
Power consumption 1W
Weight 28 g
8-15
Environment
ESD (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-2)
EFT (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-4)
Noise immunity
Surge Teat (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-5)
Conducted Susceptibility Test (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-6)
Operation: -10ºC–50ºC (temperature), 90% (humidity)
Operation /storage
Storage: -25ºC–70ºC (temperature), 95% (humidity)
Shock / vibration International standards: IEC61131-2, IEC60068-2-6 (TEST Fc) / IEC61131-2 &
resistance IEC60068-2-27 (TEST Ea)
8-7-4 Installation
PROFIBUS DP Connector
PIN PIN name Definition
1 - Not defined
2 - Not defined 9 5
3 Rxd/Txd-P Sending/receiving data P(B)
4 - Not defined
5 DGND Data reference ground
6 1
6 VP Power voltage – positive
7 - Not defined
8 Rxd/Txd-N Sending/receiving data N(A)
9 - Not defined
8-7-5 LED Indicator & Troubleshooting

There are 2 LED indicators on CMC-PD01: POWER LED and NET LED. POWER LED displays the
status of the working power. NET LED displays the connection status of the communication.
POWER LED
LED status Indication How to correct it
Green light ON Power supply in normal status. --
Check if the connection between CMC-PD01 and AC
OFF No power
motor drive is normal.
NET LED
Green light ON Normal status --
CMC-PD01 is not connected to
Red light ON Connect CMC-PD01 to PROFIBUS DP bus.
PROFIBUS DP bus.
Red light Invalid PROFIBUS communication Set the PROFIBUS address of CMC-PD01 between 1–
flashes address 125 (decimal)
Orange light CMC-PD01 fails to communicate Switch off the power and check whether CMC-PD01 is
flashes with AC motor drive. correctly and normally connected to AC motor drive.
8-16
8-8 CMC-DN01 -- Communication card, DeviceNet

8-8-1 Functions
1. Based on the high-speed communication interface of Delta HSSP protocol, able to conduct
immediate control to AC motor drive.
2. Supports Group 2 only connection and polling I/O data exchange.
3. For I/O mapping, supports Max. 32 words of input and 32 words of output.
4. Supports EDS file configuration in DeviceNet configuration software.
5. Supports all baud rates on DeviceNet bus: 125 Kbps, 250 Kbps, 500 Kbps and extendable
serial transmission speed mode.
6. Node address and serial transmission speed can be set up on AC motor drive.
7. Power supplied from AC motor drive.
1. NS indicator
2. MS indicator
3. POWER indicator
4. Positioning hole
5. DeviceNet connection port
port
DeviceNet Connector
Interface 5-PIN open removable connector of 5.08 mm PIN interval
Transmission method CAN
Transmission cable Shielded twisted pair cable (with 2 power cables)
Transmission speed 125 Kbps, 250 Kbps, 500 Kbps and extendable serial transmission speed mode
Network protocol DeviceNet protocol
AC Motor Drive Connection Port

Interface 50 PIN communication terminal
Transmission method SPI communication
1. Communicating with AC motor drive
Terminal function
2. Transmitting power supply from AC motor drive
Communication
Delta HSSP protocol
protocol
8-17
Power supply voltage 5 VDC (supplied by AC motor drive)
Communication wire
0.85 W
power consumption
Power consumption 1W
Weight 23 g
Environment
ESD (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 61000-4-2)
EFT (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 61000-4-4)
Noise immunity
Surge Test (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 61000-4-5)
Conducted Susceptibility Test (IEC 61800-5-1,IEC 61000-4-6)
Operation: -10ºC–50ºC (temperature), 90% (humidity)
Operation /storage
Storage: -25ºC–70ºC (temperature), 95% (humidity)
Shock / vibration International standards: IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-6 / IEC 61800-5-1, IEC
resistance 60068-2-27
8-8-4 Installation
DeviceNet Connector
PIN Signal Color Definition
1 V+ Red DC24V 1
2
2 H White Signal+
3
3 S - Earth 4
4 L Blue Signal- 5
5 V- Black 0V

There are 3 LED indicators on CMC-DN01: POWER LED, MS LED and NS LED. POWER LED
displays the status of power supply. MS LED and NS LED are dual-color LED, displaying the
connection status of the communication and error messages.
POWER LED

OFF Power supply in abnormal status. Check the power supply of CMC-DN01.
Green light ON Power supply in normal status --
8-18
NS LED
1. Check the power of CMC-DN01 and see if the
connection is normal.
No power supply or CMC-DN01 has 2. Make sure at least one or more nodes are on the
OFF
not completed MAC ID test yet. bus.
3. Check if the serial transmission speed of
CMC-DN01 is the same as that of other nodes.
1. Configure CMC-DN01 to the scan list of the
Green light CMC-DN01 is on-line but has not master.
flashes established connection to the master.
2. Re-download the configured data to the master.
CMC-DN01 is on-line and is normally
Green light ON --
connected to the master
Red light CMC-DN01 is on-line, but I/O 1. Check if the network connection is normal.
flashes connection is timed-out. 2. Check if the master operates normally.
1. Make sure all the MAC IDs on the network are
not repeated.
1. The communication is down. 2. Check if the network installation is normal.
2. MAC ID test failure. 3. Check if the baud rate of CMC-DN01 is
Red light ON
3. No network power supply. consistent with that of other nodes.
4. CMC-DN01 is off-line. 4. Check if the node address of CMC-DN01 is
illegal.
5. Check if the network power supply is normal.
MS LED
Check the power supply of CMC-DN01 and see if
OFF No power supply or being off-line
the connection is normal.
Green light
Waiting for I/O data Switch the master PLC to RUN status
flashes
Green light ON I/O data are normal --
Red light 1. Reconfigure CMC-DN01
Mapping error
flashes 2. Re-power AC motor drive
1. See the error code displayed on AC motor drive.
Red light ON Hardware error
2. Send back to the factory for repair if necessary.
If the flashing lasts for a long time, turn off the
Orange light CMC-DN01 is establishing connection power and check if CMC-DN01 and AC motor drive
flashes with AC motor drive. are correctly installed and normally connected to
each other.
8-19
8-9 CMC-EIP01 -- Communication card, EtherNet/IP

8-9-1 Features
1. Supports Ethernet/IP and Modbus TCP protocol
2. User-defined corresponding parameters (EIP V1.06 and above)
3. Simple firewall function for IP Filter
4. MDI/MDI-X auto-detect
5. Baud rate: 10/100 Mbps auto-detect mail alarm

[Figure1]

2. Positioning hole
port
4. LINK indicator
5. RJ45 connection port
6. POWER indicator
Network Interface
Interface RJ45 with Auto MDI/MDIX
Number of ports 1 Port
Transmission method IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u
Transmission cable Category 5e shielding 100M
Transmission speed 10/100 Mbps Auto-Detect
Network protocol ICMP, IP, TCP, UDP, DHCP, BOOTP, SMTP, EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP
Weight 25 g
Power supply voltage 5 VDC
8-20
Environment
ESD (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-2)
EFT (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-4)
Noise immunity
Surge Test (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-5)
Operation: -10°C–50°C (temperature), 90% (humidity)
Operation/storage
Storage: -25°C–70°C (temperature), 95% (humidity)
Vibration/shock
International standard: IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-6/IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-27
immunity
8-9-4 Installation
Connecting CMC-EIP01 to Network
1. Turn off the power of AC motor drive.

2. Open the cover of AC motor drive.
3. Connect CAT-5e network cable to RJ45 port on
CMC-EIP01 (See the figure on the right).
RJ45 PIN Definition
PIN Signal Definition PIN Signal Definition

Positive pole for
1 Tx+ 5 -- N/C
data transmission
Negative pole for Negative pole for
2 Tx- 6 Rx-
data transmission data receiving
Positive pole for
3 Rx+ 7 -- N/C
data receiving
4 -- N/C 8 -- N/C
8-9-5 Communication Parameters for CP2000 Connected to Ethernet

When the CP2000 is connected to an Ethernet network, set up the communication parameters for it
according to the table below. The Ethernet master is only able to read/write the frequency word and
control word of CP2000 after the communication parameters are set.
Parameter Function Set value (Dec) Explanation

Source of frequency The frequency command is controlled by
Pr.00-20 8
command setting communication card.
Source of operation The operation command is controlled by
Pr.00-21 5
Decoding method for The decoding method for Delta AC motor
Pr.09-30 0
communication drive
Pr.09-75 IP setting 0 Static IP(0) / Dynamic distribution IP(1)
Pr.09-76 IP address -1 192 IP address 192.168.1.5
8-21
Parameter Function Set value (Dec) Explanation

Pr.09-80 Netmask -1 255 Netmask 255.255.255.0
Pr.09-84 Default gateway -1 192 Default gateway 192.168.1.1

There are 2 LED indicators on CMC-EIP01: POWER LED and LINK LED. The POWER LED
displays the status of power supply, and the LINK LED displays the connection status of the
communication.
LED Indicators
LED Status Indication How to correct it
ON Power supply in normal status --
POWER Green
OFF No power supply Check the power supply.
Network connection in normal
ON --
status
LINK Green Flashes Network in operation --
Check if the network cable is
OFF Network not connected
connected.
Troubleshooting
Abnormality Cause How to correct it

Check if AC motor drive is powered, and if the
AC motor drive not powered
power supply is normal.
POWER LED OFF
CMC-EIP01 not connected to Make sure CMC-EIP01 is connected to AC motor
AC motor drive drive.
CMC-EIP01 not connected to Make sure the network cable is correctly connected
network to network.
LINK LED OFF
Poor contact to RJ45 Make sure RJ45 connector is connected to
connector Ethernet port.
CMC-EIP01 not connected to
Make sure CMC-EIP01 is connected to network.
network
No communication
card found PC and CMC-EIP01 in
Search by IP or set up relevant settings by AC
different networks and blocked
motor drive keypad.
by network firewall.
CMC-EIP01 not connected to Make sure CMC-EIP01 is connected to the

network network.
Fail to open Incorrect communication Make sure the communication setting in DCISoft is
CMC-EIP01 setup setting in DCISoft set to Ethernet.
page PC and CMC-EIP01 in
different networks and blocked Conduct the setup by AC motor drive keypad.
by network firewall.
8-22
Abnormality Cause How to correct it

Able to open Check if the network setting for CMC-EIP01 is
CMC-EIP01 setup correct. For the Intranet setting in your company,
Incorrect network setting in
page but fail to consult your IT staff. For the Internet setting in your
CMC-EIP01
utilize webpage home, refer to the network setting instruction
monitoring provided by your ISP.
Incorrect network setting in Check if the network setting for CMC-EIP01 is
CMC-EIP01 correct.
Fail to send e-mail
Incorrect mail server setting Confirm the IP address for SMTP-Server.
8-23
8-10 CMC-PN01 – Communication card, PROFINET

8-10-1 Features
CMC-PN01 connects CP2000 to PROFINET, so the drive is able to exchange data with the upper unit. It
is a simple NET solution, which can reduce the cost and time of connection/ installing factory automation,
also provide compatibility of similar components from multiple suppliers.
Connect CMC-PN01 to CP2000 via PROFINET device:
1. Control the AC motor drive via PROFINET
2. Change the drive parameters via PROFINET
3. Monitor the drive status via PROFINET

2. Positioning hole
3. Ready out indicator
4. MT out indicator
5. SD indicator
6. BF out indicator
7. ACT PHY2 indicator
8. Link PHY2 indicator
9. ACT PHY1 indicator
10. Link PHY1 indicator
11. Switch
12.Fool-proof groove
(Port 2)
(Port 1)
15. Connection port of
control board
MAC Address label definition
Def. Explanation
MAC1 Port 1 MAC Address

MAC2 Port 2 MAC Address
MAC3 Interface MAC Address
8-24
Network Interface
Interface RJ45
Number of ports 2 ports
Transmission method IEEE 802.3
Transmission cable Category 5e shielding 100 M
Transmission speed 10/100 Mbps auto-negotiate
Network protocol PROFINET
Power supply voltage 5 VDC
Weight (g) 27
Environment
ESD (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-2)
EFT (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-4)
Noise immunity
Surge Test (IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 61000-4-5)
Operation -10°C–50°C (temperature), 90% (humidity)
Storage -25°C–70°C (temperature), 95% (humidity)
Vibration / Shock International standard: IEC 61800-5-1, IEC 60068-2-6 / IEC 61800-5-1,
immunity IEC 60068-2-27
8-10-4 RJ45 PIN Definition
RJ45 PIN No. Signal Definition
1 Tx+ Positive pole for data transmission

2 Tx- Negative pole for data transmission
3 Rx+ Positive pole for data receiving
4 -- N/C
5 -- N/C
6 Rx- Negative pole for data receiving
7 -- N/C
8 -- N/C
8-25
8-10-5 Communication Parameters for CP2000 Conneted to PROFINET
When operating CP2000 via CMC-PN01, set the control and operation command as controlled by
communication card. When CP2000 is connected to PROFINET network, set up the
communication parameters according to the table below.
Parameter Set value (Dec) Explanation
Pr.00-20 8 The frequency command is controlled by communication card.

Pr.00-21 5 The operation command is controlled by communication card.
Pr.09-30 1 Set Pr.09-30 to 60xx or 20xx as the decoding method.
Identification: when CMC-PN01 is connected, Pr.09-60 will show
Pr.09-60 12
value 12.
8-10-6 LED Indicator

LED Status Indication
ON PN Stack operates in normal status
Ready out Yellow PN Stack operates in normal status, and
Flashes
waiting to sync with MCU
OFF PN Stack operates with error
MT out Green - -
SD Red - -
Connection with PROFINET Controller

ON
breaks off
Connection is normal, but an error occurs
BF out Red Flashes to the communication with PROFINET
Controller
Connection with PROFINET Controller is
OFF
normal
ON Online, exchanging data with the master
Off line, but handshaking data with the
ACT PHY1 Orange Flashes
master
OFF Initial status
ON Network connection is normal
LINK PHY1 Green
OFF Network is not connected
ON On line, exchanging data with the master
Off line, but handshaking data with the
ACT PHY2 Orange Flashes
master
OFF Initial status
ON Network connection is normal
LINK PHY2 Green
OFF Network is not connected
8-26
8-10-7 Network Connection
Wiring of CMC-PN01 is as following:
When the hardware is installed and power on, the current set value of Pr.09-60 will be 12, and
shows “PROFINET” on the display. If the above information does not show on the display, check
the version of CP2000 and the connection of the card.
8-27
8-11 eZVFD-CC – Communication card, BACnet Ethernet/BACnet IP

8-11-1 Features
The eZVFD-CC Integration Module provides BACnet/IP and BACnet over Ethernet communication to
BACnet compliant devices. When used with a Delta Controls system, you can use the module’s GCL+
programs and Delta Controls internal control loops to directly control pumps and fan motors. Quickly
configure and save drive parameters in enteliWEB and load the saved configuration onto other
CP2000 AC motor drives over the BACnet network. Features include:
 Native BACnet firmware
 BACnet/IP, BACnet over Ethernet communication protocols
 Fully programmable in GCL+ (Delta Controls General Control Language)
 Dual port ethernet to support daisy-chaining multiple CP2000 devices
 Monitor and utilize CP2000 AC motor drive I/O terminals as BACnet I/O
 Set up and configure using enteliWEB. Use enteliWEB to read, write, save and load CP2000 AC
motor drive parameters.
1. Screw fixing hole 1

2. Screw fixing hole 2
3. Positioning hole
4. Status and Power LED
6. RJ45 Ethernet Port 1
7. RJ45 Ethernet Port 2
port
MAC address is displayed in the IPS object in entelliWEB.
Network Interface
Interface RJ45
Number of ports 2 ports
Daisy chaining Up to 30 devices (daisy chain is discontinued if drive is not powered)
Transmission method IEEE 802.3
Transmission cable 10/100BaseT CAT5E/CAT6
Maximum length 100m (port-to-port)
Transmission speed 10/100 Mbps auto-negotiate
Network protocol BACnet/IP or BACnet/Ethernet
8-28
Power supply voltage 5 VDC (supplied by AC Motor Drive)
Power consumption <2W
Weight (g) 2.6g
32-bit CPU, field upgradeable firmware, real-time clock with supercapacitor
Technology
backup
Environment
CE IEC 61800-3, EMC Standard for Variable Speed Drives
Compliance
LVD IEC 61800-5-1 Safety Requirements for Electrical Power Drive Systems
Operation 0°C to 55°C (temperature), 10% to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Storage -25°C–70°C (temperature), 95% RH
RJ45 PIN No. Signal Definition
1 Tx+ Positive pole for data transmission

2 Tx- Negative pole for data transmission
3 Rx+ Positive pole for data receiving
4 -- N/C
5 -- N/C
6 Rx- Negative pole for data receiving
7 -- N/C
8 -- N/C
8-11-5 Communication Parameters for CP2000 Connected to eZVFD-CC BACnet

Controller
When operating the CP2000 using the eZVFD-CC card you must set the parameters according to
the table below:
Set value
Parameter Function Explanation
(Dec)
Source of frequency The frequency command is controlled by
Pr.00-20 8
Source of operation The operation command is controlled by
Pr.00-21 5
Decoding method for Decoding method 2 (Refer to address:
Pr.09-30 1
communication 6000h – 60FFh)
Identification for When eZVFD-CC is connected, Pr.09-60
Pr.09-60 Read-only
Communication Card will show value 8 (BACnet IP)
8-29
The following parameters should be set according to your desired network configuration. The table
below shows default values:
Parameter Function Default value (Dec) Explanation
Pr.04-50 UDP port number 47808 UDP/IP communication port
BACnet network BACnet/Ethernet: 19999

Pr.04-51 Depends on setting of Pr.09-91
number BACnet/IP: 49999
BACnet device 4100000 + (last 4 hex in

This value is added to the value of
Pr.09-52 address, low word MAC address in
Pr.09-53 * 65536
(range 0-65535) decimal)
BACnet device
This value is multiplied by 65536
Pr.09-53 address, high word -
and added to the value of Pr.09-52
(range 0-63)
0: Static IP
Pr.09-75 IP setting 0
1: Dynamic Distribution IP (DHCP)
BACnet IP or 0: BACnet/ Ethernet
Pr.09-91 1
Ethernet 1: BACnet/IP
If static IP is chosen (Pr.09-75 = 0), then the following parameters must be set according to your
local network configuration:
Set value
Parameter Function Explanation
(Dec)
8-30
8-11-6 LED Indicator

Color LED Pattern Indication
Red On Hardware startup before system is running
Blinks in a regular repeating pattern Hardware failure
Red
1 second on, 1 second off.
Blinks in a regular repeating pattern
Green OK
1 second on, 1 second off.
Amber Blinks at approx. 100 Hz Flash loading Main from Boot
Amber On Database saving or restoring from Flash
8-31
8-12 EMC-COP01 -- Communication card, CANopen

8-12-1 Terminal Resistor Position

Pin Pin name Definition
1 CAN_H CAN_H bus line (dominant high)
2 CAN_L CAN_L bus line (dominant low)
3 CAN_GND Ground/0V/V-
RS-485 socket 7 CAN_GND Ground/0V/V-
Interface RJ45
Number of ports 1 Port
Transmission method CAN
Transmission cable CAN standard cable
Transmission speed 1 Mbps, 500 Kbps, 250 Kbps, 125 Kbps, 100 Kbps, 50 Kbps
Communication protocol CANopen
8-32
8-13 Delta Standard Fieldbus Cables

Delta Cables Part Number Description Length
UC-CMC003-01A CANopen Cable, RJ45 Connector 0.3 m
UC-CMC010-01A CANopen Cable, RJ45 Connector 1m
CANopen Cable UC-CMC020-01A CANopen Cable, RJ45 Connector 2m
UC-CMC100-01A CANopen Cable, RJ45 Connector 10 m
UC-CMC200-01A CANopen Cable, RJ45 Connector 20 m
UC-DN01Z-01A DeviceNet Cable 305 m

DeviceNet Cable
UC-DN01Z-02A DeviceNet Cable 305 m
UC-EMC003-02A Ethernet/EtherCAT cable, Shielding 0.3 m
UC-EMC005-02A Ethernet/EtherCAT cable, Shielding 0.5 m
UC-EMC010-02A Ethernet/EtherCAT cable, Shielding 1m
Ethernet / EtherCAT UC-EMC020-02A Ethernet/EtherCAT cable, Shielding 2m

Cable
UC-EMC050-02A Ethernet/EtherCAT cable, Shielding 5m
UC-EMC100-02A Ethernet/EtherCAT cable, Shielding 10 m
UC-EMC200-02A Ethernet/EtherCAT cable, Shielding 20 m
TAP-CN01 1 in 2 out, built-in 121Ω terminal resistor 1 in 2 out
CANopen / DeviceNet TAP-CN02 1 in 4 out, built-in 121Ω terminal resistor 1 in 4 out

TAP
1 in 4 out, RJ45 connector, built-in 121Ω
TAP-CN03 1 in 4 out
terminal resistor
PROFIBUS Cable UC-PF01Z-01A PROFIBUS DP Cable 305 m
8-33
8-34
Chapter 09 SpecificationsCP2000
Chapter 9 Specifications
9-1 230V Models
9-2 460V Models
9-3 575V Models
9-4 690V Models
9-5 Environment for Operation, Storage and Transportation
9-6 Specification for Operation Temperature and Protection Level
9-7 Derating Curve for Ambient Temperature, Altitude and Carrier
Frequency
9-8 Efficiency Curve
9-1
9-1 230V Models

Frame A B C D E
Model: VFD_ _ _CP23_-_ 007 015 022 037 055 075 110 150 185 220 300 370 450 550 750 900
Rated output
2 3 4 6 8.4 12 18 24 30 36 42 58 72 86 110 128
capacity [kVA]
Rated output
5 7.5 10 15 21 31 46 61 75 90 105 146 180 215 276 322
current [A]
Applicable motor
0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
output [kW]
Light Duty
Applicable motor
1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125
output [HP]
Overload tolerance 120% of rated current for 1 minute during every 5 minutes
Max. output
599.00 400.00
frequency [Hz]
Carrier frequency 2–9
*Output Rating
2–15 (Default: 8) 2–10 (Default: 6)

[kHz] (Default: 4 )
Rated output
1.2 2 3.2 4.4 6.8 10 13 20 26 30 36 48 58 72 86 102
capacity [kVA]
Rated output
3 5 8 11 17 25 33 49 65 75 90 120 146 180 215 255
current [A]
Applicable motor
0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 19 22 30 37 45 55 75
output [kW]
Normal Duty
Applicable motor
0.5 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100
output [HP]
120% of rated current for 1 minute during every 5 minutes;
Overload tolerance
160% of rated current for 3 seconds during every 25 seconds
Max. output
599.00 400.00
frequency [Hz]
Carrier frequency 2–9
2–15 ( Default: 8) 2–10 (Default: 6)
[kHz] (Default: 4)
Light duty 6.4 9.6 15 22 25 35 50 65 83 100 116 146 180 215 276 322
Input
current [A] Normal
3.9 6.4 12 16 20 28 36 52 72 83 99 124 143 171 206 245
Input Rating
duty
Rated voltage /
3 phase, 200–240 VAC [-15%– +10%], 50/60 Hz
Frequency
Operating voltage
170–264 VAC
range
Frequency tolerance 47–63 Hz
Efficiency [%] 97.8 98.2
Power Factor > 0.98
Weight [Kg] 2.6 ± 0.3 5.4 ± 1 9.8 ± 1.5 38.5 ± 1.5 64.8 ± 1.5
Natural
Cooling method Fan cooling
cooling
Braking chopper Frame A, B, C: Built-in Frame D above: Optional
DC choke Frame A, B, C: Optional Frame D above: Built-in 3%
EMC Filter Optional
NOTE Table 9-1
 The carrier frequency is default. Increasing the carrier frequency requires a reduction in current. Refer to Chapter 9-7
Derating Curve of Ambient Temperature.
 Select the AC motor drive with capacity one grade larger for the impact load application.
 Refer to Chapter 9-6 Specification for Operation Temperature and Protection Level for the protection level of each model.
 *The default setting is Light Duty, you can select Normal Duty and Light Duty by setting Pr.00-16.
9-2
9-2 460V Models

Frame A B C D0
Model VFD_ _ _CP43_-_ _
007 015 022 037 040 055 075 110 150 185 220 300 370 450 550
Model VFD_ _ _CP4E_-_ _
Rated output
2.4 3.3 4.4 6.8 8.4 10.4 14.3 19 25 30 36 48 58 73 88
capacity [kVA]
Rated output current
3 4.2*2 5.5*2 8.5*2 10.5 13*2 18*2 24*2 32*2 38*2 45 60*2 73*2 91 110
[A]
Applicable motor
0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
output [kW]
Light duty
Applicable motor
1 2 3 5 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75
output [HP]
Max.output
599.00
frequency [Hz]
Carrier frequency
Output rating

[kHz]
Rated output
2.2 2.4 3.2 4.8 7.2 8.4 10.4 14.3 19 25 30 36 48 58 73
capacity [kVA]
Rated output current
1.7 3.0 4.0 6.0 9.0 10.5 12 18 24 32 38 45 60 73 91
[A]
*1
Applicable motor
0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45
output [kW]
Normal duty
Applicable motor
0.5 1 2 3 5 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 53 60
output [HP]
Overload tolerance
160% of rated current for 3 seconds during every 25 seconds
Max.output
599.00
frequency [Hz]
Carrier frequency
[kHz]
Light duty 4.3 6 8.1 12.4 16 20 22 26 35 42 50 66 80 91 110
Input
current [A] Normal
3.5 4.3 5.9 8.7 14 15.5 17 20 26 35 40 47 63 74 101
Input rating
duty
Rated voltage /
3 phase, 380–480 VAC [-15%– +10%), 50/60 Hz
Frequency
Operating voltage range 323–528 VAC
Efficiency [%] 97.8
Power factor > 0.98
Weight [Kg] 2.6 ± 0.3 5.4 ± 1 9.8 ± 1.5 27 ± 1
Natural
cooling
Frame A, B, C: Built-in;
Braking chopper
Frame D0 above: Optional
Frame A, B, C: Optional;
DC choke
Frame D0 above: Built-in 3%
Frame A, B, C of VFD_ _ _ _CP4EA-_ _: Built-in;
EMC Filter Frame A, B, C of VFD_ _ _ _CP43A-_ _: no built-in;
Frame D0 above: Optional
NOTE Table 9-2
 *1 The default setting is Light Duty, you can select Normal Duty and Light Duty by setting Pr.00-16.
 *2 It means the rated output current is for the models of Version B. (e.g. VFD015CP43B-21)
9-3
460V Models
Frame D E F G H
Model VFD_ _ _ _CP43_-_ _ 750 900 1100 1320 1600 1850 2000 2200 2500 2800 3150 3550 4000 5000 5600 6300
Rated output
120 143 175 207 247 295 315 367 383 422 491 544 613 741 872 966
capacity [kVA]
Rated output
150*2 180 220 260*2 310 370*2 395 460 481 530 616 683 770 930 1094 1212
current [A]
Applicable motor
75 90 110 132 160 185 200 220 250 280 315 355 400 500 560 630
output [kW]
Light duty
Applicable motor
100 125 150 175 215 250 270 300 340 375 425 475 530 675 750 850
output [HP]
Overload capacity 120% of rated output current: 1 minute for every 5 minutes
Max. output
599.00 400.00
frequency [Hz]
*1Output rating
Carrier Frequency 2–10 2–9

[kHz] (Default: 6) (Default: 4)
Rated output
88 120 143 175 207 247 247 295 315 367 438 491 544 690 741 872
capacity [kVA]
Rated output
110 150 180 220 260 310 310 370 395 460 550 616 683 866 930 1094
current [A]
Applicable motor
55 75 90 110 132 160 160 185 200 220 280 315 355 450 500 560
Normal duty
output [kW]
Applicable motor
75 100 125 150 175 215 215 250 270 300 375 425 475 600 675 850
output [HP]
120% of rated output current: 1 minute for every 5 minutes;
Overload capacity
160% of rated output current: 3 seconds for every 25 seconds
Max. output
599 400
frequency [Hz]
Carrier frequency 2–10 2–9
[kHz] (Default: 6) (Default: 4)
Input Light duty 150 180 220 260 310 370 395 460 481 530 616 683 770 930 1094 1212
current [A] Normal duty 114 157 167 207 240 300 300 380 390 400 494 555 625 866 930 1094
Input rating
Rated voltage / frequency 3-phase 380–480 VAC [-15%– +10%], 50/60 Hz
Efficiency [%] 97.8 98.2
Power factor > 0.98
Drive weight [Kg] 38.5 ± 1.5 64.8 ± 1.5 86.5 ± 1.5 134 ± 4 228
Braking chopper Frame D–H: Optional
DC choke Frame D–H: Built-in 3%
EMC filter Frame D–H: Optional
NOTE Table 9-3

 *1 The default setting is Light Duty, you can select Normal Duty and Light Duty by setting Pr.00-16.
 *2 It means the rated output current is for the models of Version B. (e.g. VFD015CP43B-21)
 Model VFD5000CP43A-xx is not UL certified.
9-4
9-3 575V Models

Frame A B
Model VFD_ _ _ _CP53A-21 015 022 037 055 075 110 150
Rated output capacity [kVA] 3 4.3 6.7 9.9 12.1 18.6 24.1
Light duty
Rated output current [A] 3 4.3 6.7 9.9 12.1 18.7 24.2
Applicable motor output [kW] 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15
*Output rating
Applicable motor output [HP] 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20

Rated output capacity [kVA] 2.5 3.6 5.5 8.2 10 15.4 19.9
Normal duty
Rated output current [A] 2.5 3.6 5.5 8.2 10 15.4 20

Applicable motor output [kW] 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11
Applicable motor output [HP] 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15
Carrier frequency [kHz] 2–15 (Default: 4)
Light duty 3.8 5.4 10.4 14.9 16.9 21.3 26.3
Input current [A]
Normal duty 3.1 4.5 7.2 12.3 15 18 22.8
Input rating
Rated voltage / Frequency 3-phase, 525–600 VAC [-15%– +10%]，50/60 Hz

Efficiency [%] 97 98
Power factor > 0.98
Weight [Kg] 3 ± 0.3 4.8 ± 1
Cooling method Natural cooling Fan cooling
Braking chopper Frame A–B: Built-in
DC choke Frame A–B: Optional
NOTE Table 9-4

 * The default setting is Light Duty, you can select Normal Duty and Light Duty by setting Pr.00-16.
9-5
9-4 690V Models

Frame C D E
Model VFD_ _ _ _CP63A-_ _ 185 220 300 370 450 550 750 900 1100 1320
Rated output capacity
29 36 43 54 65 80 103 124 149 179
[kVA]
Applicable motor output
18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132
690V [kW]
25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 175
Light duty
690V [HP]
20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150
575V [HP]
Rated output current [A] 24 30 36 45 54 67 86 104 125 150
Max.output frequency
599.00
*Output rating
[Hz]
24 29 36 43 54 65 80 103 124 149
[kVA]
15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110
690V [kW]
Normal duty
20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150

690V [HP]
15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125
575V [HP]
Rated output current [A] 20 24 30 36 45 54 67 86 104 125
Overload tolerance 160% of rated current for 3 seconds during every 25 seconds
599.00
[Hz]
Input current Light duty 29 36 43 54 65 81 84 102 122 147
[A] Normal duty 24 29 36 43 54 65 66 84 102 122
Input rating
Rated voltage / Frequency 3-phase, 525–690 VAC (-15%– +10%), 50/60 Hz

Efficiency [%] 97
Power factor > 0.98
Weight [Kg] 10 ± 1.5 39 ± 1.5 61 ± 1.5
Braking chopper Frame C: Built-in Frame D–E: Optional
DC choke Frame C: Optional Frame D–E: Built-in
NOTE Table 9-5

9-6
690V Models
Frame F G H
Model VFD_ _ _ _CP63A-_ _ 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 4500 5600 6300
215 263 347 418 494.5 534.7 678.5 776
[kVA]
160 200 250 315 400 450 560 630
690V [kW]
215 270 335 425 530 600 750 850
Light duty
690V [HP]
150 200 250 350 400 450 500 750
575V [HP]
Rated output current [A] 180 220 290 350 430 465 590 675
599.00
[Hz]
*Output rating

179 215 239 347 402.5 442.7 534.7 776
[kVA]
132 160 200 250 315 355 450 630
690V [kW]
Normal duty
175 215 270 335 425 475 600 850

690V [HP]
150 150 200 250 350 400 450 750
575V [HP]
Rated output current [A] 150 180 220 290 350 385 465 675
Overload tolerance 160% of rated current for 3 seconds during every 25 seconds
599.00
[Hz]
2–9
(Default: 3)
Input current [A] Light duty 178 217 292 353 454 469 595 681
Input rating
Input current [A] Normal duty 148 178 222 292 353 388 504 681
Rated voltage / Frequency 3-phase, 525–690 VAC (-15%– +10%), 50/60 Hz
Efficiency [%] 97 98
Power factor > 0.98
Weight [Kg] 88 ± 1.5 135 ± 4 243 ± 5
Braking chopper Frame F–H: Optional
DC choke Frame F–H: Built-in
NOTE Table 9-6

9-7
General Specifications
Control Mode Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM)
Control Method 1: V/F, 2: SVC, 3: PM Sensorless, 4: SynRM Sensorless
Starting Torque Reach up to 150% above at 0.5 Hz.
V/F Curve 4 point adjustable V/F curve and square curve
Speed Response Ability 5 Hz (vector control can reach up to 40 Hz)
Light duty: max. 130% torque current
Torque Limit
Normal duty: max. 160% torque current
Torque Accuracy 5%
230V models: 599.00 Hz (55 kW and above: 400.00 Hz)
Max. output frequency (Hz) 460V models: 599.00 Hz (90 kW and above: 400.00 Hz)
575/690V models: 599.00 Hz
Control Characteristics
Frequency Output Accuracy Digital command:  0.01%, -10°C– +40°C, Analog command:  0.1%, 25  10°C
Output Frequency Digital command: 0.01 Hz
Resolution Analog command: 0.03 × max. output frequency/60 Hz ( 11 bit)
Light duty: 120% of rated current can endure for 1 minute
Overload Tolerance
Normal duty: 120% of rated current can endure for 1 minute; 160% of rated current can endure for 3 sec.
Frequency Setting Signal 0–+10 V, 4–20 mA, 0–20 mA
Accel./Decel. Time 0.00–600.00/0.0–6000.0 seconds
Momentary power loss ride thru, Speed search, Over-torque detection, Torque limit, 16-step speed (max),
Accel./Decel. time switch, S-curve accel./decel., 3-wire sequence, Auto-Tuning, Dwell, Slip compensation,
Main control function Torque compensation, JOG frequency, Frequency upper/lower limit settings, DC injection braking at
start/stop, High slip braking, Energy saving control, Modbus communication (RS-485 RJ45, max. 5.2
Kbps)
230V models: Models above VFD185CP23 (including VFD185CP23) are PWM control
Models below VFD150CP23 (including VFD150CP23) are ON/OFF switch control.
Fan Control 460V models: Models above VFD220CP43/4E (including VFD220CP43/4E) are PWM control
Models below VFD185CP43/4E (including VFD185CP43/4E) are ON/OFF switch control.
575V / 690V models: PWM control
Motor Protection Electronic thermal relay protection
For drive model 230V/460V:
Over-current protection: 185% rated current for light duty; 240% rated current for normal duty
Current clamp:『Light duty: 130–135%』;『Normal duty: 170–175%』
Over-current Protection
For drive model 575/690V:
Over-current protection: 225% rated current for normal duty
Current clamp:『Light duty: 128–141%』;『Normal duty: 170–175%』
Protection Characteristics
230V models: drive will stop when DC bus voltage exceeds 410 V
Over-voltage Protection
Over-temperature
Built-in temperature sensor
Protection
Stall Prevention Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration and running independently
Restart After Instantaneous
Parameter setting up to 20 seconds
Power Failure
Grounding Leakage Current
Leakage current is higher than 50% of rated current of the AC motor drive
Protection
Short-circuit Current Rating Per UL508C, the drive is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 kA
(SCCR) symmetrical amperes (rms) when protected by fuses given in the fuse table.
Certifications
SEMI F47, GB/T12668.3
Table 9-7
NOTE
 * The setting range of max. output frequency changes as carrier wave and control modes changes. Refer to Pr.01-00 for
more information.
 Only 230V/460V models are complied with EAC certification. 575V/690V models are not yet for certified.
 Model VFD5000CP43A-xx is not UL certified.
9-8
9-5 Environment for Operation, Storage and Transportation

Do NOT expose the AC motor drive in the bad environment, such as dust, direct sunlight, corrosive/inflammable gasses, humidity, liquid and
vibration environment. The salt in the air must be less than 0.01mg/cm2 every year.
Installation
IEC60364-1/IEC60664-1 Pollution degree 2, Indoor use only
location
Surrounding Storage -25– +70
Temperature Transportation -25– +70
(oC) Non-condensation, non-frozen
Operation Max. 95%
Storage/
Rated Humidity Max. 95%
Transportation
No condense water
Operation/
Air Pressure 86–106
Storage
(kPa)
Environment Transportation 70–106
IEC60721-3-3
Operation Class 3C3; Class 3S2
Storage Class 1C2; Class 1S2
Pollution Level
Transportation Class 2C2; Class 2S2
If the AC motor drive is to be used under harsh environment with high level of contamination (e.g. dew,
water, dust), make sure it is installed in an environment qualified for IP54 such as in a cabinet.
If AC motor drive is installed at altitude 0–1000 m, follow normal operation restriction. If
it is install at altitude 1000–2000 m, decrease 1% of rated current or lower 0.5oC of
Altitude Operation temperature for every 100 m increase in altitude. Maximum altitude for Corner
Grounded is 2000 m.Contact Delta for more information, if you need to use this motor
drive at an altitude of 2000m or higher.
Storage ISTA procedure 1A (according to weight) IEC60068-2-31
Package Drop
Transportation
1.0mm, peak to peak value range from 2 Hz to 13.2 Hz; 0.7G–1.0G range from 13.2 Hz to 55 Hz; 1.0G range from 55 Hz to
Vibration
512 Hz. Comply with IEC 60068-2-6
Impact IEC/EN 60068-2-27
10 10
Operation
Max. allowed offset angle 10o (under normal installation position)
Position
Table 9-8
9-9
9-6 Specification for Operation Temperature and Protection Level

Operation
Model Frame Top cover Conduit box Protection level
temperature
230V&460V:
Frame A–C Top cover -10°C–50°C *1
IP20/UL Open Type 575V&690V:
230V: 0.75–30 kW removed
Standard -10°C~50°C
460V: 0.75–37 kW
575V: 1.5–15 kW Standard conduit plate
VFDxxxxCP23x-21
690V: 18.5–37 kW with top IP20/ UL Type1/ NEMA1 -10–40°C
VFDxxxxCP43x-21
cover
VFDxxxxCP4Ex-21
VFDxxxxCP53x-21 Frame D–H
VFDxxxxCP63x-xx 230V: 37 kW and
above
460V: 45 kW and N/A With conduit box IP20/UL Type1/NEMA1 -10–40°C
above
690V: 45 kW and
above
IP00
IP20/UL Open Type
Frame D–H
230V: 37 kW and 230V&460V:
VFDxxxxCP23x-00 above -10°C–50°C *1
VFDxxxxCP43x-00 460V: 45 kW and N/A No conduit box 690V:
VFDxxxxCP63x-xx -10°C–50°C
above
690V: 45 kW and
above
Figure 9-1
 *1 When the carrier wave for light duty is 2 kHz, the maximum operation temperature can reach
up to 50°C. Table 9-9
9-10
9-7 Derating Curve for Ambient Temperature, Altitude and Carrier Frequency
 For more information on calculation for derating curve, refer to Pr.06-55.
 When choosing the correct model, consider factors such as ambient temperature, altitude, carrier
frequency, control mode, and so on. That is,
Actual rated current for application (A) = Rated output current (A) × Ambient temp. rated derating (%)
x Altitude rated derating (%) × [Normal / Advanced control] carrier frequency rated derating (%)
Protection Level Operating Environment

If the AC motor drive operates at the rated current, the ambient temperature needs to be
UL Type I / IP20 between -10–40°C. If the temperature is above 40°C, decrease 2% of the rated current for
every 1°C increase in temperature. The maximum allowable temperature is 60°C.
If the AC motor drive operates at the rated current, the ambient temperature needs to be
UL Open Type / between -10–50°C. If the temperature is above 50°C, decrease 2% of the rated current for
IP20 every 1°C increase in temperature. The maximum allowable temperature is 60°C.
Table 9-10
Ambient Temperature Derating Curve
230V / 460V
Figure 9-2
UL Open Type:
The rated output current derating (%) in normal duty / light duty when carrier frequency is 2 kHz:
Ambient Temp. /
100% Load 30°C 50°C 60°C
Fc (kHz)
2 100 100 80
Table 9-11
UL Open Type_Side by Side or UL Type 1:
The rated output current derating (%) in normal duty / light duty when carrier frequency is the default
value:
Ambient Temp. /
100% Load 30°C 40°C 60°C
Fc (kHz)
Default Value 100 100 60
Table 9-12
9-11
575V／690V
Figure 9-3
UL Open Type:
value:
Ambient Temp. /
100% Load 30°C 50°C 60°C
Fc (kHz)
Table 9-13
UL Open Type_Side by Side or UL Type 1:
value:
Ambient Temp. /
100% Load 30°C 40°C 60°C
Fc (kHz)
Table 9-14
9-12
Altitude Derating Curve

Condition Operating Environment
If the AC motor drive is installed at an altitude of 0–1000 m, follow normal
operation restrictions. For altitudes of 1000–2000 m, decrease the drive’s rated
High Altitude current by 1% or lower the temperature by 0.5°C for every 100 m increase in
altitude. The maximum altitude for corner grounding is 2000 m. If installing at an
altitude higher than 2000 m is required, contact Delta for more information.
Table 9-15
Figure 9-4
The rated output current derating (%) for different altitudes above sea level:
Altitude above Sea
0 1000 1500 2000
Level (Meter)
Output Current / Rated
100 100 95 90
Current (%)
Table 9-16
9-13
Carrier Frequency Derating Curve

 230V / 460V Normal Control
Pr.00-11 = 0 (IMVF)
= 2 (IM SVC, Pr.05-33 = 0)
Figure 9-5
The rated output current derating (%) of 230V models in normal control mode for different carrier
frequencies:
Fc (kHz)
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Model No.
VFD007–150CP23A/E 100 100 100 100 100 97 94 91 88 85 83 80
VFD185–450CP23A/E 100 100 100 96 93 90 87 - - - - -
VFD550–900CP23A/E 100 97 93 90 87 84 - - - - - -
Table 9-17
Figure 9-6
The rated output current derating (%) of 460V models in normal control mode for different carrier
frequencies:
Fc (kHz)
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Model No.
VFD007–185CP43A/E 100 100 100 100 100 96 92 88 84 80 76 72
VFD220–750CP43A/E 100 100 100 95 89 84 79 - - - - -
VFD900–6300CP43A/E 100 94 88 82 76 71 - - - - - -
Table 9-18
9-14
 230V / 460V Advanced Control

Pr.00-11 = 2 (PM SVC, Pr.05-33 = 1, 2)
Figure 9-7
The rated output current derating (%) of 230V models in advanced control mode for different carrier
frequencies:
Fc (kHz)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Model No.
VFD007–150CP23A/E 100 100 100 100 96 92 88 83 79 75 71 67 63 59
VFD185–450CP23A/E 100 100 100 94 90 85 81 76 72 - - - - -
VFD550–900CP23A/E 100 96 91 87 82 78 73 69 - - - - - -
Table 9-19
Figure 9-8
The rated output current derating (%) of 460V models in advanced control mode for different carrier
frequencies:
Fc (kHz)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Model No.
VFD007–185CP43A/E 100 100 100 100 94 88 82 76 71 65 59 53 47 41
VFD220–750CP43A/E 100 100 100 92 84 76 68 60 52 - - - - -
VFD900–6300CP43A/E 100 92 83 75 67 58 50 42 - - - - - -
Table 9-20
9-15
 575V / 690V
Pr.00-16 = 2, light duty:
Pr.00-11 = 0 (IMVF)
= 2 (IM SVC, Pr.05-33 = 0)
Figure 9-9
The rated output current derating (%) of 575V / 690V models in light duty for different carrier
frequencies:
Fc (kHz)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Model No.
VFD015–150CP53A-21
100 100 100 100 100 90 82 75
VFD185–550CP63A-xx
VFD750–2000CP63A-xx 100 100 100 100 95 85 75 65
VFD2500–6300CP63A-xx 100 100 100 100 95 80 65 55
Table 9-21
Pr.00-16 = 0, normal duty:
Pr.00-11 = 0 (IMVF)
= 2 (IM SVC, Pr.05-33 = 0)
Figure 9-10
9-16
The rated output current derating (%) of 575V / 690V models in normal duty for different carrier
frequencies:
Fc (kHz)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Model No.
VFD015–150CP53A-21
100 100 100 100 100 90 82 75
VFD185–550CP63A-xx
VFD750–2000CP63A-xx 100 100 100 100 95 85 75 65
VFD2500–6300CP63A-xx 100 100 100 100 95 80 65 55
VFD6300CP63A-xx 100 100 100 86 73 63 55 48
Table 9-22
9-17
9-8 Efficiency Curve

 Models:
VFD007C23A–VFD370C23A
Figure 9-11
Efficiency (%) under different loads:

Speed (%)
16.7 50 66.7 100
Load (%)
100% Load 90.6 96.2 97.0 97.8
75% Load 90.4 96.1 96.9 97.8
50% Load 89.5 95.7 96.6 97.6
25% Load 82.5 92.3 93.8 95.5
Table 9-23
 Models:
Figure 9-12
Efficiency (%) under different loads:

Speed (%)
16.7 50 66.7 100
Load (%)
100% Load 93.2 97.2 97.7 98.2
75% Load 93.4 97.3 97.8 98.3
50% Load 92.6 97.1 97.7 98.2
25% Load 90.1 92.6 93.2 93.2
Table 9-24
9-18
Chapter 10 Digital KeypadCP2000
Chapter 10 Digital Keypad
10-1 Descriptions of Digital Keypad
10-2 Function of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01
10-3 TPEditor Installation Instruction
10-4 Fault Code Description of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01
10-5 Unsupported Functions when using TPEditor on
KPC-CC01 Keypad
10-1
10-1 Descriptions of Digital Keypad

KPC-CC01
Communication Interface
RJ45 (socket), RS-485 interface
Communication protocol:
RTU19200, 8, N, 2
Installation Method
1. The embedded type can be installed on the surface of the
control box. The front cover is waterproof.
2. Buy a MKC-KPPK model for wall mounting or embedded
mounting. Its protection level is IP66.
3. The maximum RJ45 extension lead is 5 m (16ft).
4. This keypad can only be used on Delta’s motor drive C2000
series, CH2000 and CP2000 series.
Keypad Functions Description

Key Descriptions
Start Operation Key
1. Only valid when the source of operation command is the keypad.
2. Operates the AC motor drive by the function setting. The RUN LED will be ON.
3. Can be pressed repeatedly at the stop process.
Stop Command Key.
1. This key has the highest priority when the command is from the keypad.
2. When it receives the STOP command, regardless of whether the AC motor drive is in
operation or stop status, the AC motor drive executes the “STOP” command.
3. Use the RESET key to reset the drive after a fault occurs.
4. If you cannot reset after the error:
a. The condition which triggers the fault is not cleared. After you clear the condition, you
can then reset the fault.
b. The drive is in fault status when powered on. After you clear the condition, restart and
then you can reset the fault.
Operation Direction Key
1. Only controls the operation direction, NOT the drive activation. FWD: forward, REV:
reverse.
2. Refer to the LED descriptions for more details.
ENTER Key
Goes to the next menu level. If at the last level, press ENTER to execute the command.
ESC Key
Leaves the current menu and returns to the previous menu; also functions as a return key or
cancel key in a sub-menu.
Returns to the main menu.
Menu commands:
1. Parameter Setup 7. Language Setup 13. Start-up Menu
2. Quick Start 8. Time Setup 14. Main Page
3. Application Selection List 9. Keypad Locked 15. PC Link
4. Changed List 10. PLC Function 16. Start Wizard
5. Copy Parameter 11. Copy PLC
6. Fault Record 12. Display Setup
10-2
Key Descriptions
Direction: Left / Right / Up / Down

1. In the numeric value setting mode, moves the cursor and changes the numeric value.
2. In the menu / text selection mode, selects an item.
Function Key
1. The functions keys have defaults and can also be user-defined. The defaults for F1 and F4
work with the function list below. For example, F1 is the JOG function, and F4 is a speed
setting key for adding / deleting user-defined parameters.
2. Other functions must be defined using TPEditor.
Download TPEditor software at Delta website. Select TPEditor version 1.60 or above.
Refer to the installation instruction for TPEditor in Section 10-3.
HAND Key
1. Use this key to select HAND mode. In this mode, the drive’s parameter settings for
frequency command source is Pr.00-30, and that for operation command source is Pr.00-31.
2. Press the HAND key at STOP, then the setting switches to the HAND frequency source and
HAND operation source.
3. Press HAND key at RUN, and it stops the AC motor drive first (displays AHSP warning), and
switches to HAND frequency source and HAND operation source.
4. Successful mode switching for the KPC-CC01 displays HAND mode on the screen.
AUTO Key
1. The default of the drive is AUTO mode.
2. Use this key to select AUTO mode. In this mode, the drive’s parameter settings for
frequency command source is Pr.00-20, and that for operation command is Pr.00-21.
3. Press the AUTO key at STOP, then the setting switches to the AUTO frequency source and
AUTO operation source.
4. Press AUTO key at RUN, and it stops the AC motor drive first (displays AHSP warning), and
switches to AUTO frequency source and AUTO operation source.
5. Successful mode switching for the KPC-CC01 displays AUTO mode on the screen.
The defaults for the frequency command and operation command source of HAND / AUTO mode are
NOTE
both from the keypad.
LED Functions Descriptions

LED Descriptions
Steady ON: STOP indicator for the AC motor drive.

Blinking: the drive is in standby.
Steady OFF: the drive does not execute the “STOP” command.
Operation Direction LED

1. Green light: the drive is running forward.
2. Red light: the drive is running backward.
3. Flashing light: the drive is changing direction.
Operation Direction LED under Torque Mode

1. Green light: when the torque command ≥ 0, and the motor is running forward.
2. Red light: when the torque command < 0, and the motor is running backward.
3. Flashing light: when the torque command < 0, and the motor is running forward.
10-3
LED Descriptions
RUN LED:
LED
Condition/ State
status
CANopen at initial
OFF
No LED
CANopen at pre-operation
Blinking
CANopen–“RUN”
CANopen at stop
Single
flash
CANopen at operation status

ON
ERR LED:
LED Condition/ State
status
OFF No Error
One message fail
Single
flash
Node guarding failure or heartbeat message failure

CANopen–“ERR” Double
flash
Synchronization failure
Triple
flash
Bus off
ON
10-4
10-2 Function of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01
NOTE
1. Start-up screen can only display pictures, not animation.
2. When powered ON, it displays the start-up screen then the main screen. The main screen displays Delta’s default
setting F/H/A/U. You can set the display order with Pr.00-03 (Start-up display). When you selected the U screen, use the
left / right keys to switch between the items, and set the display order for the U screen with Pr.00-04 (User display).
Display Icon
Display item
10-5
1. Parameter Setup
For example: Setup source for the master frequency command.
In the Group 00 Motor Drive Parameter,

use Up/Down keys to select parameter 20: Auto
Frequency Command.
Press ENTER to go to this parameter’s setting menu.

Press to select.
Press to select the

Use the Up/Down keys to choose a setting.
For example: choose 2 Analog Input, and then press
parameter group.
ENTER key.
Once you select a parameter
After you press ENTER, END is displayed which
group, press to go into means the parameter setting is done.
that group.
NOTE: When parameter lock / password protection
function is enabled, it displays “Pr. lock” on the upper
right corner of the keypad. The parameter cannot be
written or is protected by the password under this
circumstances.
2. Quick Start
Description:
1. VF Mode
Items
1. Parameter protection password input
(Pr.00-07)
2. Parameter protection password setting
(Pr.00-08)
Press to select. 3. Speed control mode (Pr.00-11)
Quick Start: 4. Load selection (Pr.00-16)
01:Password Decoder
1. V/F Mode 5. Carrier frequency (Pr.00-17)
2. SVC Mode 6. Master frequency command source
3. My Mode (AUTO) / Source selection of the PID
target (Pr.00-20)
7. Operation command source (AUTO)
(Pr.00-21)
8. Stop method (Pr.00-22)
9. Digital keypad STOP function (Pr.00-32)
10. Max. operation frequency (Pr.01-00)
11. Output frequency of motor 1 (Pr.01-01)
12. Output voltage of motor 1 (Pr.01-02)
13. Mid-point frequency 1 of motor 1
(Pr.01-03)
14. Mid-point voltage 1 of motor 1
(Pr.01-04)
15. Mid-point frequency 2 of motor 1
(Pr.01-05)
16. Mid-point voltage 2 of motor 1
(Pr.01-06)
17. Min. output frequency of motor 1
(Pr.01-07)
18. Min. output voltage of motor 1
(Pr.01-08)
19. Output frequency upper limit
(Pr.01-10)
10-6
20. Output frequency lower limit

(Pr.01-11)
21. Acceleration time 1 (Pr.01-12)
22. Deceleration time 1 (Pr.01-13)
23. Over-voltage stall prevention
(Pr.06-01)
24. Derating protection (Pr.06-55)
25. Software brake chopper action level
(Pr.07-00)
26. Speed tracking during start-up
(Pr.07-12)
27. Emergency stop (EF) & force to stop
selection (Pr.07-20)
28. Torque command filter time
(Pr.07-24)
29. Slip compensation filter time (Pr.07-25)
30. Torque compensation gain (Pr.07-26)
31. Slip Compensation Gain (Pr.07-27)
2. SVC Mode
Items
1. Parameter protection password input
(Pr.00-07)
2. Parameter protection password setting
(Pr.00-08)
3. Speed control mode (Pr.00-11)
4. Load selection (Pr.00-16)
01: Password Decoder
5. Carrier frequency (Pr.00-17)
6. Master frequency command source
(AUTO) / Source selection of the PID
target (Pr.00-20)
7. Operation command source (AUTO)
(Pr.00-21)
8. Stop method (Pr.00-22)
9. Digital keypad STOP function
(Pr.00-32)
10. Max. operation frequency (Pr.01-00)
11. Output frequency of motor 1
(Pr.01-01)
12. Output voltage of motor 1
(Pr.01-02)
13. Min. output frequency of motor 1
(Pr.01-07)
14. Min. output voltage of motor 1
(Pr.01-08)
15. Output frequency upper limit
(Pr.01-10)
16. Output frequency lower limit
(Pr.01-11)
17. Acceleration time 1 (Pr.01-12)
18. Deceleration time 1 (Pr.01-13)
19. Full-load current for induction motor 1
(Pr.05-01)
20. Rated power for induction motor 1
(Pr.05-02)
21. Rated speed for induction motor 1
(Pr.05-03)
22. Number of poles for induction motor 1
(Pr.05-04)
23. No-load current for induction motor 1
(Pr.05-05)
24. Over-voltage stall prevention
(Pr.06-01)
25. Over-current stall prevention during
acceleration (Pr.06-03)
26. Derating protection (Pr.06-55)
10-7
27. Software brake chopper action level

(Pr.07-00)
28. Emergency stop (EF) & Force to stop
selection (Pr.07-20)
29. Torque command filter time
(Pr.07-24)
30. Slip compensation filter time
(Pr.07-25)
31. Slip compensation gain (Pr.07-27)
3. My Mode
Items
It can save 1–32 sets of parameters (Pr).
Setup process
1. Go to Parameter Setup function.
Press ENTER to select the parameter to
Press F4 in parameter use. There is an ADD on the bottom right
setting screen to save corner of the screen. Press F4 to add this
parameter to My Mode.
the parameter to My
Mode. To delete or
00- 10
correct the parameter, 0
Speed M ode
select this parameter 0~3 A DD
and press F4 for DEL in

the bottom right corner.
2. The parameter (Pr) displays in My mode

if it is properly saved.
To correct or to delete this parameter,
press F4 for DEL.
3. To delete a parameter, go to My Mode

and select the parameter to delete.
Press ENTER to enter the parameter
setting screen. DEL appears in the
bottom left corner of the screen. Press
F4 to delete this parameter from My
Mode.
00- 10
0
Speed M ode
0~3 DEL
10-8
4. After you press ENTER to delete <01

Control Mode>, the <02 Maximum
Operating Frequency > automatically
replaces <01 Control Mode>.
3. Application Selection List

This function enables you to select application and its parameters sets.
Example:
In the menu content, select 3: Application Selection List
Press ENTER to go into the Application Selection List
Select Application
Press ENTER to enter the application selection screen, and the selected
application industry is “Fan”.
Press ENTER to enter the Fan application screen.
Press the Up/ Down keys to select the parameter to set.
Choose 0: Light duty or 1: Normal duty according to your needs, then press
ENTER.
10-9
4. Changed List
This function records the parameters you have changed.
Example:
Set Pr.13-00 Application Selection = 3: Fan
Enter the changed list screen. List PrNum = 026 means that there are 26
parameters that have been changed.
Press ENTER to enter the changed list screen.
Use the Up / Down keys to select the parameters to check or to change.

Press ENTER to enter the parameter.
5. Copy Parameter
Four groups of parameters are available to copy
The steps are shown in the example below.
Example: parameter saved in the motor drive.
1. Go to Copy Parameter
2. Select the parameter group to copy and press
Press key to go to ENTER.
001–004: content storage
1. Select 1: keypad  VFD

2. Press ENTER to go to the “keypad  VFD” screen.
Begin copying parameters until it is done.
After copying is done, the keypad automatically

returns to this screen.
Example: parameter saved in the keypad.
10-10
1. Go to Copy parameter
2. Select the parameter group to copy and press
ENTER.
Press ENTER key to go to the “VFD  keypad”

screen.
Press the Up / Down keys to select a symbol.

Press the Left / Right keys to move the cursor to
select a file name.
String & Symbol Table:

！＂＃＄％＆＇（）＊＋，－．／０１２３４５６７８９：；＜＝＞？＠ＡＢＣＤＥＦ
ＧＨＩＪＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴＵＶＷＸＹＺ［＼］＾＿｀ａｂｃｄｆｇｈｉｊｋｌｍ
ｎｏｐｑｒｓｔｕｖｗｘｙｚ｛｜｝～
After you confirm the file name, press ENTER.
Begin copying parameters until it is done.
After copying parameters is done, the keypad

automatically returns to this screen.
Press the Right key to see the date of the parameters

copied.
Press the Right key to see the time of the parameters

copied.
10-11
6. Fault Record
Able to store 6 error codes (Keypad V1.02 and previous versions)
Able to store 30 error codes (Keypad V1.20 and later version)
The most recent error record shows as the first record. Choose an error
record to see details such as date, time, frequency, current, voltage, and DC
bus voltage)
Press the Up / Down keys to select an error record.

Press to see an error Press ENTER to see that error record’s details.
record’s details.
Press the Up / Down keys to scroll through an error

record’s details such as date, time, frequency,
current, voltage, and DC bus voltage.
Press the Up / Down keys to select the next error

code.
After selecting an error code, press ENTER to see
that error record’s details.
Press the Up / Down keys to see an error record’s

details such as date, time, frequency, current,
voltage, and DC bus voltage.
NOTE
The AC motor drive actions are recorded and saved to the KPC-CC01. When you
remove the KPC-CC01 and connect it to another AC motor drive, the previous fault
records are not deleted. The new fault records of the new AC motor drive continue
to be added to the KPC-CC01.
7. Language Setup
The language setting option is displayed in the language of your choice.
Language setting options:
1. English 5. Русский 9. Polski

2. 繁體中文 6. Español 10. Deutsch
Use the Up / Down keys to 3. 简体中文 7. Português 11. Italiano

select the language, and then 4. Türkçe 8. Français 12. Svenska
press ENTER.
8. Time Setup
Time setup
2009/01/01 Press the Up / Down keys to set the Year
_ _ : _ _ :_ _
10-12
Use the Left / Right keys to

select Year, Month, Day, Hour,
Minute or Second to change. Press the Up / Down keys to set the Month
Press the Up / Down keys to set the Day
Press the Up / Down keys to set the Hour
Press the Up / Down keys to set the Minute
Press the Up / Down keys to set the Second
Press ENTER to confirm the Time Setup.
NOTE
Limitation: The charging process for the keypad super capacitor finishes in
about 6 minutes. When the digital keypad is removed, the time setting is
saved for 7 days. After 7 days, you must reset the time.
9. Keypad Locked
Lock the keypad
Use this function to lock the keypad. The main screen does not display
“keypad locked” when the keypad is locked; however, it displays the message”
Press ESC 3 sec to UnLock Key” when you press any key.
When the keypad is locked, the main screen does

Press to lock not indicate the lock status.
Press any key on the keypad; a message displays

as shown on the left.
If you do not press the ESC key, the keypad

automatically returns to this screen.
Press any key on the keypad, a message displays

as shown on the left.
10-13
Press ESC for 3 seconds to unlock the keypad; the

keypad returns to this screen. All keys on the
keypad is functional.
All keys on the keypad is functional. Turning the power off and on does not
lock the keypad.
10. PLC Function

When activating and stopping the PLC function (choosing 2: PLC Run or 3:
PLC Stop), the PLC status displays on main screen (Delta default setting).
Choose option 2: PLC Run to enable the PLC

function.
Press the Up/Down keys to
select a PLC’s function, and
then press ENTER.
The default on the main screen displays the PLC /
RUN status message.
Choose option 3: PLC Stop to disable the PLC

function.
The default on the main screen displays the PLC /

STOP status message.
If the PLC program is not available in the control

board, the PLFF warning displays when you
choose option 2 or 3.
In this case, choose option 1: Disable to clear PLFF
warning.
11. Copy PLC

Four groups of parameters are available to copy.
The steps are shown in the example below.
Example: PLC program saved in the motor drive.
1. Go to Copy PLC
2. Select the PLC program to copy and press
ENTER.
1. Select 1: KeypadVFD
2. Press ENTER to go to the “KeypadVFD”
screen.
Begin copying the PLC program until it is done.
10-14

NOTE
If you select “Option 1: KeypadVFD”, check if the
PLC program is built-in to the KPC-CC01 keypad.
If the PLC program is not available in the keypad
when you select “Option 1: KeypadVFD”, an
“ERR8 Warning: Type Mismatch” displays on the
screen.
If you unplug the keypad and plug it back while

copying the PLC program, the screen displays a
CPLt warning.
Example: PLC program saved in the keypad.
1. Go to Copy PLC.
2. Select the PLC program to copy and press
ENTER.
Press ENTER to go to the “VFDKeypad” screen.
If the WPLSoft editor is installed uses password,

enter the password to save the file to the keypad.
Press the Up / Down keys to select a symbol.

Press the Left / Right keys to move the cursor to
select a file name.
String & Symbol Table:

！＂＃＄％＆＇（）＊＋，－．／０１２３４５６７８９：；＜＝＞？＠ＡＢ
ＣＤＥＦＧＨＩＪＫＬＭＮＯＰＱＲＳＴＵＶＷＸＹＺ［＼］＾＿｀ａｂｃｄ
ｆｇｈｉｊｋｌｍｎｏｐｑｒｓｔｕｖｗｘｙｚ｛｜｝～
After you confirm the file name, press ENTER.
Begin copying the PLC program until it is done.
10-15

Press the Right key to see the date of the program

copied.
Press the Right key to see the time of program

copied.
12. Display setup

1. Contrast
Press the Up / Down keys to adjust the setting

value.
Press to go to the
For example, increase Contrast to +10.
setting screen.
After you set the value, press ENTER to see the

screen display after contrast is adjusted to +10.
Then press ENTER and decrease the Contrast to

-10.
Press ENTER to see screen display after

contrast is adjusted to -10.
2. Back-light
Press ENTER to go to the Back-Light Time

Setting screen.

value.
10-16
When the setting value is 0 Min, the backlight

remains on.
When the setting value is 10 Min, the backlight

turns off in 10 minutes.
3. Text Color
Press ENTER to go to the Text Color Setting

screen.
The default value is White Text.

value, and then press ENTER.
1:
The setting value changes to Blue Text.
2:
3:
13. Start-up
1. Default 1 DELTA LOGO
Indus tr ia l Aut om at ion
2. Default 2 DELTA Text
C Series
Indu strial A uto mation
3. User Defined: an optional accessory is required (TPEditor & USB / RS-485

Communication Interface-IFD6530) to design your own start-up screen.
If the editor accessory is not installed, the User Define option displays a
blank screen.
USB/RS-485 Communication Interface-IFD6530

Refer to Chapter 07 Optional Accessories for more detail.
TPEditor
Download TPEditor software at Delta website, select TPEditor version 1.60
or above. Refer to the installation instruction for TPEditor in Section 10-3.
10-17
14. ain page

1. Default page
F 60.00Hz
H 0.00Hz
u 540.0Vdc
Default screen and editable F 60.00Hz >>> H >>> A >>> U (options rotate)
screen are available upon 2. User Define: an optional accessory is required (TPEditor & USB / RS-485
selection. Communication Interface-IFD6530) to design your own main screen.
If the editor accessory is not installed, the User Define option displays a
Press to select. blank screen.
USB/RS-485 Communication Interface-IFD6530

Refer to Chapter 07 Optional Accessories for more detail.
TPEditor
Download TPEditor software at Delta website, select TPEditor version 1.60
or above. Refer to the installation instruction for TPEditor in Section 10-3.
15. PC Link
1. TPEditor: This function enables you to connect the keypad to a computer
then to download and edit user-defined screens.
Click ENTER to go to <Waiting to connect to PC>
In TPEditor, from the Communication menu, then choose “Write to HMI”
In the Confirm message box, click YES.
10-18
The software starts downloading screens to

edit to the KPC-CC01.
Download completed
2. VFDSoft: this function enables you to link to the VFDSoft then upload the
parameters 1–4 you have saved in KPC-CC01.
NOTE
If the Operation System (OS) of your computer is Windows 10, right-click

on the VFDSoft icon to enter the Property. Then, click the Compatibility
tab and select the Run this program as an administrator checkbox.
(as shown in the red frames in the figure below)
Connecting the KPC-CCO1 to a computer
Select 2: VFDSoft, and then press ENTER.
Press the Up / Down keys to select a

parameter group to upload to VFDSoft.
Press ENTER to go to Waiting to connect to

PC screen.
10-19
Open VFDSoft and click Parameter on the toolbar.
In Parameter Manager, from the Table menu, choose Read from KPC-CC01.
Choose the correct communication port and click OK.
Start to upload parameters to VFDSoft
Uploading parameter is completed
Before using the user-defined start-up screen and user-defined main

screen, you must preset the start-up screen and the main screen as user-
defined. If you do not download the user-defined screen to the KPC-CC01,
the start-up screen and the main screen are blank.
10-20
16. Start Wizard (applicable for CP2000 firmware V2.06 and above)
16.1 New drive start-up setting process
When a new drive is powered on, it directly enters the Start Wizard. There are three modes in
the start-up setting process: Start Wizard, Exit Wizard and Test Mode.
(1) Start Wizard:
 In Start Wizard, you can set drive’s parameters such as Calendar, Maximum operation
frequency and Maximum voltage…; refer to Table 1 for setting items and orders.
 The drive exits Start Wizard when you finish the complete setting process, and will not
enter this process when rebooting the power.
(2) Exit Wizard:
 Exit the Start Wizard mode. The drive does not go to Start Wizard when rebooting the
power.
(3) Test Mode:
 This function is hidden to avoid misuse. Refer to the following flow chart to enter Test
Mode.
 When the drive is in Test mode, it temporarily disables the Start Wizard and Exit Wizard
mode.
 The Test Mode is designed for distributors / suppliers / clients to manage and operate
the drive before shipping it out.
 If you enter Test Mode without exiting the Start Wizard process, the drive will begin with
the new drive start-up process upon next power on.
Setting
Description Parameter
Order
1 Calendar N/A
2 Output frequency of motor 1 01-01
3 Output voltage of motor 1 01-02
4 Full-load current for induction motor 1 (A) 05-01
5 Number of poles for induction motor 1 05-04
6 Rated speed for induction motor 1 (rpm) 05-03
7 Minimum output frequency of motor 1 01-07
8 Maximum operation frequency 01-00
Master frequency command source (AUTO) / Source
9 00-20
selection of the PID target
10 Operation command source (AUTO) 00-21
11 V/F curve selection 01-43
12 Acceleration time 1 01-12
13 Deceleration time 1 01-13
Table 1: Start Wizard setting items
10-21
Flow chart for the above setting process:
10-22
16.2 Re-start Start Wizard
NOTE: The “16: Start Wizard” on the menu is to set whether the screen shows start wizard when
powering on the drive.
10-23
Other displays
When a fault occurs, the screen display shows the fault or warning:
1. Press the STOP / RESET key to reset the fault code. If there is no response, contact your local distributor or
return the unit to the factory. To view the fault DC bus voltage, output current and output voltage, press MENU
and then choose 6: Fault Record.
2. After resetting, if the screen returns to the main page and shows no fault after you press ESC, the fault is
cleared.
3. When the fault or warning message appears, the LED backlight blinks until you clear the fault or warning.
Optional accessory: RJ45 Extension Lead for Digital Keypad

Part No. Description
CBC-K3FT RJ45 extension lead, 3 feet (approximately 0.9 m)
CBC-K10FT RJ45 extension lead, 10 feet (approximately 3 m)
Note: When you need to buy communication cables, buy non-shielded, 24 AWG, four-wire twisted pair, 100
ohms communication cables.
10-24
10-3 TPEditor Installation Instruction

TPEditor can edit up to 256 HMI (Human-Machine Interface) pages with a total storage capacity of 256 KB.
Each page can include 50 normal objects and 10 communication objects.
1) TPEditor: Setup & Basic Functions

1. Run TPEditor version 1.60 or above by double-clicking the program icon.
2. On the File menu, click New. In the New project dialog box, for Set Device Type, select DELTA VFD-C
Inverter. For TP Type, select VFD-C KeyPad. For File Name, enter TPE0 and then click OK.
3. The editor displays the Design window. On the Edit menu, click Add a New Page. You can also right-click
on the TP page in the upper right corner of the Design window and click Add to add one more page(s) to
edit.
4. Edit the start-up screen
10-25
5. Add static text. Open a blank page (step 3), then on the toolbar click . Double-click the blank page to
display the Static Text Setting dialog box, and then enter the static text.
6. Add a static bitmap. Open a blank page (step 3), then on the toolbar, click . Double-click the blank
page to display the Static Bitmap Setting dialog box where you can choose the bitmap.
You can only use images in the BMP format. Click the image and then click Open to show the image in
the page.
7. Add a geometric bitmap. There are 11 kinds of geometric bitmaps to choose. Open a new blank page (step
3), then on the toolbar click the geometric bitmap icon that you need .
In the page, drag the geometric bitmap and enlarge it to the size that you need.
8. When you finish editing the start-up screen, on the Communication menu, click Input User Defined
Keypad Starting Screen.
10-26
9. Download the new setting: On the Tool menu, click Communication. Set up the communication port and
speed for the IFD6530. There are three speeds available: 9600 bps, 19200 bps, and 38400 bps.
10. On the Communication menu, click Input User Defined Keypad Starting Screen.
11. The Editor displays a message asking you to confirm the new setting. Before you click OK, on the keypad,
go to MENU, select PC LINK, press ENTER and then wait for few seconds. Then click YES in the
confirmation dialog box to start downloading.
10-27
2) Edit the Main Page and Download to the Keypad

1. In the Editor, add a page to edit. On the Edit menu, click Add a New Page. You can also right-click on the
TP page in the upper right corner of the Design window and click Add to add one more pages to edit.
This keypad currently supports up to 256 pages.
2. In the bottom right-hand corner of the Editor, click the page number to edit, or on the View menu, click
HMI Page to start editing the main page. As shown in the picture above, the following objects are
available. From left to right they are: Static Text, ASCII Display, Static Bitmap, Scale, Bar Graph, Button,
Clock Display, Multi-state bit map, Units, Numeric Input, the 11 geometric bitmaps, and lines of different
widths. Use the same steps to add Static Text, Static Bitmap, and geometric bitmaps as for the start-up
page.
3. Add a numeric/ASCII display. On the toolbar, click the Numeric/ASCII button. In the page, double-click
the object to specify the Refer Device, Frame Setting, Font Setting and Alignment.
Click […]. In the Refer Device dialog box, choose the VFD communication port that you need. If you
want to read the output frequency (H), set the Absolute Addr. to 2202. For other values, refer to the
ACMD Modbus Comm Address List (see Pr.09-04 in Chapter 12 Group 09 Communication Parameters).
10-28
4. Scale Setting. On the toolbar, click to add a scale. You can also edit the Scale Setting in the
Property Window on the right-hand side of your computer screen.
a. Scale Position: specifies where to place the scale.

b. Scale Side: specifies whether the scale is numbered from smaller numbers to larger numbers or
from larger to smaller.
c. Font Setting: specifies the font.
d. Value Length: specifies 16 bits or 32 bits.
e. Main Scale & Sub-Scale: divides the whole scale into equal parts; enter the numbers for the main
scale and sub-scale.
f. Max Value & Min Value: specifies the numbers on the two ends of the scale. They can be negative
numbers, but the maximum and minimum values are limited by the Value Length setting. For
example, when Value Length is hexadecimal (16 bits), the maximum and the minimum value
cannot be entered as -40000.
Clicking OK creates a scale as in the picture below.
5. Bar Graph setting. On the toolbar, click to add a bar graph.
10-29
a. Refer Device: specifies the VFD communication port.

b. Direction Setting: specifies the direction: From Bottom to Top, From Top to Bottom, From Left
to Right or From Right to Left.
c. Max Value and Min Value: specifies the maximum value and minimum value. A value smaller than
or equal to the minimum value causes the bar graph to be blank (0). A value is bigger or equal to the
maximum value causes the bar graph is full (100%). A value between the minimum and maximum
values causes the bar graph to be filled proportionally.
6. Button : on the toolbar, click . Currently this function only allows the keypad to switch pages; other
functions are not yet available (including text input and insert image). In the blank page, double-click
to open the Button Setting dialog box.
Button Type: specifies the button’s functions.

Page Jump and Constant Setting are the only functions currently supported.
A. Page Jump Setting
 Page Jump Setting: in the Button Type list, choose Page Jump to show the Page Jump Setting.
 Function Key: specifies the functions for the following keys on the KPC-CC01 keypad: F1, F2, F3,
F4, Up, Down, Left and Right. Note that the Up and Down keys are locked by TPEditor. You cannot
program these two keys. If you want to program Up and Down keys, on the Tool menu, click
Function Key Setting, and then click Re-Define Up/Down Key.
 Button Text: specifies the text that appears on a button. For example, when you enter Next Page
for the button text, that text appears on the button.
10-30
B. Constant setting
This function specifies the memory address’ values for the VFD or PLC. When you press the Function
Key, it writes a value to the memory address specified by the value for Constant Setting. You can use
this function to initialize a variable.
7. Clock Display Setting: on the toolbar, click . You can display the time, day, or date on the keypad.
Open a new page and click once in that window to add a clock display.
Choose to display Time, Day, or Date on the keypad. To adjust time, go to #8 on the keypad’s menu. You
can also specify the Frame Setting, Font Setting, and Alignment.
8. Multi-state bitmap: on the toolbar, click . Open a new page and click once in that window to add a
Multi-state bitmap. This object reads a bit’s property value from the PLC. It defines the image or text that
appears when this bit is 0 or 1. Set the initial status (Current State) to be 0 or 1 to define the displayed
image or text.
10-31
9. Unit Measurement: on the toolbar, click

Open a new blank page, and double-click on that window to display the Units Setting dialog box.
Choose the Metrology Type and the Unit Name. For Metrology, the choices are Length, Square Measure,
Volume/Solid Measure, Weight, Speed, Time, and Temperature. The unit name changes automatically
when you change metrology type.
10. Numeric Input Setting: on the toolbar, click
This object enables you to provide parameters or communication ports (0x22xx) and to input numbers.
Open a new file and double click on that window to display the Numeric Input Setting dialog box.
a. Refer Device: specifies the Write and the Read values. Enter the numbers to display and the
corresponding parameter and communication port numbers. For example, enter 012C to Read and
Write Parameter Pr.01-44.
b. OutLine Setting: specifies the Frame Setting, Font Setting, Hori. Alignment, and Vert.
Alignment for the outline.
c. Function Key: specifies the function key to program on the keypad in the Function Key box. The
corresponding key on the keypad starts to blink. Press ENTER to confirm the setting.
d. Value Type and Value Length: specify the range of the Min Value and Max Value for the Limit
Setting. Note that the corresponding supporting values for MS300 must be 16 bits. 32-bit values
are not supported.
e. Value Setting: automatically set by the keypad itself.
f. Limit Setting: specifies the range for the numeric input here.
10-32
For example, if you set Function Key to F1, Min Value to 0 and Max Value to 4, when you press
F1 on the keypad, then you can press Up/Down on the keypad to increase or decrease the value.
Press ENTER on the keypad to confirm your setting. You can also view the parameter table 01-44
to verify if you correctly entered the value.
11. Download TP Page: Press Up / Down on the keypad to select #13 PC Link.
Then press ENTER on the keypad. The screen displays “Waiting”. In TPEditor, choose a page that you
have created, and then on the Communication menu click Write to TP to start downloading the page to
the keypad.
When you see “Completed” on the keypad screen, the download is finished. You can then press ESC on
the keypad to go back to the menu screen.
10-33
10-4 Fault Code Description of Digital Keypad KPC-CC01
Fault Codes
LCD Display * Fault Name Description Corrective Actions

Error in the keypad’s flash memory.
1. Press RESET to clear the errors.
Flash memory 2. Check for any problem on Flash IC.
Keypad flash memory
read error 3. Shut down the system, wait for ten minutes,
read error
(FrEr) and then restart the system.
If none of the above solutions works, contact
your authorized local dealer for assistance.
Error in the keypad’s flash memory.
Flash memory 2. Check for any problem on Flash IC.
Keypad flash memory
save error 3. Shut down the system, wait for ten minutes,
save error
(FsEr) and then restart the system.
Error in the default parameters.
It might be caused by a firmware update.
Flash memory
Keypad flash memory 2. Check for any problem on Flash IC.
parameter error
parameter error 3. Shut down the system, wait for ten minutes,
(FPEr)
and then restart the system.
Keypad cannot read any data sent from the VFD.
1. Verify that the keypad is properly connected to
the motor drive by a communication cable
Reading AC
Keypad error when such as RJ45.
motor drive data
reading AC motor drive 2. Press RESET to clear the errors.
error
data 3. Shut down the system, wait for ten minutes,
(VFDr)
A serious error in the keypad’s CPU.
1. Check for any problem on CPU clock.
2. Check for any problem on Flash IC.
3. Check for any problem on RTC IC.
CPU error 4. Verify that the communication quality of the
Keypad CPU error
(CPUEr) RS-485 cable is good.
5. Shut down the system, wait for ten minutes,
10-34
Warning Codes
LCD Display * Warning Name Description Corrective Actions

Motor drive does not accept the communication
command sent from the keypad.
Commuication error
RS-485 Modbus the motor drive by a communication cable such
1
illegal function code as RJ45.
(CE1)
2. Press RESET on the keypad to clear errors.
If none of the above solutions works, contact your
local authorized dealer for assistance.
Keypad does not accept the motor drive’s
communication command.
Keypad 1. Remove the keypad and reconnect it.
communication data, 2. Verify if the Baud rate = 19200 bps, and the
Communication
illegal function code Format = RTU8, N, 2
command error 1
(Keypad auto-detect 3. Verify if the keypad is properly connected to the
(CK1)
this error and display motor drive on the communication contact by a
it) communication cable such as RJ45.
If none of the above solution works, contact your
local authorized dealer.
Motor drive does not accept the keypad’s
communication address.
Communication
error 2
illegal data address as RJ45.
(CE2)
Communication
illegal data address Format = RTU8, N, 2
address error
(CK2)
Motor drive does not accept the communication
data sent from the keypad.
Communication
error 3
illegal data value as RJ45.
(CE3)
Communication
illegal data value Format = RTU8, N, 2
data error
(CK3)
10-35
LCD Display * Warning Name Description Corrective Actions

Motor drive cannot process the communication
command sent from the keypad.
the motor drive by a communication cable such
Communication RS-485 Modbus
as RJ45.
error 4 data is written to
(CE4) read-only address
Keypad
1. Remove the keypad and reconnect it.
communication data
2. Verify if the Baud rate = 19200 bps, and the
Communication is written to
Format = RTU8, N, 2
slave error read-only address
3. Verify if the keypad is properly connected to the
(CK4) (Keypad auto-detect
motor drive on the communication contact by a
this error and display
communication cable such as RJ45.
it)
Motor drive does not respond to the
communication command sent from the keypad.
the motor drive by a communication cable such
Communication RS-485 Modbus
as RJ45.
error 10 transmission
(CE10) time-Out
Keypad communication data, 2. Verify if the Baud rate = 19200 bps, and the
communication transmission Format = RTU8, N, 2
time out time-out (Keypad 3. Verify if the keypad is properly connected to the
(CK10) auto-detect this error motor drive on the communication contact by a
and display it). communication cable such as RJ45.
Keypad’s TPEditor uses an unsupported object.
1. Verify that the TPEditor is not using an
unsupported object or setting. Delete
unsupported objects and unsupported settings.
Keypad
2. Re-edit the object in the TPEditor, and then
communication Object not supported
download it to the keypad.
time out by TPEditor
3. Verify that the motor drive supports the TP
(CK10)
functions. If the drive does not support TP
function, the main page displays Default.
NOTE The warning code CExx only occurs when the communication problem is between the drive
and the keypad. It has nothing to do with the drive and other devices. Note the warning code
description to find the cause of the error if CExx appears.
10-36
File Copy Setting Fault Description:
These faults occur when KPC-CC01 cannot perform the command after clicking the ENTER key in the
copy function.

The parameter / file is read-only and cannot be
written to.
Read only Parameter and file are
1. Verify the specification in the user manual.
(ERR1) read-only
If this solution does not work, contact your local
authorized dealer for assistance.
An error occurred while writing to a parameter /
file.
1. Check for any problem on the Flash IC.
Write in error Fail to write parameter
(ERR2) and file
A setting cannot be changed while the motor
drive is in operation.
Drive operating AC motor drive is in
1. Verify that the drive is not in operation.
(ERR3) operating status
A setting cannot be changed because a
parameter is locked.
1. Check if the parameter is locked. If it is
Parameter locked AC motor drive
locked, unlock it and try to set the parameter
(ERR4) parameter is locked
again.
A setting cannot be changed because a
parameter is being modified.
Parameter 1. Check if the parameter is being modified. If it
AC motor drive
changing is not being modified, try to change that
parameter is changing
(ERR5) parameter again.
A setting cannot be changed because an error
has occurred in the motor drive.
1. Check if any error occurred in the motor
Fault code Fault code is not
drive. If there is no error, try to change the
(ERR6) cleared
setting again.
A setting cannot be changed because of a
warning message given to the motor drive.
Warning code Warning code is not 1. Check if there is a warning message given to
(ERR7) cleared the motor drive.
10-37

Data to be copied are not the correct type, so
the setting cannot be changed.
1. Check if the products’ serial numbers to be
File type
copied are in the same category. If they are
mismatch File type mismatch
in the same category, try to copy the setting
(ERR8)
again.
A setting cannot be changed because some
data are locked.
1. Check if the data are unlocked or able to be
unlocked. If the data are unlocked, try to
Password locked File is locked with
change the setting again.
(ERR9) password
your local authorized dealer for assistance.
A setting cannot be changed because the
password is incorrect.
1. Check if the password is correct. If the
password is correct, try to change the setting
Password fail File password
again.
(ERR10) mismatch
A setting cannot be changed because the
version of the data is incorrect.
1. Check if the version of the data matches the
Version fail
File version mismatch motor drive. If it matches, try to change the
(ERR11)
setting again.
A setting cannot be changed because the data
copying time-out expired.
1. Try copying the data again.
2. Check if copying data is authorized. If it is
VFD Time out AC motor drive copy
authorized, try to copy the data again.
(ERR12) function time-out
※ The content in this section only applies to the KPC-CC01 keypad V1.01 and later versions.
10-38
10-5 Unsupported Functions when using TPEditor with the KPC-CC01
1. Local Page Setting and Global Setting functions are not supported.
2. In the Communication menu, Read from TP function is not supported.
3. In the RTC Display Setting, you cannot change the Refer Device.
10-39
10-40
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter SettingsCP2000
Chapter 11 Summary of Parameter Settings
This chapter provides a summary of parameter (Pr.) setting ranges and defaults. You can set,
changed and reset parameters through the digital keypad.
NOTE
1) : You can set this parameter during operation
2) For more detail on parameters, refer to Ch12 Description of Parameter Settings.
3) The following are abbreviations for different types of motors:
 IM: Induction motor
 PM: Permanent magnet synchronous AC motor
 IPM: Interior permanent magnet synchronous AC motor
 SPM: Surface permanent magnet synchronous AC motor
 SynRM: Synchronous reluctance motor
00 Drive Parameters
Pr. Parameter Name Settings Range Default
4: 230V, 0.75 kW
5: 460V, 0.75 kW
6: 230V, 1.50 kW
7: 460V, 1.50 kW
8: 230V, 2.20 kW
9: 460V, 2.20 kW
10: 230V, 3.70 kW
11: 460V, 3.70 kW
12: 230V, 5.50 kW
13: 460V, 5.50 kW
14: 230V, 7.50 kW
15: 460V, 7.50 kW
16: 230V, 11.0 kW
17: 460V, 11.0 kW
Read
00-00 AC motor drive identity code 18: 230V, 15.0 kW
only
19: 460V, 15.0 kW
20: 230V, 18.5 kW
21: 460V, 18.5 kW
22: 230V, 22.0 kW
23: 460V, 22.0 kW
24: 230V, 30.0 kW
25: 460V, 30.0 kW
26: 230V, 37.0 kW
27: 460V, 37.0 kW
28: 230V, 45.0 kW
29: 460V, 45.0 kW
30: 230V, 55.0 kW
31: 460V, 55.0 kW
32: 230V, 75.0 kW
11-1

33: 460V, 75.0 kW
34: 230V, 90.0 kW
35: 460V, 90.0 kW
37: 460V, 110.0 kW
39: 460V, 132.0 kW
41: 460V, 160.0 kW
43: 460V, 185.0 kW
45: 460V, 220.0 kW
47: 460V, 280.0 kW
49: 460V, 315.0 kW
51: 460V, 355.0 kW
53: 460V, 400.0 kW
55: 460V, 450.0 kW
57: 460V, 500.0 kW
59: 460V, 560.0 kW
61: 460V, 630.0 kW
90: 230V, 3.00 kW
91: 460V, 3.00 kW
92: 230V, 4.00 kW
93: 460V, 4.00 kW
486: 460V, 200 kW
487: 460V, 250 kW
505: 575V, 1.5 kW
506: 575V, 2.2 kW
507: 575V, 3.7 kW
508: 575V, 5.5 kW
509: 575V, 7.5 kW
510: 575V, 11 kW
511: 575V, 15 kW
612: 690V, 18.5 kW
613: 690V, 22 kW
614: 690V, 30 kW
615: 690V, 37 kW
616: 690V, 45 kW
617: 690V, 55 kW
618: 690V, 75 kW
619: 690V, 90 kW
620: 690V, 110 kW
621: 690V, 132 kW
622: 690V, 160 kW
626: 690V, 315 kW
628: 690V, 400 kW
629: 690V, 450 kW
631: 690V, 560 kW
632: 690V, 630 kW
686: 690V, 200 kW
687: 690V, 250 kW
Read
00-01 AC motor drive rated current display Display by models
only
11-2

0: No function
1: Write protection for parameters
5: Return kWh displays to 0
6: Reset PLC (including CANopen Master Index)
00-02 Parameter reset 7: Reset CANopen Slave index 0
9: Reset all parameters to defaults
(base frequency is 50 Hz)
10: Reset all parameters to defaults
(base frequency is 60 Hz)
0: F (frequency command)
1: H (output frequency)
 00-03 Start-up display 0
2: U (user-defined, see Pr.00-04)
3: A (output current)
0: Display output current (A) (Unit: Amp)
1: Display counter value (c) (Unit: CNT)
2: Display the motor’s actual output frequency (H.)
(Unit: Hz)
3: Display the drive’s DC bus voltage (v) (Unit: VDC)
4: Display the drive’s output voltage (E) (Unit: VAC)
5: Display the drive’s output power angle (n)
(Unit: deg)
6: Display the drive’s output power (P) (Unit: kW)
7: Display the motor speed rpm (r) (Unit: rpm)
10: Display PID feedback (b) (Unit: %)
11: Display AVI1 analog input terminal signal (1.)
(Unit: %)
12: Display ACI analog input terminal signal (2.)
(Unit: %)
13: Display AVI2 analog input terminal signal (3.)
(Unit: %)
Content of multi-function display 14: Display the drive’s IGBT temperature (i.)
 00-04 3
(user-defined) (Unit: °C)
15: Display the drive’s capacitance temperature (c.)
(Unit: °C)
16: The digital input status (ON / OFF) (i)
17: The digital output status (ON / OFF) (o)
18: Display multi-step speed (S)
19: The corresponding CPU digital input pin status
(d)
20: The corresponding CPU digital output pin status
(0.)
26: Ground fault GFF (G.) (Unit: %)
27: DC bus voltage ripple (r.) (Unit: VDC)
28: Display PLC register D1043 data (C)
30: Display the output of User-defined (U)
31: Display Pr.00-05 user gain (K)
34: Operation speed of fan (F.) (Unit: %)
36: Present operating carrier frequency of the drive
(J.) (Unit: Hz)
11-3

38: Display the drive status (6.)
41: kWh display (J) (Unit: kWh)
42: PID target value (h.) (Unit: %)
43: PID compensation (o.) (Unit: %)
44: PID output frequency (b.) (Unit: Hz)
45: Hardware ID
51: PMSVC torque offset
52: AI10%
53: AI11%
68: STO version
69: STO checksum-high word (d)
70: STO checksum-low word (d)
Coefficient gain in actual output
 00-05 0.00–160.00 1.00
frequency
Read
00-06 Firmware version Read only
only
Parameter protection password 0–65535
 00-07 0
input 0–4: the number of password attempts allowed
0–65535
Parameter protection password 0: No password protection or password entered
 00-08 0
setting correctly (Pr.00-07)
1: Parameter has been set
0: IMVF (IM V/F control)
2: IM / PM SVC (IM / PM Space vector control)
6: PM Sensorless (PM filed-oriented sensorless
00-11 Speed control mode 0
vector control) (applied to 230V / 460V models)
8: SynRM Sensorless control (applied to 230V /
460V models)
0: Light duty
00-16 Load selection 0
1: Normal duty
230V / 460V models
Light duty
Control mode
VF, SVC PMFOC SRMFOC*
Model
VFD007–150CP23A/E
2–15 4–10 4–8
8
VFD007–185CP43A/E
VFD185–450CP23A/E 6
2–10 4–10 4–8
VFD220–750CP43A/E
VFD550–1100CP23A/E 4
2–9 4–9 4–8
VFD900–6300CP43A/E
*The default is 4 kHz in SRMFOC mode.
00-17 Carrier Frequency (kHz)

Normal duty
Control mode
VF, SVC PMFOC SRMFOC*
Model
VFD007–150CP23A/E
2–15 4–10 4–8 8
VFD007–185CP43A/E
VFD185–450CP23A/E
2–10 4–10 4–8 6
VFD220–750CP43A/E
VFD550–1100CP23A/E
2–9 4–9 4–8 4
VFD900–6300CP43A/E
*The default is 4 kHz in SRMFOC mode.
11-4

575V / 690V models
Light duty
Control mode
VF, SVC
Model
4
VFD015–150CP53A 2–9
VFD185–5600CP63A 2–9 4
VFD6300CP63A 2–9 3
Normal duty
Control mode
VF, SVC
Model
VFD015–150CP53A 2–9 4
VFD185–5600CP63A 2–9 4
VFD6300CP63A 2–9 3
bit0: Control command is forced by PLC control Read

00-19 PLC command mask
bit1: Frequency command is forced by PLC control only
0: Digital keypad
1: RS-485 communication input
2: External analog input (Refer to Pr.03-00–03-02)
Master frequency command
3: External UP / DOWN terminal (multi-function input
00-20 source (AUTO) / Source selection 0
terminals)
of the PID target
6: CANopen communication card
8: Communication card (does not include CANopen
card)
0: Digital keypad
1: External terminals
Operation command source 2: RS-485 communication input
00-21 0
(AUTO) 3: CANopen communication card
card)
0: Ramp to stop
 00-22 Stop method 0
1: Coast to stop
0: Enable forward / reverse
 00-23 Motor direction control 1: Disable reverse 0
2: Disable forward
Digital operator (keypad) frequency Read
00-24 Read only
command memory only
bit0–3: user-defined decimal place
0000b: no decimal place
0001b: one decimal place
0010b: two decimal places
0011b: three decimal places
 00-25 User-defined characteristics 0
bit4–15: user-defined unit
000xh: Hz
001xh: rpm
002xh: %
003xh: kg
11-5

004xh: m/s
005xh: kW
006xh: HP
007xh: ppm
008xh: 1/m
009xh: kg/s
00Axh: kg/m
00Bxh: kg/h
00Cxh: lb/s
00Dxh: lb/m
00Exh: lb/h
00Fxh: ft/s
010xh: ft/m
011xh: m
012xh: ft
013xh: degC
014xh: degF
015xh: mbar
016xh: bar
017xh: Pa
018xh: kPa
019xh: mWG
01Axh: inWG
01Bxh: ftWG
01Cxh: psi
01Dxh: atm
01Exh: L/s
01Fxh: L/m
020xh: L/h
021xh: m3/s
022xh: m3/h
023xh: GPM
024xh: CFM
xxxxh: Hz
0: No function
0–65535 (when Pr.00-25 is set to no decimal place)
0.0–6553.5 (when Pr.00-25 is set to 1 decimal
place)
00-26 Maximum user-defined value 0
places)
places)
Read
00-27 User-defined value Read only
Only
bit0: Sleep function control bit
0: Cancel sleep function
Switching from AUTO mode to
 00-28 1: Sleep function and Auto mode are the same
HAND mode
bit1: Control bit unit
0: Displaying unit in Hz
11-6

1: Same unit as the Auto mode
bit2: PID control bit
0: Cancel PID control
1: PID control and Auto mode are the same
bit3: Frequency source control bit
0: Frequency source set up by parameter, if the
multi-step speed is activated, then
multi-speed has the priority.
1: Frequency command set up by Pr.00-30,
regardless of whether the multi-step speed
is activated.
0: Standard HOA function
1: When switching between local and remote, the
drive stops
drive runs with REMOTE settings for frequency
and operation status
00-29 LOCAL / REMOTE selection 0
drive runs with LOCAL settings for frequency and
operation status
drive runs with LOCAL settings when switched to
Local and runs with REMOTE settings when
switched to Remote for frequency and operation
status.
0: Digital keypad
2: External analog input (Refer to Pr.03-00–03-02)
Master frequency command source
00-30 3: External UP / DOWN terminal 0
(HAND)
card)
0: Digital keypad
Operation command source 2: RS-485 communication input
00-31 0
(HAND) 3: CANopen communication card
card)
0: STOP key disabled
 00-32 Digital keypad STOP function 0
1: STOP key enabled
 00-37 Over-modulation gain 80–120 100
 00-48 Display filter time (current) 0.001–65.535 sec. 0.100
 00-49 Display filter time (keypad) 0.001–65.535 sec. 0.100
Read
00-50 Software version (Date) Read only
only
11-7
01 Basic Parameters
50.00–599.00 Hz
Maximum operation frequency of 60.00 /
 01-00 Setting range for/including 45 kW (60 HP) and
motor 1 50.00
above: 0.00–400 Hz
60.00 /
01-01 Rated / base frequency of motor 1 0.00–599.00 Hz
50.00
230V models: 0.0–255.0 V 200.0
460V models: 0.0–510.0 V 400.0
01-02 Rated / base voltage of motor 1
575V models: 0.0–637.0 V 575.0
690V models: 0.0–765.0 V 660.0
3.00 /
01-03 Mid-point frequency 1 of motor 1 0.00–599.00 Hz
0.00
230V models: 0.0–240.0 V 11.0
460V models: 0.0–480.0 V 22.0
 01-04 Mid-point voltage 1 of motor 1 575V models: 0.0–637.0 V 0.0
690V models: 0.0–720.0 V 0.0
*690V, with 185 kW and above: 10.0
01-05 Mid-point frequency 2 of motor 1 0.00–599.00 Hz 1.50
230V models: 0.0–240.0 V 5.0
460V models: 0.0–480.0 V 10.0
690V models: 0.0–720.0 V 0.0
*690V, with 185 kW and above: 2.0
01-07 Minimum output frequency of motor 1 0.00–599.00 Hz 1.50
230V models: 0.0–240.0 V 1.0
460V models: 0.0–480.0 V 2.0
 01-08 Minimum output voltage of motor 1
575V models: 0.0–637.0 V 0.0
690V models: 0.0–720.0 V 0.0
01-09 Start-up frequency 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.50
 01-10 Output frequency upper limit 0.00–599.00 Hz 599.00
 01-11 Output frequency lower limit 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.00
Pr.01-45 = 0: 0.00–600.00 sec.
Pr.01-45 = 1: 0.0–6000.0 sec.
 01-12 Acceleration time 1 Motor drive with 230V/460V/690V, 22 kW and above: 10.00
60.00 / 60.0
Motor drive with 690V, 160 kW and above: 80.00 / 80.0
Pr.01-45 = 0: 0.00–600.00 sec.
Pr.01-45 = 1: 0.0–6000.0 sec.
 01-13 Deceleration time 1 Motor drive with 230V/460V/690V, 22 kW and above: 10.00
60.00 / 60.0
Pr.01-45 = 0: 0.00–600.00 sec.
Pr.01-45 = 1: 0.0–6000.0 sec.
60.00 / 60.0
11-8

Pr.01-45 = 0: 0.00–600.00 sec.
Pr.01-45 = 1: 0.0–6000.0 sec.
60.00 / 60.0
Pr.01-45 = 0: 0.00–600.00 sec.
Pr.01-45 = 1: 0.0–6000.0 sec.
60.00 / 60.0
Pr.01-45 = 0: 0.00–600.00 sec.
Pr.01-45 = 1: 0.0–6000.0 sec.
60.00 / 60.0
Pr.01-45 = 0: 0.00–600.00 sec.
Pr.01-45 = 1: 0.0–6000.0 sec.
60.00 / 60.0
Pr.01-45 = 0: 0.00–600.00 sec.
Pr.01-45 = 1: 0.0–6000.0 sec.
60.00 / 60.0
Pr.01-45 = 0: 0.00–600.00 sec.
Pr.01-45 = 1: 0.0–6000.0 sec.
 01-20 JOG acceleration time Motor drive with 230V/460V/690V, 22 kW and above: 10.00
60.00 / 60.0
Pr.01-45 = 0: 0.00–600.00 sec.
Pr.01-45 = 1: 0.0–6000.0 sec.
 01-21 JOG deceleration time Motor drive with 230V/460V/690V, 22 kW and above: 10.00
60.00 / 60.0
 01-22 JOG frequency 0.00–599.00 Hz 6.00
Switch frequency between first and
 01-23 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.00
fourth Accel. / Decel.
Pr.01-45 = 0: 0.00–25.00 sec.
 01-24 S-curve for acceleration begin time 1 0.20
Pr.01-45 = 1: 0.0–250.0 sec.
Pr.01-45 = 0: 0.00–25.00 sec.
 01-25 S-curve for acceleration arrival time 2 0.20
Pr.01-45 = 1: 0.0–250.0 sec.
Pr.01-45 = 0: 0.00–25.00 sec.
 01-26 S-curve for deceleration begin time 1 0.20
Pr.01-45 = 1: 0.0–250.0 sec.
Pr.01-45 = 0: 0.00–25.00 sec.
 01-27 S-curve for deceleration arrival time 2 0.20
Pr.01-45 = 1: 0.0–250.0 sec.
01-28 Skip frequency 1 (upper limit) 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.00
01-29 Skip frequency 1 (lower limit) 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.00
11-9

0: Output waiting
1: Zero-speed operation
01-34 Zero-speed mode 0
2: Minimum frequency (Refer to Pr.01-07 and
Pr.01-41)
60.00 /
01-35 Rated / base frequency of motor 2 0.00–599.00 Hz
50.00
230V models: 0.0–255.0 V 200.0
460V models: 0.0–510.0 V 400.0
01-36 Rated / base voltage of motor 2
575V models: 0.0–637.0 V 575.0
690V models: 0.0–765.0 V 660.0
230V models: 0.0–240.0 V 11.0
460V models: 0.0–480.0 V 22.0
690V models: 0.0–720.0 V 0.0
Motor drive with 690V, 185 kW and above: 10.0
230V models: 0.0–240.0 V 5.0
460V models: 0.0–480.0 V 10.0
690V models: 0.0–720.0 V 0.0
Motor drive with 690V, 185 kW and above: 2.0
01-41 Minimum output frequency of motor 2 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.50
230V models: 0.0–240.0 V 1.0
460V models: 0.0–480.0 V 2.0
 01-42 Minimum output voltage of motor 2
575V models: 0.0–637.0 V 0.0
690V models: 0.0–720.0 V 0.0
0: V/F curve determined by Pr.01-00–01-08
1: V/F curve to the power of 1.5
2: V/F curve to the power of 2
3: 60 Hz, voltage saturation in 50 Hz
5: 50 Hz, decrease gradually with cube
6: 50 Hz, decrease gradually with square
01-43 V/F curve selection 0
9: 50 Hz, medium starting torque
10: 50 Hz, high starting torque
11-10

0: Linear acceleration and deceleration
1: Auto-acceleration and linear deceleration
Auto-acceleration and 2: Linear acceleration and auto-deceleration
 01-44 0
auto-deceleration setting 3: Auto-acceleration and auto-deceleration
4: Stall prevention by auto-acceleration and
auto-deceleration (limited by Pr.01-12–01-21)
Time unit for acceleration / 0: Unit: 0.01 sec.
01-45 0
deceleration and S-curve 1: Unit: 0.1 sec.
Pr.01-45 = 0: 0.00–600.00 sec. 1.00
 01-46 CANopen quick stop time
Pr.01-45 = 1: 0.0–6000.0 sec. 1.0
0: Normal deceleration
1: Over-voltage energy restriction
01-49 Deceleration method selection 0
2: Traction energy control (TEC)
3: Electromagnetic energy traction control
Electromagnetic traction energy
 01-50 0.00–5.00 Hz 0.50
consumption coefficient
Flux-weakening overload stall
 01-51 prevention time (applied to 230V / 0.00–600.00 sec. 1.00
460V models)
11-11
02 Digital Input / Output Parameters
Pr. Parameter Name Setting Range Default

0: Two-wire mode 1, power on for operation control
Two-wire / three-wire operation
02-00 1: Two-wire mode 2, power on for operation control 0
control
2: Three-wire, power on for operation control
02-01 Multi-function input command 1 (MI1) 0: No function 1
02-02 Multi-function input command 2 (MI2) 1: Multi-step speed command 1 2
02-06 Multi-function input command 6 (MI6) 5: Reset 0
02-07 Multi-function input command 7 (MI7) 6: JOG operation (By KPC-CC01 or external 0
02-08 Multi-function input command 8 (MI8) control) 0
Input terminal of I/O extension card 7: Acceleration / deceleration speed inhibit
02-26 0
(MI10) 8: 1st and 2nd acceleration / deceleration time
Input terminal of I/O extension card selection
02-27 0
(MI11) 9: 3rd and 4th acceleration / deceleration time
Input terminal of I/O extension card selection
02-28 0
(MI12) 10: External Fault (EF) input (Pr.07-20)
Input terminal of I/O extension card 11: Base Block (B.B) input from external
02-29 0
(MI13) 12: Output stop
Input terminal of I/O extension card 13: Cancel the setting of auto-acceleration /
02-30 0
(MI14) auto-deceleration time
Input terminal of I/O extension card 14: Switch between motor 1 and motor 2
02-31 0
(MI15) 15: Rotating speed command from AVI1
16: Rotating speed command from ACI
17: Rotating speed command from AVI2
18: Forced to stop (Pr.07-20)
19: Frequency up command
20: Frequency down command
21: PID function disabled
22: Clear the counter
23: Input the counter value (MI6)
24: FWD JOG command
25: REV JOG command
28: Emergency stop (EF1)
29: Signal confirmation for Y-connection
30: Signal confirmation for ᇞ-connection
38: Disable write EEPROM function
40: Force coasting to stop
41: HAND switch
42: AUTO switch
49: Enable drive
50: Slave dEb action to execute
51: Selection for PLC mode bit0
53: Trigger CANopen quick stop
11-12

54: UVW output electromagnetic valve switch
55: Brake release
56: Local / Remote selection
58: Enable fire mode (with RUN command)
59: Enable fire mode (without RUN command)
60: Disable all the motors
61: Disable Motor 1
62: Disable Motor 2
63: Disable Motor 3
64: Disable Motor 4
65: Disable Motor 5
66: Disable Motor 6
67: Disable Motor 7
68: Disable Motor 8
69: Preheating command
0: UP / DOWN by the acceleration / deceleration
 02-09 UP / DOWN key mode time 0
1: UP / DOWN constant speed (Pr.02-10)
Constant speed, acceleration /
 02-10 deceleration speed of the UP / 0.001–1.000 Hz / ms 0.001
DOWN key
 02-11 Multi-function input response time 0.000–30.000 sec. 0.005
 02-12 Multi-function input mode selection 0000h–FFFFh (0: N.O.; 1: N.C.) 0000h
 02-13 Multi-function output 1 RLY1 0: No function 11
 02-14 Multi-function output 2 RLY2 1: Indication during RUN 1
 02-15 Multi-function output 3 RLY3 2: Operation speed reached 66
Output terminal of I/O extension card 3: Desired frequency reached 1 (Pr.02-22)
 02-36 0
(MO10) or (RA10) 4: Desired frequency reached 2 (Pr.02-24)
Output terminal of I/O extension card 5: Zero speed (Frequency command)
 02-37 0
(MO11) or (RA11) 6: Zero speed including STOP (Frequency
Output terminal of I/O extension card command)
 02-38 0
(RA12) 7: Over-torque 1 (Pr.06-06–06-08)
Output terminal of I/O extension card 8: Over-torque 2 (Pr.06-09–06-11)
 02-39 0
(RA13) 9: Drive is ready
Output terminal of I/O extension card 10: Low voltage warning (Lv) (Pr.06-00)
 02-40 0
(RA14) 11: Malfunction indication
Output terminal of I/O extension card 12: Mechanical brake release (Pr.02-32)
 02-41 0
(RA15) 13: Overheat warning (Pr.06-15)
Output terminal of I/O extension card 14: Software brake signal indication (Pr.07-00)
 02-42 0
(MO16 virtual terminal) 15: PID feedback error (Pr.08-13, Pr.08-14)
Output terminal of I/O extension card 16: Slip error (oSL)
 02-43 0
(MO17 virtual terminal) 17: Count value reached, does not return to 0
Output terminal of I/O extension card (Pr.02-20)
 02-44 0
(MO18 virtual terminal) 18: Count value reached, returns to 0
Output terminal of I/O extension card (Pr.02-19)
 02-45 0
(MO19 virtual terminal) 19: External interrupt B.B. input (Base Block)
Output terminal of I/O extension card 20: Warning output
 02-46 0
(MO20 virtual terminal) 21: Over-voltage
11-13

22: Over-current stall prevention
23: Over-voltage stall prevention
24: Operation mode
25: Forward command
26: Reverse command
27: Output when current ≥ Pr.02-33
28: Output when current < Pr.02-33
29: Output when frequency ≥ Pr.02-34
30: Output when frequency < Pr.02-34
31: Y-connection for the motor coil
32: ᇞ-connection for the motor coil
33: Zero speed (actual output frequency)
34: Zero speed including stop (actual output
frequency)
35: Error output selection 1 (Pr.06-23)
40: Speed reached (including stop)
44: Low current output (use with Pr.06-71–06-73)
46: Master dEb output
50: Output control for CANopen
51: Analog output control for RS-485 interface
(InnerCOM / Modbus)
52: Output control for communication cards
53: Fire mode indication
54: Bypass fire mode indication
55: Motor 1 output
56: Motor 2 output
57: Motor 3 output
58: Motor 4 output
59: Motor 5 output
60: Motor 6 output
61: Motor 7 output
62: Motor 8 output
66: SO output logic A
67: Analog input level reached
68: SO output logic B
69: Preheating output indication
 02-18 Multi-function output direction 0000h–FFFFh (0: N.O.; 1: N.C.) 0000h
Terminal counting value reached
 02-19 0–65500 0
(returns to 0)
Preliminary counting value reached
 02-20 0–65500 0
(does not return to 0)
60.00 /
 02-22 Desired frequency reached 1 0.00–599.00 Hz
50.00
The width of the desired frequency
 02-23 0.00–599.00 Hz 2.00
reached 1
11-14

60.00 /
 02-24 Desired frequency reached 2 0.00–599.00 Hz
50.00
The width of the desired frequency
 02-25 0.00–599.00 Hz 2.00
reached 2
02-32 Brake delay time 0.000–65.000 sec. 0.000
Output current level setting for
 02-33 0–150% 0
multi-function output terminal
Output frequency setting for
 02-34 0.00–599.00 Hz 3.00
multi-function output terminal
0: Disable
External operation control selection
 02-35 1: Drive runs if the RUN command remains after 0
after reset and reboot
reset or reboot
Display the status of multi-function Read
02-50 Monitor the status of multi-function input terminals
input terminal only
Display the status of multi-function Monitor the status of multi-function output Read
02-51
output terminal terminals only
Display the external multi-function Read
02-52 Monitor the status of PLC input terminals
input terminals used by PLC only
Display the external multi-function Read
02-53 Monitor the status of PLC output terminals
output terminals used by PLC only
Display the frequency command Read
02-54 0.00–599.00 Hz (Read only)
executed by external terminal only
1: EMC-BPS01
4: EMC-D611A
Read
02-70 IO card types 5: EMC-D42A
only
6: EMC-R6AA
11: EMC-A22A
 02-72 Preheating output current level 0–100% 0
 02-73 Preheating output cycle 0–100% 0
11-15
03 Analog Input / Output Parameters

 03-00 AVI1 analog input selection 0: No function 1
 03-01 ACI analog input selection 1: Frequency command (speed limit under torque 0
 03-02 AVI2 analog input selection control mode) 0
4: PID target value
5: PID feedback signal
6: Thermistor (PTC) input value
11: PT100 thermistor input value
13: PID compensation value
 03-03 AVI1 analog input bias
 03-04 ACI analog input bias
-100.0–100.0% 0.0
AVI2 analog positive voltage
 03-05
input bias
AVI1 positive / negative bias 0: No bias
 03-07
mode 1: Lower than or equal to bias
ACI positive / negative bias 2: Greater than or equal to bias
 03-08 0
mode 3: The absolute value of the bias voltage while serving
AVI2 positive / negative bias as the center
 03-09
mode 4: Bias serves as the center
0: Negative frequency input is not allowed.
The digital keypad or external terminal controls the
forward and reverse direction.
Reverse setting when analog
1: Negative frequency is allowed.
 03-10 signal input is negative 0
Positive frequency = run in a forward direction;
frequency
negative frequency = run in a reverse direction.
The digital keypad or external terminal control
cannot change the running direction.
 03-11 AVI1 analog input gain
 03-12 ACI analog input gain
-500.0–500.0% 100.0
 03-13 AVI2 analog positive input gain
 03-14 AVI2 analog negative input gain
 03-15 AVI1 analog input filter time
 03-16 ACI analog input filter time 0.00–20.00 sec. 0.01
 03-17 AVI2 analog input filter time
0: Disable (AVI1, ACI, AVI2)
 03-18 Analog input addition function 0
1: Enable
0: Disable
Signal loss selection for the 1: Continue operation at the last frequency
03-19 0
analog input 4–20 mA 2: Decelerate to 0 Hz
3: Stop immediately and display ACE
 03-20 AFM1 analog output selection 0: Output frequency (Hz) 0
 03-23 AFM2 analog output selection 1: Frequency command (Hz) 0
2: Motor speed (Hz)
3: Output current (rms)
4: Output voltage
5: DC bus voltage
11-16

6: Power factor
7: Power
9: AVI1%
10: ACI%
11: AVI2%
20: CANopen analog output
21: RS-485 analog output
22: Communication card analog output
23: Constant voltage output
 03-21 AFM1 analog output gain 0.0–500.0% 100.0
0: Absolute value in output voltage
AFM1 analog output REV
 03-22 1: Reverse output 0 V; forward output 0–10 V 0
direction
2: Reverse output 5–0 V; forward output 5–10 V
 03-24 AFM2 analog output gain 0.0–500.0% 100.0
0: Absolute value in output voltage
AFM2 analog output REV
 03-25 1: Reverse output 0 V; forward output 0–10 V 0
direction
 03-27 AFM2 output bias -100.00–100.00% 0.00
0: 0–10 V
 03-28 AVI1 terminal input selection 1: 0–20 mA 0
2: 4–20 mA
0: 4–20 mA
 03-29 ACI terminal input selection 1: 0–10 V 0
2: 0–20 mA
PLC analog output terminal Read
03-30 Monitor the status of the PLC analog output terminals
status only
0: 0–20 mA output
 03-31 AFM2 output selection 0
1: 4–20 mA output
 03-32 AFM1 DC output setting level
0.00–100.00% 0.00
 03-33 AFM2 DC output setting level
0: 0–20 mA output
03-34 AFM1 output selection 0
1: 4–20 mA output
 03-35 AFM1 output filter time
0.00–20.00 sec. 0.01
 03-36 AFM2 output filter time
0: AVI1
Multi-function output (MO) by AI
 03-44 1: ACI 0
level source
2: AVI2
 03-45 AI upper level -100.00–100.00% 50.00
 03-46 AI lower level -100.00–100.00% 10.00
0: Normal curve
1: Three-point curve of AVI1
2: Three-point curve of ACI
3: Three-point curve of AVI1 & ACI
 03-50 Analog input curve selection 7
5: Three-point curve of AVI1 & AVI2
6: Three-point curve of ACI & AVI2
7: Three-point curve of AVI1 & ACI & AVI2
11-17

Pr.03-28 = 0, 0.00–10.00 V 0.00
 03-51 AVI1 lowest point Pr.03-28 = 1, 0.00–20.00 mA 0.00
Pr.03-28 = 2, 0.00–20.00 mA 4.00
 03-52 AVI1 proportional lowest point -100.00–100.00% 0.00
Pr.03-28 = 0, 0.00–10.00 V 5.00
 03-53 AVI1 mid-point Pr.03-28 = 1, 0.00–20.00 mA 10.00
Pr.03-28 = 2, 0.00–20.00 mA 12.00
 03-54 AVI1 proportional mid-point -100.00–100.00% 50.00
Pr.03-28 = 0, 0.00–10.00 V 10.00
 03-55 AVI1 highest point Pr.03-28 = 1, 0.00–20.00 mA 20.00
Pr.03-28 = 2, 0.00–20.00 mA 20.00
 03-56 AVI1 proportional highest point -100.00–100.00% 100.00
 Pr.03-29 = 0, 0.00–20.00 mA 4.00
03-57 ACI lowest point Pr.03-29 = 1, 0.00–10.00 V 0.00
Pr.03-29 = 2, 0.00–20.00 mA 0.00
 03-58 ACI proportional lowest point -100.00–100.00% 0.00
Pr.03-29 = 0, 0.00–20.00 mA 12.00
 03-59 ACI mid-point Pr.03-29 = 1, 0.00–10.00 V 5.00
Pr.03-29 = 2, 0.00–20.00 mA 10.00
 03-60 ACI proportional mid-point -100.00–100.00% 50.00
Pr.03-29 = 0, 0.00–20.00 mA 20.00
 03-61 ACI high point Pr.03-29 = 1, 0.00–10.00 V 10.00
Pr.03-29 = 2, 0.00–20.00 mA 20.00
 03-62 ACI proportional highest point -100.00–100.00% 100.00
 Positive AVI2 voltage lowest
03-63 0.00–10.00 V 0.00
point
 Positive AVI2 voltage
03-64 -100.00–100.00% 0.00
proportional lowest point
 03-65 Positive AVI2 voltage mid-point 0.00–10.00 V 5.00
Positive AVI2 voltage
 03-66 -100.00–100.00% 50.00
proportional mid-point
 Positive AVI2 voltage highest
03-67 0.00–10.00 V 10.00
point
Positive AVI2 voltage
 03-68 -100.00–100.00% 100.00
proportional highest point
11-18
04 Multi-step Speed Parameters

st
 04-00 1 step speed frequency 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.00
nd
rd
th
th
th
 04-06 7th step speed frequency 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.00
th
th
th
th
th
th
th
 04-14 15th step speed frequency 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.00
 04-50 PLC buffer 0 0–65535 0
 04-51 PLC buffer 1 0–65535 0
 04-52 PLC buffer 2 0–65535 0
 04-53 PLC buffer 3 0–65535 0
 04-54 PLC buffer 4 0–65535 0
 04-55 PLC buffer 5 0–65535 0
 04-56 PLC buffer 6 0–65535 0
 04-57 PLC buffer 7 0–65535 0
 04-58 PLC buffer 8 0–65535 0
 04-59 PLC buffer 9 0–65535 0
 04-60 PLC buffer 10 0–65535 0
 04-61 PLC buffer 11 0–65535 0
 04-62 PLC buffer 12 0–65535 0
 04-63 PLC buffer 13 0–65535 0
 04-64 PLC buffer 14 0–65535 0
 04-65 PLC buffer 15 0–65535 0
 04-66 PLC buffer 16 0–65535 0
 04-67 PLC buffer 17 0–65535 0
 04-68 PLC buffer 18 0–65535 0
 04-69 PLC buffer 19 0–65535 0
 04-70 PLC Application parameter 0 0–65535 0
11-19

11-20
05 Motor Parameters
0: No function
1: Simple rolling auto-tuning for induction motor (IM)
2: Static auto-tuning for induction motor (IM)
05-00 Motor parameter auto-tuning 5: Rolling auto-tuning for PM (IPM / SPM) 0
11: SynRM parameter auto-tuning (applied to 230V /
460V models)
13: Static auto-tuning for PM (IPM / SPM)
Depending
Full-load current for induction on the
05-01 Depending on the model power model
motor 1 (A)
power
Depending
Rated power for induction motor on the
 05-02 0.00–655.35 kW model
1 (kW)
power
Depending
0–xxxx rpm on the
Rated speed for induction motor
 05-03 (Depending on the motor’s number of poles) motor’s
1 (rpm) number of
1710 (60 Hz 4 poles); 1410 (50 Hz 4 poles) poles
Number of poles for induction
05-04 2–64 4
motor 1
Depending
No-load current for induction on the
05-05 0.00–Pr.05-01 default model
motor 1 (A)
power
Depending
Stator resistance (Rs) for on the
05-06 0.000–65.535  model
induction motor 1
power
Rotor resistance (Rr) for
05-07 0.000–65.535  0.000
induction motor 1
Magnetizing inductance (Lm) for
05-08 0.0–6553.5 mH 0.0
induction motor 1
Stator inductance (Lx) for
05-09 0.0–6553.5 mH 0.0
induction motor 1
Depending
Full-load current for induction on the
05-13 Depending on the model power model
motor 2 (A)
power
Depending
Rated power for induction motor on the
 05-14 0.00–655.35 kW model
2 (kW)
power
Depending
0–xxxx rpm on the
Rated speed for induction motor
 05-15 (Depending on the motor’s number of poles) motor’s
2 (rpm) number of
1710 (60 Hz 4 poles) ; 1410 (50 Hz 4 poles) poles
Number of poles for induction
05-16 2–64 4
motor 2
Depending
No-load current for induction on the
05-17 0.00–Pr.05-13 default model
motor 2 (A)
power
Depending
Stator resistance (Rs) for on the
05-18 0.000–65.535  model
induction motor 2
power
11-21

Rotor resistance (Rr) for
05-19 0.000–65.535  0.000
induction motor 2
Magnetizing inductance (Lm) for
05-20 0.0–6553.5 mH 0.0
induction motor 2
Stator inductance (Lx) for
05-21 0.0–6553.5 mH 0.0
induction motor 2
1: Motor 1
05-22 Induction motor 1 / 2 selection 1
2: Motor 2
Frequency for Y-connection /
 05-23 ᇞ-connection switch for an 0.00–599.00 Hz 60.00
induction motor
Y-connection / ᇞ-connection 0: Disable
05-24 0
switch for an induction motor 1: Enable
Delay time for Y-connection /
 05-25 ᇞ-connection switch for an 0.000–60.000 sec. 0.200
induction motor
Accumulated Watt-hour for a Read
05-28 0.0–6553.5
motor (W-hour) only
05-29 0.0–6553.5
motor in low word (kW-hour) only
05-30 0–65535
motor in high word (MW-hour) only
Accumulated motor operation
05-31 0–1439 0
time (minutes)
Accumulated motor operation
05-32 0–65535 0
time (days)
0: IM
Induction motor (IM) or
1: SPM
05-33 permanent magnet synchronous 0
2: IPM
AC motor (PM) selection
3: SynRM (applied to 230V / 460V models)
Full-load current for a permanent Depending
on the
05-34 magnet synchronous AC motor / Depending on the model power model
reluctance motor power
Rated power for a permanent Depending

on the
 05-35 magnet synchronous AC motor / 0.00–655.35 kW motor
Rated speed for a permanent

 05-36 magnet synchronous AC motor / 0–65535 rpm 2000
reluctance motor
Number of poles for a permanent
05-37 magnet synchronous AC motor / 0–65535 10
reluctance motor
System inertia for a permanent Depending
on the
05-38 magnet synchronous AC motor / 0.0–6553.5 kg-cm2 motor
Stator resistance for a permanent

05-39 magnet synchronous AC motor / 0.000–65.535  0.000
reluctance motor
11-22

Permanent magnet synchronous
05-40 0.00–655.35 mH 0.00
AC motor / reluctance motor Ld
Permanent magnet synchronous
05-41 0.00–655.35 mH 0.00
AC motor / reluctance motor Lq
Ke parameter for a permanent
 05-43 0–65535 (Unit: V / krpm) 0
magnet synchronous AC motor
11-23
06 Protection Parameters
230V models:
Frame A–D: 150.0–220.0 VDC 180.0
Frame E and above : 190.0–220.0 VDC 200.0
460V models:
 06-00 Low voltage level
Frame A–D: 300.0–440.0 VDC 360.0
Frame E and above : 380.0–440.0 VDC 400.0
575V models: 420.0–520.0 VDC 470.0
690V models: 450.0–660.0 VDC 480.0
0: Disabled
230V models: 0.0–450.0 VDC 380.0
 06-01 Over-voltage stall prevention 460V models: 0.0–900.0 VDC 760.0
575V models: 0.0–1116.0 VDC 920.0
690V models: 0.0–1318.0 VDC 1087.0
0: Traditional over-voltage and traditional over-current
stall prevention
1: Smart over-voltage and traditional over-current stall
prevention
 06-02 Selection for stall prevention 0
2: Traditional over-voltage and smart over-current stall
prevention
3: Smart over-voltage and smart over-current stall
prevention
230V / 460V models
Light duty: 0–130% (100% corresponds to the rated 120
current of the drive )
Normal duty: 0–160% (100% corresponds to the rated 120
Over-current stall prevention current of the drive)
 06-03
during acceleration 575V / 690V models
current of the drive)
230V / 460V models
current of the drive )
Over-current stall prevention current of the drive)
 06-04
during operation 575V / 690V models
0: By current acceleration / deceleration time
Acceleration / deceleration time 1: By the first acceleration / deceleration time
 06-05 selection for stall prevention at 2: By the second acceleration / deceleration time 0
constant speed 3: By the third acceleration / deceleration time
4: By the fourth acceleration / deceleration time
11-24

5: By auto-acceleration / auto-deceleration
0: No function
1: Continue operation after over-torque detection
during constant speed operation
Over-torque detection selection 2: Stop after over-torque detection during constant
 06-06 0
(OT1) speed operation
during RUN
4: Stop after over-torque detection during RUN
10–200% (100% corresponds to the drive’s light-duty
 06-07 Over-torque detection level (OT1) 120
rated current)
 06-08 Over-torque detection time (OT1) 0.0–60.0 sec. 0.1
0: No function
during constant speed operation
Over-torque detection selection 2: Stop after over-torque detection during constant
 06-09 0
(OT2) speed operation
during RUN
10–200% (100% corresponds to the light-load rated
 06-10 Over-torque detection level (OT2) 120
 06-11 Over-torque detection time (OT2) 0.0–60.0 sec. 0.1
 06-12 Current limit 0–200% 150
0: Inverter motor (with external forced cooling)
Electronic thermal relay selection
 06-13 1: Standard motor (motor with fan on the shaft) 2
1 (Motor 1)
2: Disable
Electronic thermal relay action
 06-14 30.0–600.0 sec. 60.0
time 1 (Motor 1)
Temperature level overheat (OH)
 06-15 0.0–110.0°C 105.0
warning
Stall prevention limit level
 06-16 (Weak magnetic field current stall 0–100% (Pr.06-03) 50
prevention level)
06-17 Fault record 1 0: No fault record 0
06-18 Fault record 2 1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA) 0
06-19 Fault record 3 2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd) 0
06-20 Fault record 4 3: Over-current during steady speed (ocn) 0
06-21 Fault record 5 4: Ground fault (GFF) 0
06-22 Fault record 6 5: IGBT short-circuit between upper bridge and lower 0
bridge (occ)
6: Over-current at stop (ocS)
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA)
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd)
9: Over-voltage at constant speed (ovn)
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA)
12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd)
11-25

13: Low-voltage at constant speed (Lvn)
14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS)
15: Phase loss protection (OrP)
16: IGBT overheating (oH1)
17: Heatsink overheating (oH2)
18: IGBT temperature detection failure (tH1o)
19: Capacitor hardware error (tH2o)
21: Over load (oL)
22: Electronic thermal relay 1 protection (EoL1)
24: Motor overheating (oH3) (PTC / PT100)
26: Over torque 1 (ot1)
28: Under current (uC)
30: EEPROM write error (cF1)
31: EEPROM read error (cF2)
33: U-phase error (cd1)
34: V-phase error (cd2)
35: W-phase error (cd3)
36: cc (current clamp) hardware error (Hd0)
37: oc (over-current) hardware error (Hd1)
38: ov (over-voltage) hardware error (Hd2)
39: occ hardware error (Hd3)
40: Auto-tuning error (AUE)
41: PID loss ACI (AFE)
48: ACI loss (ACE)
49: External fault (EF)
51: External base block (bb)
52: Enter wrong password three times and locked
(Pcod)
53: Firmware version error (ccod)
54: Illegal command (CE1)
55: Illegal data address (CE2)
56: Illegal data value (CE3)
57: Data is written to read-only address (CE4)
58: Modbus transmission time-out (CE10)
60: Brake transistor error (bF)
61: Y-connection / ᇞ-connection switch error (ydc)
62: Deceleration energy backup error (dEb)
63: Over slip error (oSL)
64: Electric valve switch error (ryF)
68: Reverse direction of the speed feedback (SdRv)
69: Over speed rotation feedback (SdOr)
70: Large deviation of speed feedback (SdDe)
71: Watchdog (WDTT)
72: STO loss 1 (STL1)
73: Emergency stop for external safety (S1)
74: FIRE mode output (Fire)
11-26

76: Safe torque off (STO)
82: Output phase loss U phase (OPHL)
83: Output phase loss V phase (OPHL)
84: Output phase loss W phase (OPHL)
89: Rotor position detection error (RoPd)
90: Forced to stop (FStp)
101: CANopen guarding error (CGdE)
102: CANopen heartbeat error (ChbE)
104: CANopen bus off error (CbFE)
105: CANopen index error (CidE)
106: CANopen station address error (CadE)
107: CANopen memory error (CfrE)
111: InrCOM time-out error (ictE)
142: Auto-tuning error 1 (no feedback current error)
(AUE1)
143: Auto-tuning error 2 (motor phase loss error)
(AUE2)
144: Auto-tuning error 3 (no-load current I0 measuring
error) (AUE3)
148: Auto-tuning error 4 (leakage inductance Lsigma
measuring error) (AUE4)
 06-23 Fault output option 1
0–65535 (refer to bit table for fault code) 0
0: Inverter motor (with external forced cooling)
Electronic thermal relay selection
 06-27 1: Standard motor (motor with fan on the shaft) 2
2 (motor 2)
2: Disable
Electronic thermal relay action
 06-28 30.0–600.0 sec. 60.0
time 2 (motor 2)
0: Warn and continue operation
PTC detection selection / PT100 1: Fault and ramp to stop
 06-29 0
motion 2: Fault and coast to stop
3: No warning
 06-30 PTC level 0.0–100.0% 50.0
Frequency command at Read
06-31 0.00–599.00 Hz
malfunction only
Read
06-32 Output frequency at malfunction 0.00–599.00 Hz
only
Read
06-33 Output voltage at malfunction 0.0–6553.5 V
only
Read
06-34 DC bus voltage at malfunction 0.0–6553.5 V
only
Read
06-35 Output current at malfunction 0.0–6553.5 Amp
only
11-27

Read
06-36 IGBT temperature at malfunction -3276.7–3276.7°C
only
Capacitance temperature at Read
06-37 -3276.7–3276.7°C
malfunction only
Read
06-38 Motor speed at malfunction -32767–32767 rpm
only
Status of the multi-function input Read
06-40 0000h–FFFFh
terminal at malfunction only
Status of the multi-function output Read
06-41 0000h–FFFFh
terminal at malfunction only
Read
06-42 Drive status at malfunction 0000h–FFFFh
only
0: STO latch
 06-44 STO latch selection 0
1: STO no latch
Output phase loss detection 1: Fault and ramp to stop
 06-45 3
action (OPHL) 2: Fault and coast to stop
3: No warning
Detection time for output phase
 06-46 0.000–65.535 sec. 0.500
loss
Current detection level for output
 06-47 0.00–100.00% 1.00
phase loss
DC brake time for output phase
 06-48 0.000–65.535 sec. 0.000
loss
0: Disable
 06-49 LvX auto-reset 0
1: Enable
Time for input phase loss
 06-50 0.00–600.00 sec. 0.20
detection
230V models: 0.0–100.0 VDC 30.0
460V models: 0.0–200.0 VDC 60.0
 06-52 Ripple of input phase loss
575V models: 0.0–400.0 VDC 75.0
690V models: 0.0–480.0 VDC 90.0
Input phase loss detection action 0: Fault and ramp to stop
 06-53 0
(OrP) 1: Fault and coast to stop
0: Auto-decrease carrier frequency and limit output
current
 06-55 Derating protection 0
1: Constant carrier frequency and limit output current
2: Auto-decrease carrier frequency
 06-56 PT100 voltage level 1 0.000–10.000 V 5.000
 06-57 PT100 voltage level 2 0.000–10.000 V 7.000
PT100 level 1 frequency
 06-58 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.00
protection
PT100 activation level 1 protection
 06-59 0–6000 sec. 60
frequency delay time
Software detection GFF current 0.0–6553.5% (100% corresponds to the light-duty
 06-60 60.0
level rated current of the drive)
 06-61 Software detection GFF filter time 0.00–655.35 sec. 0.10
11-28

Operation time of fault record 1 Read
06-63 0–65535 days
(Days) only
06-64 0–1439 min.
(Minutes) only
06-65 0–65535 days
(Days) only
06-66 0–1439 min.
(Minutes) only
06-67 0–65535 days
(Days) only
06-68 0–1439 min.
(Minutes) only
06-69 0–65535 days
(Days) only
06-70 0–1439 min.
(Minutes) only
0.0–100.0% (100% corresponds to the light-duty rated
 06-71 Low current setting level 0.0
 06-72 Low current detection time 0.00–360.00 sec. 0.00
0: No function
1: Fault and coast to stop
 06-73 Low current action 2: Fault and ramp to stop by the second deceleration 0
time
230V models: 0.0–200.0 VDC 20.0
460V models: 0.0–200.0 VDC 40.0
 06-76 dEb motion offset
575V models: 0.0–200.0 VDC 50.0
690V models: 0.0–200.0 VDC 60.0
0: Disable
06-80 Fire mode 1: Forward (counterclockwise) operation 0
2: Reverse (clockwise) operation
Operating frequency when
 06-81 0.00–599.00 Hz 60.00
running fire mode
0: Disable bypass
 06-82 Enable bypass on fire mode 0
1: Enable bypass
 06-83 Bypass delay time on fire mode 0.0–6550.0 sec. 0.0
Number of times of reset in fire
 06-84 0–10 0
mode
Length of time of reset in fire
 06-85 0.0–6000.0 sec. 60.0
mode
bit0: 0 = Open Loop; 1 = Close Loop (PID control)
bit1: 0 = Manual reset fire mode; 1 = Auto reset fire
mode
06-86 Fire mode motion 0: Open loop control and manual reset fire mode 0
1: Close loop control and manual reset fire mode
2: Open loop control and auto reset fire mode
3: Close loop control and auto reset fire mode
 06-87 Fire mode PID set point 0.00–100.00% 0.00
11-29
07 Special Parameters
230V models: 350.0–450.0 VDC 370.0
Software brake chopper action 460V models: 700.0–900.0 VDC 740.0
 07-00
level 575V models: 850.0–1116.0 VDC 895.0
690V models: 939.0–1318.0 VDC 1057.0
 07-01 DC brake current level 0–100% 0
 07-02 DC brake time at start-up 0.0–60.0 sec. 0.0
 07-03 DC brake time at STOP 0.0–60.0 sec. 0.0
 07-04 DC brake frequency at STOP 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.00
 07-05 Voltage increasing gain 1–200% 100
0: Stop operation
Restart after momentary power
 07-06 1: Speed tracking by the speed before the power loss 0
loss
2: Speed tracking by the minimum output frequency
 07-07 Allowed power loss duration 0.0–20.0 sec. 2.0
Depending
on the
 07-08 Base block time 0.0–5.0 sec. (Depending on the model power) model
power
20–200% (100% corresponds to the light-duty rated
 07-09 Current limit of speed tracking 100
0: Stop operation
 07-10 Restart after fault action 1: Speed tracking by current speed 0
2: Speed tracking by minimum output frequency
Number of times of restart after
 07-11 0–10 0
fault
0: Disable
1: Speed tracking by the maximum output frequency
 07-12 Speed tracking during start-up 0
2: Speed tracking by the motor frequency at start-up
0: Disable
1: dEb with auto-acceleration / auto-deceleration, the
drive does not output the frequency after the power is
 07-13 dEb function selection restored. 0
2: dEb with auto-acceleration / auto-deceleration, the
drive outputs the frequency after the power is
restored.
 07-15 Dwell time at acceleration 0.00–600.00 sec. 0.00
 07-16 Dwell frequency at acceleration 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.00
 07-17 Dwell time at deceleration 0.00–600.00 sec. 0.00
 07-18 Dwell frequency at deceleration 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.00
0: Fan always ON
1: Fan is OFF after the AC motor drive stops for one
minute
 07-19 Fan cooling control 0
2: Fan is ON when the AC motor drive runs; fan is OFF
when the AC motor drive stops
11-30

3: Fan turns ON when temperature (IGBT) reaches
around 60°C.
4: Fan always OFF
0: Coast to stop
1: Stop by the first deceleration time
2: Stop by the second deceleration time
Emergency stop (EF) & force to
 07-20 3: Stop by the third deceleration time 0
stop selection
4: Stop by the fourth deceleration time
5: System deceleration
6: Automatic deceleration
0: Disable
Automatic energy-saving
 07-21 1: Power factor energy-saving improvement 0
selection
2: Automatic energy-saving optimization
 07-22 Energy-saving gain 10–1000% 100
0: Enable AVR
Automatic voltage regulation
 07-23 1: Disable AVR 0
(AVR) function
2: Disable AVR during deceleration
Torque command filter time
 07-24 0.001–10.000 sec. 0.500
(V/F and SVC control mode)
Slip compensation filter time
 07-25 0.001–10.000 sec. 0.100
(V/F and SVC control mode)
IM: 0–10 (when Pr.05-33 = 0)
 07-26 Torque compensation gain 0
PM: 0–5000 (when Pr.05-33 = 1 or 2)
0.00
(Default
 07-27 Slip compensation gain 0.00–10.00 value is
1.00 in SVC
mode)
0.0–100.0%
 07-29 Slip deviation level 0.0
0：No detection
Over-slip deviation detection
 07-30 0.0–10.0 sec. 1.0
time
1: Fault and ramp to stop
 07-31 Over-slip deviation treatment 0
3: No warning
Motor oscillation compensation 0–10000
 07-32 1000
factor 0: Disable
 07-33 Auto-restart interval of fault 0.0–6000.0 sec. 60.0
PMSVC voltage feed forward
 07-38 0.00–2.00 1.00
gain
 07-41 Minimum frequency for AES 0.00–40.00 Hz 10.00
07-42 Delay time for AES 0–600 sec. 5
Targeted power factor angle for
 07-43 0.00–65.00° 40.00
AES
 07-44 Maximum voltage drop for AES 0.00–70.00% 60.00
 07-45 AES coefficient 0–10000% 100
 07-50 PWM fan speed 60–100% 60
11-31
08 High-function PID Parameters

0: No function
1: Negative PID feedback: by analog input
Terminal selection of PID
 08-00 (Pr.03-00–03-02) 0
feedback
4: Positive PID feedback: by analog input
(Pr.03-00–03-02)
 08-01 Proportional gain (P) 0.0–100.0 1.0
0.00–100.00 sec.
 08-02 Integral time (I) 1.00
0.00: No integral
 08-03 Differential time (D) 0.00–1.00 sec. 0.00
 08-04 Upper limit of integral control 0.0–100.0% 100.0
 08-05 PID output command limit 0.0–110.0% 100.0
Read
 08-06 PID feedback value display -200.00–200.00%
only
 08-07 Delay time 0.0–35.0 sec. 0.0
 08-08 Feedback signal detection time 0.0–3600.0 sec. 0.0
 08-09 Feedback signal fault treatment 0
3: Warn and operate at last frequency
 08-10 Sleep level 0.00–599.00 Hz or 0–200.00% 0.00
 08-11 Wake-up level 0.00–599.00 Hz or 0–200.00% 0.00
 08-12 Sleep delay time 0.0–6000.0 sec. 0.0
PID feedback signal error
 08-13 1.0–50.0% 10.0
deviation level
PID feedback signal error
 08-14 0.1–300.0 sec. 5.0
deviation detection time
0: Parameter setting (Pr.08-17)
 08-16 PID compensation selection 0
1: Analog input
 08-17 PID compensation -100.0–100.0% 0.0
0: Refer to PID output command
08-18 Sleep mode function setting 0
1: Refer to PID feedback signal
 08-19 Wake-up integral limit 0.0–200.0% 50.0
0: Serial connection
08-20 PID mode selection 0
1: Parallel connection
Enable PID to change the 0: Operation direction cannot be changed
08-21 0
operation direction 1: Operation direction can be changed
 08-22 Wake-up delay time 0.00–600.00 sec. 0.00
11-32
09 Communication Parameters
 09-00 Communication address 1–254 1
 09-01 COM1 transmission speed 4.8–115.2 Kbps 9.6
 09-02 COM1 transmission fault treatment 3
3: No warning, no fault and continue operation
 09-03 COM1 time-out detection 0.0–100.0 sec. 0.0
1: 7, N, 2 (ASCII)
2: 7, E, 1 (ASCII)
3: 7, O, 1 (ASCII)
4: 7, E, 2 (ASCII)
5: 7, O, 2 (ASCII)
6: 8, N, 1 (ASCII)
7: 8, N, 2 (ASCII)
8: 8, E, 1 (ASCII)
 09-04 COM1 communication protocol 9: 8, O, 1 (ASCII) 1
10: 8, E, 2 (ASCII)
11: 8, O, 2 (ASCII)
12: 8, N, 1 (RTU)
13: 8, N, 2 (RTU)
14: 8, E, 1 (RTU)
15: 8, O, 1 (RTU)
16: 8, E, 2 (RTU)
17: 8, O, 2 (RTU)
 09-09 Communication response delay time 0.0–200.0 ms 2.0
09-10 Communication main frequency 0.00–599.00 Hz 60.00
 09-11 Block transfer 1 0000–FFFFh 0000h
0: Decoding method 1 (20xx)
09-30 Communication decoding method 1
1: Decoding method 2 (60xx)
11-33

1: BACnet
0: Modbus 485
-1: Internal communication slave 1
09-31 Internal communication protocol 0
-10: Internal communication master
-12: Internal PLC control
bit0: Before PLC scans, set up PLC target
 09-33 PLC command force to 0 0
frequency = 0
09-35 PLC address 1–254 2
0: Disable
09-36 CANopen slave address 0
1–127
0: 1 Mbps
1: 500 Kbps
2: 250 Kbps
09-37 CANopen speed 0
3: 125 Kbps
4: 100 Kbps (Delta only)
5: 50 Kbps
bit0: CANopen guarding time out
bit1: CANopen heartbeat time out
bit2: CANopen SYNC time out
bit3: CANopen SDO time out
bit4: CANopen SDO buffer overflow
bit5: Can Bus off
09-39 CANopen warning record bit6: Error protocol of CANopen Read only
bit8: The setting values of CANopen indexes
are fail
bit9: The setting value of CANopen address
is fail
bit10: The checksum value of CANopen
indexes is fail
0: Disable (Delta-defined decoding method)
09-40 CANopen decoding method 1: Enable (CANopen standard DS402 1
protocol)
0: Node reset state
1: Com reset state
2: Boot up state
09-41 CANopen communication status Read only
3: Pre-operation state
4: Operation state
5: Stop state
0: Not ready for use state
1: Inhibit start state
09-42 CANopen control status Read only
2: Ready to switch on state
3: Switched on state
11-34

4: Enable operation state
7: Quick stop active state
13: Error reaction activation state
14: Error state
0: Disable
09-45 CANopen master function 0
1: Enable
09-46 CANopen master address 0–127 100
0: Update Index 604F and 6050 to
Acceleration / Deceleration time 1
bit0 = 0: Enabled (default)
bit0 = 1: Disabled
1: Distinguish the CANopen identity code by
09-49 CANopen extension setting 0002h
models or by series
bit1 = 0: Distinguish the CANopen identify
code by models
bit1 = 1: Distinguish the CANopen identify
code by series
09-50 BACnet MS / TP node address 0–127 10
09-51 BACnet baud rate 9.6–76.8 Kbps 38.4
09-52 BACnet Device index L 0–65535 10
09-53 BACnet Device index H 0–63 0
09-55 BACnet Max Address 0–127 127
09-56 BACnet password 0–65535 0
0: No communication card
1: DeviceNet slave
2: Profibus-DP slave
3: CANopen slave / master
09-60 Communication card identifications 4: Modbus –TCP Slave Read only
5: EtherNet/IP Slave
6: EtherCAT
8: BACnet IP
12: PROFINET
09-61 Firmware version of communication card Read only Read only
09-62 Product code Read only Read only
09-63 Fault code Read only Read only
Communication card address DeviceNet: 0–63
 09-70 1
(for DeviceNet or PROFIBUS) Profibus-DP: 1–125
Standard DeviceNet:
0: 100 Kbps
1: 125 Kbps
2: 250 Kbps
3: 1 Mbps (Delta only)
Communication card speed setting
 09-71 Non-standard DeviceNet: (Delta only) 2
(for DeviceNet)
0: 10 Kbps
1: 20 Kbps
2: 50 Kbps
3: 100 Kbps
4: 125 Kbps
11-35

5: 250 Kbps
6: 500 Kbps
7: 800 Kbps
8: 1 Mbps
0: Standard DeviceNet
In this mode, the baud rate can only be 100
Kbps, 125 Kbps or 250 Kbps in standard
Additional settings for communication
 09-72 DeviceNet speed 0
card speed (for DeviceNet)
1: Non-standard DeviceNet
In this mode, DeviceNet baud rate can be
the same as that for CANopen (0–8).
Communication card IP configuration 0: Static IP
 09-75 0
(for Modbus TCP) 1: Dynamic IP (DHCP)
Communication card IP address 1
 09-76 0–65535 0
(for Modbus TCP)
 09-77 0–65535 0
(for Modbus TCP)
 09-78 0–65535 0
(for Modbus TCP)
 09-79 0–65535 0
(for Modbus TCP)
Communication card address mask 1
 09-80 0–65535
(for Modbus TCP) 0
 09-81 0–65535 0
(for Modbus TCP)
 09-82 0–65535 0
(for Modbus TCP)
 09-83 0–65535 0
(for Modbus TCP)
Communication card gateway address 1
 09-84 0–65535 0
(for Modbus TCP)
 09-85 0–65535 0
(for Modbus TCP)
 09-86 0–65535 0
(for Modbus TCP)
 09-87 0–65535 0
(for Modbus TCP)
Communication card password
 09-88 0–99 0
(Low word) (for Modbus TCP)
Communication card password
 09-89 0–99 0
(High word) (for Modbus TCP)
Reset communication card 0: Disable
 09-90 0
(for Modbus TCP) 1: Reset to defaults
bit0: Enable IP filter
bit1: Enable internet parameters (1 bit).
Additional settings for the communication
 09-91 When the IP address is set, this bit is 0
card (for Modbus TCP)
enabled. After updating the parameters
for the communication card, this bit
11-36

changes to disabled.
bit2: Enable login password (1 bit).
When you enter the login password, this
bit is enabled. After updating the
parameters for the communication card,
this bit changes to disabled.
bit0: Enable password
When the communication card is set
Communication card status
09-92 with password; this bit is enabled. 0
(for Modbus TCP)
When the password is cleared; this bit is
disabled.
11-37
10 Sensorless Motor Control Parameters

Treatment for speed observer
 10-08 1: Fault and ramp to stop 2
feedback fault
Detection time of speed 0.0–10.0 sec.
 10-09 1.0
observer feedback fault 0: Disable
0–120%
 10-10 Speed observer stall level 115
0: No function
Detection time of speed
 10-11 0.0–2.0 sec. 0.1
observer stall
 10-12 Speed observer stall action 1: Fault and ramp to stop 2
0–50%
 10-13 Speed observer slip range 50
0: No function
Detection time of speed
 10-14 0.0–10.0 sec. 0.5
observer slip
Speed observer stall and slip
 10-15 1: Fault and ramp to stop 2
error action
 10-31 I/F mode, current command 0–150% of motor rated current 40
PM FOC sensorless speed
 10-32 0.00–600.00 Hz 5.00
estimator bandwidth
PM FOC sensorless speed
 10-33 estimator bandwidth (low speed) 0.00–600.00 Hz 1.00
(applied to 230V / 460V models)
PM sensorless speed estimator
 10-34 0.00–655.35 1.00
low-pass filter gain
AMR (Kp) gain
 10-35 0.00–3.00 1.00
AMR (Ki) gain
 10-36 0.00–3.00 1.00
Frequency to switch from I/F
 10-39 0.00–599.00 Hz 20.00
mode to PM sensorless mode
Frequency to switch from PM
 10-40 0.00–599.00 Hz 20.00
sensorless mode to I/F mode
I/F mode, Id current low-pass
 10-41 0.0–6.0 sec. 0.2
filter time
Initial angle detection pulse
 10-42 0.0–3.0 1.0
value
 10-49 Zero voltage time during start-up 0.000–60.000 sec. 0.000
 10-51 Injection frequency 0–1200 Hz 500
0.0–200.0 V
230V models: 0.0–100.0 V 15.0
 10-52 Injection magnitude
460V models: 0.0–200.0 V 30.0
575V models: 0.0–200.0 V 30.0
11-38

690V models: 0.0–200.0 V 30.0
0: Disable
1: Using I/F current command (Pr.10-31) to attract the
PM initial rotor position
 10-53 rotor to zero degrees 0
detection method
2: High frequency injection
3: Pulse injection
Magnetic flux linkage estimate
 10-54 low-speed gain (applied to 230V 10–1000% 100
/ 460V models)
Magnetic flux linkage estimate
 10-55 high-speed gain (applied to 10–1000% 100
230V / 460V models)
 Kp of phase-locked loop
10-56 10–1000% 100
 Ki of phase-locked loop
10-57 10–1000% 100
Mutual inductance gain
 10-58 compensation 0.00–655.35 1.00
11-39
11 Advanced Parameters (Applied to 230V / 460V models)

bit0: Auto-tuning for ASR and APR
11-00 System control bit6: 0 Hz linear-cross 0000h
bit7: Saving or not saving the frequency
11-01 Per-unit of system inertia 1–65535 (256 = 1PU) 256
 11-02 ASR1 / ASR2 switch frequency 0.00–599.00 Hz 7.00
 11-03 ASR1 low-speed bandwidth 1–40 Hz (IM) / 1–100 Hz (PM) / 1–30 Hz (SynRM) 10
 11-04 ASR2 high-speed bandwidth 1–40 Hz (IM) / 1–100 Hz (PM) / 1–30 Hz (SynRM) 10
 11-05 Zero-speed bandwidth 1–40 Hz (IM) / 1–100 Hz (PM) / 1–30 Hz (SynRM) 10
 11-06 ASR 1 gain 0–40 Hz (IM) / 1–100 Hz (PM) / 1–30 Hz (SynRM) 10
 11-07 ASR 1 integral time 0.000–10.000 sec. 0.100
 11-08 ASR 2 gain 0–40 Hz (IM) / 1–100 Hz (PM) / 1–30 Hz (SynRM) 10
 11-09 ASR 2 integral time 0.000–10.000 sec. 0.100
 11-10 ASR gain of zero speed 0–40 Hz (IM) / 1–100 Hz (PM) / 1–30 Hz (SynRM) 10
ASR1 integral time of zero
 11-11 0.000–10.000 sec. 0.100
speed
Gain for ASR speed feed
 11-12 0–200% 0
forward
 11-13 PDFF gain value 0–200% 30
 11-14 ASR output low pass filter time 0.000–0.350 sec. 0.008
 11-15 Notch filter depth 0–20 dB 0
 11-16 Notch filter frequency 0.0–6000.0 Hz 0.0
Forward motor torque limit
 11-17 0–500% 500
Quadrant I
Forward regenerative torque
 11-18 0–500% 500
limit Quadrant II
Reverse motor torque limit
 11-19 0–500% 500
Quadrant III
Reverse regenerative torque
 11-20 0–500% 500
limit Quadrant IV
Flux weakening curve for motor
 11-21 0–200% 90
1 gain value
Flux weakening curve for motor
 11-22 0–200% 90
2 gain value
Flux weakening area speed
 11-23 0–150% 65
response
11-40
12 PUMP Parameters
0: No operation
1: Fixed time circulation (by time)
2: Fixed quantity circulation
12-00 Circulation Control 0
3: Fixed quantity control
4: Fixed time circulation + fixed quantity circulation
5: Fixed time circulation + fixed quantity control
Number of Motors to be
12-01 1–8 1
connected
Operating time for each motor
12-02 0–65500 min. 0
(minutes)
Delay time due to the
12-03 acceleration (or the increment ) 0.0–3600.0 sec. 1.0
at motor switching (seconds)
Delay time due to the
12-04 deceleration ( or the decrement) 0.0–3600.0 sec. 1.0
at motor switching (seconds)
Delay time due to fixed quantity
 12-05 circulation at motor switching 0.0–3600.0 sec. 10.0
(seconds)
Frequency when switching
 12-06 motors at fixed quantity 0.00–599.00 Hz 60.0
circulation (Hz)
0: Turn off all output
Action when fixed 1uantity
12-07 1: Motors powered by mains electricity continues to 0
circulation breaks down
operate
Frequency for stopping auxiliary
 12-08 0.00–599.00 Hz 0.00
motor (Hz)
Fixed quantity circulation output
12-09 1.0–3600.0 sec. 1.0
delay
Motor 1 operation record Read
12-10 Read only
(min./sec.) Only
Read
12-11 Motor 1 operation record (hour) Read only
Only
12-12 Read only
(min./sec.) Only
Read
Only
12-14 Read only
(min./sec.) Only
Read
Only
12-16 Read only
(min./sec.) Only
Read
Only
11-41

12-18 Read only
(min./sec.) Only
Read
Only
12-20 Read only
(min./sec.) Only
Read
Only
12-22 Read only
(min./sec.) Only
Read
Only
12-24 Read only
(min./sec.) Only
Read
Only
0: No function
1: Clear operation time for motor 1
12-26 Clear motor’s operation time 0
10: Clear operation time for all motors
0: Terminal order
12-27 Priority for circulated operation 0
1: Minimum operation time
11-42
13 Application Parameters by Industry

0: Disable
1: User-defined Parameter
Industry Parameters 2: Compressor (IM)
13-00 0
combination 3: Fan
4: Pump
10: Air Handling Unit, AHU
13-01
| Industry Parameters 1–99 0.00–655.35 0.00
13-99
11-43
14 Extension Card Parameter

Extension card Input terminal 0: Disable
 14-00 0
selection (AI10) 1: Frequency command
Extension card Input terminal 4: PID target value
 14-01 0
selection (AI11) 5: PID feedback signal
13: PID compensation amount
 14-08 Analog input filter time (AI10) 0.00–20.00 sec. 0.01
 14-09 Analog input filter time (AI11) 0.00–20.00 sec. 0.01
Analog input 4–20mA signal loss 0: Disable
14-10 0
selection (AI10) 1: Continue operation at the last frequency
Analog input 4–20mA signal loss 2: Decelerate to 0 Hz
14-11 0
selection (AI11) 3: Stop immediately and display ACE
Extension card output terminal 0: Output frequency (Hz)

 14-12 0
selection (AO10) 1: Frequency command (Hz)
Extension card output terminal 2: Motor speed (Hz)
 14-13 0
selection (AO11) 3: Output current (rms)
4: Output voltage
5: DC bus voltage
6: Power factor
7: Power
9: AVI1 proportional
10: ACI proportional
11: AVI2 proportional
20: CANopen analog output
21: RS-485 analog output
22: Communication card analog output
23: Constant voltage output
Analog output 1 gain output
 14-14 0.0–500.0% 100.0
(AO10)
Analog output 1 gain output
 14-15 0.0–500.0% 100.0
(AO11)
Analog output 1 in REV direction

 14-16 0: Absolute value of output voltage 0
(AO10)
1: Reverse output 0 V; Forward output 0–10 V
Analog output 1 in REV direction
 14-17 2: Reverse output 5–0 V; Forward output 5–10 V 0
(AO11)
Extension card input selection 0: 0–10 V (AVI10)
 14-18 0
(AI10) 1: 0–20 mA (ACI10)
11-44

2: 4–20 mA (ACI10)
0: 0–10 V (AVI11)
Extension card input selection
 14-19 1: 0–20 mA (ACI11) 0
(AI11)
2: 4–20 mA (ACI11)
14-20 AO10 DC output setting level 0.00–100.00% 0.00
14-21 AO11 DC output setting level 0.00–100.00% 0.00
 14-22 AO10 filter output time 0.00–20.00 sec. 0.01
 14-23 AO11 filter output time 0.00–20.00 sec. 0.01
14-36 0: 0–10 V 0
 AO10 output selection
1: 0–20 mA
 14-37 AO11 output selection 2: 4–20 mA 0
11-45
11-46
Chapter 12 Description of Parameter SettingsCP2000
Chapter 12 Descriptions of Parameter Settings

12-1 Description of parameter settings
00 Drive Parameters
 You can set this parameter during operation.
AC Motor Drive Identity Code

Default: Read only
Settings Read Only
AC Motor Drive Rated Current Display
Default: Read only
Settings Read Only
 Pr.00-00 displays the AC motor drive identity code. Using the following specification table to
check if Pr.00-01 setting is the rated current of the AC motor drive. Pr.00-01 corresponds to the
identity code of the AC motor drive (Pr.00-00).
 The default is the rated current for light duty. Set Pr.00-16 = 1 to display the rated current for
normal duty.
230V Models
Frame A B
Power (kW) 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15
Power (HP) 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20
Identity code 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
Rated current for
5 7.5 10 15 21 31 46 61
light duty [A]
Rated current for
3 5 8 11 17 25 33 49
normal duty [A]
Frame C D E
Power (kW) 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
Power (HP) 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125
Identity code 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34
Rated current for
75 90 105 146 180 215 276 322
light duty [A]
Rated current for
65 75 90 120 146 180 215 255
normal duty [A]
460V Models
Frame A B C D0
Power (kW) 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
Power (HP) 1 2 3 5 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75
Identity code 5 7 9 11 93 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
Rated current for
3 4.2 5.5 8.5 10.5 13 18 24 32 38 45 60 73 91 110
light load [A]
Rated current for
2.8 3.0 4.0 6.0 9.0 10.5 12 18 24 32 38 45 60 73 91
normal load [A]
12.1-00-1
460V Models
Frame D E F G H
Power (kW) 75 90 110 132 160 185 200 220 250 280 315 355 400 500 560 630
Power (HP) 100 125 150 175 215 250 270 300 340 375 425 475 530 675 750 850
Identity code 33 35 37 39 41 43 486 45 487 47 49 51 53 55 59 61
Rated current for
150 180 220 260 310 370 395 460 481 530 616 683 770 930 1094 1212
light duty [A]
Rated current for
110 150 180 220 260 310 310 370 395 460 550 616 683 866 930 1094
normal duty [A]
575V Models
Frame A B
Power (kW) 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15
Power (HP) 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20
Identity code 505 506 507 508 509 510 511
Rated current for
3 4.3 6.7 9.9 12.1 18.7 24.2
light duty [A]
Rated current for
2.5 3.6 5.5 8.2 10 15.5 20
normal duty [A]
690V Models
Frame C D E
Power (kW) 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132
Power (HP) 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 175
Identity code 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621
Rated current for
24 30 36 45 54 67 86 104 125 150
light duty [A]
Rated current for
20 24 30 36 45 54 67 86 104 125
normal duty [A]
Frame F G H
kW 160 200 250 315 400 450 560 630
HP 215 270 335 425 530 600 750 850
Identity code 622 686 687 626 628 629 631 632
Rated current for
180 220 290 350 430 465 590 675
light duty [A]
Rated current for
150 180 220 290 350 385 465 675
normal duty [A]
Parameter Reset
Default: 0
Settings 0: No Function
1: Write protection for parameters
5: Return kWh displays to 0
6: Reset PLC (including CANopen Master Index)
7: Reset CANopen Slave Index
9: Reset all parameters to defaults (base frequency at 50 Hz)
10: Reset all parameters to defaults (base frequency at 60 Hz)
12.1-00-2
 1: All parameters are read only except Pr.00-02, Pr.00-07 and Pr.00-08. Set Pr.00-02 to 0 before
changing other parameter settings.
 5: You can return the kWh displayed value to 0 even during drive is operation. For example, you
can set Pr.05-26–Pr.05-30 to 0.
 6: Clear the internal PLC program (includes the related settings of PLC internal CANopen master)
 7: Reset the related settings of CANopen slave.
 9 or 10: Reset all parameters to defaults. If you have set a password (Pr.00-08), unlock the
password (Pr.00-07) to clear the password you have set before you reset all parameters.
 For settings of 6, 7, 9 and 10, you must reboot the motor drive after you finish the setting.
 Start-up Display
Default: 0
Settings 0: F (Frequency command)
1: H (Output frequency)
2: U (User-defined, see Pr.00-04)
3: A (Output current)
 Determines the start-up display page after power is applied to the drive. The user-defined
contents display according to the Pr.00-04 settings.
 Content of Multi-function Display

Default: 3
Settings 0: Display output current (A) (Unit: Amp)
1: Display counter value (c) (Unit: CNT)
2: Display the motor’s actual output frequency (H) (Unit: Hz)
3: Display the drive’s DC bus voltage (v) (Unit: VDC)
4: Display the drive’s output voltage (E) (Unit: VAC)
5: Display the drive’s output power angle (n) (Unit: deg)
6: Display the drive’s output power in kW (P) (Unit: kW)
7: Display the motor speed rpm (Unit: rpm)
10: Display PID feedback (b) (Unit: %)
11: Display AVI1 analog input terminal signal (1.) (Unit: %)
12: Display ACI analog input terminal signal (2.) (Unit: %)
13: Display AVI2 analog input terminal signal (3.) (Unit: %)
14: Display the drive’s IGBT temperature (i.) (Unit: °C)
15: Display the drive’s capacitance temperature (c.) (Unit: °C)
16: The digital input status (ON/OFF) (i)
17: The digital output status (ON/OFF) (o)
18: Display multi-step speed (S)
19: The corresponding CPU digital input pin status (d)
20: The corresponding CPU digital output pin status (0.)
26: Ground Fault GFF (G.) (Unit: %)
27: DC bus voltage ripple (r.) (Unit: VDC)
12.1-00-3
28: Display PLC register D1043 data (C)

30: Display the output of User-defined (U)
31: Display Pr.00-05 user Gain (K)
34: Operation speed of fan (F.) (Unit: %)
36: Present operating carrier frequency of the drive (J.) (Unit: Hz)
38: Display the drive status (6.)
41: kWh display (J) (Unit: kWh)
42: PID target value (h) (Unit: %)
43: PID compensation (o.) (Unit: %)
44: PID output frequency (b.) (Unit: Hz)
45: Hardware ID
51: PMSVC torque offset
52: AI10%
53: AI11%
68: STO version (d)
69: STO checksum-high word (d)
70: STO checksum-low word (d)
 Explanation 1
 It can display negative values when setting analog input bias (Pr.03-03–03-10).
Example: Assume that AVI1 input voltage is 0 V, Pr.03-03 is 10.0% and Pr.03-07 is 4 (Bias
serves as the center).
Explanation 2
Example: If REV, MI1 and MI6 are ON, the following table shows the status of the terminals.
Normally opened contact (N.O.), 0: OFF, 1: ON
Terminal MI15 MI14 MI13 MI12 MI11 MI10 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 REV FWD
Status 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
NOTE MI10–MI15 are the terminals for extension cards (Pr.02-26–02-31).
 The value is 0000 0000 1000 0110 in binary and 0086h in HEX. When Pr.00-04 is set to 16 or 19,
the u page on the keypad displays “0086h”.
 The setting value 16 is ON / OFF status of digital input according to Pr.02-12 setting, and the
setting value 19 is the corresponding CPU pin ON / OFF status of the digital input.
 You can set 16 to monitor the digital input ON / OFF status, and then set 19 to check if the circuit
is normal.
Explanation 3
Assume that RY1: Pr.02-13 is set to 9 (Drive is ready). After the drive is powered on, if there is no
other abnormal status, the contact is ON. The display status is shown as below.
Normally opened contact (N.O.):
Terminal MO20 MO19 MO18 MO17 MO16 MO15 MO14 MO13 MO12 MO11 MO10 Reserved Reserved RY3 RY2 RY1
Status 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
 If Pr.00-04 is set to 17 or 20, it displays in hexadecimal “0001h” with LED u page is ON in the
keypad.
12.1-00-4
 The setting value 17 is ON / OFF status of digital output according to Pr.02-18 setting, and the
setting value 20 is the corresponding CPU pin ON / OFF status of the digital output.
 You can set 17 to monitor the digital output ON / OFF status, and then set 20 to check if the
circuit is normal.
Explanation 4
Setting value 25: when displayed value reaches 100.00%, the drive shows “oL” as an overload
warning.
Explanation 5
Setting value 38:
bit 0: The drive is running forward. bit 3: Errors occurred on the drive.
bit 1: The drive is running backward. bit 4: The drive is running.
bit 2: The drive is ready. bit 5: Warnings occurred on the drive.
 Coefficient Gain in Actual Output Frequency

Default: 1.00
Settings 0.00–160.00
 Sets the user-defined unit coefficient gain. Set Pr.00-04 = 31 to display the calculation result on
the screen (calculation = output frequency × Pr.00-05).
Firmware Version
Default: Read only
Settings Read only
 Parameter Protection Password Input
Default: 0
Settings 0–65535
Display 0–4 (the number of password attempts allowed)
 This parameter allows you to enter your password (which is set in Pr.00-08) to unlock the
parameter protection and to make changes to the parameter.
 To avoid problems in the future, be sure to write down the password after you set this parameter.
 Pr.00-07 and Pr.00-08 are used to prevent personnel from setting other parameters by accident.
 If you forget the password, clear the password setting by input 9999 and press the ENTER key,
then enter 9999 again and press ENTER within 10 seconds. After decoding, all the settings
return to default.
 When setting is under password protection, all the parameters read 0, except Pr.00-08.
 Parameter Protection Password Setting

Default: 0
Settings 0–65535
0: No password protection or password entered correctly (Pr.00-07)
1: Password has been set
 This parameter sets the password protection. Password can be set directly the first time. After
you set the password, the value of Pr.00-08 is 1, which means password protection is activated.
At this time, if you want to change any of the parameter settings, you must enter the correct
12.1-00-5
password in Pr.00-07 to deactivate the password temporarily, and this would make Pr.00-08
become 0. After you finish setting the parameters, reboot the motor drive and the password is
activated again.
 Entering the correct password in Pr.00-07 only temporarily deactivates the password. To
permanently deactivate password protection, set Pr.00-08 to 0 manually. Otherwise, password
protection is always reactivated after you reboot the motor drive.
 The keypad copy function works only when the password protection is deactivated (temporarily
or permanently), and password set in Pr.00-08 cannot be copied to the keypad. So when copying
parameters from the keypad to the motor drive, set the password manually again in the motor
drive to activate password protection.
 Password Decode Flow Chart
Speed Control Mode

Default: 0
Settings 0: IMVF (IM V/F control)
2: IM / PM SVC (IM / PM space vector control)
6: PM Sensorless (PM FOC sensorless) (applied to 230V / 460V models)
8: SynRM Sensorless Control (applied to 230V / 460V models)
 Determines the control method of the AC motor drive:
0: IM V/F control, you can set the proportion of V/F as required and control multiple motors
simultaneously.
2: IM / PM space vector control, gets the optimal control by auto-tuning the motor parameters.
6: PM FOC sensorless, PM filed oriented sensorless vector control
8: SynRM Sensorless, SynRM filed oriented sensorless vector control
12.1-00-6
 When you set Pr.00-11 to 0, the V/F control diagram is as follows:
 When you set Pr.00-11 to 2, the space vector control diagram is as follows.
Induction Motor Space Vector Control (IMSVC)
Permanent Magnetic Motor Space Vector Control (PMSVC)
12.1-00-7
 When you set Pr.00-11 to 6, PM FOC Sensorless control diagram is as follows:
 When you set Pr.00-11 to 8, SynRM Sensorless control diagram is as follows:
Load Selection
Default: 0
Settings 0: Light duty
1: Normal duty
 Light load (230V / 460V models): over-load ability is 120% rated output current in 60 seconds.
Refer to Pr.00-17 for the setting of carrier frequency. Refer to Chapter 09 Specifications or
Pr.00-01 for the rated current.
 Normal load (230V / 460V models): over-load ability is 120% rated output current in 60 seconds
(160% rated output current in 3 seconds). Refer to Pr.00-17 for the setting of carrier frequency.
Refer to Chapter 09 Specifications or Pr.00-01 for the rated current.
 Pr.00-01 varies with the setting value for Pr.00-16. The default value and maximum setting value
for Pr.06-03 and Pr.06-04 also vary with the setting value for Pr.00-16.
Carrier Frequency
Default: Table below
Settings 2–15 kHz
12.1-00-8
 This parameter determinates the PWM carrier frequency for the AC motor drive.
 When you set Pr.00-11 = 8 (SynRM Sensorless control), the maximum setting value of carrier
frequency is 8 kHz.
 230V / 460V models:
Light duty
Control mode VF, SVC PMFOC SRMFOC
Model Settings Default Settings Default Settings Default
VFD007–150CP23A/E
2–15 kHz 8 kHz 4–10 kHz 8 kHz 4–8 kHz 4 kHz
VFD007–185CP43A/E
VFD185–450CP23A/E
VFD220–750CP43A/E
VFD550–1100CP23A/E
VFD900–6300CP43A/E
Normal duty
Control mode VF, SVC PMFOC SRMFOC
Model Settings Default Settings Default Settings Default
VFD007–150CP23A/E
VFD007–185CP43A/E
VFD185–450CP23A/E
VFD220–750CP43A/E
VFD550–1100CP23A/E
VFD900–6300CP43A/E
 575V / 690V models:

Light duty Normal duty
Control mode VF, SVC VF, SVC
Model Settings Default Settings Default
VFD015–150CP53A 2–9 kHz 4 kHz 2–9 kHz 4 kHz
VFD185–5600CP63A 2–9 kHz 4 kHz 2–9 kHz 4 kHz
VFD6300CP63A 2–9 kHz 3 kHz 2–9 kHz 3 kHz*1
*1. Light duty / Normal duty: the default for 690V, 630 kW [850 HP] model is 3 kHz in VF / SVC mode.
 From the table, you see that the PWM carrier frequency has significant influences on the
electromagnetic noise, the AC motor drive heat dissipation, and the motor acoustic noise.
12.1-00-9
Therefore, if the surrounding noise is greater than the motor noise, lower the carrier frequency to
reduce the temperature rise. Although the motor has quiet operation in the higher carrier
frequency, consider the entire wiring and interference.
 When the carrier frequency is higher than the default, decrease the carrier frequency to protect
the drive. Refer to Pr.06-55 for the related setting and details.
PLC Command Mask

Default: Read Only
Settings bit0: Control command is forced by PLC control
bit1: Frequency command is forced by PLC control
 Determines if the frequency command or control command is locked by PLC
Master Frequency Command Source (AUTO) / Source Selection of the PID Target
Default: 0
Settings 0: Digital keypad
2: External analog input (Refer to Pr.03-00–Pr.03-02)
3: External UP/DOWN terminal (multi-function input terminals)
8: Communication card (does not include CANopen card)
 Set the master frequency source in AUTO mode.
 Pr.00-20 and Pr.00-21 are for settings the frequency source and operation source in AUTO mode.
Pr.00-30 and Pr.00-31 are for settings the frequency source and operation source in HAND mode.
You can switch the AUTO/HAND mode with the keypad KPC-CC01 or the multi-function input
terminal (MI).
 The default for the frequency source or operation source is AUTO mode. It returns to AUTO mode
whenever you cycle the power. If you use a multi-function input terminal to switch between AUTO
and HAND mode, the highest priority is the multi-function input terminal. When the external
terminal is OFF, the drive does not accept any operation signal and cannot execute JOG.
Operation Command (AUTO) Source

Default: 0
 Determines the operation frequency source in the AUTO mode.
 When you control the operation command by the keypad KPC-CC01, keys RUN, STOP and JOG
(F1) are valid.
12.1-00-10
 Stop Method
Default: 0
Settings 0: Ramp to stop
1: Coast to stop
 Determines how the motor is stopped when the drive receives the STOP command.
1. Ramp to stop: the AC motor drive decelerates to 0 or the minimum output frequency (Pr.01-07)
according to the set deceleration time, and then to stop.
2. Coast to stop: the AC motor drive stops output immediately, and the motor coasts to stop
according to the load inertia.
 Use “ramp to stop” for the safety of personnel, or to prevent material from being wasted in
applications where the motor must stop immediately after the drive stops. You must set the
deceleration time accordingly.
 If idling is allowed, or the load inertia is large, use “coast to stop”. For example, blowers,
punching machines and pumps
 Motor Direction Control

Default: 0
Settings 0: Enable forward / reverse
1: Disable reverse
2: Disable forward
 Enables the motor to run in the forward and reverse direction. You can use it to prevent a motor
from running in a direction that would cause injure or damage to the equipment, especially when
only on running direction is allowed for the motor load.
Digital Operator (Keypad) Frequency Command Memory

Default: Read only
Settings Read only
 If the keypad is the frequency command source, when Lv or Fault occurs, this parameter stores
the current frequency command.
12.1-00-11
 User-Defined Characteristics
Default: 0
Settings bit0–3: user-defined decimal place
0000b: no decimal place
0001b: one decimal place
0010b: two decimal places
0011b: three decimal places
bit4–15: user-defined unit
000xh: Hz
001xh: rpm
002xh: %
003xh: kg
004xh: m/s
005xh: kW
006xh: HP
007xh: ppm
008xh: 1/m
009xh: kg/s
00Axh: kg/m
00Bxh: kg/h
00Cxh: lb/s
00Dxh: lb/m
00Exh: lb/h
00Fxh: ft/s
010xh: ft/m
011xh: m
012xh: ft
013xh: degC
014xh: degF
015xh: mbar
016xh: bar
017xh: Pa
019xh: mWG
01Axh: inWG
01Bxh: ftWG
01Cxh: psi
01Cxh: psi
01Dxh: atm
01Exh: L/s
01Fxh: L/m
020xh: L/h
12.1-00-12
021xh: m3/s
022xh: m3/h
023xh: GPM
024xh: CFM
xxxxh: Hz
 bit0–3: the displayed units for the control frequency F page and user-defined (Pr.00-04 = d10,
PID feedback) and the displayed number of decimal places for Pr.00-26 (supports up to three
decimal places).
 bit4–15: the displayed units for the control frequency F page, user-defined (Pr.00-04 = d10, PID
feedback) and Pr.00-26.
 You must convert the setting value to decimal when using the keypad to set parameters.
Example: Assume that the user-defined unit is inWG and user-defined decimal place is the third
decimal point. According to the information above, the corresponding unit to inWG is
01Axh (x is the set decimal point), and the corresponding unit to the third decimal
place is 0003h, then inWG and the third decimal point displayed in hexadecimal is
01A3h, that is 419 in decimal value. Thus, set Pr.00-25 = 419 to complete the setting.
Maximum User-Defined Value

Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
0–65535 (when Pr.00-25 is set to no decimal place)
0.0–6553.5 (when Pr.00-25 is set to one decimal place)
0.00–655.35 (when Pr.00-25 is set to two decimal places)
0.000–65.535 (when Pr.00-25 is set to three decimal places)
 When Pr.00-26 is NOT set to 0, the user-defined value is enabled. After selecting the displayed
unit and number of decimal places with Pr.00-25, the setting value of Pr.00-26 corresponds to
Pr.01-00 (drive’s maximum operating frequency).
Example: When the frequency set in Pr.01-00 = 60.00 Hz, the maximum user-defined value for
Pr.00-26 is 100.0%. This also means that Pr.00-25 is set as 0021h.
NOTE Set Pr.00-25 before using Pr.00-26. After you finish setting, when Pr.00-26 is not 0,
the displayed unit on the keypad shows correctly according to Pr.00-25 settings.
12.1-00-13
User-Defined Value
Default: Read only
Settings Read only
 Pr.00-27 displays the user-defined value when Pr.00-26 is not set to 0.
 The user-defined value is valid only when Pr.00-20 (frequency source) is set to the digital keypad
or to RS-485 communication.
 Switching from AUTO Mode to HAND Mode

Default: 0
Settings bit0: Sleep function control bit
0: Cancel sleep function
1: Sleep function and AUTO mode are the same
bit1: Control bit unit
0: Displaying unit in Hz
1: Same unit as the AUTO mode
bit2: PID control bit
0: Cancel PID control
1: PID control and AUTO mode are the same.
bit3: Frequency source control bit
0: Frequency source set up by parameter, if the multi-step speed is
activated, then multi-step speed has the priority.
1: Frequency command set up by Pr.00-30, regardless of whether the
multi-step speed is activated.
LOCAL / REMOTE Selection

Default: 0
Settings 0: Standard HOA function
1: When switching between local and remote, the drive stops
2: When switching between local and remote, the drive runs with REMOTE
settings for frequency and operating status
3: When switching between local and remote, the drive runs with LOCAL
setting for frequency and operating status
4: When switching between local and remote, the drive runs with LOCAL
settings when switched to Local and runs with REMOTE settings when
switched to Remote for frequency and operation status.
 The default for Pr.00-29 is 0, that is, the standard HOA (Hand-Off-Auto) function. Set the AUTO
and HAND frequency and operation source with Pr.00-20, Pr.00-21 and Pr.00-30, Pr.00-31. Use
digital keypad (KPC-CC01) or multi-function input terminal to set MIx = 41 and 42 (AUTO / HAND
mode).
 When you set the external terminal (MI) to 41 and 42 (AUTO / HAND mode), Pr.00-29 = 1, 2, 3, 4
are disabled. The external terminal has the highest command priority, and Pr.00-29 functions in
standard HOA mode.
12.1-00-14
 If Pr.00-29 is not set to 0, the Local / Remote function is enabled, and the top right corner of
digital keypad (firmware version 1.021 and above) displays “LOC” or “REM”. Set the REMOTE
frequency and operation source with Pr.00-20 and Pr.00-21. Set the LOCAL frequency and
operation source with Pr.00-30 and Pr.00-31. Select or switch Local / Remote mode with the
digital keypad or set the multi-function input terminal MIx = 56. The AUTO key of the digital
keypad is for the REMOTE function, and HAND key is for the LOCAL function.
 When you set the external terminal (MI) to 56 for LOC / REM mode selection, if you set Pr.00-29
to 0, then the external terminal function is disabled.
 When you set the external terminal (MI) to 56 for LOC / REM mode selection, if Pr.00-29 is not
set to 0, then AUTO / HAND key is disabled, and the external terminal has the highest command
priority.
 The comparison between the setting of each mode and the PLC address:
PLC address / HOA mode LOC / REM mode HOA mode
Mode HAND-ON AUTO-ON LOC-ON REM-ON OFF
M1090 = 0 0 0 0 1
M1091 = 1 0 0 0 0
M1092 = 0 1 0 0 0
M1100 = 0 0 1 0 0
M1101 = 0 0 0 1 0
Master Frequency Command Source (HAND)

Default: 0
2: External analog input (refer to Pr.03-00–Pr.03-02)
3: External UP/DOWN terminal
 Determines the master frequency source in HAND mode.
Operation Command Source (HAND)

Default: 0
2: RS-485 serial communication input
 Sets the operation frequency source in HAND mode.
 Use Pr.00-20 and Pr.00-21 to set the frequency source and the operation source in AUTO mode,
and use Pr.00-30 and Pr.00-31 to set the frequency source and operation source in HAND mode.
Select or switch AUTO / HAND mode by using the digital keypad KPC-CC01 or setting the
multi-function input terminal (MI).
 The default for the frequency source or operation source is AUTO mode. It returns to AUTO
12.1-00-15
mode whenever you cycle the power. If you use a multi-function input terminal to switch AUTO /
HAND mode, the multi-function input terminal has the highest priority. When the external terminal
is OFF, the drive does not accept any operation signal and cannot execute JOG.
 Digital Keypad STOP Function

Default: 0
Settings 0: STOP key disabled
1: STOP key enabled
 Valid when the operation command source is note the digital keypad (Pr.00-21 ≠ 0). When
Pr.00-21 = 0, the STOP key on the digital keypad is not affected by this parameter.
 Over-modulation Gain
Default: 100
Settings 80–120
 When the motor operates in the flux-weakening region or voltage saturation region it can be that
a higher voltage output is required. Increase Pr.00-37 to increase the output RMS voltage.
Increasing the over-modulation gain reduces the output current and enhances the motor
efficiency. However, note that low-frequency harmonics created by the six-step square-wave
modulation may occur if the gain is too large.
 How to use Pr.00-37:
Gradually increase Pr.00-37 setting value to check if the output current reduces and the operation
performance improves for an optimal over-modulation gain value.
 Display Filter Time (Current)

Default: 0.100
Settings: 0.001–65.535 sec.
 Minimizes the current fluctuation displayed by the digital keypad.
 Display Filter Time (Keypad)

Default: 0.100
Settings: 0.001–65.535 sec
 Minimizes the value fluctuation displayed by the digital keypad.
Software Version (date)

Default: Read only
Settings: Read only
 Displays the current drive software version by date.
12.1-00-16
01 Basic Parameters
 Maximum Operation Frequency
Default: 60.00 / 50.00
Settings 50.00–599.00 Hz
230V models: setting range for / including 55 kW: 0.00–400.00 Hz
460V models: setting range for / including 90 kW: 0.00–400.00 Hz
575V / 690V models: 599.00 Hz
 Determines the AC motor drive’s maximum operation frequency range. All the AC motor drive
frequency command sources (analog inputs 0–10 V, 4–20 mA, 0–20 mA, ±10 V) are scaled to
correspond to the output frequency range.
Minimum Carrier Frequency Requirement Maximum Operation Frequency (IM VF/ IM SVC)
2k 200 Hz
3k 300 Hz
4k 400 Hz
5k 500 Hz
6k 599 Hz
230V models 55 kW and above: the maximum operation frequency is 400 Hz ( the carrier frequency
should be set at least 4k)
460V models 90 kW and above: the maximum operation frequency is 400 Hz (the carrier frequency
should be set at least 4k)
575V / 690V models: maximum operation frequency is 599 Hz
Rated / Base Frequency of Motor 1

Rated / Base Frequency of Motor 2
Default: 60.00 / 50.00
 Set this parameter according to the motor’s rated frequency on the motor nameplate. If the
motor’s rated frequency is 60 Hz, set this parameter to 60. If the motor’s rated frequency is 50 Hz,
set this parameter to 50.
Rated / Base Voltage of Motor 1

Rated / Base Voltage of Motor 2
Default: 220.0/400.0/
575.0/660.0
Settings 230V models: 0.0–255.0 V
460V models: 0.0–510.0 V
575V models: 0.0–637.0 V
690V models: 0.0–765.0 V
 Set this parameter according to the rated voltage on the motor nameplate. If the motor’s rated
voltage is 220 V, set this parameter to 220.0. If the motor’s rated voltage is 200 V, set this
parameter to 200.0.
 There are many motor types in the market and the power system for each country is also different.
The economical and convenient solution is to install an AC motor drive. Then there is no problem
using the motor with different voltage and frequency inputs, and the motor drive can improve the
original motor characteristics and useful life.
12.1-01-1
Mid-point Frequency 1 of Motor 1

Default: 3.00 / 3.00 /
0.0 / 0.0
Settings 230V models: 0.00–599.00 Hz
460V models: 0.00–599.00 Hz
575V models: 0.00–599.00 Hz
690V models: 0.00–599.00 Hz
 Mid-point Voltage 1 of Motor 1
Default: 11.0 / 22.0 /
0.0 / 0.0
460V models: 0.0–480.0 V
575V models: 0.0–637.0 V
690V models: 0.0–720.0 V
690V, 185 kW and above models: 10.0
Default: 3.00
Default: 11.0 / 22.0 /
0.0 / 0.0
460V models: 0.0–480.0 V
575V models: 0.0–637.0 V
690V models: 0.0–720.0 V
Default: 1.50
Default: 5.0 / 10.0 /
0.0 / 0.0
460V models: 0.0–480.0 V
575V models: 0.0–637.0 V
690V models: 0.0–720.0 V
Default: 1.50
12.1-01-2

Default: 5.0 / 10.0 /
0.0 / 0.0
460V models: 0.0–480.0 V
575V models: 0.0–637.0 V
690V models: 0.0–720.0 V
Minimum Output Frequency of Motor 1
Default: 1.50
 Minimum Output Voltage of Motor 1
Default: 1.0 / 2.0 /
0.0 / 0.0
460V models: 0.0–480.0 V
575V models: 0.0–637.0 V
690V models: 0.0–720.0 V
Minimum Output Frequency of Motor 2
Default: 0.50
 Minimum Output Voltage of Motor 2
Default: 1.0 / 2.0 /
0.0 / 0.0
460V models: 0.0–480.0 V
575V models: 0.0–637.0 V
690V models: 0.0–720.0 V
 You usually set the V/F curve according to the motor’s allowable loading characteristics. Pay
special attention to the motor’s heat dissipation, dynamic balance, and bearing lubrication when
the loading characteristics exceed the loading limit of the motor.
 There is no limit for the voltage setting, but a high voltage at a low frequency may cause motor
damage, overheating, and trigger the stall prevention or the over-current protection; therefore,
use low voltage at low frequency to prevent motor damage or drive error.
 Pr.01-35 to Pr.01-42 is the V/F curve for motor 2. When setting the multi-function input terminals
[Pr.02-01–02-08 and Pr.02-26–Pr.02-31 (extension card)] to 14, the AC motor drive acts with the
second V/F curve.
 The diagram below shows the V/F curve for motor 1. You can use the same V/F curve for motor
2.
12.1-01-3
Common settings of the V/F curve:

(1) General purpose
(2) For fan and hydraulic machinery
(3) High starting torque
12.1-01-4
Start-Up Frequency
Default: 0.50
 When the starting frequency is larger than the Minimum Output Frequency, the drives’ frequency
output starts when the starting frequency reaches the F command. Refer to the following diagram
for details.
Fcmd: frequency command
Fstart: start-up frequency (Pr.01-09)
fstart: actual start-up frequency of the drive
Fmin: 4th output frequency setting (Pr.01-07 / Pr.01-41)
Flow: output frequency lower limit (Pr.01-11)
 When Fcmd > Fmin and Fcmd < Fstart:

If Flow < Fcmd, the drive runs directly by Fcmd.
If Flow ≥ Fcmd, the drive runs with Fcmd, and then rises to Flow according to acceleration time.
 The drive’s output frequency goes directly to 0 when decelerating to Fmin.
12.1-01-5
 Output Frequency Upper Limit

Default: 599.00
 Output Frequency Lower Limit

Default: 0.00
 If the output frequency setting is higher than the upper limit (Pr.01-10), the drive runs with the
upper limit frequency. If the output frequency setting is lower than the lower limit (Pr.01-11) but
higher than the minimum output frequency (Pr.01-07), the drive runs with the lower limit frequency.
Set the upper limit frequency > the lower limit frequency (Pr.01-10 setting value must be >
Pr.01-11 setting value).
 If the slip compensation function (Pr.07-27) is enabled for the drive, the drive’s output frequency
may exceed the Frequency command.
 When the drive starts, it operates according to the V/F curve and accelerates from the minimum
output frequency (Pr.01-07) to the setting frequency. It is not limited by the lower output frequency
settings.
 Use the frequency upper and lower limit settings to prevent operator misuse, overheating caused
by the motor’s operating at a too low frequency, or mechanical wear due to a too high operation
frequency.
 If the frequency upper limit setting is 50 Hz and the frequency setting is 60 Hz, the maximum
operation frequency is 50 Hz.
 If the frequency lower limit setting is 10 Hz and the minimum operation frequency setting
(Pr.01-07) is 1.5 Hz, then the drive operates at 10 Hz when the Frequency command is higher
than Pr.01-07 but lower than 10 Hz. If the Frequency command is lower than Pr.01-07, the drive
is in ready status without output.
12.1-01-6
 Acceleration Time 1
 Deceleration Time 1
 JOG Acceleration Time
 JOG Deceleration Time
Default: 10.00
Default: 60.00 / 60.0 (22 kW models and above)
Default: 80.00 / 80.0 (160 kW models and above)
Settings Pr.01-45 = 0: 0.00–600.00 seconds
Pr.01-45 = 1: 0.0–6000.0 seconds
 The acceleration time determines the time required for the AC motor drive to ramp from 0.00 Hz
to the maximum operation frequency (Pr.01-00). The deceleration time determines the time
required for the AC motor drive to decelerate from the maximum operation frequency (Pr.01-00)
down to 0.00 Hz.
 The acceleration and deceleration time are invalid when using Pr.01-44 Auto-acceleration and
Auto-deceleration Setting
 Select the Acceleration / Deceleration time 1, 2, 3, 4 with the multi-function input terminals
settings. The defaults are Acceleration Time 1 and Deceleration Time 1.
 With the enabled torque limits and stall prevention functions, the actual acceleration and
deceleration time are longer than the above action time.
 Note that setting the acceleration and deceleration time too short may trigger the drive’s
protection function (Pr.06-03 Over-current Stall Prevention during Acceleration or Pr.06-01
Over-voltage Stall Prevention), and the actual acceleration and deceleration time are longer than
this setting.
 Note that setting the deceleration time too short may cause motor damage or trigger drive
protection due to over-current during the drive’s deceleration or over-voltage.
 Use suitable brake resistor (refer to Section 07 Optional Accessories) to decelerate in a short
time and prevent over-voltage.
 When you enable Pr.01-24–Pr.01-27 (S-curve acceleration and deceleration begin and arrival
time), the actual acceleration and deceleration time are longer than the setting.
12.1-01-7
 JOG Frequency
Default: 6.00
 You can use both the external terminal JOG and F1 key on the optional keypad KPC-CC01 to set
the JOG function. When the JOG command is ON, the AC motor drive accelerates from 0 Hz to
the JOG frequency (Pr.01-22). When the JOG command is OFF, the AC motor drive decelerates
from the JOG frequency to stop. The JOG acceleration and deceleration time (Pr.01-20, Pr.01-21)
are the time to accelerate from 0.0 Hz to JOG frequency (Pr.01-22).
You cannot execute the JOG command when the AC motor drive is running. When the JOG
command is executing, other operation commands are invalid.
 Switch Frequency between First and Fourth Accel. / Decel.

Default: 0.00
 This function does not require the external terminal switching function; it switches the
acceleration and deceleration time automatically according to the Pr.01-23 setting. If you set the
external terminal, the external terminal has priority over Pr.01-23.
 Use this parameter to set the switch frequency between acceleration and deceleration slope. The
First / Fourth Accel. / Decel. slope is calculated by the Max. Operation Frequency (Pr.01-00) /
acceleration / deceleration time.
Example: When the Max. Operation Frequency (Pr.01-00) = 80 Hz, and Switch Frequency
between First and Fourth Accel. / Decel. (Pr.01-23) = 40 Hz:
a. If Acceleration Time 1 (Pr.01-02) = 10 sec., Acceleration Time 4 (Pr.01-18) = 6 sec., then the
acceleration time is 3 sec. for 0–40 Hz and 5 sec. for 40–80 Hz.
b. If Deceleration Time 1 (Pr.01-13) = 8 sec., Deceleration Time 4 (Pr.01-19) = 2 sec., then the
deceleration time is 4 sec. for 80–40 Hz and 1 sec. for 40–0 Hz.
12.1-01-8
 S-curve for Acceleration Begin Time 1

 S-curve for Acceleration Arrival Time 2
 S-curve for Deceleration Begin Time 1
 S-curve for Deceleration Arrival Time 2
Default: 0.20
Settings Pr.01-45 = 0: 0.00–25.00 seconds
Pr.01-45 = 1: 0.0–250.0 seconds
 Using an S-curve gives the smoothest transition between speed changes. The acceleration and
deceleration curve adjusts the acceleration and deceleration S-curve. When enabled, the drive
produces a different acceleration and deceleration curve according to the acceleration and
deceleration time.
 The S-curve function is invalid when you set the acceleration and deceleration time to 0.
 When Pr.01-12, Pr.01-14, Pr.01-16, Pr.01-18 ≥ Pr.01-24 and Pr.01-25,
the actual acceleration time = Pr.01-12, Pr.01-14, Pr.01-16, Pr.01-18 + (Pr.01-24 + Pr.01-25) / 2
 When Pr.01-13, Pr.01-15, Pr.01-17, Pr.01-19 ≥ Pr.01-26 and Pr.01-27,
the actual deceleration time = Pr.01-13, Pr.01-15, Pr.01-17, Pr.01-19 + (Pr.01-26 + Pr.01-27) / 2
Skip Frequency 1 (Upper Limit)

Skip Frequency 1 (Lower Limit)
Default: 0.00
12.1-01-9
 Sets the AC motor drive’s skip frequency. The drive’s frequency setting skips these frequency
ranges. However, the frequency output is continuous. There are no limits for these six parameters
and you can combine them. Pr.01-28 does not need to be greater than Pr.01-29; Pr.01-30 does
not need to be greater than Pr.01-31; Pr.01-32 does not need to be greater than Pr.01-33. You
can set Pr.01-28–01-33 as you required. There is no size distinction among these six parameters.
 These parameters set the skip frequency ranges for the AC motor drive. You can use this function
to avoid frequencies that cause mechanical resonance. The skip frequencies are useful when a
motor has resonance vibration at a specific frequency bandwidth. Skipping this frequency avoids
the vibration. There are three frequency skip zones available.
 You can set the frequency command (F) within the range of skip frequencies. Then the output
frequency (H) is limited to the lower limit of skip frequency ranges.
 During acceleration and deceleration, the output frequency still passes through the skip
frequency ranges.
Zero-speed Mode
Default: 0
Settings 0: Output waiting
1: Zero-speed operation
2: Minimum frequency (Refer to Pr.01-07 and Pr.01-41)
 When the drive’s Frequency command is lower than Fmin (Pr.01-07 or Pr.01-41), the drive
operates according to this parameter.
 0: the AC motor drive is in waiting mode without voltage output from terminals U, V, W.
 1: the drive executes the DC brake by Vmin (Pr.01-08 and Pr.01-42) in V/F and SVC modes.
 2: the AC motor drive runs using Fmin (Pr.01-07, Pr.01-41) and Vmin (Pr.01-08, Pr.01-42) in V/F
and SVC modes.
 In V/F and SVC modes
12.1-01-10
V/F Curve Selection

Default: 0
Settings 0: V/F curve determined by Pr.01-00–01-08
1: V/F curve to the power of 1.5
2: V/F curve to the power of 2
 When setting to 0, refer to Pr.01-01–01-08 for the motor 1 V/F curve. For motor 2, refer to
Pr.01-35–01-42.
 When setting to 1 or 2, the second and third voltage frequency setting are invalid.
 If the load of the motor is a variable torque load (torque is in direct proportion to the rotating
speed, such as the load of a fan or a pump), the load torque is low at low rotating speed. You can
decrease the input voltage appropriately to make the magnetic field of the input current smaller
and reduce flux loss and iron loss for the motor to increase efficiency.
 When you set the V/F curve to high power, it has lower torque at low frequency, and the drive is
not suitable for rapid acceleration and deceleration. Do NOT use this parameter for rapid
acceleration and deceleration.
12.1-01-11
 Auto-acceleration and Auto-deceleration Setting

Default: 0
Settings 0: Linear acceleration and deceleration
1: Auto-acceleration and linear deceleration
2: Linear acceleration and auto-deceleration
3: Auto-acceleration and auto-deceleration
4: Stall prevention by auto-acceleration and auto-deceleration (limited by
Pr.01-12–Pr.01-21)
 0 (linear acceleration and linear deceleration): the drive accelerates and decelerates according to
the setting for Pr.01-12–01-19.
 1 or 2 (auto / linear acceleration and auto / linear deceleration): the drive auto-tunes the
acceleration and deceleration to effectively reduce the mechanical vibration during the load
start-up and stop and make the auto-tuning process more easier. It does not stall during
acceleration and does not need a brake resistor during deceleration to stop. It can also improve
operation efficiency and save energy.
 3 (auto-acceleration and auto-deceleration-decelerating by the actual load): the drive
auto-detects the load torque and automatically accelerates from the fastest acceleration time and
smoothest start-up current to the setting frequency. During deceleration, the drive automatically
determines the loaded regenerative energy to steadily and smoothly stop the motor in the fastest
deceleration time.
 4 (stall prevention by auto-acceleration and deceleration–reference to the acceleration and
deceleration time settings): if the acceleration and deceleration time are within a reasonable
range, the actual acceleration and deceleration time refer to Pr.01-12–01-19 settings. If the
acceleration and deceleration time are too short, the actual acceleration and deceleration time
are greater than the acceleration and deceleration time settings.
12.1-01-12
Time Unit for Acceleration and Deceleration and S Curve

Default: 0
Settings 0: Unit 0.01 sec.
1: Unit 0.1 sec.
 CANopen Quick Stop Time
Default: 1.00
Settings Pr.01-45 = 0: 0.00–600.00 sec.
Pr.01-45 = 1: 0.0–6000.0 sec.
 Sets the time required to decelerate from the maximum operation frequency (Pr.01-00) to 0.00 Hz
through the CANopen control.
Deceleration Method Selection

Default: 0
Settings 0: Normal deceleration
1: Over voltage energy restriction
2: Traction energy control (TEC)
3: Electromagnetic energy traction control
 Different control modes for Pr.01-49:
Synchronous
Permanent Magnet
Induction Motor (IM) Reluctance Motor
Setting / Control mode Synchronous Motor (PM)
(SynRM)
VF SVC PMSVC PMFOC HFI FOC
0: Normal deceleration ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
1: Over-voltage energy
✓
restriction
2: Traction energy
✓
control (TEC)
3: Electromagnetic
✓
energy traction control
 0: The drive decelerates or stops based on the original deceleration time settings. Use this setting
when brake resistors are used.
 1: During deceleration, the drive controls the motor according to Pr.06-01 (Over-voltage Stall
Prevention) setting and the regenerative DC bus voltage. When the regenerative DC bus voltage
reaches 95% of Pr.06-01, the controller is enabled. If Pr.06-01 = 0, the drive controls on the basis
of the working voltage and regenerative DC bus voltage instead. When using this method, the
drive decelerates according to the deceleration time setting. However, the actual deceleration
time is equal to or larger than the deceleration setting time.
 2: During deceleration, the drive controls the motor according Pr.06-01 (Over-voltage Stall
Prevention) setting and the regenerative DC bus voltage. When the regenerative DC bus voltage
reaches 95% of Pr.06-01, the drive dynamically adjusts the output frequency and output voltage
to consume the regenerative energy. Use this method when the deceleration time that is set to
fulfill the system requirement for application triggers over-voltage.
 3: During operation (acceleration / steady speed / deceleration), the drive adjusts the output
voltage according to the amount of regenerative energy and consumes the regenerative energy
12.1-01-13
timely to reduce the risk of over-voltage. Moreover, you can also use Pr.01-50 (Electromagnetic
Traction Energy Consumption Coefficient) to adjust the drive’s output voltage strength.
 If you use the electromagnetic energy traction control (Pr.01-49 = 3) during linear deceleration
(no triggering of over-voltage stall prevention), you can enhance the output current by increasing
the output voltage (Vout) to further suppress the regenerative DC bus voltage that is prompt to rise.
Using this function with Pr.06-02 = 1 (Smart Over-voltage Stall Prevention) can achieve a
smoother and faster deceleration.
 Electromagnetic energy traction control activates in the following three conditions:

1. Activates when DC bus is larger than the over-voltage stall prevention level (Pr.06-01) during
acceleration and deactivates once Pr.06-01 is disabled.
2. Activates when DC bus is larger than the over-voltage stall prevention level (Pr.06-01) during
steady operation and deactivates once Pr.06-01 is disabled.
3. Activates during deceleration (including stop) and deactivates once acceleration occurs or
deceleration is stopped.
 When Pr.01-49 = 3, Pr.06-02 = 1 (Smart Over-voltage Stall Prevention) is automatically set to
increase the stability during deceleration.
 Electromagnetic Traction Energy Consumption Coefficient

Default: 0.50
 During acceleration / steady speed / deceleration, the drive will dynamically adjust the output
voltage based on the DC bus voltage level in order to prevent the drive from tripping on
over-voltage. The output voltage is adjusted based on this parameter setting.
 The drive’s output current and the efficiency of regenerative energy consumption increase when
Pr.01-50 is increased. When Pr.01-50 is decreased, also the drive’s output current and the
12.1-01-14
efficiency of regenerative energy consumption will decrease.

 When setting Pr.01-50, pay attention to the drive’s output current. The drive’s output current must
be lower than 80% of the motor’s rated current to prevent the motor from overheating.
 Flux-weakening Overload Stall Prevention Time (applied to 230V / 460V models)

Default: 1.00
Settings 0.00–600.00 sec.
 This parameter is only valid when Pr.00-11 = 8 (SynRM Sensorless Control Mode).
 When the drive operates in flux-weakening zone, and the motor decelerates due to its sudden
loading increment, adjust the setting for this parameter.
12.1-01-15
02 Digital Input / Output Parameter

Two-wire / Three-wire Operation Control
Default: 0
Settings 0: Two-wire mode 1, power on for operation control
1: Two-wire mode 2, power on for operation control
2: Three-wire, power on for operation control
 This parameter sets the configuration of the terminals (Pr.00-21 = 1 or Pr.00-31 = 1) which control
the operation. There are three different control modes listed in the following table.
Pr.02-00 Control Circuits of the External Terminal
Setting value: 0
Two-wire operation control
FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
Setting value: 1
Two-wire operation control
RUN/STOP
REV/FWD
Setting value: 2
Three-wire operation control
Multi-function Input Command 1 (MI1)

Default: 1
Default: 2
Default: 3
Default: 4
Input terminal of I/O extension card (MI10)
12.1-02-1

Default: 0
Settings
0: No function
1: Multi-step speed command 1
5: Reset
6: JOG operation [by external control or KPC-CC01 (optional)]
7: Acceleration / deceleration speed inhibit
8: 1st and 2nd acceleration / deceleration time selection
9: 3rd and 4th acceleration / deceleration time selection
10: External Fault (EF) input (Pr.07-20)
11: Base Block (B.B.) input from external
12: Output stop
13: Cancel the setting of auto-acceleration / auto-deceleration time
14: Switch between motor 1 and motor 2
16: Rotating speed command from ACI
18: Forced to stop (Pr.07-20)
19: Frequency up command
20: Frequency down command
21: PID function disabled
22: Clear the counter
23: Input the counter value (MI6)
24: FWD JOG command
25: REV JOG command
29: Signal confirmation for Y-connection
30: Signal confirmation for -connection
38: Disable write EEPROM function
40: Force coasting to stop
41: HAND switch
42: AUTO switch
49: Enable drive
12.1-02-2
50: Slave dEb action to execute

53: Trigger CANopen quick stop
55: Brake release
56: Local / Remote Selection
58: Enable fire mode with RUN command
59: Enable fire mode without RUN command
60: Disable all the motors
61: Disable Motor 1
62: Disable Motor 2
63: Disable Motor 3
64: Disable Motor 4
65: Disable Motor 5
66: Disable Motor 6
67: Disable Motor 7
68: Disable Motor 8
69: Preheating command
 This parameter selects the functions for each multi-function terminal.
 Pr.02-26–Pr.02-31 are entity input terminals only when extension cards are installed; otherwise,
there are virtual terminals. For example, when using the multi-function extension card EMC-D42A,
Pr.02-26–Pr.02-29 are defined as the corresponded parameters for MI10–MI13. In this case,
Pr.02-30–Pr.02-31 are virtual terminals.
 When Pr.02-12 is defined as virtual terminal, use digital keypad KPC-CC01 or communication
method to change its status (0: ON; 1: OFF) of bit8–15.
 If Pr.02-00 is set to three-wire operation control, terminal MI1 is for the STOP contact. The
function set previously for this terminal is automatically invalid.
Summary of function settings

Take the normally opened contact (N.O.) for example, ON: contact is closed, OFF: contact is
open
Settings Functions Descriptions
0 No Function
Multi-step speed
1
command 1 You can set 15 steps of speed or 15 positions with the digital status
Multi-step speed of these four terminals. You can use 16-steps of speed if you
2
command 2 include the master speed when setting as 15 steps of speed (refer
Multi-step speed to Parameter Group 04 Multi-step Speed Parameters.)
3
command 3
12.1-02-3

Multi-step speed
4
command 4
5 Reset Use this terminal to reset the drive after clearing a drive fault.
This function is valid when the source of the operation command is
the external terminals.
The JOG operation executes when the drive stops completely.
While running, you can still change the operation direction, and the
STOP key on the keypad* and the STOP command from
communications are valid. Once the external terminal receives the
OFF command, the motor stops in the JOG deceleration time.
Refer to Pr.01-20–01-22 for details.
JOG operation *: This function is valid when Pr.00-32 is set to 1.
6 [by external control or
KPC-CC01 (optional)]
When you enable this function, the drive stops acceleration or

deceleration immediately. After you disable this function, the AC
motor drive starts to accelerate or decelerate from the inhibit point.
Acceleration /
7 deceleration speed
inhibit
1st and 2nd acceleration / You can select the acceleration and deceleration time of the drive
8 deceleration time with this function, or from the digital status of the terminals; there
selection are four acceleration and deceleration selection.
12.1-02-4

MIx=9 MIx=8 Accel./Decel.
3rd and 4th acceleration / OFF OFF 1st Accel./Decel.
9 deceleration time OFF ON 2nd Accel./Decel.
selection ON OFF 3rd Accel./Decel.
ON ON 4th Accel./Decel.
For external fault input, the drive decelerates according to the
Pr.07-20 setting, and the keypad shows “EF” (It shows the fault
10 External Fault (EF) Input
record when an external fault occurs). The drive keeps running until
the fault is cleared (terminal status restored) after RESET.
ON: the output of the drive stops immediately. The motor is in free
Base block (B.B.) input
11 run and the keypad displays the B.B. signal. Refer to Pr.07-08 for
from external
details.
ON: the output of the drive stops immediately and the motor is in
free run status. The drive is in output waiting status until the switch
is turned to OFF, and then the drive restarts and runs to the current
setting frequency.
12 Output Stop
Cancel the setting of Set Pr.01-44 to one of the 01–04 setting modes before using this
13 auto-acceleration / function. When this function is enabled, OFF is for auto mode and
auto-deceleration time ON is for linear acceleration / deceleration.
Switch between motor 1 ON: use parameters for motor 2.
14
and motor 2 OFF: use parameters for motor 1.
ON: force the source of the drive’s frequency to be AVI1. (If the
Rotating speed
15 rotating speed commands are set to AVI1, ACI and AVI2 at the
command from AVI1
same time, the priority is AVI1 > ACI > AVI2)
ON: force the source of the drive’s frequency to be ACI. (If the
Rotating speed
command form ACI
same time. The priority is AVI1 > ACI > AVI2)
ON: force the source of the drive’s frequency to be AVI2. (If the
Rotating speed
command form AVI2
same time. The priority is AVI1 > ACI > AVI2)
18 Forced to stop (Pr.07-20) ON: the drive ramps to stop according to the Pr.07-20 setting.
12.1-02-5

ON: the frequency of the drive increases or decreases by one unit.
19 Frequency Up command If this function remains ON continuously, the frequency increases
or decreases according to Pr.02-09 / Pr.02-10.
The Frequency command returns to zero when the drive stops, and
Frequency Down
20 the displayed frequency is 0.0 Hz. If you select Pr.11-00, bit7 = 1,
command
the frequency is not saved.
21 PID function disabled ON: the PID function is disabled.
ON: the current counter value is cleared and displays “0”. The drive
22 Clear the counter
counts up when this function is disabled.
ON: the counter value increases by one. Use the function with
23 Input the counter value
Pr.02-19.
24 FWD JOG command
external terminal. ON: the drive executes forward JOG.
25 REV JOG command
external terminal. ON: the drive executes reverse JOG.
ON: the output of the drive stops immediately, displays “EF1” on the
keypad, and the motor is in the free run status. The drive keeps
running until the fault is cleared after you press RESET on the
keypad (EF: External Fault).
28 Emergency stop (EF1)
Signal confirmation for When the control mode is V/F, ON: the drive operates by the first
29
Y-connection V/F.
Signal confirmation for When the control mode is V/F, ON: the drive operates by the
30
-connection second V/F.
Disable writing EEPROM
ON: writing to EEPROM is disabled. Changed parameters are not
38 function (parameters
saved after power off
memory disable)
40 Force coasting to stop ON: during operation, the motor coasts to stop.
12.1-02-6

1. When the MI terminal switches to OFF, it executes a STOP
command. Therefore, if the MI terminal switches to OFF
during operation, the drive stops.
41 HAND switch
2. Use the optional keypad KPC-CC01 to switch between HAND
and AUTO. The drive stops first, and then switches to HAND
or AUTO status.
3. The optional digital keypad KPC-CC01 displays the current
status of the drive (HAND/OFF/AUTO).
bit1 bit0
42 AUTO switch OFF 0 0
AUTO 0 1
HAND 1 0
OFF 1 1
When the drive is enabled, the RUN command is valid.

When the drive is disabled, the RUN command is invalid.
49 Enable drive
When drive is operating, the motor coasts to stop.
This function varies with MOx = 45.
Enter the message setting in this parameter when the master
Slave dEb action to
50 triggers dEb. This ensures that the slave also triggers dEb, then the
execute
master and slave stop simultaneously.
Selection for PLC mode PLC status bit1 bit0

51
(bit0) Disable PLC function (PLC 0) 0 0
Trigger PLC to operation (PLC 1) 0 1
Selection for PLC mode Trigger PLC to stop (PLC 2) 1 0
52
(bit1) No function 1 1
When this function is enabled under CANopen control, it changes

Trigger CANopen quick
53 to Quick Stop. Refer to Section 15 CANopen Overview for more
stop
details.
UVW output
This function allows receiving confirmation signals when the output
54 electromagnetic valve
is controlled through the UVW magnetic switch.
switch
When Pr.02-56 ≠ 0, connect the brake release signal to
55 Brake release multi-function input terminals. When the brake is opened, and the
drive does not receive its confirming signal, the Brk error occurs.
Use Pr.00-29 to select LOCAL / REMOTE mode (refer to Pr.00-29).
When Pr.00-29 is not set to 0, the digital keypad KPC-CC01
LOCAL / REMOTE displays the LOC / REM status. (KPC-CC01 firmware version 1.021
56 and above).
Selection
bit 0
REM 0
LOC 1
12.1-02-7

Enable fire mode with Enable this function under fire mode to force the drive to run (while
58
RUN Command there is RUN command).
Enable fire mode Enable this function under fire mode to force the drive to run (while
59
without RUN Command there is not a RUN command).
ON: when the multi-motor circulative control is enable, all motors
60 Disable all the motors
coast to stop.
61 Disable Motor 1
62 Disable Motor 2
63 Disable Motor 3 These functions work with multi-motor circulative control, motor 1 to
64 Disable Motor 4 8 can be set to coast to stop. If any of Auxiliary Motor 1 to Motor 8 is
65 Disable Motor 5 out of order or under maintenance, enable this terminal to bypass
66 Disable Motor 6 that motor.
67 Disable Motor 7
68 Disable Motor 8
ON: if the preheating function is open and drive is in STOP status,
the preheating function is executed; until the contact status
69 Preheating Command
changes to OFF, or the drive status turns to RUN and stops the
preheating function. Refer to Pr.02-72–02-73 for detail.
 UP/DOWN Key Mode

Default: 0
Settings 0: Up / Down by the acceleration or deceleration time
1: Up / Down constant speed (Pr.02-10)
 Constant speed, Acceleration or Deceleration Speed of the UP/DOWN Key

Default: 0.001
Settings 0.001–1.000 Hz/ms
 Use when the multi-function input terminals are set to 19, 20 (Frequency UP / DOWN command).
The frequency increases or decreases according to Pr.02-09 and Pr.02-10.
 When Pr.02-09 is set to 0:
The increasing or decreasing Frequency command (F) operates according to the setting for
acceleration or deceleration time (refer to Pr.01-12–Pr.01-19)
12.1-02-8
 When Pr.02-09 is set to 1:

The increasing or decreasing Frequency command (F) operates according to the setting for
Pr.02-10 (0.01–1.00 Hz/ms).
 Multi-function Input Response Time

Default: 0.005
 Use this parameter to set the response time of the digital input terminals FWD, REV and
MI1–MI8.
 This function is to delay and confirm the digital input terminal signal. The time for delay is also the
time for confirmation. The confirmation prevents interference that could cause error in the input to
the digital terminals. But in the meanwhile, it delays the response time though confirmation
improves accuracy.
 Multi-function Input Mode Selection

Default: 0000h
Settings 0000h–FFFFh (0: N.O.; 1: N.C.)
 The parameter setting is in hexadecimal.
 This parameter sets the status of the multi-function input signal (0: normally open； 1: normally
closed) and it is not affected by the status of SINK / SOURCE.
 bit2–bit15 correspond to MI1–MI14.
 The default for bit0 is FWD terminal, and the default for bit1 is REV terminal. You cannot use this
parameter to change the input mode.
 You can change the terminal ON / OFF status through communications.
For example, MI1 is set to 1 (multi-step speed command 1) and MI2 is set to 2 (multi-step speed
command 2). Then the forward + second step speed command = 10012 = 910. As long as
Pr.02-12 = 9 is set through communications, there is no need to wire any multi-function terminal
to run forward with the second step speed.
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
MI15 MI14 MI13 MI12 MI11 MI10 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 REV FWD
12.1-02-9
Multi-function Output 1 (Relay1)

Default: 11
Default: 1
Default: 66
Output Terminal of I/O Extension Card (MO10) or (RA10)
Output Terminal of I/O Extension Card (MO11) or (RA11)
Output Terminal of I/O Extension Card (RA12)
Output Terminal of I/O Extension Card (MO16 Virtual Terminal)
Default: 0
Settings
0: No function
1: Indication during RUN
2: Operation speed reached
3: Desired frequency reached 1 (Pr.02-22)
4: Desired frequency reached 2 (Pr.02-24)
5: Zero speed (Frequency command)
6: Zero speed including STOP (Frequency command)
7: Over-torque 1 (Pr.06-06–06-08)
8: Over-torque 2 (Pr.06-09–06-11)
9: Drive is ready
10: Low voltage warning (Lv) (Pr.06-00)
11: Malfunction indication
12: Mechanical brake release (Pr.02-32)
13: Overheat warning (Pr.06-15)
14: Software brake signal indication (Pr.07-00)
15: PID feedback error (Pr.08-13, Pr.08-14)
16: Slip error (oSL)
17: Count value reached, does not return to 0 (Pr.02-20)
18: Count value reached, returns to 0 (Pr.02-19)
19: External interrupt B.B. input (Base Block)
20: Warning output
21: Over-voltage
12.1-02-10
22: Over-current stall prevention

23: Over-voltage stall prevention
24: Operation mode
25: Forward command
26: Reverse command
27: Output when current ≥ Pr.02-33
28: Output when current < Pr.02-33
29: Output when frequency ≥ Pr.02-34
30: Output when frequency < Pr.02-34
31: Y-connection for the motor coil
32: △ -connection for the motor coil
33: Zero speed (actual output frequency)
34: Zero speed including stop (actual output frequency)
40: Speed reached (including stop)
44: Low current output (use with Pr.06-71–Pr.06-73)
46: Master dEb output
50: Output control for CANopen
51: Analog output control for RS-485 interface (InnerCOM / Modbus)
52: Output control for communication cards
53: Fire mode indication
54: Bypass fire mode indication
55: Motor 1 output
56: Motor 2 output
57: Motor 3 output
58: Motor 4 output
59: Motor 5 output
60: Motor 6 output
61: Motor 7 output
62: Motor 8 output
66: SO output logic A
67: Analog input level reached
68: SO output logic B
69: Preheating output indication
 Use this parameter to set the function of the multi-function terminals.
 Pr.02-36–Pr.02-41 requires additional extension cards to display the parameters, the choices of
optional cards are EMC-D42A and EMC-R6AA.
 The optional card EMC-D42A provides two output terminals, use with Pr.02-36–Pr.02-37.
12.1-02-11
 The optional card EMC-R6AA provides six output terminals, use with Pr.02-36–Pr.02-41.
 MO16–MO20 are virtual terminals, set the status of bit11–15 of Pr.02-18 to control these virtual
terminals.
Summary of function settings
Take the normally open contact (N.O.) for example, ON: contact is closed, OFF: contact is open
0 No function
1 Indication during RUN Active when the drive is not in STOP.
Operation speed Active when output frequency of the drive reaches the setting
2
reached frequency.
Desired frequency
3 Active when the desired frequency (Pr.02-22) reached.
reached 1 (Pr.02-22)
Desired frequency
4 Active when the desired frequency (Pr.02-24) reached.
reached 2 (Pr.02-24)
Zero Speed (frequency Active when frequency command = 0 (the drive must be in RUN
5
command) status)
Zero Speed, includes
6 Stop (frequency Active when frequency command = 0 or stopped.
command)
Active when the drive detects over-torque. Pr.06-07 sets the
7 Over-torque 1 over-torque detection level, and Pr.06-08 sets the over-torque
detection time. Refer to Pr.06-06–Pr.06-08.
Active when the drive detects over-torque. Pr.06-10 sets the
8 Over-torque 2 over-torque detection level, and Pr.06-11 sets the over-torque
detection time. Refer to Pr.06-09–06-11.
9 Drive is ready Active when the drive is ON with no error detected.
Low voltage warning Active when the DC bus voltage is too low (refer to Pr.06-00 Low
10
(Lv) Voltage Level).
11 Malfunction indication Active when fault occurs (except Lv stop).
Mechanical brake Active when the drive runs after the set delayed time for Pr.02-32.
12
release (Pr.02-32) This function must be used with DC brake function.
Active when IGBT or heat sink overheats, to prevent the drive from
13 Overheat warning
shutting down due to overheating (refer to Pr.06-15).
Software brake signal
14 Active when the soft brake function is ON (refer to Pr.07-00).
indication
15 PID feedback error Active when the PID feedback signal error is detected.
16 Slip Error (oSL) Active when the slip error is detected.
Count value reached, When the drive executes external counter, this contact is active if the
17 does not return to 0 count value is equal to the setting value for Pr.02-20. This contact is
(Pr.02-20) not active when the setting value for Pr.02-20 > Pr.02-19.
Counter value reached, When the drive executes the external counter, this contact is active if
18
returns to 0 (Pr.02-19) the count value is equal to the setting value for Pr.02-19.
External interrupt B.B.
19 Active when external interrupt (B.B.) stop output occurs in the drive.
input (Base Block)
20 Warning output Active when a warning is detected.
Active when over-voltage is detected. (Refer to over-voltage
21 Over-voltage
descriptions in Chapter 14 Fault Codes for action levels.)
Over-current stall
22 Active when over-current stall prevention is detected.
prevention
Over-voltage stall
23 Active when over-voltage stall prevention is detected.
prevention
12.1-02-12

Operation mode Active when the operation command is not controlled by external
24
indication terminal. (Pr.00-21 ≠ 0)
25 Forward command Active when the operation direction is forward.
26 Reverse command Active when the operation direction is reverse.
Output when current ≥
27 Active when the current is ≥ Pr.02-33.
Pr.02-33
Output when current <
28 Active when the current is < Pr.02-33
Pr.02-33
Output when frequency
29 Active when the frequency is ≥ Pr.02-34.
≥ Pr.02-34
Output when frequency
30 Active when the frequency is < Pr.02-34.
< Pr.02-34
Y-connection for the Active when Pr.05-24 = 1, the frequency output is lower than Pr.05-23
31
motor coil minus 2 Hz, and the time is longer than Pr.05-25.
∆-connection for the Active when Pr.05-24 = 1, the frequency output is higher than Pr.05-23
32
motor coil plus 2 Hz, and the time is longer than Pr.05-25.
Zero speed (actual Active when the actual output frequency is 0 (the drive is in RUN
33
output frequency) mode).
Zero speed including
34 stop (actual output Active when the actual output frequency is 0 or stopped.
frequency)
Error output selection 1
35 Active when Pr.06-23 is ON.
(Pr.06-23)
(Pr.06-24)
(Pr.06-25)
(Pr.06-26)
Speed reached Active when the output frequency reaches the setting frequency or
40
(including STOP) stopped.
44 Low current output This function needs to be used with Pr.06-71–Pr.06-73
Use this function with external terminal input = 49 (drive enabled) and
external terminal output = 45 (electromagnetic valve enabled), and
then the electromagnetic valve is ON or OFF according to the status of
the drive.
UVW output
45 electromagnetic valve
switch
12.1-02-13

When dEb rises at master, MO sends a dEb signal to the slave.
Output the message when the master triggers dEb. This ensures that
46 Master dEb output
the slave also triggers dEb. Then slave follows the deceleration time
of the master to stop simultaneously with the master.
Control the multi-function output terminals through CANopen.
To control RY2, set Pr.02-14 = 50.
The mapping table of the CANopen DO is shown in the following table:
Physical Setting of related
Attribute Corresponding Index
terminal parameters
RY1 Pr.02-13 = 50 RW The bit0 at 2026-41
RY2 Pr.02-14 = 50 RW The bit1 at 2026-41
Output control for
50 RY3 Pr.02-15 = 50 RW The bit2 at 2026-41
CANopen
MO10/RY10 Pr.02-36 = 50 RW The bit5 at 2026-41
MO11/RY11 Pr.02-37 = 50 RW The bit6 at 2026-41
RY12 Pr.02-38 = 50 RW The bit7 at 2026-41
RY13 Pr.02-39 = 50 RW The bit8 at 2026-41
RY14 Pr.02-40 = 50 RW The bit9 at 2026-41
RY15 Pr.02-41 = 50 RW The bit10 at 2026-41
Refer to Section 15-3-5 for more information.
For RS-485 interface (InnerCOM / Modbus) communication control

output.
terminal parameters
RY1 Pr.02-13 = 51 RW The bit0 at 2640h
Analog output control MO1 Pr.02-16 = 51 RW The bit3 at 2640h
51
for RS-485 interface MO2 Pr.02-17 = 51 RW The bit 4 at 2640h
MO10/RA10 Pr.02-36 = 51 RW The bit5 at 2640h
MO11/RA11 Pr.02-37 = 51 RW The bit6 at 2640h
Control the output through communication cards (CMC-EIP01,

CMC-PN01 and CMC-DN01)
terminal parameters
RY1 Pr.02-13 = 52 RW The bit0 at 2640
RY2 Pr.02-14 = 52 RW The bit1 at 2640
Output control for
52 RY3 Pr.02-15 = 52 RW The bit2 at 2640
communication cards
MO10/RY10 Pr.02-36 = 52 RW The bit5 at 2640
MO11/RY11 Pr.02-37 = 52 RW The bit6 at 2640
RY12 Pr.02-38 = 52 RW The bit7 at 2640
RY13 Pr.02-39 = 52 RW The bit8 at 2640
RY14 Pr.02-40 = 52 RW The bit9 at 2640
RY15 Pr.02-41 = 52 RW The bit10 at 2640
53 Fire mode indication This function is enabled when setting 58 or 59 is enabled.
Bypass fire mode
54 The contact works when bypass function is enabled in the fire mode.
indication
55 Motor 1 output When setting multi-motor circulative function, the multi-function output
56 Motor 2 output terminal automatically sets up Pr.02-13–Pr.02-15 and Pr.02-36–
57 Motor 3 output Pr.02-40 in accordance with the setting for Pr.12-01.
58 Motor 4 output
12.1-02-14

59 Motor 5 output
60 Motor 6 output
61 Motor 7 output
62 Motor 8 output
Status of safety output
66 SO output logic A (N.O.) Status of drive
N.O. (MOx = 66) N.C. (MOx = 68)
Normal Broken circuit (Open) Short circuit (Close)
68 SO output logic B (N.C.) STO Short circuit (Close) Broken circuit (Open)
STL1–STL3 Short circuit (Close) Broken circuit (Open)
The multi-function output terminals operate when the analog input
level is between the high level and the low level.
Pr.03-44: Select one of the analog signal channels (AVI1, ACI, and
AVI2) to be compared.
Analog input level
67 Pr.03-45: The high level for the analog input, default is 50.00%
reached
Pr.03-46: The low level for the analog input, default is 10.00%.
If analog input > Pr.03-45, the multi-function output terminal operates.
If analog input < Pr.03-46, the multi-function output terminal stops
output.
Preheating output
69 Active when the preheating is detected.
indication
 Add Remote IO function to directly control the drive’s AO / DO and read current AI / DI status
through the standard Modbus, the corresponding indexes of 26xx is as following:
2600h MI15 MI14 MI13 MI12 MI11 MI10 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 REV FWD
2640h - - - - - MO15 MO14 MO13 MO12 MO11 MO10 - - RY3 RY2 RY1
2660h AVI1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
2661h ACI - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
2662h AVI2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
266Ah AI10 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
266Bh AI11 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
26A0h AFM1 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
26A1h AFM2 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
26AAh AO10 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
26ABh AO11 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
In addition, the AI and DI values can be read directly, while DO and AO must be controlled by
Modbus under corresponding parameter function. The related parameter definition is as
following:
DO
Terminal Pr. Setting Direct control the index corresponded to Modbus
RY1 Pr.02-13 = 51 bit0 of 2640h
RY2 Pr.02-14 = 51 bit1 of 2640h
RY3 Pr.02-15 = 51 bit2 of 2640h
MO10 / RY10 Pr.02-36 = 51 bit5 of 2640h
MO11 / RY11 Pr.02-37 = 51 bit6 of 2640h
RY12 Pr.02-38 = 51 bit7 of 2640h
RY13 Pr.02-39 = 51 bit8 of 2640h
RY14 Pr.02-40 = 51 bit9 of 2640h
RY15 Pr.02-41 = 51 bit10 of 2640h
AO
AFM1 Pr.03-20 = 21 The value of 26A0h
AFM2 Pr.03-23 = 21 The value of 26A1h
12.1-02-15

AFM10 Pr.14-12 = 21 The value of 26AAh
AFM11 Pr.14-13 = 21 The value of 26ABh
 Multi-function Output Direction

Default: 0000h
Settings 0000h–FFFFh (0: N.O.; 1: N.C.)
 This parameter is in hexadecimal.
 This parameter is set by a bit. If a bit is 1, the corresponding multi-function output acts in an
opposite way.
Example: Assume Pr.02-13 = 1 (indication when the drive is operating). If the output is positive,
the bit is set to 0, and then Relay is ON when the drive runs and is OFF when the drive stops. On
the contrary, if the output is negative, and the bit is set to 1, then the Relay is OFF when the drive
runs and is ON when the drive stops.
MO20 MO19 MO18 MO17 MO16 MO15 MO14 MO13 MO12 MO11 MO10 Reserved RY3 RY2 RY1
 Terminal Counting Value Reached (return to 0)

Default: 0
Settings 0–65500
 You can set the input point for the counter using the multi-function terminal MI6 as a trigger
terminal (set Pr.02-06 to 23). When counting is completed, the specified multi-function output
terminal is activated (Pr.02-13, Pr.02-14, Pr.02-36, Pr.02-37 are set to 18), and Pr.02-19 cannot
be set to 0 at this time.
Example: When the displayed value is c5555, the drive count is 5,555 times. If the displayed
value is c5555, the actual count value is 55,550–55,559.
 Preliminary Counting Value Reached (does not return to 0)

Default: 0
Settings 0–65500
 When the count value counts from 1 to reach this value, the corresponding multi-function output
terminal is activated (Pr. 02-13, Pr.02-14, Pr.02-36, Pr.02-37 are set to 17). You can use this
parameter as the end of counting to make the drive run from the low speed to stop.
12.1-02-16
 Desired Frequency Reached 1

 Desired Frequency Reached 2
Default: 60.00 / 50.00
 The Width of the Desired Frequency Reached 1
 The Width of the Desired Frequency Reached 2
Default: 2.00
 Once the output speed (frequency) reaches the desired speed (frequency), if the corresponding
multi-function output terminal is set to 3–4 (Pr.02-13, Pr.02-14, Pr.02-36, and Pr.02-37), this
multi-function output terminal is “closed”.
Brake Delay Time

Default: 0.000
 When the AC motor drive runs after the setting delay time of Pr.02-32, the corresponding
multi-function output terminal (12: mechanical brake release) is “closed”. The function must be
used with DC brake.
12.1-02-17
 This parameter is invalid if it is used without DC brake. Refer to the following operation timing.
 Output Current Level Setting for Multi-function Output Terminals

Default: 0
Settings 0–150%
 When the drive outputs current higher than or equal to Pr.02-33 (≥ Pr.02-33), the multi-function
output parameters active (Pr.02-13, Pr.02-14, and Pr.02-15 are set to 27).
 When the drive outputs current lower than Pr.02-33 (< Pr.02-33), the multi-function output
parameters active (Pr.02-13, Pr.02-14, and Pr.02-15 are set to 28).
 Output Frequency Setting for Multi-function Output Terminals

Default: 3.00
 When the drive outputs frequency higher than or equal to Pr.02-34 (actual output frequency H ≥
Pr.02-34), the multi-function terminals active (Pr.02-13, Pr.02-14 and Pr.02-15 are set to 29).
 When the drive outputs frequency lower than Pr.02-34 (actual output frequency H < Pr.02-34), the
multi-function terminals active (Pr.02-13, Pr.02-14 and Pr.02-15 are set to 30).
 External Operation Control Selection after Reset and Activate

Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Drive runs if the RUN command remains after reset or re-boot
 Setting 1: The drive automatically executes the RUN command under the following
circumstances, pay extra attention on this.
 Status 1: After the drive is powered on and the external terminal for RUN stays ON, the drive
runs.
 Status 2: After clearing a fault once a fault is detected and the external terminal for RUN stays
ON, you can run the drive by pressing the RESET key.
12.1-02-18
Display the Status of Multi-function Input Terminal

Default: Read only
Settings Monitoring status of multi-function input terminal
 Example:
When Pr.02-50 displays 0034h (hex), (that is, the value is 110100 (binary), it means that MI1, MI3
and MI4 are ON.
Display the Status of Multi-function Output Terminal

Default: Read only
Settings Monitoring status of multi-function output terminal
12.1-02-19
 Example:
When Pr.02-51 displays 0023h (hex) (that is, the value is 100011 (binary)), it means that
RY1, RY2 and MO10 are ON.
Note
Display the External Multi-function Input Terminals Used by PLC

Default: Read only
Settings Monitoring status of PLC external output terminal
 Pr.02-52 displays the external multi-function input terminals that used by PLC.
 Example:
When Pr.02-52 displays 0034h (hex) (that is, the value is 110100 (binary)), it means that MI1, MI3
and MI4 are used by PLC.
12.1-02-20
Display the External Multi-function Output Terminals Used by PLC

Default: Read only
Settings Monitoring status of PLC external multi-function output terminal
 Pr.02-53 displays the external multi-function output terminal that used by PLC.
 Example:
When Pr.02-53 displays 0003h (hex) (that is, the value is 0011 (binary)), it means that RY1 and
RY2 are used by PLC.
Display the Frequency Command Executed by External Terminal

Default: Read only
Settings 0.00–599.00 Hz (Read only)
 When you set the source of the Frequency command as the external terminal, if Lv or Fault
occurs, the external terminal Frequency command is saved in this parameter.
IO Card Types
Default: Read only
Settings 1: EMC-BPS01
4: EMC-D611A
5: EMC-D42A
6: EMC-R6AA
11: EMC-A22A
12.1-02-21
 Preheating Output Current Level

Default: 0
Settings 0–100%
 When a motor drive is not in operation (STOP) and is placed in a cold and humid environment,
enabling the preheating function to output DC current to heat up the motor drive can prevent the
invasion of humidity into the motor drive, which creates condensation affects the normal function
of the motor drive.
 Sets the output current level from the motor drive to the motor after enabling the preheating. The
percentage of the preheating DC current is 100% of the rated current of the motor drive (Pr.05-01,
Pr.05-13 and Pr.05-34). When setting this parameter, slowly increase the percentage to reach
the sufficient preheating temperature.
 Preheating Output Cycle

Default: 0
Settings 0–100%
 Sets the output current cycle of preheating. 0–100% corresponds to 0–10 seconds. When set to
0%, there is no output current. When set to 100%, there is a continuous output. For example,
when set to 50%, a cycle of preheating goes from OFF (5 seconds) to ON (5 seconds), and vice
versa.
 Related Parameters of Preheating
Parameter Description Setting Range Explanation
Output current level 0–100% (rated current of the motor) Output current level of
Pr.02-72
of preheating 0% No output preheating
0–100% (0–10 sec.)
Output cycle of Output cycle of
Pr.02-73 0% No output
preheating preheating
100% Continuous output
Multi-input function
Pr.02-01–08 Enable or disable the
commands 69 Preheating command
Pr.02-26–31 preheating
(MFI)
Multi-output
Pr.02-13–15 Indication of the
function commands 69 Output command of preheating
Pr.02-36–46 preheating
(MFO)
Drive STOP
A
Pr.02-72 ≠ 0
Pre-Heat
Pr.02-73 ≠ 0
Running
Drive STOP &

B MIx = ON (69)
12.1-02-22
 Enable preheating: When Pr.02-72 and Pr.02-73 are NOT set to zero.
 Preheating function A: If Pr.07-72 and Pr.07-23 are set before the motor drive stops operation
(STOP), preheating is enabled right after the motor drive stops. However, if Pr.07-72 and
Pr.07-73 are set after the motor drives stops operation, preheating is not enabled. Preheating is
enabled only when the motor drive stops again or restarts.
 Preheating function B: When the motor drive is in operation (RUN) or stops operating (STOP),
set Pr.02-72 and Pr.02-73 between 1–100% and set MIx = 69 and MIx = ON. Preheating is
enabled whenever the motor drive stops; no matter the motor drive is in operation (RUN) or stops
operating (STOP).
 Preheating priority: if preheating function A and B are both enabled, function B takes priority.
Sequential Diagram of the Preheating Function:

1. Setting parameters to enable preheating (Function A)
Set Pr.02-72 and Pr.02-73 not equal to zero (50% in the diagram) and stop running the motor
drive, then preheating is enabled to output DC current. At the same time, MOx (Output
Command of Preheating) is ON (MOx = 69). Once the drive is rebooted, the preheating function
is enabled right away. The sequence of preheating goes from OFF (5 seconds) to ON (5
seconds). When the motor is in operation (RUN), the preheating function is OFF even it is
enabled. Meanwhile, MOx is OFF (MOx = 69) and the preheating is enabled when the motor
drive stops.
12.1-02-23
2. Enable preheating via multi-input terminals (Function B)

Set Pr.02-72 and Pr.02-73 (50% in the diagram) not equal to zero and set MIx = 69, and MIx =
ON, then Function B takes priority to enable / disable preheating on the motor drive. At the
same time, enabling preheating by parameters is automatically invalid. If, at this moment, the
motor drive is already STOP, the preheating function is enabled to output DC current and the
MOx (Output Command of Preheating) is ON (MOx = 69). The sequence of preheating goes
from OFF (5 seconds) to ON (5 seconds). When the motor is in operation (RUN), the
preheating function is OFF even it is enabled. Meanwhile, MOx is OFF (MOx = 69) and the
preheating is enabled when the motor drive stops.
12.1-02-24
3. Enable DC brake function

DC brake and preheating are enabled at the same time. The motor drive operates with the
same logic described above for preheating. The only difference is that no matter the motor drive
is in operation (RUN) or stops operating (STOP), DC brake enables first. When the motor drive
stops, preheating is activated.
12.1-02-25
03 Analog Input / Output Parameter

 AVI1 Analog Input Selection
Default: 1
 ACI Analog Input Selection
Default: 0
 AVI2 Analog Input Selection
Default: 0
Settings
0: No function
1: Frequency command
4: PID target value
13: PID compensation value
 When you use analog input as the PID reference target input, you must set Pr.00-20 to 2
(external analog input).
Setting method 1: Pr.03-00–03-02 set 1 as PID reference target input.
If the setting value 1 and setting value 4 exist at the same time, the AVI1 input has highest priority
to become the PID reference target input value.
 When you use analog input as the PID compensation value, you must set Pr.08-16 to 1 (source of
PID compensation value is analog input). You can see the compensation value with Pr.08-17.
 When using the Frequency command, the corresponding value for 0– ±10 V / 4–20 mA is 0–
maximum output frequency (Pr.01-00).
 If the settings for Pr.03-00–Pr.03-02 are the same, the AVI1 input has highest priority.
 AVI1 Analog Input Bias
Default: 0.0
Settings -100.0–100.0%
 Sets the corresponding AVI1 voltage for the external analog input 0.
 ACI Analog Input Bias

Default: 0.0
Settings -100.0–100.0%
 Sets the corresponding ACI current for the external analog input 0.
 AVI2 Analog Voltage Input Bias

Default: 0.0
Settings -100.0–100.0%
 Sets the corresponding AVI2 voltage for the external analog input 0.
 The corresponding external input voltage / current signal and the set frequency is 0–10 V (4–20
mA) corresponds to 0–maximum frequency (Pr.01-00).
12.1-03-1
 AVI1 Positive / Negative Bias Mode

 ACI Positive / Negative Bias Mode
 AVI2 Positive / Negative Bias Mode
Default: 0
Settings 0: No bias
1: Lower than or equal to bias
2: Greater than or equal to bias
3: The absolute value of the bias voltage while serving as the center
4: Serve bias as the center
 Using negative bias to set the frequency greatly reduces the noise interference. In a noisy
environment, do NOT use signals less than 1 V to set the drive’s operation frequency.
In the diagram below: Black line: Curve with no bias. Gray line: curve with bias
Diagram 1
Diagram 2
12.1-03-2
Diagram 3
Diagram 4
Diagram 5
12.1-03-3
Diagram 6
Diagram 7
Diagram 8
12.1-03-4
Diagram 9
Diagram 10
Diagram 11
12.1-03-5
Diagram 12
Diagram 13
Diagram 14
12.1-03-6
Diagram 15
Diagram 16
Diagram 17
12.1-03-7
Diagram 18
Diagram 19
Diagram 20
12.1-03-8
Diagram 21
Diagram 22
Diagram 23
12.1-03-9
Diagram 24
Diagram 25
Diagram 26
12.1-03-10
Diagram 27
Diagram 28
Diagram 29
12.1-03-11
Diagram 30
Diagram 31
Diagram 32
12.1-03-12
Diagram 33
Diagram 34
Diagram 35
12.1-03-13
Diagram 36
Diagram 37
Diagram 38
12.1-03-14
Diagram 39
Diagram 40
 Reverse Setting when Analog Signal Input is Negative Frequency

Default: 0
Settings 0: Negative frequency is not allowed. The digital keypad or external terminal
controls the forward and reverse direction.
1: Negative frequency is allowed. Positive frequency = run in forward
direction; negative frequency = run in reverse direction. The digital keypad
or external terminal control cannot switch the running direction.
 Use this parameter only for AVI1 or ACI analog input.
 Requirements for negative frequency (reverse running):
1. Pr.03-10 = 1
2. Bias mode = Bias serve as the center
3. Corresponded analog input gain < 0 (negative); this makes the input frequency negative.
 In using the additional analog input function (Pr.03-18 = 1), when the analog signal is negative
after the addition, you can set this parameter to allow or not allow the reverse running. The result
after adding depends on the “Requirements for negative frequency (reverse running).”
12.1-03-15
 AVI1 Analog Input Gain

 ACI Analog Input Gain
 AVI2 Analog Positive Input Gain
 AVI2 Analog Negative Input Gain
Default: 100.0
Settings -500.0–500.0%
 Use Pr.03-03–Pr.03-14 are used when the Frequency command source is the analog voltage or
current signal.
 AVI1 Analog Input Filter Time

 ACI Analog Input Filter Time
 AVI2 Analog Input Filter Time
Default: 0.01
 Analog signals, such as those entering AVI1, ACI and AVI2, are commonly affected by
interference that affects the stability of the analog control. Use the Input Noise Filter to create a
more stable system.
 When the time constant setting is too large, the control is stable but the control response is slow.
When the time constant setting is too small, the control response is be faster but the control may
be unstable. For optimal setting, adjust the setting based on the control stability or the control
response.
 Analog Input Addition Function

Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable (AVI1, ACI, AVI2)
1: Enable
 When Pr.03-18 = 1:
Example 1: Pr.03-00 = Pr.03-01 = 1, Frequency command = AVI1 + ACI
Example 2: Pr.03-00 = Pr.03-01 = Pr.03-02 = 1, Frequency command = AVI1 + ACI + AVI2
Example 3: Pr.03-00 = Pr.03-02 = 1, Frequency command = AVI1 + AVI2
Example 4: Pr.03-01 = Pr.03-02 = 1, Frequency command = ACI + AVI2
 When Pr.03-18 = 0 and the analog input selection settings (Pr.03-00, Pr.03-01 and Pr.03-02) are
the same, AVI1 has priority over ACI and AVI2 (AVI1 > ACI > AVI2).
12.1-03-16
Signal Loss Selection for the Analog Input 4–20 mA

Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Continue operation at the last frequency
2: Decelerate to 0 Hz
3: Stop immediately and display “ACE”
 Determines the treatment when the 4–20 mA signal is lost [AVIc (Pr.03-28 = 2) or ACIc (Pr.03-29
= 0)].
 When Pr.03-28 ≠ 2, the voltage input to AVI1 terminal is 0–10 V or 0–20 mA, and Pr.03-19 is
invalid.
 When Pr.03-29 ≠ 0, the voltage input to ACI terminal is 0–10 V, and the Pr.03-19 is invalid.
 When the setting is 1 or 2, the keypad displays the warning code “ANL”. It keeps blinking until the
ACI signal is recovered.
 When the setting is 3, and the ACI terminal is disconnected, the keypad displays “ACE” error. It
keeps blinking until the connection is recovered and the error is reset.
 When the drive stops, the condition that causes the warning does not exist, so the warning
automatically disappears.
 AFM1 Analog Output Selection

 AFM2 Analog Output Selection
Default: 0
Settings 0–23
Function Chart
0 Output frequency (Hz) Maximum frequency Pr.01-00 is processed as 100%.
1 Frequency command (Hz) Maximum frequency Pr.01-00 is processed as 100%.
2 Motor speed (Hz) Maximum frequency Pr.01-00 is processed as 100%
3 Output current (rms) (2.5 × drive rated current) is processed as 100%
4 Output voltage (2 × motor rated voltage) is processed as 100%
5 DC bus Voltage 450V (900V) = 100%
6 Power factor -1.000–1.000 = 100%
7 Power Drive rated power is processed as 100%
9 AVI1 percentage 0–10 V / 0–20 mA / 4–20 mA = 0–100%
10 ACI percentage 4–20 mA / 0–10 V / 0–20 mA = 0–100%
11 AVI2 percentage 0–10 V = 0–100%
For CANopen communication analog output
Corresponding
Terminal
address
20 CANopen analog output AFM1 2026-A1
AFM2 2026-A2
AO10 2026-AB
AO11 2026-AC
12.1-03-17

For RS-485 (InnerCOM / Modbus) control analog output
Corresponding
Terminal
address
21 RS-485 analog output AFM1 26A0H
AFM2 26A1H
AO10 26AAH
AO11 26ABH
For communication analog output (CMC-EIP01,

CMC-PN01, CMC-DN01)
Corresponding
Communication card analog Terminal
address
22
output AFM1 26A0H
AFM2 26A1H
AO10 26AAH
AO11 26ABH
Pr.03-32 and Pr.03-33 control the voltage output level
23 Constant voltage output 0–100% of Pr.03-32 corresponds to 0–10 V of AFM1.
0–100% of Pr.03-33 corresponds to 0–10 V of AFM2.
 AFM1 Analog Output Gain

 AFM2 Analog Output Gain
Default: 100.0
Settings 0.0–500.0%
 Adjusts the voltage level outputted to the analog meter from the analog signal (Pr.03-20) output
terminal AFM of the drive.
 AFM1 Analog Output REV Direction

 AFM2 Analog Output REV Direction
Default: 0
Settings 0: Absolute value in output voltage
1: Reverse output 0 V; forward output 0–10 V
 AFM2 Output Bias

Default: 0.00
Settings -100.00–100.00%
12.1-03-18
 Example 1, AFM2 0–10 V is set to the output frequency, the output equation is:
10 V × (output frequency / Pr.01-00) × Pr.03-24 + 10 V × Pr.03-27
 Example 2, AFM2 0–20 mA is set to the output frequency, the output equation is:
20 mA × (output frequency / Pr.01-00) × Pr.03-24 + 20 mA × Pr.03-27
 Example 3, AFM2 4–20 mA is set to the output frequency, the output equation is:
4 mA + 16 mA × (output frequency / Pr.01-00) × Pr.03-24 + 16 mA × Pr.03-27
 This parameter sets the corresponding voltage of the analog output 0.
 AVI1 Terminal Input Selection

Default: 0
Settings 0: 0–10 V
1: 0–20 mA
2: 4–20 mA
 ACI Terminal Input Selection
Default: 0
Settings 0: 4–20 mA
1: 0–10 V
2: 0–20 mA
 When you change the input mode, verify that the external terminal switch (SW3, SW4)
corresponds to the setting for Pr.03-28–Pr.03-29.
 When you change the setting, proportion to the corresponding ACI and ACI will change to default.
PLC Analog Output Terminal Status

Default: Read only
Settings Monitor the status of the PLC analog output terminals
 Pr.03-30 displays the external multi-function output terminal that used by PLC.
 For Example:
When Pr.03-30 displays 0002h (hex), it means that AFM2 is used by PLC.
12.1-03-19
 AFM2 Output Selection

 AFM1 Output Selection
Default: 0
Settings 0: 0–20 mA output
1: 4–20 mA output
 AFM1 DC Output Setting Level

 AFM2 DC Output Setting Level
Default: 0.00
Settings 0.00–100.00%
 Pair with multi-function output: 23, Pr.03-32 and Pr.03-33 outputs constant AFM voltage.
 Set Pr.03-32 between 0–100.00% to correspond to 0–10 V of AFM1.
 Set Pr.03-33 between 0–100.00% to correspond to 0–10 V of AFM2.

AFM1 Filter Output Time

AFM2 Filter Output Time
Default: 0.01
 Multi-function MO Output by AI Level Source

Default: 0
Settings 0: AVI1
1: ACI
2: AVI2
 AI Upper Level
Default: 50.00
Settings -100.00–100.00%
 AI Lower Level
Default: 10.00
Settings -100.00–100.00%
 Use this function (Pr.03-44) with the multi-function output setting 67 (analog input level reached).
The MO is active when the AI input level is higher than the Pr.03-45. The MO is disabled when
the AI input is lower than the Pr.03-46.
 When setting levels, Pr.03-45 AI upper level must be higher than Pr.03-46 AI lower level.
 Analog Input Curve Selection

Default: 7
Settings 0: Normal Curve
2: Three-point curve of ACI
3: Three-point curve of AVI 1& ACI
12.1-03-20
5: Three-point curve of AVI 1& AVI2

6: Three-point curve of ACI & AVI2
7: Three-point curve of AVI1 & ACI & AVI2
 Sets the calculation method for analog input.
 When Pr.03-50 = 0, all analog input signal is calculated by bias and gain.
 When Pr.03-50 = 1, AVI1 calculates by frequency and voltage / current (Pr.03-51–Pr.03-56), other
analog input signal calculates by bias and gain.
 When Pr.03-50 = 2, ACI calculates by frequency and voltage / current (Pr.03-57–Pr.03-62), other
analog input signal calculates by bias and gain.
 When Pr.03-50 = 3, AVI1 and ACI calculate by frequency and voltage / current
(Pr.03-51–Pr.03-62), other analog input signal calculate by bias and gain.
 When Pr.03-50 = 4, AVI2 calculates by frequency and voltage (Pr.03-63–Pr.03-68), other analog
input signal calculates by bias and gain.
 When Pr.03-50 = 5, AVI1 and AVI2 calculate by frequency and voltage / current
(Pr.03-51–Pr.03-56 and Pr.03-63–Pr.03-68), other analog input signal calculate by bias and gain.
 When Pr.03-50 = 6, ACI and AVI2 calculate by frequency and voltage / current
(Pr.03-57–Pr.03-68), other analog input signal calculates by bias and gain.
 When Pr.03-50 = 7, all analog input signal calculate by frequency and voltage / current (Pr.03-51–
Pr.03-68).
 AVI1 Lowest Point

Default:
0.00 / 0.00 / 4.00
Settings Pr.03-28 = 0, 0.00–10.00 V
Pr.03-28 = 1, 0.00–20.00 mA
Pr.03-28 = 2, 0.00–20.00 mA
 AVI1 Proportional Lowest Point
Default: 0.00
Settings -100.00–100.00%
 AVI1 Mid-Point
Default:
5.00 / 10.00 / 12.00
Settings Pr.03-28 = 0, 0.00–10.00 V
Pr.03-28 = 1, 0.00–20.00 mA
Pr.03-28 = 2, 0.00–20.00 mA
 AVI1 Proportional Mid-Point
Default: 50.00
Settings -100.00–100.00%
12.1-03-21
 AVI1 Highest Point

Default:
10.00 / 20.00 / 20.00
Settings Pr.03-28 = 0, 0.00–10.00 V
Pr.03-28 = 1, 0.00–20.00 mA
Pr.03-28 = 2, 0.00–20.00 mA
 AVI1 Proportional Highest Point
Default: 100.00
Settings -100.00–100.00%
 When Pr.03-28 = 0, the AVI1 setting is 0–10 V and the unit is in voltage (V).
When Pr.03-28 ≠ 0, the AVI1 setting is 0–20 mA or 4–20 mA and the unit is in current (mA).
 When you set the analog input AVI1 to frequency command, 100% corresponds to Fmax
(Pr.01-00 Maximum Operation Frequency).
 The requirement for these there parameters (Pr.03-51, Pr.03-53 and Pr.03-55) is Pr.03-51 <
Pr.03-53 < Pr.03-55. The values for three proportional points (Pr.03-52, Pr.03-54 and Pr.03-56)
have no limits. Values between two points are calculated by a linear equation. The ACI and AVI2
are the same as AVI1.
 The output percentage is 0% when the AVI1 input value is lower than the lowest point setting.
Example: Pr.03-51 = 1 V, Pr.03-52 = 10%. The output is 0% when AVI1 input is lower than 1 V. If
the AVI1 input varies between 1 V and 1.1 V, the drive’s output frequency is between 0% and
10%.
12.1-03-22
 ACI Lowest Point

Default:
4.00 / 0.00 / 0.00
Settings Pr.03-29 = 0, 0.00–20.0 mA
Pr.03-29 = 1, 0.00–10.00 V
Pr.03-29 = 2, 0.00–20.00 mA
 ACI Proportional Low Point
Default: 0.00
Settings -100.00–100.00%
 ACI Mid-Point
Default:
12.00 / 5.00 / 10.00
Settings Pr.03-29 = 0, 0.00–20.00 mA
Pr.03-29 = 1, 0.00–10.00 V
Pr.03-29 = 2, 0.00–20.00 mA
 ACI Proportional Mid-Point
Default: 50.00
Settings -100.00–100.00%
 ACI Highest Point
Default:
20.00 / 10.00 / 20.00
Settings Pr.03-29 = 0, 0.00–20.00 mA
Pr.03-29 = 1, 0.00–10.00 V
Pr.03-29 = 2, 0.00–20.00 mA
 ACI Proportional Highest Point
Default: 100.00
Settings -100.00–100.00%
 When Pr.03-29 = 1, the ACI setting is 0–10 V and the unit is in voltage (V).
When Pr.03-29 ≠ 1, the ACI setting is 0–20 mA or 4–20 mA and the unit is in current (mA).
 When you set the analog input ACI to the Frequency command, 100% corresponds to Fmax
(Pr.01-00 Maximum Operation Frequency).
12.1-03-23
 The requirement for these three parameters (Pr.03-57, Pr.03-59 and Pr.03-61) is Pr.03-57 <
have no limits. There is a linear calculation between two points.
 The output percentage becomes 0% when the ACI input value is lower than the lowest point
setting.
Example:
Pr.03-57 = 2 mA; Pr.03-58 = 10%, then the output becomes 0% when the AVI1 input is ≤ 2 mA. If
the ACI input swings between 2 mA and 2.1 mA, the drive’s output frequency oscillates between
0% and 10%.
 Positive AVI2 Voltage Lowest Point

Default: 0.00
Settings 0.00–10.00 V
 Positive AVI2 Voltage Proportional Lowest Point
Default: 0.00
Settings -100.00–100.00%
 Positive AVI2 Voltage Mid-Point
Default: 5.00
 Positive AVI2 Voltage Proportional Mid-Point
Default: 50.00
Settings -100.00–100.00%
 Positive AVI2 Voltage Highest Point
Default: 10.00
 Positive AVI2 Voltage Proportional Highest Point
Default: 100.00
Settings -100.00–100.00%
 When you set the positive voltage AVI2 to the Frequency command, 100% corresponds to Fmax
(Pr.01-00 Maximum Operation Frequency) and the motor runs in the forward direction.
 The requirement for these three parameters (Pr.03-63, Pr.03-65 and Pr.03-67) is Pr.03-63 <
have no limits. There is a linear calculation between two points.
 The output percentage becomes 0% when the positive voltage AVI2 input value is lower than the
lowest point setting.
For example:
If Pr.03-63 = 1 V; Pr.03-64 = 10%, then the output becomes 0% when the input is lower than 1 V.
If the AVI input swings between 1 V and 1.1 V, the drive’s output frequency oscillates between 0%
and 10%.
 When AVI1 Selection (Pr.03-28) is 0–10 V, the setting ranges for Pr.03-51, Pr.03-53, and Pr.03-55
must be 0.00–10.00 or 0.00–20.00.
12.1-03-24
 When ACI Selection (Pr.03-29) is 0–10 V, the setting ranges for Pr.03-57, Pr.03-59 and Pr.03-61
must be 0.00–10.00 or 0.00–20.00.
 Use Pr.03-51–Pr.03-68 to set the open circuit corresponding function of analog input value and
maximum operation frequency (Pr.01-00), as shown in the figure below:
12.1-03-25
04 Multi-Step Speed Parameters

 This parameter can be set during operation.
 1st Step Speed Frequency
 2nd Step Speed Frequency
 3rd Step Speed Frequency
 4th Step Speed Frequency
Default: 0.00
 Use the multi-function input terminals (refer to setting 1–4 of Pr.02-01–Pr.02-08 and
Pr.02-26–Pr.02-31 Multi-function Input Command) to select the multi-step speed command (the
maximum is 15th step speed). Pr.04-00 to Pr.04-14 set the multi-step speed frequency as shown
in the following diagram.
 The external terminal/digital keypad/communication controls the RUN and STOP commands with
Pr.00-21.
 You can set each multi-step speed between 0.00–599.00 Hz during operation.
 Explanation for the timing diagram of the multi-step speed and external terminals.
The related parameter settings are:
1. Pr.04-00–04-14: sets the 1st to 15th multi-step speed (to set the frequency of each step speed)
2. Pr.02-01–02-08 and Pr.02-26–02-31: sets the multi-function input terminals (multi-step speed
command 1–4)
 Related parameters:
Pr.01-22 JOG Frequency
Pr.02-01 Multi-function Input Command 1 (MI1)
12.1-04-1
 PLC Buffer 0
 PLC Buffer 1
 PLC Buffer 2
 PLC Buffer 3
 PLC Buffer 4
 PLC Buffer 5
 PLC Buffer 6
 PLC Buffer 7
 PLC Buffer 8
 PLC Buffer 9
 PLC Buffer 10
Default: 0
Settings 0–65535
 You can combine the PLC buffer with the built-in PLC function for a variety of applications.
12.1-04-2
 PLC Application Parameter 0

PLC Application Parameter 15
Default: 0
Settings 0–65535
 Pr.04-70–Pr.04-99 are user-defined parameters. You can combine these 30 PLC Application
Parameters with the PLC programming for a variety of applications.
12.1-04-3
05 Motor Parameters  You can set this parameter during operation.
The following are abbreviations for different types of motors:

 IM: Induction motor  SPM: Surface permanent magnet
synchronous AC motor
 PM: Permanent magnet synchronous AC  SynRM: Synchronous reluctance motor
motor
 IPM: Interior permanent magnet synchronous
AC motor
Motor Parameter Auto-Tuning

Default: 0
Settings 0: No function
1: Simple rolling auto-tuning for induction motor(IM)
2: Static auto-tuning for induction motor
5: Rolling auto-tuning for PM (IPM / SPM)
11: SynRM parameter auto-tuning (applied to 230V / 460V models)
13: Static auto-tuning for PM (IPM / SPM)
 Refer to Section 12-2 “Adjustment and Application” for more details of motor adjustment process.
Full-load Current for Induction Motor 1 (A)

Default: Depending on
the model power
Settings Depending on the model power
 Sets this value according to the rated current of the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate.
 The default is 90% of the drive’s rated current.
Example: The rated current for a 7.5 HP (5.5 kW) is 25 A. The default is 22.5 A.
The setting range is between 2.5–30 A. (25 × 10% = 2.5 A and 25 × 120% = 30 A)
 Rated Power for Induction Motor 1(kW)

the model power
Settings 0.00–655.35 kW
 Sets the rated power for motor 1. The default is the drive’s power value.
 Rated Speed for Induction Motor 1 (rpm)

the motor’s number of
poles
Settings 0–xxxx rpm (Depending on the motor’s number of poles)
1710 (60 Hz 4 poles); 1410 (50 Hz 4 poles)
 Sets the rated speed for the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate.
 Pr.01-01 and Pr.05-04 determine the maximum rotor speed for IM.
For example: Pr.01-01 = 20 Hz, Pr.05-04 = 2, according to the equation 120 x 20 Hz / 2 = 1200
12.1-05-1
rpm and take integers. Due to the slip of the IM, the maximum setting value for Pr.05-03 is 1199
rpm (1200 rpm – 1).
Number of Poles for Induction Motor 1

Default: 4
Settings 2–64
 Sets the number poles for the motor (must be an even number).
 Set up Pr.01-01 and Pr.05-03 before setting up Pr.05-04 to make sure the motor operates
normally. Pr.01-01 and Pr.05-03 determine the maximum set up number poles for the IM.
For example: Pr.01-01 = 20 Hz and Pr.05-03 = 39 rpm, according to the equation 120 x 20 Hz / 39
rpm = 61.5 and take even number, the number of poles is 60. Therefore, Pr.05-04 can be set to
the maximum of 60 poles.
No-load Current for Induction Motor 1 (A)

the model power
Settings 0.0–Pr.05-01 default
 The default is 10–40% of motor rated current.
 For model with 110 kW and above, default setting is 20% of motor rated current.
Stator Resistance (Rs) for Induction Motor 1

the model power
Settings 0.000–65.535 Ω
Rotor Resistance (Rr) for Induction Motor 1

Default: 0.000
Settings 0.000–65.535 Ω
Magnetizing Inductance (Lm) for Induction Motor 1

Stator Inductance (Lx) for Induction Motor 1
Default: 0.0
Settings 0.0–6553.5 mH
Full-load Current for Induction Motor 2 (A)
the model power
 Set this value according to the rated current of the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate.
The default is 90% of the drive’s rated current.
Example: The rated current for a 7.5 HP (5.5 kW) motor is 25 A. The default is 22.5 A.
12.1-05-2
 Rated Power for Induction Motor 2 (kW)

the model power
 Set the rated power for motor 2. The default is the drive’s power value.
 Rated Speed for Induction Motor 2 (rpm)

the motor’s number of
poles
Settings 0–xxxx rpm (Depending on the motor’s number of poles)
1710 (60 Hz 4 poles); 1410 (50 Hz 4 poles)
 Sets the rated speed for the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate.
Number of Poles for Induction Motor 2

Default: 4
Settings 2–64
 Sets the number of poles for the motor (must be an even number).
 Set up Pr.01-35 and Pr.05-15 before setting up Pr.05-16 to make sure the motor operates
normally. Pr.01-35 and Pr.05-15 determine the maximum set up number of poles.
For example: Pr.01-35 = 20 Hz and Pr.05-15 = 39 rpm, according to the equation 120 x 20 Hz / 39
rpm = 61.5 and take even number, the number of poles is 60. Therefore, Pr.05-16 can be set to
the maximum of 60 poles.
No-load Current for Induction Motor 2 (A)

the model power
Settings 0.00–Pr.05-13 default
 The default is 10–40% of motor rated current.
 For model with 110 kW and above, default setting is 20% of motor rated current.
Stator Resistance (Rs) for Induction Motor 2

the model power
Settings 0.000–65.535 Ω
Rotor Resistance (Rr) for Induction Motor 2

Default: 0.000
Settings 0.000–65.535 Ω
Magnetizing Inductance (Lm) for Induction Motor 2

Stator Inductance (Lx) for Induction Motor 2
Default: 0.0
12.1-05-3
Induction Motor 1 / 2 Selection

Default: 1
Settings 1: Motor 1
2: Motor 2
 Sets the motor currently operated by the AC motor drive.
 Frequency for Y-connection / ∆-connection Switch for an Induction Motor

Default: 60.00
Y-connection / ∆-connection Switch for Induction Motor
Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Enable
 Delay Time for Y-connection / ∆-connection Switch for an Induction Motor
Default: 0.200
 You can apply Pr.05-23–Pr.05-25 in a wide range of motors, and the motor coil executes the
Y-connection / -connection switch as required. The wide range motors are related to the motor
design. In general, the motor has higher torque with low speed Y-connection, and has higher
speed with high speed -connection).
 Pr.05-24 enables and disables the switch of Y-connection / -connection.
 When you set Pr.05-24 as 1, the drive uses the Pr.05-23 setting and current motor frequency, and
switches the current motor to Y-connection or -connection. You can switch the relevant motor
parameter settings simultaneously.
 Pr.05-25 sets the switch delay time of Y-connection / -connection.
 When the output frequency reaches Y-connection / -connection switch frequency, the drive
delays according to Pr.05-25 before activating the multi-function output terminals.
12.1-05-4
Accumulated Watt-hour for a Motor (W-hour)

Default: Read only
Accumulated Watt-hour for a Motor in Low Word (kW-hour)
Default: Read only
Accumulated Watt-hour for a Motor in High Word (MW-hour)
Default: Read only
Settings 0–65535
 Pr.05-28–05-30 record the amount of power consumed by the motors. The accumulation begins
when the drive is activated and the record is saved when the drive stops or turns OFF. The
amount of consumed watts continues to accumulate when the drive is activated again. To clear
the accumulation, set Pr.00-02 as 5 to return the accumulation record to 0.
 The accumulated total watts of the motor per hour = Pr.05-30 x 1000000 + Pr.05-29 x 1000 +
Pr.05-28 Wh
12.1-05-5
Example: When Pr.05-30 = 76 MWh and Pr.05-29 = 150 kWh, Pr.05-28 = 400 Wh (or 0.4 kWh),
the accumulated total kilowatts of the motor per hour = 76 x 1000000 + 150 x 1000 + 40 =
76150400Wh = 76150.4 kWh
Accumulated Motor Operation Time (Minutes)

Default: 0
Settings 0–1439
Accumulated Motor Operation Time (Days)
Default: 0
Settings 0–65535
 Use Pr.05-31 and Pr.05-32 to record the motor operation time. To clear the operation time, set
Pr.05-31 and Pr.05-32 as 00. An operation time shorter than 60 seconds is not recorded.
Induction Motor (IM) or Permanent Magnet Synchronous AC Motor Selection

Default: 0
Settings 0: IM
1: SPM
2: IPM
3: SynRM (applied to 230V / 460V models)
Full-load Current for a Permanent Magnet Synchronous AC Motor / Reluctance Motor
the model power
 Sets the full-load current for the motor according to motor’s nameplate. The default is 90% of the
drive’s rated current.
For example: The rated current of a 7.5 HP (5.5 kW) is 25 A. The default is 22.5 A.
 Rated Power for a Permanent Magnet Synchronous AC Motor / Reluctance Motor

the motor power
 Sets the rated power for the permanent magnet synchronous motor. The default is the drive’s
power value.
 Rated Speed for a Permanent Magnet Synchronous AC Motor / Reluctance Motor

Default: 2000
Settings 0–65535 rpm
Pole Number for a Permanent Magnet Synchronous AC Motor / Reluctance Motor
Default: 10
Settings 0–65535
12.1-05-6
System Inertia for a Permanent Magnet Synchronous AC Motor / Reluctance Motor

the motor power
Settings 0.0–6553.5 kg-cm2
 Default values are as below:
Rated Power [kW] 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 9.3 11
Rotor Inertia [kg-cm2] 1.2 3.0 6.6 15.8 25.7 49.6 82.0 121.6 177.0
54 and
Rated Power [kW] 14.1 18.2 27 33 40 46 54
above
Rotor Inertia [kg-cm2] 211.0 265.0 308.0 527.0 866.0 1082.0 1267.6 1515.0
Stator Resistance for a Permanent Magnet Synchronous AC Motor / Reluctance Motor

Default: 0.000
Settings 0.000–65.535 
Permanent Magnet Synchronous AC Motor / Reluctance Motor Ld
Default: 0.00
Permanent Magnet Synchronous AC Motor / Reluctance Motor Lq
Default: 0.00
 Ke parameter for a Permanent Magnet Synchronous AC Motor

Default: 0
Settings 0–65535 V/krpm
 Permanent magnet motor parameter Ke (Vphase, rms / krpm).
 When Pr.05-00 = 5, parameter Ke is calculated according to the motor’s actual operation.
 When Pr.05-00 = 13, parameter Ke is automatically calculated according to the motor power,
current and rotor speed.
12.1-05-7
06 Protection Parameters  You can set this parameter during operation.
 Low Voltage Level

Default:
Settings 230V models:
Frame A–D: 150.0–220.0 VDC 180.0
Frame E and above: 190.0–220.0 VDC 200.0
460V models:
Frame A–D: 300.0–440.0 VDC 360.0
Frame E and above: 380.0–440.0 VDC 400.0
575V models: 420.0–520.0 VDC 470.0
690V models: 450.0–660.0 VDC 480.0
 Sets the Low Voltage (Lv) level. When the DC bus voltage is lower than Pr.06-00, a Lv fault is
triggered, and the drive stops output and the motor coasts to stop.
 If the Lv fault is triggered during operation, the drive stops output and the motor coasts to stop.
There are three Lv faults: LvA (Lv during acceleration), Lvd (Lv during deceleration), and Lvn (Lv
in constant speed) that are triggered according to the status of acceleration or deceleration. You
must press RESET to clear the Lv fault. The drive automatically restarts if you set to restart after
momentary power loss (refer to Pr.07-06 Restart after Momentary Power Loss and Pr.07-07
Allowed Power Loss Duration for details).
 If the Lv fault is triggered when the drive is in STOP status, the drive displays LvS (Lv during
stop), which is not recorded, and the drive restarts automatically when the input voltage is higher
than Pr.06-00 + Lv return level (as listed below).
Lv Return Level 230V 460V 575V 690V
Frame A–D 30 VDC 60 VDC 100 VDC 100 VDC
Frame E–H 40 VDC 80 VDC N/A 120 VDC
 Over-voltage Stall Prevention

Default:
Settings 0: Disabled
230V models: 0.0–450.0 VDC 380.0
460V models: 0.0–900.0 VDC 760.0
575V models: 0.0–1116.0 VDC 920.0
690V models: 0.0–1318.0 VDC 1087.0
12.1-06-1
 Setting Pr.06-01 to 0.0 disables the over-voltage stall prevention function (connected with
braking unit or brake resistor). Use this setting when braking units or brake resistors are
connected to the drive.
 Setting Pr.06-01 to a value > 0.0 enables the over-voltage stall prevention. This setting refers to
the power supply system and loading. If the setting is too low, then over-voltage stall prevention
is easily activated, which may increase the deceleration time.
 Related parameters:
 Pr.01-13, Pr.01-15, Pr.01-17, Pr.01-19 Deceleration Time 1–4
 Pr.02-13–Pr.02-15 Multiple-function Output (Relay1–3)
 Pr.06-02 Selection for Over-voltage Stall Prevention.
 Selection for Stall Prevention

Default: 0
Settings 0: Traditional over-voltage and traditional over-current stall prevention
1: Smart over-voltage and traditional over-current stall prevention
2: Traditional over-voltage and smart over-current stall prevention
3: Smart over-voltage and smart over-current stall prevention
 A comparison between traditional stall prevention and smart stall prevention:
Over-voltage Over-current
Type
Description Action Parameter Description Action Parameter
Frequency
maintains during Acceleration
Pr.06-03
Frequency acceleration stops
Deceleration
Traditional maintains during Pr.06-01
stops Frequency Frequency
deceleration
decreases at gradually Pr.06-04
constant speed decreases
Frequency
decreases Frequency
Frequency
during gradually Pr.06-03
increases during Frequency
acceleration / decreases
Smart acceleration / gradually Pr.06-01
deceleration
deceleration / increases
Frequency Frequency
constant speed
decreases at gradually Pr.06-04
constant speed decreases
 Pr.06-02 (Selection for stall prevention) can be used with Pr.01-49 (Regenerative energy
restriction control method), but Pr.06-02 cannot work with Pr.01-44 (Auto-acceleration and
auto-deceleration setting).
 When Pr.06-02 or Pr.01-49 is enabled (setting value > 0), Pr.01-44 (Auto-acceleration and
auto-deceleration setting) automatically disables (setting value = 0) and cannot be set; when
Pr.01-44 is enabled (setting value > 0), Pr.06-02 and Pr.01-49 automatically disable and cannot
be set.
 If you use smart over-voltage or smart over-current stall prevention for industries that require fast
response, you can decrease the deceleration time when needed.
 When using smart over-voltage stall prevention, the drive decelerates to stop with the fastest
deceleration time according to different working condition, rather than the first to fourth
deceleration time (Pr.01-13–01-19).
12.1-06-2
 For 220V / 440V 160 kW models and above, the default for Pr.06-02 is automatically set to 1
(Smart over-voltage and traditional over-current stall prevention). If you need to set the
deceleration time with Pr.01-13–01-19, set Pr.06-02 = 0.
Pr.06-01 Over-voltage stall prevention, Pr.06-03 Over-current stall prevention during acceleration,
Pr.06-04 Over-current stall prevention during operation, Pr.06-05 Acceleration / deceleration time
selection for stall prevention at constant speed, Pr.01-12–01-19 Acceleration / Deceleration time
1–4, and Pr.02-13–02-15 Multi-function output (Relay 1–3).
Traditional over-voltage stall prevention
 Used for uncertain load inertia. When it stops under normal load, the over-voltage does not
occur during deceleration and fulfills the deceleration time setting. However, load regenerative
inertia may occasionally increase and does not trip due to over-voltage when decelerating to
stop. In this case, the drive automatically increases the deceleration time until it stops.
 Because of the motor load inertia, the motor may exceed the synchronous speed when the drive
decelerates; in this case, the motor becomes generator. If the motor load inertia is larger, or the
setting for drive’s decelerating time is too small, the motor regenerates energy to the drive, and
makes the DC bus voltage increase to the maximum allowable value. Thus, when traditional
over-voltage stall prevention is enabled, the drive does not decelerate further and maintains the
output frequency until the voltage drops below the setting value again.
 When the over-voltage stall prevention is enabled, the drive deceleration time is larger than the
setting time.
 When there is a problem with the deceleration time, this function is disabled. See below for
solution:
1. Increase the deceleration time properly.
2. Install a brake resistor (refer to Section 7-1 Brake Resistors and Brake Units Selection
Chart for details) to dissipate the heat, that is, the electrical energy regenerating from the
motor.
12.1-06-3
Smart over-voltage stall prevention

 Adopts closed-loop control and takes the setting for Pr.06-01 over-voltage stall prevention as
target command during acceleration, deceleration and constant speed. When the DC bus
voltage is higher than the stall prevention level, the controller increases the output frequency
gradually according to closed-loop response until the DC bus voltage drops below the stall
prevention level, and returns to target frequency based on the previous setting for deceleration
time when the DC bus voltage is lower than the stall prevention level. If the DC bus voltage is
still higher than the stall prevention level during the adjustment, the output frequency increases
to the maximum operation frequency (Pr.01-00).
Traditional over-current stall prevention

 When the output current exceeds the over-current stall prevention level (Pr.06-03) during
acceleration, the output frequency stops accelerating. The output frequency continues to
accelerate when the output current drops below the stall prevention level to protect the drive.
 When the output current exceeds the over-current stall prevention during operation (Pr.06-04),
the output frequency decreases according to the setting for acceleration / deceleration time
selection for over-current stall prevention at constant speed (Pr.06-05). When the output current
drops below the stall prevention level, the output frequency accelerates to the target frequency
according to its previous set acceleration time.
Smart over-current stall prevention

 Adopts closed-loop control. It takes the setting for Pr.06-03 over-current stall prevention during
acceleration as target command during acceleration and deceleration, and takes Pr.06-04
over-current stall prevention during operation as target command at constant speed. When the
output current exceeds the stall prevention level, the controller decreases the output frequency
gradually according to the closed-loop response until the current drops below the stall
prevention level, and returns to target frequency based on the previous setting when the current
is lower than the stall prevention level. If the output current is still higher than the stall prevention
level during the adjustment, the output frequency decreases to the minimum output frequency at
0.5 Hz.
12.1-06-4
 Over-current Stall Prevention during Acceleration

Default: 120
Settings 230V / 460V models
Light duty: 0–130% (100%: drive’s rated current)
Normal duty: 0–160% (100%: drive’s rated current)
575V / 690V models
 This parameter only works in VF and SVC control modes.
 If the motor load is too large or the drive’s acceleration time is too short, the output current of the
drive may be too high during acceleration, and it may cause motor damage or trigger the drive’s
protection functions (oL or oc). Use this parameter to prevent these situations.
 During acceleration, the output current of the drive may increase abruptly and exceed the
setting value of Pr.06-03. In this case, the drive stops accelerating and keeps the output
frequency constant, and then continues to accelerate until the output current decreases.
 Refer to Pr.06-16 for more details of stall level in flux weakening region. The protection curve is
as following:
12.1-06-5
 When you enable the over-current stall prevention, the drive’s acceleration time is longer than
the setting.
 When the over-current stall prevention occurs because the motor capacity is too small or
operates in the default, decrease the Pr.06-03 setting value.
 If you encounter any problem with the acceleration time, refer to the following guides for
troubleshooting:
1. Increase the acceleration time to a proper value.
2. Setting Pr.01-44 Auto-Acceleration and Auto-Deceleration Setting to 1, 3 or 4
(auto-acceleration).
 Pr.01-12, Pr.01-14, Pr.01-16, Pr.01-18 Acceleration Time 1–4
 Pr.01-44 Auto-Acceleration and Auto-Deceleration Setting
 Pr.02-13–02-15 Multi-function Output Relay1–3.
 Over-current Stall Prevention during Operation

Default: 120
Settings 230V / 460V models
575V / 690V models
 This parameter only works in VF and SVC control modes.
 This is a protection for the drive to decrease output frequency automatically when the motor
over-loads abruptly during constant motor operation.
 If the output current exceeds the setting value for Pr.06-04 when the drive is operating, the drive
decelerates according to the Pr.06-05 setting to prevent the motor from stalling. The lower limit
for the over-current stall prevention is determined by the maximum value among 0.5 Hz,
Pr.01-07 and Pr.01-11.
 If the output current is lower than the setting value for Pr.06-04, the drive accelerates (according
to Pr.06-05) again to the setting frequency.
12.1-06-6
 Acceleration / Deceleration Time Selection for Stall Prevention at Constant Speed

Default: 0
Settings 0: By current acceleration / deceleration time
1: By the first acceleration / deceleration time
2: By the second acceleration / deceleration time
3: By the third acceleration / deceleration time
4: By the fourth acceleration / deceleration time
5: By auto-acceleration / auto-deceleration
 Sets the acceleration / deceleration time selection when stall prevention occurs at constant
speed.
 Over-torque Detection Selection (OT1)

Default: 0
1: Continue operation after over-torque detection during constant speed
operation
2: Stop after over-torque detection during constant speed operation
3: Continue operation after over-torque detection during RUN
 Over-torque Detection Selection (OT2)
Default: 0
operation
 When you set Pr.06-06 and Pr.06-09 to 1 or 3, a warning message displays, but there is no error
record.
 When you set Pr.06-06 and Pr.06-09 to 2 or 4, an error message displays and there is an error
record.
12.1-06-7
 Over-torque Detection Level (OT1)

Default: 120
Settings 10–200% (100% corresponds to the light-duty rated current of the drive)
Default: 0.1
Default: 120
 Over-torque Detection Time (OT2)
Default: 0.1
 When the output current exceeds the over-torque detection level (Pr.06-07 or Pr.06-10) and
exceeds the over-torque detection time (Pr.06-08 or Pr.06-11), the over-torque detection follows
the setting of Pr.06-06 and Pr.06-09.
 When you set Pr.06-06 or Pr.06-09 to 1 or 3, an ot1 / ot2 warning displays while the drive keeps
running after over-torque detection. The warning remains on until the output current is smaller
than 5% of the over-torque detection level.
 When you set Pr.06-06 or Pr.06-09 to 2 or 4, an ot1 / ot2 warning displays and the drive stops
running after over-torque detection. The drive does not run until you manually reset it.
12.1-06-8
 Current Limit
Default: 150
Settings 0–200% (100% corresponds to the rated current of the drive)
 Sets the maximum output current of the drive. Use Pr.11-17–Pr.11-20 to set the drive’s output
current limit. When setting the control mode to PMFOC and SynRM FOC, if the output frequency
of the drive reaches this current limit, the output frequency decreases automatically. It works like
the current stall prevention.
 This parameter is invalid in VF and SVC control mode.
 Electronic Thermal Relay Selection (Motor 1)

 Electronic Thermal Relay Selection (Motor 2)
Default: 2
Settings 0: Inverter motor (with external forced cooling)
1: Standard motor (motor with fan on the shaft)
2: Disable
 Prevents self-cooled motor from overheating under low speed. Use an electronic thermal relay to
limit the drive’s output power.
 Setting the parameter to 0 is suitable for an inverter motor (motor fan using an independent
power supply). For this kind of motor, there is no significant correlation between cooling capacity
and motor speed. Therefore, the action of electronic thermal relays remains stable in low speed
to ensure the load capability of the motor in low speed.
 Setting the parameter to 1 is suitable for standard motor (motor fan is fixed on the rotor shaft). For
this kind of motor, the cooling capacity is lower in low speed; therefore, the action of electronic
thermal relay reduces the action time to ensure the life of motor.
 When the power is cycled frequently, if the power is switched OFF, the electronic thermal relay
protection is reset; therefore, even setting the parameter to 0 or 1 may not protect the motor well.
If there are several motors connected to one drive, install an electronic thermal relay in each
motor.
 Electronic Thermal Relay Action Time 1 (Motor 1)

 Electronic Thermal Relay Action Time 2 (Motor 2)
Default: 60.0
 Set the parameter to 150% of motor rated current and use with the setting of Pr.06-14 and
Pr.06-28 to prevent motor damage due to overheating. When it reaches the setting, the drive
displays “EoL1 / EoL2”, and the motor coasts to stop.
 Use this parameter to set the action time of electronic thermal relay. It works based on the I2t
characteristic curve of electronic thermal relay, the output frequency and current of the drive, and
the operation time to prevent motor from overheating.
12.1-06-9
 The action of electronic thermal relay depends on the setting for Pr.06-13 and Pr.06-27.
1. Pr.06-13 or Pr.06-27 is set to 0 (using inverter motor)：
When the output current of motor drive is higher than 150% of the motor rated current (refer to
the motor rated current % corresponded to the motor rated frequency in the motor cooling
curve with independent fan), motor drive starts to count the time. The electronic thermal relay
acts when the accumulated time exceeds Pr.06-14 or 06-28.
2. Pr.06-13 or Pr.06-27 is set to 1 (using standard motor)：
When the output current of the drive is higher than 150% of the motor rated current (refer to
the motor rated current % corresponded to the motor rated frequency in the motor cooling
curve with shaft-fixed fan), the drive starts to count the time. The electronic thermal relay acts
when the accumulated time exceeds Pr.06-14 or 06-28
3. If the motor’s rated current (Pr.05-01) is not set, set 90% of the drive’s rated current (Pr.00-01)
as the default for this parameter.
 The actual electronic thermal relay action time adjusts according to the drive output current
(shown as the motor loading rate %). The action time is short when the current is high, and the
action time is long when the current is low. Refer to following diagram: (The motor cooling curve
with shaft-fixed fan and motor cooling curve with independent fan F = 50 Hz are the same one.)
 Temperature Level Overheat (oH) Warning

Default: 105.0
Settings 0.0–110.0°C
 If Pr.06-15 is set to 110°C, when the temperature reaches 110°C, the drive stops with an IGBT
overheat fault.
12.1-06-10
 For Frame C and above, when IGBT temperature is above Pr.06-15 minus 15°C, the cooling fan
enhances performance to 100%; however, when IGBT temperature is below 35°C of Pr.06-15
and the temperature of capacitance is below 10°C of oH2 over-heat warning (Pr.06-51), the
cooling fan resets. The temperature 35°C is the criterion if Pr.06-15 is set below to 35°C.
 Stall Prevention Limit Level (Weak Magnetic Area Current Stall Prevention Level)
Default: 50
Settings 0–100% (Refer to Pr.06-03)
 Sets the over-current stall prevention level when the motor’s operation frequency is larger than
Pr.01-01 (base frequency). This parameter only works during acceleration.
 Example: Pr.06-03 = 150%, Pr.06-04 = 100% and Pr.06-16 = 80%, when the operation frequency
is larger than Pr.01-01, the lowest over-current stall prevention level during acceleration is:
Pr.06-03 × Pr.06-16 = 150 × 80% = 120%. (Refer to Pr.06-03 diagram for the protection curve)
 Pr.06-16 is invalid when the over-current stall prevention activates according to Pr.06-04 at
constant speed.
Fault Record 1
Fault Record 2
Fault Record 3
Fault Record 4
Fault Record 5
Fault Record 6
Settings
0: No fault record
1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA)
2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd)
3: Over-current during steady speed (ocn)
4: Ground fault (GFF)
5: IGBT short-circuit between upper bridge and lower bridge (occ)
6: Over-current at stop (ocS)
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA)
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd)
9: Over-voltage at constant speed (ovn)
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA)
12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd)
13: Low-voltage at constant speed (Lvn)
14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS)
15: Phase loss protection (OrP)
16: IGBT overheating (oH1)
17: Heatsink overheating (oH2)
18: IGBT temperature detection failure (tH1o)
12.1-06-11
19: Capacitor hardware error (tH2o)

21: Over load (oL)
24: Motor overheating (oH3) (PTC / PT100)
28: Under current (uC)
30: EEPROM write error (cF1)
31: EEPROM read error (cF2)
33: U-phase error (cd1)
34: V-phase error (cd2)
35: W-phase error (cd3)
36: cc (current clamp) hardware error (Hd0)
37: oc (over-current) hardware error (Hd1)
38: ov (over-voltage) hardware error (Hd2)
39: occ hardware error (Hd3)
40: Auto-tuning error (AUE)
41: PID loss ACI (AFE)
48: ACI loss (ACE)
49: External fault (EF)
51: External base block (bb)
52: Enter wrong password three times and locked (Pcod)
53: Firmware version error (ccod)
54: Illegal command (CE1)
55: Illegal data address (CE2)
56: Illegal data value (CE3)
57: Data is written to read-only address (CE4)
58: Modbus transmission time-out (CE10)
60: Brake transistor error (bF)
61: Y-connection / ∆-connection switch error (ydc)
62: Deceleration energy backup error (dEb)
63: Over slip error (oSL)
64: Electric valve switch error (ryF)
68: Reverse direction of the speed feedback (SdRv)
69: Over speed rotation feedback (SdOr)
70: Large deviation of speed feedback (SdDe)
71: Watchdog (WDTT)
73: Emergency stop for external safety (S1)
74: FIRE mode output (Fire)
12.1-06-12
76: Safety Torque Off (STO)

82: Output phase loss U phase (OPHL)
83: Output phase loss V phase (OPHL)
84: Output phase loss W phase (OPHL)
89: Rotor position detection error (RoPd)
90: Forced to stop (FStp)
101: CANopen guarding error (CGdE)
102: CANopen heartbeat error (CHbE)
104: CANopen bus off error (CbFE)
105: CANopen index error (CidE)
106: CANopen station address error (CAdE)
107: CANopen memory error (CFrE)
111: InrCOM time-out error (ictE)
142: Auto-tuning error 1 (no feedback current error) (AUE1)
143: Auto-tuning error 2 (motor phase loss error) (AUE2)
144: Auto-tuning error 3 (no-load current I0 measuring error) (AUE3)
148: Auto-tuning error (leakage inductance Lsigma measuring error) (AUE4)
 The parameters record when the fault occurs and forces a stop.
 When low-voltage at stop fault (LvS) occurs, the fault is not recorded. When low-voltage during
operation faults (LvA, Lvd, Lvn) occur, the faults are recorded.
 When dEb function is valid and enabled, the drive executes dEb and records fault code 62 to
Pr.06-17–Pr.06-22 simultaneously.
 Fault Output Option 1

Default: 0
Settings 0–65535 (Refer to bit table for fault code)
 Use these parameters with multi-function output terminal (set Pr.06-23–Pr.06-26 to 35–38) for the
specific requirement. When the fault occurs, the corresponding terminals are activated. Convert
the binary value to decimal value before you enter the value for Pr.06-23–Pr.06-26).
bit0 bit1 bit2 bit3 bit4 bit5 bit6

Fault Code
current Volt. OL SYS FBK EXI CE
0: No fault
1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA) ●
2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd) ●
3: Over-current during steady speed (ocn) ●
4: Ground fault (GFF) ●
12.1-06-13

Fault Code
5: IGBT short-circuit between upper bridge and
●
lower bridge (occ)
6: Over-current at stop (ocS) ●
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA) ●
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd) ●
9: Over-voltage at constant speed (ovn) ●
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS) ●
11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA) ●
12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd) ●
13: Low-voltage at constant speed (Lvn) ●
14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS ) ●
15: Phase loss protection (OrP) ●
16: IGBT overheating (oH1) ●
17: Heatsink overheating (oH2) ●
18: IGBT temperature detection failure (tH1o) ●
19: Capacitor hardware error (tH2o) ●
21: Over load (oL) ●
22: Electronic thermal relay 1 protection (EoL1) ●
23: Electronic thermal relay 2 protection (EoL2) ●
24: Motor overheating (oH3) (PTC / PT100) ●
26: Over torque 1 (ot1) ●
27: Over torque 2 (ot2) ●
28: Under current (uC) ●
30: EEPROM write error (cF1) ●
31: EEPROM read error (cF2) ●
33: U-phase error (cd1) ●
34: V-phase error (cd2) ●
35: W-phase error (cd3) ●
36: cc (current clamp) hardware error (Hd0) ●
37: oc (over-current) hardware error (Hd1) ●
38: ov (over-voltage) hardware error (Hd2) ●
39: occ hardware error (Hd3) ●
40: Auto-tuning error (AUE) ●
41: PID loss ACI (AFE) ●
48: ACI loss (ACE) ●
49: External fault (EF) ●
50: Emergency stop (EF1) ●
51: External base block (bb) ●
52: Enter wrong password three times and
●
locked (Pcod)
53: Firmware version error (ccod) ●
12.1-06-14

Fault Code
54: Illegal command (CE1) ●
55: Illegal data address (CE2) ●
56: Illegal data value (CE3) ●
57: Data is written to read-only address (CE4) ●
58: Modbus transmission time-out (CE10) ●
60: Brake transistor error (bF) ●
61: Y-connection/∆-connection switch error (ydc) ●
62: Deceleration energy backup error (dEb) ●
63: Over slip error (oSL) ●
64: Electric valve switch error (ryF) ●
68: Reverse direction of the speed feedback
●
(SdRv)
69: Over speed rotation feedback (SdOr) ●
70: Large deviation of speed feedback (SdDe) ●
71: Watchdog (WDTT) ●
72: STO loss 1 (STL1) ●
73: Emergency stop for external safety (S1) ●
74: FIRE mode output (Fire) ●
76: Safety Torque Off (STO) ●
82: Output phase loss U phase (OPHL) ●
83: Output phase loss V phase (OPHL) ●
84: Output phase loss W phase (OPHL) ●
89: Rotor position detection error (RoPd) ●
90: Forced to stop (FStp) ●
101: CANopen guarding error (CGdE) ●
102: CANopen heartbeat error (CHbE) ●
104: CANopen bus off error (CbFE) ●
105: CANopen index error (CIdE) ●
106: CANopen station address error (CAdE) ●
107: CANopen memory error (CFrE) ●
111: InrCOM time-out error (ictE) ●
142: Auto-tuning error 1 (no feedback current
●
error) (AUE1)
143: Auto-tuning error 2 (motor phase loss error)
●
(AUE2)
144: Auto-tuning error 3 (no-load current I0
●
measuring error) (AUE3)
148: Auto-tuning error 4 (leakage inductance
●
Lsigma measuring error) (AUE4)
12.1-06-15
 PTC Detection Selection / PT100 Motion

Default: 0
Settings 0: Warn and continue operation
3: No warning
 Sets the operation mode of a drive after detecting PTC / PT100 / KTY84 detection.
 PTC Level
Default: 50.0
 Sets AVI1 / ACI / AVI2 analog input function Pr.03-00–03-02 to 6 [Thermistor (PTC) input value].
 Use this to set the PTC level, the corresponding value for 100% is the analog input maximum
value.
Frequency Command at Malfunction

Default: Read only
 When a malfunction occurs, check the current frequency command. If it happens again, it
overwrites the previous record.
Output Frequency at Malfunction

Default: Read only
 When a malfunction occurs, check the current output frequency. If it happens again, it overwrites
the previous record.
Output Voltage at Malfunction

Default: Read only
 When a malfunction occurs, check the current output voltage. If it happens again, it overwrites the
previous record.
DC bus Voltage at Malfunction

Default: Read only
 When a malfunction occurs, check the current DC bus voltage. If it happens again, it overwrites
the previous record.
Output Current at Malfunction

Default: Read only
Settings 0.0–6553.5 Amp
 When a malfunction occurs, check the current output current. If it happens again, it overwrites the
previous record.
12.1-06-16
IGBT Temperature at Malfunction

Default: Read only
Settings -3276.7–3276.7°C
 When a malfunction occurs, check the current IGBT temperature. If it happens again, it
Capacitance Temperature at Malfunction

Default: Read only
Settings -3276.7–3276.7°C
 When a malfunction occurs, check the current capacitance temperature. If it happens again, it
Motor Speed in rpm at Malfunction

Default: Read only
Settings -32767–32767 rpm
 When a malfunction occurs, check the current motor speed in rpm. If it happens again, it
Status of Multi-function Input Terminal at Malfunction

Default: Read only
Settings 0000h–FFFFh
Status of Multi-function Output Terminal at Malfunction
Default: Read only
 When a malfunction occurs, check the current status of multi-function input / output terminals. If it
happens again, it overwrites the previous record.
Drive Status at Malfunction

Default: Read only
 When a malfunction occurs, check the current drive status (communication address 2101H). If it
happens again, it overwrites the previous record.
 STO Latch Selection

Default: 0
Settings 0: STO Latch
1: STO No latch
 Pr.06-44 = 0: STO Alarm Latch. After you clear the cause of the STO Alarm, use a Reset
command to clear the STO Alarm.
 Pr.06-44 = 1: STO Alarm no Latch. After you clear the cause of the STO Alarm, the STO Alarm
clears automatically.
 All of STL1–STL3 errors are “Alarm Latch” mode (in STL1–STL3 mode, the Pr.06-44 function is
not available).
12.1-06-17
 Output Phase Loss Detection Action (OPHL)

Default: 3
3: No warning
 The OPHL protection is enabled when Pr.06-45 is not set to 3.
 Detection Time of Output Phase Loss

Default: 0.500
 Current Detection Level for Output Phase Loss
Default: 1.00
Settings 0.00–100.00%
 DC Brake Time of Output Phase Loss
Default: 0.000
 There are two situations for the output phase loss detection: “detect when the drive is in
operation” and “detect before operation”. Setting Pr.06-48 to 0 disables the OPHL detection
function before operation.
 The status of output phase loss detection are as following:
 Status 1: The drive is in operation
When any phase is less than the Pr.06-47 setting, and exceeds Pr.06-46 setting time, the
drive executes according to the Pr.06-45 setting.
12.1-06-18
 Status 2: The drive is in STOP; Pr.06-48 = 0 ; Pr.07-02 ≠ 0

After the drive starts, the DC brake operates according to Pr.07-01 and Pr.07-02. During
this period, OPHL detection is not active. After the DC brake action is completed, the drive
starts to run, and enables the OPHL protection as mentioned above for status 1.
 Status 3: The drive is in STOP; Pr.06-48≠0 ; Pr.07-02≠0

When the drive starts, it executes Pr.06-48 first, and then executes Pr.07-02 (DC brake).
The DC brake current level in this state includes two parts: one is 20 times the Pr.06-47
setting value in Pr.06-48 setting time; the other is the Pr.07-02 setting value in Pr.07-01
setting time. The total DC brake time is T = Pr.06-48 + Pr.07-02.
Status 3-1: Pr.06-48 ≠ 0, Pr.07-02 ≠ 0 (No OPHL detected before operation)
12.1-06-19
Status 3-2: Pr.06-48 ≠ 0, Pr.07-20 ≠ 0 (OPHL detected before operation)

In this period, if an OPHL occurs within the time for Pr.06-48, the drive executes the
Pr.06-45 setting after the drive starts counting for half the time of Pr.06-48.
 Status 4: The drive is in STOP; Pr.06-48 ≠ 0 ; Pr.07-02 = 0

When the drive starts, it executes Pr.06-48 as the DC brake. The DC brake current level is
20 times the Pr.06-47 setting value.
Status 4-1: Pr.06-48 ≠ 0, Pr.07-02 = 0 (No OPHL detected before operation)
12.1-06-20
Status 4-2: Pr.06-48 ≠ 0, Pr.07-02 = 0 (OPHL detected before operation)
In this period, if an OPHL occurs within the time for Pr.06-48, the drive executes the
Pr.06-45 setting after the drive starts counting for half the time of Pr.06-48.
 LvX Auto-Reset
Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Enable
 Time for Input Phase Loss Detection
Default: 0.20
 Sets the time for input phase loss detection; setting 0.20 seconds means to check every 0.20 sec.
 Ripple of Input Phase Loss

Default:
30.0/ 60.0/ 75.0/ 90.0
Settings 230V models: 0.0–100.0 VDC
460V models: 0.0–200.0 VDC
575V models: 0.0–400.0 VDC
690V models: 0.0–480.0 VDC
 When the drive detects the DC bus ripple is higher than the setting for Pr.06-52, and lasts for the
time of Pr.06-50 plus 30 seconds, the drive executes the input phase loss protection according to
Pr.06-53.
 In the period of Pr.06-50 setting plus 30 seconds, if the DC bus ripple is lower than the setting for
Pr.06-52, the OrP protection recalculates.
12.1-06-21
 Input Phase Loss Detection Action (OrP)

Default: 0
Settings 0: Fault and ramp to stop
 When the DC bus ripple voltage lasts for Pr.06-50 ripple time, the drive activates the Input Phase
Loss protection according to the Pr.06-53 settings:
 DC bus ripple frequency ≤ 166 Hz
 The amplitude is higher than Pr.06-52 setting [default 30 V (230V models), 60 V (460V
models)]. It starts to count time after 20 consecutive times.
 When the counting lasts for the following time conditions, an ORP occurs.
(I)% is rated current percentage
(I)% Actual seconds
50 432
75 225
120 60
 When any of the above conditions is not met, the ORP protection recalculates.
 Derating Protection
Default: 0
Settings 0: Auto-decrease carrier frequency and limit output current
1: Constant carrier frequency and limit output current
2:Auto-decrease carrier frequency
 Refer to Pr.00-01 (Maximum Operation Frequency) for allowable maximum output frequency in
each control mode.
 The corresponded carrier frequency lower limit under each control mode:
 VF, SVC: 599 Hz, 6K
 FOC sensorless (IM): 300 Hz, 6K
 FOC sensorless (PM): 500 Hz, 10K
 Refer to the Section 9-7 Derating for Ambient Temperature, Altitude and Carrier Frequency for
the derating ratio.
 Setting 0:
 Actual over-current stall prevention level = derating ratio × over-current stall prevention level
(Pr.06-03 and Pr.06-04).
 Rated current derating level: derating ratio × rated current (Pr.00-01).
 When the operating point is greater than the derating curve, the carrier frequency (Fc)
output by the drive decreases automatically according to the ambient temperature, overload
output current and time.
 Applicable conditions: If overloads are not frequent, and the concern is only about the carrier
frequency operating with the rated current for a long time, and changes to the carrier wave
due to short overload are acceptable, set to 0.
 Take VFD007CP43A Normal Duty for example: ambient temperature 50°C, UL Open Type,
and independent installation. When the carrier frequency is set to 15 kHz, it corresponds to
12.1-06-22
72% of the derating ratio. When the output current is higher than the value, it automatically
decreases the carrier frequency according to the ambient temperature, output current and
overload time (for example: set Pr.06-03 to 200%). At this time, the over-current stall
prevention level is 144% ( = 72% × 200%) of the rated current (Pr.00-01).
 Setting 1:
 When the operating point is greater than the derating curve 1, the carrier frequency (Fc)
output by the drive is fixed to the default value.
 Applicable conditions: Select this mode if the change of carrier frequency and motor noise
caused by ambient temperature and frequent overload are not acceptable. Refer to
Pr.00-17.
 Take VFD007CP43A Normal Duty for example: ambient temperature 50°C, UL Open Type,
and independent installation. When the carrier frequency maintains at 15 kHz, it
corresponds to 72% of the derating ratio. The oL protection executes when the current is
120% × 72% = 86% for one minute; therefore, it must operate by the curve to keep the
carrier frequency.
 Setting 2:
 The protection method and action are set to 0, but this disables the current limit when output
current is the derating ratio x 160% of output current in normal load, and derating ratio x
130% of output current in light load.
 The advantage is that it can provide a higher starting output current (Pr.06-55 = 0) when the
carrier frequency (Pr.00-17) setting is higher than the default value. The disadvantage is that
the carrier frequency derates easily when it overloads.
For example: when Pr.06-55 = 0 or 1, the over-current stall prevention level = Ratio ×
Pr.06-03. When Pr.06-55 = 2, the over-current stall prevention level = Pr.06-03.
 Use with the settings for Pr.00-16 and Pr.00-17.
 PT100 Voltage Level 1

Default: 5.000
Settings 0.000–10.000 V
 PT100 Voltage Level 2
Default: 7.000
Settings 0.000–10.000 V
 Condition settings: PT100 voltage level Pr.06-57 > Pr.06-56.
 PT100 Level 1 Frequency Protection

Default: 0.00
 PT100 Activation Level 1 Protection Frequency Delay Time
Default: 60
Settings 0–6000 sec.
 PT100 operation instructions:
(1) Use voltage type analog input (AVI1, AVI2 and ACI voltage 0–10 V) and select PT100 mode.
(2) Select one of the voltage type analog inputs below:
12.1-06-23
(a) AVI1 (Pr.03-00 = 11)

(b) AVI2 (Pr.03-02 = 11)
(c) ACI (Pr.03-01 = 11 and Pr.03-29 = 1).
(3) When selecting Pr.03-01 = 11 and Pr.03-29 = 1, you must switch SW4 to 0–10 V for the
external I/O board.
(4) The AFM2 outputs constant voltage or current, then Pr.03-23 = 23. You must switch AFM2
SW2 to 0–20 mA for the external I/O board, and set AFM2 output level to 45% (Pr.03-33 =
45%) of 20 mA = 9 mA.
(5) Use Pr.03-33 to adjust the constant voltage or constant current of the AFM2 output; the
setting range is 0–100.00%.
(6) There are two types of action levels for PT100. The diagram below shows the PT100
protecting action:
(7) PT100 wiring diagram:
Figure 1
12.1-06-24
 When Pr.06-58 = 0.00 Hz, PT100 function is disabled.

Case:
When using PT100, if the motor temperature is higher than 135°C (275°F), the drive starts to
count the delay time for auto-deceleration (Pr.06-59). The drive decreases the motor frequency to
the setting for Pr.06-58 when it reaches the delay time count value. The drive operates at the
frequency set for Pr.06-58 until the motor temperature is lower than 135°C (275°F). If the motor
temperature is higher than 150°C (302°F), the drive automatically decelerates to STOP and
displays the warning “oH3”.
Set up process:
1. Switch AFM2 to 0–20 mA on the I/O control terminal block. (Refer to Figure 1, PT100 wiring
diagram)
2. Wiring (Refer to Figure 1, PT100 wiring diagram):
Connect external terminal AFM2 to “+”
Connect external terminal ACM to “-“
Connect external terminals AFM2 and AVI1 to “short circuit”
3. Set Pr.03-00 = 11 or Pr.03-23 = 23 or Pr.03-33 = 45% (9 mA).
4. Refer to the RTD temperature and resistance comparison table
Temperature = 135°C, resistance = 151.71 ; input current: 9 mA, voltage: about 1.37 VDC
Temperature = 150°C, resistance = 157.33 ; input current: 9 mA, voltage: about 1.42 VDC
5. When the RTD temperature > 135°C, the drive decelerates to the specified operation
frequency automatically. Then, Pr.06-56 = 1.37 V and Pr.06-58 = 10 Hz. (When Pr.06-58 = 0,
it disables the specified operation frequency.)
6. When the RTD temperature > 150°C, the drive outputs a fault, decelerates to STOP, and
displays the warning ”oH3”. Then, Pr.06-57 = 1.42 V and Pr.06-29 = 1 (fault and ramp to
stop).
 Software Detection GFF Current Level

Default: 60.0
Settings 0.0–6553.5% (100% corresponds to the light-load rated current of the drive)
 Software Detection GFF Filter Time
Default: 0.10
 When the drive detects that the unbalanced three-phase output current is higher than the setting
for Pr.06-60, GFF protection activates. The drive then stops output.
Operation Time of Fault Record 1 (Day)

Default: Read only
Settings 0–65535 days
12.1-06-25
Operation Time of Fault Record 1 (Min)

Default: Read only
Settings 0–1439 min.
 If there is any malfunctions when the drive operates, Pr.06-17–Pr.06-22 record the malfunctions,
and Pr.06-63–Pr.06-70 record the operation time for four sequential malfunctions. Check if there
is any problem with the drive according to the interval of the recorded fault.
Example:
The first error: ocA occurs after motor drive operates for 1000 minutes.
The second error: ocd occurs after another 1000 minutes.
The third error: ocn occurs after another 1000 minutes.
The fourth error: ocA occurs after another 1000 minutes.
The fifth error: ocd occurs after another 1000 minutes.
The sixth error: ocn occurs after 1000 minutes.
Then Pr.06-17–Pr.06-22 and Pr.06-63–Pr.06-70 are recorded as follows:

1st fault 2nd fault 3rd fault 4th fault 5th fault 6th fault
Pr.06-17 ocA ocd ocn ocA ocd ocn
Pr.06-18 0 ocA ocd ocn ocA ocd
Pr.06-19 0 0 ocA ocd ocn ocA
Pr.06-20 0 0 0 ocA ocd ocn
Pr.06-21 0 0 0 0 ocA ocd
Pr.06-22 0 0 0 0 0 ocA
Pr.06-63 0 1 2 2 3 4
Pr.06-64 1000 560 120 1120 680 240
Pr.06-65 0 0 1 2 2 3
Pr.06-66 0 1000 560 120 1120 680
Pr.06-67 0 0 0 1 2 2
Pr.06-68 0 0 1000 560 120 1120
Pr.06-69 0 0 0 0 1 2
Pr.06-70 0 0 0 1000 560 120
※ By examining the time record, you can see that the last fault (Pr.06-17) happened after the
drive ran for 4 days and 240 minutes.
 Low Current Setting Level

Default: 0.0
Settings 0.0–100.0% (100% corresponds to the light-load rated current of the drive)
 Low Current Detection Time
Default: 0.00
12.1-06-26
 Low Current Action

Default: 0
2: Fault and ramp to stop by the 2nd deceleration time
3: Warn and operation continue
 The drive operates according to the setting for Pr.06-73 when the output current is lower than
the setting for Pr.06-71, and when the time of the low current exceeds the detection time for
Pr.06-72. Use this parameter with the multi-function output terminal = 44 (low current output).
 The low current detection function does not execute when the drive is in sleep or standby status.
 Sets Pr.06-71 low current level according to the drive’s rated current, the equation is Pr.00-01
(drive’s rated current) × Pr.06-71 (low current setting level)% = low current detection level (A).
The drive changes the setting for Pr.00-01 (rated current) according to the setting for Pr.00-16
(load selection).
 dEb Motion Offset

Default:
20.0/ 40.0/ 50.0/ 60.0
460V models: 0.0–200.0 VDC
575V models: 0.0–200.0 VDC
690V models: 0.0–200.0 VDC
Fire Mode
Default: 0.00
Settings 0: Disable
1: Forward (counter clockwise) operation
2: Reverse (clockwise) operation
 Use this parameter with multi-function input terminal setting 58 or 59, and multi-function output
terminal setting 53 or 54.
0: Fire detection is invalid.
1: The motor operates in a counterclockwise direction (U, V, W).
2: The motor operates in a clockwise direction (U, W, V).
 Operating Frequency in Fire Mode

Default: 60.00
 Enables fire mode (Pr.06-80 = 1 or 2) and sets the operation frequency in fire mode (Pr.06-81).
The drive operates with operation frequency in fire mode when the fire mode is enabled. Refer to
Pr.06-86 Fire mode operating sequence for details.
12.1-06-27
 Enable Bypass on Fire Mode

Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable Bypass
1: Enable Bypass
 The Bypass function only enables in Fire mode.
 When the Bypass function enables and the fault listed in Table 1 occurs, the drive automatically
switches to mains power for the motor’s operation.
 Bypass Delay Time on Fire Mode

Default: 0.0
 Conditions to enable the Bypass function (Pr.06-82 = 1):
(1) When a fault that can enable the Bypass function (as shown in Table 1) occurs in Fire mode,
and the fire alarm lasts for Pr.06-83 setting time, the Bypass function enables and the
Bypass fire mode indication (MOx = 54) is ON.
(2) When a fault that can be reset (as shown in Table 1) occurs in Fire mode, the automatic
reset time is zero, and the fire alarm lasts for Pr.06-83 setting time, then the Bypass function
enables and the Bypass fire mode indication (MOx = 54) is ON. If the fault is successfully
reset (no fault) before the Bypass function enabled, the counter of bypass delay time returns
to zero and waits for the next trigger.
Table 1: Fault detection under Normal mode, Fire mode and Bypass function in Fire mode.
(V means detectable)
Normal Enable bypass

Code Fault name Fire Mode
mode function
1 Over-current during acceleration (ocA) V(RS) V(able to auto-reset) V
2 Over-current during deceleration (ocd) V(RS) V(able to auto-reset) V
3 Over-current during steady speed (ocn) V(RS) V(able to auto-reset) V
4 Ground Fault (GFF) V V(able to auto-reset) V
IGBT short-circuit between upper bridge
5 V(RS) V(able to auto-reset) V
and lower bridge (occ)
6 Over-current at stop (ocS) V(RS) V(able to auto-reset) V
7 Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA) V(RS) V(able to auto-reset) V
8 Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd) V(RS) V(able to auto-reset) V
9 Over-voltage at constant speed (ovn) V(RS) V(able to auto-reset) V
12.1-06-28

mode function
10 Over-voltage at stop (ovS) V(RS) V(able to auto-reset) V
11 Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
12 Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
13 Low-voltage at constant speed (Lvn) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
14 Low-voltage at Stop (LvS) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
15 Phase loss protection (OrP) V V(able to auto-reset) V
16 IGBT overheating (oH1) V V(able to auto-reset) V
17 Heatsink overheating (oH2) V V(able to auto-reset) V
18 IGBT temperature detection failure (tH1o) V V(able to auto-reset) V
19 Capacitor hardware error (tH2o) V V(able to auto-reset) V
21 Over load (oL) (150% 1Min, Inverter) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
Electronic thermal relay 1 protection
22 V Not-detectable Not-detectable
(EoL1)
(EoL2)
24 Motor overheating (oH3) (PTC / PT100) V V(able to auto-reset) V
26 Over torque 1 (ot1) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
27 Over torque 2 (ot2) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
28 Under current (uC) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
30 EEPROM write error (cF1) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
31 EEPROM read error (cF2) V V Not-detectable
33 U-phase error (cd1) V V Not-detectable
34 V-phase error (cd2) V V Not-detectable
35 W-phase error (cd3) V V Not-detectable
36 cc (current clamp) hardware error (Hd0) V V Not-detectable
37 oc (over-current) hardware error (Hd1) V V Not-detectable
38 ov (over-voltage) hardware error (Hd2) V V Not-detectable
39 occ hardware error (Hd3) V V Not-detectable
40 Auto-tuning error (AUE) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
41 PID loss ACI (AFE) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
48 ACI loss (ACE) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
49 External fault (EF) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
50 Emergency stop (EF1) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
51 External base block (bb) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
Enter wrong password three times and
locked (Pcod)
53 Firmware version error (ccod) V V Not-detectable
54 Illegal command (CE1) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
55 Illegal data address (CE2) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
56 Illegal data value (CE3) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
57 Data is written to read-only address (CE4) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
58 Modbus transmission time-out (CE10) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
60 Braking transistor error (bF) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
Y-connection / ᇞ-connection switch error
(ydc)
62 Deceleration energy backup error (dEb) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
63 Over slip error (oSL) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
12.1-06-29

mode function
64 Electric valve switch error (ryF) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
Reverse direction of the speed feedback
(SdRv)
69 Over speed rotation feedback (SdOr) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
70 Large deviation of speed feedback (SdDe) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
Not
71 Watchdog (WDTT) Not-detectable Not-detectable
detectable
72 STO loss 1 (STL1) V V Not-detectable
73 Emergency stop for external safety (S1) V V Not-detectable
V (keeps
74 Fire mode output (Fire) V V (keeps operating)
operating)
76 Safety Torque Off (STO) V V Not-detectable
82 Output phase loss U-phase (OPHL) V V(able to auto-reset) V
83 Output phase loss V-phase (OPHL) V V(able to auto-reset) V
84 Output phase loss W-phase (OPHL) V V(able to auto-reset) V
89 Rotor position detection error (RoPd) V V V
90 Forced to stop (FStp) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
101 CANopen guarding error (CGdE) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
102 CANopen heartbeat error (CHbE) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
104 CANopen bus off error (CbFE) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
105 CANopen index error (CidE) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
106 CANopen station address error (CAdE) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
107 CANopen memory error (CFrE) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
111 InrCOM time-out error (ictE) V Not-detectable Not-detectable
Auto-tuning error 1 (no feedback current Not
142 Not-detectable Not-detectable
error) (AUE1) detectable
Auto-tuning error 2 (motor phase loss Not
error) (AUE2) detectable
Auto-tuning error 3 (no-load current I0 Not
measuring error) (AUE3) detectable
Auto-tuning error 4 (leakage inductance Not
Lsigma measuring error) (AUE4) detectable
 Number of Times of Reset in Fire Mode

Default: 0
Settings 0–10
 When a fault occurs in fire mode, the drive attempts resetting the fault to prevent entering bypass
mode. Use Pr.06-84 and Pr.06-85 to set this function.
 When this function is disabled (Pr.06-84 = 0) and a fault that listed in Table 1 occurs, the drive
enters bypass mode (Pr.06-82 = 1, bypass function is enabled).
Example: If Pr.06-83 = 3, the drive attempts to reset the fault for three times at most. When the
fourth fault occurs in the setting time for Pr.06-85, the drive will no longer attempt to reset the
fault, and directly goes into Bypass mode after the setting delay time for Pr.06-83.
12.1-06-30
 Length of Time of Reset in Fire Mode

Default: 60.0
 The settings for Pr.06-82 to Pr.06-85 determine whether to switch the motor operation to mains
power in fire mode.
Fire Mode Motion

Default: 0
Settings bit0: 0 = Open Loop; 1 = Close Loop (PID control)
bit1: 0 = Manual reset fire mode; 1 = Auto reset fire mode
0: Open loop control and manual reset fire mode
1: Close loop control and manual reset fire mode
2: Open loop control and auto reset fire mode
3: Close loop control and auto reset fire mode
 The sequence of Fire mode operation is as the diagram below. Choose the operation mode
[open-loop control or close-loop control (PID control)] according to the setting for Pr.06-86.
 The Fire mode operating procedure:

 Pr.06-86 bit0 = 0:
When setting Pr.06-80 = 1 or 2, and the multi-functional input terminals MIx = 58 is ON, the
drive enables the fire mode operation. The drive accelerates to the setting frequency for
Pr.06-81, and the keypad KPC-CC01 displays a “Fire” warning. The drive outputs a RUN
command for the fire mode when the multi-function output terminal MOx is set to 53. If you
set Pr.06-82 = 1 to enable the Bypass function and the condition is established, the MOx =
54 Bypass fire mode indicates action and switches the motor power to the mains power,
then the drive stops.
12.1-06-31
 Pr.06-86 bit0 = 1:
When setting the Pr.06-80 = 1 or 2, and the multi-functional input terminals MIx = 58 is ON,
the drive enables the fire mode operation. The drive runs PID control with Pr.06-87 as PID
set point, and the keypad KPC-CC01 displays a “Fire” warning. The drive outputs a RUN
command for the fire mode when the multi-function output terminal MOx is set to 53. If you
set Pr.06-82 = 1 to enable the Bypass function and the condition is established, the MOx =
54 Bypass fire mode indicates action and switches the motor power to the mains power,
then the drive stops.
 If an error occurs to the PID feedback signal, the drive switches to the open-loop control and
runs according to the setting frequency for Pr.06-81.
 Fire Mode PID Set Point

Default: 0.00
Settings 0.00–100.00%
 Sets the PID target value in Fire mode.
The Fire mode reset procedure:

When the terminal MIx = 58 changes from ON to OFF, the drive starts to run “fire mode reset
procedure”, and determines whether to “Manual reset” or “Auto reset” fire mode according to the
selection of Pr.06-86 bit1.
12.1-06-32
Wiring Diagram:
1. When AC power is ON, RB1 and RC1 are ON, and RA1 and RC1 are OFF.
2. When operating in fire mode and bypass indication function is disabled, RB1 and RC1 are ON, and
the motor is driven by the drive.
3. When operating in fire mode and bypass indication function is enabled, RA1 and RC1 are ON, and
the motor runs under mains electricity.
 When in fire mode, the running direction of the drive is based on Pr.06-80 = 1 (Forward / Counter
clockwise operation) or Pr.06-80 = 2 (Reverse / Clockwise operation). Other running direction
commands are invalid and Pr.00-23 Motor Operating Direction is not available when in fire mode.
 When in fire mode, all keypad command are ignored, including RUN, STOP, JOG and direction
commands.
 When in fire mode, all RS-485 communication commands are ignored, including RUN, STOP,
JOG and direction commands.
 When in fire mode, B.B. and EF are not activated, including external terminal B.B,
communication B.B, external terminal EF, communication EF and external terminal EF1). Any
activated B.B. is automatically invalid, including external terminal B.B. and communication B.B.,
and the drive executes speed tracking.
 When in fire mode, activated EF and EF1 are automatically invalid, including external terminals
EF & EF1 and communication EF).
 When in fire mode, the JOG command is not available (JOG command source: keypad, external
terminals and communications). Any operating JOG command is automatically invalid.
 When in fire mode, the Acceleration / Deceleration Speed Inhibit function is not available. Any
activated acceleration / deceleration speed inhibition is automatically invalid.
 When in fire mode, If you set Pr.06-86 to bit0 = 0 (open-loop control), the drive does not execute
parameter group 08 PID function. Any operating PID function is automatically invalid.
 When in fire mode, the Hand-Off-Auto function is not available, including multi-function output
terminals.
12.1-06-33
 When in fire mode, the drive does not execute the circulative control function, and all circulating
control function parameters are cleared. The circulative control function is automatically invalid
when in fire mode.
 When in fire mode, the drive does not execute the sleep function.
 When in fire mode, the drive does not execute the DC brake function. Any operating DC brake is
automatically invalid when in fire mode.
 When in fire mode, the drive does not execute over-current stall prevention function. Any
operating over-current stall prevention is automatically invalid when in fire mode.
 When in fire mode, over-torque detection function is not available.
 When in fire mode, oL1/oL2 detection function is not available.
 When in fire mode, abnormal communication (CE10, CE1, CE2, CE3 and CE4) detection is not
available.
 The cd1, cd2, cd3 and Hd0, Hd1, Hd2, Hd3 are boot check and cannot be cleared. The above
errors cannot be cleared when in fire mode. The drive does not operate when in fire mode.
 Lv protection is not activated when in fire mode, so the drive keeps running or runs until the
power is lost. If the Lv error occurs before the fire mode warning, clear the Lv error to operate the
drive.
 If bypass fire mode indication (MOx = 54) is activated, reboot the drive and deactivate the fire
mode to turn off this terminal output.
 When in fire mode, the output stop function is not available.
 When in fire mode, the skip frequency function is not available.
 When in fire mode, the operating frequency for Pr.06-81 cannot be larger than Pr.01-00
Maximum Output Frequency. If Pr.06-81 > Pr.01-00, the maximum frequency is automatically set
to Pr.01-00.
12.1-06-34
07 Special Parameters  You can set this parameter during operation.
The following are abbreviations for different types of motors:

 IM: Induction motor  SPM: Surface permanent magnet
synchronous AC motor
 PM: Permanent magnet synchronous AC  SynRM: Synchronous reluctance motor
motor
AC motor
 Software Brake Chopper Action Level
Default:
380.0/740.0/895.0/1057.0
460V models: 700.0–900.0 VDC
575V models: 850.0–1116.0 VDC
690V models: 939.0–1318.0 VDC
 Sets the DC bus voltage at which the brake chopper is activated. Choose a suitable brake
resistor to achieve the best deceleration. Refer to Chapter 7 Optional Accessories for
information about brake resistors.
 This parameter is only valid for the models below 22 kW of 230V models and 30 kW of 460V
models.
 DC Brake Current Level

Default: 0
Settings 0–100%
 100% corresponds to the rated current of the drive (Pr.00-01).
 Sets the level of the DC brake current output to the motor at start-up and stop. It is
recommended that you start with a low DC brake current level and then increase until you reach
the proper holding torque. However, the DC brake current cannot exceed the motor’s rated
current to prevent the motor from burnout. Do NOT use the DC brake for mechanical retention,
otherwise, injury or accident may occur.
 The PM has the magnetic field itself, using the DC brake may possibly cause the motor run in a
reverse direction, therefore, it is not recommended to use DC brake for PM.
 DC Brake Time at Start-up

Default: 0.0
 The motor may continue rotating after the drive stops output due to external forces or the inertia
of the motor itself. If you use the drive with the motor rotating, it may cause motor damage or
trigger drive protection due to over-current. This parameter outputs DC current, generating
torque to force the motor to stop to get a stable start before more operation. This parameter
determines the duration of the DC brake current output to the motor when the drive starts up.
Setting this parameter to 0.0 disables the DC brake at start-up.
12.1-07-1
 The PM has the magnetic field itself, using the DC brake may possibly cause the motor run in a
reverse direction, therefore, it is not recommended to use DC brake for PM. Use Pr.10-49 zero
voltage command to force the motor decelerate or to stop.
 DC Brake Time at STOP

Default: 0.0
 The motor may continue rotating after the drive stops output due to external forces or the inertia
of the motor itself. This parameter outputs DC current, generating torque to force the drive stop
after the drive stops output to make sure that the motor stops.
 This parameter determines the duration of the DC brake current output to the motor when
braking. To enable the DC brake at STOP, you must set Pr.00-22 (Stop Method) to 0 (ramp to
stop). Set this parameter to 0.0 to disable the DC brake at stop.
 Related parameters: Pr.00-22 Stop Method, Pr.07-04 DC Brake Frequency at STOP.
 DC Brake Frequency at STOP

Default: 0.00
 Determines the start frequency of the DC brake before the drive ramps to stop. When this
setting is less than Pr.01-09 (Start-up Frequency), the start frequency for the DC brake begins at
the minimum frequency.
 Use the DC brake before running the motor when the load is movable at stop, such as with fans
and pumps. The motor is in free running status and in unknown rotation direction before the
drive starts up. Execute the DC brake before you start the motor.
 Use the DC brake at STOP when you need to brake the motor quickly or to control the
positioning, such as with cranes or cutting machines.
 Voltage Increasing Gain

Default: 100
Settings 1–200%
 When using speed tracking, adjust Pr.07-05 to slow down the increasing voltage gain if there
are errors such as oL or oc; however, the speed tracking time will be longer.
12.1-07-2
 Restart after Momentary Power Loss

Default: 0
Settings 0: Stop operation
1: Speed tracking by speed before the power loss
 Determines the operation mode when the drive restarts from a momentary power loss.
 The power system connected to the drive may power off momentarily due to many reasons. This
function allows the drive to keep outputting voltages after the drive is repowered and does not
cause the drive to stop.
 1: Frequency tracking begins before momentary power loss and accelerates to the master
Frequency command after the drive output frequency and motor rotator speed are synchronous.
Use this setting when there is a lot of inertia with little resistance on the motor load. For example,
in equipment with a large inertia flywheel, there is NO need to wait until the flywheel stops
completely after a restart to execute the operation command; therefore, it saves time.
 2: Frequency tracking starts from the minimum output frequency and accelerates to the master
Frequency command after the drive output frequency and motor rotator speed are synchronous.
Use this setting when there is little inertia and large resistance.
 This function is only valid when the RUN command is enabled.
 Allowed Power Loss Duration

Default: 2.0
 Determines the maximum time of allowable power loss. If the duration of a power loss exceeds
this parameter setting, the AC motor drive stops output after the power recovers.
 Pr.07-06 is valid when the maximum allowable power loss time is ≤ 20 seconds and the AC
motor drive displays “Lv”. If the AC motor drive is powered off due to overload, even if the
maximum allowable power loss time is ≤ 20 seconds, Pr.07-06 is invalid after the power
recovers.
 Base Block Time

Default: Depending on the
model power
Settings 0.0–5.0 sec. (Depending on the model power)
 When momentary power loss is detected, the AC motor drive blocks its output and then waits for
a specified period of time (determined by Pr.07-08, called Base Block Time) before resuming
operation. Set this parameter to the time that allows the residual voltage at the output side to
decrease to 0 V before activating the drive again.
 This parameter is not only for the B.B. time, but also is the re-start delay time after free run.
 The RUN command during a free run operation is memorized, and runs or stops with the last
frequency command after the delay time.
 This delay time is only applicable in “Re-start after coast to stop” status, and does not limit ramp
to stop. The coast to stop can be caused by various control command source, or by errors.
12.1-07-3
 Following table is the recommended setting for re-start delay time of each model power. You
must set Pr.07-08 according to this table (the default of each model power is also based on this
table).
kW 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 4.0 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0
HP 1 2 3 5 5.5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30
Delay time (sec.) 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2
kW 30.0 37.0 45.0 55.0 75.0 90.0 110.0 132.0 160.0 185.0 200.0
HP 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 175 215 250 270
Delay time (sec.) 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3
kW 220.0 250.0 280.0 315.0 355.0 400.0 500.0 560.0 630.0

HP 300 340 375 425 475 530 675 750 850
Delay time (sec.) 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3.2 3.4
12.1-07-4
 Current Limit for Speed Tracking

Default: 100
 The AC motor drive executes speed tracking only when the output current is greater than the
value set in Pr.07-09.
 The maximum current for speed tracking affects the synchronous time. The larger the parameter
setting is, the faster the synchronization occurs. However, if the parameter setting is too large,
the overload protection function may be activated.
 Restart after Fault Action

Default: 0
Settings 0: Stop operation
1: Speed tracking by current speed
 Faults include: bb, oc, ov, and occ. To restart after oc, ov and occ, you cannot set Pr.07-11 to 0.
 Number of Times of Restart after Fault

Default: 0
Settings 0–10
 After fault (oc, ov, and occ) occurs, the AC motor drive can reset and restart automatically up to
10 times. If Pr. 07-11 is set to 0, the drive resets or restarts automatically after faults occur. The
drive starts according to the Pr.07-10 setting after restarting after fault.
 If the number of faults exceeds the Pr.07-11 setting, the drive does not restart and reset until you
press RESET manually and execute the operation command again.
 Speed Tracking during Start-up

Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Speed tracking by the maximum output frequency
2: Speed tracking by the motor frequency start-up
12.1-07-5
 Speed tracking is suitable for punch, fans and other large inertia loads. For example, a
mechanical punch usually has a large inertia flywheel, and the general stop method is coast to
stop. If it needs to be restarted again, the flywheel may take 2–5 minutes or longer to stop. This
parameter setting allows you to start the flywheel operating again without waiting until the
flywheel stops completely.
 When using PM, Pr.07-12 ≠ 0, the speed tracking function is enabled. When Pr.07-12 = 1, 2 or 3,
the output frequency converts to the actual rotor speed from zero-speed.
 When using SynRM control mode, only Pr.07-12 = 3 (speed tracking by the minimum output
frequency) is enabled.
 dEb Function Selection

Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: dEb with auto-acceleration / auto-deceleration, the drive does not output
the frequency after the power is restored.
2: dEb with auto-acceleration / auto-deceleration, the drive outputs the
frequency after the power is restored
 dEb (Deceleration Energy Backup) lets the motor decelerates to stop when momentary power
loss occurs. When the power loss is instantaneous, use this function to let the motor decelerate
to zero speed. If the power recovers at this time, the drive restarts the motor after the dEb return
time.
 Lv return level: Default value depends on the drive power model
Models for frame A, B, C, D = Pr.06-00 + 60V/30V (230V models)
Models for frame E and above = Pr.06-00 + 80V/40V (230V models)
 Lv level: Default = Pr.06-00
 During dEb operation, other protection such as ryF, ov, oc, occ and EF may interrupt it, and
these error codes are recorded.
 The STOP (RESET) command does not work during the dEb auto-deceleration, and the drive
continues decelerating to stop. To make the drive coast to stop immediately, use another
function (EF) instead.
 The B.B. function does not work when executing dEb. The B.B. function is enabled after the dEb
function finishes.
 Even though the Lv warning does not display during dEb operation, if the DC bus voltage is
lower than the Lv level, MOx = 10 (Low voltage warning) still operates.
 The following explains the dEb action:
When the DC voltage drops below the dEb setting level, the dEb function starts to work (soft
start relay remains closed), and the drive executes auto-deceleration.
12.1-07-6
 Situation 1: Momentary power loss, or too low and unstable power voltage, or power supply
sliding down because of sudden heavy load.
Pr.07-13 = 1, “dEb active, DC bus voltage returns, output frequency does not return” and power
recovers.
When the power recovers and DC bus voltage exceeds the dEb return level, the drive linearly
decelerates to 0 Hz and stops. The keypad displays the ”dEb” warning until you manually reset
it, so you can see the reason for the stop.
 Situation 2: Momentary power loss or too low and unstable power voltage, or power supply
sliding down because of sudden heavy load.
Pr.07-13 = 2 “dEb active, DC bus voltage returns, output frequency returns” and power recovers.
During the dEb deceleration (includes 0 Hz run), if the power recovers to a voltage higher than
dEb return level, the drive maintains the frequency for the set time of Pr.07-14 (default = 3 sec.)
and then accelerates again. The “dEb” warning on the keypad is automatically cleared.
12.1-07-7
 Situation 3: Unexpected power shut down or power loss

Pr.07-13 = 1 ”dEb active, DC bus voltage returns, the output frequency does not return” and the
power does not recover.
The keypad displays the “dEb” warning and the drive stops after decelerating to the lowest
operating frequency. When the DC bus voltage is lower than the Lv level, the drive disconnects
the soft start relay until the power completely runs out.
 Situation 4:
Pr.07-13 = 2 “dEb active, DC bus voltage returns, the output frequency returns” and power does
not recover.
The drive decelerates to 0 Hz. The DC bus voltage continues to decrease until the voltage is
lower than the Lv level, and then the drive disconnects the soft-start relay. The keypad displays
“dEb” warning until the drive completely runs out of power.
 Situation 5:
Pr.07-13 = 2 “dEb low voltage control, when the speed is lower than 1/4 rated motor speed, DC
bus voltage rises to 350 VDC / 700 VDC, the drive ramps to stop .
The drive decelerates to 0 Hz. The DC bus voltage continues to decrease until the voltage is
lower than the Lv level, and then the drive disconnects the soft-start relay. The soft-start relay
closes again after the power recovers and the DC bus voltage is higher than the Lv return level.
When the DC bus voltage is higher than the dEb return level, the drive maintains the frequency
for the set time of Pr.07-14 (default = 3 sec.) and starts to accelerate linearly, and the dEb
warning on the keypad is automatically cleared.
 Situation 6:
Pr.07-13 = 4, dEb high-voltage control
When dEb occurs, the DC bus voltage control level rises to 350 VDC / 700 VDC to ramp to stop.
12.1-07-8
Even though the power recovers and the frequency does not return, dEb activates until the
motor decelerates to 0 Hz.
(1) When dEb activates, it sends dEb warning. When the output frequency reaches 0 Hz, the
operation status is STOP and disables the dEb function, the dEb warning continues.
(2) If power does not recover, the DC bus voltage drops until reaches the Lv level, the drive LvS
error occurs (keypad displays LvS error that covers the dEb display), the Soft Start Relay will
be OFF.
 Dwell Time at Acceleration

Default: 0.00
 Dwell Frequency at Acceleration
Default: 0.00
 Dwell Time at Deceleration
Default: 0.00
 Dwell Frequency at Deceleration
Default: 0.00
 In the heavy load situation, Dwell can make stable output frequency temporarily.
 For heavy load applications, use Pr.07-15–Pr.07-18 to avoid ov or oc protection.
 Fan Cooling Control

Default: 0
Settings 0: Fan is always ON
1: Fan is OFF after AC motor drive stops for one minute
2: Fan is ON when the AC motor drive runs; fan is OFF when the AC motor
drive stops
3: Fan turns ON when temperature (IGBT) reaches around 60°C
4: Fan is always OFF
 Use this parameter to control the fan.
 0: Fan runs immediately when the drive power is turned ON.
12.1-07-9
 1: Fan runs when the AC motor drive runs. One minute after the AC motor drives stops, the fan
is OFF.
 2: Fan runs when the AC motor drive runs and stops immediately when AC motor drive stops.
 3: Fan is ON when IGBT or capacitance temperature is > 60°C
Fan is OFF when IGBT and capacitance temperature are both < 40°C, and the drive stops
running
 Setting 4: Fan is always OFF
 The control parameter for the applicable fan of each frame are as below:
Frame Heat Sink Fan Capacitor Fan
A Pr.07-19 No capacitor fan
B Pr.07-19 Pr.07-19
Pr.07-19
C Pr.07-19
230V models: always ON
D0 Pr.07-19 Pr.07-19
D Pr.07-19 ON
E Pr.07-19 Pr.07-19
F Pr.07-19 Pr.07-19
G Pr.07-19 No capacitor fan
H Pr.07-19 No capacitor fan
 Emergency Stop (EF) & Force to Stop Selection

Default: 0
Settings 0: Coast to stop
1: Stop by the first deceleration time
2: Stop by the second deceleration time
3: Stop by the third deceleration time
4: Stop by the fourth deceleration time
6: Automatic deceleration
 When the multi-function input terminal setting is set to 10 (EF input) or 18 (force to stop) and the
terminal contact is ON, the drive stops according to the setting of this parameter.
12.1-07-10
 Automatic Energy-saving (AES) Selection

Default: 0
1: Power factor energy-saving improvement (for VF and SVC control modes)
2: Automatic energy-saving optimization (for VF and SVC control modes)
 Different control modes for Pr.07-21:
Synchronous
Permanent Magnet
Settings / Control Induction Motor (IM) Reluctance Motor
Synchronous Motor (PM)
mode (SynRM)
VF SVC PMSVC PMFOC FOC
1: Power factor
energy-saving ✓ ✓
improvement
2: Automatic
energy-saving ✓ ✓
optimization
 Power factor energy-saving improvement (Pr.07-21 = 1):

 When the automatic energy-saving function is enabled, the drive runs with full-voltage
during acceleration and deceleration, and runs with the optimal voltage that is automatically
calculated by the load power during constant operation. It is not recommended to use this
function for applications that require frequent load changes or when the load is close to
full-load during operation.
 The prerequisites for valid power factor energy-saving improvement (Pr.07-21 = 1) are:
A. Power factor angle is larger than Pr.07-43 (Targeted Power Factor Angle for AES)
B. Output frequency is larger than Pr.07-41 (Minimum Frequnecy for AES)
C. The drive is in a steady-state output frequency status
D. Time for steady-state output frequency is larger than Pr.07-42 (Delay Time for AES)
E. Output current is smaller than or equal to 90% of the drive’s rated current
12.1-07-11
 The prerequisites for invalid power factor energy-saving improvement (Pr.07-21 = 1) are:
1. A changing output frequency
2. Output current is lager than 90% of the drive’s rated current
 Automatic energy-saving optimization (Pr.07-21 = 2):

 Controls the output voltage to minimize the motor’s losses for optimal energy-saving. The
motor’s losses are calculated by motor parameter auto-tuning and energy-saving coefficient.
 Automatic energy-saving optimization control is according to the block diagram below:
 The prerequisites for valid automatic energy-saving optimization (Pr.07-21 = 2) are:

A. Output frequency is larger than Pr.07-41 (Miminum Frequency for AES)
B. The drive is in a steady-state output frequency status
C. Time for steady-state output frequency is larger than Pr.07-42 (Delay Time for AES)
12.1-07-12
 The prerequisites for invalid automatic energy-saving optimization (Pr.07-21 = 2) are:

1. A changing output frequency
2. The loss model automatically determines the voltage drops when the drive is in normal
and heavy duty. If there is no more voltage that can be adjusted, that is, the voltage
drop is already optimized, AES is invalid.
 The energy-saving function is invalid during the drive’s acceleration and deceleration. To make it
valid, the prerequisites need to be verified again.
 Energy-saving Gain
Default: 100
Settings 10–1000%
 When Pr.07-21 is set to 1, use this parameter to adjust the energy-saving gain. The default is
100%. If the result is not satisfactory, adjust it by decreasing the setting value. If the motor
oscillates, then increase the setting value.
 In certain applications such as high speed spindles, the temperature rise in the motor is a major
concern. When the motor is not in working state, reduce the motor current to a lower level.
Reduce this parameter setting to meet this requirement.
 Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR) Function

Default: 0
Settings 0: Enable AVR
1: Disable AVR
2: Disable AVR during deceleration
 The rated voltage of the motor is usually 200–240 VAC (380–480 VAC), 60 Hz / 50 Hz and the
input voltage of the AC motor drive may vary between 170–264 VAC (323–528 VAC), 50 Hz / 60
Hz. Therefore, when the AC motor drive is used without AVR function, the output voltage is the
same as the input voltage. When the motor runs at the voltage exceeding 12–20% of the rated
voltage, it causes higher temperature, damaged insulation, and unstable torque output, which
12.1-07-13
result in losses due to shorter motor lifetime.

 The AVR function automatically regulates the output voltage of the AC motor drive to the motor’s
rated voltage when the input voltage exceeds the motor’s rated voltage. For example, if the V/F
curve is set at 200 VAC / 50 Hz and the input voltage is at 200–264 VAC, then the drive
automatically reduces the output voltage to the motor to a maximum of 200 VAC / 50 Hz. If the
input voltage is at 170–200 VAC, the output voltage to motor is in direct proportion to the input
voltage.
 0: When the AVR function is enabled, the drive calculates the output voltage according to the
actual DC bus voltage. The output voltage does NOT change when the DC bus voltage
changes.
 1: When the AVR function is disabled, the drive calculates the output voltage according to the
actual DC bus voltage. The output voltage changes with the DC bus voltage, and may cause
insufficient current, over-current or oscillation.
 2: The drive disables the AVR function only during deceleration to stop, and at this time, you can
accelerate the braking to achieve the same result.
 When the motor ramps to stop, disable the AVR function to shorten the deceleration time. Then,
use with the auto-acceleration and auto-deceleration functions to make the motor’s deceleration
more stable and quicker.
 Torque Command Filter Time (V/F and SVC Control Mode)

Default: 0.500
 When the time constant setting is too large, the control is stable but the control response is slow.
When the time constant setting is too small, the control response is faster but the control may be
unstable. For optimal setting, adjust the setting based on the control stability or the control
response.
 Slip Compensation Filter Time (V/F and SVC Control Mode)

Default: 0.100
 Change the compensation response time with Pr.07-24 and Pr.07-25.
 If you set Pr.07-24 and Pr.07-25 to 10 seconds, the compensation response time is the slowest;
however, the system may be unstable if you set the time too short.
 Torque Compensation Gain

Default: 0
Settings IM: 0–10 (when Pr.05-33 = 0)
PM: 0–5000 (when Pr.05-33 = 1 or 2)
 Only applicable in IMVF and PMSVC control modes.
 With a large motor load, a part of the drive output voltage is absorbed by the stator winding
resistor; therefore, the air gap magnetic field is insufficient. This causes insufficient voltage at
motor induction and results in excessive output current but insufficient output torque.
Auto-torque compensation can automatically adjust the output voltage according to the load and
12.1-07-14
keep the air gap magnetic fields stable to get the optimal operation.
 In the V/F control, the voltage decreases in direct proportion when decreasing frequency. The
torque decreases at low speed because of a decreasing AC resistor and an unchanged DC
resistor. The auto-torque compensation function increases the output voltage at low frequency
to get a higher starting torque.
 When the compensation gain is set too large, it may cause motor over-flux and result in a too
large output current of the drive, motor overheating or trigger the drive’s protection function.
 Slip Compensation Gain

Default: 0.00
(1.00 in SVC mode)
 Only applicable in IMVF and IMSVC control modes.
 The induction motor needs constant slip to produce electromagnetic torque. It can be ignored at
a higher motor speed, such as rated speed or 2–3% of slip.
 However, during the drive operation, the slip and the synchronous frequency are in reverse
proportion to produce the same electromagnetic torque. The slip is larger with the reduction of
synchronous frequency. Moreover, the motor may stop when the synchronous frequency
decreases to a specific value. Therefore, the slip seriously affects the motor speed accuracy at
low speed.
 In another situation, when you use an induction motor with the drive, the slip increases when the
load increases. It also affects the motor speed accuracy.
 Use this parameter to set the compensation frequency, and reduce the slip to maintain the
synchronous speed when the motor runs at the rated current in order to improve the accuracy of
the drive. When the drive output current is higher than Pr.05-05 (No-load Current for Induction
Motor 1 (A)), the drive compensates the frequency according to this parameter.
 This parameter is set to 1.00 automatically when Pr.00-11 (Speed Control Mode) is changed
from V/F mode to vector mode. Otherwise, it is automatically set to 0.00. Apply the slip
compensation after load and acceleration. Increase the compensation value from small to large
gradually; add the output frequency to the [motor rated slip × Pr.07-27 (Slip Compensation Gain)]
when the motor is at the rated load. If the actual speed ratio is slower than expected, increase
the parameter setting value; otherwise, decrease the setting value.
 Slip Deviation Level

Default: 0.0
0: No detection
 Over-slip Deviation Detection Time
Default:1.0
12.1-07-15
 Over-slip Deviation Treatment

Default: 0
3: No warning
 Pr.07-29 to Pr.07-31 set the allowable slip level / time and the over-slip treatment when the drive
is running.
 Motor Oscillation Compensation Factor

Default: 1000
Settings 0–10000
0: Disable
 If there are current wave motions which cause severe motor oscillation in some specific area,
setting this parameter can effectively improve this situation. (When running with high frequency,
set this parameter to 0. When the current wave motion occurs in low frequency and high power,
increase the value for Pr.07-32.)
 Auto-restart Interval of Fault

Default: 60.0
 When a reset / restart occurs after a fault, the drive uses Pr.07-33 as a timer and starts counting
the numbers of faults within this time period. Within this period, if the number of faults does not
exceed the setting for Pr.07-11, the counting clears and starts from 0 when the next fault occurs.
 PMSVC Voltage Feed Forward Gain

Default: 1.00
 Adjusts the PMSVC voltage feedback forward gain, and to meet the demand of rapid feedback
application.
 Pr.07-38 = 1.00 means forward feedback = Ke × motor rotor speed
 Refer to Section 12-2 “PMSVC adjustment” for details.
 Minimum Frequency for AES

Default: 10.00
 The drive’s output frequency must be larger than Pr.07-41 to make the drive determine whether
to run in a steady-state output frequency.
 In general, larger power and voltage can give more energy-savings; lower power and voltage
produce less energy-savings. However, too low power and voltage are not suitable for
low-speed operation because it needs a larger starting current. Pr.07-41 is the parameter that
limits the minimum frequency when AES is enabled (Pr.07-41 to Pr.01-00 is the frequency
range – from minimum to maximum – that you can use for the AES function).
12.1-07-16
 Delay Time for AES

Default: 5
Settings 0–600 sec.
 When the drive runs in a steady-state output frequency, and exceeds Pr.07-42 setting time, the
drive enters the energy-saving mode.
 Targeted Power Factor Angle for AES

Default: 40.00
Settings 0.00–65.00°
 Use this function when Pr.07-21 = 1. If the power factor angle is larger than Pr.07-43, the drive
continuously adjusts the energy-saving until it is smaller than Pr.07-43.
 Pr.07-43 is the angle  between active power and reactive power. The smaller COS, the lower
the reactive power, and the lower the loss.
 Maximum Voltage Drop for AES

Default: 60.00
 Defines the maximum allowed voltage drop when the drive is in energy-saving mode.
 The drive has bigger energy-saving efficiency when running in no-load or light-load. But the
output voltage drop is not unlimited. Use Pr.07-44 to limit the maximum ratio (%) of the output
voltage drop.
Example:
(1) If Pr.01-01 = 60 Hz, Pr.01-02 = 380 VAC, the frequency command is 60 Hz and the actual
voltage output is 371.2 VAC, and Pr.07-44 = 60%, then the
maximum voltage drop = 380V (the voltage command corresponding to the frequency
command in the VF table: 60 Hz corresponds to 380V) × 60% = 228 VAC.
(2) If the frequency command is 30 Hz, the corresponding voltage is 200 VAC in the VF table, and
Pr.07-44 = 60%, then the maximum voltage drop = 200V × 60% = 120 VAC.
12.1-07-17
 AES Coefficient
Default: 100
Settings 0–10000%
 Defines the motor power loss constant. Default 100% corresponds to the drive’s iron loss
constant that is calculated by motor parameter auto-tuning or motor nameplate information.
 Pr.07-45 affects the final steady-state output voltage value for the energy-saving control. The
larger the Pr.07-45 setting value, the higher the steady-state output voltage (smaller voltage drop).
The smaller the Pr.07-45 setting value, the lower the steady-state output voltage (larger voltage
drop).
 See below for the flowchart of AES adjustment with motor parameter auto-tuning
(recommended):
 See below for the flowchart of AES adjustment without motor parameter auto-tuning (not
recommended):
12.1-07-18
 PWM Fan Speed

Default: 60
Settings 60–100%
 For different application and environment, adjust the fan speed to expedite the heat dissipation
of the drive.
 Default for 460V models (45 kW, 55 kW, 75 kW, 90 kW and 110 kW) is 80%; default for other
models are 60%.
 230V models : 18.5 kW and above models are controlled by PWM fan speed control, and
Pr.07-50 is available.
 460V models : 22kW and above models are controlled by PWM fan speed control, and Pr.07-50
is available.
 575V / 690V models are all controlled by PWM, and Pr.07-50 is available.
12.1-07-19
08 High-function PID Parameters  You can set this parameter during operation.
 Terminal Selection of PID Feedback

Default: 0
1: Negative PID feedback: by analog input (Pr.03-00–03-02)
4: Positive PID feedback: by analog input (Pr.03-00–03-02)
 Pr.08-00 ≠ 0 enables the PID function.
 Negative feedback:
Error = +Target value (set point) – Feedback. Use negative feedback when the detection value
increases if the output frequency increases.
 Positive feedback:
Error = -Target value (set point) + Feedback. Use positive feedback when the detection value
decreases if the output frequency increases.
 When Pr.08-00 ≠ 7 or ≠ 8, the input value is disabled. The setting value does not remain when
the drive is powered off.
 When Pr.08-00 ≠ 0, the related applicable parameters include:
 Pr.00-20 (Master frequency command source (AUTO) / Source selection of the PID target)
 Pr.03-00–03-02
When Pr.00-20 = 2 (External analog input), set Pr.03-00–03-02 = 4 (PID tartget value)
When Pr.08-00 = 2 or 4, set Pr.03-00–03-02 = 5 (PID feedback signal)
Refer to the following description for details.
Master Frequency Command Source (AUTO) / Source Selection of the PID Target
Default: 0
2: External analog input (Refer to Pr.03-00)
3: External UP/DOWN terminal
12.1-08-1
 Analog Input Selection (AVI1)

Default: 1
 Analog Input Selection (ACI)
Default: 0
 Analog Input Selection (AVI2)
Default: 0
Settings 4: PID target value
Common applications for PID control

1. Flow control: Use a flow sensor to feedback the flow data and perform accurate flow
control.
2. Pressure control: Use a pressure sensor to feedback the pressure data and perform
precise pressure control.
3. Air volume control: Use an air volume sensor to feedback the air volume data to achieve
excellent air volume regulation.
4. Temperature control: Use a thermocouple or thermistor to feedback temperature data for
comfortable temperature control.
5. Speed control: Use a speed sensor feedback motor shaft speed or input another machine
speed as a target value for synchronous control.
PID control loop:
KP Proportional Gain (P), Ti Integral Time (I), Td Differential Time (D), S Calculation
Concept of PID control

 Proportional gain (P):
The output is proportional to input. With only proportional gain control, there is always a
steady-state error.
Adjustment: Turn off the Ti and Td, or remain Ti and Td in constant value, then adjust the
proportional gain (P).
Increase: Faster status feedback, but excessive adjustment increases the overshoot.
Decrease: Smaller overshoot, but excessive adjustment slows down the transient
response.
12.1-08-2
 Integral time(I):
The controller output is proportional to the integral of the controller input. When an
automatic control system is in a steady state and a steady-state error occurs, the system is
called a System with Steady-state Error. To eliminate the steady-state error, add an
“integral part” to the controller. The integral time controls the relation between integral part
and the error. The integral part increases over time even if the error is small. It gradually
increases the controller output to eliminate the error until it is zero. This stabilizes the
system without a steady-state error by using proportional gain control and integral time
control.
Adjustment: The integral time (I) accumulates from the time difference, if the vibration
cycle is longer than the setting for integral time, the integration enhances.
Increase the integral time (I) to reduce the vibration.
Increase: Reduce the overshoot, excessive adjustment causes worse transient response.
Decrease: Faster transient response, but the transient time will be longer, and takes more
time to achieve the steady state. Excessive adjustment causes larger overshoot.
 Differential control (D):

The controller output is proportional to the differential of the controller input. During
elimination of the error, oscillation or instability may occur. Use the differential control to
suppress these effects by acting before the error. That is, when the error is near zero, the
differential control should be zero. Use proportional gain (P) and differential control (D) to
improve the system state during PID adjustment.
Adjustment: When the vibration cycle is shorter and continuous, it means that the
differential time setting is too large, and causes excessive output. Decrease
the setting of D gain to reduce the vibration. If the D gain is set to 0, adjust the
PID control again.
12.1-08-3
Using PID control in a constant pressure pump feedback application:

Set the application’s constant pressure value (bar) to be the set point of PID control. The pressure
sensor sends the actual value as the PID feedback value. After comparing the PID set point and
PID feedback, an error displays. The PID controller calculates the output by using proportional
gain (P), integral time (I) and differential time (D) to control the pump. It controls the drive to use a
different pump speed and achieves constant pressure control by using a 4–20 mA signal
corresponding to 0–10 bar as feedback to the drive.
 Pr.00-04 = 10 (Display PID feedback (b) (%))

 Pr.01-12 Acceleration Time is set according to actual conditions.
 Pr.01-13 Deceleration Time is set according to actual conditions.
 Pr.00-21 = 0, operate through the digital keypad
 Pr.00-20 = 0, the digital keypad controls the set point.
 Pr.08-00 = 1 (Negative PID feedback from analog input)
 ACI analog input Pr.03-01 = 5, PID feedback signal.
 Pr.08-01–08-03 is set according to actual conditions:
If there is no oscillation in the system, increase Pr.08-01 (Proportional Gain (P))
If there is no oscillation in the system, reduce Pr.08-02 (Integral Time (I))
If there is no oscillation in the system, increase Pr.08-03 (Differential Time (D))
 Refer to Pr.08-00–08-21 for PID parameter settings.
 Proportional Gain (P)

Default: 1.0
 1.0: Kp gain is 100%; if the setting is 0.5, Kp gain is 50%.
 Sets the proportional gain to determine the deviation response speed. The higher the
proportional gain, the faster the response speed. Eliminates the system deviation; usually used
to decrease the deviation and get faster response speed, it also reduces the steady-state error.
If you set the value too high, overshoot occurs and it may cause system oscillation and
instability.
12.1-08-4
 If you set the other two gains (I and D) to zero, proportional control is the only effective
parameter.
 Integral Time (I)

Default: 1.00
0.00: No integral
 Use the integral controller to eliminate the deviation during stable system operation. The integral
control does not stop working until the deviation is zero. The integral is affected by the integral
time. The smaller the integral time, the stronger integral action. It is helpful to reduce overshoot
and oscillation for a stable system. Accordingly, the speed to lower the steady-state deviation
decreases. The integral control is often used with the other two controls for the PI controller or
PID controller.
 Sets the integral time of the I controller. When the integral time is long, there is a small I
controller gain, with slower response and slow external control. When the integral time is short,
there is a large gain of I controller gain, with faster response and rapid external control.
 When the integral time is too short, it may cause overshoot or oscillation for the output
frequency and system.
 Set Integral Time to 0.00 to disable the I controller.
 Differential Time (D)

Default: 0.00
 Use the differential controller to show the system deviation change, as well as to preview the
change in the deviation. You can use the differential controller to eliminate the deviation in order
to improve the system state. Using a suitable differential time can reduce overshoot and shorten
adjustment time; however, the differential operation increases noise interference. Note that a too
large differential causes more noise interference. In addition, the differential shows the change
and the output is 0 when there is no change. Note that you cannot use the differential control
independently. You must use it with the other two controllers for the PD controller or PID
controller.
 Sets the D controller gain to determine the deviation change response. Using a suitable
differential time reduces the P and I controllers overshoot to decrease the oscillation for a stable
system. A differential time that is too long may cause system oscillation.
 The differential controller acts on the change in the deviation and cannot reduce the interference.
Do not use this function when there is significant interference.
 Upper limit of Integral Control

Default: 100.0
 Defines an upper bound for the integral gain (I) and therefore limits the master frequency. The
formula is: Integral upper bound = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00) x Pr.08-04 %.
 An excessive integral value causes a slow response due to sudden load changes and may
cause motor stall or machine damage. If so, decrease it to a proper value.
12.1-08-5
 PID Output Command Limit

Default: 100.0
 Defines the percentage of the output command limit during the PID control. The formula is
Output Command Limit = Maximum Operation Frequency (Pr.01-00 x Pr.08-05 %).
 PID Feedback Value Display

Default: Read only
Settings -200.00–200.00%
 PID Delay Time

Default: 0.0
PID Mode Selection
Default: 0
Settings 0: Serial connection
1: Parallel connection
 0: Serial connection, use conventional PID control structure.
 1: Parallel connection, the proportional gain, integral gain and differential gain are independent.
You can customize the P, I and D value to fit your application.
 Pr.08-20 determines the primary low pass filter time when in PID control. Setting a large time
constant may slow down the drive’s response speed.
 PID control output frequency is filtered with a primary low pass function. This function can filter a
mix frequencies. A long primary low pass time means the filter degree is high and a short
primary low pass time means the filter degree is low.
 Inappropriate delay time setting may cause system oscillation.
 PI Control:
Controlled only by the P action, so the deviation cannot be entirely eliminated. In general, to
eliminate residual deviations, use the P + I control. When you use the PI control, it eliminates the
deviation caused by the targeted value changes and the constant external interferences.
However, if the I action is too powerful, it delays the response when there is rapid variation. You
can use the P action by itself to control the loading system with the integral components.
 PD Control:
When deviation occurs, the system immediately generates an operation load that is greater than
the load generated only by the D action to restrain the deviation increment. If the deviation is
small, the effectiveness of the P action decreases as well. The control objects include
applications with integral component loads, which are controlled by the P action only.
Sometimes, if the integral component is functioning, the whole system may oscillate. In this case,
use the PD control to reduce the P action’s oscillation and stabilize the system. In other words,
this control is useful with no brake function’s loading over the processes.
 PID Control:
Use the I action to eliminate the deviation and the D action to reduce oscillation; then combine
12.1-08-6
this with the P action for the PID control. Use the PID method for a control process with no
deviations, high accuracies and a stable system.
Serial connection
Parallel connection
 Feedback Signal Detection Time

Default: 0.0
 Valid only when the feedback signal is ACI (4–20 mA).
 This parameter sets the detection time for abnormal PID signal feedback. You can also use it
when the system feedback signal response is extremely slow. (Setting the detection time to 0.0
disables the detection function.)
 Feedback Signal Fault Treatment

Default: 0
 Valid only when the feedback signal is ACI (4–20 mA).
 Sets the treatments when the PID feedback signal is abnormal.
12.1-08-7
 Sleep Level
Default: 0.00
Settings 0.00–599.00 Hz or 0–200.00%
 Determines the sleep level, and if the sleep time and the wake-up level are enabled or disabled.
When Pr.08-10 = 0: Disabled; when Pr.08-10 ≠ 0: Enabled.
 Wake-up Level
Default: 0.00
Settings 0.00–599.00 Hz or 0–200.00%
 When Pr.08-18 = 0, the unit for Pr.08-10 and that for Pr.08-11 switch to frequency. The settings
become 0.00–599.00 Hz.
 When Pr.08-18 = 1, the unit for Pr.08-10 and that for Pr.08-11 switch to percentage. The settings
are between 0–200.00%.
 The percentage is based on the current command value, not the maximum value. For example, if
the maximum value is 100 kg, and the current command value is 30 kg, then if Pr.08-11 = 40%,
the value is 12 kg.
 Pr.08-10 uses the same logic for calculation.
 Sleep Delay Time

Default: 0.0
 When the frequency command is smaller than the sleep frequency and less than the sleep time,
the frequency command is equal to the sleep frequency. However, the frequency command
remains at 0.00 Hz until the frequency command becomes equal to or larger than the wake-up
frequency.
 PID Feedback Signal Error Deviation Level

Default: 10.0
 PID Feedback Signal Error Deviation Detection Time
Default: 5.0
 When the PID control function is normal, it should calculate the value within a period of time
that is close to the target value.
 Refer to the PID control diagram for details. When executing PID feedback control, if |PID
reference target value – detection value| > Pr.08-13 PID Feedback Signal Error Deviation Level
and exceeds Pr.08-14 setting, it is regarded as a PID control fault, and the multi-function output
terminal setting 15 (PID feedback error) activates.
 PID Compensation Selection

Default: 0
Settings 0: Parameter setting (Pr.08-17)
1: Analog input
12.1-08-8
 0: The setting for Pr.08-17 gives the PID compensation value.

 1: Set the analog input (Pr.03-00–Pr.03-02) to 13, then the PID compensation value of analog
input is displayed on Pr.08-17. At this time, Pr.08-17 is read only.
 PID Compensation
Default: 0.0
Settings -100.0–100.0%
 The PID compensation value = maximum PID target value × Pr.08-17. For example, if the
maximum operation frequency Pr.01-00 = 60.00 Hz, Pr.08-17 = 10.0%, the PID compensation
value increases the output frequency 6.00 Hz. 60.00 Hz × 100.00% × 10.0% = 6.00 Hz
Sleep Mode Function Setting

Default: 0
Settings 0: Refer to PID output command
1: Refer to PID feedback signal
 0: The unit for Pr.08-10 and that for Pr.08-11 switch to frequency. The settings are between
0.00–599.00 Hz.
 1: The unit for Pr.08-10 and that for Pr.08-11 switch to percentage. The settings are between
0–200.00%.
 Wake-up Integral Limit

Default: 50.0
 The wake-up integral limit for the drive prevents suddenly running at high speed when the drive
wakes up. Defines the wake-up integral frequency limit = (Pr.01-00 × Pr.08-19%)
 Reduces the reaction time from sleep to wake-up.
Enable PID to Change the Operation Direction

Default: 0
Settings 0: Operation direction cannot be changed
1: Operation direction can be changed
 Wake-up Delay Time
Default: 0.00
 Refer to Pr.08-18 for more information.
12.1-08-9
There are three scenarios for the sleep and wake-up frequency. Refer to following explanations:
1. Frequency Command (PID is not in use, Pr.08-00 = 0. Works only in VF mode)
When the output frequency ≤ the sleep frequency, and the drive reaches the preset sleep
time, then the drive is in sleep mode (0 Hz). When the Frequency command reaches the
wake-up frequency, the drive starts to count the wake-up delay time. When the drive reaches the
wake-up delay time, it starts to catch up to reach the Frequency command value by the
acceleration time.
2. Internal PID Calculation Frequency Command (PID is in use, Pr.08-00 ≠ 0 and Pr.08-18 = 0)
When the PID calculation Frequency command reaches the sleep frequency, the drive starts
to count the sleep time and the output frequency starts to decrease. If the drive exceeds the
preset sleep time, then the drive is in sleep mode (0 Hz). If the drive does not reach the preset
sleep time, it remains at the lower frequency limit (if there is a preset of lower limit), or it remains
at the minimum output frequency set at Pr.01-07 and waits until it reaches the sleep time before
it going into sleep mode (0 Hz). When the PID calculated Frequency command reaches the
wake-up frequency, the drive starts to count the wake-up delay time. Once it reaches the
wake-up delay time, the drive starts to catch up to reach the PID Frequency command value by
the acceleration time.
12.1-08-10
3. PID Feedback Value Rate Percentage (PID is in use, Pr.08-00 ≠ 0 and Pr.08-18 = 1)
When the PID feedback value reaches the sleep level percentage, the drive starts to count
the sleep time and the output frequency starts to decrease. If the drive exceeds the preset sleep
time, then the drive is in sleep mode (0 Hz). If the drive does not reach the preset sleep time, it
remains at the lower frequency limit (if there is a preset of lower limit.), or it remains at the
minimum output frequency set for Pr.01-07 and waits until it reaches the sleep time before going
into sleep mode (0 Hz).
When the PID feedback value reaches the wake-up percentage, the drive starts to count the
wake-up delay time. Once it reaches the wake-up delay time, the drive starts to catch up to reach
the PID Frequency command value by the acceleration time.
Example 01: PID negative feedback

 Pr.08-10 must > Pr.08-11
PID
 30 kg is the reference Area
Physical quantity
 Set the parameter:
> 12 kg, the drive goes
Pr.03-00 = 5 (AVI1 is PID feedback) Sleep
into sleep, the motor
Pr.08-00 = 1 (PID negative feedback: AVI1 area
goes into sleep
simulation input function select)
between 6 kg and 12
Pr.08-10 = 40% (Sleep reference: Excessive
kg, the drive remains in
12 kg = 40% × 30 kg) area
current state
Pr.08-11 = 20% (Wake-up reference:
< 6 kg, the drive
6 kg = 20% × 30 kg) Wake-up
wakes-up, the motor
Case 01: If feedback > 12 kg, frequency decreases. area
wakes-up
Case 02: If feedback < 6 kg, frequency increases.
12.1-08-11
Example 02: PID positive feedback

 Pr.08-10 must < Pr.08-11
PID
 30 kg is the reference Area
Physical quantity
 Set the parameter:
> 36 kg, the drive goes
Pr.03-00 = 5 (AVI1 is PID feedback) Sleep
into sleep, the motor
Pr.08-00 = 4 (PID positive feedback: AVI1 area
goes into sleep
simulation input function select)
between 33 kg and 36
Pr.08-10 = 110% (Sleep reference: Excessive
kg, the drive remains in
33 kg = 110% × 30 kg) area
the current state
Pr.08-11 = 120% (Wake-up reference:
Wake-up < 33 kg, the drive
36 kg = 120% × 30 kg)
area wakes-up
Case 01: If feedback < 33 kg, frequency decreases.
Case 02: If feedback > 36 kg, frequency increases.
12.1-08-12
09 Communication Parameters  You can set this parameter during the operation.
When using the communication interface, the diagram

on the right shows the communication port pin
definitions. We recommend that you connect the AC
motor drive to your PC by using Delta IFD6530
orIFD6500 as a communication converter.
 Communication Address
Default: 1
Settings 1–254
 Sets the communication address for the drive if the AC motor drive is controlled through RS-485
serial communication. The communication address for each AC motor drive must be unique.
 COM1 Transmission Speed

Default: 9.6
Settings 4.8–115.2 Kbps
 Sets the transmission speed between the computer and the AC motor drive.
 Options are 4.8 Kbps, 9.6 Kbps, 19.2 Kbps, 38.4 Kbps, 57.6 Kbps or 115.2 Kbps; otherwise, the
transmission speed is set to the default 9.6 Kbps.
 COM1 Transmission Fault Treatment

Default: 3
3: No warning, no fault and continue operation
 Determines the treatment when an error is detected that the host controller does not
continuously transmit data to the AC motor drive during Modbus communication. The detection
time is based on the Pr.09-03 setting.
 COM1 Time-out Detection

Default: 0.0
 Sets the communication transmission time-out value.
 COM1 Communication Protocol

Default: 1
Settings 1: 7, N, 2 (ASCII)
2: 7, E, 1 (ASCII)
3: 7, O, 1 (ASCII)
4: 7, E, 2 (ASCII)
5: 7, O, 2 (ASCII)
6: 8, N, 1 (ASCII)
12.1-09-1
7: 8, N, 2 (ASCII)
8: 8, E, 1 (ASCII)
9: 8, O, 1 (ASCII)
10: 8, E, 2 (ASCII)
11: 8, O, 2 (ASCII)
12: 8, N, 1 (RTU)
13: 8, N, 2 (RTU)
14: 8, E, 1 (RTU)
15: 8, O, 1 (RTU)
16: 8, E, 2 (RTU)
17: 8, O, 2 (RTU)
 Control by PC (Computer Link)
When using the RS-485 serial communication interface, you must specify each drive’s
communication address in Pr.09-00. The computer then implements control using the drives’
individual addresses.
 Modbus ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange): Each byte of data is the
combination of two ASCII characters. For example, one byte of data: 64 Hex, shown as ‘64’ in
ASCII, consists of ‘6’ (36Hex) and ‘4’ (34Hex).
1. Code Description
The communication protocol is in hexadecimal, ASCII: ”0”…“9”, “A”…“F”, every hexadecimal
value represents an ASCII code. The following table shows some examples:
Character ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’ ‘4’ ‘5’ ‘6’ ‘7’
ASCII code 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H
Character ‘8’ ‘9’ ‘A’ ‘B’ ‘C’ ‘D’ ‘E’ ‘F’

ASCII code 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H
2. Data Format
10-bit character frame (For ASCII):
(7, N, 2)
Start Stop Stop

bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
bit bit
7-data bits
10-bits character frame
(7, E, 1)
Start Even Stop

bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 parity bit
7-data bits
12.1-09-2
(7, O, 1)
Start Odd Stop

bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 parity bit
7-data bits
11-bit character frame (For RTU):

(8, N, 2)
Start Stop Stop

bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 bit bit
8-data bits
(8, E, 1)
Start Even Stop

bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
parity bit
8-data bits
(8, O, 1)
Start Odd Stop

bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
parity bit
8-data bits
3. Communication Protocol
3.1 Communication Data Frame:
ASCII mode
STX Start character = ‘:’ (3AH)
Address High Communication address:
Address Low one 8-bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes
Function High Command code:
Function Low one 8-bit command consists of 2 ASCII codes
DATA (n-1) Contents of data:
……. n × 8-bit data consist of 2n ASCII codes
DATA 0 n ≤ 16, maximum of 32 ASCII codes
LRC Check High LRC checksum:
LRC Check Low one 8-bit checksum consists of 2 ASCII codes
END High End characters:
END Low END1 = CR (0DH), END0 = LF(0AH)
12.1-09-3
RTU mode
START Defined by a silent interval of larger than / equal to 10 ms
Address Communication address: 8-bit binary address
Function Command code: 8-bit binary command
DATA (n-1)
Contents of data:
…….
n × 8-bit data, n ≤ 16
DATA 0
CRC Check Low CRC checksum:
CRC Check High one 16-bit CRC checksum consists of 2 8-bit binary
characters
END Defined by a silent interval of larger than / equal to 10 ms
3.2 Communication Address ( Address )

00H: broadcast to all AC motor drives
01H: AC motor drive of address 01
0FH: AC motor drive of address 15
10H: AC motor drive of address 16
:
FEH: AC motor drive of address 254
3.3 Function (Function code) and DATA (data characters)
03H: read data from register
06H: write single register
10H: write continuous multiple data
Example: Reading two continuous data from register address 2102H, AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
Command Message: Response Message
STX ‘:’ STX ‘:’
‘0’ ‘0’
Address Address
‘1’ ‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
Function Function
‘3’ ‘3’
‘2’ Number of register ‘0’
‘1’ (count by byte) ‘4’
Starting register
‘0’ ‘1’
‘2’ Content of starting ‘7’
‘0’ register 2102H ‘7’
Number of register ‘0’ ‘0’
(count by word) ‘0’ ‘0’
‘2’ Content of register ‘0’
‘D’ 2103H ‘0’
LRC Check
‘7’ ‘0’
CR ‘7’
END LRC Check
LF ‘1’
END CR
12.1-09-4
RTU mode:
Address 01H Address 01H
Function 03H Function 03H
21H Number of register
Starting data register 04H
02H (count by byte)
Number of register 00H Content of register 17H
(count by word) 02H address 2102H 70H
CRC Check Low 6FH Content of register 00H
CRC Check High F7H address 2103H 00H
CRC Check Low FEH
CRC Check High 5CH
06H: single write, write single data to register.

Example: Writing data 6000 (1770H) to register 0100H. AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
‘0’ ‘0’
Address Address
‘1’ ‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
Function Function
‘6’ ‘6’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘1’ ‘1’
Target register Target register
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘1’ ‘1’
‘7’ ‘7’
Register content Register content
‘7’ ‘7’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘7’ ‘7’
LRC Check LRC Check
‘1’ ‘1’
CR CR
END END
LF LF
RTU mode:
Address 01H Address 01H
Function 06H Function 06H
01H 01H
00H 00H
17H 17H
Register content Register content
70H 70H
CRC Check Low 86H CRC Check Low 86H
CRC Check High 22H CRC Check High 22H
10H: write multiple registers (can write at most 20 sets of data simultaneously).
Example: Set the multi-step speed of an AC motor drive (address is 01H),

Pr.04-00 = 50.00 (1388H), Pr.04-01 = 40.00 (0FA0H).
12.1-09-5
ASCII Mode
ADR 1 ‘0’ ADR 1 ‘0’
ADR 0 ‘1’ ADR 0 ‘1’
CMD 1 ‘1’ CMD 1 ‘1’
CMD 0 ‘0’ CMD 0 ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘4’ ‘4’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
Number of register ‘0’ Number of register ‘0’
(count by word) ‘0’ (count by word) ‘0’
‘2’ ‘2’
Number of register ‘0’ ‘E’
LRC Check
(count by byte) ‘4’ ‘9’
‘1’ CR
END
‘3’ LF
The first data content
‘8’
‘8’
‘0’
The second data ‘F’
content ‘A’
‘0’
‘9’
LRC Check
‘B’
CR
END
LF
RTU mode:
Command Message: Response Message:
ADR 01H ADR 01H
CMD 10H CMD 1 10H
04H 04H
00H 00H
Number of register 00H Number of register 00H
(Count by word) 02H (Count by word) 02H
Quantity of data (byte) 04 CRC Check Low 40H
13H CRC Check High F8H
The first data content
88H
The second data 0FH
content A0H
CRC Check Low ‘9’
CRC Check High ‘A’
3.4 Checksum
(1) ASCII mode (LRC Check):

LRC (Longitudinal Redundancy Check) is calculated by summing up the values of the bytes
from ADR1 to last data character then calculating the hexadecimal representation of the
2’s-complement negation of the sum.
For example,
01H+03H+21H+02H+00H+02H=29H, the 2’s-complement negation of 29H is D7H.
12.1-09-6
(2) RTU mode (CRC Check):

CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is calculated by the following steps:
Step 1: Load a 16-bit register (called CRC register) with FFFFh.
Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte of the command message with the low order byte of
the 16-bit CRC register, putting the result in the CRC register.
Step 3: Examine the LSB of CRC register.
Step 4: If the LSB of CRC register is 0, shift the CRC register one bit to the right, fill MSB with
zero, then repeat step 3. If the LSB of CRC register is 1, shift the CRC register one bit
to the right, fill MSB with zero, Exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial
value A001H, then repeat step 3.
Step 5: Repeat step 3 and 4 until you perform eight shifts. This processes a complete 8-bit
byte.
Step 6: Repeat step 2 through 5 for the next 8-bit byte of the command message. Continue
doing this until all bytes are processed. The final contents of the CRC register are the
CRC value. When transmitting the CRC value in the message, the upper and lower
bytes of the CRC value must be swapped, that is, the lower order byte is transmitted
first.
The following is an example of CRC generation using C language.

The function takes two arguments:
Unsigned char* data  a pointer to the message buffer
Unsigned char length  the quantity of bytes in the message buffer
The function returns the CRC value as a type of unsigned integer.
Unsigned int crc_chk(unsigned char* data, unsigned char length)
{
int j;
unsigned int reg_crc=0xffff;
while(length--){
reg_crc ^= *data++;
for(j=0;j<8;j++){
if(reg_crc & 0x01){ /* LSB(b0)=1 */
reg_crc=(reg_crc>>1) ^ 0xa001;
}else{
reg_crc=reg_crc >>1;
}
}
}
return reg_crc; // return register CRC
12.1-09-7
4. Address list
AC motor drive parameters (GGxx)

Modbus
Function
address
GG is the parameter group, nn is the parameter number; for example, the address of
GGnnH
Pr.04-10 is 040AH.
Control command (20xx)

Modbus
R/W Function
address
00B: No function
01B: Stop
bit1–0
10B: Run
11B: JOG + RUN
bit3–2 Reserved
00B: No function
01B: FWD
bit5–4
10B: REV
11B: Change direction
00B: 1st acceleration / deceleration
01B: 2nd acceleration / deceleration
bit7–6
10B: 3rd acceleration / deceleration
11B: 4th acceleration / deceleration
0000B: Master speed
0001B: 1st Step speed frequency
2000H RW 0010B: 2nd Step speed frequency
0011B: 3rd Step speed frequency
0100B: 4th Step speed frequency
bit11–8
bit12 1: Enable bit06–11 function
bit15 Reserved
2001H RW Frequency command (XXX.XX Hz)
12.1-09-8
Modbus
R/W Function
address
bit0 1: E.F. ON
bit1 1: Reset
2002H RW
bit2 1: Base block (B.B) ON
bit15–3 Reserved
Status monitor read only (21xx)

Modbus
R/W Function
address
High byte: Warn Code
2100H R
Low Byte: Error Code
AC motor drive operation status
bit1–0 00B: Drive stops
01B: Drive decelerating
10B: Drive standby
11B: Drive operating
bit2 1: JOG Command
Operation Direction
bit4–3 00B: FWD run
01B: From REV run to FWD run
2101H R
10B: From FWD run to REV run
11B: REV run
bit8 1: Master frequency controlled by communication interface
bit9 1: Master frequency controlled by analog/external signal
bit10 1: Operation command controlled by communication interface
bit11 1: Parameter locked

bit12 1: Enable to copy parameters from keypad
bit15–13 Reserved
2102H R Frequency command (XXX.XX Hz)
2103H R Output frequency (XXX.XX Hz)
Output current (XX.XX A). When current is higher than 655.35, it shifts the
2104H R
decimal as (XXX.X A). The decimal can refer to High byte of 211F.
2105H R DC bus Voltage (XXX.X V)
2106H R Output voltage (XXX.X V)
2107H R Current step number of multi-step speed operation
2108H R Reserved
2109H R Counter value
210AH R Power factor angle (XXX.X)
210CH R Actual motor speed (XXXXX rpm)
210DH R Reserved
12.1-09-9
Modbus
R/W Function
address
210EH R Reserved
210FH R Power output (X.XXX kW)
2116H R Multi-function display (Pr.00-04)
Maximum Operation Frequency (Pr.01-00) or Maximum User-defined Value
(Pr.00-26)
When Pr.00-26 is 0, this value is equal to Pr.01-00 setting
211BH R When Pr.00-26 is not 0, and the command source is keypad, this value =
Pr.00-24 × Pr.00-26 / Pr.01-00
When Pr.00-26 is not 0, and the command source is 485, this value =
Pr.09-10 × Pr.00-26 / Pr.01-00
211FH R High byte: decimal of current value (display)
Status monitor read only (22xx)

Modbus
RW Function
address
Display output current (A). When current is higher than 655.35, it shifts the
2200H R
decimal as (XXX.X A). The decimal can refer to High byte of 211F.
2201H R Display counter value ©
2202H R Actual output frequency (XXXXX Hz)
2203H R DC bus voltage (XXX.X V)
2204H R Output voltage (XXX.X V)
2205H R Power angle (XXX.X)
2206H R Display actual motor speed kW of U, V, W (XXXX.X kW)
Display motor speed in rpm estimated by the drive or encoder feedback
2207H R
(XXXXX rpm)
Display positive/negative output torque in %, estimated by the drive (XXX.X
2208H R
%)
2209H R Reserved
220AH R PID feedback value after enabling PID function (XXX.XX %)
Display signal of AVI1 analog input terminal, 0–10 V corresponds to
220BH R
0.00–100.00% (1.) (see NOTE 2 in Pr.00-04)
Display signal of ACI analog input terminal, 4–20 mA / 0–10 V corresponds
220CH R
to 0.00–100.00% (2.) (see NOTE 2 in Pr.00-04)
Display signal of AVI2 analog input terminal, -10 V–10 V corresponds to
220DH R
-100.00–100% (3.) (see NOTE 2 in Pr.00-04)
220EH R IGBT temperature of drive power module (XXX.X°C)
220FH R The temperature of capacitance (XXX.X°C)
The status of digital input (ON/OFF), refer to Pr.02-12
2210H R
(see NOTE 3 in Pr.00-04)
12.1-09-10
Modbus
RW Function
address
The status of digital output (ON/OFF), refer to Pr.02-18
2211H R
2212H R The multi-step speed that is executing (S)
The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input (d.)
2213H R
The corresponding CPU pin status of digital output (O.)
2214H R
2215H R Reserved
2216H R Reserved
2217H R Reserved
2218H R Reserved
2219H R Display times of counter overload (XXX.XX %)
221AH R GFF (XXX.XX %)
221BH R DC bus voltage ripples (XXX.X V)
221CH R PLC register D1043 data (C)
221DH R Reserved
221EH R User page displays the value in physical measure
221FH R Output Value of Pr.00-05 (XXX.XX Hz)
Number of motor turns when drive operates (saves when drive stops, and
2220H R
resets to zero when operating)
Operating position of the motor (saves when drive stops, and resets to zero
2221H R
when operating)
2222H R Fan speed of the drive (XXX %)
2223H R Control mode of the drive 0: speed mode
2224H R Carrier frequency of the drive (XXXX kHz)
2225H R Reserved
Drive
00b: No direction
status
01b: Forward
bit1–0
10b: Reverse
01b: Drive ready
2226H R bit3–2
10b: Error
0b: Motor drive did not output
bit4
1b: Motor drive did output
0b: No alarm
bit5
1b: Alarm
2228H R Reserve
2229H R kWh display (XXXX.X)
222AH R Reserve
12.1-09-11
Modbus
RW Function
address
222BH R Reserve
222CH R Reserve
222DH R Reserve
222EH R PID reference (XXX.XX %)
222FH R PID offset (XXX.XX %)
2230H R PID output frequency (XXX.XX Hz)
2231H R Hardware ID
Remote IO (26xx)
Modbus
RW Function
address
2600H R Each bit corresponds to different terminal input contact
2640H RW Each bit corresponds to different terminal output contact
2660H R AVI1 proportional value
2661H R ACI proportional value
2662H R AVI2 proportional value
266AH R Extension card AI10, 0.0–100.0% (EMC-A22A)
266BH R Extension card AI11, 0.0–100.0% (EMC-A22A)
26A0H RW AFM1 output proportional value
26A1H RW AFM2 output proportional value
26AAH RW Extension card AO10, 0.0–100.0% (EMC-A22A)
26ABH RW Extension card AO11, 0.0–100.0% (EMC-A22A)
5. Exception response:
When the drive is using the communication connection, if an error occurs, the drive responds to
the error code and sets the highest bit (bit7) of the command code to 1 (function code AND 80H),
then responds to the control system to signal that an error occurred.
If the keypad displays “CE-XX” as a warning message, “XX” is the error code at that time. Refer
to the table of error codes for communication error for reference.
Example:
ASCII mode: RTU mode:
STX ‘:’ Address 01H
‘0’ Function 86H
Address
‘1’ Exception code 02H
‘8’ CRC Check Low C3H
Function
‘6’ CRC Check High A1H
‘0’
Exception code
‘2’
‘7’
LRC Check
‘7’
CR
END
LF
12.1-09-12
The explanation of exception codes:

Exception code Explanation
1 Function code is not supported or unrecognized.
2 Address is not supported or unrecognized.
3 Data is not correct or unrecognized.
4 Failure to execute this function code
10 Transformation for over-time duration
 Communication Response Delay Time
Default: 2.0
Settings 0.0–200.0 ms
 If the host controller does not finish the transmitting / receiving process, you can use this
parameter to set the response delay time after the AC motor drive receives communication
command as shown in the following picture.
Communication Main Frequency

Default: 60.00
 When you set Pr.00-20 to 1 (RS-485 serial communication input), the AC motor drive saves the
last Frequency command into Pr.09-10 when there is abnormal power off or momentary power
loss. When power is restored, the AC motor drive operates with the frequency in Pr.09-10 if no
new Frequency command input. When a Frequency command of RS-485 changes (the
frequency command source must be set as Modbus), this parameter also changes.
 Block Transfer 1
Default: 0000
Settings 0000–FFFFh
12.1-09-13
 There is a group of block transfer parameters available in the AC motor drive (Pr.09-11–
Pr.09-26). Using communication code 03H, you can store the parameters (Pr.09-11–Pr.09-26)
that you want to read.
 For example: according to the Address List (as shown in the table below), Pr.01-42 is shown as
012A. Set Pr.09-11 to 012Ah (the minimum voltage of Pr.01-42 M2 is 2.0 V), and use Pr.09-11
(communication address 090B) to read the communication parameter, the read value is 2.0.
AC motor drive GG is the parameter group, nn is the parameter number; for
GGnnH
parameters example, the address of Pr.04-10 is 040AH.
 Mind if the transfer parameters are read only. If the data is written to read-only paraemters from
the upper unit, a communication error may occur.
Communication Decoding Method

Default: 1
Settings 0: Decoding Method 1 (20xx)
1: Decoding Method 2 (60xx)
 The EtherCAT communication card only supports Decoding Method 2 (60xx).
Decoding Method 1 Decoding Method 2
Digital Keypad Digital keypad controls the drive action regardless of decoding method 1 or 2.
External Terminal External terminal controls the drive action regardless of decoding method 1 or 2.
Source of
RS-485 Refer to address: 2000h–20FFh Refer to address: 6000h–60FFh
Operation
CANopen Refer to index: 2020-01h–2020-FFh Refer to index: 2060-01h–2060-FFh
Control
Communication Card Refer to address: 2000h–20FFh Refer to address: 6000h–60FFh
PLC PLC commands controls the drive action regardless of decoding method 1 or 2.
Internal Communication Protocol

Default: 0
Settings 1: BACnet
0: Modbus 485
-1: Internal Communication Slave 1
-10: Internal Communication Master
-12: Internal PLC Control
 When it is defined as internal communication, refer to Section 16-10 for Main Control Terminal
of Internal Communication.
 When it is defined as internal PLC control, refer to Section 16-12 for Remote IO Control
Application (using MODRW).
12.1-09-14
 PLC Command Force to 0

Default: 0000
Setting bit0: Before PLC scans, set the PLC target frequency = 0
 Defines whether the Frequency command or the Speed command must be cleared to zero or not
before the PLC starts the next scan.
PLC Address
Default: 2
Settings 1–254
CANopen Slave Address
Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
0–127
CANopen Speed
Default 0
Settings 0: 1 Mbps
1: 500 Kbps
2: 250 Kbps
3: 125 Kbps
4: 100 Kbps (Delta only)
5: 50 Kbps
CANopen Warning Record
Default: Ready only
Settings bit0: CANopen Guarding Time-out
bit1: CANopen Heartbeat Time-out
bit2: CANopen SYNC Time-out
bit3: CANopen SDO Time-out
bit4: CANopen SDO Buffer Overflow
bit5: CANopen hardware disconnection warning (Can Bus Off)
bit6: Error protocol of CANopen
bit8: The setting values of CANopen indexes are fail
bit9: The setting value of CANopen address is fail
bit10: The checksum value of CANopen indexes is fail
CANopen Decoding Method
Default: 1
Settings 0: Disable (Delta-defined decoding method)
1: Enable (CANopen DS402 Standard protocol)
CANopen Communication Status
Default: Read Only
Settings 0: Node Reset State
1: Com Reset State
2: Boot up State
12.1-09-15
3: Pre-operation State
4: Operation State
5: Stop State
CANopen Control Status
Default: Read Only
Settings 0: Not ready for use state
1: Inhibit start state
2: Ready to switch on state
3: Switched on state
4: Enable operation state
7: Quick stop active state
13: Error reaction activation state
14: Error state
CANopen Master Function
Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Enable
CANopen Master Address
Default: 100
Settings 0–127
CANopen Extension Setting
Default: 0002h
Settings bit0: Update Index 604F and 6050 to Acceleration / Deceleration time 1
bit0 = 0: Enabled (default)
bit0 = 1: Disabled
bit1: Distinguish the CANopen identity code by models or by series
bit1 = 0: Distinguish the CANopen identity code by models
bit1 = 1: Distinguish the CANopen identity code by series
 bit0 = 0, the drive directly controls Acceleration time 1 (Pr.01-12) and Deceleration time 1
(Pr.01-13).
 bit1 = 0: each model of different series of drives has its own EDS file, this setting is more
complicated to use.
bit1 = 1: distinguish the CANopen identity code by the drive’s serie, which requires only one
EDS file.
BACnet MS / TP Node Address

Default: 10
Settings 0–127
BACnet Baud Rate
Default: 38.4
Settings 9.6–76.8 Kbps
12.1-09-16
BACnet Device ID L
Default: 10
Settings 0–65535
BACnet Device ID H
Default: 0
Settings 0–63
BACnet Max Address
Default: 127
Settings 0–127
BACnet Password
Default: 0
Settings 0–65535
Identifications for Communication Card
Default: Read only
Settings 0: No communication card
1: DeviceNet Slave
2: Profibus-DP Slave
3: CANopen Slave / Master
4: Modbus-TCP Slave
5: EtherNet / IP Slave
8: BACnet IP
12: PROFINET
Firmware Version of Communication Card
Default: Read only
Settings Read only
Product Code
Default: Read only
Settings Read only
Error Code
Default: Read only
Settings Read only
 Communication Card Address (for DeviceNet or PROFIBUS)

Default: 1
Settings DeviceNet: 0–63
Profibus-DP: 1–125
12.1-09-17
 Communication Card Speed Setting (for DeviceNet)

Default: 2
Settings Standard DeviceNet:
0: 125 Kbps
1: 250 Kbps
2: 500 Kbps
3: 1 Mbps (Delta only)
Non standard DeviceNet : (Delta only)
0: 10 Kbps
1: 20 Kbps
2: 50 Kbps
3: 100 Kbps
4: 125 Kbps
5: 250 Kbps
6: 500 Kbps
7: 800 Kbps
8: 1 Mbps
 Additional Settings for Communication Card Speed (for DeviceNet)
Default: 0
Settings 0: Standard DeviceNet
In this mode, the baud rate can only be 125 Kbps, 250 Kbps, and 500 Kbps
in standard DeviceNet speed.
1: Non-standard DeviceNet
In this mode, the DeviceNet baud rate can be same as that for CANopen
(0–8).
 Use this parameter with Pr.09-71.
 0: The baud rate can only be set to 125 Kbps, 250 Kbps and 500 Kbps as a standard DeviceNet
speed.
 1: The DeviceNet communication rate can be the same as that for CANopen (setting 0–8).
 Communication Card IP Configuration (for Modbus TCP)
Default: 0
Settings 0: Static IP
1: DynamicIP (DHCP)
 0: Set the IP address manually.
 1: IP address is dynamically set by the host controller.
 Communication Card IP Address 1 (for Modbus TCP)
Default: 0
Settings 0–65535
 Use Pr.09-76–09-79 with a communication card.
12.1-09-18
 Communication Card Address Mask 1 (for Modbus TCP)

Default: 0
Settings 0–65535
 Communication Card Gateway Address 1 (for Modbus TCP)
Default: 0
Settings 0–65535
 Communication Card Password (Low word) (for Modbus TCP)
 Communication Card Password (High word) (for Modbus TCP)
Default: 0
Settings 0–99
 Reset Communication Card (for Modbus TCP)
Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Reset to defaults
 Additional Setting for the Communication Card (for Modbus TCP)
Default: 1
Settings bit0: Enable IP Filter
bit1: Enable internet parameters (1bit)
When the IP address is set, this bit is enabled. After updating the
parameters for the communication card, this bit changes to disabled.
bit2: Enable login password (1bit)
When you enter the login password, this bit is enabled. After updating the
communication card parameters, this bit changes to disable.
Communication Card Status (for Modbus TCP)
Default: 0
Settings bit0: Enable password
When the communication card is set with a password, this bit is enabled.
When the password is cleared, this bit is disabled.
12.1-09-19
10 Sensorless Motor Control Parameters

 Treatment for Speed Observer Feedback Fault
Default: 2
 Detection Time of Speed Observer Feedback Fault
Default: 1.0
0: Disable
 When speed observer outputs an abnormal signal, or the rotation direction is different with the
detected direction from speed observer, and the fault time exceeds the detection time of speed
observer feedback fault (Pr.10-09), a reverse direction of the speed feedback (SdRv) fault occurs.
Refer to Chapter 14 for solutions.
 Speed Observer Stall Level

Default: 115
Settings 0–120%
0: Disable
 Determines the fault level of feedback signal. The maximum operation frequency for Pr.01-00 =
100%
 Detection Time of Speed Observer Stall

Default: 0.1
 Speed Observer Stall Action
Default: 2
 When the drive output frequency exceeds the speed observer stall level (Pr.10-10), the drive
starts to count the time. When the error time exceeds the speed observer stall detection time
(Pr.10-11), an over speed rotation feedback (SdOr) fault occurs. Refer to Chapter 14 for
solutions.
 Speed Observer Slip Range

Default: 50
Settings 0–50%
0: Disable
12.1-10-1
 Detection Time of Speed Observer Slip

Default: 0.5
 Speed Observer Stall and Slip Error Action
Default: 2
 When the value of (rotation speed – motor frequency) exceeds the Pr.10-13 setting, and the
detection time exceeds Pr.10-14; the drive starts to count the time. If the detection time exceeds
Pr.10-14, a large deviation of speed feedback (SdDe) fault occurs. Refer to Chapter 14 for
solutions.
 I/F Mode, Current Command

Default: 40
Settings 0–150% rated current of the motor
 Sets the current command for the drive in low speed area (low speed area: frequency command
< Pr.10-39). When the motor stalls on heavy-duty start-up or forward / reverse with load,
increase the parameter value. If the inrush current is too high and causes oc stall, then
decrease the parameter value.
 When Pr.00-11 is set to 8 (SynRM Sensorless), the maximum setting value for I/F mode Current
command is 15%. The application for this parameter extends to high-speed zone and
flux-weakening zone.
 When Pr.00-11 is set to 8 (SynRM Sensorless) and the drive operates in flux-weakening zone, if
the speed is restricted and cannot accelerate, even causes the observer lost control, adjust the
setting for Pr.10-31.
 PM FOC Sensorless Speed Estimator Bandwidth

Default: 5.00
 Sets the speed estimator bandwidth. Adjust the parameter to change the stability and the
accuracy of the motor speed.
 If there is low frequency vibration (the waveform is similar to the sine wave) during the process,
then increase the bandwidth. If there is high frequency vibration (the waveform shows extreme
vibration and is like a spur), then decrease the bandwidth.
 PM FOC Sensorless Speed Estimator Bandwidth (Low Speed)

(applied to 230V/460V models)
Default: 1.00
 Works only when Speed mode is set as IPM sensorless / SRM sensorless (Pr.00-11 = 7 or 8).
 Increase this parameter to enhance the loading performance during start-up and low-speed
operation.
12.1-10-2
 When the motor speed during start-up or operation is lower than the frequency to switch from
I/F mode to PM sensorless mode (Pr.10-39), and the motor speed oscillates, adjust the setting
for this parameter.
 When Pr.05-33 is set to 3 (SynRM), the unit changes to Pu, the setting upper and lower limit for
Pr.10-33 change to 3.00–0.01 and the default is 1.0.
 PM Sensorless Speed Estimator Low-pass Filter Gain
Default: 1.00
 Changes the response speed of the speed estimator.
 If there is low frequency vibration (the waveform is similar to the sine wave) during the process,
then increase the gain. If there is high frequency vibration (the waveform shows extreme
vibration and is like a spur), then decrease the gain.
 When Pr.05-33 is set to 3 (SynRM), the setting upper limit is 10.00.
 AMR (Kp) Gain (applied to 230V / 460V models)

Default: 1.00
 When Pr.00-11 is set to 8 (SynRM), the default for this parameter is 0.40.
 AMR (Ki) Gain (applied to 230V / 460V models)

Default: 0.20
 When Pr.00-11 is set to 8 (SynRM), the default for this parameter is 2.00.
 AMR is the abbreviation for Active Magnetic Regulator (Kp / Ki), it affects the response of
magnetic regulation in flux-weakening zone.
 If the input voltage or DC bus plummets in the flux-weakening zone (for example, a sudden
insufficient voltage due to unstable power net, or DC bus plummets because of a sudden
loading), causes the ACR diverges and oc fault occurs, then increase the gain. If the Id value of a
spur generates large noise in high frequency output current, decrease the gain to reduce the
noise. But decreasing the gain will slow down the response speed.
 Frequency to Switch from I/F Mode to PM Sensorless Mode

Default: 20.00
 The setting upper limit is the same as that for Pr.01-00 (Maximum operation frequency).
 Sets the frequency for switching from low frequency to high frequency, and sets the switch point
for high and low frequencies of the speed observer.
 If the switch frequency is too low, the motor does not generate enough back-EMF to let the
speed observer measure the right position and speed of the rotor, causing stall and oc when
running at the switch frequency.
 If the switch frequency is too high, the active range of I/F is too wide, which generates a larger
current without energy saving. (If the current value for Pr.10-31 is too high, the high switch
frequency makes the drive continue to output with Pr.10-31 setting value.)
 When Pr.00-11 is set to 8 (SynRM), the default for this parameter is 10.00 Hz.
12.1-10-3
 Frequency to Switch from PM Sensorless Mode to I/F Mode

Default: 20.00
 The setting upper limit is the same as that for Pr.01-00 (Maximum operation frequency).
 Sets the frequency for switching from high frequency to low frequency, and sets the switch point
for high and low frequencies of the speed observer.
 If the switch frequency is too low, the motor does not generate enough back-EMF to let the
speed observer measure the right position and speed of the rotor when running at the switch
frequency.
 If the switch frequency is too high, the active range of I/F is too wide, which generates a larger
current without energy saving. (If the current value for Pr.10-31 is too high, the high switch
frequency makes the drive continue to output with Pr.10-31 setting value.)
 I/F Mode, Id Current Low-Pass Filter Time

Default: 0.2
 Sets the filter time for Pr.10-31. Smoothly increases the magnetic field to the current command
setting value under the I/F mode.
 If you want to slowly increase the size of Id, increase the filter time to avoid a Step phenomenon
occurs when starting current output. When decrease the filter time (minimum value is 0), the
current rises faster, then a Step phenomenon occurs.
 Initial Angle Detection Pulse Value

Default: 1.0
Settings 0.0–3.0 times rated current of the motor
 The angle detection is fixed to Pr.10-53 = 2 (High frequency injection) or 3 (Pulse injection).
 The parameter influences the value of the pulse during the angle detection. The larger the pulse,
the higher the accuracy of rotator’s position. A larger pulse might cause oc.
 Increase the parameter when the running direction and the command are opposite during
start-up. If oc occurs at start-up, then decrease the parameter.
 Refer to Section 12-2 Adjustment & Application for detailed motor adjustment procedure.
 Zero Voltage Time during Start-up
Default: 0.000
 This parameter is valid only when the setting for Pr.07-12 (Speed Tracking during Start-up) = 0.
 When the motor is in static status at start-up, this increases the accuracy when estimating
angles. In order to put the motor in static state, set the three-phase drive output to 0 V to the
motor. The Pr.10-49 setting time is the length of time when three-phase output at 0 V.
 It is possible that even when you apply this parameter, the motor cannot go into the static state
because of inertia or some external force. If the motor does not go into the static state in 0.2
seconds, increase the setting value appropriately.
 If Pr.10-49 is too high, the start-up time is longer. If it is too low, the braking performance is
weak.
12.1-10-4
 Injection Frequency
Default: 500
Settings 0–1200 Hz
 This parameter is a high frequency injection command in PM SVC control mode and usually you
do not need to adjust it. If a motor’s rated frequency (for example, 400 Hz) is too close to the
frequency setting for this parameter (that is, the Default of 500 Hz), it affects the accuracy of the
angle detection. Refer to the setting for Pr.01-01 before you adjust this parameter.
 If the setting value for Pr.00-17 is lower than Pr.10-51 × 10, then increase the frequency of the
carrier wave.
 Pr.10-51 is valid only when Pr.10-53 = 2.
 When Pr.00-11 is set to 8 (SynRM), the default for this parameter is 400.
 Injection Magnitude
Default:
15.0/ 30.0/ 30.0/ 30.0
230V models: 0.0–100.0 V
460V models: 0.0–200.0 V
575V models: 0.0–200.0 V
690V models: 0.0–200.0 V
 The parameter is the magnitude command for the high frequency injection signal in IPM
Sensorless control mode.
 Increasing the parameter can increase the accuracy of the angle estimation, but the
electromagnetic noise might be louder if the setting value is too high.
 The system uses this parameter when the motor’s parameter is “Auto”. This parameter
influences the angle estimation accuracy.
 When the ratio of the salient pole (Lq/Ld) is lower, increase Pr.10-52 to make the angle
detection more accurate.
 Pr.10-52 is valid only when Pr.10-53 = 2.
 When Pr.05-33 is set to 3 (SynRM), the unit is percentage (%); the setting upper limit and lower
limit is 50–10%, and the default is 30%.
 PM Initial Rotor Position Detection Method
Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Using I/F current command (Pr.10-31) to attract the rotor to zero degrees
3: Pulse injection
 When the Speed mode is set to PMSVC (Pr.00-11 = 2) or PM Sensorless (Pr.00-11 = 6):
 For IPM application, set Pr.10-53 = 2.
 For SPM application, set Pr.10-53 = 3.
 If the above settings cause problems, then set this parameter to 1.
 When the Speed mode is set to SynRM Sensorless (Pr.00-11 = 8), you do not need to set this
parameter.
12.1-10-5
 Magnetic Flux Linkage Estimate Low-speed Gain (applied to 230V / 460Vmodels)

Default: 100
Settings 10–1000%
 This parameter is valid only when the speed mode is set to PM Sensorlss control mode
(Pr.00-11 = 6).
 Increase this parameter to enhance the loading capacity during start-up.
 Low-speed zone means motor speed under 1/5 of motor’s rated speed; high-speed zone
means speed beyond 1/5 of motor’s rated speed.
 Magnetic Flux Linkage Estimate High-speed Gain (applied to 230V / 460V models)
Default: 100
Settings 10–1000%
 This parameter is valid only when the speed mode is set to PM Sensorless (Pr.00-11 = 6) /
SynRM Sensorless control modes (Pr.00-11 = 8).
 Increase this parameter to enhance the loading performance in high-speed zone and improve
the response.
 Decrease this parameter when there is a speed oscillation in the flux-weakening zone.
 When Pr.05-33 is set to 3 (SynRM), the unit is Pu; the setting upper and lower limits are 3.0–0.1
and the default is 1.0.
 Kp of Phase-locked Loop (applied to 230V / 460V models)

Default: 100
Settings 10–1000%
 Increase this parameter to enhance the loading performance in high-speed zone and improve
the response.
 Decrease this parameter when there is a high frequency vibration in the speed output
frequency.
 When Pr.05-33 is set to 3 (SynRM), the unit is Hz; the setting upper and lower limits are 50–5
and the default is 30.
 Ki of Phase-locked Loop (applied to 230V / 460V models)

Default: 100
Settings 10–1000%
 Increase this parameter to increase the speed response during acceleration and deceleration.
 Mutual Inductance Gain Compensation (applied to 230V / 460V models)

Default: 100
 This parameter is valid only when the speed mode is set to SynRM sensorlss control mode
(Pr.00-11 = 8).
 If the motor’s loading performance during start-up is poor or the speed is lower than the
frequency switch from I/F mode to PM sensorless mode (Pr.10-39), adjust this parameter to
improve the loading performance.
12.1-10-6
11 Advanced Parameters (applied to 230V / 460V models)

In this parameter group, ASR stands for Adjust Speed Regulator
System Control
Default: 0000h
Settings bit0: Auto-tuning for ASR and APR
bit6: 0 Hz linear-cross
bit7: Save or do not save the frequency
 bit0 = 0: Manual adjustment for ASR and APR gain, Pr.11-06–Pr.11-11 are valid and
Pr.11-03–Pr.11-05 are invalid.
bit0 = 1: Auto-adjustment for ASR and APR gain, the system automatically generates an ASR
setting, Pr.11-06–Pr.11-11 are invalid and Pr.11-03–Pr.11-05 are valid.
 When the drive needs to keep a certain torque at zero-speed, or it needs a steady frequency
output at extreme low speed, increase Pr.11-05 zero-speed bandwidth appropriately. If there is
serious output current vibration that cause the drive vibrates in high-speed area, then decrease
the high-speed bandwidth.
For example:
Response:
Manual gain
[Pr.11-10, Pr.11-11] > [Pr.11-06, Pr.11-07] > [Pr.11-08, Pr.11-09]
Auto gain Pr.11-05 = 15 Hz, Pr.11-03 = 10 Hz, Pr.11-04 = 8 Hz
12.1-11-1
 bit6 0 Hz linear-cross function: keeps the S-Curve in linear-cross the 0 Hz point when the
S-curves for acceleration / deceleration time (Pr.01-24–Pr.01-27) are set, and the forward /
reverse run cross 0 Hz.
bit6 = 1: The S-curves for acceleration / deceleration time (Pr.01-24–Pr.01-27) do NOT affect the
drive starts and stops. Forward / reverse rotation crosses the zero point in linear.
bit6 = 0: The S-curves for acceleration / deceleration time (Pr.01-24–Pr.01-27) affect the drive
starts and stops. Forward / reverse rotation crosses the zero point after the S-Curve.
Pr.11-00 bit6 = 1 Pr.11-00 bit6 = 0
 bit 7 = 0: Save the frequency before power is OFF. The keypad displays the saved frequency
after cycle the power.
bit7 = 1: Do not save the frequency before power is OFF. The keypad displays 0.00 Hz after cycle
the power.
Per Unit of System Inertia

Default: 256
Settings 1–65535 (256 = 1PU)
 When Pr.11-01 = 256, it is 1PU. So if you use a 2 HP motor, the 2 HP motor inertia is 6.6 kg-cm2
according to the rotor inertia table in Pr.05-38. If Pr.11-01 = 10000 after tuning, the system inertia
is (10000 / 256) x 6.6 kg-cm2.
12.1-11-2
 If the Iq current command from ASR has high-frequency glitch, then decrease the setting. If the
response time of sudden loading is too slow, then increase the setting.
 ASR1 / ASR2 Switch Frequency

Default: 7.00
 Sets the low-speed and high-speed ASR switching point in the FOC area. Provides flexibility to
meet two needs: in the high-speed region of the estimator switch point it has a high response,
and in the low-speed region of the estimator switch point it has a lower response. The
recommended switching point is higher than Pr.10-39.
 A low setting does not cover Pr.10-39. If the setting is too high, the high-speed range is too
narrow.
 When Pr.00-11 is set to 8 (SynRM), the default for this parameter is 10.00 Hz.
 ASR1 Low-speed Bandwidth

Default: 10
Settings 1–40 Hz (IM) / 1–100 Hz (PM) / 1–30 Hz (SynRM)
 ASR2 High-speed Bandwidth
Default: 10
 Zero-speed Bandwidth
Default: 10
 After estimating inertia and setting Pr.11-00 bit0 = 1 (auto-tuning), you can adjust Pr.11-03,
Pr.11-04 and Pr.11-05 separately by speed response. The larger the setting value, the faster the
response. Pr.11-02 is the switch frequency between the low-speed / high-speed bandwidth.
 When Pr.00-11 = 8 (SynRM), the setting upper limit is 30, and the default is 5.
 ASR 1 Gain
Default: 10
 ASR 1 Integral Time
Default: 0.100
 ASR 2 Gain
Default: 10
 ASR 2 Integral Time
Default: 0.100
 ASR Gain of Zero Speed
Default: 10
12.1-11-3
 ASR Integral Time of Zero Speed

Default: 0.100
 ASR Speed Feed Forward Gain
Default: 0
Settings 0–150%
 This function enables when Pr.11-00 bit0 = 1.
 Increase the setting for Pr.11-12 to reduce the command tracking difference, and improve the
speed response. Use this function for speed tracking applications.
 Set Pr.11-01 correctly to get excellent improvement of the speed response.
 PDFF Gain Value

Default: 30
Settings 0–200%
 This parameter is invalid when Pr.05-24 = 1.
 This parameter is valid only when Pr.11-00 bit0 = 1.
 After you estimate and set Pr.11-00 bit0 = 1 (auto-tuning), use Pr.11-13 to reduce overshoot.
However, a shift of the curve may occur earlier. In this case, you can set Pr.11-13 = 0 first, and
then increase the setting value to "a condition with best acceleration and without overshoot"
when the acceleration time meets your application but overshoot occurs.
 Increasing Pr.11-13 improves the overshoot of speed tracking, but an excessive value may
reduce the transient response.
 Increasing Pr.11-13 enhances the system stiffness in high-speed steady state, and reduce the
speed transient fluctuation at a sudden loading.
 Ensure that you set Pr.11-01 system inertia correctly to get excellent improvement of the speed
response.
12.1-11-4
 ASR Output Low Pass Filter Time

Default: 0.008
 Sets the ASR command filter time.
 Notch Filter Depth

Default: 0
Settings 0–100 dB
 Notch Filter Frequency
Default: 0.00
 A notch filter is a filter that attenuates a signal in a specific frequency band.
 The notch filter also slows down the response speed in the frequency band to avoid mechanical
resonance.
 The higher the setting value for Pr.11-15, the better the mechanical resonance is suppressed.
 The notch filter frequency should be equal to the mechanical frequency resonance.
 The notch filter bandwidth is the frequency range in which the notch filter is active.
 Forward Motor Torque Limit Quadrant I

 Forward Regenerative Torque Limit Quadrant II
 Reverse Motor Torque Limit Quadrant III
 Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit Quadrant IV
Default: 500
Settings 0–500%
 VF and SVC mode:
Pr.11-17–Pr.11-20 limit the output current, the percentage base value is the drive’s rated current
(not the motor’s rated current). The minimum value between Pr.11-17–11-20 and Pr.06-12
becomes the current output limit. In acceleration and steady state operation, when the output
current reaches the limit, the ocA (over-current during acceleration) protection or over-current
stall prevention under steady-state operation acts. The output frequency drops, and recovers
when the output current is lower than the limit value.
 Calculation equation for the motor rated torque:
P (W )
Motor rated torque = T ( N .M )  ; P(W) value = Pr.05-02 (Pr.05-14);
 (rad / s)
RPM  2
ω(rad/s) value = Pr.05-03 (Pr.05-15);  rad / s
60
12.1-11-5
 All control mode is based on 100% of the motor rated current except for these four modes:
IM: VF, SVC and PM: PMSVC modes.
 When Pr.00-11 = 8 (SynRM), the default for Pr.11-17–Pr.11-20 is 200.
 Flux Weakening Curve for Motor 1 Gain Value

Default: 90
Settings 0–200%
 Flux Weakening Curve for Motor 2 Gain Value
Default: 90
Settings 0–200%
 Adjusts the output voltage for the flux-weakening curve.
 For the spindle application, use this adjustment method:
1. Run the motor to the highest frequency.
2. Observe the output voltage.
3. Adjust the Pr.11-21 (motor 1) or Pr.11-22 (motor 2) setting to make the output voltage reach
the motor rated voltage.
4. The larger the setting value, the greater the output voltage.
12.1-11-6
 Flux Weakening Area Speed Response

Default: 65
Settings 0: Disable
0–150%
 Controls the speed in the flux weakening area. The larger the value, the faster the acceleration/
deceleration. In normal condition, you do not need to adjust this parameter.
12.1-11-7
12 Pump Parameters  You can set this parameter during operation.
Circulation Control
Default: 0
Settings 0: No operation
1: Fixed Time Circulation (by time)
2: Fixed Quantity Circulation
3: Fixed Quantity Control
4: Fixed Time Circulation + Fixed Quantity Circulation
5: Fixed Time Circulation + Fixed Quantity Control
 In this mode, the CP2000 can control up to eight motors at a time. The total number of motors is
determined by Pr.12-01. In accordance with the Fixed Time Circulation (Pr.12-02), you can adjust
the switching time between Start and Stop for each motor. When an operating motor reaches the
time setting for Pr.12-02, the CP2000 stops that motor according to the setting for Pr.00-22 (Stop
method). After the delay time setting for Pr.12-03, next motor starts operating. See diagram
below.
Diagram 12-1: Sequential Diagram of Fixed Time Free Runs Circulation (by time)
 Disable Motors’ Output

Setting the multi-function input commands as Disable Motors’ Output can stop the corresponding
motors. The following table lists the settings:
Pr.02-01–Pr.02-06 = 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
Disable Motors’ Output ALL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
When a motor’s output is disabled, this motor coasts to stop.
12.1-12-1
 Wiring: Fixed Time Circulation (by time) can control up to eight motors. Diagram 12-2 shows an
example of controlling four motors at the same time.
Diagram 12-2: Wiring
12.1-12-2
Number of Motors to be Connected

Default: 1
Settings 1–8
 Number of Motors: maximum of eight motors. After setting the number of connected motors, the
multi-function output terminals automatically follow the setting as shown in the table below.
Pr.12-01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
Pr.02-13 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55
Pr.02-14 56 56 56 56 56 56 56
Pr.02-15 57 57 57 57 57 57
Pr.02-36 58 58 58 58 58
Pr.02-37 59 59 59 59
Pr.02-38 60 60 60
Pr.02-39 61 61
Pr.02-40 62
Table 1: Setting of Multi-function Output Terminal for Circulating Motors
Operating Time of Each Motor (minutes)

Default: 0
Settings 0–65500 minutes
 Sets the fixed time for circulation. If Pr.12-02 = 0, stop the timing. The currently running motors
continue operating until a Stop command is given.
Delay Time due to the Acceleration (or the Increment ) at Motor Switching (seconds)
Default: 1.0
Settings 0.0–3600.0 seconds
 Sets the delay time when switching motors. When the currently running motors reach the time
setting for Pr.12-02, the CP2000 uses the delay time setting for Pr.12-03 and then switches to run
the next motors.
Delay Time due to the Deceleration (or the Decrement) at Motor Switching (seconds)
Default: 1.0
 Sets the delay time of motor switching during the deceleration, the unit is second.
 Delay time due to Fixed Quantity Circulation at Motor Switching (seconds)

Default: 10.0
 Sets the fixed quantity circulation with PID
Sequential Diagram
In this mode, the CP2000 can control up to four motors to increase flow quantity and pressure
range control. When controlling the flow quantity, the motors are in parallel connection. When
12.1-12-3
controlling the pressure range, the motors are in series connection.

To increase the flow quantity or pressure range, the CP2000 increases the first motor’s pressure
from 0 Hz to the largest operating frequency. If the output frequency reaches the frequency
setting for Pr.12-06 and delay time for Pr.12-05, the CP2000 delays the time setting for Pr.12-03.
CP2000 then switches to the next motor to use mains electricity and delays the time setting for
Pr.12-03 to run the next motor. If necessary, other motors are activated in sequence. See
sequential diagram of 12-3 and 12-4.
Diagram 12-3: Sequence of Fixed quantity circulation with PID – Increasing Demand
12.1-12-4
Diagram 12-4: Sequence of switching motors at Fixed Quantity Circulation with PID
– Increasing Demands
12.1-12-5
However, if the decreasing demands for flow quantity and pressure are too big, the
CP2000 stops the current operating motors and waits for the delay time setting for Pr.12-04. It
continues doing this until the last motor stops using mains electricity. See sequential diagram
12-5 and 12-6 below.
Diagram 12-5: Sequence of Fixed Quantity Circulation with PID – Decreasing Demands
12.1-12-6
Diagram 12-6: Sequence of switching motors at Fixed Quantity Circulation with PID
– Decreasing Demands
 Parameter Setting
Parameter
Description
setting
Pr.12-00=2 Choose Fixed Quantity Circulation with PID
Number of Motors: maximum four motors. After you set the number of motors to be
connected at the same time, the multi-function output terminals automatically follow the
setting as shown in the table below.
Pr.12-01 01 01 02 02 03 03 04 04
Pr.02-13 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 Motor 1 by Drive
Pr.02-14 56 56 56 56 56 56 56 Motor 1 by Mains
Pr.12-01=X Pr.02-15 57 57 57 57 57 57 Motor 2 by Drive
Pr.02-36 58 58 58 58 58 Motor 2 by Mains
Pr.02-37 59 59 59 59 Motor 3 by Drive
Pr.02-38 60 60 60 Motor 3 by Mains
Pr.02-39 61 61 Motor 4 by Drive
Pr.02-40 62 Motor 4 by Mains
Table 2: Setting of Multi-function Output Terminal on Circulating Motors
Pr.12-03 = X Delay Time due to the Acceleration (or the Increment) at Motor Switching (unit: sec.)
Pr.12-04 = X Delay Time due to the Deceleration (or the Decrement) at Motor Switching (unit: sec.)
Pr.12-05 = X Delay time while Fixed Quantity Circulation at Motor Switching with PID (unit: sec.)
Pr.12-06 = X Frequency when switching motors at Fixed Quantity Circulation (Hz)
Pr.12-09 = X Delay time for the next motor output when the demand increases.
12.1-12-7
 Disable Motor Output

Set the multi-function input commands to Disable Motors’ Output can stop corresponding motors.
The settings are:
Pr.02-01–Pr.02-06= 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
Disable Motor’s Output ALL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 Fixed Quantity Circulation with PID can control up to four motors. Diagram 12-7 below shows an
example of controlling 4 motors.
Diagram 12-7
12.1-12-8
 Frequency when Switching Motors at Fixed Quantity Circulation (Hz)

Default: 60.00
 Sets the drive’s output frequency at which the system prepares to switch motors.
Action when Fixed Quantity Circulation Breaks Down

Default: 0
Settings 0: Turn off all output
1: Motors powered by mains electricity continues to operate
 Frequency for Stopping Auxiliary Motor (Hz)

Default: 0
 When the output frequency is smaller than the Pr.12-08 and remains at the time setting for
Pr.12-04, the CP2000 shuts down the motors one by one.
 Fixed Quantity Control with PID
In this mode, the CP2000 can control up to eight motors to increase flow quantity and pressure
range control.
The CP2000 connects directly to a main motor while the rest of the motors use mains electricity
and are controlled by a relay. When controlling flow quantity, the motors are in parallel connection.
When controlling pressure range, the motors are in series connection.
To increase the flow quantity or pressure range, the CP2000 increases the main motor’s pressure
from 0 Hz to the largest operating frequency. If necessary, the CP2000 switches the motors to
use mains electricity in sequence. See sequential diagram 12-8 and 12-9.
12.1-12-9
Diagram 12-8: Sequence of Fixed Quantity Control with PID – Increasing Demand
12.1-12-10
Diagram 12-9: Sequence of switching motors at Fixed Quantity Control with PID
– Increasing Demand
12.1-12-11
However, if the flow quantity or pressure is too large, the CP2000 stops, one by one, the motors use
mains electricity until the CP2000 decreases the main motor’s frequency to 0 Hz. See Diagram
12-10 and Diagram 12-11.
Diagram 12-10: Sequence of Fixed Quantity Control with PID – Decreasing Demand
12.1-12-12
Diagram 12-11: Sequence of switching motors at Fixed Quantity Control with PID
– Decreasing Demand
 Parameter setting:
Parameter
Description
Setting
Pr.12-00 = 3 Choose Fixed Quantity Control
Number of Motors: maximum of eight motors. After you set the number of connected
motors, the multi-function output terminals automatically follow the setting as shown in the
table below.
Pr.12-01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
Pr.02-13 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 Motor 1 by Mains
Pr.02-14 56 56 56 56 56 56 56 Motor 2 by Mains
Pr.12-01 = X Pr.02-15 57 57 57 57 57 57 Motor 3 by Mains

Pr.02-36 58 58 58 58 58 Motor 4 by Mains
Pr.02-37 59 59 59 59 Motor 5 by Mains
Pr.02-38 60 60 60 Motor 6 by Mains
Pr.02-39 61 61 Motor 7 by Mains
Pr.02-40 62 Motor 8 by Mains
Table 2: Setting of Multi-function Output Terminal on Circulating Motors
Pr.12-05 = X Delay time for Fixed Quantity Circulation at Motor Switching (seconds)
Pr.12-06 = X Frequency for switching motors at Fixed Quantity Circulation (Hz)
12.1-12-13
 Disable Motor’s Output

Set the multi-function input commands to Disable Motors’ Output can stop the corresponding
motors.
The settings are:
Pr.02-01–Pr.02-06= 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
Disable Motor’s Output ALL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 Wiring: Fixed Quantity Control can control up to eight motors. Diagram 12-12 is an example of
controlling four motors at the same time.
Diagram 12-12
12.1-12-14
 Fixed Time circulation and Fixed quantity circulation with PID

This mode combines Fixed Time Circulation and Fixed Quantity Circulation with PID. This is to
prevent motors from becoming rusty if they are not in use for a long period. If some motors are
not activated, set the fixed time circulation to run the motors one by one to make sure each of
them is running.
If all the motors are running and the water pressure is sufficient, the fixed time circulation is not
enabled. If motor 1 and motor 2 run to reach a balance in water pressure and the time reaches
the setting for Pr.12-02, motor 1 runs without using mains electricity (runs by the motor drive) and
motor 2 decelerates to stop.
When the motor 2 reaches the frequency setting at Pr.12-06 and the time setting for Pr.12-05, it
separates from the motor drive (runs on mains electricity). When time reaches the setting for
Pr.12-03, motor 2 runs using the mains electricity. Then when the time exceeds the setting for
Pr.12-03, motor 3 is enabled by the motor drive. The time sequence Diagram 12-13 is shown as
below.
Diagram 12-13 Fixed Time Circulation and Fixed Quantity Control with PID
12.1-12-15
 Fixed Time Circulation and Fixed Quantity Control with PID

This mode combines Fixed Time Circulation and Fixed Quantity Control with PID. This is to
prevent motors from becoming rusty if they are not in use for a long period. If some motors are
not activated, set the fixed time circulation to run the motors one by one to make sure each of
them is running.
When all the motors are running and water pressure is sufficient, the fixed time circulation is not
enabled. If motor 1 and motor 2 run to reach a balance in water pressure and when the time
reaches the setting for Pr.12-02, motor 1 runs without using mains electricity (run by the motor
drive). When the time reaches the setting for Pr.12-03, motor 3 runs using mains electricity, and
the operating time of each motor resets. Once it reaches the time setting for Pr.12-02 again,
motor 2 runs without using mains electricity. Then when time reaches the setting for Pr.12-03,
motor 4 runs using mains electricity. The time sequence Diagram 12-14 is as shown below
Diagram 12-14: Fixed Time Circulation under Fixed Amount Control Balance
12.1-12-16
 Fixed Quantity Circulation Output Delay

Default: 1.0
 Under Fixed Quantity Circulation (Increment) mode, the first motor of the drive switches to the
supply mains through the setting time for Pr.12-03, then switches to the second motor through
the setting delay time for Pr.12-09.
Diagram 12-15: Sequence of output delay for fixed quantity circulation
Motor 1 Operation Record (min. /sec.)

Default: Read only
Settings Read only
12.1-12-17
Motor 1 Operation Record (hour)

Default: Read only
Settings Read only
 These parameters record the operation time for Motor 1 to Motor 8. For examples, Pr.12-10 and
Pr.12-11 both record the operation time for Motor 1. Pr.12-10 records the operation time in
minutes and seconds, whereas Pr.12-11 records the operation time in hours. When Pr.12-10
displays 5959, it means the motor has operated for 59 minutes and 59 seconds. When the motor
operates for an hour, Pr.12-11 displays 1 and Pr.12-10 displays 0.
 When circulation control Pr.12-00 = 1–5, the output frequency is > 0 Hz and output current is > 0
A, the motor operation time is recorded.
 When the record reaches the upper limit 65535 hours 59 minutes and 59 seconds, clear the
motor operation time manually to keep tracking the operation status of each motor, and the
service life of the motor.
Motor No. / Clear

Hour Min./Sec.
Motor Operation Time Motor Operation Time
Pr.12-11 = 65535 Pr.12-10 = 5959
Motor 1 ↓ ↓ Pr.12-26 = 1
65535 hour 59 min.: 59 sec.
Motor 2 Pr.12-13 Pr.12-12 Pr.12-26 = 2
Motor 3 Pr.12-15 Pr.12-14 Pr.12-26 = 3
Motor 4 Pr.12-17 Pr.12-16 Pr.12-26 = 4
Motor 5 Pr.12-19 Pr.12-18 Pr.12-26 = 5
Motor 6 Pr.12-21 Pr.12-20 Pr.12-26 = 6
Motor 7 Pr.12-23 Pr.12-22 Pr.12-26 = 7
Motor 8 Pr.12-25 Pr.12-24 Pr.12-26 = 8
All motors N/A N/A Pr.12-26 = 10
12.1-12-18
Clear Motor’s Operation Time

Default: 0
10: Clear operation time for all motors
 Clear the operation time for single motor or all motors as needed.
 1: The operation time for Motor 1 returns to zero, including operation records in Pr.12-11 (hour)
and Pr.12-10 (min. /sec.).
 10: The operation time for Motor 1–8 (Pr.12-10–Pr.12-25) all return to zero.
Priority for Circulated Operation

Default: 0
Settings 0: Terminal order
1: Minimum operation time
 Terminal order: the multi-function output terminals corresponded to each circulation control mode
(Pr.12-00 = 1–5).
 Minimum operation time: starts in the order from the motor with the minimum operating hours
among all running motors.
 The minimum operation time is only applicable for operation time record under fixed time
circulation mode (Pr.12-00 = 1), as listed in the circulation mode comparison table below.
 A comparison for each circulation mode
Function / Circulation Control Mode Pr.12-00 = 1 Pr.12-00 = 2–5
Motor operation time record v v

Terminal order v v
Minimum operation time v* x
* When the drive resumes and starts running after stopping (or turning off) after operating for a
period, the motor operates according to the minimum operation time. However, the first operating
motor after resuming is the previous running motor before stop or turn-off. If you need to start the
motors according to the minimum operation time in sequence immediately after resuming, close
the minimum operation time (Pr.12-27 = 0) first and start (Pr.12-27 = 1) again.
 When Pr.12-00 = 1–5, the terminal order (Pr.12-27 = 0) is applicable for the operation time record
under all the circulated control modes.
 When Pr.12-00 = 1–5, the terminal order (Pr.12-27 = 0) is the only available selection, and the
minimum operation time (Pr.12-27 = 1) is invalid.
12.1-12-19
 When the minimum operation time (Pr.12-27 = 1) is enabled, the drive sorts the operation hours
according to the amount of running motors at the moment, and then choose the motor that has
the minimum operation hour to start after RUN command.
As Example 1 below shows, the drive starts Motor 2, which having a minimum operation time
among all eight motors.
As Example 2 below shows, Motor 8 does not start though it has the minimum operation time,
because only Motor 1 to Motor 5 are started. Moreover, if more than one motors have the same
minimum operation hour, the number of the motor takes the priority. Therefore, Motor 3 starts
rather than Motor 5.
Motor operation time-Example 1
Motor No. / Motor Status Status Operating Hour Operating Min./ Sec.
Motor 1 ON 0 59 59
Motor 2 ON 0 12 12
Motor 3 ON 2 00 00
Motor 4 ON 0 43 11
Motor 5 ON 1 33 00
Motor 6 ON 3 50 05
Motor 7 ON 1 05 22
Motor 8 ON 10 20 21
Motor operation time-Example 2

Motor No. / Motor status Status Operating Hour Operating Min./ Sec.
Motor 1 ON 0 59 59
Motor 2 ON 5 12 12
Motor 3 ON 0 33 00
Motor 4 ON 0 43 11
Motor 5 ON 0 33 00
Motor 6 OFF 3 50 05
Motor 7 OFF 1 05 22
Motor 8 OFF 0 00 01
12.1-12-20
13 Application Parameters by Industry

Application Selection
Default: 0
1: User-defined Parameter
2: Compressor IM
3: Fan
4: Pump
10: Air Handling Unit, AHU
 After you select the macro, some of the default values adjust automatically according to the
application selection.
 Each setting varies with different application selection, and its value is different as well.
 Refer to Section 10-2 for more operation details.
 Group settings: 2: Compressor IM
The following table lists the relevant compressor application parameters.
Pr. Explanation Settings
00-11 Speed control mode 0: VF (IM V/F control)
00-16 Load selection 0: Light load
00-17 Carrier frequency Default setting
Master frequency command source (AUTO)
00-20 2: External analog input
/ Source selection of the PID target
00-21 Operation command source (AUTO) 1: External terminals.
00-22 Stop method 0: Ramp to stop
00-23 Control of motor direction 1: Disable reverse
01-00 Maximum operation frequency Default setting
01-01 Output frequency of motor 1 Default setting
01-02 Output voltage of motor 1 Default setting
01-03 Mid-point frequency 1 of motor 1 Default setting
01-04 Mid-point voltage 1 of motor 1 Default setting
01-07 Minimum output frequency of motor 1 Default setting
01-08 Minimum output voltage of motor 1 Default setting
01-11 Output frequency lower limit 20 (Hz)
01-12 Acceleration time 1 20 (s)
01-13 Deceleration time 1 20 (s)
03-00 Analog input selection (AVI1) 0: No function
03-01 Analog input selection (ACI) 1: Frequency command
05-01 Full-load current for induction motor 1(A) Default setting
12.1-13-1

05-03 Rated speed for induction motor 1 (rpm) Default setting
05-04 Number of poles for induction motor 1 Default setting
 Group setting 03: Fan

The following table lists the relevant fan setting application parameters.
00-11 Speed control mode 0 (V/F control)
00-17 Carrier frequency Default setting
00-22 Stop method 1: Coast to stop
00-23 Control of Motor Direction 1: Disable reverse
00-30 Master frequency command (HAND) source 0: Digital keypad
00-31 Operation command (HAND) source 0: Digital keypad
01-10 Output frequency upper limit 50 (Hz)
01-11 Output frequency lower limit 35 (Hz
01-43 V/F curve selection 2: 2nd V/F curve
02-05 Multi-function input command 5 (MI5) 16: Rotating speed command from ACI
03-00 Analog input selection (AVI1) 1: Frequency command
03-01 Analog input selection (ACI) 1: Frequency command
03-28 AVI1 terminal input selection 0 (0–10 V)
03-29 ACI terminal input selection 1 (0–10 V)
03-31 AFM output selection 0 (0–10 V)
03-50 Analog input curve selection 1: three-point curve of AVI1
2: Speed tracking by minimum output
07-06 Restart after momentary power loss
frequency
07-11 Number of times of restart after fault 5 (times)
07-33 Auto-restart interval of fault 60 (s)
12.1-13-2
 Group setting 04: Pump

The following table lists the relevant pump setting application parameters.
00-11 Speed control mode 0 (V/F mode)
01-10 Output frequency upper limit 50 (Hz)
01-11 Output frequency lower limit 35 (Hz)
01-43 V/F curve selection 2: 2nd V/F curve
2: Speed tracking by minimum output
frequency
 Group setting 10: Air Handling Unit, AHU

The following table lists the relevant AHU setting application parameters.
00-04 Content of multi-function display 2
00-11 Speed control mode 0 (V/F control)
00-20 2 or 0 (External analog input)
00-21 Operation command source (AUTO) 1 or 0 (External terminals)
00-22 Stop method 1: Coast to stop
00-30 Master frequency command (HAND) source 0: Digital keypad
00-31 Operation command (HAND) source 0: Digital keypad
12.1-13-3

01-10 Output frequency upper limit 50
01-11 Output frequency lower limit 35
01-34 Zero-speed mode 2
01-43 V/F curve selection 2
02-05 Multi-function input command 5 (MI5) 16 or 17
02-13 Multi-function output 1 RLY1 11
02-14 Multi-function output 2 RLY2 1
03-00 Analog input selection (AVI1) 1
03-01 Analog input selection (ACI) 1
03-02 Analog input selection (AVI2) 1
03-28 AVI1 terminal input selection 0
03-29 ACI terminal input selection 1
03-20 Multi-function output 1 (AFM1) 0
03-23 Multi-function output 2（AFM2） 0
03-31 AFM1 current selection 0 or 1
03-34 AFM2 current selection 0 or 1
03-50 Analog input curve selection 4
2 (Speed tracking by minimum output
frequency)
| Application Parameter 1–99
Default: 0.00
12.1-13-4
14 Extension Card Parameter

 Extension Card Input Terminal Selection (AI10)
 Extension Card Input Terminal Selection (AI11)
Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Frequency command
4: PID target value
13: PID compensation amount
 When the setting for Pr.14-00 and Pr.14-01 are the same, the AI10 is selected first.
 Analog Input Filter Time (AI10)

 Analog Input Filter Time (AI11)
Default: 0.01
 The input analog signal of terminal AI1 and AI2 often includes interferences, which will affect the
stability of the control. Use these input delays to filter a noisy analog signal.
 When the setting for the time constant is too large, the control is stable but the control response
is slow. When the setting for time constant is too small, the control response is faster but the
control may be unstable. For optimal setting, adjust the setting according to the control stability
or the control response.
Analog Input 4–20 mA Signal Loss Selection (AI10)

Analog Input 4–20 mA Signal Loss Selection (AI11)
Default: 0
Settings 0: Disable
1: Continue operation at the last frequency
2: Decelerate to 0 Hz
 This parameter determines the treatment when the 4–20 mA signal is lost, when Pr.14-18 = 2,
Pr.14-19 = 2.
 When the setting for Pr.14-18 or Pr.14-19 are 0 or 1, the voltage input to AVI and ACI terminal is
0–10 V or 4–20 mA. At this moment, Pr.14-10 and Pr.14-11 are invalid.
 Setting 1 or 2: Displays the warning code “ANL” on the keypad. It continues blinking until the
lost ACI signal is recovered.
 When the motor drive stops, the warning condition does not continue to exist, so the warning
disappears.
12.1-14-1
 Extension Card Output Terminal Selection (AO10)

 Extension Card Output Terminal Selection (AO11)
Default: 0
Settings 0–23
 Refer to the function chart below for details setting.
Function Chart
0 Output frequency (Hz) Maximum frequency Pr.01-00 is processed as 100%.
1 Frequency command (Hz) Maximum frequency Pr.01-00 is processed as 100%.
2 Motor speed (Hz) Maximum frequency Pr.01-00 is processed as 100%.
3 Output current (rms) (2.5 × rated current) is processed as 100%
4 Output voltage (2 × rated voltage) is processed as 100%
5 DC bus voltage 450V (900V)=100%
6 Power factor -1.000–1.000=100%
7 Power (2 × rated power) is processed as 100%
9 AVI1 0–10 V = 0–100%
10 ACI 4–20 mA = 0–100%
11 AVI2 -10–10 V = 0–100%
For CANopen communication analog output

Corresponding
Terminal
address
20 CANopen analog output AFM1 2026-A1
AFM2 2026-A2
AO10 2026-AB
AO11 2026-AC
For RS-485 (InnerCOM / Modbus) analog output

Corresponding
Terminal
address
21 RS-485 analog output AFM1 26A0H
AFM2 26A1H
AO10 26AAH
AO11 26ABH
For communication analog output (CMC-EIP01, CMC-PN01,

CMC-DN01)
Corresponding
Communication card Terminal
22 address
analog output AFM1 26A0H
AFM2 26A1H
AO10 26AAH
AO11 26ABH
Pr.14-20 and Pr.14-21 control voltage output level

23 Constant voltage output 0–100% of Pr.14-20 corresponds to 0–10 V of AO10.
0–100% of Pr.14-21 corresponds to 0–10 V of AO11.
12.1-14-2
 Analog Output 1 Gain (AO10)

 Analog Output 1 Gain (AO11)
Default: 100.0
 Adjusts the voltage level outputted to the analog meter from the analog signal (Pr.14-12,
Pr.14-13) output terminal AFM of the drive.
 Analog Output 1 in REV Direction (AO10)

 Analog Output 1 in REV Direction (AO11)
Default: 0
Settings 0: Absolute output voltage value
1: Reverse output 0 V; forward output 0–10 V
 Determines the voltage reverse output when AO10 and AO11 are set as 0–10 V (Pr.14-36 = 0,
Pr.14-37 = 0).
 Extension Card Input Selection (AI10)

Default: 0
Settings 0: 0–10 V (AVI10)
1: 0–20 mA (ACI10)
2: 4–20 mA (ACI10)
 Extension Card Input Selection (AI11)
Default: 0
Settings 0: 0–10 V (AVI11)
1: 0–20 mA (ACI11)
2: 4–20 mA (ACI11)
 When you change the input mode, verify that the switch position of external terminal (AI10, AI11)
is correct.
 AO10 DC Output Setting Level

 AO11 DC Output Setting Level
Default: 0.00
Settings 0.00–100.00%
12.1-14-3
 AO10 Filter Output Time

 AO11 Filter Output Time
Default: 0.01
 AO10 Output Selection

 AO11 Output Selection
Default: 0
Settings 0: 0–10 V
1: 0–20 mA
2: 4–20 mA
12.1-14-4
12-2 Adjustment & Application

The followings are abbreviations for different types of motors:
 IM: Induction motor  SPM: Surface permanent magnet synchronous
AC motor
 PM: Permanent magnet synchronous AC motor  SynRM: Synchronous reluctance motor
AC motor
12-2-1 Permanent Magnet Motor Space Vector Control (PM SVC) Pr.00-11 = 2
1. Control Diagram
PM SVC control diagram
12.2-00-1
2. PM SVC Adjustment Procedure (※ the number marked on the procedure corresponds to the
number of following adjustment explanations)
I. PM SVC motor parameters adjustment
12.2-00-2
 Basic Motor Parameters Adjustment

1. Parameter reset:
Reset Pr.00-02 = 10 (60 Hz) to the default value.
2. Select PM motor type:
Pr.05-33 = 1 (SPM) or 2 (IPM)
3. Motor nameplate parameter setting:
Parameter Description
Pr.01-01 Rated frequency (Hz)
Pr.01-02 Rated voltage (VAC)
Pr.05-34 Rated current (A)
Pr.05-35 Rated power (kW)
Pr.05-36 Rated rotor speed (rpm)
Pr.05-37 Number of poles for the motor (poles)
4. PM parameter auto-tuning:
5. Set Pr.05-00 = 5 (Rolling auto-tuning for PM) or 13 (Static auto-tuning for PM) and press “RUN”
key to finish motor auto-tuning, then you will get the following parameters:
Pr.05-39 Stator resistance for a permanent magnet motor (Ω)
Pr.05-40 Permanent magnet motor Ld (mH)
Pr.05-41 Permanent magnet motor Lq (mH)
Ke parameter of a permanent magnet motor (Vphase，rms / krpm)
(When Pr.05-00 = 5, the Ke parameter is measured based on the actual
Pr.05-43 motor rotation.)
(When Pr.05-00 = 13, the Ke parameter is automatically calculated
based on the motor power, current and rotor speed.)
If an auto-tuning error (AUE) occurs, refer to Section 14 “Fault Codes and Descriptions” for
further treatment.
AUE Error (code) Description
AUE (40) Auto-tuning error
AUE1 (142) Auto-tuning error 1 (No feedback current error)
AUE2 (143) Auto-tuning error 2 (Motor phase loss error)
6. Set control mode

Control mode for the motor: Pr.00-11 = 2: PM SVC mode
7. Measure the initial magnetic pole angle of PM
Set Pr.10-53 PM initial rotor position detection method
0: Disable
3: Pulse injection
(Set to 2 for IPM; set to 3 for SPM. If these settings cause problems, then set the parameter to
1.)
12.2-00-3
II. PMSVC Adjustment for Operation without Load / with Light-load
8. No-load
Running
SPM > Increase Pr.10-42 SPM > Decrease Pr.10-42
Initial angle detection pulse Initial angle detection pulse value
value
（Too high pulse bandwidth may
IPM > Increase Pr.10-52
Injection magnitude cause ocA）
角度偵測脈衝頻寬
A1. Start running

NO direction is
Start running Press RUN, then ocA
direction error correct? (over current) occurs
YES
A2. No-load current

Increase torque offset runs with ½ of rated
Pr.07-26 rotor speed
No-load current is
NO No-load running 10%~20% of rated
current is normal? current range
No-load current is too high
Increase low-pass filter gain YES Increase low-pass filter gain

Pr.10-34 Pr.10-34
Increase speed estimation Decrease speed estimation
bandwidth Pr.10-32 bandwidth Pr.10-32
NO
Output frequency A3. Acceleration to
Periodic low-frequency wave rated frequency is Strongly high-frequency
stable? vibration of output frequency
YES
Increase low-pass filter gain Pr.10-34

Increase carrier frequency Pr.00-17
（Carrier frequency need to be >10
times of the max. output frequency)
A4. Reach
NO
max. output
Motor stall at max.
rotor speed frequency?
YES
9. Running Test
with Load
12.2-00-4
 Adjustment for Operation with Light-load
8. Start the motor with no-load / light-load, and operates to 1/2 of the rated rotor speed
A1. Start operation direction:
a. If the start operation direction is wrong
SPM: increase the current proportion for Pr.10-42 (Initial angle detection pulse value) to
improve the accuracy of the angle detection.
IPM: Increase the voltage for Pr.10-52 (Injection magnitude) to improve the accuracy of the
angle detection.
b. If an ocA error occurs when pressing RUN to start the motor, decrease the current
proportion for Pr.10-42 (Initial angle detection pulse value). An excessive pulse current
may cause ocA error easily.
A2. Operates the motor in 1/2 of the rated rotor speed, adjust the no-load operating current
If the no-load operating current exceeds 20% of the rated current, increase Pr.07-26
(Torque compensation gain) and observe the no-load operating current.
A3. Accelerate to rated frequency and observe if the motor operates stably.
a. If the motor output rotor speed presents periodic low-frequency wave, increase Pr.10-34
(PM sensorless speed estimator low-pass filter gain), or increase Pr.10-32 (PM FOC
sensorless speed estimator bandwidth).
b. If the output frequency reflects high frequency vibration, decrease Pr.10-34 or decrease
Pr.10-32.
A4. Accelerate the motor to the maximum rotor speed, and observe if it operates stably.
If the motor stalls when accelerating to the maximum rotor speed, then increase Pr.10-34
PM Sensorless Speed Estimator Low-pass Filter Gain, or increase Pr.00-17 Carrier
Frequency (you must set the carrier frequency larger than 10 times of the maximum output
frequency)
12.2-00-5
III. PM SVC Carrier Start-up Adjustment
12.2-00-6
 Heavy Load Operation Adjustment

9. Load operating test
B1. Low-frequency loading performance is below 1/10 of rated frequency:
a. If the low-frequency loading performance is insufficient, or the rotor speed is not smooth,
increase Pr.10-31 (Current command of I/F mode).
b. If the low-frequency current is large, decrease Pr.10-31 (Current command of I/F mode).
B2. Test the with-load accelerating performance:
When the motor operates in 1/10 of rotor speed and above, if the speed cannot follow the
acceleration time during accelerating, or the current stalls, increase Pr.07-38 (PMSVC
voltage feedback forward gain).
10. Stability test at constant speed operation: if the motor operates stably at constant speed
a. If the motor output rotor speed presents periodic low-frequency wave, increase Pr.10-34
(PM sensorless speed estimator low-pass filter gain), or increase Pr.10-32 (PM FOC
sensorless speed estimator bandwidth).
b. If the output frequency reflects high frequency vibration, decrease Pr.10-34 or decrease
Pr.10-32.
12-2-2-1 PMSVC Related Parameters

Refer to Section 12-1 Description of Parameter Settings for more details.
Setting
Parameter Description Unit Default
Range
Pr.07-24 Torque command filter time sec. 0.5 0.001–10
Pr.07-26 Torque compensation gain N/A 0 0–5000
Pr.07-38 PMSVC voltage feedback forward gain N/A 1.0 0.5–2.0
Pr.10-31 I/F mode, current command % 40 0–150
Pr.10-32 PM FOC sensorless speed estimator bandwidth Hz 5.00 0.00–600.00
PM sensorless speed estimator low-pass filter
Pr.10-34 N/A 1.00 0.00–655.35
gain
Frequency point to switch from I/F mode to PM
Pr.10-39 Hz 20.00 0.00–599.00
sensorless mode
Frequency point to switch from PM sensorless
Pr.10-40 Hz 20.00 0.00–599.00
mode to V/F mode
Initial Angle Estimating Parameters
Pr.10-42 Initial angle detection pulse value N/A 1.0 0.0–3.0
Pr.10-51 Injection frequency Hz 500 0–1200
15.0 /
Pr.10-52 Injection magnitude V 0.0–200.0
30.0
PM initial rotor position detection method
0: Disable
1: Using I/F current command (Pr.10-31) to
Pr.10-53 N/A 0 0–3
attract the rotor to zero degrees
3: Pulse injection
12.2-00-7
12-2-2 PM Sensorless Adjustment (Pr.00-11 = 6)

1. Control Diagram
PM Sensorless FOC mode (applicable for CP2000 V2.07 and above)
※ PM Sensorless FOC control is the control method dedicated for PM; it uses the high salient pole
characteristic of PM to detect positions of NS magnetic poles. By doing this, it calculates the motor’s
rotor position at low-speed frequency.
12.2-00-8
2. PM Sensorless FOC Control Adjustment (* the number marked on the procedure corresponds the
number of following explanations)
I. Adjustment for PM Sensorless FOC Mode Motor Parameters
12.2-00-9
 Motor Parameters Adjustment

1. Parameter reset:
Pr.00-02 = 10, reset parameter to the default value.
2. Select motor type:
Pr.05-33 = 1 or 2 (SPM or IPM)
Pr.05-37 Number of motor poles (poles)
Pr.05-38 System inertia for PM (kg-cm2)
4. PM parameter auto-tuning:
Set Pr.05-00 = 5 [Rolling auto-tuning for PM (without load)] or 13 (Static auto-tuning for PM),
and press “RUN” key to finish motor auto-tuning, then you get the following parameters:
Ke parameter of a permanent magnet motor (Vphase，rms / krpm)
(When Pr.05-00 = 5, the Ke parameter is measured based on the
Pr.05-43 actual motor rotation.)
(When Pr.05-00 = 13, the Ke parameter is automatically calculated
based on the motor power, current and rotor speed.)
If an auto-tuning error (AUE) occurs, refer to Section 14 “Error Codes and Descriptions” for
further treatment.
AUE Fault
Description
code
AUE (40) Auto-tuning error
AUE 1 (142) Auto-tuning error 1 (no feedback current error)
AUE 2 (143) Auto-tuning error 2 (motor phase loss error)
5. Set control mode
Set Pr.00-11 = 6 PM Sensorless FOC control mode
6. After auto-tuning, cycle the power.
7. Measure the initial magnetic pole angle of PM
Set Pr.10-53 PM initial rotor position detection method:
0: Disable
3: Pulse injection
(Set “2” for IPM; set “3” for SPM; set “1” when setting “2” and “3” are not enough)
12.2-00-10
II. PM Sensorless FOC Mode – No load / Light-load Adjustment
12.2-00-11
 No-load / Light-load Operation Adjustment

8. Start the motor without load
(a) Set Pr.11-00 = 1 Auto-tuning for ASR and APR
(b) Start the motor without load, and operates the motor to 1/2 of rated rotor speed
A1. If the start direction is wrong or starting rotation is not smooth (ocA), adjust Pr.11-01
(System inertia). When the Ke parameter (Pr.05-43) is < 25 V, increase Pr.10-31 (I/F mode,
current command) or Pr.10-39, Pr.10-40 (Switch the frequency from I/F mode to PM
Sensorless mode).
A2. If the motor starts up with a reverse direction, but operates with a correct direction, adjust
Pr.10-52 (Injection magnitude) when using High frequency injection to detect the PM initial
rotor position (Pr.10-53 = 2); increase Pr.10-42 (Initial angle detection pulse value) to
improve the accuracy of angle detection when using Pulse injection to detect the PM initial
rotor position (Pr.10-53 = 3).
9. Acceleration test with no-load / light-load
A3. Accelerate the motor to the rated frequency, and check if it operates stably.
a. If the motor output frequency presents steady state speed wave, increase Pr.11-04
(ASR2 high-speed bandwidth) or Pr.11-01 (Per-unit of system inertia).
b. If the motor output frequency presents large fluctuations or diverges, increase Pr.10-55
(Magnetic flux linkage estimate high-speed gain) or decrease Pr.10-56 (Kp of
phase-locked loop).
A4. Accelerate the motor to the maximum frequency, and check if it operates stably.
If the motor stalls at the maximum operation speed, increase Pr.10-55 (Magnetic flux
linkage estimate high-speed gain) and Pr.00-17 (Carrier frequency), or decrease Pr.10-56
(Kp of phase-locked loop).
※ Setting curve for speed regulator (ASR) and related parameters:
Parameter Description Default

Pr.11-00 System control 0
Pr.11-01 Per-unit of system inertia 256
ASR1 / ASR2 switch frequency
Pr.11-02 7 Hz
(set the switch frequency > Pr.10-39)
Pr.11-03 ASR1 low-speed bandwidth 10 Hz
Pr.11-04 ASR2 high-speed bandwidth 10 Hz
Pr.11-05 Zero-speed bandwidth 10 Hz
12.2-00-12
III. PM Sensorless FOC Mode – Load Starting Adjustment
12.2-00-13
 Load Operation Adjustment and Steady State Adjustment at Constant Speed

11. Load operation test
B1. Low-frequency carrier capacity test (the output frequency is < 20% of rated speed):
a. If the frequency switch from I/F mode to PM Sensorless is zero (Pr.10-39 = 0 Hz),
increase Pr.10-54 (Magnetic flux linkage estimate low-speed gain).
b. If the output frequency is less than Pr.10-39 (Frequency to switch from I/F mode to
PM Sensorless), increase Pr.10-31 (I/F mode, current command).
B2. Carrier capacity test during acceleration
In heavy load operation, accelerate the motor to rated speed according to the
acceleration time:
a. If the motor responds too slowly or an over current occurs during the acceleration,
increase Pr.10-57 (Ki phase-locked loop).
12. Steady state test at constant speed, check if the motor operates stably at constant speed.
a. If the motor’s output frequency presents periodic low-frequency wave, increase
Pr.10-34 (PM sensorless speed estimator low-pass filter gain), or adjust the ASR
parameters.
b. If the motor’s output frequency presents extreme vibration, decrease Pr.10-34 (PM
sensorless speed estimator low-pass filter gain) or Pr.10-56 (Kp phase-locked loop).
PM Sensorless FOC Mode Adjustment Parameters

Parameter Description Unit Default Settings
Pr.10-31 I/F mode, current command % 40 150
Pr.10-34 NA 1.00 0.00–655.35
gain
Frequency to switch from I/F mode to PM
Pr.10-39 Hz 20.0 0.0–599.0
sensorless mode
Frequency to switch from PM sensorless mode
Pr.10-40 Hz 20.0 0.0–599.0
to I/F mode
Magnetic flux linkage estimate low-speed gain
Pr.10-54 % 100 10–1000
Magnetic flux linkage estimate high-speed gain
Pr.10-55 % 100 10–1000
Kp of phase-locked loop
Pr.10-56 % 100 10–1000
Ki of phase-locked loop
Pr.10-57 % 100 10–1000
Initial Angle Estimating Parameters
Pr.10-42 Initial angle detection pulse value NA 0.5 0.0–3.0
Injection frequency
Pr.10-51 Hz 500 0–1200
(applicable when Pr.10-53 = 2)
Injection magnitude
Pr.10-52 V 15.0/30.0 0.0–200.0
(applicable when Pr.10-53 = 2)
PM initial rotor position detection method
0: Disable
Pr.10-53 1: Force attracting the rotor to zero degrees NA 0 0–3
3: Pulse injection
Motor Performance Control Parameters
Pr.11-00 System control bit 0 0–8
12.2-00-14

Pr.11-02 ASR1 / ASR2 switch frequency Hz 7.0 5.0–599.0
1–100 (PM)
Pr.11-03 ASR1 low-speed bandwidth Hz 10 1–40 (IM)
1–100 (PM)
Pr.11-04 ASR2 high-speed bandwidth Hz 10
1–40 (IM)
1–100 (PM)
Pr.11-05 Zero-speed bandwidth Hz 10
1–40 (IM)
12.2-00-15
12-2-3 SynRM FOC Sensorless Vector Control Mode (SynRM Sensorless) Pr.00-11 = 8
1. Control diagram
SynRM Sensorless (applied to CP2000 V2.07 and above)
12.2-00-16
2. SynRM Sensorless Adjustment Procedure

(* the number marked on the procedure corresponds the number of following explanations)
I. Adjustment for SynRM Sensorless Parameters
12.2-00-17
 Motor Parameters Adjustment

1. Parameter reset:
Pr.00-02 = 9 (50 Hz) or 10 (60 Hz), reset parameter to the default value
2. Select motor type:
Pr.05-33 = 3 (SynRM)
Pr.05-37 Number of motor poles (poles)
4. Motor parameter auto-tuning:
Set Pr.05-00 = 11 [SynRM parameter auto-tuning (without load)] and press “RUN” key to finish
motor auto-tuning, then you get the following parameters:
5. Set control mode:
Set Pr.00-11 = 8 (SynRM Sensorless)
6. After auto-tuning, cycle the power.
12.2-00-18
II. SynRM Sensorless No-load Adjustment Procedure
12.2-00-19
 No-load Operation Adjustment

7. Start the motor without load
A1. Start the motor without load, refer to the following adjustment before the operation
frequency reaches 1/5 or motor’s rated frequency:
a. If the motor starts in a wrong direction, the starting rotation is not smooth (ocA) or there
is motor shaft lock, adjust Pr.10-31 (I/F mode, current command) and Pr.10-33 (PM
FOC sensorless low-speed estimator bandwidth).
b. When there is an extreme vibration of the motor speed, adjust Pr.11-01 (Per-unit of
system inertia) and Pr.11-03 (ASR1 low-speed bandwidth) depending on whether the
motor departs from the load.
※ Setting curve for speed regulator (ASR) and related parameters:
Parameter Description Default

Pr.11-00 System control 0
Pr.11-01 Per-unit of system inertia 256
ASR1 / ASR2 switch frequency
Pr.11-02 (set the switch frequency > 1/5 of 7 Hz
motor’s rated frequency)
Pr.11-03 ASR1 low-speed bandwidth 10 Hz
Pr.11-04 ASR2 high-speed bandwidth 10 Hz
Pr.11-05 Zero-speed bandwidth 10 Hz
A2. The operation frequency exceeds the switch frequency for Pr.10-39
a. If there is an extreme vibration of speed and current when switching frequency, or a
fault occurs during the switching process, adjust Pr.10-56 (Kp of phase-locked loop).
b. Both of adjustments for Pr.10-55 (Magnetic flux linkage estimate high-speed gain) and
Pr.10-56 (Kp of phase-locked loop) affect the performance of the speed estimator.
Adjust only Pr.10-56 in no-load operation.
c. When there is a low-frequency vibration of speed during motor’s operation, adjust
Pr.11-01 (Per-unit of system inertia) and Pr.11-04 (ASR2 high-speed bandwidth)
depending on whether the motor departs from the load.
A3. Observe whether the motor operates stably when accelerates to the maximum frequency
If the motor stalls at the maximum operation speed, decrease Pr.10-56 (Kp phase-locked
loop)
12.2-00-20
III. SynRM Sensorless Start-up with Load Adjustment
12.2-00-21
 Load Operation Adjustment

8. Operation test with load
B1. Low-frequency loading capacity test

a. If the low-frequency loading performance is low, increase Pr.10-31 (I/F mode, current
command) and Pr.10-58 (mutual inductance compensation gain).
b. If the low-frequency loading speed presents large plummet, or the output frequency
presents low-frequency vibration, adjust Pr.11-03 (ASR1 low-speed bandwidth) and
Pr.10-33 (PM FOC sensorless speed estimator bandwidth). Increase the setting to
improve the response when the speed drops too much at transient load. Decrease the
setting if the frequency presents an extreme vibration at stable load.
B2. High frequency loading capacity test

a. If the high frequency loading performance is insufficient, increase Pr.10-55 (Magnetic flux
linkage estimate high-speed gain) and Pr.10-56 (Kp of phase-locked loop).
b. If there is large plummet of loading speed, or the output frequency vibrates, adjust
Pr.11-04 (ASR2 high-speed bandwidth), Pr.10-55 (Magnetic flux linkage estimate
high-speed gain) and Pr.10-56 (Kp of phase-locked loop). Increase the setting to improve
the response when the speed drops too much at transient load. Decrease the setting if
the frequency presents an extreme vibration at stable load.
B3. Operation frequency exceeds the rated frequency

a. When there is a waveform of speed and current in the flux-weakening zone, and an oc or
ov fault occurs during the deceleration, adjust Pr.01-51 (Flux-weakening overload stall
prevention time) and Pr.10-31 (I/F mode current command).
SynRM Sensorless Mode Adjustment Parameters

00-11 Speed control mode 0 0–8
00-17 Carrier frequency kHz 4 4–8
01-51 Flux-weakening overload stall prevention time sec. 1.00 0.00–600.00
05-00 Motor parameter auto-tuning 0 0–13
Induction motor or permanent magnet
05-33 3 0–3
synchronous AC motor selection
Full-load current for a permanent magnet
05-34 Amps NA NA
synchronous AC motor / reluctance motor
Rated power for a permanent magnet
05-35 kW NA 0–655.35
Rated speed for a permanent magnet
05-36 rpm NA 0–65535
Number of poles for a permanent magnet
05-37 NA 0–65535
System inertia for a permanent magnet
05-38 kg-cm2 NA 0.0–6553.5
05-39 Stator resistance for a permanent magnet
ohm 0.000 0.000–65.535
05-40 Permanent magnet synchronous AC motor /
mH 0.00 0.00–655.35
reluctance motor Ld
12.2-00-22

05-41 Permanent magnet synchronous AC motor /
mH 0.00 0.00–655.35
reluctance motor Lq
07-12 Speed tracking during start-up 0 0–3
10-08 Treatment for speed observer feedback fault 2 0–2
10-09 Detection time of speed observer feedback fault sec. 1.0 0.0–10.0
10-10 Speed observer stall level % 115 0–120
10-11 Detection time of speed observer stall sec. 0.1 0.0–2.0
10-12 Speed observer stall action 2 0–2
10-13 Speed observer slip range % 50 0–0
10-14 Detection time of speed observer slip sec. 0.5 0.0–10.0
10-15 Speed observer stall and slip error action 2 0–2
10-31 I/F mode, current command % 15 0–150
PM FOC sensorless speed estimator bandwidth
10-33 1.00 0.01–3.00
(low speed)
10-34 1.00 0.00–10.00
gain
10-35 AMR (Kp) gain 0.4 0.00–3.00
10-36 AMR (Ki) gain 2.00 0.00–3.00
Frequency to switch from I/F mode to PM
10-39 Hz 10.00 0.0–599.00
sensorless mode
10-51 Injection frequency Hz 400 0–1200
10-52 Injection magnitude % 30 10–50
10-55 PM initial rotor position detection method 1.0 0.1–3.0
10-56 Kp of phase-locked loop Hz 10 5–50
10-58 Mutual inductance gain compensation 1.00 0.00–655.35
11-00 System control 0x201h 0–65535
11-01 Per-unit of system inertia pu 256 0–65535
11-02 ASR1 / ASR2 switch frequency Hz 10.00 5.00–599.00
11-03 ASR1 low-speed bandwidth Hz 5 1–30
11-04 ASR2 high-speed bandwidth Hz 5 1–30
11-05 Zero-speed bandwidth Hz 5 1–30
11-17 Forward motor torque limit Quadrant I % 200 0–500
11-18 Forward regenerative torque limit Quadrant II % 200 0–500
11-19 Reverse motor torque limit Quadrant III % 200 0–500
11-20 Reverse regenerative torque limit Quadrant IV % 200 0–500
12.2-00-23
Chapter 13 Warning CodesCP2000
Chapter 13 Warning Codes
ID No. Display on LCD Keypad Warning Name Description
Communication error 1
1 (CE1)
RS-485 Modbus illegal function code
Action and Reset

Action condition When the function code is not 03, 06, 10 and 63
Action time Immediately act
Warning setting parameter N/A
“Warning” occurs when Pr.09-02 = 0 and the motor drive keeps running. The
Reset method
drive resets automatically when receiving the correct function code.
Reset condition Immediately reset
Record N/A
Cause Corrective Actions
Incorrect communication
Check if the communication command is correct.
command from upper unit
Verify the wiring and grounding of the communication circuit. It is recommended
Malfunction caused by interference to separate the communication circuit from the main circuit, or wire in 90 degree
for effective anti-interference performance.
Different communication setting
Check if the setting for Pr.09-02 is the same as the setting for the upper unit.
from the upper unit
Disconnection or bad connection
Check the cable and replace it if necessary.
of the cable
Display on LCD Keypad Warning Name Description
Communication
Keypad communication data, illegal function code
command error 1
(Keypad auto-detects this error and displays it.)
(CK1)
Action and Reset

Action condition When the function code is not 03, 06, 10 and 63
Reset method Remove the keypad and then reconnect it to the motor drive.
Record N/A
Incorrect communication Keypad and the motor drive don’t communicate properly. It is recommended to
command from keypad remove the keypad and then reconnect it to the motor drive.
Check if the Baud rate = 19200 bps. Format = RTU8, N, 2.
from keypad
of the cable
13-1
2 (CE2)
RS-485 Modbus illegal data address
Action and Reset

Action condition When the input data address is incorrect
Reset method
drive resets automatically when receiving the correct data address.
Record N/A
from the upper unit
of the cable
Communication Keypad communication data, illegal data address

address error (CK2) (Keypad auto-detects this error and displays it.)
Action and Reset

Action condition When the input data address is incorrect
Record N/A
from keypad
of the cable
13-2
3 (CE3)
RS-485 Modbus illegal data value
Action and Reset

Action condition When the length of communication data is too long
Reset method
drive resets automatically when receiving the correct communication data value.
Record N/A
from upper unit
of the cable
Communication data Keypad communication data, illegal data value

error (CK3) (Keypad auto-detects this error and displays it.)
Action and Reset

Action condition When the length of communication data is too long
Record N/A
from keypad
of the cable
13-3
4 (CE4)
RS-485 Modbus data is written to read-only address
Action and Reset

Action condition When the data is written to read-only address
Reset method drive resets automatically when receiving the correct written address of
communication data.
Record N/A
from the upper unit
Check the cable and replace it if is necessary.
of the cable
Keypad communication data is written to read-only

Communication slave
address. (Keypad auto-detects this error and displays
error (CK4)
it.)
Action and Reset

Action condition When the data is written to read-only address
Record N/A
Keypad and the motor drive don’t communicate properly. It is recommended to
remove the keypad and then reconnect it to the motor drive. If the problem
persists after reconnecting the keypad, pay attention to the motor drive status.
command from keypad
For example: Motor drive might reset to default setting during operation or while
enabling PLC function.
from keypad
Check the cable and replace it if is necessary.
of the cable
13-4
Communication error
5 10 (CE10)
RS-485 Modbus transmission time-out
Action and Reset

When the communication time exceeds the detection time of Pr.09-03
Action condition
communication time-out
Action time Setting for Pr.09-03
Reset method
drive resets automatically when receiving the next communication packet.
Record N/A
The upper unit does not transmit
Check if the upper unit transmits the communication command within the setting
the communication command
time for Pr.09-03.
within Pr.09-03 setting time
from the upper unit
of the cable
Keypad
Keypad communication data, transmission time-out
communication time
(Keypad auto-detects this error and displays it.)
out (CK10)
Action and Reset

When the communication time exceeds the detection time of Pr.09-03
Action condition
communication time-out
Action time Setting for Pr.09-03
Record N/A
from keypad
of the cable
13-5
Save error 1
7 (SE1)
Keypad COPY error 1: Keypad copy time-out
Action and Reset

“SE1” warning occurs when the keypad does not transmit the COPY command
Action condition to the drive, and does not transmit any data to the drive again in 10 ms at the
time you copy the parameters to the drive.
Action time 10 ms
Reset method Manual reset
Record N/A
Communication connection error SE1: The causes of error are mostly communication problems between the
keypad and control board. Potential causes include communication signal
interference and the unacceptable communication command to the Slave.
Keypad error
Check if the error occurs randomly, or only occurs when copying certain
parameters (the error displays on the upper right corner of the copy page). If you
Control board error cannot clear the error, please contact Delta.
Save error 2
8 (SE2)
Keypad COPY error 2: parameter writing error
Action and Reset

“SE2” warning occurs when writing the parameters incorrectly at the time you
Action condition copy parameters to the drive. For example, you copy the new firmware version
with added parameters to the drive with old firmware version.
Action time N/A
Record N/A
SE2: In this stage, the copied data has been transmitted to the Slave.
The Slave compares and processes the copied data, and then saves the data to
the Data ROM. During the process, the data error (should be attribution error)
Add new parameters to the new may occur, or the data cannot be saved to EEPROM. At this time, the warning
firmware version. occurs.
It is suggested to check the status of Data ROM and remove the error causes
first.
If you cannot clear the error, please contact Delta.
Verify the wiring and grounding of the main circuit, control circuit and the
Malfunction caused by interference
encoder for effective anti-interference performance.
13-6

The AC motor drive detects over-heating of IGBT, and
IGBT over-heating over the protection level of oH1 warning. (When
9 warning (oH1) Pr.06-15 is higher than the IGBT over-heating level, the
drive shows oH1 error without displaying oH1 warning.)
Action and Reset
Action condition Pr.06-15
“oH1” warning occurs when IGBT temperature is higher than Pr.06-15 setting
Action time
value.
Reset method Auto-reset
The drive auto-resets when IGBT temperature is lower than oH1 warning level
Reset condition
minus (–) 5°C
Record N/A
1. Check the ambient temperature.
Check if the ambient temperature
2. Regularly inspect the ventilation hole of the control cabinet.
or temperature inside the cabinet
3. Change the installed place if there are heating objects, such as braking
is too high, or if there is obstruction
resistors, in the surroundings.
in the ventilation hole of the control
4. Install/ add cooling fan or air conditioner to lower the temperature inside the
cabinet.
cabinet.
Check if there is any obstruction on
Remove the obstruction or replace the cooling fan.
the heat sink or if the fan is running
Insufficient ventilation space Increase ventilation space of the drive.
1. Decrease loading.
Check if the drive matches the
2. Decrease the carrier.
corresponded loading
3. Replace with a drive with larger capacity.
The drive has run 100% or more of
Replace with a drive with larger capacity.
the rated output for a long time
Board-level component
The drive has detected over heat of the board-level
10 overheating warning
component
(oH2)
Action and Reset

Action condition oH2 error level minus (–) 5°C
The oH2 warning occurs when the board-level component temperature is higher
Action time
than oH2 warning level
The drive auto-resets when the board-level component temperature is lower
Reset condition
than oH2 error level minus (–) 10°C
Record N/A
1. Check the ambient temperature.
or temperature inside the cabinet
is too high, or if there is obstruction
in the ventilation hole of the control
cabinet.
cabinet.
Remove the obstruction or replace the cooling fan.
the heat sink or if the fan is running
1. Decrease loading.
2. Decrease the carrier.
corresponded loading
3. Replace with a drive with larger capacity.
13-7
The drive has run 100% or more of

Replace with a drive with larger capacity.
the rated output for a long time
Unstable power Install reactor(s).
The load changes frequently Reduce the changes of the load.
oH1/ oH2 warning level

oH warning
Model oH1 oH2
oH1 warning = (Pr. 06-15)
VFD007CP23A-21
VFD015CP23A-21
VFD022CP23A-21
VFD037CP23A-21
VFD055CP23A-21
VFD075CP23A-21 110
VFD110CP23A-21
VFD150CP23A-21 oH1 Warning = oH1 – 5
110
VFD220CP23A-21
VFD300CP23A-21
VFD370CP23A-00/-21
VFD450CP23A-00/-21
VFD550CP23A-00/-21 90
VFD750CP23A-00/-21
VFD900CP23A-00/-21
VFD007CP43A/4EA-21
VFD015CP43B/4EB-21 oH1 Warning = oH1 – 5
110 110
VFD037CP43B/4EB-21
VFD040CP43A/4EA-21
VFD055CP43B/4EB-21
VFD075CP43B/4EB-21
VFD110CP43B/4EB-21
110
VFD150CP43B/4EB-21
VFD185CP43B/4EB-21
VFD220CP43A/4EA-21
VFD370CP43B/4EB-21
VFD450CP43S-00/-21
VFD550CP43S-00/-21
VFD750CP43B-00/-21
VFD900CP43A-00/-21
VFD1100CP43A-00/-21
VFD1320CP43B-00/-21 oH1 Warning = oH1 – 5
110
VFD1600CP43A-00/-21 oH2 Warning = oH2 – 5
VFD1850CP43B-00/-21
VFD2000CP43A-00/-21
90
VFD2200CP43A-00/-21
VFD2500CP43A-00/-21
VFD2800CP43A-00/-21
VFD3150CP43A-00
VFD3150CP43C-00/-21
VFD3550CP43A-00
VFD3550CP43C-00/-21
VFD4000CP43A-00
VFD4000CP43C-00/-21
VFD5000CP43A-00
85
VFD5000CP43C-00/-21
VFD5600CP43A-00
Contact Delta for more information
VFD5600CP43C-21
VFD6300CP43A-00
VFD6300CP43C-21
VFD015CP53A-21 100 85 oH1 Warning = oH1 – 5
13-8
oH warning
Model oH1 oH2
oH1 warning = (Pr. 06-15)
VFD037CP53A-21
VFD055CP53A-21
VFD075CP53A-21
70
VFD110CP53A-21
VFD150CP53A-21
VFD185CP63A-21
VFD220CP63A-21
90 85
VFD300CP63A-21
VFD370CP63A-21
VFD450CP63A-00/-21
100
VFD550CP63A-00/-21
VFD750CP63A-00/-21
VFD900CP63A-00/-21 65
VFD1600CP63A-00/-21
VFD2000CP63A-00/-21
110
VFD2500CP63A-00/-21
VFD3150CP63A-00/-21
VFD4000CP63A-00/-21 70
VFD4500CP63A-00/-21
VFD5600CP63A-00/-21
VFD6300CP63A-00/-21
PID feedback error PID feedback loss (warning for analog feedback signal;
11 (PID) works only when PID enables)
Action and Reset

When the analog input is lower than 4 mA (only detects analog input of 4–20
Action condition
mA)
Action time Pr.08-08
Pr.08-09
0: Warn and keep operation
Warning setting parameter 1: Fault and ramp to stop
“Warning” occurs when Pr.08-09 = 0 or 3. The “Warning” automatically
Auto
Reset method clears when the feedback signal is larger than 4mA.
Manual “Error” occurs when Pr.08-09 = 1 or 2. You must reset manually.
Records when Pr.08-09 = 1 or 2 (“Error”).
Record
Does not record when Pr.08-09 = 3 (“Warning”).
Loose or broken PID feedback Tighten the terminals again.
wiring Replace with a new cable.
Feedback device malfunction Replace with a new feedback device.
If the PID error still occurs after checking all the wiring, return to the factory for
Hardware error
repair.
13-9
ACI analog signal loss Analog input current loss (including all analog 4–20 mA
12 (AnL) signals)
Action and Reset

Action condition When the analog input is lower than 4 mA (only detects analog input 4–20 mA)
Pr.03-19
0: Disable
Warning setting parameter 1: Continue operation at the last frequency (warning, keypad displays ANL)
2: Decelerate to 0 Hz (warning, keypad displays ANL)
“Warning” occurs when Pr.03-19 = 1 or 2. The “Warning automatically
Auto
Reset method clears when the analog input signal is larger than 4mA.
Manual “Error” occurs when Pr.03-19 = 3. You must reset manually.
Record Does not record when Pr.03-19 = 1 or 2 (“Warning”).
Tighten the terminals again.
Loose or broken ACI wiring
Replace with a new cable.
External device error Replace new device.
If the AnL error still occurs after checking all the wiring, return to the factory for
Hardware error
repair.
Under current
13 (uC)
Low current
Action and Reset

Pr.06-73
0: No function
Warning setting parameter 1: Fault and coast to stop
2: Fault and ramp to stop by 2nd deceleration time
“Warning” occurs when Pr.06-73 = 3. The “Warning” automatically
Auto
Reset method clears when the output current is > (Pr.06-71 + 0.1 A).
Manual “Error” occurs when Pr.06-73 = 1 and 2. You must reset manually.
Record Does not record when Pr.06-73 = 3 and uC displays “Warning”.
Broken motor cable Exclude the connection issue of the motor and its load.
Improper setting for the low current
Set the proper settings for Pr.06-71, Pr.06-72 and Pr.06-73.
protection
Check the loading status.
Low load
Make sure the loading matches the motor capacity.
13-10
Over speed warning

17 (oSPd)
Over speed warning
Action and Reset

Action condition The encoder feedback speed > Pr.10-10
Pr.10-12 = 0
Warning setting parameter
Reset method “Warning” automatically clears when the drive stops
Reset condition “Warning” automatically clears when the drive stops
Record N/A
Improper setting for Pr.10-25 FOC
Decrease setting value for Pr.10-25.
bandwidth of speed observer
Improper bandwidth setting for
Increase the bandwidth setting for ASR speed controller.
ASR speed controller
Incorrect motor parameter setting Reset motor parameter and run parameter tuning.
Verify wiring of the control circuit, and wiring/grounding of the main circuit to
prevent interference.
Deviation Warning
18 (dAvE)
Over speed deviation warning
Action and Reset

Pr.10-15 = 0
Reset condition After the drive stops
Record N/A
Improper parameter setting for the
Reset proper value for Pr.10-13 and Pr.10-14.
slip error
Improper setting for ASR
Reset ASR parameters.
parameter and acceleration/
Set proper accel./ decel. time.
deceleration
Accel./ Decel. time is too short Reset proper accel./ decel. time.
Motor locked Remove the causes of motor locked.
Mechanical brake is not released Check the active timing of the system.
Incorrect parameter setting of
torque limit Adjust to proper setting value.
(Pr.06-12, Pr.11-17–20)
13-11
Phase loss
19 (PHL)
Input phase loss warning
Action and Reset

Action condition One of the phases outputs less than Pr.06-47
Pr.06-45 = 0
Reset condition After the drive stops
Record N/A
Phase loss of the input power Verify wiring of the main circuit.
Single phase power input on a
Use the model with voltage that matches the power.
three-phase model
If the power of main circuit works well, check if the MC of the main circuit is
broken.
The power voltage has changed
Cycle the power after verifying the power is normal. If PHL still occurs, return to
the factory for repair.
Loose wiring terminal of input
Tighten the terminal screws with the torque listed in the user manual.
power
Check if the input cable of 3-phase Make sure the wiring is correct.
power is broken Replace the broken part of the cable.
The voltage of input power has Check setting for Pr.06-50 (Time for Input Phase Loss Detection) and Pr.06-52
changed (Ripple of Input Phase Loss).
Unbalance three-phase of the
Check the status of three-phase power.
input power
Over-torque 1
20 (ot1)
Over-torque 1 warning
Action and Reset

Pr.06-06 = 1 or 3
0: No function
Warning setting parameter operation
Reset method When input current < (Pr.06-07 – 5%), the Ot1 warning automatically clears
Reset condition When input current < (Pr.06-07 – 5%), the Ot1 warning automatically clears
Record N/A
Incorrect parameter setting Configure the settings for Pr.06-07 and Pr.06-08 again.
Mechanical error (e.g. mechanical
Remove the causes of malfunction.
lock due to over-torque)
Decrease the loading.
The load is too large
Replace with a motor with larger capacity.
Accel./ Decel. time and working
Increase the setting values for Pr.01-12–01-19 (accel./ decel. time)
cycle is too short
Adjust the settings for Pr.01-01–01-08 (V/F curve), especially the setting value
V/F voltage is too high for the mid-point voltage (if the mid-point voltage is set too small, the load
capacity decreases at low-speed).
13-12
The motor capacity is too small Replace with a motor with larger capacity.
Over-load during low-speed Decrease the loading during low-speed operation.
operation Increase the motor capacity.
The torque compensation is too Adjust the torque compensation value (Pr.07-26 torque compensation gain) until
large the output current decreases and the motor does not stall.
Improper parameter settings for
Correct the parameter settings for speed tracking.
the speed tracking function
Start the speed tracking function.
(including restart after momentary
Adjust the maximum current for Pr.07-09 speed tracking.
power loss and restart after fault)
Over-torque
21 (ot2)
Over-torque 2 warning
Action and Reset

Pr.06-09 = 1 or 3
0: No function
Warning setting parameter operation
Reset method When output current < (Pr.06-10 – 5%), the Ot2 warning automatically clears
Reset condition When output current < (Pr.06-10 – 5%), the Ot2 warning automatically clears
Record N/A
Incorrect parameter setting Configure the settings for Pr.06-10 and Pr.06-11
Mechanical error (e.g. mechanical
lock due to over-torque)
Increase the setting values for Pr.01-12–01-19 (accel./ decel. time)
cycle is too short
Adjust the V/F curve (Motor 2, Pr.01-35–01-42), especially the setting value for
V/F voltage is too high the mid-point voltage (if the mid-point voltage is set too small, the load capacity
decreases at low-speed).
The motor capacity is too small Replace with a motor with larger capacity.
Over-load during low-speed Decrease the loading during low-speed operation.
The torque compensation is too Adjust the torque compensation value (Pr.07-26 torque compensation gain) until
large the output current decreases and the motor does not stall.
Start speed tracking function.
Adjust the maximum current for Pr.07-09 speed tracking.
13-13
Motor over-heating warning.

Motor over-heating
22_1 (oH3) PTC
The AC motor drive detects the temperature inside the
motor is too high
Action and Reset

Action condition Pr.03-00 = 6 (PTC), PTC input level > Pr.06-30 (default = 50%)
Error treatment: Pr.06-29
0: Warn and keep operating
3: No warning
When Pr.06-29 = 0 and when the temperature is ≤ Pr.06-30 level, the oH3
warning automatically clears.
When Pr.06-29 = 0 (“Warning”), it automatically resets.
When Pr.06-29 = 0, oH3 displays “Warning”. When the temperature is ≤
Reset method
Pr.06-30 level, the oH3 warning automatically clears.
Reset condition When the temperature is ≤ Pr.06-30 level, the oH3 warning automatically clears.
Record N/A
Motor locked Clear the motor lock status.
Change the installed place if there are heating devices in the surroundings.
Ambien temperature is too high
Install/ add cooling fan or air conditioner to lower the ambient temperature.
Motor cooling system error Check the cooling system to make it work normally.
Motor fan error Replace the fan.

Decrease low-speed operation time.
Operates at low-speed too long Change to dedicated motor for the drive.
Increase the motor capacity.
Increase setting values for Pr.01-12–01-19 (accel./ decel. time).
cycle is too short
Adjust settings for Pr.01-01–01-08 (V/F curve), especially the setting value for
V/F voltage is too high the mid-point voltage (if the mid-point voltage is set too small, the load capacity
decreases at low-speed).
Check if the motor rated current
Configure the correct rated current value of the motor again.
matches the motor nameplate
Check if the PTC is properly set
Check the connection between PTC thermistor resistor and the heat protection.
and wired
Check if the setting for stall
Set the stall prevention to the proper value.
prevention is correct
Unbalance three-phase
Replace the motor.
impedance of the motor
Harmonics is too high Use remedies to reduce harmonics.
13-14
Motor over-heating warning.

Motor over-heating
22_2 (oH3) PT100
The AC motor drive detects the temperature inside the
motor is too high.
Action and Reset

Action condition Pr.03-00 = 11 (PT100), PT100 input level > Pr.06-57 (default = 7 V)
Error treatment: Pr.06-29
Warning setting parameter 3: No warning
When Pr.06-29 = 0 and when the temperature is < Pr.06-56 level, the oH3
If the temperature is between Pr.06-56 and Pr.06-57, the frequency outputs
according to the operating frequency setting for Pr.06-58.
When Pr.06-29 = 0, oH3 displays “Warning”. When the temperature is <
Reset method
Pr.06-56 level, the oH3 warning automatically clears.
Reset condition When the temperature is < Pr.06-56 level, the oH3 warning automatically clears.
Record N/A
Motor locked Clear the motor lock status.
Decrease loading.
Ambien temperature is too high

Operates at low-speed too long Change to dedicated motor for the drive.
Increase the setting values for Pr.01-12–01-19 (accel./ decel. time).
cycle is too short
V/F voltage is too high for the mid-point voltage (if the mid-point voltage is set too small, the load
capacity decreases at low-speed).
Configure the correct rated current value of the motor again.
matches the motor nameplate
Check if the PT100 is properly set Check the connection between PT100 thermistor resistor and the heat
and wired protection.
Unbalance three-phase
Replace the motor.
Harmonics is too high Use remedies to reduce harmonics.
13-15

Over slip warning.
By using the maximum slip (Pr.10-29) as the base,
Over slip warning
24 (oSL)
when the drive outputs at constant speed, and the F>H
or F<H exceeds Pr.07-29 level and Pr.07-30 setting
time, 100% Pr.07-29 = Pr.10-29.
Action and Reset
When the drive outputs at constant speed, and F > H or F < H exceeds the
Action condition
Pr.07-29 level
Pr.07-31 = 0 Warning
3: No warning
When Pr.07-31 = 0 and when the drive outputs at constant speed, and F > H or
Reset method F < H no longer exceeds the Pr.07-29 level, the oSL warning automatically
clears.
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Check if the motor parameter is
Check the motor parameter.
correct
The load is too large Decrease the loading.
Check if the settings for Pr.07-29,
Pr.07-30 and Pr.10-29 are properly Check the parameter settings for oSL protection.
set
Auto tuning Parameter auto-tuning is processing.

25 (tUn) When running auto-tuning, the keypad displays “tUn”.
Action and Reset

Action condition When running Pr.05-00 motor parameter auto-tuning, the keypad displays “tUn”.
Action time N/A
When auto-tuning is finished and no error occurs, the warning automatically
Reset method
clears.
Reset condition When auto-tuning is finished and no error occurs.
Record N/A
The motor parameter is running
When the auto-tuning is finished, the warning automatically clears.
auto-tuning
13-16
Output phase loss

28 (OPHL)
Output phase loss
Action and Reset

Action time N/A
Pr.06-45
3: No warning
If Pr.06-45 is set to 0, the OPHL warning automatically clears after the drive
Reset method
stops.
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Unbalanced three-phase
Replace the motor.
Check the cable.
Check if the wiring is incorrect
Replace the cable.
Check if the motor is a
Choose a three-phase motor.
single-phase motor
Check if the control board cable is loose. If yes, reconnect the cable and run the
drive to test. If the error still occurs, return to the factory for repair.
Check if the current sensor is
Check if the three-phase current is balanced with a current clamp meter. If the
broken
current is balanced and the OPHL error still shows on the display, return to the
factory for repair.
If capacity of the drive is larger
Choose the matches capacity of the drive and motor.
than the motor
Copy model error 3

30 (SE3)
Keypad COPY error 3: copy model error
Action and Reset

“SE3” warning occurs when different drive identity codes are found during
Action condition
copying parameters.
Action time Immediately act when the error is detected
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Keypad copy between different
It is mainly to prevent parameter copies between different HP/models.
power range drives
13-17
CANopen guarding
36 time-out (CGdn)
CANopen guarding time-out 1
Action and Reset

When CANopen Node Guarding detects that one of the slaves does not
Action condition response, the CGdn error displays.
The upper unit sets factor and time during configuration.
Action time The time that upper unit sets during configuration
Reset condition The upper unit sends a reset package to clear this fault.
Record N/A
The guarding time is too short, or
Increase the guarding time (Index 100C) and detection times.
less detection times
1. Verify the wiring and grounding of the communication circuit. It is
recommended to separate the communication circuit from the main circuit,
Malfunction caused by interference or wire in 90 degree for effective anti-interference performance.
2. Make sure the communication circuit is wired in series.
3. Use CANopen cable or add terminating resistance.
CANopen heartbeat
37 error (CHbn)
CANopen heartbeat error
Action and Reset

When CANopen Heartbeat detects that one of the slaves does not response, the
CHbn error shows.
Action condition
The upper unit sets the confirming time of producer and consumer during
configuration.
Action time
configuration.
Reset condition The upper unit sends a reset package to clear this fault
Record When Pr.00-21 ≠ 3, CHbn is a “Warning”, and the warning is not recorded
The heartbeat time is too short Increase heartbeat time (Index 1016)
Communication cable is broken or
Check or replace the communication cable.
bad connected
13-18
CANopen bus off error

39 (CbFn)
CANopen BUS off error
Action and Reset

Hardware When CANopen card is not installed, CbFn fault will occur.
When the master received wrong communication package, CbFn
fault will occur.
Action condition
Software Too much interference on BUS
When the CAN_H and CAN_L communication cable is short, the
master receives wrong package, and CbFn fault occurs.
Action time Immediately act when the fault is detected
Reset method Manual Reset
Reset condition Cycle the power
Record When Pr.00-21≠3, CbFn is a “Warning”, and the warning is not recorded
Check if the CANopen card is
Make sure the CANopen card is installed.
installed
Check if the CANopen speed is
Reset CANopen speed (Pr.09-37)
correct
bad connected
CANopen index error

40 (CIdn)
CANopen Index error
Action and Reset

Action condition CANopen communication Index error
Reset condition Upper unit sends a reset package to clear this fault
Record When Pr.00-21 ≠ 3, Cldn is a “Warning”, and the warning is not recorded
Incorrect setting of CANopen
Reset CANopen Index (Pr.00-02 = 7)
index
13-19
CANopen station
41 address error (CAdn)
CANopen station address error (only supports 1–127)
Action and Reset

Action condition CANopen station address error
Reset condition Pr.00-02 = 7
Record When Pr.00-21 ≠ 3, CAdn is a “Warning”, and the warning is not recorded
1. Disable CANopen (Pr.09-36 = 0)
2. Reset CANopen (Pr.00-02 = 7)
station address
3. Reset CANopen station address (Pr.09-36)
CANopen memory
42 error (CFrn)
CANopen memory error
Action and Reset

When the user update firmware version of the control board, the FRAM internal
Action condition
data will not be changed, then CFrn fault will occur.
Record When Pr.00-21 ≠ 3, CFrn is a “Warning”, and the warning is not recorded
CANopen internal memory error 2. Reset CANopen (Pr.00-20 = 7)
13-20
CANopen SDO SDO transmission time-out (only shows on master

43 time-out (CSdn) station)
Action and Reset

When the CANopen master transmits SDO command, and the Slave response
Action condition
“time-out”, CSdn warning will occur.
When the master resends a SDO command and receives the response, the
Reset method
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Slave is not connected Connect slave and CANopen BUS.
The synchronize cycle is set too
Increase the synchronization time (Index 1006)
short
Check the status of the cable, or replace the cable.
of the communication cable
CANopen SDO
44 receives register CANopen SDO receives register overflow
overflow (CSbn)
Action and Reset

Action condition The upper unit sends too much SDO and causes buffer overflow
Reset method The upper unit sends a reset package to clear the warning.
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Check if the master sends too much SDO command. Make sure the master
Too much SDO from the upper unit
sends SDO command according to the command format.
13-21
CANopen format error

46 (CPtn)
CANopen protocol format error
Action and Reset

The slave detects that data from the upper unit cannot be recognized, and then
Action condition
shows CPtn warning
Action time Immediately displays when the fault is detected
Reset method The upper unit sends a reset packet to clear the warning
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
The upper unit sends incorrect Make sure the master sends the packet based on CANopen DS301 standard
communication packet command format.
RTC adjust
47 (PLrA)
PLC (RTC) is not adjusted
Action and Reset

When using RTC function for PLC program, and PLC detects unreasonable
Action condition
RTC time, PLrA warning displays.
Auto Stops the PLC and runs again, the warning automatically clears
Reset method
Manual Manual reset to clear this warning
Record N/A
When using RTC function for PLC
program, and the drive is power off
over 7 days or KPC-CC01 does
1. Stop the PLC program and restart it.
not connect to the drive for a long
2. Adjust the RTC time and cycle the power.
time, the RTC time is different with
the internal calculated time when
re-connect the keypad to the drive.
KPC-CC01 does not adjust the
Adjust the RTC time and cycle the power.
RTC time
PLC detects unreasonable RTC 1. Stop the PLC program and restart it.
time 2. Cycle the power.
1. Stop the PLC program and restart it.
Replace with a new KPC-CC01
2. Cycle the power.
13-22
InnerCOM error
48 (PLiC)
InnerCOM error
Action and Reset

Action condition N/A
Action time N/A
Reset method N/A
Reset condition When InnerCOM is back to normal condition, the warning automatically clears
Record N/A
Communication cable is loose Check the connection of the communication cable
to separate the communication circuit from the main circuit, or wire in 90 degree
Malfunction caused by interference for effective anti-interference performance.
It recommended to install terminal resistor(s) on the first and the last unit of the
communication circuit.
Keypad RTC time-out

49 (PLrt)
PLC (RTC) error
Action and Reset

Action time N/A
Reset method N/A
Record N/A
KPC-CC01 is not connected to the
control board while using the RTC Do not remove the KPC-CC01 keypad while using RTC function.
function
13-23
PLC opposite defect

50 (PLod)
PLC download error warning
Action and Reset

During PLC downloading, the program source code detects incorrect address
Action condition
(e.g. the address exceeds the range), then the PLod warning shows.
Check if the program is correct and re-download the program. If the fault does
Reset method
not exist, the warning automatically clears.
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Incorrect component number is
found when downloading the PLC Use the correct component number.
program
PLC save memory

51 error Data error during PLC operation
(PLSv)
Action and Reset

The program detects incorrect written address (e.g. the address has exceeded
Action condition
the range) during PLC operation, then the PLSv warning shows.
Reset method
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
An incorrect written address is
Make sure the write-in address is correct and re-download the program.
detected during PLC operation
13-24
52 Data defect (PLdA) Data error during PLC operation
Action and Reset

T. The program detects incorrect write-in address when decoding the program
Action condition source code and downloading the PLC program (e.g. the address has exceeded
the range), then PLdA warning acts.
Reset method
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
During PLC operation, the external
Modbus has written/read incorrect Check if the upper unit transmits the correct command
data to internal PLC program
Function defect
53 (PLFn)
PLC download function code error
Action and Reset

The program detects incorrect command (unsupported command) during PLC
Action condition
downloading, then PLFn warning acts.
Reset method
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Unsupported command has used
Check if the firmware of the drive is the old version. If yes, contact Delta.
while downloading the program
13-25
PLC buffer overflow

54 (PLor)
PLC register overflow
Action and Reset

When PLC runs the last command and the command exceeds the maximum
Action condition
capacity of the program, the PLor warning shows.
Reset method
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
1. Disable PLC
The program detects source code 2. Delete PLC program (Pr.00-02 = 6)
error during PLC operation 3. Enable PLC
4. Re-download PLC program
Function defect
55 (PLFF)
Function code error during PLC operation
Action and Reset

The program detects incorrect command (unsupported command) during PLC
Action condition
operation, then PLFF warning shows.
Warning setting parameter NA
Reset method
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
The PLC runs an incorrect When starting the PLC function and there is no program in the PLC, the PLFF
command during operation warning shows. This is a normal warning, please download the program.
13-26
Checksum error
56 (PLSn)
PLC checksum error
Action and Reset

Action condition PLC checksum error is detected after power on, then PLSn warning shows
Reset method
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
1. Disable PLC
The program detects checksum 2. Remove PLC program (Pr.00-02 = 6)
error during PLC operation 3. Enable PLC
No end command
57 (PLEd)
PLC end command is missing
Action and Reset

The “End” command is missing until the last command is executed, the PLEd
Action condition
warning shows
Reset method
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
1. Disable PLC
There is no “END” command 2. Remove PLC program (Pr.00-02 = 6)
during PLC operation 3. Enable PLC
13-27
PLC MCR error

58 (PLCr)
PLC MCR command error
Action and Reset

The MC command is detected during PLC operation, but there is no
Action condition
corresponded MCR command, then the PLCr warning shows.
Reset method
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
The MC command is continuously The MC command cannot be used continuously for 9 times. Check and reset the
used for more than 9 times program, then re-download the program.
PLC download fail

59 (PLdF)
PLC download fail
Action and Reset

PLC download fail due to momentary power loss during the downloading, when
Action condition
power is ON again, PLdF warning shows.
Reset method
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
PLC download is forced to stop, so
Check if there is any error in the program and re-download the PLC program
the program write-in is incompleted
13-28
PLC scan time fail

60 (PLSF)
PLC scan time exceeds the maximum allowable time
Action and Reset

When the PLC scan time exceeds the maximum allowable time (400 ms), PLSF
Action condition
warning shows.
Reset method
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
The PLC scan time exceeds the
Check if the source code is correct and re-download the program
maximum allowable time (400ms)
CAN/M guarding error

61 (PCGd)
CANopen Master guarding error
Action and Reset

When CANopen Master Node Guarding detects that one of the Slaves does not
Action condition
response, the PCGd warning will display
Reset method
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Slave is not connected or
CANopen BUS cable is not Connect the Slave and CANopen BUS
connected
1. Verify wiring/grounding of the communication circuit. It is recommended to
separate the communication circuit from the main circuit, or wire in 90
Malfunction caused by interference degree for effective anti-interference performance.
bad connected
13-29
CAN/M BUS off

62 (PCbF)
CANopen Master BUS off
Action and Reset

When the CANopen master detects error packets more than 255 during the BUS
off detection, or when the CANopen card is not installed, the PCbF warning
Action condition displays.
If the BUS cable is not connected, the drive will not receive issues packet, and
the PCbF warning will not display.
Reset method Cycle the power
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
bad connected
CAN/M node lack

63 (PCnL)
CANopen Master node error
Action and Reset

When the CANopen master configures different setting nodes from the actual
Action condition
nodes, the PCnL warning displays.
When connect BUS to the original slave, or change the configured node
Reset method
numbers to meet the actual node quantity, the warning automatically clears.
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
The configured node quantity is Connect BUS to the original slave, or change the configured node numbers to
different from the actual nodes meet the actual node quantity
bad connected
13-30
CAN/M cycle time-out

64 (PCCt)
CANopen Master cycle time-out
Action and Reset

When the transmitted packet from CANopen master exceeds the maximum
Action condition
allowable quantity in a certain time, the PCCt warning displays.
The warning automatically clears when changing the configuration and
Reset method
re-executing the program.
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
When the transmitted packet from
CANopen master exceeds the
Increase the time setting of D1090 synchronization cycle
maximum allowable quantity in a
certain time
CAN/M SDO over

65 (PCSF)
CANopen Master SDO overflow
Action and Reset

When the CANopen master transmits too much SDO that causes buffer
Action condition
overflow, the PCSF warning displays
Reset method Cycle the power, or stop the PLC and run the PLC again
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Internal PLC transmits too much The PLC program needs to confirm receiving the SDO feedback data before
SDO at once sending another SDO command.
13-31
CAN/M SDO time-out

66 (PCSd)
CANopen Master SDO time-out
Action and Reset

When the CANopen master sends a SDO command, and the BUS is too busy to
Action condition
transmit the command, PCSd warning displays.
Reset method The warning automatically clears when the SDO transmits normally.
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
When the CANopen master
transmits a SDO command, and
Check if the Slave responds within 1 second.
does not receive feedback from
the Slave within 1 sec.
CAN/M address error

67 (PCAd)
CANopen Master station address error
Action and Reset

When the CANopen master detects an incorrect or repeated station address
Action condition
from the Slave, the PCAd warning displays.
The warning automatically clears when reset the station address and run the
Reset method
program again.
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
When the CANopen master
detects an incorrect or repeated Set the correct slave station address.
station address from the Slave
13-32

When the drive receives an incorrect packet, it means
CAN/M time-out that there is interference or the command from the
68 (PCTo) upper unit does not meet the CANopen command
format.
Action and Reset
Action time Immediately acts when receiving the command
Reset method The warning automatically clears after receives another normal packet
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
The command from the upper unit
does not meet the CANopen Contact Delta for further confirmation.
format
Duplicate MAC ID error

70 ExCom ID fail (ECid)
Node address setting error
Action and Reset

Duplicate setting of MAC ID
Action condition
Node address setting error
Action time N/A
Reset method Correct the setting and cycle the power
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
The setting address exceeds the
Check the address setting of the communication card (Pr.09-70)
range (0–63)
The speed setting exceeds the
Standard: 0–2, non-standard: 0–7
range
The address is duplicated with
Reset the address
other nodes on the BUS
13-33
ExCom power loss

71 (ECLv)
Low voltage of communication card
Action and Reset

Action condition The 5V power that drive provides to communication card is to low
Action time Immediately acts
Reset method Re-power
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
1. Switch the communication card to other CP2000 drives and observe if there
is ECLv warning shown. If yes, replace with a new communication card; if
The 5V power that drive provides
not, replace the drive.
to communication card is to low
2. Use another communication card to test if the ECLv warning has shown as
well. If not, replace the card; if yes, replace the drive.
The card is loose Make sure the communication card is well inserted.
ExCom test mode

72 (ECtt)
Communication card is in the test mode
Action and Reset

Action condition Communication card is in the test mode
Reset method Cycle the power and enter the normal mode
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Communication command error Cycle the power
The communication card detects too much errors in the

ExCom Bus off
73 (ECbF)
BUS, then enters the BUS-OFF status and stop
communicating
Action and Reset

Action condition When the drive detects BUS-off (for DeviceNet)
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Poor connection of the cable Re-connect the cable
Bad quality of the cable Replace the cable
13-34
ExCom no power
74 (ECnP)
There is no power supply on the DeviceNet
Action and Reset

Action condition There is no power supply on the DeviceNet
Reset method Re-power
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
The drive detects that DeviceNet
Check if the cable and power is normal. If yes, return to the factory for repair.
has no power
ExCom factory defect

75 (ECFF)
Factory default setting error
Action and Reset

Action condition Factory default setting error
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Factory default setting error Use DCISoft to reset to the default value.
ExCom inner error

76 (ECiF)
Serious internal error
Action and Reset

Action condition Internal memory saving error
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Noise interference prevent interference.
Cycle the power.
Reset to the default value and check if the error still exists. If yes, replace the
The memory is broken
communication card.
13-35
ExCom IO Net break

77 (ECio)
IO connection break off
Action and Reset

Action condition IO connection between the communication card and the master is broken off
Record N/A
The cable is loose Re-install the cable
Incorrect parameter setting for
Check the setting for master communication parameter
master communication
ExCom Parameter
78 data error Profibus parameter data error
(ECPP)
Action and Reset

Action time N/A
Record N/A
The GSD file is incorrect Get the correct GSD file from the software
ExCom configuration
79 data error Profibus configuration data error
(ECPi)
Action and Reset

Action time N/A
Record N/A
The GSD file is incorrect Get the correct GSD file from the software
13-36
Ethernet link fail

80 (ECEF)
Ethernet cable is not connected
Action and Reset

Action condition Hardware detection
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Ethernet cable is loose Re-connect the cable
Bad quality of Ethernet cable Replace the cable
Communication
Communication time-out for communication card and
81 time-out
the upper unit
(ECto)
Action and Reset

Action time N/A
Reset method N/A
CMC-EC01: auto resets when the communication with the upper unit is back to
Reset condition
normal
Record N/A
Communication card is not
Check if the connection of the communication cable is correct
connected with the upper unit
Communication error of the upper
Check if the communication of the upper unit is normal
unit
Checksum error
82 (ECCS)
Checksum error for communication card and the drive
Action and Reset

Action condition Software detection
Action time N/A
Reset condition Immediately resets
Record N/A
Noise interference
13-37
Return defect
83 (ECrF)
Communication card returns to the default setting
Action and Reset

Action condition Communication card returns to the default setting
Action time N/A
Record N/A
Communication card is returning to
No actions.
default setting
Modbus TCP over

84 (Eco0)
Modbus TCP exceeds maximum communication value
Action and Reset

Record N/A
The Master communication value
is more than the allowable quantity Reduce Master communication value
of the communication card
The upper unit is online without
communicating, and does not Revise program of upper unit, the communication should be break off when it is
break off the Modbus TCP link, not used for a long time
causes occupy connection
A new Modbus TCP connection is
built every time when the upper
Revise program of upper unit: use the same Modbus TCP connection when
unit is connected to the
connected to the same communication card
communication card, which
caused occupy connection
13-38
EtherNet/IP over
85 (ECo1)
Ethernet/IP exceeds maximum communication value
Action and Reset

Record N/A
The Master communication value
is more than the allowable quantity Reduce Master communication value
of the communication card
The upper unit is online without
communicating, and does not Revise program of upper unit, the communication should be break off when it is
break off the Modbus TCP link, not used for a long time
causes occupy connection
A new Modbus TCP connection is
built every time when the upper
Revise program of upper unit: use the same Modbus TCP connection when
unit is connected to the
connected to the same communication card
communication card, which
caused occupy connection
86 IP fail (ECiP) IP setting error
Action and Reset

Reset condition Immediate reset
Record N/A
IP conflict Reset IP
DHCP IP configuration error MIS check if DHCP Server works normally
13-39
Mail warning: Alarm mail will be sent when the

87 Mail fail (EC3F)
communication card establishes alarm conditions
Action and Reset

Action condition Communication card establishes alarm conditions
Record N/A
Communication card establishes
No actions
alarm conditions
ExCom busy Communication card busy: too much packets are

88 (ECbY) received
Action and Reset

Action time N/A
Reset condition N/A
Record N/A
Communication packets are too
much for the communication card Reduce communication packets
to process
ExCom card break

89 (ECCb)
Communication card break off warning
Action and Reset

Action condition Communication card break off
The time between communication card break off and ECCb displays:
1. EtherNet/IP: 3 sec.
2. Modbus TCP: 3 sec.
Action time
3. DeviceNet: 1 sec.
4. PROFIBUS: 1 sec.
5. EtherCAT: 0.1 sec.
Reset method Auto resets after communication card is re-installed
Record N/A
Communication card break off Re-install communication card
13-40
Copy PLC password error.

Copy PLC: password
90 error (CPLP)
When KPC-CC01 is processing PLC copy and the PLC
password is incorrect, the CPLP warning shows.
Action and Reset

Action condition PLC password is incorrect
Reset condition Directly resets
Record N/A
PLC password is incorrect Reset and enter correct PLC password
Copy PLC: Read mode

91 error (CPL0)
Copy PLC Read mode error
Action and Reset

Action condition When copy PLC read mode with incorrect process
Record N/A
When copy PLC read mode and
Cycle the power and copy PLC read mode again
the process is incorrect
Copy PLC: Write mode

92 (CPL1)
Copy PLC write mode error
Action and Reset

Action condition Copy PLC write mode with incorrect process
Record N/A
When copy PLC write mode and
Cycle the power and copy PLC read mode again
the process is incorrect
13-41
Copy PLC version error.

Copy PLC: version
93 error (CPLv)
When non-CP2000 built-in PLC is copied to CP2000
drive, the CPLv warning shows
Action and Reset

Record N/A
Non-CP2000 PLC program is Check if the copied PLC program is for CP2000.
copied to CP2000 Use the correct CP2000 PLC program.
Copy PLC: size error

94 (CPLS)
Copy PLC Capacity size error
Action and Reset

Record N/A
The PLC copied to CP2000 Check if the copied PLC program is for CP2000
exceeds the allowable capacity Use CP2000 PLC program with correct capacity
Copy PLC: PLC KPC-CC01 Copy PLC function should be executed

95 function (CPLF) when PLC is off
Action and Reset

Record N/A
PLC function is enabled when
Disable PLC function first, then run the PLC copy function again
KPC-CC01 is running copy PLC
13-42
Copy PLC: time-out

96 (CPLt)
Copy PLC time out
Action and Reset

Record N/A
KPC-CC01 is removed while
The KPC-CC01 cannot be removed during the PLC copy process
copying PLC program
101 InrCOM time-out (ictn) Internal communication time-out
Action and Reset

When Pr.09-31= (-1) – (-10) (no -9) and the internal communication between
Action condition
Master and Slave is abnormal, the ictn warning shows.
The warning automatically clears when the communication is back to normal
Reset condition
condition
Record N/A
Verify wiring/grounding of the communication circuit. It is recommended to
Malfunction caused by interference separate the communication circuit from the main circuit, or wire in 90 degree for
effective anti-interference performance.
Different communication
Check if the setting for Pr.09-02 is the same as the setting for upper unit
conditions with the upper unit
Communication cable break off or
Check the cable status or replace the cable
not connected well
13-43
Estimated speed Estimated speed is in a reverse direction with motor

105 reverse (SpdR) actual running direction
Action and Reset

Pr.10-08
Record N/A
The motor runs in reverse direction
Check if the motor is hold when started, or start the motor with speed source.
at start
The difference between motor Normally the Rr value of IM is Rs × 0.7. If there is much difference of the
parameter measured Rr and Rs measured value (e.g. Rr = Rs × 0.3), proceed the motor parameter auto-tuning
value is too large again.
Insufficient output torque is
dragged to the reverse direction by Increase the current limit of Pr.06-12, so as to increase the output torque.
the load.
Deceleration energy
123 backup (dEb)
Deceleration energy backup
Action and Reset

Action time N/A
0: Disable
1: dEb with auto accel./decel., the output frequency will note return after power
reply.
Warning setting parameter 2: dEb with auto accel./decel., the output frequency will return after power reply.
3: dEb low-voltage control, then increase to 350 VDC / 700 VDC and decelerate to
stop.
4: dEb high-voltage control of 350 VDC / 700 VDC and decelerate to stop
Record N/A
Instantaneous power off or low
voltage and unstable/ sudden
Check the power consumption
heavy load of the power that cause
the voltage drop
Unexpected power off Check the power consumption
13-44
Chapter 14 Fault Codes and DescriptionsCP2000
Chapter 14 Fault Codes and Descriptions
ID Display on LCD Keypad Fault Name Fault Descriptions

Output current exceeds 2.4 times of rated current during
Over-current during acceleration.
1 acceleration When ocA occurs, the drive closes the gate of the
(ocA) output immediately, the motor runs freely, and the
display shows an ocA error.
Action and Reset
Action condition 240% of rated current
Fault treatment parameter N/A
Reset condition Reset in 5 sec. after the fault is cleared
Record Yes
1. Increase the acceleration time
2. Increase the acceleration time of S curve
Acceleration time is too short 3. Set auto-acceleration and auto-deceleration parameter (Pr.01-44)
4. Set over-current stall prevention function (Pr.06-03)
5. Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.
Short circuit at motor output due to Check the motor cable and remove causes of the short circuits, or replace the
poor insulation wiring cable before turning on the power.
Check for possible burnout or Check the motor insulation value with megger. Replace the motor if the
aging insulation of the motor insulation is poor.
Check if the output current during the whole working process exceeds the AC
The load is too large. motor drive’s rated current. If yes, replace the AC motor drive with a larger
capacity model.
Impulsive change of the load Reduce the load or increase the capacity of AC motor drive.
Use special motor or motor with Check the motor capacity (the rated current on the motor’s nameplate should ≦
larger capacity than the drive the rated current of the drive)
Use ON/OFF controller of an
Check the action timing of the contactor and make sure it is not turned ON/OFF
electromagnetic contactor at the
when the drive outputs the voltage.
output (U/V/W) of the drive
Adjust V/F curve setting and frequency/voltage. When the fault occurs, and the
V/F curve setting error
frequency voltage is too high, reduce the voltage.
Adjust the torque compensation (refer to Pr.07-26 torque compensation gain)
Torque compensation is too large
until the output current reduces and the motor does not stall.
Verify the wiring of the control circuit and wiring/grounding of the main circuit to
The motor starts when in free run Enable the speed tracking during start-up of Pr.07-12.
1. Start the speed tracking function.
2. Adjust the maximum current for Pr.07-09 speed tracking.
Check the settings for Pr.00-11 control mode:
Incorrect combination of control
1. For IM, Pr.00-11 = 0, 1, 2, 3, 5
mode and used motor
2. For PM, Pr.00-11 = 4, 6, or 7
The length of motor cable is too Increase AC motor drive’s capacity.
long Install AC reactor(s) on the output side (U/V/W).
14-1
The ocA occurs due to short circuit or ground fault at the output side of the drive.
Check for possible short circuits between terminals with the electric meter:
Hardware failure B1 corresponds to U, V and W; DC- corresponds to U, V and W;
corresponds to U, V and W.
If short circuit occur, return to the factory for repair.

Output current exceeds 2.4 times of rated current during
Over-current during deceleration.
2 deceleration When ocd occurs, the drive closes the gate of the
(ocd) output immediately, the motor runs freely, and the
display shows an ocd error.
Action and Reset
Record Yes
1. Increase the deceleration time
2. Increase the deceleration time of S-curve
Deceleration time too short 3. Set auto-acceleration and auto-deceleration parameter (Pr.01-44)
4. Set over-current stall prevention function (Pr.06-03)
5. Replace the drive with a larger capacity model
Check if the mechanical brake of
Check the action timing of the mechanical brake
the motor activates too early
Short-circuit at motor output due to Check the motor cable and remove causes of the short circuits, or replace the
Check for possible burnout or Check the motor insulation value with megger. Replace the motor if the
aging insulation of the motor insulation is poor.
Check if the output current during the whole working process exceeds the AC
The load is too large motor drive’s rated current. If yes, replace the AC motor drive with a larger
capacity model.
Use special motor or motor with Check the motor capacity (the rated current on the motor’s nameplate should ≤
larger capacity than the drive the rated current of the drive)
Adjust V/F curve settings and frequency/voltage. When the fault occurs, and the
The length of motor cable is too Increase AC motor drive’s capacity
long Install AC reactor(s) on the output side (U/V/W)
The ocd occurs due to short circuit or ground fault at the output side of the drive.
Check for possible short circuits between terminals with the electric meter:
Hardware error B1 corresponds to U, V and W; DC- corresponds to U, V and W;
corresponds to U, V and W.
If short circuits occur, return to the factory for repair.
Check if the setting of stall
14-2

Output current exceeds 2.4 times of the rated current
Over-current during during constant speed.
3 steady operation When ocn occurs, the drive closes the gate of the output
(ocn) immediately, the motor runs freely, and the display
shows an ocn error.
Action and Reset
Record Yes
Short-circuit at motor output due to Check the motor cable and remove causes of the short circuits, or replace the
Check for possible shaft lock, Troubleshoot the motor shaft lock.
burnout or aging insulation of the Check the motor insulation value with megger. Replace the motor if the
motor insulation is poor.
Use special motor or motor with Check motor capacity (the rated current on the motor’s nameplate should ≤ the
larger capacity than the drive rated current of the drive)
Adjust V/F curve settings and frequency/voltage. When the fault occurs, and the
Adjust over-torque offset value (Refer to Pr.07-26 torque compensation gain),
Over-torque offset value too high
until the output current is reduced and not motor stall.
Torque compensation is too large.
The length of motor cable is too Increase the AC motor drive’s capacity.
long Install AC reactor(s) on the output side (U/V/W).
The ocn occurs due to short circuit or ground fault at the output side of the drive.
Check for possible short circuit between terminals with the electric meter:
Hardware failure B1 corresponds to U, V and W; DC- corresponds to U, V, and W;
corresponds to U, V, and W.
If short circuits occur, return to the factory for repair.
14-3

When (one of) the output terminal(s) is grounded, short
circuit current is larger than Pr.06-60 setting value, and
the detection time is longer than Pr.06-61 time setting,
4 Ground fault (GFF)
GFF occurs.
NOTE: the short circuit protection is provided for AC
motor drive protection, not to protect the user.
Action and Reset
Action condition Pr.06-60 (Default = 60%)
Action time Pr.06-61 (Default = 0.10 sec.)
Record Yes
Motor burnout or aging insulation Check the motor insulation value with megger. Replace the motor if the
occurred insulation is poor.
Troubleshoot the short circuit.
Short circuit due to broken cable
Replace the cable.
Larger stray capacitance of the If the motor cable length exceeds 100 m, decrease the setting value for carrier
frequency.
cable and terminal Take remedies to reduce stray capacitance.
Verify the grounding and wiring of the communication circuit. It is recommended
for effective sufficient anti-interference performance.
Cycle the power after checking the status of motor, cable and cable length. If
Hardware failure
GFF still exists, return to the factory for repair.
IGBT short circuit

Short-circuit is detected between upper bridge and
5 between upper bridge
lower bridge of the IGBT module
and lower bridge (occ)
Action and Reset

Action condition Hardware protection
Record Yes
IGBT error Check the motor wiring.
Short-circuit detecting circuit error Cycle the power, if occ still exists, return to the factory for repair.
14-4

Over-current or hardware failure in current detection at
Over-current at stop stop.
6 (ocS) Cycle the power after ocS occurs. If the hardware failure
occurs, the display shows cd1, cd2 or cd3.
Action and Reset
Record Yes
Check if other error code such as cd1–cd3 occur after cycling the power. If yes,
Hardware failure
return to the factory for repair.

DC bus over-voltage during acceleration.
Over-voltage during
When ovA occurs, the drive closes the gate of the
7 acceleration
output, the motor runs freely, and the display shows an
(ovA)
ovA error.
Action and Reset
230V models: 410 VDC
Action condition
Action time Immediately act when DC bus voltage is higher than the level
Reset condition Reset only when DC bus voltage is lower than 90% of the over-voltage level
Record Yes
Acceleration is too slow (e.g. hen Decrease the acceleration time
lifting load decreases acceleration Use brake unit or DC bus
time) Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.
The setting for stall prevention
level is smaller than no-load The setting for stall prevention level should be larger than no-load current
current
Check if the input voltage is within the rated AC motor drive input voltage range,
Power voltage is too high
and check for possible voltage spikes.
ON/OFF switch action of phase-in If the phase-in capacitor or active power supply unit acts in the same power
capacitor in the same power system, the input voltage may surge abnormally in a short time. In this case,
system install an AC reactor.
Use over-voltage stall prevention function (Pr.06-01)
Regenerative voltage of motor
Use auto-acceleration and auto-deceleration setting (Pr.01-44)
inertia
Use a brake unit or DC bus
Check if the over-voltage warning occurs after acceleration stops.
When the warning occurs, do the following:
Acceleration time is too short 1. Increase the acceleration time
2. Set Pr.06-01 over-voltage stall prevention
3. Increase setting value for Pr.01-25 S-curve acceleration arrival time 2
The ground short circuit current charges the capacitor in the main circuit through
the power. Check if there is ground fault on the motor cable, wiring box and its
Motor ground fault
internal terminals.
Troubleshoot the ground fault.
Incorrect wiring of brake resistor or
Check the wiring of brake resistor and brake unit.
brake unit
14-5

DC bus over-voltage during deceleration.
Over-voltage during
When ovd occurs, the drive closes the gate of the
8 deceleration
output immediately, the motor runs freely, and the
(ovd)
display shows an ovd error.
Action and Reset
Action condition
Reset condition Reset only when DC bus voltage is lower than 90% of the over-voltage level
Record Yes
1. Increase the setting value of Pr.01-13, Pr.01-15, Pr.01-17 and Pr.01-19
(deceleration time)
2. Connect brake resistor, brake unit or DC bus on the drive.
Deceleration time is too short, 3. Reduce the brake frequency.
causing too large regenerative 4. Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.
energy of the load 5. Use S-curve acceleration/deceleration.
6. Use over-voltage stall prevention (Pr.06-01).
7. Use auto-acceleration and auto-deceleration (Pr.01-44).
8. Adjust braking level (Pr.07-01 or the bolt position of the brake unit).
level is smaller than no-load The setting for stall prevention level should be larger than no-load current
current
Motor ground fault
internal terminals.
Check the wiring of brake resistor or brake unit.
brake unit
14-6

DC bus over-voltage at constant speed.
Over-voltage at
When ovn occurs, the drive closes the gate of the
9 constant speed
output immediately, the motor runs freely, and the
(ovn)
display shows an ovn error.
Action and Reset
Action condition
Reset condition Reset only when DC bus voltage is lower than 90% of over-voltage level
Record Yes
1. Connect brake resistor, brake unit or DC bus to the drive.
2. Reduce the load.
Impulsive change of the load
3. Replace to drive with a larger capacity model.
4. Adjust braking level (Pr.07-01 or bolt position of the brake unit).
level is smaller than no-load The setting of stall prevention level should be larger than no-load current
current
Regenerative voltage of motor Use over-voltage stall prevention function (Pr.06-01)
inertia Use a brake unit or DC bus
The ground short-circuit current charges the capacitor in the main circuit through
Motor ground fault
internal terminals.
brake unit
14-7
Over-voltage at stop
10 (ovS)
Over-voltage at stop
Action and Reset

Action condition
Reset condition Reset only when DC bus voltage is lower than 90% of over-voltage level
Record Yes
ON/OFF switch action of phase-in If the phase-in capacitor or active power supply unit activates in the same power
brake unit
Hardware failure in voltage Check if other error code such as cd1–cd3 occur after cycling the power. If yes,
detection return to the factory for repair.
Motor ground fault
internal terminals.
Low-voltage during
DC bus voltage is lower than Pr.06-00 setting value
11 acceleration
during acceleration
(LvA)
Action and Reset

Action condition Pr.06-00 (Default = depending on the model)
Action time Immediately act when DC bus voltage is lower than Pr.06-00
Reset when DC bus voltage is higher than Pr.06-00 + 30 V (Frame A–D) / 40 V
Reset condition
(Frame E and below)
Record Yes
Power-off Improve power supply condition.
Power voltage changes Adjust voltage to the power range of the drive
Start up the motor with large Check the power system.
capacity Increase the capacity of power equipment.
Reduce the load.
The load is too large Increase the drive capacity.
Increase the acceleration time.
DC bus Install DC reactor(s).
Check if there is short-circuit plate
Connect short circuit plate or DC reactor between terminal +1 and +2.
or any DC reactor installed
If the error still exists, return to the factory for repair.
between terminal +1 and +2
14-8
Low-voltage during
DC bus voltage is lower than Pr.06-00 setting value
12 deceleration
during deceleration
(Lvd)
Action and Reset

Fault treatment parameter NA
Reset condition
(Frame E and above)
Record Yes
Power voltage changes Adjust voltage to the power range of the drive.
Reduce the load.
Sudden load
Increase the drive capacity.
Low-voltage at
DC bus voltage is lower than Pr.06-00 setting value at
13 constant speed
constant speed
(Lvn)
Action and Reset

Fault treatment parameter NA
Reset condition
(Frame E and above)
Record Yes
Power voltage changes Adjust voltage to the power range of the drive
Reduce the load.
Sudden load
14-9
1. DC bus voltage is lower than Pr.06-00 setting value

Low-voltage at stop
14 (LvS)
at stop
2. Hardware failure in voltage detection
Action and Reset

Manual / auto:
230V models:
Frame A–D = Lv level + 30 VDC + 500 ms
Frame E and above = Lv level + 40 VDC + 500 ms
460V models:
Frame A–D = Lv level + 60 VDC + 500 ms
Reset method Frame E and above = Lv level + 80 VDC + 500 ms
575V models:
Frame A–D = Pr.06-00 + 100.0 VDC
Frame E and above = Pr.06-00 + 120 VDC
690V models:
Frame A–D = Pr.06-00 + 100.0 VDC
Frame E and above = Pr.06-00 + 100.0 VDC
Reset condition 500 ms
Record Yes
Incorrect drive models Check if the power specification matches the drive.
Adjust voltage to the power range of the drive.
Power voltage changes Cycle the power after checking the power. If LvS error still exists, return to the
factory for repair.
14-10
Phase loss protection

15 (OrP)
Phase loss of power input
Action and Reset

Action condition DC bus is lower than Pr.07-00, and DC bus ripple is higher than Pr.06-52
Action time N/A
Fault treatment parameter Pr.06-53
Reset condition Immediately reset when DC bus is higher than Pr.07-00
Record Yes
Phase loss of input power Correctly install the wiring of the main circuit power.
Single phase power input to
Choose the model whose power matches the voltage.
three-phase model
If the main circuit power works normally, verify the main circuit.
Power voltage changes Cycle the power after checking the power, if OrP error still exists, return to the
factory for repair.
Loose wiring terminal of input Tighten the terminal screws according to the torque described in the user
power manual.
The input cable of three-phase Wire correctly.
power is cut off Replace the cut off cable.
Input power voltage changes too Verify the setting value for Pr.06-50 Time for Input Phase Loss Detection and
much Pr.06-52 Ripple of Input Phase Loss
Unbalanced three-phase of input
Check the power three-phase status.
power
IGBT overheating
16 (oH1)
IGBT temperature exceeds the protection level
Action and Reset

When Pr.06-15 is higher than the IGBT overheating protection level, oH1 error
Action condition
occurs instead of oH1 warning.
IGBT temperature exceeds the protection level for more than 100ms, oH1 error
Action time
occurs.
Reset condition Reset only when IGBT temperature is lower than oH1 error level minus (-) 10°C
Record Yes
1. Check ambient temperature.
or temperature inside the control
cabinet is too high, or if there is
obstruction in the ventilation hole
of the control cabinet.
cabinet.
the heat sink or if the fan is Remove the obstruction or replace the cooling fan.
running.
1. Reduce the load
2. Reduce the carrier
corresponding load
The drive has run 100% or more
than 100% of the rated output for a Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.
long time
14-11
Board level component Board-level component temperature exceeds the

17 overheating (oH2) protection level
Action and Reset

Action condition Refer to the table below for oH2 level of each models
When board-level component temperature exceeds the protection level for more
Action time
than 100 ms, oH2 error occurs
Reset when board-level component temperature is lower than oH2 error level
Reset condition
minus (-) 10°C
Record Yes
1. Check ambient temperature.
or temperature inside the control
cabinet is too high, or if there is
obstruction in the ventilation hole
4. Install / add cooling fan or air conditioner to lower the temperature inside the
of the control cabinet.
cabinet.
the heat sink or if the fan is Remove the obstruction or replace the cooling fan.
running.
1. Reduce the load
2. Reduce the carrier
corresponding load
The drive has run 100% or more
than 100% of the rated output for a Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.
long time
Unstable power Install reactor(s)
Load changes frequently Reduce load changes
oH1/ oH2 warning level

oH warning
Model oH1 oH2
oH1 warning = (Pr.06-15)
VFD007CP23A-21
VFD015CP23A-21
VFD022CP23A-21
VFD037CP23A-21
VFD055CP23A-21
VFD075CP23A-21 110
VFD110CP23A-21
110
VFD220CP23A-21
VFD300CP23A-21
VFD370CP23A-00/-21
VFD450CP23A-00/-21
VFD550CP23A-00/-21 90
VFD750CP23A-00/-21
VFD900CP23A-00/-21
VFD007CP43A/4EA-21
VFD015CP43B/4EB-21
VFD022CP43B/4EB-21
110 110
VFD040CP43A/4EA-21 oH2 Warning = oH2 – 5
VFD055CP43B/4EB-21
VFD075CP43B/4EB-21
VFD110CP43B/4EB-21
14-12
oH warning
Model oH1 oH2
oH1 warning = (Pr.06-15)
VFD150CP43B/4EB-21
VFD185CP43B/4EB-21
VFD220CP43A/4EA-21 110
VFD370CP43B/4EB-21
VFD450CP43S-00/-21
VFD550CP43S-00/-21
VFD750CP43B-00/-21
VFD900CP43A-00/-21
VFD1100CP43A-00/-21
VFD1320CP43B-00/-21
VFD1600CP43A-00/-21
VFD1850CP43B-00/-21
90
110
VFD2500CP43A-00/-21
VFD2800CP43A-00/-21
VFD3150CP43A-00
VFD3150CP43C-00/-21
VFD3550CP43A-00
VFD3550CP43C-00/-21
VFD4000CP43A-00
VFD4000CP43C-00/-21
VFD5000CP43A-00
85
VFD5000CP43C-00/-21
VFD5600CP43A-00
VFD5600CP43C-21
VFD6300CP43A-00
VFD6300CP43C-21
VFD015CP53A-21
VFD022CP53A-21 85
VFD037CP53A-21
oH1 Warning = oH1 – 5
VFD055CP53A-21 100
oH2 Warning = oH2 – 5
VFD075CP53A-21
70
VFD110CP53A-21
VFD150CP53A-21
VFD185CP63A-21
VFD220CP63A-21
90 85
VFD300CP63A-21
VFD370CP63A-21
VFD450CP63A-00/-21
100
VFD550CP63A-00/-21
VFD750CP63A-00/-21
VFD900CP63A-00/-21 65
VFD1600CP63A-00/-21
VFD2000CP63A-00/-21
110
VFD2500CP63A-00/-21
VFD3150CP63A-00/-21
VFD4000CP63A-00/-21 70
VFD4500CP63A-00/-21
VFD5600CP63A-00/-21
VFD6300CP63A-00/-21
14-13
IGBT temperature
18 detection failure IGBT hardware failure in temperature detection
(tH1o)
Action and Reset

Action condition NTC broken or wiring failure
When the IGBT temperature is higher than the protection level, and detection
Action time
time exceeds 100 ms, the tH1o protection activates.
Record Yes
Wait for 10 minutes, and then cycle the power. Check if tH1o protection still
Hardware failure
exists. If yes, return to the factory for repair.
Capacitor hardware
19 error Hardware failure in capacitor temperature detection
(tH2o)
Action and Reset

Action condition NTC broken or wiring failure
When the IGBT temperature is higher than the protection level, and detection
Action time
time exceeds 100 ms, the tH2o protection activates.
Record Yes
Wait for 10 minutes, and then cycle the power. Check if tH2o protection still
Hardware failure
exists. If yes, return to the factory for repair.
14-14

The AC motor drive detects excessive drive output
current. The overload capacity sustains for 1 minute
21 Over load (oL)
when the drive outputs 150% of the drive’s rated output
current.
Action and Reset
Action condition Based on over load curve and derating curve.
When the load is higher than the protection level and exceeds allowable time,
Action time
the oL protection activates.
Record Yes
The load is too large Reduce the load
Accel./Decel. time or the working
Increase the setting value for Pr.01-12–01-19 (accel./decel time)
cycle are too short
for the mid-point voltage (if the mid-point voltage is set too low, the load capacity
V/F voltage is too high
decreases at low speed).
Refer to the V/F curve selection of Pr.01-43.
The capacity of the drive is too
Replace the drive with a larger capacity model.
small
Reduce the load during low-speed operation.
Overload during low-speed
operation
Decrease the carrier frequency of Pr.00-17.
Adjust the torque compensation (refer to Pr.07-26 Torque Compensation Gain)
prevention is correct.
Check the status of three-phase motor.
Output phase loss
Check if the cable is broken or the screws are loose.
14-15
Electronic thermal
Electronics thermal relay 1 protection. The drive coasts
22 relay 1 protection
to stop once it activates.
(EoL1)
Action and Reset

Action condition Start counting when output current > 105% of motor 1 rated current
Pr.06-14 (if the output current is larger than 105% of motor 1 rated current again
Action time
within 60 sec., the counting time reduces and is less than Pr.06-14)
Record Yes
The load is too large Reduce the load.
Increase the setting values for Pr.01-12–01-19 (Accel./Decel. time)
cycle is too short
Refer to the V/F curve selection of Pr.01-43.
operation.
When using a general motor, even
Replace the drive with a dedicated to VFD model.
it operates below rated current, an
overload may still occur during
low-speed operation.
When using VFD dedicated
motors, Pr.06-13=0 (electronic Pr.06-13 = 1 electronic thermal relay selection motor 1 = standard motor (motor
thermal relay selection motor 1 = with fan on the shaft).
inverter motor)
Incorrect value of electronic
Reset to the correct motor rated current.
thermal relay
The maximum motor frequency is
Reset to the correct motor rated frequency.
set too low
Set Pr.06-13 = 2 electronic thermal relay selection motor 1= disable, and install
One drive to multiple motors
thermal relay on each motor.
until the current reduces and the motor does no stall.
Motor fan error Check the status of the fan, or replace the fan.
Replace the motor.
14-16
Electronic thermal
Electronic thermal relay 2 protection. The drive coasts
23 relay 2 protection
to stop once it activates.
(EoL2)
Action and Reset

Action condition Start counting when output current > 105% of motor 2 rated current
Pr.06-28 (If the output current is larger than 105% of motor 2 rated current again
Action time
within 60 sec., the counting time reduces and is less than Pr.06-28)
Record Yes
The load is too large Reduce the load
Increase the setting values for Pr.01-12–01-19 (accel./decel. time)
cycle are too short
Refer to the V/F curve selection setting of Pr.01-43.
operation.
When using general motor, even it
Replace the drive with a dedicated to VFD model.
operates below rated current, an
overload may still occur during
low-speed operation.
When using VFD dedicated
motors, Pr.06-27 = 0 (electronic Pr.06-27 = 1 Electronic thermal relay selection motor 2 = standard motor (motor
thermal relay selection motor 2 = 0 with fan on the shaft).
inverter motor)
Incorrect value of electronic
Reset to the correct motor rated current.
thermal relay
The maximum motor frequency is
Reset to the correct motor rated frequency.
set too low
Set Pr.06-27 = 2 Electronic thermal relay selection motor 2 = disable, and install
One drive to multiple motors
thermal relay on each motor.
Motor fan error Check the status of the fan, or replace the fan.
Replace the motor.
14-17
Motor overheating (PTC) (Pr.03-00–Pr.03-02 = 6 PTC),

Motor overheating
24_1 (oH3) PTC
when PTC input > Pr.06-30, the fault treatment acts
according to Pr.06-29.
Action and Reset

Action condition PTC input value > Pr.06-30 setting (Default = 50%)
Pr.06-29
Fault treatment parameter 1: Fault and ramp to stop
3: No warning
When Pr.06-29 = 0, oH3 is a “Warning”. The “Warning” is automatically cleared.
Reset method
When Pr.06-29 = 1 or 2, oH3 is a “Fault”. You must reset manually.
Record When Pr.06-29 = 1 or 2, oH3 is a “Fault”, and the fault is recorded.
Motor shaft lock Remove the shaft lock.
Reduce the load.
Ambient temperature is too high
Operate at low-speed too long. Replace the motor with a dedicated to VFD model.
Accel./Decel. time and working
Increase the setting values for Pr.01-12–01-19 (accel./decel. time)
cycle are too short
V/F voltage is too high the mid-point voltage (if the mid-point voltage is set too low, the load capacity
matches that on the motor Reset to the correct motor rated current.
nameplate.
Check if the PTC is properly set
Check the connection between PTC thermistor and the heat protection.
and wired.
Replace the motor.
Harmonics are too high. Use remedies to reduce harmonics.
14-18
Motor overheating (PT100) (Pr.03-00–Pr.03-02 = 11

Motor overheating
24_2 (oH3) PT100
PT100). When PT100 input > Pr.06-57 (default = 7 V),
the fault treatment acts according to Pr.06-29.
Action and Reset

Action condition PT100 input value > Pr.06-57 setting (default = 7 V)
Pr.06-29
3: No warning
When Pr.06-29 = 0 and the temperature < Pr.06-56, oH3 is automatically
Reset method cleared.
When Pr.06-29 = 1 or 2, oH3 is a “Fault”. You must reset manually.
Record When Pr.06-29 = 1 or 2, oH3 is a “Fault”, and the fault is recorded.
Motor shaft lock Remove the shaft lock.
Reduce the load.
Change the installed place If there are heating devices in the surroundings.
Ambient temperature is too high
Operate at low-speed too long Replace the motor with a dedicated to VFD model.
Increase the setting values for Pr.01-12–Pr.01-19 (accel./decel. time)
cycle are too short
matches that on the motor Reset to the correct motor rated current.
nameplate.
Check if the PT100 is properly set
Check connection of PT100 thermistor.
and wired.
Replace the motor.
Harmonics are too high Use remedies to reduce harmonics.
14-19
When output current exceeds the over-torque detection

Over torque 1 level (Pr.06-07) and exceeds over-torque detection time
26 (ot1) (Pr.06-08), and when Pr.06-06 or Pr.06-09 is set to 2 or
4, the ot1 error displays.
Action and Reset

Pr.06-06
0: No function
1: Continue operation after Over-torque detection during constant speed
Fault treatment parameter operation
2: Stop after Over-torque detection during constant speed operation
3: Continue operation after Over-torque detection during RUN
4: Stop after Over-torque detection during RUN
When Pr.06-06 = 1 or 3, ot1 is a “Warning”. The warning is
Reset method Auto
automatically cleared when the output current < (Pr.06-07 – 5%)
Reset condition
Manual When Pr.06-06 = 2 or 4, ot1 is a “Fault”. You must reset manually.
Record Immediately reset
Active level When Pr.06-06 = 2 or 4, ot1 is a “Fault”, and the fault is recorded.
Incorrect parameter setting Reset Pr.06-07 and Pr.06-08
Mechanical failure (e.g.
over-torque, mechanical lock)
Reduce the load.
Replace the motor with a larger capacity model.
Increase the setting values for Pr.01-12–Pr.01-19 (accel./decel. time)
cycle are too short
The motor capacity is too small Replace the motor with a larger capacity model.
Overload during low-speed Decrease low-speed operation time.
speed tracking function (including
restart after momentary power loss
and restart after fault)
14-20
When output current exceeds the over-torque detection

Over torque 2 level (Pr.06-10) and exceeds over-torque detection time
27 (ot2) (Pr.06-11), and when Pr.06-09 is set to 2 or 4, the ot2
error displays.
Action and Reset

Pr.06-09
0: No function
1: Continue operation after Over-torque detection during constant speed
Fault treatment parameter operation
2: Stop after Over-torque detection during constant speed operation
3: Continue operation after Over-torque detection during RUN
4: Stop after Over-torque detection during RUN
When Pr.06-09 = 1 or 3, ot2 is a “Warning”. The warning is
Reset method Auto
automatically cleared when the output current < (Pr.06-10 – 5%).
Reset condition
Manual When Pr.06-09 = 2 or 4, ot2 is a “Fault”. You must reset manually.
Active level When Pr.06-09 = 2 or 4, ot2 is a “Fault”, and the fault is recorded.
Incorrect parameter setting Reset Pr.06-07 and Pr.06-08
Mechanical failure (e.g.
over-torque, mechanical lock)
Reduce the load.
The load is too large.
Increase the setting values for Pr.01-12–01-19 (accel./decel. time).
cycle are too short
V/F voltage is too high for the mid-point voltage (if the mid-point voltage is set too low, the load capacity
The motor capacity is too small Replace the motor with a larger capacity model.
Overload during low-speed Decrease low-speed operation time.
speed tracking function (including
restart at momentary power loss
and restart after fault)
14-21
Under current
28 (uC)
Low current detection
Action and Reset

Pr.06-73
0: No function
Fault treatment parameter 1: Fault and coast to stop
2: Fault and ramp to stop by 2nd deceleration time
When Pr.06-73 = 3, uC is a “Warning”. The warning is automatically
Reset method Auto
cleared when the output current > (Pr.06-71+0.1A).
Reset condition
Manual When Pr.06-73 = 1 or 2, uC is a “Fault”. You must reset manually.
Active level When Pr.06-71 = 1 or 2, uC is a “Fault”, and the fault is recorded.
Motor cable disconnection Troubleshoot the connection between the motor and the load.
Improper setting of low-current
Reset Pr.06-71, Pr.06-72 and Pr.06-73 to proper settings.
protection
Check the load status.
The load is too low
Check if the motor capacity matches the load.

When MIx = 45 (forward run limit) or MIx = 44
(backward run limit) act during operation, LiT error
29 Limit Error (LiT)
shows.
(This error does not show on the CP2000 drive.)
Action and Reset
Action condition MIx = 44 (backward run limit) or MIx = 45(forward run limit)
Record Yes
The limit ON/OFF switch is on
Install the limit ON/OFF switch to correct position.
incorrect position
Deceleration time is too long, Reduce deceleration time.
causing the motor cannot stop at Adjust setting values for brake level (Pr.07-01 or the insert position on the brake
limited position unit).
The motor cannot stop due to
Reset the over-voltage stall prevention.
over-voltage stall prevention
Verify wiring of the control circuit and wiring/grounding of the main circuit to
14-22
EEPROM write error

30 (cF1)
Internal EEPROM cannot be programmed
Action and Reset

Action condition Firmware internal detection
Action time cF1 acts immediately when the drive detects the fault
Record Yes
Press “RESET” key or reset the parameter to the default setting, if cF1 still
Internal EEPROM cannot be
exists, return to the factory for repair.
programmed
Cycle the power, if cF1 still exists, return to the factory for repair.
EEPROM read error

31 (cF2)
Internal EEPROM cannot be read
Action and Reset

Action condition Firmware internal detection
Action time cF2 acts immediately when the drive detects the fault
Record Yes
Press “RESET” key or reset the parameter to the default setting, if cF2 still
Internal EEPROM cannot be read exists, return to the factory for repair.
Cycle the power, if cF2 error still exists, return to the factory for repair.
U-phase error
33 (cd1)
U-phase current detection error when power is ON
Action and Reset

Action time cd1 acts immediately when the drive detects the fault
Reset method Power-off
Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
Cycle the power.
Hardware failure
If cd1 still exists, return to the factory for repair.
14-23
34 V-phase error (cd2) V-phase current detection error when power ON
Action and Reset

Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
Cycle the power.
Hardware failure
W-phase error
35 (cd3)
W-phase current detection error when power ON
Action and Reset

Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
Cycle the power.
Hardware failure
cc hardware failure cc (current clamp) hardware protection error when

36 (Hd0) power is ON
Action and Reset

Action time Hd0 acts immediately when the drive detects the fault
Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
Cycle the power.
Hardware failure
If Hd0 still exists, return to the factory for repair.
14-24
oc hardware error
37 (Hd1)
oc hardware protection error when power is ON
Action and Reset

Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
Cycle the power.
Hardware failure
ov hardware error
38 (Hd2)
ov hardware protection error when power is ON
Action and Reset

Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
Cycle the power.
Hardware failure
occ hardware error Protection error of occ IGBT short-circuit detection

39 (Hd3) when power is ON
Action and Reset

Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
Cycle the power.
Hardware failure
14-25
Auto-tuning error
40 (AUE)
Motor auto-tuning error
Action and Reset

Record Yes
Press “STOP” key during
Re-execute auto-tuning.
auto-tuning
Check motor capacity and related parameters.
Incorrect motor capacity (too large
Set the correct parameters, that is Pr.01-01–Pr.01-02.
or too small) and parameter setting
Set Pr.01-00 larger than motor rated frequency.
Incorrect motor wiring Check the wiring.
Motor shaft lock Remove the cause of motor shaft lock.
The electromagnetic contactor is
ON at output side (U/V/W) of the Make sure the electromagnetic valve is OFF.
drive
Reduce the load.
The load is too large.
Accel./Decel. time is too short Increase the setting values for Pr.01-12–Pr.01-19 (Accel./Decel. time).
PID feedback loss (analog feedback signal is only valid

41 PID loss ACI (AFE)
when the PID function is enabled)
Action and Reset

Action condition When the analog input < 4 mA (only detects 4–20 mA analog input)
Pr.08-09
When Pr.08-09 = 3 or 4, AFE is a “Warning”. When the feedback signal
Auto
Reset method is > 4 mA, the ”Warning” is automatically cleared.
Manual When Pr.08-09 = 1 or 2, AFE is a “Fault”. You must reset manually.
When Pr.08-09 = 1 or 2, AFE is a “Fault”, and the fault is recorded; when
Record
Pr.08-09 = 3 or 4, AFE is a “Warning”, and the warning is not recorded.
PID feedback cable is loose or cut Tighten the terminal.
off Replace the cable with a new one.
Feedback device failure Replace the device with a new one.
Hardware failure Check all the wiring. If AFE fault still exists, return to the factory for repair.
14-26
The motor runs in a reverse direction to the frequency

PG feedback error
42 (PGF1)
command direction. (This error does not show on the
CP2000 drive.)
Action and Reset

Pr.10-08
Fault treatment parameter
Record Yes
Incorrect parameter setting of
Reset encoder parameter (Pr.10-02).
encoder
Check wiring of the encoder Re-wire the encoder.
PG card or PG encoder failure Replace PG card or encoder with a new one.
Verify wiring of the control circuit and wiring/grounding of the main circuit to
Pr.10-00 and Pr.10-02 is not set in the PG control mode.

PG feedback loss
43 (PGF2)
When press “RUN” key, PGF2 fault occurs.
Action and Reset

Record Yes
Incorrect setting of encoder
Reset encoder parameters (Pr.10-00 and Pr.10-02)
parameter
Incorrect selection of the control
Choose the correct control mode.
mode
14-27

Under PG mode, when the motor frequency exceeds
the encoder observer stall level (Pr.10-10) and starts to
PG feedback stall
44 (PGF3)
count, the fault time is longer than the detection time of
encoder observer stall (Pr.10-11), then PGF3 fault
occurs. (This error does not show on the CP2000 drive.)
Action and Reset
Pr.10-12
Record Yes
Incorrect setting of encoder
Reset encoder parameter (Pr.10-01)
parameter
Pr. 01-00 is set too small Set proper value for Pr.01-00.
Incorrect setting for ASR Reset ASR parameters.
parameters and accel./decel. time Set correct accel./decel. time.
Incorrect setting for PG feedback
Reset proper values for Pr.10-10 and Pr.10-11
stall

Under PG mode, when the motor frequency exceeds
encoder observer slip range (Pr.10-13) and starts to
PG slip error
45 (PGF4)
count, the fault time is longer than the detection time of
encoder observer slip (Pr.10-14), PGF4 fault occurs.
Action and Reset
Pr.10-15
When Pr.10-15 = 0, PGF4 is a “Warning”, when the deviation between
Auto output frequency and motor frequency is smaller than the encoder
Reset method
observer slip range, the warning is automatically cleared.
Manual When Pr.10-15 = 1 or 2, PGF4 is a “Fault”. You must reset manually.
Record When Pr.10-15 = 1 or 2, PGF4 is a “Fault”, and the fault is recorded.
Incorrect settings for PG feedback
Reset correct values for Pr.10-13 and Pr.10-14.
parameters
Incorrect settings for ASR Reset ASR parameters.
parameters and accel./decel. time Set correct accel./decel time.
Incorrect settings of encoder
Reset encoder parameters (Pr.10-01).
parameters
Accel./Decel. time is too short Reset proper accel./decel. time.
Incorrect settings of torque limit
parameters (Pr.06-12, Reset proper setting values for Pr.06-12 and Pr.11-17–Pr. 17-20.
Pr.11-17–20)
Motor shaft lock Remove causes of motor shaft lock.
Mechanical brake is not released Check the action sequence of the system.
14-28
ACI loss Analog input loss (including all the 4–20 mA analog
48 (ACE) signal)
Action and Reset

Action condition When the analog in conditionput is < 4 mA (only detects 4–20 mA analog input)
Pr.03-19
0: Disable
1: Continue operation at the last frequency (warning, ANL is displayed on the
keypad)
2: Decelerate to stop (warning, ANL is displayed on the keypad)
When Pr.03-19 = 1 or 2, ACE is a “Warning”. When analog input signal
Auto
Reset method is > 4 mA, the warning is automatically cleared.
Manual When Pr.03-19 = 3, ACE is a “Fault”. You must reset manually.
Record When Pr.03-19 = 3, ACE is a “Fault”, and the fault is recorded.
Tighten the terminal.
ACI cable is loose or cut off
Replace the cable with a new one.
External device failure Replace the device with a new one.
Hardware failure Check all the wiring. If ACE still exists, return to the factory for repair.
External fault. When the drive decelerates based on the

49 External fault (EF)
setting of Pr.07-20, the EF fault displays on the keypad.
Action and Reset

Action condition MIx = EF and the MI terminal is ON
Pr.07-20
0: Coast to stop
1: Stop by the 1st deceleration time
2: Stop by the 2nd deceleration time
3: Stop by the 3rd deceleration time
4: Stop by the 4th deceleration time
6: Automatic deceleration (Pr.01-46)
Reset condition Manual reset only after the external fault is cleared (terminal status is recovered)
Record Yes
External fault Press RESET key after the fault is cleared.
14-29
When the contact of MIx = EF1 is ON, the output stops

Emergency stop
50 (EF1)
immediately and displays EF1 on the keypad. The
motor is in free running.
Action and Reset

Action condition MIx = EF1 and the MI terminal is ON
Reset condition Manual reset only after the external fault is cleared (terminal status is recovered)
Record Yes
Verify if the system is back to normal condition, and then press “RESET” key to
When MIx = EF1 activates
go back to the default.
When the contact of MIx = bb is ON, the output stops

External base block
51 (bb)
immediately and displays bb on the keypad. The motor
is in free running.
Action and Reset

Action condition MIx = bb and the MI terminal is ON
Reset method The display “bb” is automatically cleared after the fault is cleared.
Reset condition N/A
Record No
Verify if the system is back to normal condition, and then press “RESET” key to
When MIx=bb activates
go back to the default.
Password is locked
52 (Pcod)
Entering the wrong password three consecutive times
Action and Reset

Action condition Entering the wrong password three consecutive times
Reset condition Power-off
Record Yes
1. Input the correct password after rebooting the motor drive.
2. If you forget the password, do the following steps:
Step 1: Input 9999 and press ENTER.
Incorrect password input through Step 2: Repeat step 1. Input 9999 and press ENTER.
Pr.00-07 (You need to finish step 1 and step 2 within 10 seconds. If you don’t finish
the two steps in 10 seconds, try again.)
3. The parameter settings return to the default when the “Input 9999” process
is finished.
14-30
Illegal command
54 (CE1)
Communication command is illegal
Action and Reset

Action condition When the function code is not 03, 06, 10, or 63.
Record No
command from the upper unit
from the upper unit
of the cable
Illegal data address

55 (CE2)
Data address is illegal
Action and Reset

Action condition When the data address is correct.
Record No
from the upper unit
of the cable
14-31
Illegal data value

56 (CE3)
Data value is illegal
Action and Reset

Action condition When the data length is too long
Record No
from the upper unit
of the cable
Data is written to
57 read-only address Data is written to read-only address
(CE4)
Action and Reset

Action condition When the data is written to read-only address.
Record No
from the upper unit
of the cable
14-32
Modbus transmission
58 time-out Modbus transmission time-out occurs
(CE10)
Action and Reset

Action condition When the communication time exceeds the detection time for Pr.09-03 time-out.
Pr.09-02
3: No warning and continue operation
Record Yes
The upper unit does not transmit
Check if the upper unit transmits the communication command within the setting
the communication command
time for Pr.09-03.
within Pr.09-03 setting time.
from the upper unit
of the cable
Brake transistor error The brake transistor of the motor drive is abnormal. (for
60 (bF) the models with built-in brake transistor)
Action and Reset

Record Yes
1. Press “RESET” key to go back to the default. If bF still exists, return to the
factory for repair.
Hardware error 2. Power off the motor drive since the internal circuit is abnormal. Use a meter
to check if it is short-circuit between B2 to DC-. If short-circuit exists, return
to the factory for repair.
Malfunction caused by interference Verify wiring/grounding of the main circuit to prevent interference.
Using the incorrect brake resistor Check if the resistance value of the brake resistor matches to the drive.
Incorrect wiring of the brake
Refer to the optional accessories instruction in chapter 7, and verify the wiring.
resistor
14-33
Y-connection /
Δ-connection
61 An error occurs when Y-Δ switches
switch error
(ydc)
Action and Reset

1. ydc occurs when the confirmation signals of Y-connection and Δ-connection
Action condition are conducted at the same time.
2. If any of confirmation signals is not conducted within Pr.05-25, ydc occurs.
Can be reset only when the confirmation signal of Y-connection is conducted if it
Reset condition is Y-connection, or when the confirmation signal of Δ-connection is conducted if
it is Δ-connection.
Record Yes
The electromagnetic valve
Check if the electromagnetic valve works normally.
operates incorrectly during Y-Δ
If not, replace it.
switch.
Incorrect parameter setting Check if related parameters are all set up and set correctly.
The wiring of Y-Δ switch function is
Check the wiring.
incorrect
When Pr.07-13 is not 0, and the power is suddenly off,

Deceleration energy
causing the DC bus voltage lower than the dEb action
62 backup error
level, the dEb function acts and the motor ramps to
(dEb)
stop. Then dEb displays on the keypad.
Action and Reset

Action condition When Pr.07-13 is not 0, and the DC bus voltage is lower than the level of dEb.
When Pr.07-13 = 2 (dEb with auto-acceleration / auto-deceleration, the
Auto drive outputs the frequency after the power is restored): dEb is
automatically cleared.
Reset method When Pr.07-13 = 1 (dEb with auto-acceleration / auto-deceleration, the
drive does not output the frequency after the power is restored): The
Hand
drive stops when dEb acts and the rotation speed becomes 0 Hz, then
the drive can be reset manually.
Auto: The fault is automatically cleared.
Reset condition
Hand: When the drive decelerates to 0 Hz.
Record Yes
Unstable power source or the
Check the power system.
power is off
There is any other large load 1. Replace power system with a larger capacity.
operates in the power system 2. Use a different power system from the large load system.
14-34

On the basis of the maximum slip limit set via Pr.10-29,
the speed deviation is abnormal. When the motor drive
outputs at constant speed, F > H or F < H exceeds the
63 Over slip error (oSL)
level set via Pr.07-29, and it exceeds the time set via
Pr.07-30, oSL shows. oSL occurs in induction motors
only.
Action and Reset
Pr.07-29
Action condition
100% of Pr.07-29 = the maximum limit of the slip frequency (Pr.10-29)
Pr.07-31
3: No warning
Pr.07-31 = 0 is a warning.
When the motor drive outputs at constant speed, and F > H or F < H
Auto
does not exceed the level set via Pr.07-29 anymore, oSL warning will
Reset method
be cleared automatically.
When Pr.07-31 = 1 or 2, oSL is an error, and it needs to reset
Hand
manually.
Record Pr.07-31 = 1 or 2, oSL is “Fault”, and will be recorded.
Any of the motor parameters in
parameter group 5 may be Check the motor parameters
incorrect
Overload Decrease the load
Any of the setting value of
Pr.07-29, 07-30, and 10-29 is Check the setting of oSL protection function related parameters
improper
Electric valve switch

64 error (ryF)
Electric valve switch error when executing Soft Start
Action and Reset

Action condition Hardware detection (Frame D and above)
Reset condition Reset when the electric valve switch is correctly closed
Record Yes
Check if the power is shut down during the drive operation.
The input power is abnormal
Check if the three-phase input power is normal.
Malfunction caused by interference Verify the wiring/grounding of the main circuit to prevent interference.
Cycle the power after checking the power. If ryF error still exists, return to the
Hardware failure
factory for repair.
14-35
PG hardware error PG card hardware error

65
(PGF5) (This error does not show on the CP2000 drive.)
Action and Reset

1. Only for installing a permanent magnetic motor with PG01U/ PG02U: When
powering on, Pr.00-04 = 29 < Magnetic Pole Segment> displays 0 or 7
(Wiring Error or No U,V, W Input Signal), then the keypad displays this fault
Action condition
code.
2. The motor drive receives a <RUN> command when powering on, but PG
card is not ready to work. Then the keypad displays this fault code.
Reset condition Cycle the power to reset this fault message..

Record Yes
Wiring Error or No U,V, W Input
Re-wire correctly.
Signal
Encoder error Verify if it is a UVW signal encoder
Incorrect setting of encoder Reset correct values for Pr.10-00
parameter
Verify if the motor selecting switch Verify if using a UVW signal encoder or a Delta wire-saving encoder.
on the PG card is on the right side
Wrong PG card Verify if using a wrong PG card then choose a right one.
14-36
Reverse direction of
Rotating direction is different from the commanding
68 the speed feedback
direction detected by the sensorless
(SdRv)
Action and Reset

Pr.10-08
Record When Pr.10-08 = 1 or 2, SdRv is a “Fault”, and the fault is recorded.
The setting of Pr.10-25 FOC
bandwidth of speed observer is Decrease the setting of Pr.10-25
improper
The setting of motor parameter is
Reset the motor parameter and execute parameter tuning
incorrect
The motor cable is abnormal or
Check if the cable is well functioned or replace the cable
broken
A reverse force is exerted, or the
motor runs in a reverse direction at Start speed tracking function (Pr.07-12)
start
Over speed rotation

69 feedback (SdOr)
Over speed rotation detected by sensorless
Action and Reset

Pr.10-12
Record When Pr.10-12 = 1 or 2, SdOr is a “Fault”, and the fault is recorded.
The setting of Pr.10-25 FOC
bandwidth of speed observer is Decrease the setting of Pr.10-25
improper
The setting of ASR bandwidth of
Increase the bandwidth of ASR speed controller
speed controller is improper
The setting of motor parameter is
Reset motor parameter and execute parameter tuning
incorrect
14-37
Large deviation of
A large deviation between the rotating speed and the
70 speed feedback
command detected by the sensorless
(SdDe)
Action and Reset

Pr.10-15
Record When Pr.10-15 = 1 or 2, SdDe is a “Fault”, and the fault is recorded.
Improper parameter setting for
Reset proper setting for Pr.10-13 and Pr.10-14
abnormal rotating slip function
Improper parameter setting for Reset ASR parameters
ASR and acceleration/deceleration Set proper acceleration/deceleration time
The acceleration/deceleration time
Reset proper acceleration/deceleration time
is too short
Motor shaft lock Remove the cause of motor shaft lock
The mechanical brake is not
Verify the system action timeline
released
Incorrect parameter setting for
torque limit (Pr.06-12, Adjust the setting to proper value
Pr.11-17–20)
71 Watchdog（WDTT） Watchdog error
Action and Reset

Action time N/A
Reset method Hardware failure, and cannot reset. Cycle the power.
Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
Hardware interference prevent interference.
If the WDTT fault still exists, return to the factory for repair.
14-38
72 STO Loss 1 (STL1) STO1–SCM1 internal loop detection error
Action and Reset

Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
STO1 and SCM1 short circuit lines
Connect the short circuit line
are not connected
After you make sure all the wiring is correct, if STOL fault still exists after cycling
Hardware failure
the power, please return to the factory for repair.
Check if the PIN of IO card is broken.
Bad connection of the IO card Check if the IO card connects to the control board correctly, and if the screws
are tightened well.
The IO card does not match the
Contact local agent or Delta
version of the control board
Emergency stop for

73 external safety (S1)
Emergency stop for external safety
Action and Reset

Reset condition Reset only after S1 error is cleared.
Record Yes
The switch action of S1 and SCM
Reset the switch and cycle the power.
(OPEN)
S1 and SCM short circuit lines are
Re-connect the short circuit lines
not connected
Verify the wiring/grounding of the main circuit, control circuit and encoder to
If S1 fault still exists after cycling the power, please return to the factory for
Hardware failure
repair.
Poor connection of the IO card Check if the IO card connects to the control board correctly, and if the screws
are tightened well.
14-39
External mechanical brake error

External brake error The MO terminal is active when MOx = 12, 42, 47 or 63,
75 (Brk) but the MIx = 55 does not receive signal for mechanical
brake action during the set time of Pr.02-56.
Action and Reset

MIx = 55 did not receive signal for the mechanical brake action during the set
Action condition
time of Pr.02-56.
Record Yes
Verify if the mechanical brake can work correctly.
Mechanical brake error
Replace mechanical brake.
Incorrect parameter setting If there is no brake-confirming signal to use, set Pr.02-56 = 0.
Tighten the screws.
Signal cable is loose or cut off
Replace the signal cable with a new one.
The time of Pr.02-56 is set too
Increase the time setting of Pr.02-56
short
Verify the wiring/grounding of the main circuit, control circuit and encoder to
76 STO (STO) Safety Torque Off function active
Action and Reset

When Pr.06-44 = 1 and after STO error is cleared, it automatically
Auto
Reset method resets.
Manual When Pr.06-44 = 0 and after STO error is cleared, reset it manually.
Reset condition Reset only after STO error is cleared.
Record Yes
The switch action of STO1/SCM1
Reset the switch (ON) and cycle the power
and STO2/SCM2 (OPEN)
are tightened well.
14-40
77 STO Loss 2 (STL2) STO2–SCM2 internal loop detection error
Action and Reset

Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
STO2 and SCM2 short circuit lines
Connect the short circuit lines
are not connected
After you make sure all the wiring is correct, if STL2 fault still exists after cycling
Hardware failure
are tightened well.
STO1–SCM1 and STO2–SCM2 internal loop detection

78 STO Loss 3 (STL3)
error
Action and Reset

Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
STO1 and SCM1, or STO2 and
SCM2 short circuit lines are not Re-connect the short circuit lines
connected
After you make sure all the wiring is correct, if STL3 fault still exists after cycling
Hardware failure
are tightened well.
14-41
Output phase loss

82 U phase (OPHL)
U phase output phase loss
Action and Reset

Pr.06-46
Action time Pr.06-48: Use the setting value of Pr.06-48 first if there is DC braking function,
and then use that of Pr.06-46.
Pr.06-45
3: No warning
Record Pr.06-45=1 or 2 is “Fault”, and will be recorded.
The three-phase impedance of
Replace the motor.
motor is unbalanced
Check the cable condition.
The motor is wired incorrectly
Replace the cable.
Using a single-phase motor Choose a three-phase motor
Check the flat cable of the control board. Re-do the wiring and test again if the
flat cable is loose. If the fault still exists, return the unit to the factory.
The current sensor is damaged
Verify that the three-phase current is balanced via a current clamp meter. If it is
balanced and the OPHL fault still exists, return the unit to the factory
The drive capacity is much larger
Make sure the capacity of the drive and motor match to each other.
than the motor capacity
14-42
Output phase loss

83 V phase (OPHL)
V phase output phase loss
Action and Reset

Pr.06-46
Action time Pr.06-48: Use the setting value of Pr.06-48 first. If DC braking function activates,
use that of Pr.06-46.
Pr.06-45
3: No warning
Record When Pr.06-45 = 1 or 2, OPHL is a “Fault”, and the fault is recorded.
Replace the motor.
Check if the wiring is incorrect Check the cable and replace it if necessary.
single-phase motor
Check if the current sensor is drive to test. If the fault still exists, return to the factory for repair.
broken Check if the three-phase current is balanced with a current clamp meter. If the
current is balanced and the OPHL fault still exists, return to the factory for repair.
Check if the drive capacity is larger
Choose the drive that matches the motor capacity
14-43
Output phase loss

84 W phase (OPHL)
W phase output phase loss
Action and Reset

Pr.06-46
Action time Pr.06-48: Use the setting value of Pr.06-48 first. If DC braking function activates,
use that of Pr.06-46.
Pr.06-45
3: No warning
Record When Pr.06-45 = 1 or 2, OPHL is a “Fault”, and the fault is recorded.
Replace the motor.
Check if the wiring is incorrect Check the cable and replace it if necessary.
single-phase motor
Check if the current sensor is drive to test. If the fault still exists, return to the factory for repair.
broken Check if the three-phase current is balanced with a current clamp meter. If the
current is balanced and the OPHL fault still exists, return to the factory for repair.
Check if the drive capacity is larger
Choose the drive that matches the motor capacity
14-44
PG ABZ loss protection When using PG02U card, the protection for ABZ loss
85
(AboF) (This error does not show on the CP2000 drive.)
Action and Reset

Reset condition Reset Immediately reset

Record Yes
PG card signal cable is not wired Re-wire the PG card
or is broken
PG card screws are loose. Tighten all PG card screws.
1. Cycle the power. If the keypad still displays AboF, return to the factory for
repair.
Hardware failure 2. The VP power on the PG card does not output power or has abnormal
voltage level.
3. Encoder is broken.
Using a cable between the
encoder and the PG card that is 1. Reduce the cable length
too long causes a VP voltage drop 2. Use power from another source to supply power to the encoder.
that is too large.
14-45
PG UVW loss
When using PG02U card, the protection for UVW loss
86 protection
(UvoF)
Action and Reset

Reset condition Reset Immediately reset

Record Yes
PG card signal cable is not wired Re-wire the PG card
or is broken
PG card screws are loose. Tighten all PG card screws.
1. Cycle the power. If the keypad still displays AboF, return to the factory for
repair.
Hardware failure 2. The VP power on the PG card doesnot output power or has abnormal
voltage level.
3. Encoder is broken.
Using a cable between the
encoder and the PG card that is 1. Reduce the cable length
too long causes a VP voltage drop 2. Supply power to the encoder from another power source
that is too large.
14-46
Overload protection at
87 low frequency (oL3)
Low frequency and high current protection
Action and Reset

Record Yes
1. Enhance the heat dissipation capacity for the cabinet.
2. Lower the carrier frequency (Pr.00-17).
The drive operates at a frequency
3. Decrease the voltage settings that correspond to frequency below 15 Hz in
below 15 Hz, and output current is
the V/F curve.
too large.
4. Change Pr.00-11 to general control mode.
5. Replace the drive with a larger power model.
Rotor position
89 detection error Rotor position detection error protection
(RoPd)
Action and Reset

Record Yes
Check if the motor cable is
Check or replace the cable.
abnormal or broken
Motor coil error Replace the motor.
Hardware failure IGBT broken. Return to the factory for repair.
Cycle the power. If RoPd still occurs during operation, return to the factory for
Drive’s current feedback line error
repair.
14-47
90 Force to stop (FStp) Keypad forces PLC to Stop
Action and Reset

When Pr.00-32 = 1, STOP button on the keypad is valid. When giving the STOP
Action condition
command during the PLC operation, FStp fault will active.
Record Yes
Pr.00-32 = 1: keypad STOP button Check if it is necessary to set Pr.00-32 = 0, so the keypad STOP button is
is valid invalid.
Press STOP button during PLC
Verify the timing of STOP function.
operation
93 CPU error 0 (TRAP) CPU crash
Action and Reset

Reset method Cannot reset, power off.
Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
Verify the wiring of control circuit, and the wiring/grounding of the main circuit to
Hardware interference prevent interference.
If TRAP fault still exists, return to the factory for repair.
Hardware failure Return to the factory for repair.
CPU is in an infinite loop Cycle the power. If the TRAP fault still exists, return to the factory for repair.
14-48
CANopen guarding
101 error (CGdE)
CANopen guarding error
Action and Reset

When CANopen Node Guarding detects that one of the slaves does not
Action condition response, the CGdE fault will activate.
The upper unit sets factor and time during configuration.
Action time The time that upper unit sets during configuration
Record Yes
The guarding time is too short, or
Increase the guarding time (Index 100C) and detection times
less detection times
bad connected
CANopen heartbeat
102 error (CHbE)
CANopen heartbeat error
Action and Reset

When CANopen Heartbeat detects that one of the slaves does not
response, the CHbE fault will activate.
Action condition
configuration.
The confirming time that upper unit sets for producer and consumer during
Action time
configuration.
Record Yes
The heartbeat time is too short Increase heartbeat time (Index 100C)
bad connected
14-49

104 (CbFE)
Action and Reset

Hardware When CANopen card is not installed, CbFE fault will occur.
When the master received wrong communication package, CbFE
fault will occur.
Action condition
Software Too much interference on BUS
When the CAN_H and CAN_L communication cable is short, the
master will receive wrong package, and CbFE fault will occur.
Action level Immediately act
Record Yes
Check if the CANopen card is
Make sure the CANopen card is installed.
installed
Check if the CANopen speed
Reset CANopen speed (Pr.09-37)
is correct
bad connected
CANopen index error

105 (CIdE)
CANopen index error
Action and Reset

Reset condition Upper unit sends a reset package to clear this fault
Record Yes
Reset CANopen Index (Pr.00-02 = 7)
index
14-50
CANopen station
106 address error (CAdE)
CANopen station address error (only supports 1–127)
Action and Reset

Reset method Manual reset (Pr.00-02 = 7)
Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
2. Reset CANopen (Pr.00-02 = 7)
station address
CANopen memory
107 error (CFrE)
CANopen memory error
Action and Reset

When the user update firmware version of the control board, the FRAM internal
Action condition
data will not be changed, and then CFrE fault will occur.
Record Pr.00-21 = 3, the fault is recorded
CANopen internal memory error 2. Reset CANopen (Pr.00-02 = 7)
14-51
InrCOM time-out error

111 (ictE)
Internal communication time-out
Action and Reset

Pr.09-31 = -1 – -10 (there is no -9), when the internal communication between
Action condition
Slave and Master is abnormal, IctE fault will occur.
Reset method Automatically reset after the internal communication is normal
Reset condition N/A
Record Yes
The communication condition is
Verify the setting of Pr.09-02 is the same as the setting of upper unit.
different with the upper unit
bad connected
PMLess shaft lock The drive has RUN command with output frequency, but
112 (SfLK) the permanent magnetic motor does not turn.
Action and Reset

Action time 3 sec.
Record Yes
Improper setting of the speed
Increase the setting value.
observer bandwidth
Motor shaft lock Remove causes of the motor shaft lock.
Motor error (e.g. demagnetization) Replace the motor with a new one.
14-52
Auto-tune error 1 No feedback current error when motor parameter

142 (AUE1) automatically detects
Action and Reset

Record Yes
Motor is not wired Wire the motor correctly
used as an open state on the Verify that the electromagnetic valve is closed.
output side of the drive (U/V/W).
Auto-tune error 2 Motor phase loss error when motor parameter

143 (AUE2) automatically detects
Action and Reset

Record Yes
Incorrect motor wiring Wire the motor correctly.
Motor error Check if the motor works normally.
used as an open state on the Verify that the three-phases of the electromagnetic valve are all closed.
output side of the drive (U/V/W).
Motor U/V/W wire error Check if the wires are broken.
14-53
Auto-tune error 3 No load current I0 measurement error when motor

144 (AUE3) parameter automatically detects.
Action and Reset

Record Yes
Incorrect settings for the motor
Check the settings for Pr.05-01 / Pr.05-13 / Pr.05-34.
parameter (rated current)
Auto-tune error 4 Leakage inductance Lsigma measurement error when

148 (AUE4) motor parameter automatically detects.
Action and Reset

Record Yes
Incorrect setting of motor
Check the setting of Pr.01-01.
parameters (base frequency)
C/B mismatch Control board matching error

170 (CBM) (This error does not show on the CP2000 drive.)
Action and Reset

Action time Acts when turning on the drive
Reset method Cannot reset
Reset condition Cannot reset
Record Yes
Replace with the correct control board. If the CBM still exists, contact Delta for
Incorrect control board
further confirmation.
14-54
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview│CP2000
Chapter 15 CANopen Overview
15-1 CANopen Overview
15-2 Wiring for CANopen
15-3 CANopen Communication Interface Description
15-4 CANopen Supporting Index
15-5 CANopen Fault Codes
15-6 CANopen LED Function
15-1
The built-in CANopen function is a kind of remote control. You can control the AC motor drive
using the CANopen protocol. CANopen is a CAN-based higher layer protocol that provides standardized
communication objects, including real-time data (Process Data Objects, PDO), configuration data
(Service Data Objects, SDO), and special functions (Time Stamp, Sync message, and Emergency
message). It also has network management data, including Boot-up message, NMT message, and Error
Control message. Refer to CiA website http://www.can-cia.org/ for details.
Delta CANopen supporting functions:

 Support CAN2.0A Protocol;
 Support CANopen DS301 V4.02;
 Support DSP-402 V2.0.
Delta CANopen supporting services:
 PDO (Process Data Objects): PDO1–PDO4
 SDO (Service Data Object):
Initiate SDO Download;
Initiate SDO Upload;
Abort SDO;
You can use the SDO message to configure the slave node and access the Object Dictionary in every
node.
 SOP (Special Object Protocol):
Support default COB-ID in Predefined Master/Slave Connection Set in DS301 V4.02;
Support SYNC service;
Support Emergency service.
 NMT (Network Management):
Support NMT module control;
Support NMT Error control;
Support Boot-up.
Delta CANopen not supporting service:
 Time Stamp service
15-2
15-1 CANopen Overview

CANopen Protocol
CANopen is a CAN-based higher layer protocol, and was designed for motion-oriented
machine control networks such as handling systems. Version 4.02 of CANopen (CiA DS301) is
standardized as EN50325-4. The CANopen specifications cover the application layer and
communication profile (CiA DS301), as well as a framework for programmable devices (CiA
DS302), recommendations for cables and connectors (CiA DS303-1) and SI units and prefix
representations (CiA DS303-2).
Device Profile CiA Device Profile CiA Device Profile CiA

DSP-401 DSP-404 DSP-XXX
OSI Layer 7
Application Communication Profile CiA DS-301
OSI Layer 2
CAN Controller CAN 2.0A
Data Link Layer
+ -
OSI Layer 1
Physical Layer + - ISO 11898
CAN bus
RJ45 Pin Definition
8~1
plug
PIN Signal Description

1 CAN_H CAN_H bus line (dominant high)
2 CAN_L CAN_L bus line (dominant low)
3 CAN_GND Ground / 0V / V-
6 CAN_GND Ground / 0V / V-
15-3
CANopen Communication Protocol contains the following services:

 NMT (Network Management Object)
 SDO (Service Data Objects)
 PDO (Process Data Object)
 EMCY (Emergency Object)
NMT (Network Management Object)
The Network Management (NMT) follows a Master/Slave structure for executing NMT service.
A network has only one NMT master, and the other nodes are slaves. All CANopen nodes have a
present NMT state, and the NMT master can control the state of the slave nodes. The following
shows the state diagram of a node:
(1) After power is applied, start in the auto-initialization state

(2) Automatically enter the pre-operational state A: NMT
(3) (6) Start remote node B: Node Guard
(4) (7) Enter pre-operational state C: SDO
(5) (8) Stop remote node D: Emergency
(9) (10) (11) Reset node E: PDO
(12) (13) (14) Reset communication F: Boot-up
(15) Automatically enter the reset application state

(16) Automatically enter the reset communication state
Initializing Pre-Operational Operational Stopped

PDO ○
SDO ○ ○
SYNC ○ ○
Time Stamp ○ ○
EMCY ○ ○
Boot-up ○
NMT ○ ○ ○
15-4
SDO (Service Data Objects)
Use SDO to access the Object Dictionary in every CANopen node using the Client / Server
model. One SDO has two COB-ID (request SDO and response SDO) to upload or download data
between two nodes. There is no data limit for SDOs to transfer data, but it must transfer data by
segment when the data exceeds four bytes with an end signal in the last segment.
The Object Dictionary (OD) is a group of objects in a CANopen node. Every node has an OD in
the system, and OD contains all parameters describing the device and its network behavior. The
access path in the OD is the index and sub-index; each object has a unique index in the OD, and
has a sub-index if necessary.
PDO (Process Data Object)
PDO communication can be described by the producer / consumer model. Each node of the
network listens to the messages of the transmission node and distinguishes whether the message
has to be processed or not after receiving the message. A PDO can be transmitted from one device
to one another device or to many other devices. Every PDO has two PDO services: a TxPDO and
an RxPDO. PDOs are transmitted in a non-confirmed mode. All transmission types are listed in the
following table:
PDO
Type Number
Cyclic Acyclic Synchronous Asynchronous RTR only
0 ○ ○
1–240 ○ ○
241–251 Reserved
252 ○ ○
253 ○ ○
254 ○
255 ○
 Type number 0 indicates the synchronous aperiodic message between two PDO transmissions.
 Type number 1–240 indicates the number of SYNC message between two PDO transmissions.
 Type number 252 indicates the data is updated (but not sent) immediately after receiving
SYNC.
 Type number 253 indicates the data is updated immediately after receiving RTR.
 Type number 254 indicates that Delta CANopen does not support this transmission format.
 Type number 255 indicates the data is an asynchronous aperiodic transmission.
All PDO transmission data must be mapped to the index with Object Dictionary.
EMCY (Emergency Object)

When errors occur inside the hardware, an emergency object is triggered. An emergency
object is only sent when an error occurs. As long as there is nothing wrong with the hardware, there
is no emergency object warning of an error message.
15-5
15-2 Wiring for CANopen

Use an external CANopen communication card EMC-COP01 for CANopen wiring to connect
the CANopen to the CP2000 drive. The link uses an RJ45 cable. You must write the two farthest
ends with 120 Ω terminating resistors as shown in the picture below.
Characteristic
line impedance
Characteristic
line impedance
15-6
15-3 CANopen Communication Interface Description

15-3-1 CANopen Control Mode Selection
There are two control modes for CANopen: the DS402 standard (Pr.09-40 = 1) is the default, and
the Delta’s standard setting (Pr.09-40 = 0). There are two control modes according to Delta’s
standard. One is the old control mode (Pr.09-30 = 0); this control mode can only control the motor
drive under frequency control. The other mode is a new standard (Pr.09-30 = 1); this new control
mode allows the motor drive to be controlled under all kinds of modes. The CP2000 currently only
supports speed mode. The following table shows the control mode definitions:
Control Mode
CANopen Control
Speed
Mode Selection
Index Description
DS402 standard 6042-00 Target rotating speed (rpm)
Pr.09-40 = 1 ----- -----
Delta Standard (Old definition)
2020-02 Target rotating speed (Hz)
Pr.09-40 = 0, Pr.09-30 = 0
Delta Standard (New definition) 2060-03 Target rotating speed (Hz)
Pr.09-40 = 0, Pr.09-30 = 1 2060-04 Torque Limit (%)
CANopen Control Mode Operation Control

Selection Index Description
DS402 standard 6040-00 Operation Command
Pr.09-40 = 1 ----- -----
2020-01 Operation Command
Pr.09-40 = 0, Pr.09-30 = 0
Delta Standard (New definition) 2060-01 Operation Command

Pr.09-40 = 0, Pr.09-30 = 1 ----- -----
CANopen Control Mode Other

Selection Index Description
605A-00 Quick stop processing method
DS402 standard
Disable operation processing
Pr.09-40 = 1 605C-00
method
----- -----
Pr.09-40 = 1, Pr.09-30 = 0
Delta Standard (New definition) ----- -----
Pr.09-40 = 0, Pr.09-30 = 1 ----- -----
You can use some indices in either DS402 or Delta’s standard.

For example:
1. Index that are defined as RO attributes.
2. The corresponding index of available parameter groups: (2000-00–200B-XX)
3. Acceleration / Deceleration Index: 604F 6050
4. Control mode: Index: 6060
15-7
15-3-2 DS402 Standard Control Mode
15-3-2-1 Related setting for an AC motor drive (following the DS402 standard)
If you want to use the DS402 standard to control the motor drive, follow these steps:
1. Wire the hardware (refer to Section 15-2 Wiring for CANopen)
2. Set the operation source: set Pr.00-21 to 3 for CANopen communication card control.
(Run/stop, forward/reverse run…etc.)
3. Set the frequency source: set Pr.00-20 to 6. Choose the source for the Frequency command
from the CANopen setting.
4. Set DS402 for the control mode: Pr.09-40 = 1
5. Set the CANopen station: set Pr.09-36, the range is between 1–127. When Pr.09-36 = 0, the
CANopen slave function is disabled. Note that if an error appears (station address error CAdE
or CANopen memory error CFrE) when you finish the station setting, set Pr.00-02 = 7 to reset.
6. Set the CANopen baud rate: set Pr.09-37 (CANBUS Baud Rate: 1 Mbps(0), 500 Kbps(1), 250
Kbps (2), 125 Kbps (3), 100 Kbps (4) and 50 Kbps (5))
7. Set the multiple input functions to Quick Stop. You can also choose to enable or disable; the
default setting is disabled. If it is necessary to enable the function, set MI terminal to 53 in one
of the following parameter: Pr.02-01–Pr.02-08 or Pr.02-26–Pr.02-31. Note that this function is
available in DS402 only.
15-3-2-2 The status of the motor drive (by following DS402 standard)
According to the DS402 definition, the motor drive is divided into 3 blocks and 9 statuses as
described below.
3 blocks
1. Power Disable: without PWM output
2. Power Enable: with PWM output
3. Fault: one or more errors have occurred.
9 status
1. Start: power ON
2. Not ready to switch on: the motor drive is initiating.
3. Switch ON Disable: occurs when the motor drive finishes initiating.
4. Ready to Switch On: warming up before running.
5. Switch ON: the motor drive has the PWM output, but the reference command is not
effective.
6. Operation Enable: able to control normally.
7. Quick Stop Active: when there is a Quick Stop request, stop running the motor drive.
8. Fault Reaction Active: the motor drive detects conditions which might trigger error(s).
9. Fault: One or more errors have occurred in the motor drive.
When the motor drive turns on and finishes the initiation, it remains in Ready to Switch On
status. To control the operation of the motor drive, change to Operation Enable status. To do this,
set the control word's bit0–bit3 and bit7 of the Index 6040H and pair with Index Status Word
(Status Word 0X6041). The control steps and index definition are described as below:
15-8
Index 6040
15–9 8 7 6–4 3 2 1 0
Enable Enable
Reserved Halt Fault Reset Operation Quick Stop Switch On
operation Voltage
Index 6041
15–14 13–12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Internal Switch
Target Quick Voltage Operation Switch Ready to
Reserved Operation limit Remote Reserved Warning on Fault
reached stop enabled enable on switch on
active disabled
Set command 6040 = 0xE, then set another command 6040 = 0xF. Then you can switch the
motor drive to Operation Enable. The Index 605A determines the direction of the lines from Operation
Enable when the control mode changes from Quick Stop Active. When the setting value is 1–3, both
direction lines are active, but when the setting value of 605A is not 1–3, once the motor drive is
switched to Quick Stop Active, it is not be able to switch back to Operation Enable.
15-9
PDO
Index Sub Definition Default R/W Size Unit Mode note
Map
0: disable drive function
1: Slow down on slow down ramp
2: Slow down on quick stop ramp
3: Slow down on the current limit
5: Slow down on slow down ramp
605Ah 0 Quick stop option code 2 RW S16 No
and stay in Quick Stop
6: Slow down on quick stop ramp
7: Slow down on the current limit
When the control block switches from Power Enable to Power Disable, use 605C to define the
stop method.
PDO
Index Sub Definition Default R/W Size Unit Mode note
Map
0: Disable drive function
Disable operation option 1: Slow down with slow down
605Ch 0 code 1 RW S16 No
ramp; disable of the drive
function
15-3-2-3 Various mode control method (by following DS402 standard)

CP2000 currently only supports speed control which is described as below:
Speed mode
1. Set CP2000 to speed control mode: set Index6060 to 2.
2. Switch to Operation Enable mode: Set 6040 = 0xE, then set 6040 = 0xF.
3. Set the target frequency: Set target frequency for 6042, since the operation unit of 6042 is rpm, a
conversion is required:
n: rotation speed (rpm) (rounds/minute)
120 P: motor’s pole number (Pole)
nf
p f: rotation frequency (Hz)
For example:
Set 6042H = 1500 (rpm), if the number of poles for the drive is 4 (Pr.05-04 or Pr.05-16), then the
motor drive's operation frequency is 1500 / (120/4) = 50 Hz. The 6042 is defined as a signed
operation. The plus or minus sign means to rotate clockwise or counter-clockwise
4. To set acceleration and deceleration: Use 604F (Acceleration) and 6050 (Deceleration).
5. Trigger an ACK signal: in the speed control mode, control the bit6–4 of Index 6040. It is defined
below:
Index 6040
SUM
bit6 bit5 bit4
Speed mode
1 0 1 Locked at the current signal.
(Index 6060=2)
1 1 1 Run to reach targeting signal.
Other Decelerate to 0 Hz.
15-10
NOTE 01: Read 6043 to get the current rotation speed. (Unit: rpm)
NOTE 02: Read bit10 of 6041 to check if the rotation speed has reached the targeting value. (0: Not
reached; 1: Reached)
15-11
15-3-3 Using the Delta Standard (Old definition, only supports speed mode)
15-3-3-1 Various mode control method (following the Delta old standard)
If you want to use the Delta old standard to control the motor drive, follow these steps:
2. Set the operation source: set Pr.00-21 to 3 for CANopen communication card control. (Run/stop,
forward/ reverse run…, etc.)
4. Set Delta Standard (Old definition, only supports speed mode) as the control mode: Pr.09-40 = 0
and Pr.09-30 = 0.
5. Set the CANopen station: set Pr.09-36; the range is between 1–127. When Pr.09-36 = 0, the
or CANopen memory error CFrE) when you finish the station setting, set Pr.00-02=7 to reset.
6. Set the CANopen baud rate: set Pr.09-37 (CANBUS Baud Rate: 1 Mbps(0), 500 Kbps(1), 250
Kbps(2), 125 Kbps(3), 100 Kbps(4) and 50 Kbps(5))
15-3-3-2 The control method under speed mode

1. Set the target frequency: set 2020-02, the unit is Hz, with 2 decimal places. For example, 1000 is
10.00 Hz.
2. Operation control: set 2020-01 = 0002H for running, and set 2020-01 = 0001H for stopping.
15-12
15-3-4 By Using Delta Standard (New Definition)

15-3-4-1 Related settings for an AC motor drive (following the Delta New Standard)
If you want to use the Delta new standard to control the motor drive, follow these steps:
2. Set the operation source: set Pr.00-21 to 3 for CANopen communication card control. (Run/stop,
forward/reverse run…, etc.)
4. Set Delta Standard (New definition) as the control mode: Pr.09-40 = 0 and Pr.09-30 = 1.
5. Set the CANopen station: set Pr.09-36; the range is between 1–127. When Pr.09-36=0, the
or CANopen memory error CFrE) when you finish the station setting, set Pr.00-02 = 7 to reset.)
6. Set the CANopen baud rate: set Pr.09-37 (CANBUS Baud Rate: 1 Mbps (0), 500 Kbps (1), 250
Kbps (2), 125 Kbps (3), 100 Kbps (4) and 50 Kbps(5)).
15-3-4-2 Various mode control method (Delta New Standard)

Speed Mode
1. Set CP2000 to speed control mode: set Index6060 = 2.
2. Set the target frequency: set 2060-03, unit is Hz, with 2 decimal places. For example, 1000 is
10.00Hz.
3. Operation control: set 2060-01 = 008H for Server on, and set 2060-01 = 0081H for running.
NOTE 1: Read 2061-05 to get the current position.

NOTE 2: Read bit0 of 2061 to find if the position has reached to the target position. (0: Not reached, 1:
Reached).
15-13
15-3-5 DI/ DO/ AI/ AO are controlled via CANopen
To control the DO and AO of the motor drive through CANopen, follow these steps:
1. Define the DO to be controlled by CANopen. For example, set Pr.02-14 = 50 to control RY2.
2. Define the AO to be controlled by CANopen. For example, set Pr.03-23 = 20 to control AFM2.
3. Control the Index mapped by CANopen. To control DO, use control Index 2026-41. To control AO,
use control 2026-AX. To set RY2 as ON, set bit1 of Index 2026-41 = 1, then RY2 outputs 1. To
control AFM2 output = 50.00%, set Index 2026-A2 = 5000, then AFM2 outputs 50%.
The following table shows the mapping of CANopen DI/ DO/ AI/ AO:
DI:
Terminal Related Parameters R/W Mapping Index
FWD == RO 2026-01 bit0
REV == RO 2026-01 bit1
MI 1 == RO 2026-01 bit2
MI 2 == RO 2026-01 bit3
MI 3 == RO 2026-01 bit4
MI 4 == RO 2026-01 bit5
MI 5 == RO 2026-01 bit6
MI 6 == RO 2026-01 bit7
MI 7 == RO 2026-01 bit8
MI 8 == RO 2026-01 bit9
MI 10 == RO 2026-01 bit10
MI 11 == RO 2026-01 bit11
MI 12 == RO 2026-01 bit12
MI 13 == RO 2026-01 bit13
MI 14 == RO 2026-01 bit14
MI 15 == RO 2026-01 bit15
DO：
RY1 Pr.02-13 = 51 RW 2026-41 bit0
RY2 Pr.02-14 = 51 RW 2026-41 bit1
RY3 Pr.02-15 = 51 RW 2026-41 bit2
MO10/RY10 Pr.02-36 = 51 RW 2026-41 bit5
MO11/RY11 Pr.02-37 = 51 RW 2026-41 bit6
RY12 Pr.02-38 = 51 RW 2026-41 bit7
RY13 Pr.02-39 = 51 RW 2026-41 bit8
RY14 Pr.02-40 = 51 RW 2026-41 bit9
RY15 Pr.02-41 = 51 RW 2026-41 bit10
AI：
AVI1 == RO Value of 2026-61
ACI == RO Value of 2026-62
AVI2 == RO Value of 2026-63
AO：
AFM1 Pr.03-20 = 21 RW Value of 26A0h
AFM2 Pr.03-23 = 21 RW Value of 26A1h
AFM10 Pr.14-12 = 21 RW Value of 26AAh
AFM11 Pr.14-13 = 21 RW Value of 26ABh
15-14
15-4 CANopen Supporting Index

CP2000 Index:
The parameter index corresponds as following in this example:
Index sub-Index
2000H + Group member+1
For example:
Pr.10-15 (Encoder Slip Error Treatment)
Group member
10(0AH) - 15(0FH)
Index = 2000H + 0AH = 200A

Sub Index = 0FH + 1H = 10H
CP2000 Control Index:
Delta Standard Mode (Old definition)

Factory
Index Sub Definition R/W Size Note
Setting
0 Number 3 R U8
bit1–0 00B: disable
01B: stop
10B: disable
11B: JOG Enable
bit3–2 Reserved
bit5–4 00B: disable
01B: Direction forward
10B: Reverse
11B: Switch Direction
bit7–6 00B: 1st step Accel. /Decel.
01B: 2nd step Accel. /Decel.
10B: 3rd step Accel. /Decel.
11B: 4th step Accel. /Decel.
bit11–8 0000B: Master speed
0001B: 1st step speed
0010B: 2nd step speed
1 Control word 0 RW U16
0011B: 3rd step speed
2020H
0100B: 4th step speed
bit12 1: Enable the function of
bit6–11
bit15 Reserved
Freq. command
2 0 RW U16
(XXX.XX Hz)
3 Other trigger 0 RW U16 bit0 1: E.F. ON
15-15
Factory
Setting
bit1 1: Reset
bit2 1: Base Block (B.B) ON
bit15–3 Reserved
0 Number 10 R U8
High byte: Warn code
1 Error code 0 R U16
Low byte: Error code
00B: stop
01B: decelerate to stop
bit1–0 10B: waiting for operation
command
11B: in operation
bit2 1: JOG command
00B: run forward
01B: switch from run in reverse
to run forward
bit4–3
10B: switch from run forward to
run in reverse
11B: run in reverse
bit7–5 Reserved
2 AC motor drive status 0 R U16
1: master frequency command
bit8 controlled by communication
interface
1: master frequency command
bit9 controlled by analog signal
input
1: operation command
bit10 controlled by communication
2021H interface
bit11 1: Parameter lock
1: Enable the digital keypad
bit12
copy parameter function
bit15–13 Reserved
Freq. command
3 0 R U16
(XXX.XX Hz)
4 Output freq. (XXX.XX Hz) 0 R U16
5 Output current (XX.X A) 0 R U16
6 DC bus voltage (XXX.X V) 0 R U16
7 Output voltage (XXX.X V) 0 R U16
The current segment run by
8 the multi-segment speed 0 R U16
command
9 Reserved 0 R U16
A Display counter value (c) 0 R U16
Display output power angle
B 0 R U16
(XX.X°)
Display output torque
C 0 R U16
(XXX.X %)
Display actual motor speed
D 0 R U16
(rpm)
10 Power output (X.XXX kWh) 0 R U16
Multi-function display
17 0 R U16
(Pr.00-04)
0 Reserved 0 R U16
1 Display output current 0 R U16
2 Display counter value 0 R U16
2022H Display actual output
3 0 R U16
frequency (XXX.XX Hz)
Display DC bus voltage
4 0 R U16
(XXX.X V)
15-16
Factory
Setting
Display output voltage
5 0 R U16
(XXX.X V)
Display output power angle
6 0 R U16
(XX.X°)
7 Display output power in kW 0 R U16
Display actual motor speed
8 0 R U16
(rpm)
Display estimate output
9 0 R U16
torque (XXX.X%)
Display PID feedback value
B after enabling PID function 0 R U16
in % (To 2 decimal places)
Display signal of AVI 1
C analog input terminal, 0–10 0 R U16
V corresponds to 0–100%
(To 2 decimal places)
Display signal of ACI analog
input terminal, 4–20 mA
D 0 R U16
/0–10 V corresponds to
0–100% (To 2 decimal places)
Display signal of AVI 2
analog input terminal, -10
E V–10 V corresponds to 0 R U16
-100–100% (To 2 decimal
places)
Display the IGBT
F temperature of drive power 0 R U16
module in oC
Display the temperature of
10 0 R U16
capacitance in oC
The status of digital input
11 0 R U16
(ON/OFF), refer to Pr.02-12
The status of digital output
12 0 R U16
(ON/OFF), refer to Pr.02-18
Display the multi-step
13 0 R U16
speed that is executing
The corresponding CPU pin
14 0 R U16
status of digital input
The corresponding CPU pin
15 0 R U16
status of digital output
Display times of counter
1A 0 R U16
overload (0.00–100.00%)
1B Display GFF in % 0 R U16
Display DC bus voltage
1C 0 R U16
ripples (Unit: VDC)
Display PLC register D1043
1D 0 R U16
data
Display Pole of Permanent
1E 0 R U16
Magnet Motor
User page displays the
1F 0 R U16
value in physical measure
20 Output Value of Pr.00-05 0 R U16
Number of motor turns
21 0 R U16
when drive operates
22 Operation position of motor 0 R U16
23 Fan speed of the drive 0 R U16
Control mode of the drive 0:
24 0 R U16
speed mode
Carrier frequency of the
25 0 R U16
drive
26 Reserved
27 Motor status
15-17
Factory
Setting
2A kWh display
Motor actual position
2D
low-word
Motor actual position
2E
high-word
2F PID reference target
30 PID bias value
31 PID output frequency
CANopen Remote IO mapping

Index Sub R/W Definition
01h R Each bit corresponds to the different input terminals
03h–40h R Reserved
41h RW Each bit corresponds to the different output terminals
42h–60h R Reserved
61h R AVI1 (%)
62h R ACI (%)
63h R AVI2 (%)
64h–6Ah R Reserved
2026H
6Bh R Extension card AI10, 0.0–100.0% (EMC-A22A)
6Ch R Extension card AI11, 0.0–100.0% (EMC-A22A)
6Dh–A0h R Reserved
A1h RW AFM1 (%)
A2h RW AFM2 (%)
A3h–AAh RW Reserved
ABh RW Extension card AO10, 0.0–100.0% (EMC-A22A)
ACh RW Extension card AO11, 0.0–100.0% (EMC-A22A)
Index
2026-01
1 FWD REV MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 MI7 MI8
2 MI10 MI11 MI12 MI13 MI14 MI15
3 MI10 MI11 MI12 MI13
1：Control broad I/O (Standard)
2：Add external card, EMC-D611A
Index
2026-41
1 RY1 RY2 MO1 MO2
2 MO10 MO11
3 RY10 RY11 RY12 RY13 RY14 RY15
1：Control broad I/O (Standard)

3：Add external card, EMC-R6AA
15-18
Delta Standard Mode (New definition)

Descriptions
Index sub R/W Size Speed Mode
bit Definition Priority
00h R U8
0: fcmd = 0
0 Ack 4
1: fcmd = Fset (Fpid)
0: FWD run command
1 Dir 4
1: REV run command
2
0: drive run till target speed is
attained
3 Halt
1: drive stop by deceleration
setting
0: drive run till target speed is
attained
4 Hold
1: frequency stop at current
frequency
01h RW U16 0: JOG OFF
5 JOG
Pulse 1: JOG RUN
6 QStop Quick Stop
2060h
0:Power OFF
7 Power
1:Power ON
8 Reserved
9 Ext Cmd2 4 0->1: Absolute position cleared
10–14 Reserved
15 RST 4 Pulse 1: Fault code cleared

02h RW U16 Mode Cmd 0: Speed mode
Speed command (unsigned
03h RW U16
decimal)
04h RW U16
05h RW S32
06h RW
07h RW U16
08h RW U16
0 Arrive Frequency attained
0: Motor FWD run
1 Dir
1: Motor REV run
2 Warn Warning
01h R U16 3 Error Error detected
4
5 JOG JOG
6 QStop Quick stop
2061h 7 Power On Switch ON
15–8
02h R
03h R U16 Actual output frequency
04h R
05h R S32 Actual position (absolute)
06h R
07h R S16 Actual torque
15-19
Mapping for CANopen built-in PLC register D (mapping from D900–D999 to 3000H–3063H）
Index Sub R/W Definition
3000 0 RW PLC D900
3001 0 RW PLC D901
3002 0 RW PLC D902
… … … …
3063 0 RW PLC D999
DS402 Standard
Factory PDO
Index Sub Definition R/W Size Unit Mode Note
Setting Map
0: No action
6007h 0 Abort connection option code 2 RW S16 Yes 2: Disable Voltage
3: quick stop
603Fh 0 Error code 0 R0 U16 Yes
6040h 0 Control word 0 RW U16 Yes
6041h 0 Status word 0 R0 U16 Yes
6042h 0 vl target velocity 0 RW S16 rpm Yes vl
6043h 0 vl velocity demand 0 RO S16 rpm Yes vl
6044h 0 vl control effort 0 RO S16 rpm Yes vl
604Fh 0 vl ramp function time 10000 RW U32 1ms Yes vl
Unit must be: 100 ms, and
6050h 0 vl slow down time 10000 RW U32 1ms Yes vl
check if the setting is 0.
6051h 0 vl quick stop time 1000 RW U32 1ms Yes vl
0: disable drive function
1: slow down on slow down
ramp
2: slow down on quick stop
ramp
605Ah 0 Quick stop option code 2 RW S16 No 5: slow down on slow down
ramp and stay in Quick
Stop
6: slow down on quick stop
ramp and stay in Quick
Stop
0: Disable drive function
Disable operation option 1: Slow down with slow
605Ch 0 1 RW S16 No
code down ramp; disable of the
drive function
6060h 0 Mode of operation 2 RW S8 Yes 2: Velocity Mode
6061h 0 Mode of operation display 2 RO S8 Yes Same as above
15-20
15-5 CANopen Fault Codes
 Refer to setting value of Pr.06-17–Pr.06-22.

 Refer to Chapter 14 Fault Codes for detailed descriptions.
CANopen
ID CANopen
Display Fault code Description fault register
No.* fault code
(bit0–7)
Over-current during acceleration

1 0001H 1 2213H
(ocA)
Over-current during deceleration

2 0002H 1 2213H
(ocd)
Over-current during steady operation

3 0003H 1 2214H
(ocn)
4 0004H Ground fault (GFF) 1 2240H
IGBT short circuit between upper

5 0005H 1 2250H
bridge and lower bridge (occ)
6 0006H Over-current at stop (ocS) 1 2314H
Over-voltage during acceleration

7 0007H 2 3210H
(ovA)
Over-voltage during deceleration

8 0008H 2 3210H
(ovd)
15-21
CANopen
ID CANopen
No.* fault code
(bit0–7)
DC bus over-voltage at constant

9 0009H 2 3210H
speed (ovn)
10 000AH Over-voltage at stop (ovS) 2 3210H
Low-voltage during acceleration

11 000BH 2 3220H
(LvA)
Low-voltage during deceleration

12 000CH 2 3220H
(Lvd)
Low-voltage at constant speed

13 000DH 2 3220H
(Lvn)
14 000EH Low-voltage at stop (LvS) 2 3220H
15 000FH Phase loss protection (OrP) 2 3130H
16 0010H IGBT overheating (oH1) 3 4310H
17 0011H Heatsink overheating (oH2) 3 4310H
IGBT temperature detection failure

18 0012H 3 FF00H
(tH1o)
19 0013H Capacitor hardware error (tH2o) 3 FF01H
15-22
CANopen
ID CANopen
No.* fault code
(bit0–7)
21 0015H Over load (oL) 1 2310H

22 0016H 1 2310H
(EoL1)

23 0017H 1 2310H
(EoL2)
24 0018H Motor overheating (oH3) 3 FF20H
26 001AH Over torque 1 (ot1) 3 8311H
27 001BH Over torque 2 (ot2) 3 8311H
28 001CH Under current (uC) 1 8321H
30 001EH EEPROM write error (cF1) 5 5530H
31 001FH EEPROM read error (cF2) 5 5530H
33 0021H U-phase error (cd1) 1 FF04H
34 0022H V-phase error (cd2) 1 FF05H
15-23
CANopen
ID CANopen
No.* fault code
(bit0–7)
35 0023H W-phase error (cd3) 1 FF06H
cc (current clamp) hardware error

36 0024H 5 FF07H
(Hd0)
37 0025H oc hardware error (Hd1) 5 FF08H
38 0026H ov hardware error (Hd2) 5 FF09H
39 0027H occ hardware error (Hd3) 5 FF0AH
40 0028H Auto-tuning error (AUE) 1 FF21H
41 0029H PID loss ACI (AFE) 7 FF22H
48 0030H ACI loss (ACE) 1 FF25H
49 0031H External fault (EF) 5 9000H
50 0032H Emergency stop (EF1) 5 9000H
51 0033H External base block (bb) 5 9000H
15-24
CANopen
ID CANopen
No.* fault code
(bit0–7)
52 0034H Password is locked (Pcod) 5 FF26H
54 0036H Illegal command (CE1) 4 7500H
55 0037H Illegal data address (CE2) 4 7500H
56 0038H Illegal data value (CE3) 4 7500H
Data is written to read-only address

57 0039H 4 7500H
(CE4)
Modbus transmission time-out

58 003AH 5 7500H
(CE10)
60 003CH Brake transistor error (bF) 4 7110H
Y-connection / Δ-connection switch

61 003DH 2 3330H
error (ydc)
Deceleration energy backup error

62 003EH 2 FF27H
(dEb)
63 003FH Over slip error (oSL) 7 FF28H
64 0040H Electric valve switch error (ryF) 5 7110H
15-25
CANopen
ID CANopen
No.* fault code
(bit0–7)
Reverse direction of the speed

68 0044H 0 8400H
feedback (SdRv)
Over speed rotation feedback

69 0045H 0 8400H
(SdOr)
Large deviation of speed feedback

70 0046H 0 8400H
(SdDe)
71 0047H Watchdog (WDTT) 1 6010H
72 0048H STO loss 1 (STL1) 5 FF30H
Emergency stop for external safety

73 0049H 5 FF2AH
(S1)
74 004AH Fire mode (Fire) 7 FF2FH
76 004CH Safe torque off (STO) 5 FF31H
77 004DH STO loss 2 (STL2) 5 FF32H
78 004EH STO loss 3 (STL3) 5 FF33H
82 0052H Output phase loss U phase (OPHL) 2 2331H
15-26
CANopen
ID CANopen
No.* fault code
(bit0–7)
83 0053H Output phase loss V phase (OPHL) 2 2332H
Output phase loss 3 W phase

84 0054H 2 2333H
(OPHL)
90 005AH Force to stop (FStp) 7 FF2EH
101 0065H CANopen guarding error (CGdE) 4 8130H
102 0066H CANopen heartbeat error (CHbE) 4 8130H
104 0068H CANopen bus off error (CbFE) 4 8140H
105 0069H CANopen index error (CIdE) 4 8100H
CANopen station address error

106 006AH 4 8100H
(CAdE)
107 006BH CANopen memory error (CFrE) 4 8100H
111 006FH InrCOM time-out error (ictE) 4 7500H
112 0070H PMLess shaft lock (SfLK) 7 8A00H
15-27
CANopen
ID CANopen
No.* fault code
(bit0–7)
142 008EH Auto-tune error 1 (AUE1) 1 FF3DH
143 008FH Auto-tune error 2 (AUE2) 1 FF3EH
144 0090H Auto-tune error 3 (AUE3) 1 FF3FH
148 0094H Auto-tune error 4 (AUE4) 1 FF43H
15-28
15-6 CANopen LED Function

There are two CANopen flash signs: RUN and ERR.
RUN LED:
LED status Condition CANopen State
OFF Initial
Blinking Pre-Operation
ON
200 200 1000
Single flash 單次閃爍 ms ms ms Stopped
OFF
ON Operation
ERR LED:
LED status Condition/ State
OFF No Error
One Message fail
Single ON
200 1000
flash 單次閃爍 ms ms
OFF
Node guarding failure or heartbeat message failure

Double ON
200 200 200 1000
flash 雙次閃爍 ms ms ms ms
OFF
Synchronization failure
Triple flash ON
200 200 200 200 200 1000
雙次閃爍 ms ms ms ms ms ms
OFF
Bus off
ON
15-29
15-30
Chapter 16 PLC Function Applications│CP2000
Chapter 16 PLC Function Applications
16-1 PLC Summary
16-2 Notes before PLC use
16-3 Turn on
16-4 Basic principles of PLC ladder diagrams
16-5 Various PLC device functions
16-6 Introduction to the Command Window
16-7 Error display and handling
16-8 CANopen Master control applications
16-9 Explanation of various PLC speed mode controls
16-10 Internal communications main node control
16-11 Modbus remote IO control applications (use MODRW)
16-12 Calendar functions
16-1
16-1 PLC Summary

16-1-1 Introduction
The commands provided by the CP2000's built-in PLC functions, including the ladder diagram editing
tool WPLSoft, as well as the usage of basic commands and applications commands, chiefly retain
the operating methods of Delta's PLC DVP series.
16-1-2 WPLSoft ladder diagram editing tool

WPLSoft is Delta's program editing software for the DVP and CP2000 programmable controllers in
the Windows operating system environment. Apart from general PLC program design general
Windows editing functions (such as cut, paste, copy, multiple windows, etc.), WPLSoft also provides
many Chinese/English annotation editing and other convenience functions (such as registry editing,
settings, file reading, saving, and contact graphic monitoring and settings, etc.).
The following basic requirements that need to install WPLSoft editing software:
Item System requirements
Operating system Windows 95/98/2000/NT/ME/XP
CPU At least Pentium 90
Memory At least 16 MB (we recommend at least 32 MB)
Hard drive capacity: at least 100MB free space
Hard drive
One optical drive (for use in installing this software)
Resolution: 640 × 480, at least 16 colors; it is recommended that the screen
Display
area be set at 800 × 600 pixels
Mouse Ordinary mouse or Windows-compatible device
Printer Printer with a Windows driver program
RS-485 port Must have at least an RS-485 port to link to the PLC
16-2
16-2 Notes before PLC use

1. The PLC has a preset communications format of 7, N, 2, 9600, with node 2; the PLC node can
be changed in Pr.09-35, but this address may not be the same as the drive's address setting of
Pr.09-00.
2. The CP2000 provides two communications serial ports that can be used to download PLC
programs (see figure below). Channel 1 has a fixed communications format of 19200, 8, N, 2
RTU.
3. The client can simultaneously access data from the converter and internal PLC, which is
performed through identification of the node. For instance, if the converter node is 1 and the
internal PLC node is 2, then the client command will be
01 (node) 03 (read) 0400 (address) 0001 (1 data item), indicating that it must read the data in
converter Pr.04-00.
02 (node) 03 (read) 0400 (address) 0001 (1 data item), indicating that it must read the data in
internal PLC X0
4. The PLC program will be disabled when uploading/ downloading programs.
5. Please note when using WPR commands to write in parameters, values may be modified up to
a maximum of 109 times, otherwise a memory write error will occur. The calculation of
modifications is based on whether the entered value has been changed. If the entered value is
left unchanged, the modifications will not increase afterwards. But if the entered value is
different from before, the number of modifications will increase by one. Those parameters listed
below are exceptions, proceed to the next page for details:
 Pr.00-11 Speed control mode
 Pr.01-12–01-19 Acceleration / Deceleration time 1–4
 Pr.02-12 Multi-function input mode selection
 Pr.02-18 Multi-function output direction
 Pr.04-50–04-59 PLC buffer 0–9
 Pr.08-04 Upper limit of integral control
 Pr.08-05 PID output command limit
16-3
6. When Pr.00-04 is set as 28, the displayed value is the value of PLC register D1043 (see figure
below):
Keypad KPC-CC01
Can display 0–65535
H 0.00Hz
A 0.00Hz
C _____
7. In the PLC Run and PLC Stop mode, the content 9 and 10 of Pr.00-02 cannot be set nor be
reset to the default value.
8. The PLC can be reset to the default value when Pr.00-02 is set as 6.
9. The corresponding MI function will be disabled when the PLC writes to input contact X.
10. When the PLC controls converter operation, control commands will be entirely controlled by the
PLC and will not be affected by the setting of parameter 00-21.
11. When the PLC controls converter frequency commands (FREQ commands), frequency
commands will be entirely controlled by the PLC, and will not be affected by the setting of
Pr.00-20 or the Hand ON/OFF configuration.
12. When the PLC controls the drive’s operation, if the keypad Stop setting is valid, this will trigger
an FStP error and cause stoppage.
16-4
16-3 Turn on
16-3-1 Connect to PC
Start operation of PLC functions in accordance with the following four steps
1. After pressing the Menu key and selecting 4: PLC on the KPC-CC01 digital keypad, press
the Enter key (see figure below).
2. Wiring: Connect the driver's RJ45 communications interface to a PC via the RS-485
3. PLC function usage

 PLC functions are as shown in the figure on the left; select
PLC item 2 and implement PLC functions.
1.Disable 1: No function (Disable)
2.PLC Run 2: Enable PLC (PLC Run)
3.PLC Stop 3: Stop PLC functions (PLC Stop)
 When the external multifunctional input terminals (MI1–MI8) are in PLC Mode select bit0
(51) or PLC Mode select bit1 (52), and the terminal contact is closed or open, it will
compulsorily switch to the PLC mode, and keypad switching will be ineffective.
Corresponding actions are as follows:
16-5
PLC mode
PLC Mode select bit1(52) PLC Mode select bit0 (51)
Using KPC-CC01
Disable OFF OFF
PLC Run OFF ON
PLC Stop ON OFF
Maintain previous
ON ON
state
NOTE
 When input/output terminals (FWD REV MI1–MI8, MI10–15, Relay1–3, RY10–RY15,

MO10–MO11,) are included in the PLC program, these input/output terminals will only be
used by the PLC. As an example, when the PLC program controls Y0 during PLC operation
(PLC1 or PLC2), the corresponding output terminal relay (RA/RB/RC) will operate in
accordance with the program. At this time, the multifunctional input/output terminal setting
will be ineffective. Because these terminal functions are already being used by the PLC, the
DI DO AO in use by the PLC can be determined by looking at Pr.02-52, Pr.02-53, and
Pr.03-30.
 When the PLC's procedures use special register D1040, the corresponding AO contact
AFM1 will be occupied, and AFM2 corresponding to special register D1045 will have the
same situation.
 Pr.03-30 monitors the state of action of the PLC function analog output terminal; bit0
corresponds to the AFM1 action state, and bit1 corresponds to the AFM2 action state.
16-6
16-3-2 I/O device explanation

Input devices:
Serial
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17
No.
1 FWD REV MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 MI7 MI8
2 MI10 MI11 MI12 MI13 MI14 MI15
3 MI10 MI11 MI12 MI13
1: Control I/O
2: Extension card: EMC-D611A (D1022=4)
Output devices:
Serial
Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17
No.
1 RY1 RY2 RY3
2 MO10 MO11
3 RY10 RY11 RY12 RY13 RY14 RY15
1: Control I/O
3: Extension card: EMC-R6AA (D1022=6)
16-3-3 Installation WPLSoft

Download and install WPLSoft editing software in Delta’s website:
After completing installation, the WPLSoft program will be installed in the designated subfolder “C:
\Program Files\Delta Industrial Automation\WPLSoft x.xx”.
16-3-4 Program writing

Step 1: Click on the WPLSoft icon to start the editing software. (See figure 16-1)
Figure 16-1 (Left: WPLSoft icon; Right: Start WPLSoft)
16-7
Step 2: The WPLSoft editing window appears (see figure 16-2 below). When running WPLSoft for the
first time, before "New file" has been used, only the "File (F)," "Communications (C)," View
(V)," "Options (O)," and "Help (H)" columns will appear on the function toolbar.
Figure 16-2
NOTE After running WPLSoft for the second time, the last file edited will open and be displayed
in the editing window. The following figure 16-3 provides an explanation of the WPLSoft editing
software window:
Figure 16-3
16-8
Step 3: Click on the icon on the toolbar: opens new file (Ctrl+N), see figure 16-4 below
Figure 16-4
NOTE You can also find “New file (N) (Ctrl+N)” in the "File (F)", as shown in figure 16-5 below.
Figure 16-5
Step 4: The "Device settings" window will appear after clicking, see figure 16-6 below. You can now
enter the project title and filename, and select the device and communication settings to be
used.
Figure 16-6
Communications settings: Perform settings in accordance with the desired communications method.
See figure 16-7 below.
Figure 16-7
16-9
Step 5: Press Confirm after completing settings and begin program editing. There are two program
editing methods; you can choose whether to perform editing in the command mode or the
ladder diagram mode (see figure 16-8 below).
Figure 16-8
NOTE In ladder diagram mode, you can perform program editing using the buttons on the
function icon row (see figure 16-9 below).
Figure 16-9
16-10
Basic Operation-Example
Input the ladder diagram as the figure below. The following steps can be operated through the mouse
or function key (F1–F12) on the keyboard.
Figure 16-10
Step 1: The following screen will appear after a new file is established:
Figure 16-11
Step 2: Click on the always-open switch icon or press the function key F1. After the name of the
input device and the comment dialog box have appeared, the device name (such as "M"),
device number (such as "10"), and input comments (such as "auxiliary contact") can be
selected; press the OK button when finished (see figure 16-12 and 16-13 below).
Figure 16-12
16-11
Figure 16-13
Step 3: Click on the output coil icon or press function key F7. After the name of the input device
and the comment dialog box have appeared, the device name (such as "Y"), device number
(such as "0"), and input comments (such as "output coil") can be selected; press the OK button
when finished (see figure 16-14 and 16-15 below).
Figure 16-14
Figure 16-15
16-12
Step 4: Press “ENTER” button, when the “Input Instructions” window appears, key in “END” in the
field and press the OK button (see figure 16-16 and 16-17 below).
Figure 16-16
Figure 16-17
Step 5: Click on the “Ladder diagram => Code” icon, which will compile the edited ladder
diagram as a command program. After compiling, the number of steps will appear on the left
side of the busbar (see figure 16-18 below).
Figure 16-18
16-13
16-3-5 Program download
After inputting a program using WPLSoft, select compile . After completing compilation, select
the to download a program. WPLSoft will perform program download with the online PLC in the
communications format specified in communications settings.
16-3-6 Program monitoring
While confirming that the PLC is in the Run mode, after downloading a program, click on in the
communications menu and select start ladder diagram control (see figure below)
16-14
16-4 Basic principles of PLC ladder diagrams

16-4-1 Schematic diagram of PLC ladder diagram program scanning
Output results are

calculated on the basis of
the ladder diagram
configuration Repeated
(internal devices will have implementation
real-time output before
results are sent to an
external output point)
16-4-2 Introduction to ladder diagrams

Ladder diagrams comprise a graphic language widely applied in automatic control, and
employs common electrical control circuit symbols. After a ladder diagram editor has been used to
create a ladder pattern, PLC program designed is completed. The use of a graphic format to control
processes is very intuitive, and is readily accepted by personnel who are familiar with electrical
control circuit technology. Many of the basic symbols and actions in a ladder diagram comprise
commonly seen electrical devices in conventional automatic control power distribution panels, such
as buttons, switches, relays, timers, and counters.
Internal PLC devices: The types and quantities of internal PLC devices vary in different
brands of products. Although these internal devices use the same names as conventional electrical
control circuit elements such as relays, coils, and contacts, a PLC does not actually contain these
physical devices, and they instead correspond to basic elements in the PLC's internal memory
(bits). For instance, if a bit is 1, this may indicate that a coil is electrified, and if that bit is 0, it will
indicate that the coil is not electrified. An N.O. contact (Normal Open, or contact a) can be used to
directly read the value of the corresponding bit, and an N.C. contact (Normal Close, or contact b) can
be used to obtain the inverse of the bit's value. Multiple relays occupy multiple bits, and 8 bits
comprise one byte; two bytes comprise one word, and two words comprise a double word. When
multiple relays are processing at the same time (such as addition / subtraction or displacement, etc.),
a byte, word, or double word can be used. Furthermore, a PLC contains two types of internal devices:
a timer and a counter. It not only has a coil, but can count time and numerical values. Because of this,
when it is necessary to process some numerical values, these values are usually in the form of bytes,
words, or double words.
The various internal devices in a PLC all account for a certain quantity of storage units in the
PLC's storage area. When these devices are used, the content of the corresponding storage area is
red in the form of bits, bytes, or words.
16-15
Introduction to the basic internal devices in a PLC

Device type Description of Function
An input relay constitutes the basic unit of storage in a PLC's internal memory
corresponding to an external input point (which serves as a terminal connecting
with an external input switch and receiving external input signals). It is driven by
external input signals, to which it assigns values of 0 or 1. A program design
method cannot change the input relay status, and therefore cannot rewrite the
corresponding basic units of an input relay, and WPLSoft cannot be used to
Input Relay perform compulsory ON / OFF actions. A relay's contacts (contacts a and b) can
be used an unlimited number of times. An input relay with no input signal must be
left idle and cannot be used for some other purpose.
 Device indicated as: X0, X1, X7, X10, X11, etc. This device is expressed
with the symbol "X," and a device's order is indicated with an octal number.
Input point numbers are indicated in Section 16-8 I/O devices explanation.
An output relay constitutes the basic unit of storage in a PLC's internal memory
corresponding to an external output point (which connects with an external load).
It may be driven by an input relay contact, a contact on another internal device, or
its own contacts. It uses one N.O. contact to connect with external loads or other
contacts, and, like input contacts, can use the contact an unlimited number of
Output Relay times. An output relay with no input signal will be idle, but may be used an internal
relay if needed.
 Device indicated as: Y0, Y1, Y7, Y10, Y11, etc. This device is expressed
with the symbol "Y," and a device's order is indicated with an octal number.
Output point numbers are indicated in Section 16-8 I/O devices explanation.
Internal relays have no direct connection with the outside. These relays are
auxiliary relays inside a PLC. Their function is the same as that of an auxiliary
(central) relay in an electrical control circuit: Each auxiliary relay corresponding to
a basic unit of internal storage; they can be driven by input relay contacts, output
Internal Relay relay contacts, and the contacts of other internal devices. An internal auxiliary
relay's contact can also be used an unlimited number of times. Internal relays
have no outputs to outside, and must output via an output point.
 Device indicated as: M0, M1 to M799, etc. This device is expressed as the
symbol "M," expressed, and its order is expressed as a decimal number.
A counter is used to perform counting operations. A count setting value (such as
the number of pulses to be counted) must be assigned when a counter is used. A
counter contains a coil, contact, and a counting storage device. When the coil
Counter goes from OFF to ON, this indicates that the counter has an input pulse, and one
is added to its count. There are 16 bits that can be employed by the user.
 Device indicated as: C0, C1 to C79, etc. This device is expressed as the
symbol "C," expressed, and its order is expressed as a decimal number.
A timer is used to complete control of timing. The timer contains a coil, contact,
and a time value register. When the coil is electrified, if the preset time is reached,
the contact will be actuated (contact a will close, contact b will open), and the
Timer timer's fixed value be given by the set value. Timer has a regulated clock cycle
(timing units: 100 ms). As soon as power to the coil is cut off, the contact will no
longer be actuated (contact a will open, contact b will close), and the original
timing value will return to zero.
16-16
Device type Description of Function

 Device indicated as: T0, T1 to T159, etc. The device is expressed as the
symbol "T," and its order is expressed as a decimal number.
When a PLC is used to perform various types of sequence control and set time
value and count value control, it most commonly perform data processing and
numerical operations, and data registers are used exclusively for storage of data
and various parameters. Each data register contains 16 bits of binary data, which
Data register means that it can store one word. Two data registers with adjacent numbers can
be used to process double words.
Device indicated as: D0, D1 to D399, etc. The device is expressed as the symbol
"D," and its order is expressed as a decimal number.
Ladder diagram images and their explanation

Ladder diagram
Explanation of commands Command Using Device
structures
N.O. switch, contact a LD X、Y、M、T、C
N.C. switch, contact b LDI X、Y、M、T、C
Series N.O. AND X、Y、M、T、C
Series N.C. ANI X、Y、M、T、C
Parallel N.O. OR X、Y、M、T、C
Parallel N.C. ORI X、Y、M、T、C
Positive edge-triggered
LDP X、Y、M、T、C
switch
Negative edge-triggered
LDF X、Y、M、T、C
switch
ANDP X、Y、M、T、C
series
ANDF X、Y、M、T、C
series
ORP X、Y、M、T、C
parallel
ORF X、Y、M、T、C
parallel
Block series ANB N/A
Block parallel ORB N/A
MPS
Multiple outputs MRD N/A
MPP
16-17
Ladder diagram
Explanation of commands Command Using Device
structures
Coil driven output
OUT Y、M
commands
Some basic
Some basic commands, commands
applications commands Applications
commands
Inverted logic INV N/A
16-4-3 Overview of PLC ladder diagram editing

The program editing method begins from the left busbar and proceeds to the right busbar (the
right busbar is omitted when editing using WPLSoft). Continue to the next row after completing each
row; there is a maximum of 11 contacts on each row. If this is not sufficient, a continuous line will be
will be generated to indicate the continued connection and more devices can be added. A continuous
series of numbers will be generated automatically and identical input points can be used repeatedly.
See figure below:
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 C0 C1
00000
X11 X12 X13
00000 Y0
Row Number
The ladder diagram programming method involves scanning from the upper left corner to the
lower right corner. The coils and applications command computing box are handled in the output, and
the ladder diagram is placed on the farthest right. Taking the figure below as an example, we can
gradually analyze the procedural sequence of the ladder diagram. The number in the upper right
corner gives the sequential order.
Explanation of command sequence
1 LD X0
2 OR M0
3 AND X1
4 LD X3
X0 X1 Y1 X4
AND M1
ORB Y1
5 LD Y1 M0 T0 M3
TMR T0 K10
AND X4
6 LD T0 X3 M1
AND M3
ORB
7 ANB
8 OUT Y1
TMR T0 K10
16-18
Explanation of basic structure of ladder diagrams

LD (LDI) command: An LD or LDI command is given at the start of a block.
LDP and LDF have this command structure, but there are differences in their action state. LDP, LDF
only act at the rising or falling edge of a conducting contact. (see figure below):
AND (ANI) command: A series configuration in which a single device is connected with one device
or a block.
ANDP, ANDF also have structures like this, but their action occurs at the rising and falling edge.
OR (ORI) command: A single device is connected with one device or a block.
ORP, ORF also have identical structures, but their action occurs at the rising and falling edge.
ANB command: A configuration in which one block is in series with one device or block.
16-19
ORB command: A configuration in which one block is in parallel with one device or block.
In the case of ANB and ORB operations, if a number of blocks are connected, they should be
combined to form a block or network from the top down or from left to right.
MPS, MRD, MPP commands: Branching point memory for multiple outputs, enabling multiple,
different outputs. The MPS command begins at a branching point, where the so-called branching
point refers to the intersection of horizontal and vertical lines. We have to rely on the contact status
along a single vertical line to determine whether the next contact can give a memory command.
While each contact is basically able to give memory commands, in view of convenience and the
PLC's capacity restrictions, this can be omitted from some places when converting a ladder diagram.
The structure of the ladder diagram can be used to judge what kinds of contact memory commands
are used.
MPS can be distinguished by use of the "┬" symbol; this command can be used consecutively
for up to 8 times. The MRD command is read from branching point memory; because logic states
along any one vertical line must be the same, in order to continue analysis of other ladder diagrams,
the original contact status must be read.
MRD can be distinguished by use of the "├" symbol. The MPP command is read from the
starting state of the uppermost branching point, and it is read from the stack (pop); because it is the
final command along a vertical line, it indicates that the state of the vertical line can be concluded.
MPP can be distinguished by use of the "└" symbol. Although there should basically be no errors
when using the foregoing analytical approach, the compiling program may sometimes omit identical
state output, as shown in the following figure:
MPS
( )
( )
( )
( )
MRD
( )
MPP ( )
( )
16-20
16-4-4 Commonly-used basic program design examples

Start, stop, and protection
Some applications may require a brief close or brief break using the buttons to start and stop
equipment. A protective circuit, therefore, must be designed to maintain continued operation in these
situations; this protective circuit may employ one of the following methods:
Example 1: Priority stop protective circuit
When the start N.O. contact X1 = ON, and the stop N.C. contact X2 = OFF, Y1 = ON; if X2 =
ON at this time, coil Y1 will no longer be electrified, and this is therefore referred to as priority
stop.
Y1 X2
Y1
STOP
X1
START
Example 2: Priority start protective circuit

When start N.O. contact X1 = ON, and the stop N.C. contact X2 = OFF, Y1 = ON, and coil Y1
will be electrified and protected. At this time, if X2 = ON, coil Y1 will still protect the contact
and continue to be electrified, and this is therefore priority start.
X1 X2
Y1
START STOP
Y1
Example 3: Setting (SET) and reset (RST) command protective circuit

The following figure shows a protective circuit composed of RST and SET commands.
Priority stop occurs when the RST command is placed after the SET command. Because the
PLC executes programs from the top down, at the end of the program, the state of Y1 will
indicate whether coil Y1 is electrified. When X1 and X2 are both actuated, Y1 will lose power,
and this is therefore priority stop.
Priority start occurs when the SET command is placed after the RST command. When X1
and X2 are both actuated, Y1 will be electrified, and this is therefore priority start.
16-21
Commonly-used control circuits

Example 4: Conditional control
X1 and X3 respectively starts and stops Y1; X2 and X4 respectively starts and stops Y2.
All of these have protective circuits. Because Y1's N.O. contact is series connected with Y2's
circuit, it becomes an AND condition for the actuation of Y2. The action of Y1 is therefore a
condition for the action of Y2, and Y1 must be actuated before Y2 can be actuated.
X1 X3
Y1 X1
Y1 X3
X2
X2 X4 Y1
Y2 X4
Y2
Y1
Y2
Example 5: Interlocking control

The figure below shows an interlocking control circuit. Depending on which of the start
contacts X1, X2 is valid first, the corresponding output Y1 or Y2 will be actuated, and when
one is actuated, the other will not be actuated. This implies that Y1 and Y2 cannot be
actuated at the same time (interlocking effect). Even if both X1 and X2 are valid at the same
time, because the ladder diagram program is scanned from the top down, it is impossible for
Y1 and Y2 to be actuated at same time. This ladder diagram assigns priority only to Y1.
X1 X3 Y2
Y1 X1
Y1 X3
X2
X2 X4 Y1
Y2 X4
Y2
Y1
Y2
16-22
Example 6: Sequence control

If the N.C. contact of Y2 in the interlocking control configuration of example 5 is put in
series with the Y1 circuit, so that it is an AND condition for actuation of Y1 (see figure below),
not only is Y1 a condition for the actuation of Y2 in this circuit, the actuation of Y2 will also
stop the actuation of Y1. This configuration confirms the actuation order of Y1 and Y2.
X1 X3 Y2
Y1
Y1
X2 X4 Y1
Y2
Y2
Example 7: Oscillating circuit

Oscillating circuit with a period of ΔT+ΔT
The figure below shows a very simple ladder diagram. When starting to scan the Y1 N.C.
contact, because the Y1 coil has lost power, the Y1 N.C. contact will be closed. When the Y1
coil is then scanned, it will be electrified, and the output will be 1. When the Y1 N.C. contact
is scanned in the scanning cycle, because Y1 coil is electrified, the Y1 N.C. contact will be
open, the Y1 coil will then lose power, and the output will be 0. Following repeated scanning,
the output of Y1 coil will have an oscillating waveform with a period of ΔT (On) +ΔT (Off).
Y1
Y1 Y1
T T
Oscillating circuit with a period of nT+ΔT

The program of the ladder diagram shown below uses timer T0 to control coil Y1's
electrified time. After Y1 is electrified, it causes timer T0 to close during the next scanning
cycle, which will cause the output from Y1 to have the oscillating waveform shown in the
figure below. Here n is the timer's decimal setting value, and T is the clock cycle of the timer.
X0 Y1
TMR T0 Kn X0
T0
Y1
Y1
nT T
16-23
Example 8: Flashing circuit

The following figure shows an oscillating circuit of a type commonly used to cause an
indicator light to flash or buzzers to buzz. It uses two timers to control the ON and OFF time
of Y1 coil. Here n1, n2 are the timing set values of T1 and T2, and T is the clock cycle of the
timer.
X0 T2
TMR T1 Kn1 X0 n2*T
T1
TMR T2 Kn2
Y1
X0 T1 n1*T
Y1
Example 9: Triggering circuit

In the figure below, a command consisting of the differential of the rising edge of X0
causes coil M0 to generate a single pulse for ΔT (length of one scanning cycle), and coil Y1
is electrified during this scanning cycle. Coil M0 loses power during the next scanning
cycle, N.C. contact M0 and N.C. contact Y1 are both closed. This causes coil Y1 to stay in an
electrified state until there is another rising edge in input X0, which again causes the
electrification of coil M0 and the start of another scanning cycle, while also causing coil Y1 to
lose power, etc. The sequence of these actions can be seen in the figure below. This type of
circuit is commonly used to enable one input to perform two actions in alternation. It can be
seen from the time sequence in the figure below that when input X0 is a square wave signal
with a period of T, the output of coil Y1 will be a square wave signal with a period of 2T.
X0
M0 X0
M0 Y1 T
Y1 M0
M0 Y1
Y1
Example 10: Delay circuit

When input X0 is ON, the timer T10 is in no power status because the
corresponding N.C. contact is OFF, and the output coil Y1 is electrified. T10 receives power
and begins timing only after input X0 is OFF, and the output coil Y1 is delayed for 100 sec.
(K1000 × 0.1 sec. = 100 sec.) before losing power; refer to the sequence of actions in the
figure below.
16-24
Example 11: The open / close delay circuit is composed of two timers; output Y4 has a delay whether
the input X0 is ON or OFF.
X0
TMR T5 K50 X0
T5 T6 5秒
Y4 T5
Y4
Y4
Y4 X0 T6
TMR T6 K30 3秒
Example 12: Extended timing circuit

In the circuit in the figure on the left, the total delay time from the moment input X0
closes to the time output Y1 is electrified is (n1 + n2) × T, where T is the clock cycle. Timers:
T11, T12; clock cycle: T.
X0
TMR T11 Kn1 X0
T11 n1*T
TMR T12 Kn2 T11
T12 n2*T
Y1
T12
Y1
(n1+n2)*T
16-25
16-5 Various PLC device functions

Item Specifications Notes
Algorithmic control Program stored internally, alternating
method back-and-forth scanning method
When it starts again after ending (after execution to
Input / output control
the END command), the input/output has an
method
immediate refresh command
Algorithmic Applications command (1-several
Basic commands (several μs);
processing speed tens of μs)
Programming
Command + ladder diagram
language
Program capacity 10000 steps
This number of contacts
constitutes CP2000 input / output
Input / output terminal Input (X): 10, output (Y): 3
contacts; other devices have
different correspondences
Type Device Item Range Function

X0–X17, 16 points, octal Corresponds to
X External input relay Total
number external input point
32
Y0–Y17, 16 points, octal Corresponds to
Y External output relay points
number external output point
General Use M0–M799, 800 points Total Contact can switch ON
Auxiliary
M 880 / OFF within the
Relay Special purpose M1000–M1079, 80 points
points program
Timers referred to by
the TMR command;
Relay bit Total
contact of the T with the
form T Timer 100ms timer T0–T159, 160 points 160
same number will go
points
On when the time is
reached
Counter referred to by
the CNT command;
Total
16-bit counter, contact of the C with
C Counter C0–C79, 80 points 80
general use the same number will
points
go ON when the count
is reached
The contact will be ON
T Current timer value T0–T159, 160 points when the time is
reached
The counter contact will
Register C Current counter value C0–C79, 16-bit counter 80 points come ON when the
word data count is reached
Used to maintain
D0–D399, 400 points Total
Data power OFF Used as data storage
D 1400
Register D1000–D1199, 200 points memory area
Special purpose points
D2000–D2799, 800 points
Single-byte Setting Range: K-32,768–K32,767
K Decimal
Double-byte Setting Range: K-2,147,483,648–K2,147,483,647
Constant
Single-byte Setting Range:H0000–HFFFF
H Hexadecimal
Double-byte Setting Range: H00000000–HFFFFFFFF
Serial communications port (program write/read) RS-485/keypad port
Input/output Built-in three analog inputs and two analog outputs
Optional
Function expansion module EMC-D42A; EMC-R6AA; EMC-D611A
Accessories
Communication Expansion Optional
EMC-COP01 (CANopen)
Module Accessories
16-26
16-5-1 Introduction to device functions
Input/output contact functions

Input contact X functions: Input contact X is connected with an input device, and reads input
signals entering the PLC. The number of times that contact a or b of input contact X used in the
program is not subject to restrictions. The ON / OFF state of input contact X will change as the input
device switches ON and OFF; a peripheral device (WPLSoft) cannot be used to force contact X On or
Off.
Output contact Y functions

The job of output contact Y is to send an ON / OFF signal to drive the load connected with output
contact Y. Output contacts consist of two types: relays and transistors. While number of times that
contact a or b of each output contact Y used in the program is not subject to restrictions, it is
recommended that the number of output coil Y be used only once in a program, otherwise the right to
determine the output state when the PLC performs program scanning will be assigned to the
program's final output Y circuit.
Numerical value, constant [K]/ [H]

Single-byte K-32,768–K32,767
K Decimal
Double-byte K-2,147,483,648–K2,147,483,647
Constant
Single-byte H0000–HFFFF
H Hexadecimal
Double-byte H00000000–HFFFFFFFF
The PLC can use five types of numerical values to implement calculations based on its control tasks;
the following is an explanation of the missions and functions of different numerical values.
Binary Number, BIN
The PLC's numerical operations and memory employ binary numbers. Binary nibbles and relevant
terms are explained as follows:
bit bits are the fundamental units of binary values, and have a state of either 1 or 0
Comprised of a series of 4 bits (such as b3–b0); can be used to express a
Nibble
one-nibble decimal number 0–9 or hexadecimal number: 0–F.
Comprised of a series of two nibbles (i.e. 8 bits, b7–b0); can express a
Byte
hexadecimal number: 00–FF.
Comprised of a series of two bytes (i.e. 16 bits, b15–b0); can express a
Word
hexadecimal number with four nibbles: 0000–FFFF.
Comprised of a series of two words (i.e. 32 bits, b31–b0); can express a
Double Word
hexadecimal number with eight nibbles: 00000000–FFFFFFFF
16-27
Relationship between bits, digits, nibbles, words, and double words in a binary system (see figure
below):
Octal Number, OCT

The external input and output terminals of a DVP-PLC are numbered using octal numbers
Example: External input: X0–X7, X10–X17… (Device number table);
External output: Y0–Y7, Y10–Y17… (Device number table)
Decimal Number, DEC

Decimal numbers are used for the following purposes in a PLC system:
 The setting values of timer T or counter C, such as TMR C0 K50. (K constant)
 The numbers of devices including M, T, C, or D, such as M10 or T30. (device number)
 Used as an operand in an application command, such as MOV K123 D0. (K constant)
Binary Code Decimal, BCD

Uses one nibble or 4 bits to express the data in a decimal number; a series of 16 bits can therefore
express a decimal number with 4 nibbles. Chiefly used to read the input value of a fingerwheel
numerical switch input or output a numerical value to a seven-segment display driver.
Hexadecimal Number, HEX

Applications of hexadecimal numbers in a PLC system: Used as operands in application commands,
such as MOV H1A2B D0. (H constant)
Constant K
Decimal numbers are usually prefixed with a "K" in a PLC system, such as K100. This indicates that it
is a decimal number with a numerical value of 100.
Exceptions: K can be combined with bit device X, Y, M, or S to produce data in the form of a nibble,
byte, word, or double word, such as in the case of K2Y10 or K4M100. Here K1 represents a
4-bit combination, and K2-K4 variously represent 8-, 12-, and 16-bit combinations.
Constant H
Hexadecimal numbers are usually prefixed with the letter "H" in a PLC system, such as in the case of
H100, which indicates a hexadecimal number with a numerical value of 100.
16-28
Functions of auxiliary relays

Like an output relay Y, an auxiliary relay M has an output coil and contacts a and b, and the
number of times they can be used in a program is unrestricted. Users can use an auxiliary relay M to
configure the control circuit, but cannot use it to directly drive an external load. Auxiliary relays have
the following two types of characteristics:
Ordinary auxiliary relays: Ordinary auxiliary relays will all revert to the OFF state if a power outage
occurs while the PLC is running, and will remain in the OFF state if power is
again turned down.
Special purpose auxiliary relays: Each special purpose auxiliary relay has its own specific use. Do not
use any undefined special purpose auxiliary relays.
Timer functions
Timers take 100 ms as their timing units. When the timing method is an upper time limit, when
the current timer value = set value, power will be sent to the output coil. Timer setting values consist
of decimal K values, and the data register D can also serve as a setting value.
Actual timer setting time = timing units × set value
Counter features
Item 16-bit counter
Type General Type
CT Direction: Score:
Setting 0–32,767
Designation of set value Constant K or data register D
Change in current value When the count reaches the set value, there is no longer a count
Output contact When the count reaches the set value, the contact comes On and stays On
The current value reverts to 0 when an RST command is executed, and the
Reset
contact reverts to Off
Contact actuation All are actuated after the end of scanning
Counter functions
When a counter's counting pulse input signal goes OFF→ON, if the counter's current value is
equal to the set value, the output coil will become ON. The setting value will be a decimal K values,
and the data register D can also serve as a setting value.
16-bit counter C0–C79:
 16-bit counter setting range: K0–K32,767. (when K0 and K1 are identical, the output contact
will immediately be ON during the first count.)
 The current counter value will be cleared from an ordinary counter when power is shut off to the
PLC.
 If the MOV command or WPLSoft is used to transmit a value greater than the set value to the
C0 current value register, when the next X1 goes from OFF→ON, the C0 counter contact will
change to On, and the current value will change to the set value.
 A counter's setting value may be directly set using a constant K or indirectly set using the value
in register D (not including special data registers D1000–D1199 or D2000–D2799).
 If the set value employs a constant K, it may only be a positive number; the set value may be
either a positive or a negative number if the value in data register D is used. The current
counter value will change from 32,767 to -32,768 as the count continues to accumulate.
16-29
Example
LD X0
X0
RST C0 RST C0
LD X1 X1
CNT C0 K5
CNT C0 K5
C0
LD C0 Y0
OUT Y0
1. When X0 = ON and the RST command is
executed, the current value of C0 will
revert to 0, and the output contact will
revert to OFF.
2. When X1 changes from OFF→ON, the
current value of the counter will execute
an increase (add one).
3. When the count of counter C0 reaches the
set value K5, the contact C0 will come ON,
and the current value of C0 = set value =
K5. Afterwards, signal C0 triggered by X1
cannot be received, and the current value
of C0 will remain K5.
16-30
16-5-2 Introduction to special relay functions (special M)

R/W items: RO: read only function; RW: read and write function
Special
Description of Function R/W *
M
Operates monitor N.O. contact (contact a). N.O. while RUN, contact a. This
M1000 RO
contact is ON while in the RUN state.
Operates monitor N.C. contact (contact b). N.C. while RUN, contact b. This
M1001 RO
contact is OFF while in the RUN state.
Initiates a forward (the instant RUN is ON) pulse. Initial pulse, contact a. Produces
M1002 RO
a forward pulse the moment RUN begins; its width = scan cycle
Initiates a reverse (the instant RUN is OFF) pulse. Initial pulse, contact a.
M1003 RO
Produces a reverse pulse the moment RUN ends; the pulse width = scan cycle
M1004 Reserved RO
M1005 Driver malfunction instructions RO
M1006 Converter has no output RO
M1007 Driver direction FWD(0)/REV(1) RO
M1008
| -- --
M1010
M1011 10 ms clock pulse, 5ms ON / 5ms OFF RO
M1012 100 ms clock pulse, 50ms On / 50ms Off RO
M1013 1 sec. clock pulse, 0.5s On / 0.5s Off RO
M1014 1 min. clock pulse, 30s On / 30s Off RO
M1015 Frequency attained (when used together with M1025) RO
M1016 Parameter read/write error RO
M1017 Parameter write successful RO
M1018 -- --
M1019 Motor drive warning indicator RO
M1020 Zero flag RO
M1021 Borrow flag RO
M1022 Carry flag RO
M1023 Divisor is 0 RO
M1024 -- --
Driver frequency = set frequency (ON)
M1025 RW
Driver frequency = 0(OFF)
M1026 Driver operating direction FWD(OFF) / REV(ON) RW
M1027 Driver Reset RW
M1028 -- --
M1029 -- --
M1030 -- --
Compulsory setting of the current PID integral value equal to D1019 (0 change, 1 RW
M1031
valid)
M1032 Compulsory definition of FREQ command after PID control RW
M1033 -- --
M1034 Initiates CANopen real-time control RW
M1035 Initiates internal communications control RW
M1036 Ignore calendar error RW
M1037 -- --
M1038 -- --
M1039 -- --
M1040 Excitation (Servo ON) RW
M1041 -- --
M1042 Quick stop RW
M1043 -- --
M1044 Pause (Halt) RW
16-31
Special
M
M1045
| -- --
M1047
M1048 -- --
M1049 -- --
M1050 -- --
M1051 -- --
M1052 Lock frequency (lock, frequency locked at the current operating frequency) RW
M1053 -- --
M1054 -- --
M1055 -- --
M1056 Excitation ready (Servo ON Ready) RO
M1057 -- --
M1058 On Quick Stopping RO
M1059 CANopen Master setting complete RO
M1060 CANopen Currently initializing slave station RO
M1061 CANopen Slave station initialization failure RO
M1062 -- --
M1063 -- --
M1064 -- --
M1065 Read/write CANOpen data time out RO
M1066 Read/write CANopen data complete RO
M1067 Read/write CANopen data successful RO
M1068 Calendar calculation error RO
M1069 -- --
M1070 -- --
M1071 -- --
M1072
| -- --
M1075
M1076 Calendar time error or refresh time out RO
M1077 485 Read/write complete RO
M1078 485 Read-write error RO
M1079 485 Communications time out RO
M1090 OFF (refer to parameter descriptions for Pr.00-29) RO
M1091 HAND (refer to parameter descriptions for Pr.00-29) RO
M1092 AUTO (refer to parameter descriptions for Pr.00-29) RO
M1100 LOCAL (refer to parameter descriptions for Pr.00-29) RO
M1101 REMOTE (refer to parameter descriptions for Pr.00-29) RO
M1168 SMOV BCD and BIN mode switch RW
M1260 PLC PID1 Enable RW
M1262 PLC PID1 Positive integral value limit RW
M1270 PLC PID2 Enable RW
M1272 PLC PID2 Positive integral value limit RW
16-32
16-5-3 Introduction to special register functions (special D)

Special
D
D1000 -- --
D1001 Device system program version RO
D1002 Program capacity RO
D1003 Total program memory content RO
D1004
| -- --
D1009
D1010 Current scan time (units: 0.1 ms) RO
D1011 Minimum scan time (units: 0.1 ms) RO
D1012 Maximum scan time (units: 0.1 ms) RO
D1013
| -- --
D1017
D1018 Current integral value RO
D1019 Compulsory setting of PID I integral RW
D1020 Output frequency (0.00–600.00Hz) RO
D1021 Output current (####.#A) RO
AI AO DI DO Expansion card number
0: No extension card
4: AC input card ( 6 in ) (EMC-D611A)
D1022 RO
5: Digital I/O Card ( 4 in 2 out ) (EMC-D42A)
6: Relay card( 6 out ) (EMC-R6AA)
11: Analog I/O card (2 in 2 out) (EMC-A22A)
Communication expansion card number
0: No extension card
1: DeviceNet Slave (CMC-DN01)
2: Profibus-DP Slave (CMC-PD01)
D1023 RO
3: CANopen Slave (EMC-COP01)
4: Modbus-TCP Slave
5: EtherNet/IP Slave (CMC-EIP01)
12: PROFINET Slave (CMC-PN01)
D1024
| -- --
D1026
D1027 PID calculation frequency command (frequency command after PID calculation) RO
D1028 AVI1value (0.00–100.00%) RO
D1029 ACI value (0.0–100.00%) RO
D1030 AVI2 value (0.00–100.00%) RO
D1031 C series: extension card AI10 (0.0–100.0%) RO
D1032 C series: extension card AI11 (0.0–100.0%) RO
D1033
| -- --
D1035
D1036 Servo fault bit RO
D1037 Driver output frequency RO
D1038 DC bus voltage RO
D1039 Output voltage RO
D1040 Analog output value AFM1 (-100.00–100.00%) RW
D1041 C series: extension card AO10 (0.0–100.0%) RW
D1042 C series: extension card AO11 (0.0–100.0%) RW
Can be user-defined (will be displayed on panel when Pr.00-04 is set as 28; RW
D1043
display method is C xxx)
D1044 -- -
D1045 Analog output value AFM2 (-100.00–100.00%) RW
16-33
Special
D
D1046
| -- --
D1049
Actual Operation Mode
D1050 RO
0: Speed
D1051 -- --
D1052 -- --
D1053 -- --
D1054 -- --
D1055 -- --
D1056 -- --
D1057 -- --
D1058 -- --
D1059 -- --
Operation Mode setting
D1060 RW
0: Speed
D1061 485 COM1 communications time out time (ms) RW
D1062 Torque command (torque limit in speed mode) RW
D1063 Year (Western calendar) (display range 2000-2099) (must use KPC-CC01) RO
D1064 Week (display range 1-7) (must use KPC-CC01) RO
D1065 Month (display range 1-12) (must use KPC-CC01) RO
D1066 Day (display range 1-31) (must use KPC-CC01) RO
D1067 Hour (display range 0-23) (must use KPC-CC01) RO
D1068 Minute (display range 0-59) (must use KPC-CC01) RO
D1069 Second (display range 0-59) (must use KPC-CC01) RO
D1100 Target frequency RO
D1101 Target frequency (must be operating) RO
D1102 Reference frequency RO
D1103 -- --
D1104 -- --
D1105 -- --
D1106 -- --
D1107 π(Pi) Low word RO
D1108 π(Pi) High word RO
D1109 Random number RO
Internal node communications number (set number of slave stations to be
D1110 RW
controlled)
D1111 -- --
D1112 -- --
D1113 -- --
Numbering of the operating motors:
D1114 1: Motor 1 RO
2: Motor 2
D1115 Internal node synchronizing cycle (ms) RO
D1116 Internal node error (bit0 = Node 0, bit1 = Node 1,…bit7 = Node 7) RO
Internal node online correspondence (bit0 = Node 0, bit1 = Node 1,…bit7 = Node
D1117 RO
7)
D1118 -- --
D1119 -- --
D1120 Internal node 0 control command RW
D1121 Internal node 0 mode RW
D1122 Internal node 0 reference command L RW
D1123 Internal node 0 reference command H RW
D1124 -- --
D1125 -- --
16-34
Special
D
D1126 Internal node 0 status RO
D1127 Internal node 0 reference status L RO
D1128 Internal node 0 reference status H RO
D1129 -- --
D1134 -- --
D1135 -- --
D1139 -- --
D1144 -- --
D1145 -- --
D1149 -- --
D1154 -- --
D1155 -- --
D1159 -- --
D1164 -- --
D1165 -- --
D1169 -- --
D1174 -- RW
D1175 -- --
D1176 Internal node 5 status --
D1179 -- --
16-35
Special
D
D1184 -- --
D1185 -- --
D1189 -- --
D1194 -- --
D1195 -- --
D1199 -- --
D1560 Motor drive warning code RO
Special
Description of Function Default R/W*
D
PID1 mode:
D1200 0 RW
0: Basic mode
PID1 target selection:
0: Refer to D1202
D1201 1: AVI1 0 RW
2: ACI
3: AVI2
D1202 PID1 target value (0.00%–100.00%) 5000 RW
PID1 feedback selection
0: Refer to D1204
D1203 1: AVI1 1 RW
2: ACI
3: AVI2
D1204 PID1 feedback value (0.00%–100.00%) 0 RW
D1205 PID1 P value (decimal point 2) 10 RW
D1206 PID1 I value (decimal point 2) 1000 RW
D1207 PID1 D value (decimal point 2) 0 RW
D1209 Max. limit of PID1 10000 RW
D1215 Counting value of PID1 (decimal point 2) 0 RO
PID2 mode:
D1220 0 RW
0: Basic mode
PID2 target selection:
0: Refer to D1202
D1221 1: AVI1 0 RW
2: ACI
3: AVI2
D1222 PID2 target value (0.00%–100.00%) 5000 RW
PID2 feedback selection
0: Refer to D1204
D1223 1: AVI1 1 RW
2: ACI
3: AVI2
16-36
Special
Description of Function Default R/W*
D
D1224 PID2 feedback value (0.00%–100.00%) 0 RW
D1225 PID1 P value (decimal point 2) 10 RW
D1226 PID2 I value (decimal point 2) 1000 RW
D1227 PID2 D value (decimal point 2) 0 RW
D1229 Max. limit of PID2 10000 RW
D1235 Counting value of PID2 (decimal point 2) 0 RO
The following is CANopen Master's special D (can be written in only with PLC in Stop state)
※ CP2000 does not have torque and position mode. As CANopen master, however, CP2000 can
issue torque and position commands to CANopen slaves.
n=0–7
Power
PDO
Special D Description of Function off Default: R/W
Map
Memory
Channel opened by CANopen initialization
D1070 NO NO 0 R
(bit0=Machine code0 …….)
Error channel occurring in CANopen initialization
D1071 NO NO 0 R
process (bit0=Machine code0 …….)
D1072 Reserved - - -
D1073 CANopen break channel (bit0=Machine code0 …….) NO NO R
Error code of master error
0: No error
D1074 NO NO 0 R
1: Slave station setting error
2: Synchronizing cycle setting error (too small)
D1076 SDO error message (main index value) NO NO R
D1077 SDO error message (secondary index value) NO NO R
D1078 SDO error message (error code) NO NO R
D1079 SDO error message (error code) NO NO R
D1081 -
| Reserved - -
D1086
D1087
| Reserved - - -
D1089
D1090 Synchronizing cycle setting NO YES 4 RW
Sets slave station On or Off (bit0–bit7 correspond to
D1091 NO YES FFFFH RW
slave stations number 0–7)
D1092 Delay before start of initialization NO YES 0 RW
D1093 Break time detection NO YES 1000ms RW
D1094 Break number detection NO YES 3 RW
D1095
| Reserved - - -
D1096
16-37
Power
PDO
Special D Description of Function off Default: R/W
Map
Memory
Corresponding real-time transmission type (PDO)
D1097 NO YES 1 RW
Setting range: 1–240
Corresponding real-time receiving type (PDO)
D1098 NO YES 1 RW
Initialization completion delay time
D1099 NO YES 15 sec. RW
Setting range: 1 to 60000 sec
Station number n of slave station
D2000+100*n Setting range: 0–127 NO YES 0 RW
0: No CANopen function
The CP2000 supports 8 slave stations under the CANopen protocol; each slave station
occupies 100 special D locations; stations are numbered 1–8, total of 8 stations.
Explanation of Slave station no. 1 D2000 Node ID
slave station D2001 Slave station no. 1 torque restrictions
number | |
D2099 Address 4(H) corresponding to receiving
channel 4
Slave station no. 2 D2100 Node ID
D2101 Slave station no. 2 torque restrictions
| |
channel 4
| |
channel 4

| |
channel 4
1. The range of n is 0–7
2. ●Indicates PDOTX, ▲Indicates PDORX; unmarked special D can be refreshed using the
CANFLS command
Special D Description of Function Default: R/W

D2000+100*n Setting range: 0–127 0 RW
D2002+100*n Manufacturer code of slave station number n (L) 0 R
D2003+100*n Manufacturer code of slave station number n (H) 0 R
D2004+100*n Manufacturer's product code of slave station number n (L) 0 R
D2005+100*n Manufacturer's product code of slave station number n (H) 0 R
16-38
Basic definitions
PDO PDO Default:
Mapping 1 2 3 4
Communications break handling method of
D2006+100*n 0 6007H-0010H RW
slave station number n
D2007+100*n Error code of slave station number n error 0 603FH-0010H R
D2008+100*n Control word of slave station number n 0 6040H-0010H ● ● ● RW
D2009+100*n Status word of slave station number n 0 6041H-0010H ▲ ▲ ▲ R
D2010+100*n Control mode of slave station number n 2 6060H-0008H RW
D2011+100*n Actual mode of slave station number n 2 6061H-0008H R
Velocity Control
Slave station number n=0–7
PDO PDO Default:
Mapping 1 2 3 4
D2001+100*n Torque restriction on slave station number n 0 6072H-0010H RW
D2012+100*n Target speed of slave station number n 0 6042H-0010H ● RW
D2013+100*n Actual speed of slave station number n 0 6043H-0010H ▲ R
D2014+100*n Error speed of slave station number n 0 6044H-0010H R
D2015+100*n Acceleration time of slave station number n 1000 604FH-0020H R
D2016+100*n Deceleration time of slave station number n 1000 6050H-0020H RW
20XXH correspondences: MI / MO / AI / AO
Slave station number n=0–7
PDO PDO Default:
Mapping 1 2 3 4
D2026+100*n MI status of slave station number n 0 2026H-0110H ▲ RW
D2027+100*n MO setting of slave station number n 0 2026H-4110H ● RW
D2028+100*n AI1 status of slave station number n 0 2026H-6110H ▲ RW
D2031+100*n AO1 status of slave station number n 0 2026H-A110H ● RW
PDO reflection length setting:
D2034+100*n Real-time transmission setting of slave station number n 000AH RW

D2067+100*n Real-time reception setting of slave station number n 0000H RW
16-39
16-5-4 PLC Communication address

Device Range Type Address (Hex)
X 00–37 (Octal) bit 0400–041F
Y 00–37 (Octal) bit 0500–051F
T 00–159 bit/word 0600–069F
M 000–799 bit 0800–0B1F
M 1000–1079 bit 0BE8–0C37
C 0–79 bit/word 0E00–0E47
D 00–399 word 1000–118F
D 1000–1198 word 13E8–144B
D 2000–2799 word 17D0–1AEF
Command code that can be used

Function Code Description of Function Function target
01 Coil status read Y, M, T, C
02 Input status read X,Y,M,T,C
03 Read single unit of data T,C,D
05 Compulsory single coil status change Y,M,T,C
06 Write single unit of data T,C,D
0F Compulsory multiple coil status change Y,M,T,C
10 Write multiple units of data T,C,D
NOTE
When PLC functions have been activated, the CP2000 can match PLC and driver parameters; this method employs
different addresses, drivers (default station number is 1, PLC sets station number as 2)
16-40
16-6 Introduction to the Command Window
16-6-1 Overview of basic commands

Ordinary commands
Command Execution
Function OPERAND
code speed (us)
LD Load contact a X、Y、M、T、C 0.8
LDI Load contact b X、Y、M、T、C 0.8
AND Connect contact a in series X、Y、M、T、C 0.8
ANI Connect contact b in series X、Y、M、T、C 0.8
OR Connect contact a in parallel X、Y、M、T、C 0.8
ORI Connect contact b in parallel X、Y、M、T、C 0.8
ANB Series circuit block N/A 0.3
ORB Parallel circuit block N/A 0.3
MPS Save to stack N/A 0.3
MRD Stack read (pointer does not change) N/A 0.3
MPP Read stack N/A 0.3
Output command
Command Execution
Function OPERAND
code speed (us)
OUT Drive coil Y、M 1
SET Action continues (ON) Y、M 1
RST Clear contact or register Y、M、T、C、D 1.2
Timer, counter
Command Execution
Function OPERAND
code speed (us)
TMR 16-bit timer T-K or T-D commands 1.1
CNT 16-bit counter C-K or C-D (16-bit) 0.5
Main control command

Command Execution
Function OPERAND
code speed (us)
MC Common series contact connection N0~N7 0.4
MCR Common series contact release N0~N7 0.4
Contact rising edge/falling edge detection command

Command Execution
Function OPERAND
code speed (us)
LDP Start of forward edge detection action X、Y、M、T、C 1.1
LDF Start of reverse edge detection action X、Y、M、T、C 1.1
ANDP Forward edge detection series connection X、Y、M、T、C 1.1
ANDF Reverse edge detection series connection X、Y、M、T、C 1.1
ORP Forward edge detection parallel connection X、Y、M、T、C 1.1
ORF Reverse edge detection parallel connection X、Y、M、T、C 1.1
16-41
Upper/lower differential output commands

Command Execution
Function OPERAND
code speed (us)
PLS Upper differential output Y、M 1.2
PLF Lower differential output Y、M 1.2
Stop command
Command Execution
Function OPERAND
code speed (us)
END Program conclusion N/A 0.2
Other commands
Command Execution
Function OPERAND
code speed (us)
NOP No action N/A 0.2
INV Inverse of operation results N/A 0.2
P Index P 0.3
16-6-2 Detailed explanation of basic commands

Command Function
LD Load contact a
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
     －
The LD command is used for contact a starting at the left busbar or contact a starting
at a contact circuit block; its function is to save current content and save the acquired
contact status in the cumulative register.
Ladder diagram: Command code: Description:
X0 X1
Y1 LD X0 Load Contact a of X0
Create series
AND X1 connection to contact a
of X1
OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil
Command Function
LDI Load contact b
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
     －
The LDI command is used for contact b starting at the left busbar or contact b starting
at a contact circuit block; its function is to save current content and save the acquired
contact status in the cumulative register.
X0 X1
Y1 LDI X0 Load Contact b of X0
Create series
of X1
16-42
Command Function
AND Connect contact a in series
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
     －
The AND command is used to create a series connection to contact a; first reads
current status of the designated series contact and logical operation results before
contact in order to perform "AND" operation; saves results in cumulative register.
X1 X0 LDI X1 Load Contact b of X1
Y1 Create series
of X0
Command Function
ANI Connect contact b in series
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
     －
The ANI command is used to create a series connection to contact b; its function is to
first read current status of the designated series contact and logical operation results
before contact in order to perform "AND" operation; saves results in cumulative
register.
X1 X0
Create series
ANI X0 connection to contact b
of X0
Command Function
OR Connect contact a in parallel
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
     －
The OR command is used to establish a parallel connection to contact a; its function is
to first read current status of the designated series contact and logical operation
results before contact in order to perform "OR" operation; saves results in cumulative
register.
X0
X1 Create series
OR X1 connection to contact a
of X1
16-43
Command Function
ORI Connect contact b in parallel
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
     －
The ORI command is used to establish a parallel connection to contact b; its function
is to first read current status of the designated series contact and logical operation
results before contact in order to perform "OR" operation; saves results in cumulative
register.
X0
X1 Create series
ORI X1 connection to contact b
of X1
Command Function
ANB Series circuit block
Operand N/A
ANB performs an "AND" operation on the previous saved logic results and the current
cumulative register content.
X0 X1 LD X0 Load Contact a of X0
ANB
Y1 Establish parallel
ORI X2 connection to contact b
X2 X3 of X2
LDI X1 Load Contact b of X1
Block A Block B Establish parallel
OR X3 connection to contact a
of X3
ANB Series circuit block
Command Function
ORB Parallel circuit block
Operand N/A
ORB performs an "OR" operation on the previous saved logic results and the current
cumulative register content.
X0 X1 Block A LD X0 Load Contact a of X0
ANI X1 connection to contact b
X2 X3 of X1
ORB
LDI X2 Load Contact b of X2
Block B Establish parallel
of X3
ORB Parallel circuit block
16-44
Command Function
MPS Save to stack
Operand N/A
Save current content of cumulative register to the stack. (Add one to stack pointer)
Command Function
MRD Read stack (pointer does not change)
Operand N/A
Reads stack content and saves to cumulative register. (Stack pointer does not
change)
Command Function
MPP Read stack
Operand N/A
Retrieves result of previously-save logical operation from the stack, and saves to
cumulative register. (Subtract one from stack pointer)
MPS LD X0 Load Contact a of X0
X0 X1 MPS Save to stack
Y1 Create series connection
AND X1
to contact a of X1
X2 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil
MRD M0 Read stack (pointer does
MRD
not change)
Y2 Create series connection
AND X2
to contact a of X2
MPP
OUT M0 Drive M0 coil
END MPP Read stack
END Program conclusion
Command Function
OUT Drive coil
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
－   －－－
Outputs result of logical operation before OUT command to the designated element.
Coil contact action:
Out command
Result: Access Point:
Coil
Contact a (N.O.) Contact b (N.C.)
FALSE OFF Not conducting Conducting
TRUE ON Conducting Not conducting

X0 X1 LD X0 Load Contact b of X0
of X1
16-45
Command Function
SET Action continues (ON)
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
－   －－－
When the SET command is driven, the designated element will be set as ON, and will
be maintained in an ON state, regardless of whether the SET command is still driven.
The RST command can be used to set the element as OFF.
X0 Y0 LD X0 Load Contact a of X0
SET Y1 Establish parallel
ANI Y0 connection to contact b
of Y0
SET Y1 Action continues (ON)
Command Function
RST Clear contact or register
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
－     
When the RST command is driven, the action of the designated element will be as
follows:
Element Mode
Y, M Both coil and contact will be set as OFF.
The current timing or count value will be set as 0, and both the coil
T, C
and contact will be set as OFF.
D The content value will be set as 0.
If the RST command has not been executed, the status of the designated element will
remain unchanged.
X0 LD X0 Load Contact a of X0
RST Y5 Clear contact or
RST Y5
register
Command Function
TMR 16-bit timer
T-K T0–T159, K0–K32,767
Operand
T-D T0–T159, D0–D399
When the TMR command is executed, the designated timer coil will be electrified, and
the timer will begin timing. The contact's action will be as follows when the timing
value reaches the designated set value (timing value ≥ set value):
N.O. (Normally Open) contact Closed
N.C. (Normally Close) contact Open
If the RST command has not been executed, the status of the designated element will
remain unchanged.
TMR T5 K1000 T5 timer
TMR T5 K1000
Set value as K1000
16-46
Command Function
CNT 16-bit counter
C-K C0–C79, K0–K32,767
Operand
C-D C0–C79, D0–D399
When the CNT command is executed from OFF→ON, this indicates that the
designated counter coil goes from no power → electrified, and 1 will be added to the
counter's count value; when the count reaches the designated value (count value =
set value), the contact will have the following action:
N.O. (Normally Open) contact Closed
N.C. (Normally Close) contact Open
After the count value has been reached, the contact and count value will both remain
unchanged even if there is continued count pulse input. Use the RST command if you
wish to restart or clear the count.
CNT C2 K100 C2counter
CNT C2 K100
Set value as K100
16-47
Command Function
MC/MCR Connect/release a common series contact
Operand N0–N7
MC is the main control initiation command, and any commands between MC and
MCR will be executed normally. When the MC command is OFF, any commands
between MC and MCR will act as follows:
Determination of commands Description
The timing value will revert to 0, the coil will lose
Ordinary timer
power, and the contact will not operate
The coil will lose power, and the count value and
Counter
contact will stay in their current state
Coil driven by OUT command None receive power
Elements driven by SET, RST
Will remain in their current state
commands
Applications commands None are actuated
MCR is the main control stop command, and is placed at the end of the main control
program. There may not be any contact commands before the MCR command.
The MC-MCR main control program commands support a nested program structure
with a maximum only 8 levels; use in the order N0-N7, please refer to the following
program:
Command Description:
Ladder diagram: code:
X0
MC N0 LD X0 Load Contact a of X0
Connection of N0 common series
X1 MC N0
contact
Y0
LD X1 Load Contact a of X1
X2 OUT Y0 Drive Y0 coil
MC N1 :
Y1 Connection of N1 common series
MC N1
contact
MCR N1 LD X3 Load Contact a of X3
MCR N0 :
MCR N1 Release N1 common series contact
X10
:
MC N0
X11 :
Y10
Connection of N0 common series
MC N0
MCR N0 contact
:
16-48
Command Function
LDP Start of forward edge detection action
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
     －
The LDP command has the same usage as LD, but its action is different; its function is
to save current content, while also saving the detected state of the rising edge of the
contact to the cumulative register.
Command Description:
Ladder diagram: code:
X0 X1
Y1 Start of X0 forward edge detection
LDP X0
action
Create series connection to
AND X1
contact a of X1
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in series for the scope
of usage of each operand.
A rising edge contact will be TRUE after power is turned on if the rising edge contact is
On before power is turned on to the PLC.
Command Function
LDF Start of reverse edge detection action
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
     －
The LDF command has the same usage as LD, but its action is different; its function is
to save current content while also saving the detected state of the falling edge of the
contact to the cumulative register.
Command code: Description:
Ladder diagram:
X0 X1 Start of X0 reverse
LDF X0
Y1 edge detection action
Create series
of X1
Command Function
ANDP Forward edge detection series connection
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
     －
The ANDP command used for a contact rising edge detection series connection.
Y1 X1 Forward edge
ANDP X1 detection series
connection
16-49
Command Function
ANDF Reverse edge detection series connection
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
     －
The ANDF command is used for a contact falling edge detection series connection.
Y1 X1 Reverse edge
ANDF X1 detection series
connection
Command Function
ORP Forward edge detection parallel connection
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
     －
The ORP command is used for a contact rising edge detection parallel connection.
X0
X1 X1 Forward edge
ORP X1 detection parallel
connection
Command Function
ORF Reverse edge detection parallel connection
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
     －
The ORF command is used for contact falling edge detection parallel connection.
X0
X1 Reverse edge
X1
ORF X1 detection parallel
connection
16-50
Command Function
PLS Upper differential output
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
－   －－－
Upper differential output commands. When X0 = OFF→ON (positive edge-triggered),
the PLS command will be executed, and M0 will send one pulse, with a pulse length
consisting of one scanning period.
X0
PLS M0 LD X0 Load Contact a of X0
M0 M0 Upper differential
PLS M0
SET Y0 output
Time sequence diagram: LD M0 Load Contact a of M0
X0 Y0 Action continues
SET Y0
(ON)
M0 Time for one scan cycle
Y0
Command Function
PLF Lower differential output
X0–X17 Y0–Y17 M0–M799 T0–159 C0–C79 D0–D399
Operand
－   －－－
Lower differential output command. When X0 = ON→OFF (negative edge-triggered),
the PLF command will be executed, and M0 will send one pulse, with pulse length
consisting of one scanning period.
X0
PLF M0 LD X0 Load Contact a of X0
M0 M0 Lower differential
PLF M0
SET Y0 output
Time sequence diagram: LD M0 Load Contact a of M0
X0 Y0 Action continues
SET Y0
(ON)
M0 Time for one scan cycle
Y0
Command Function
END Program conclusion
Operand N/A
An END command must be added to the end of a ladder diagram program or
command program. The PLC will scan from address 0 to the END command, and will
return to address 0 and begins scanning again after execution.
16-51
Command Function
NOP No action
Operand N/A
The command NOP does not perform any operation in the program. Because
execution of this command will retain the original logical operation results, it can be
used in the following situation: the NOP command can be used to replace a command
that is deleted without changing the program length.
NOP command will be simplified and not
displayed when the ladder diagram is LD X0 Load Contact b of X0
displayed.
NOP No action
X0
NOP Y1 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil
Command Function
INV Inverse of operation results
Operand N/A
Saves the result of the logic inversion operation prior to the INV command in the
cumulative register.
X0
Inverse of operation
INV
results
Command Function
P Index
Operand P0–P255
Pointer P is used to subprogram call command API 01 CALL. Use does not require
starting from zero, but the number cannot be used repeatedly, otherwise an
unpredictable error will occur.
Command code: Description:
Ladder diagram:
CALL P10 CALL P10 Call command CALL to
P10
X1
P10 Y1 ：
P10 Pointer P10
16-52
16-6-3 Overview of application commands

Command code P STEPS
Classification API Function
16 bit 32 bit command 16bit 32bit
01 CALL –  Call subprogram 3 –
Circuit control 02 SRET – – Conclusion of subprogram 1 –
06 FEND – – Conclusion of main program 1 –
10 CMP DCMP  Compares set output 7 13
11 ZCP DZCP  Range comparison 9 17
Send
12 MOV DMOV  Data movement 5 9
comparison
13 SMOV DSMOV  Nibble movement 11 21
15 BMOV –  Send all 7 –
18 BCD DBCD  BIN to BCD transformation 5 9
19 BIN DBIN  BCD to BIN transformation 5 9
20 ADD DADD  BIN addition 7 13
Four logical 21 SUB DSUB  BIN subtraction 7 13
operations 22 MUL DMUL  BIN multiplication 7 13
23 DIV DDIV  BIN division 7 13
24 INC DINC  BIN add one 3 5
25 DEC DDEC  BIN subtract one 3 5
Rotational 30 ROR DROR  Right rotation 5 –
displacement 31 ROL DROL  Left rotation 5 –
40 ZRST –  Clear range 5 -
41 DECO DDECO  Decoder 7 13
42 ENCO DENCO  Encoder 7 13
Data Process 43 SUM DSUM  ON bit number 5 9
44 BON DBON  ON bit judgement 7 13
BIN whole number → binary
49 – DFLT  floating point number – 9
transformation
– Comparison of binary floating
110 DECMP  – 13
point numbers
– Comparison of binary floating
111 DEZCP  – 17
point number range
116 – DRAD  Angle → Radian – 9
117 – DDEG  Radian → Angle – 9
Binary floating point number
120 – DEADD  – 13
addition
121 – DESUB  – 13
subtraction
122 – DEMUL  – 13
multiplication
123 – DEDIV  – 13
division
Floating point
operation 124 – DEXP  – 9
obtain exponent
125 – DLN  – 9
obtain logarithm
127 – DESQR  – 9
find square root
129 INT DINT  → BIN whole number – 9
transformation
130 – DSIN  – 9
SIN operation
131 – DCOS  – 9
COS operation
132 – DTAN  – 9
TAN operation
16-53

– Binary floating point number
133 DASIN  – 9
ASIN operation
134 DACOS  – 9
ACOS operation
135 DATAN  – 9
ATAN operation
136 DSINH  – 9
SINH operation
Floating point – Binary floating point number
137 DCOSH  – 9
operation COSH operation
138 DTANH  – 9
TANH operation
Other 147 SWAP DSWAP  Exchange the up/down 8 bits 3 5
Communication 150 MODRW –  Modbus read/write 7 –
160 TCMP –  Compare calendar data 11 –
161 TZCP –  Compare calendar data range 9 –
Calendar 162 TADD –  Calendar data addition 7 –
163 TSUB –  Calendar data subtraction 7 –
166 TRD –  Calendar data read 3 –
BIN→GRY code
170 GRY DGRY  5 9
transformation
GRAY code
GRY code →BIN
171 GBIN DGBIN  5 9
transformation
Contact form logical operation
215 LD& DLD& – 5 9
LD#
216 LD| DLD| – 5 9
LD#
217 LD^ DLD^ – 5 9
LD#
218 AND& DAND& – 5 9
AND#
Contact form Contact form logical operation
219 ANDl DANDl – 5 9
logical operation AND#
220 AND^ DAND^ – 5 9
AND#
221 OR& DOR& – 5 9
OR#
222 OR| DOR| – 5 9
OR#
223 OR^ DOR^ – 5 9
OR#
224 LD＝ DLD＝ – Contact form compare LD※ 5 9
225 LD＞ DLD＞ – Contact form compare LD※ 5 9
226 LD＜ DLD＜ – Contact form compare LD※ 5 9
228 LD＜＞ DLD＜＞ – Contact form compare LD※ 5 9
229 LD＜＝ DLD＜＝ – Contact form compare LD※ 5 9
230 LD＞＝ DLD＞＝ – Contact form compare LD※ 5 9
232 AND＝ DAND＝ – Contact form compare AND※ 5 9
233 AND＞ DAND＞ – Contact form compare AND※ 5 9
Contact form 234 AND＜ DAND＜ – Contact form compare AND※ 5 9
compare
236 AND＜＞ DAND＜＞ – Contact form compare AND※ 5 9
command
237 AND＜＝ DAND＜＝ – Contact form compare AND※ 5 9
238 AND＞＝ DAND＞＝ – Contact form compare AND※ 5 9
240 OR＝ DOR＝ – Contact form compare OR※ 5 9
241 OR＞ DOR＞ – Contact form compare OR※ 5 9
242 OR＜ DOR＜ – Contact form compare OR※ 5 9
244 OR＜＞ DOR＜＞ – Contact form compare OR※ 5 9
245 OR＜＝ DOR＜＝ – Contact form compare OR※ 5 9
246 OR＞＝ DOR＞＝ – Contact form compare OR※ 5 9
16-54

Floating point number contact
275 – FLD＝ – – 9
form compare LD※
Floating point Floating point number contact
276 – FLD＞ – – 9
contact form form compare LD※
277 – FLD＜ – – 9
form compare LD※
278 – FLD＜＞ – – 9
form compare LD※
279 – FLD＜＝ – – 9
form compare LD※
280 – FLD＞＝ – – 9
form compare LD※
281 – FAND＝ – – 9
form compare AND※
282 – FAND＞ – – 9
form compare AND※
283 – FAND＜ – – 9
form compare AND※
284 – FAND＜＞ – – 9
form compare AND※
Compare Floating point number contact
285 – FAND＜＝ – – 9
command form compare AND※
286 – FAND＞＝ – – 9
form compare AND※
287 – FOR＝ – – 9
form compare OR※
288 – FOR＞ – – 9
form compare OR※
289 – FOR＜ – – 9
form compare OR※
290 – FOR＜＞ – – 9
form compare OR※
291 – FOR＜＝ – – 9
form compare OR※
292 – FOR＞＝ – – 9
form compare OR※
139 RPR –  Read servo parameter 5 –
140 WPR –  Write servo parameter 5 –
141 FPID –  Driver PID control mode 9 –
142 FREQ –  Driver torque control mode 7 –
 Read CANopen slave station
261 CANRX – 9 –
data
Driver special
 Write CANopen slave station –
command 264 CANTX – 9
data
 Refresh special –
265 CANFLS – 3
D corresponding to CANopen
320 ICOMR DICOMR  Internal communications read 9 17
321 ICOMW DICOMW  Internal communications write 9 17
323 WPRA – – RAM write in drive parameters 5 –
16-55
16-6-4 Detailed explanation of applications commands

API
CALL S Call subprogram
01 P
Bit device Word device 16-bit command (3 STEP)
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D CALL Continuous CALLP Pulse
execution type execution type
Notes on operand usage: 32-bit command

The S operand can designate P －－－－
CP2000 series device: The S operand can designate P0-P63
Flag signal: none
 S：Call subprogram pointer.
 Write the subprogram after the FEND command.

 The subprogram must end after the SRET command.
 Refer to the FEND command explanation and sample content for detailed
command functions.
API
SRET － Conclusion of subprogram
02 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D Continuous
FEND －－
execution type

No operand －－－－
A contact-driven command is not needed
Flag signal: none
 A contact-driven command is not needed. Automatically returns next

command after CALL command
 Indicates end of subprogram. After end of subprogram, SRET returns to main
program, and executes next command after the original call subprogram CALL
command.
 Refer to the FEND command explanation and sample content for detailed
command functions.
16-56
API
FEND － Conclusion a main program
06
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D Continuous
FEND －－
execution type

No operand －－－－
A contact-driven command is not needed
Flag signal: none
 This command indicates the end of the main program. It is the same as
the END command when the PLC executes this command.
 The CALL command program must be written after the FEND command,
and the SRET command added to the end of the subprogram.
 When using the FEND command, an END command is also needed.
However, the END command must be placed at the end, after the main
program and subprogram.
16-57
API
CMP S1 S2 D Compares set output
10 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D CMP Continuous CMPP Pulse
S1 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ execution type execution type
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
32-bit command (13 STEP)
D ＊＊ DCMP Continuous DCMPP Pulse
Notes on operand usage:
The operand D occupies three consecutive points Flag signal: none
 S1 : Compare value 1. S2 : Compare value 2. D : Results of comparison.
 Compares the size of the content of operand S1 and S2 ; the results of
comparison are expressed in D .

 Size comparison is performed algebraically. All data is compared in the form of
numerical binary values. Because this is a 16-bit command, when b15 is 1, this
indicates a negative number.
 When the designated device is Y0, it automatically occupies Y0, Y1 and Y2.
 When X10 = ON, the CMP command executes, and Y0, Y1 or Y2 will be ON.
When X10 = OFF, the CMP command will not execute, and the state of Y0, Y1
and Y2 will remain in the state prior to X10 = OFF.
 If ≥, ≤, or ≠ results are needed, they can be obtained via series/parallel
connections of Y0-Y2.
X10
CMP K10 D10 Y0
Y0
If K10>D10, Y0 = On
Y1
If K10=D10, Y1 = On
Y2
If K10<D10, Y2= On
 To clear results of comparison, use the RST or ZRST command.

X10 X10
RST M0 ZRST M0 M2
RST M1
RST M2
16-58
API
ZCP S1 S2 S D Range comparison
11 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ZCP Continuous ZCPP Pulse
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
S ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ DZCP Continuous DZCPP Pulse
D ＊＊ execution type execution type
The content value of operand S1 is less than the content value of Flag signal: none
S2 operand
The operand D occupies three consecutive points
 S1 : Lower limit of range comparison. S2 : Upper limit of range comparison.

S : Comparative value. D : Results of comparison.
 When the comparative value S is compared with the lower limit S1 and
upper limitS2 , the results of comparison are expressed in D .
 When lower limit S1 > upper limit S2 , the command will use the lower limit
S1 to perform comparison with the upper and lower limit.
 Size comparison is performed algebraically. All data is compared in the form of
numerical binary values. Because this is a 16-bit command, when b15 is 1, this
indicates a negative number.
 When the designated device is M0, it automatically occupies M0, M1 and M2.
 When X0 = ON, the ZCP command executes, and M0, M1 or M2 will be ON.
When X0 = OFF, the ZCP command will not execute, and the state of M0, M1 or
M2 will remain in the state prior to X0 = OFF.
 If ≥, ≤, or ≠ results are needed, they can be obtained via series/parallel
connections of M0-M2.
X0
ZCP K10 K100 C10 M0
M0
If C10 < K10, M0 = On
M1
If K10 =
< C10 =
< K100, M1 = On
M2
If C10 > K100, M2 = On
 To clear results of comparison, use the RST or ZRST command.
X0 X0
RST M0 ZRST M0 M2
RST M1
RST M2
16-59
API
MOV S D Data movement
12 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D MOV Continuous MOVP Pulse
S ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ execution type execution type
D ＊＊＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: none
DMOV Continuous DMOVP Pulse
Flag signal:
 S : Data source. D : Destination of data movement.
 When this command is executed, the content of S content will be directly

moved to D . When the command is not executed, the content of D will not
change.
 When X0 = OFF, the content of D10 will not change; if X0 = ON, the value K10 will
be sent to data register D10.
 When X1 = OFF, the content of D10 will not change; if X1 = ON, the current value
of T0 will be sent to data register D10.
X0
MOV K10 D0
X1
MOV T0 D10
16-60
API n
SMOV S m1 m2 D Nibble movement
13 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D MOV Continuous SMOVP Pulse
S ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
D ＊＊＊＊＊ 32-bit command (21 STEP)

DSMOV Continuous DSMOV Pulse
Notes on operand usage: none execution type P execution type
Flag signal: M1168
S : Data source. m1
 : The data source transfers starting bit number.
m2
：The data source transfers individual bit number. D : Transfer destination.
n
Transferring starting bit number of the destination.
 BCD mode (M1168 = OFF):
SMOV enables and operates BCD under this mode, the operation is similar to the
way SMOV operates decimal numbers. The command copies specific bit number
of arithmetic element S (S is a 4-figure decimal number), and sends the bit
number to arithmetic element D (D is also a 4-figure decimal number). The current
data on the target register will be covered.
 m1 range: 1–4
 m2 range: 1–m1 (m2 cannot be larger than m1)
 n range: m2–4 (n cannot be smaller than m2)
 When M1168 = OFF (BCD mode), X0 is ON, the instruction transfers two digits of
the decimal number starting from the fourth digit of the decimal number (the digit
in the thousands place of the decimal number) in D10 to the two digits of the
decimal number starting from the third digit of the decimal number (the digit in the
hundreds place of the decimal number) in D20. After the instruction is executed,
the digits in the thousands place of the decimal number (103) and the ones place
of the decimal number (100) in D20 are unchanged.
16-61
 When M1168 is ON (BIN mode), and the SMOV command is executed, D10 and
D20 do not change in BCD mode, but send 4 digits as a unit in BIN mode.
16-62
API
BMOV S D n Send all
15 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D BMOV Continuous BMOVP Pulse
S ＊＊＊＊＊＊ execution type execution type
D ＊＊＊＊＊
n ＊＊＊＊ 32-bit command
Notes on operand usage: －－－－
n operand scope n ＝ 1 to 512
Flag signal: none
 S : Initiate source device. D : Initiate destination device. n : Send block

length.
 The content of n registers starting from the initial number of the device designated
by S will be sent to the n registers starting from the initial number of the
device designated by n ; if the number of points referred to n exceeds the
range used by that device, only points within the valid range will be sent.
 When X10 = ON, the content of registers D0–D3 will be sent to the four registers
D20 to D23.
 If the designated bit devices KnX, KnY, and KnM are sent, S and D must
have the same number of nibbles, which implies that n must be identical.
 In order to prevent overlap between the transmission addresses of two operands,

which would cause confusion, make sure that the addresses designated by the
two operands have different sizes, as shown below:
When S > D , send in the order → →.
X10
D20 1 D19
BMOV D20 D19 K3 2
D21 D20
3
D22 D21
When S < D , send in the order → →.
X11
D10 3 D11
BMOV D10 D11 K3 2
D11 D12
1
D12 D13
16-63
API
BCD S D BIN to BCD transformation
18 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D BCD Continuous BCDP Pulse
S ＊＊＊＊＊＊

DBCD Continuous DBCDP Pulse
Notes on operand usage: none execution type execution type
Flag signal: none

 S : Data source. D : Destination of data movement.
 The content of data source S (BIN value, 0–9999) executes

BCD transformation and saves in D .
 Arithmetic elements S and D use the F device, it can only use 16-bit command.
 When X0 is ON, and the BIN value of D10 is transformed to BCD value, the digit is
saved in 4-bit element of K1Y0 (Y0–Y3).
X0
BCD D10 K1Y0
 If D10 = 001E (Hex) = 0030 (Decimal), the executed result will be Y0–Y3=0000
(BIN).
16-64
API
BIN S D BCD to BIN transformation
19 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D BIN Continuous BINP Pulse
S ＊＊＊＊＊＊

DBIN Continuous DBINP Pulse
Flag signal: none

 S : Data source. D : Transformation result.
 The content of data source S (BCD: 0–9,999) executes BIN transformation

and saves in D .
 Valid number range of the data source S: BCD (0–9,999), DBCD (0–99,999,999).
 When X0 is ON, and the BCD value of K1X20 is transformed to BIN value, the
result saves in D10.
X0
BIN K1X20 D10
 When PLC reads a BCD type switch-off from the outside, it has to use the BIN
command to transform the read data to BIN value, then saves the value into PLC.
16-65
API
ADD S1 S2 D BIN addition
20 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ADD Continuous ADDP Pulse
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
D ＊＊＊＊＊ DADD Continuous DADDP Pulse
Flag signal: M1020 Zero flag

M1021 Borrow flag
M1022 Carry flag
Please refer to the following
supplementary explanation
 S1 : Augend. S2 : Addend. D : Sum.
 Using two data sources: The result of adding S1 and S2 using the BIN
method will be stored in D .
 The highest bit of any data is symbolized as bit 0 indicating (positive) 1 indicating
(negative), enabling the use of algebraic addition operations. (for instance: 3+(-9)
= -6)
 Flag changes connected with the addition.
1. When calculation results are 0, the zero flag M1020 will be ON.
2. When calculation results are less than –32,768, the borrow flag M1021 will be
ON.
3. When calculation results are greater than 32,767, the carry flag M1022 will be
ON.
 16-bit BIN addition: When X0 = ON, the result of the content of addend D0 plus
the content of augend D10 will exist in the content of D20.
X0
ADD D0 D10 D20
 Relationship between flag actions and negative/positive numbers:
16-66
API
SUB S1 S2 D BIN subtraction
21 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D SUB Continuous SUBP Pulse
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
D ＊＊＊＊＊ Continuous Pulse
Notes on operand usage: none DSUB DSUBP
Flag signal: M1020 Zero flag

M1021 Borrow flag
M1022 Carry flag
Please refer to the following
supplementary explanation
 S1 : Minuend. S2 : Subtrahend. D : Difference.
 Using two data sources: The result of subtraction of S1 and S2 using the
BIN method is stored in D .
 The highest bit of any data is symbolized as bit 0 indicating (positive) 1 indicating
(negative), enabling the use of algebraic subtraction operations.
 Flag changes connected with subtraction.
1. When calculation results are 0, the zero flag M1020 will be ON.
2. When calculation results are less than –32,768, the borrow flag M1021 will be
ON.
3. When calculation results are greater than 32,767, the carry flag M1022 will be
ON.
 16-bit BIN subtraction: When X0 = ON, the content of D10 is subtracted from the
content of D0, and the difference is stored in D20.
X0
SUB D0 D10 D20
16-67
API
MUL S1 S2 D BIN multiplication
22 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D MUL Continuous MULP Pulse
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
D ＊＊＊＊＊ DMUL Continuous DMULP Pulse
Notes on operand usage: execution type execution type
The 16-bit command operand D will occupy 2 consecutive points
Flag signal: none
 S1 : Multiplicand. S2 : Multiplier. D : Product.
 Using two data sources: When S1 and S2 are multiplied using the BIN
method, the product is stored in D .
16-bit BIN multiplication operation:
When D is a bit device, K1~K4 can be designated as a hexadecimal number,

which will occupy 2 consecutive units.
 When 16-bit DO is multiplied by 16-bit D10, the result will be a 32-bit product; the
upper 16 bits will be stored in D21, and the lower 16 bits will be stored in D20.
Whether the bit at the farthest left is OFF or ON will indicate the sign of the result.
X0
MUL D0 D10 D20
MUL D0 D10 K8M0
16-68
API
DIV S1 S2 D BIN division
23 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D DIV Continuous DIVP Pulse
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
D ＊＊＊＊＊ DDIV Continuous DDIVP Pulse
Notes on operand usage: execution type execution type
The 16-bit command operand D will occupy 2 consecutive points
Flag signal: none
 S1 : Dividend. S2 : Divisor. D : Quotient and remainder.
 Using two data sources: The quotient and remainder will be stored in D when
S1 and S2 are subjected to division using the BIN method. The sign bit for
S1 , S2 and D must be kept in mind when performing a 16-bit operation.
16-bit BIN division:
If D is a bit device, K1–K4 can be designated 16 bits, which will occupy 2

consecutive units and yield the quotient and remainder.
 When X0 = ON, the quotient resulting from division of dividend D0 by divisor D10
will be placed in D20, and the remainder will be placed in D21. Whether the
highest bit is OFF or ON will indicate the sign of the result.
X0
DIV D0 D10 D20
DIV D0 D10 K4Y0
16-69
API
INC D BIN add one
24 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D INC Continuous INCP Pulse
D ＊＊＊＊＊ execution type execution type
DINC Continuous DINCP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 D : Destination device.
 If a command is not the pulse execution type, when the command is executed, the
program will add 1 to the content of device D for each scanning cycle.
 This command is ordinarily used as a pulse execution type command (INCP).
 During 16-bit operation, 32,767 +1 will change the value to -32,768. During 32 bit
operation, 2,147,483,647 +1 will change the value to -2,147,483,648.
 When X0 = OFF→ON, 1 is automatically added to the content of D0.
X0
INCP D0
16-70
API
DEC D BIN subtract one
25 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D DEC Continuous DECP Pulse
DDEC Continuous DDECP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 D : Destination device.
 If a command is not the pulse execution type, when the command is executed, the
program will add 1 to the content of device D for each scanning cycle.
 This command is ordinarily used as a pulse execution type command (DECP).
 During 16-bit operation, -32,768 -1 will change the value to 32,767. During 32 bit
operation, -2,147,483,648 -1 will change the value to 2,147,483,647.
 When X0 = OFF→ON, 1 is automatically subtracted from the content of D0.
X0
DECP D0
16-71
API
ROR D n Right rotation
30 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ROR Continuous RORP Pulse
n ＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DROR Continuous DRORP Pulse
Only K4 (16-bit) will be valid if the operand D is designated as KnY execution type execution type
or KnM.
n operand n=K1-K16 (16-bit) Flag signal: M1022 Carry flag
 D : Device to be rotated. n : Number of bits for one rotation.
 Rotate the device designated by D to the right n bits.

 This command is ordinarily used as a pulse execution type command (RORP).
 When X0 = OFF→ON, 4 of the 16 bits in D10 specify a right rotation; the content
of the bit indicated with * (see figure below) will be sent to the carry flag signal
M1022.
16-72
API
ROL D n Left rotation
31 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ROL Continuous ROLP Pulse
n ＊＊
DROL Continuous DROLP Pulse
Only K4 (16-bit) will be valid if the operand D is designated as KnY
or KnM.
n operand n=1 to 16 (16-bit) Flag signal: M1022 Carry flag
 D : Device to be rotated. n : Number of bits for one rotation.
 Rotates the device designated by D to the left n bits.

 This command is ordinarily used as a pulse execution type command (ROLP).
 When X0 = OFF→ON, 4 of the 16 bits in D10 specify a left rotation; the content of
the bit indicated with * (see figure below) will be sent to the carry flag signal
M1022.
16-73
API
ZRST D1 D2 Clear range
40 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ZRST Continuous ZRSTP Pulse
D1 ＊＊＊＊＊ execution type execution type
D2 ＊＊＊＊＊
Number of operand D1 operand ≤ number of operand D2 －－－－
Operands D1, D2 must designate the same type of device
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in Flag signal: none
series for the scope of device usage
 D1: Clear range's initial device. D2: Clear range's final device.
 When the number of operand D1 > number of operand D2, only the operand
designated by D2 will be cleared.
 When X0 is ON, auxiliary relays M300–M399 will be cleared and changed to Off.
 When X1 is ON, 16-bit counters C0–C127 will all be cleared. (Writes 0, and clears
and changes contact and coil to OFF).
 When X10 is ON, timer T0–T127 will all be cleared. (Writes 0, and clears and
changes contact and coil to OFF).
 When X3 is ON, the data in data registers D0–D100 will be cleared and set as 0.
X0
ZRST M300 M399
X1
ZRST C0 C127
X10
ZRST T0 T127
X3
ZRST D0 D100
 Devices can independently use the clear command (RST), such as bit device Y, M
and word device T, C, D.
X0
RST M0
RST T0
RST Y0
16-74
API
DECO S D n Decoder
41 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D DECO Continuous DECOP Pulse
S ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
D ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 32-bit command (13 STEP)

DDECO Continuous DDECOP Pulse
n ＊＊ execution type execution type
Notes on operand usage: none Flag signal: none
 S : Decoding source device. D : Device that saves the decoding result.

n
: Length of decoding bit.
 Decodes with the lower “n” bit, and saves the length of “2n” bit in D.
 This command usually uses pulse execution type command (DECOP).
 When D is the bit device, n = 1–8, when D is the word device, n = 1–4.
 When Dis the bit device, the valid range of n is 0< n ≤ 8. If n = 0 or n > 8, a fault
will occur.
 When n = 8, the maximum decoding will be 28 = 256 points.
 When M200 switches from Off to On, the content of X0–X2 is decoded to
M100–M107.
 If S = 3, M103 (the third digit starting from M100) = ON.
 When the command is executed, M200 turns to OFF. The ones that are decoded
and outputted act as usual.
M200
DE COP X0 M100 K3
X2 X1 X0
0 1 1
4 2 1
3
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
M107 M106 M105 M104 M103 M102 M101 M100
 When D is word device, the valid range of n is 0< n ≦4. If n = 0 or n > 4, the fault
occurs.
 When M200 switches from OFF to ON, the content of D10 (b2–b0) is decoded to
D20 (b7–b0). The unused digits (b15–b8) of D20 become 0.
 The lower 3 digits of D10 are decoded and saved in the lower 8 digits of D20, the
upper 8 digits are 0.
 When the command is executed, M200 turns to OFF. The ones that are decoded
and outputted act as usual.
M200
DE COP D10 D20 K3
16-75
API
ENCO S D n Encoder
42 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ENCO Continuous ENCOP Pulse
S ＊＊＊＊＊＊

DENCO Continuous DENCOP Pulse
 S : Encoding source device. D : Device that saves the encoding result.

n
: Length of encoding bit.
 Encodes the data of lower “2n” bit length from encoding source device S, and
saves the encoding result in D.
 If multiple digits of encoding source device are 1, the command will process the
first digit starting from high digit.
 This command usually uses pulse execution type command (ENCOP).
 When S is the bit device, n = 1–8, when S is the word device, n = 1–4.
 When S is the bit device, the valid range of n is 0< n ≤ 8. If n = 0 or n > 8, a fault
will occur.
 When X0 switches from OFF to ON, the content of 23 digit (M0–M7) is encoded
and saved in the lower 3 digits (b2–b0). The unused digits (b15–b3) in D0 become
0.
 When the command is executed, X0 turns to OFF. The data in D is unchanged.
X0
ENCOP M0 D0 K3
16-76
 When S is word device, the valid range of n is 0< n ≤ 4. If n = 0 or n > 4, the fault
occurs.
 When X0 switches from OFF to ON, 23 digit data of D10 (b0–b7) is encoded and
saved in the lower 3 digits (b2–b0) of D20. The unused digits (b15–b3) of D20
become 0. (b8–b15 in D10 are invalid data)
 When the command is executed, X0 turns to OFF. The data in D is unchanged.
M200
DE COP D10 D20 K3
API
SUM ON bit number
43 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D SUM Continuous SUMP Pulse
S ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
D ＊＊＊ 32-bit command (9 STEP)

DSUM Continuous DSUMP Pulse
Flag signal: M1020
 S : Source device. D : Destination of saving counter values.

 The total amount of all digits that is “1” in S will be saved in D.
 D will use 2 registers when use the 32-bit command.
 Arithmetic elements S and D use F device, and can only use 16-bit command.
 If there is no bit is ON, the flag signal M1020 will be ON.
 When M200 = ON, the total amount of content “1” digit in D0’s 16-bit command
will be saved in D2.
M200
S UM D0 D2
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 3
D0 D2
16-77
API
BON S D n ON bit judgement
44 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D BON Continuous BONP Pulse
S ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊

DBON Continuous DBONP Pulse
 S : Source device. D : Destination of saving judging result.: assignn

judged digit (numbering from 0)
 The status of specific digit from source device is shown on target position.
 Arithmetic element S uses F device, and can only use the 16-bit command.
 The valid range of arithmetic element n: n = 0–15 (16-bit), n = 0–31 (32-bit).
 When X0 = ON, if the 15th digit of D0 is “1”, M0 is ON. If it is “0”, M0 is OFF.

 When X0 turns to OFF, M0 remains previous status.
X0
BON D0 M0 K15
b15 b0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 M0=Off
D0
b15 b0
1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 M0=On
D0
16-78
API BIN whole number → binary decimal

FLT
49 D P transformation
Bit device Word device 16-bit command
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D FLT Continuous FLTP Pulse
S ＊＊＊＊＊ execution type execution type
D ＊＊＊＊＊
32-bit command (9steps)
Notes on operand usage: Please refer to the function specifications
DFLT Continuous DFLTP Pulse
table for each device in series for the scope of device usage
The operand D will occupy 2 consecutive points
Flag signal: none
 S: Transformation source device. D: Device storing transformation results.

 Transforms BIN whole number into a binary decimal value.
 When X11 is ON, converts the whole number of values corresponding to D0 and
D1 into floating point numbers, which are placed in D20 and D21.
16-79
API
ECMP Comparison of binary floating point numbers
110 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D －－－－
S1 ＊＊＊
S2 ＊＊＊ 32-bit command (13 STEP)
D ＊ DECMP Continuous DECMP Pulse
Notes on operand usage: execution type P execution type
The operand D occupies three consecutive points
 S1: Comparison of binary floating point numbers value 1. S2: Comparison of
binary floating point numbers value 2. D: Results of comparison, occupies 3
consecutive points.
 When binary floating point number 1 is compared with comparative binary
floating point number 2, the result of comparison (>, =, <) will be expressed in D.
 If the source operand S1 or S2 designates a constant K or H, the command will
transform the constant to a binary floating-point number for the purpose of
comparison.
 When the designated device is M10, it will automatically occupy M10–M12.
 When X0 = ON, the DECMP command executes, and one of M10–M12 will be
ON. When X0 = OFF, the DECMP command will not execute, and M10–M12 will
remain in the X0 = OFF state.
 If results in the form of ≥, ≤, or ≠ are needed, they can be obtained by series and
parallel connection of M10–M12.
 Please use the RST or ZRST command to clear the result.
16-80
API
EZCP Comparison of binary floating point number range
111 D P
Bit device Word device
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D 16-bit command
S1 ＊＊＊－－－－
S2 ＊＊＊
S ＊＊＊
DEZCP Continuous DEZCP Pulse
D ＊＊ execution type P execution type
The operand D occupies three consecutive points Flag signal: none
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in
 S1: Lower limit of binary floating point number in range comparison. S2: Upper
limit of binary floating point number in range comparison. S: Comparison of
binary floating point numerical values. D: Results of comparison, occupies 3
consecutive points.
 Comparison of binary floating point numerical value S with binary floating point
number lower limit value S1 and binary floating point number upper limit value S2;
the results of comparison are expressed in D.
transform the constant to a binary floating-point number for the purpose of
comparison.
 When the lower limit binary floating point number S1 is greater than the upper
limit binary floating point number S2, a command will be issued to perform
comparison with the upper and lower limits using the binary floating point number
lower limit value S1.
 When the designated device is M0, it will automatically occupy M0–M2.
 When X0 = ON, the DEZCP command will be executed, and one of M0–M2 will
be ON. When X0 = OFF, the EZCP command will not execute, and M0–M2 will
continue in the X0 = OFF state.
 Please use the RST or ZRST command to clear the result.
16-81
API
RAD Angle → Radian
116 D P
S ＊＊＊
D ＊ 32-bit command (9 STEP)
Notes on operand usage: DRAD Continuous DRADP Pulse
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in execution type execution type
Flag signal: none
 S: data source (angle). D: result of transformation (radian).

 Uses the following formula to convert angles to radians.
 Radian = Angle × (π/180)
 When X0 = ON, the angle of the designated binary floating point number (D1,
D0) will be converted to radians and stored in (D11, D10), with the content
consisting of a binary floating point number.
X0
DRAD D0 D10
16-82
API
DEG Radian → Angle
117 D P
S ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DDEG Continuous DDEGP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: data source (radian). D: results of transformation (angle).

 Uses the following formula to convert radians to an angle.
 Angle = Radian × (180/π)
 When X0 = ON, angle of the designated binary floating point number (D1, D0) in
radians will be converted to an angle and stored in (D11, D10), with the content
consisting of a binary floating point number.
X0
DDEG D0 D10
16-83
API
EADD Adding binary floating point numbers
120 D P
S1 ＊＊＊
D ＊ DEADD Continuous DEADDP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S1: augend. S2: addend. D: sum.
 When the content of the register designated by S2 is added to the content of the
register designated by S1, and the result is stored in the register designated by D.
Addition is performed entirely using binary floating-point numbers.
transform that constant into a binary floating point number for use in addition.
 In the situation when S1 and S2 designate identical register numbers, if a
"continuous execution" command is employed, when conditional contact is ON,
the register will perform addition once during each scan. Pulse execution type
commands (DEADDP) are generally used under ordinary circumstances.
 When X0 = ON, a binary floating point number (D1, D0) will be added to a binary
floating point number (D3, D2), and the results stored in (D11, D10).
X0
DEADD D0 D2 D10
 When X2 = ON, a binary floating point number (D11, D10) will be added to K1234
(which has been automatically converted to a binary floating-point number), and
the results stored in (D21, D20).
X2
DEADD D10 K1234 D20
16-84
API
ESUB Subtraction of binary floating point numbers
121 D P
S1 ＊＊＊
D ＊ DESUB Continuous DESUBP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S1: minuend. S2: subtrahend. D: difference.
 When the content of the register designated by S2 is subtracted from the content
of the register designated by S1, the difference will be stored in the register
designated by D; subtraction is performed entirely using binary floating-point
numbers.
transform that constant into a binary floating point number for use in subtraction.
"continuous execution" command is employed, when conditional contact is ON,
the register will perform addition once during each scan. Pulse execution type
commands (DESUBP) are generally used under ordinary circumstances.
 When X0 = ON, a binary floating point number (D1, D0) will be subtracted to a
binary floating point number (D3, D2), and the results stored in (D11, D10).
X0
DESUB D0 D2 D10
 When X2 = ON, the binary floating point number (D1, D0) will be subtracted from
K1234 (which has been automatically converted to a binary floating-point
number), and the results stored in (D11, D10).
X2
DESUB K1234 D0 D10
16-85
API
EMUL Multiplication of binary floating point numbers
122 D P
S1 ＊＊＊
D ＊ DEMUL Continuous DEMULP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S1: multiplicand. S2: multiplier. D: product.
 When the content of the register designated by S1 is multiplied by the content of
the register designated by S2, the product will be stored in the register
designated by D; multiplication is performed entirely using binary floating-point
numbers.
transform that constant into a binary floating point number for use in
multiplication.
"continuous execution" command is employed, when conditional contact is On,
the register will perform multiplication once during each scan. Pulse execution
type commands (DEMULP) are generally used under ordinary circumstances.
 When X1 = ON, the binary floating point number (D1, D0) will be multiplied by the
binary floating point number (D11, D10), and the product will be stored in the
register designated by (D21, D20).
X1
DEMUL D0 D10 D20
 When X2 = ON, the binary floating point number (D1, D0) will be multiplied from
K1234 (which has been automatically converted to a binary floating-point
X2
DEMUL K1234 D0 D10
16-86
API
EDIV Division of binary floating point numbers
123 D P
S1 ＊＊＊
D ＊ DEDIV Continuous DEDIVP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S1: dividend. S2: divisor. D: quotient and remainder.
 When the content of the register designated by S1 is divided by the content of the
register designated by S2, the quotient will be stored in the register designated
by D; division is performed entirely using binary floating-point numbers.
transform that constant into a binary floating point number for use in division.
 When X1 = ON, the binary floating point number (D1, D0) will be divided by the
binary floating point number (D11, D10), and the quotient stored in the register
designated by (D21, D20).
X1
DEDIV D0 D10 D20
 When X2 = ON, the binary floating point number (D1, D0) will be divided by
K1,234 (which has been automatically converted to a binary floating-point
X2
DEDIV D0 K1234 D10
16-87
API
EXP Binary floating point number obtain exponent
124 D P
S ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DEXP Continuous DEXPP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: operation source device. D: operation results device.

 Taking e = 2.71828 as a base, S is the exponent in the EXP operation.
 [ D +1，D ] = EXP [ S +1，S ]
 Valid regardless of whether the content of S has a positive or negative value. The
designated register D must have a 32-bit data format. This operation is
performed using floating-point numbers, and S must therefore be converted to a
floating point number.
 Content of operand D = e S ; e = 2.71828, S is the designated source data
 When M0 is ON, the value of (D1, D0) will be converted to a binary floating point
number, which will be stored in register (D11, D10).
 When M1 is ON, the EXP operation is performed on the exponent of (D11, D10);
its value is a binary floating point number stored in register (D21, D20).
M0
DFLT D0 D10
M1
DEXP D10 D20
16-88
API
LN Binary floating point number obtain logarithm
125 D P
S ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DLN Continuous DLNP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: operation source device. D: operation results device.

 Taking e = 2.71828 as a base, S is the exponent in the EXP operation.
 [ D +1，D ] = EXP [ S +1，S ]
 Valid regardless of whether the content of S has a positive or negative value. The
designated register D must have a 32-bit data format. This operation is performed
using floating-point numbers, and S must therefore be converted to a floating
point number.
 Content of operand D = e S ; e = 2.71828，S is the designated source data
 When M0 is ON, the value of (D1, D0) will be converted to a binary floating point
number, which will be stored in register (D11, D10).
 When M1 is ON, the EXP operation is performed on the exponent of (D11, D10);
its value is a binary floating point number stored in register (D21, D20).
M0
DFLT D0 D10
M1
DLN D10 D20
16-89
API
ESQR Binary floating point number find square root
127 D P
S ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DESQR Continuous DESQR Pulse
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in execution type P execution type
Flag signal: none
 S: source device for which square root is desired D: result of finding square root.
 When the square root is taken of the content of the register designated by S, the
result is temporarily stored in the register designated by D. Taking square roots
is performed entirely using binary floating-point numbers.
 If the source operand S refers to a constant K or H, the command will transform
that constant into a binary floating point number for use in the operation.
 When X0 = ON, the square root is taken of the binary floating point number (D1,
D0), and the result is stored in the register designated by (D11, D10).
X0
DESQR D0 D10
 When X2 = ON, the square root is taken of K1,234 (which has been
automatically converted to a binary floating-point number), and the results
stored in (D11, D10).
X2
DESQR K1234 D10
16-90
API Binary floating point number → BIN whole

INT
129 D P number transformation
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D INT Continuous INTP Pulse
S ＊ execution type execution type
D ＊
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in DINT Continuous DINTP Pulse
series for the scope of device usage execution type execution type
Flag signal: none
 S: the source device to be transformed. D: results of transformation.

 The content of the register designated by S is transformed from a binary floating
point number format into a BIN whole number, and is temporarily stored in D. The
BIN whole number floating point number will be discarded.
 The action of this command is the opposite of that of command API 49 (FLT).
 When X0 = ON, the binary floating point number (D1, D0) is transformed into a
BIN whole number, and the result is stored in (D10); the BIN whole number
floating point number will be discarded.
X0
DINT D0 D10
16-91
API
SIN Binary floating point number SIN operation
130 D P
S ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DSIN Continuous DSINP Pulse
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in series execution type execution type
for the scope of device usage
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source value. D: the SIN value result.

 S is the designated source in radians.
 The value in radians (RAD) is equal to (angle ×π/180).
 The SIN obtained from the source value designated by S is stored in D.
The following figure displays the relationship between the arc and SIN results:
 When X0 = ON, the SIN value of the designated binary floating point number (D1,
D0) in radians (RAD) will be stored in (D11, D10), with the content consisting of a
binary floating point number.
X0
DSIN D0 D10
16-92
API
COS Binary floating point number COS operation
131 D P
S ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DCOS Continuous DCOSP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source value. D: the COS value result.

 The source designated by S can be given as radians or an angle; this is decided
by flag M1018.
 When M1018 = OFF, the operation is in radians mode, where the radians (RAD)
value is equal to (angle × π/180).
 When M1018 = ON, the operation is in the angle mode, where the angular range is
0° ≤ angle < 360°.
 When calculation results yield 0, M1020 = ON.
 The COS obtained from the source value designated by S is stored in D.
 When X0 = ON, the COS value of the designated binary floating point number (D1,
D0) in radians will be stored in (D11, D10), with the content consisting of a binary
X0
DCOS D0 D10
16-93
API
TAN Binary floating point number TAN operation
132 D P
S ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DTAN Continuous DTANP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source value. D: the TAN value result.

 The source designated by S can be given as radians or an angle; this is decided by
flag M1018.
 When M1018 = OFF, the operation is in radians mode, where the radians (RAD)
value is equal to (angle ×π/180).
 When M1018 = ON, the operation is in the angle mode, where the angular range is
0° ≤ angle < 360°.
 When calculation results yield 0, M1020 = ON.
 The TAN obtained from the source value designated by S is stored in D.
 When X0 = ON, the TAN value of the designated binary floating point number (D1,
D0) in radians (RAD) will be stored in (D11, D10), with the content consisting of a
X0
DTAN D0 D10
16-94
API
ASIN Binary floating point number ASIN operation
133 D P
S ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DASIN Continuous DASINP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source (binary floating point number). D: the ASIN value result.
 ASIN value = sin-1
The figure below shows the relationship between input data and result:
 When X0 = ON, the ASIN value obtained from the designated binary floating point
number (D1, D0) will be stored in (D11, D10), with the content consisting of a
X0
DASIN D0 D10
16-95
API
ACOS Binary floating point number ACOS operation
134 D P
S ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DACOS Continuous DACOS Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source (binary floating point number). D: the ACOS value result.
 ACOS value = cos-1
 When X0 = ON, the ACOS value obtained from the designated binary floating
point number (D1, D0) will be stored in (D11, D10), with the content consisting of a
X0
DACOS D0 D10
16-96
API
ATAN Binary floating point number ATAN operation
135 D P
S ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DATAN Continuous DATANP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source (binary floating point number). D: the ATAN value result.
 ATAN value = tan-1
 When X0 = ON, the TAN value obtained from the designated binary floating point
X0
DATAN D0 D10
16-97
API
SINH Binary floating point number SINH operation
136 D P
S ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DSINH Continuous DSINHP Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source (binary floating point number). D: the SINH value result.
 SINH value = (es-e-s)/2
 When X0 = ON, the SINH value obtained from the designated binary floating point
X0
DSINH D0 D10
16-98
API
COSH Binary floating point number COSH operation
137 D P
S ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DCOSH Continuous DCOSH Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source (binary floating point number). D: the COSH value result.
 COSH value = (es+e-s)/2
 When X0 = ON, the COSH value obtained from the designated binary floating point
X0
DCOSH D0 D10
16-99
API
TANH Binary floating point number TANH operation
138 D P
S ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: DTANH Continuous DTANH Pulse
Flag signal: none
 S: the designated source (binary floating point number). D: the TANH value result.
 tanh value = (es-e-s)/(es+e-s)
 When X0 = ON, the TANH value obtained from the designated binary floating point
number (D1, D0) will be stored in (D11, D10), with the content consisting of a binary
X0
DTANH D0 D10
16-100
API
SWAP Exchange the up/down 8 bits
147 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D SWAP Continuous SWAPP Pulse execution
execution type type
S ＊＊＊＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: none 32-bit command (5 STEP)
DSWAP Continuous DSWAPP Pulse execution
execution type type
Flag signal: none
 S : The device that going to exchange its up/down 8 bits.

 When using 16-bit command, the upper 8-bit and lower 8-bit exchange.
 When using 32-bit command, the contents of upper 8-bit and lower 8-bit of the 2
registers exchange.
 This command usually uses pulse execution type (SWAPP, DSWAPP)
16-101
API
MODRW Modbus data read/write
150 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D MODRW Continuous MODRW Pulse
S1 ＊＊＊ execution type P execution type
S2 ＊＊＊
S3 ＊＊＊ 32-bit command
－－－－
S ＊
n ＊＊＊ Flag signal: M1077 M1078 M1079
 S1: online device address. S2: communications function code. S3: address of
data to read/write. S: register for data to be read/written is stored. N: length of data
to be read/written.
 COM1 must be defined as controlled by the PLC (set P9-31 = -12) before using
this command, and the corresponding communications speed and format must
also be set (set P09-01 and P09-04). S2: communications function code.
Currently only supports the following function code; the remaining function code
cannot be executed.
Function Description
H 02 Input read
H 03 Read word
H 06 Write single word
H 0F Write multiple coils
H10 Write single word
 After executing this command, M1077, M1078 and M1079 will be immediately
changed to 0.
 As an example, when CP2000 must control another converter and PLC, if the
converter has a station number of 10 and the PLC has a station number of 20, see
the following example:
Control slave device converter
MODRW command
Seria S1 S2 S3 S4 n
Example
l No.
Function
Node ID Address Register Length
code
Reads 4 sets of data comprising the
converter slave device parameters
1 K10 H3 H100 D0 K4
P01-00 to P01-03, and saves the read
data in D0 to D3
converter slave device addresses
2 K10 H3 H2100 D5 K3
H2100 to H2102, and saves the read
data in D5 to D7
converter slave device parameters
3 K10 H10 H500 D10 K3
P05-00 to P05-03, and writes the
values as D10 to D12
Writes 2 sets of data comprising the
converter slave device addresses
4 K10 H10 H2000 D15 K2
H2000 to H2001, and writes the values
as D15 to D16
16-102
PLC controlling slave device

MODRW command
Serial Example S1 S2 S3 S4 n
No. Node Functio Addres Registe
Length:
ID n code s r
1 PLC slave device's X0 to X3 state, and K20 H2 H400 D0 K4
saves the read data in bits 0 to 3 of D0
2 PLC slave device's Y0 to Y3 state, and K20 H2 H500 D1 K4
3 PLC slave device's M0 to M3 state, and K20 H2 H800 D2 K4
4 PLC slave device's T0 to T3 state, and K20 H2 H600 D3 K4
5 PLC slave device's C0 to C3 state, and K20 H2 HE00 D4 K4
PLC slave device's T0 to T3 count
6 K20 H3 H600 D10 K4
value, and saves the read data of D10
to D13
PLC slave device's C0 to C3 count
7 K20 H3 HE00 D20 K4
to D23
PLC slave device's D0 to D3 count
8 K20 H3 H1000 D30 K4
to D33
Writes 4 sets of the PLC slave device's
9 Y0 to Y3 state, and writes the values as K20 HF H500 D1 K4
bits 0 to 3 of D1
10 M0 to M3 state, and writes the values K20 HF H800 D2 K4
as bits 0 to 3 of D2
11 T0 to T3 state, and writes the values as K20 HF H600 D3 K4
bits 0 to 3 of D3
12 C0 to C3 state, and writes the values K20 HF HE00 D4 K4
as bits 0 to 3 of D4
13 T0 to T3 state, and writes the values of K20 H10 H600 D10 K4
D10 to D13
14 C0 to C3 state, and writes the values of K20 H10 HE00 D20 K4
D20 to D23
15 D0 to D3 state, and writes the values of K20 H10 H1000 D30 K4
D30 to D33
16-103
 Will trigger M0 ON when the PLC begins to operate, and sends instruction to
execute one MODRW command.
 After receiving the slave device's response, if the command is correct, it will
execute one ROL command, which will cause M1 to be ON.
 After receiving the slave device's response, will trigger M50 = 1 after a delay of 10
PLC scanning cycles, and then execute one MODRW command.
 After again receiving the slave device's response, if the command is correct, it will
execute one ROL command, and M2 will change to ON at this time (and M2 can
be defined as a repeat of M); K4M0 will change to K1, and only M0 will remain 1.
Transmission can proceed in a continuous cycle. If you wish to add a command,
merely add the desired command in the empty frame, and change repeat M to
Mn+1.
16-104
API
TCMP Comparison of calendar data
160 P
Bit device Word device
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D 16-bit command (11 STEP)
S1 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ TCMP Continuous TCMPP Pulse
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
S3 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ 32-bit command
S ＊＊＊－－－－
D ＊＊
Notes on operand usage: Flag signal: none
 S1: Sets the hours of the comparison time, setting range is "K0–K23." S2: Sets the
minutes of the comparison time, setting range is "K0–K59." S3: Sets the seconds of
the comparison time, setting range is "K0–K59." S: current calendar time. D:
Results of comparison.
 Compares the time in hours, minutes, and seconds set in S1–S3 with the current
calendar time in hours, minutes, and seconds, with the results of comparison
expressed in D.
 S The hour content of the current calendar time is "K0–K23." S +1 comprises the
minutes of the current calendar time, and consists of "K0–K59." S +2 comprises the
seconds of the current calendar time, and consists of "K0–K59."
 The current calendar time designated by S is usually compared using the TCMP
command after using the TRD command to read the current calendar time. If the
content value of S exceeds the range, this is considered an operating error, the
command will not execute, and M1068 = ON.
 When X10 = ON, the command will execute, and the current calendar time in
D20–D22 will be compared with the preset value of 12:20:45; the results will be
displayed in M10–M12. When X10 ON→OFF, the command will not be executed,
but the ON/OFF status prior to M10–M12 will be maintained.
 If results in the form of ≥, ≤, or ≠ are needed, they can be obtained by series and
parallel connection of M10–M12.
16-105
API
TZCP Comparison of calendar data
161 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D TZCP Continuous TZCPP Pulse
S1 ＊＊＊ execution type execution type
S2 ＊＊＊
S ＊＊＊ 32-bit command
D ＊＊－－－－
 S1: Sets the lower limit of the comparison time. S2: Sets the upper limit of the
comparison time. S: current calendar time. D: Results of comparison.
 Performs range comparison by comparing the hours, minutes, and seconds of the
current calendar time designated by S with the lower limit of the comparison time
set as S1 and the upper limit of the comparison time set as S2, and expresses the
results of comparison in D.
 S1、S1 +1、S1 +2: Sets the hours, minutes, and seconds of the lower limit of the
comparison time.
 S2、S2 +1、S2 +2: Sets the hours, minutes, and seconds of the upper limit of the
comparison time.
 S、S +1、S +2: The hours, minutes, and seconds of the current calendar time
 The D0 designated by the S listed in this program is usually obtained by

comparison using the TZCP command after using the TRD command in advance to
read the current calendar time. If the value of S1, S2, or S exceeds the range, this is
considered an operating error, the command will not execute, and M1068 = ON.
 When the current time S is less than the lower limit value S1 and S is less than the
upper limit value S2, D will be ON. When the current time S is greater than the lower
limit value S1 and S is greater than the upper limit value S2, D +2 will be ON; D +1
will be ON under other conditions.
 When X10 = ON, the TZCP command executes, and one of M10-M12 will be ON.
When X10 = OFF, the TZCP command will not execute, and M10-M12 will remain
in the X10 = OFF state.
16-106
API
TADD Calendar data addition
162 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D TADD Continuous TADDP Pulse
S2 ＊＊＊
32-bit command
D ＊＊＊
－－－－
series for the scope of device usage  Flag signal: M1020 Zero flag
M1022 Carry flag
M1068 Calendar error
 S1: time addend. S2: time augend. D: time sum.
 The calendar data in hours, minutes, and seconds designated by S2 is added to the
calendar data in hours, minutes, and seconds designated by S1, and the result is
stored as hours, minutes, and seconds in the register designated by D.
 If the value of S1 or S2 exceeds the range, this is considered an operating error, the
command will not execute, M1067, M1068 = ON, and D1067 will record the error
code 0E1A (HEX).
 If the results of addition are greater than or equal to 24 hours, carry flag M1022 =
ON, and D will display the results of addition minus 24 hours.
 If the results of addition are equal to 0 (0 hours, 0 minutes, 0 seconds), zero flag
M1020 = ON.
 When X10 = ON, the TADD command will be executed, and the calendar data in
hours, minutes, and seconds designated by D0 to D2 will be added to the calendar
data in hours, minutes, and seconds designated by D10 to D12, and the results are
stored as a total number of hours, minutes, and seconds in the registers
designated by D20 to D22.
X10
TADD D0 D10 D20
16-107
API
TSUB Calendar data subtraction
163 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D TSUB Continuous TSUBP Pulse
S2 ＊＊＊
32-bit command
D ＊＊＊
－－－－
series for the scope of device usage  Flag signal: M1020 Zero flag
M1022 Carry flag
M1068 Calendar error
 S1: time minuend. S2: time augend. D: time sum.
 Subtracts the calendar data in hours, minutes, and seconds designated by S2 from
the calendar data in hours, minutes, and seconds designated by S1, and the result
is temporarily stored as hours, minutes, and seconds in the register designated by
D.
 If the value of S1 or S2 exceeds the range, this is considered an operating error, the
command will not execute, M1067, M1068 = ON, and D1067 will record the error
code 0E1A (HEX).
 If subtraction results in a negative number, borrow flag M1021 = ON, and the result
of that negative number plus 24 hours will be displayed in the register designated
by D.
 If the results of subtraction are equal to 0 (0 hours, 0 minutes, 0 seconds), zero flag
M1020 = ON.
 When X10 = ON, the TADD command will be executed, and the calendar data in
hours, minutes, and seconds designated by D10 to D12 will be subtracted from the
calendar data in hours, minutes, and seconds designated by D0 to D2, and the
results are stored as a total number of hours, minutes, and seconds in the registers
designated by D20 to D22.
X10
TSUB D0 D10 D20
16-108
API
TRD Calendar data read
166 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D TRD Continuous TRDP Pulse
D ＊＊＊ execution type execution type
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in 32-bit command
series for the scope of device usage －－－－
 Flag signal: none

 S1: time minuend. S2: time augend. D: time sum.
 D: device used to store the current calendar time after reading.
 The EH/EH2/SV/EH3/SV2/SA/SX/SC main units have a built-in calendar clock, and
the clock provides seven sets of data comprising year, week, month, day, hour,
minute, and second stored in D1063 to D1069. The TRD command function allows
program designers to directly read the current calendar time into the designated
seven registers.
 D1063 only reads the two right digits of the Western calendar year.
 When X0 = ON, the current calendar time is read into the designated registers D0
to D6.
 In D1064, 1 indicates Monday, 2 indicates Tuesday, and so on, with and 7
indicating Sunday.
X0
TRD D0
Special General
Item Content Item
D D
Year Year
D1063 00–99 D0
(Western) (Western)
D1064 Weeks 1–7 D1 Weeks
D1065 Month 1–12 D2 Month
D1066 Day 1–31 D3 Day
D1067 Hour 0–23 D4 Hour
D1068 Minute 0–59 D5 Minute
D1069 Second 0–59 D6 Second
16-109
API
GRY BIN→GRAY code transformation
170 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D GRY Continuous GRYP Pulse
D ＊＊＊＊＊
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in DGRY Continuous DGRYP Pulse

 S: source device. D: device storing GRAY code.
 Transforms the content value (BIN value) of the device designated by S to GRAY
code, which is stored in the device designated by D.
 The valid range of S is as shown below; if this range is exceeded, it will be
considered an error, and the command will not execute.
16-bit command: 0–32,767
 32-bit command: 0–2,147,483,647
 When X0 = ON, the constant K6513 will be transformed to GRAY code and stored
in D0.
16-110
API
GBIN GRAY code →BIN transformation
171 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D GBIN Continuous GBINP Pulse
D ＊＊＊＊＊
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in DGBIN Continuous DGBINP Pulse

 S: source device used to store GRAY code. D: device used to store BIN value after
transformation.
 The GRAY code corresponding to the value of the device designated by S is
transformed into a BIN value, which is stored in the device designated by D.
 This command will transform the value of the absolute position encoder connected
with the PLC's input and (this encoder usually has an output value in the form of
GRAY code) into a BIN value, which is stored in the designated register.
 The valid range of S is as shown below; if this range is exceeded, it will be
considered an error, and the command will not execute.
 16-bit command: 0–32,767
 32-bit command: 0–2,147,483,647
 When X20 = ON, the GRAY code of the absolute position encoder connected with
input points X0 to X17 will be transformed into BIN value and stored in D10.
X20
GBIN K4X0 D10
X17 K4X0 X0
GRAY CODE 6513 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
b15 b0
H1971=K6513 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
16-111
API
215– LD# S1 S2 Contact form logical operation LD#
217 D

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D LD# Continuous －－
S1 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊ execution type
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: ＃：&、|、^ DLD# Continuous －－
Please refer to the function specifications table for each device in execution type
series for the range of device usage
Flag signal: none
 S1: data source device 1. S2: data source device 2.

 This command performs comparison of the content of S1 and S2; when the result
of comparison is not 0, this command will be activated, but this command will not
be activated when the result of comparison is 0.
 The LD#This command can be used while directly connected with the busbar
16-bit 32-bit Conditions for
API No. Conditions for inactivation
commands commands activation
215 LD& DLD& S1 & S2 0 S1 & S2 0

216 LD| DLD| S1 | S2 0 S1 | S2 0
217 LD^ DLD^ S1 ^ S2 0 S1 ^ S2 0
 &: logical AND operation.
 |: logical OR operation.
 ^: logical XOR operation.
 When the content of C0 and C10 is subjected to the logical AND operation, and
the result is not equal to 0, Y10 = ON.
 When the content of D200 and D300 is subjected to the logical OR operation, and
the result is not equal to 0, and X1 = ON, Y11 = ON and remains in that state.
LD & C0 C10 Y10
X1
LD I D200 D300 SET Y11
16-112
API
218– AND# S1 S2 Contact form logical operation AND#
220 D

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D AND# Continuous －－
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: ＃：&、|、^ DAND# Continuous －－
Flag signal: none

 The AND# command is an operation command in series with the contact.
218 AND& DAND& S1 & S2 0 S1 & S2 0

219 AND| DAND| S1 | S2 0 S1 | S2 0
220 AND^ DAND^ S1 ^ S2 0 S1 ^ S2 0
 When X0 = ON and the content of C0 and C10 is subjected to the logical
AND operation, and the result is not equal to 0, Y10 = ON.
 When X1 = OFF and D10 and D0 is subjected to the logical OR operation, and the
result is not equal to 0, Y11 = ON and remains in that state.
 When X2 = ON and the content of the 32-bit register D200 (D201) and 32-bit
register D100 (D101) is subjected to the logical XOR operation, and the result is
not equal to 0 or M3 = ON, M50 = ON.
X0
AND & C0 C10 Y10
X1
AND I D10 D0 SET Y11
X2
DAND ^ D200 D100 M50
M3
16-113
API
221– OR# S1 S2 Contact form logical operation OR#
223 D

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D OR# Continuous －－
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: ＃：&、|、^ DOR# Continuous －－
Flag signal: none

 The OR# command is an operation command in series with the contact.
221 OR& DOR& S1 & S2 0 S1 & S2 0
222 OR| DOR| S1 | S2 0 S1 | S2 0
223 OR^ DOR^ S1 ^ S2 0 S1 ^ S2 0
 When X1 = ON or the content of C0 and C10 is subjected to the logical
AND operation, and the result is not equal to 0, Y0 = ON.
 When X2 and M30 are both equal to On, or the content of 32-bit register D10
(D11) and 32-bit register D20 (D21) is subjected to the logical OR operation, and
the result is not equal to 0, or the content of the 32-bit counter C235 and the 32-bit
register D200 (D201) is subjected to the logical XOR operation, and the result is
not equal to 0, M60 = ON.
X1
Y0
OR & C0 C10
X2 M30
M60
DOR I D10 D20
DOR ^ D25 D200
16-114
API
224– LD※ S1 S2 Contact form compare LD*
230 D

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D LD※ Continuous －－
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: ※：=、>、<、<>、≦、≧
DLD※ Continuous －－
Flag signal: none

 This command compares the content of S1 and S2. Taking API 224 (LD=) as an
example, this command will be activated when the result of comparison is
"equal," and will not be activated when the result is "unequal."
 The LD* can be used while directly connected with the busbar
Conditions for Conditions for
API No. 16-bit commands 32-bit commands
activation inactivation
224 LD＝ DLD＝ S1 ＝ S2 S1 ≠ S2
225 LD＞ DLD＞ S1 ＞ S2 S1 ≦ S2
226 LD＜ DLD＜ S1 ＜ S2 S1 ≧ S2
228 LD＜＞ DLD＜＞ S1 ≠ S2 S1 ＝ S2
229 LD＜＝ DLD＜＝ S1 ≦ S2 S1 ＞ S2
230 LD＞＝ DLD＞＝ S1 ≧ S2 S1 ＜ S2
 When the content of C10 is equal to K200, Y10 = ON.
 When the content of D200 is greater than K-30, and X1 = ON, Y11 = ON and
remains in that state.
LD= K200 C10 Y10
X1
LD> D200 K-30 SET Y11
DLD> K678493 C20 M50
M3
16-115
API
232– AND※ S1 S2 Contact form compare AND*
238 D

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D AND※ Continuous －－
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
DAND※ Continuous －－
Flag signal: none

 This command compares the content of S1 and S2. Taking API 232 (AND=) as an
example, when the result of comparison is equal, this command will be activated;
when the result of comparison is unequal, this command will not be activated.
 The AND* command is a comparison command in series with a contact.
232 AND＝ DAND＝ S1 ＝ S2 S1 ≠ S2
233 AND＞ DAND＞ S1 ＞ S2 S1 ≦ S2
234 AND＜ DAND＜ S1 ＜ S2 S1 ≧ S2
236 AND＜＞ DAND＜＞ S1 ≠ S2 S1 ＝ S2
237 AND＜＝ DAND＜＝ S1 ≦ S2 S1 ＞ S2
238 AND＞＝ DAND＞＝ S1 ≧ S2 S1 ＜ S2
 When X0 = ON and the current value of C10 is also equal to K200, Y10 = ON.
 When X1 = OFF and the content of register D0 is not equal to K-10, Y11 = ON and
 When X2 = ON and the content of the 32-bit register D0 (D11) is less than
678,493, or M3 = ON, M50 = ON.
X0
AND= K200 C10 Y10
X1
AND<> K-10 D0 SET Y11
X2
DAND> K678493 D10 M50
M3
16-116
API
240– OR※ S1 S2 Contact form compare OR*
246 D

X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D OR※ Continuous －－
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
DOR※ Continuous －－
Flag signal: none

 This command compares the content of S1 and S2. Taking API 240 (OR=) as an
example, when the result of comparison is equal, this command will be activated;
when the result of comparison is unequal, this command will not be activated.
 The OR* command is a compare command in parallel with a contact.
240 OR＝ DOR＝ S1 ＝ S2 S1 ≠ S2
241 OR＞ DOR＞ S1 ＞ S2 S1 ≦ S2
242 OR＜ DOR＜ S1 ＜ S2 S1 ≧ S2
244 OR＜＞ DOR＜＞ S1 ≠ S2 S1 ＝ S2
245 OR＜＝ DOR＜＝ S1 ≦ S2 S1 ＞ S2
246 OR＞＝ DOR＞＝ S1 ≧ S2 S1 ＜ S2
 When X0 = ON and the current value of C10 is also equal to K200, Y10 = ON.
 When X1 = OFF and the content of register D0 is not equal to K-10, Y11 = ON and
 When X2 = ON and the content of the 32-bit register D0 (D11) is less than
678,493, or M3 = ON, M50 = ON.
X1
Y0
OR>= K200 C10
X2 M30
M60
DOR>= D100 K100000
16-117
API
275– FLD※ S1 S2 Floating point number contact form compare LD*
280

S1 ＊＊＊
S2 ＊＊＊
FLD※ Continuous －－
Notes on operand usage: ＃：&、|、^
execution type
series for the scope of device usage Flag signal: none

 This command compares the content of S1 and S2. Taking "FLD=" as an example,
if the result of comparison is "equal," this command will be activated; but it will not
be activated when the result is "unequal."
 The FLD* command can directly input floating point numerical values (for
instance: F1.2) to the S1, S2 operands, or store floating-point numbers in register
D for use in operations.
 This command can be used while directly connected with the busbar
API No. 32-bit commands
275 FLD＝ S1 ＝ S2 S1 ≠ S2
276 FLD＞ S1 ＞ S2 S1 ≦ S2
277 FLD＜ S1 ＜ S2 S1 ≧ S2
278 FLD＜＞ S1 ≠ S2 S1 ＝ S2
279 FLD＜＝ S1 ≦ S2 S1 ＞ S2
280 FLD＞＝ S1 ≧ S2 S1 ＜ S2

 When the floating point number of register D200 (D201) is less than or equal
to F1.2, and X1 activated, contact Y21 will be activated and remain in that state.
X1
FLD<= D200 F1.2 SET Y21
16-118
API
281– FAND※ S1 S2 Floating point number contact form compare AND*
286

S1 ＊＊＊
S2 ＊＊＊
FAND※ Continuous －－
execution type

 This command compares the content of S1 and S2. Taking "FAND=" as an
example, if the result of comparison is "equal," this command will be activated;
but it will not be activated when the result is "unequal."
 The FAND* command can directly input floating point numerical values (for
281 FAND＝ S1 ＝ S2 S1 ≠ S2
282 FAND＞ S1 ＞ S2 S1 ≦ S2
283 FAND＜ S1 ＜ S2 S1 ≧ S2
284 FAND＜＞ S1 ≠ S2 S1 ＝ S2
285 FAND＜＝ S1 ≦ S2 S1 ＞ S2
286 FAND＞＝ S1 ≧ S2 S1 ＜ S2
 When X1 = OFF, and the floating point number in register D100 (D101) is not
equal to F1.2, Y21 = ON and remains in that state.
X1
FAND<> F1.2 D0 SET Y21
16-119
API
287– FOR※ S1 S2 Floating point number contact form compare OR*
292

S1 ＊＊＊
S2 ＊＊＊
FOR※ Continuous －－
execution type

 This command compares the content of S1 and S2. Taking "FOR=" as an
example, if the result of comparison is "equal," this command will be activated;
but it will not be activated when the result is "unequal."
 The FOR* command can directly input floating point numerical values (for
287 FOR＝ S1 ＝ S2 S1 ≠ S2
288 FOR＞ S1 ＞ S2 S1 ≦ S2
289 FOR＜ S1 ＜ S2 S1 ≧ S2
290 FOR＜＞ S1 ≠ S2 S1 ＝ S2
291 FOR＜＝ S1 ≦ S2 S1 ＞ S2
292 FOR＞＝ S1 ≧ S2 S1 ＜ S2
 When X2 and M30 are both equal to "On," or the floating point number in register
D100 (D101) is greater than or equal to F1.234, M60 = ON.
X2 M30
M60
FOR>= D100 F1.234
16-120
16-6-5 Detailed explanation of driver special applications commands

API
RPR S1 S2 Read servo parameter
139 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D RPR Continuous RPRP Pulse
S2 ＊
Notes on operand usage: none 32-bit command
－－－－
Flag signal: none
 S1 : Parameter address of data to be read. S2 : Register where data to be

read is stored.
API
WPR S1 S2 Write servo parameter
140 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D WPR Continuous WPRP Pulse
S2 ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: none 32-bit command
－－－－
Flag signal: none
 S1 : Data to write to specified page. S2 : Parameter address of data to be

written.
 When the data in the CP2000 driver's parameter H01.00 is read and written to
D0, data from H01.01 will be read and written to D1.
 When M0 = ON, the content of D10 will be written to the CP2000 driver
parameter 04.00 (first speed of multiple speed levels).
 When the parameter has been written successfully, M1017 = ON.
 The CP2000's WPR command does not support writing to the 20XX address,
but the RPR command supports reading of 21XX, 22XX.
Recommendation Take care when using the WPR command. When writing parameters, because
most parameters are recorded as they are written, these parameters may only be
revised 109 times; a memory write error may occur if parameters are written more
than 109 times.
Because the following commonly-used parameters have special processing, there
are no restrictions on the number of times they may be written.
Pr.00-11: Speed mode selection

Pr.00-27: User-defined value
Pr.01-12: Acceleration time 1

Pr.01-13: Deceleration time 1
16-121

Pr.02-12: Select MI Conversion Time mode:

Pr.02-18: Select MO Conversion Time mode:
Pr.04-50–Pr.04-69: PLC register parameter 0–19
Pr.08-04: Upper limit of integral

Pr.08-05: PID output upper limit
Pr.10-17: Electronic gear A

Pr.10-18: Electronic gear B
Calculation of the number of times written is based on whether the written value is
modified. For instance, writing the same value 100 times at the same time counts
as writing only once.
When writing a PLC program, if unsure of usage of the WPR command, we
recommend that you use the WPRP command.
16-122
API
FPID S1 S2 S3 S4 Driver PID control mode
141 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D FPID Continuous FPIDP Pulse
S2 ＊＊＊
32-bit command
S3 ＊＊＊
－－－－
S4 ＊＊＊
 S1 : PID reference target value input terminal select. S2 : PID function
proportional gain P. S3 : PID function integral time I. S4 : PID function

differential time D.
 The FPID command can directly control the driver's feedback control of
PID parameter Pr.08-00 PID reference target value input terminal selection,
Pr.08-01 proposal gain P, Pr.08-02 integral time I, and Pr.08-03 differential time D.
 When M0 = ON, the set PID reference target value input terminal selection is 0
(no PID function), the PID function proportional gain P is 0, the PID function
integral time I is 1 (units: 0.01 sec.), and the PID function differential time D is 1
(units: 0.01 sec.).
(no PID function), the PID function proportional gain P is 1 (units: 0.01), the
PID function integral time I is 0, and the PID function differential time D is 0.
(target frequency input is controlled from the digital keypad), the PID function
proportional gain P is 1 (units: 0.01), the PID function integral time I is 0, and the
PID function differential time D is 0.
 D1027: Frequency command after PID operation.
M0
FPID H0 H0 H1 H1
M1
FPID H0 H1 H0 H0
M2
FPID H1 H1 H0 H0
M1000
MOV D1027 D1
END
16-123
API
FREQ S1 S2 S3 Driver speed control mode
142 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D FREQ Continuous FREQP Pulse
S2 ＊＊＊
32-bit command
S3 ＊＊＊
－－－－
Flag signal: M1015
 S1 : Frequency command. S2 : Acceleration time. S3 : Deceleration time

 S2, S3: In acceleration/deceleration time settings, the number of decimal places is
determined by the definitions of Pr.01-45.
Example
When Pr.01-45=0: units of 0.01 sec.
The setting of 50 for S2 (acceleration time) in the ladder diagram below implies 0.5 sec,
and the S3 (deceleration time) setting of 60 implies 0.6 sec
 The FREQ command can control driver frequency commands, and acceleration and
deceleration time; it also uses special register control actions, such as:
M1025: Control driver RUN(On)/STOP(Off) (RUN requires Servo On (M1040 On) to be
effective)
M1026: Control driver operating direction FWD(Off)/REV(On)
M1040: Control Servo On/Servo Off.
M1042: Trigger quick stop (ON)/does not trigger quick stop (Off).
M1044: Pause (On)/release pause (Off)
M1052: Lock frequency (On)/release lock frequency (Off)
 M1025: Driver RUN (On) / STOP (Off), M1026: driver operating direction FWD (Off) / REV
(On). M1015: frequency reached.
 When M10 = ON, sets the driver frequency command K300 (3.00 Hz), with an
acceleration/deceleration time of 0.
When M11 =ON, sets the driver frequency command K3000 (30.00 Hz), with an
acceleration time of 50 (0.5 sec.) and deceleration time of 60 (0.6 sec.). (When Pr.01-45 =
0)
 When M11 = OFF, the driver frequency command will now change to 0
M1000
M1025
M11
M1026
M1000
M1040
M12
M1042
M13
M1044
M14
M1052
M10 M11
FREQP K300 K0 K0
M11 M10
FREQ K3000 K50 K60
END
 Pr.09-33 are defined on the basis of whether the reference commands have been cleared
before PLC operation.
bit0: Prior to PLC scanning procedures, whether the target frequency has been cleared is
0. (This will be written to the FREQ command when the PLC is ON).
16-124
Example: When using r to write a program

M0
FREQ K2000 K1000 K1000
END
If we force M0 to be 1, the frequency command will be 20.00 Hz; but when M0 is set as 0,
there will be a different situation.
Case 1: When the bit0 of Pr.09-33 is 0, and M0 is set as 0, the frequency command remains
at 20.00 Hz.
Case 2: When the bit0 of Pr.09-33 is 1, and M0 is set as 0, the frequency command changes
to 0.00 Hz.
The reason is that when the Pr.09-33 bit0 is 1 prior to the PLC scanning procedures, the
frequency will firstly revert to 0.
When the Pr.09-33 bit0 is 0, the frequency will not revert to 0.
16-125
API
CANRX S1 S2 S3 D Read CANopen slave station data
261 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D CANRX Continuous CANRX Pulse
S1 ＊＊ execution type P execution type
S2 ＊＊
32-bit command
S3 ＊＊
－－－－
D ＊＊＊
Notes on operand usage: none Flag signal
 S1 : Slave station number. S2 : Main index. S3 : Subindex+bit length. D :

Preset address.
 The CANRX command can read the index of the corresponding slave station.
When it is executed, it will send the SDO message format to the slave station.
M1066 and M1067 will both be 0 at that time, and M1066 will be set as 1 after
reading. If the slave station gives the correct response, it will write the value to the
preset register, and set M1067 as 1. If the slave station has a response error,
M1067 will be set as 0, and an error message will be recorded to D1076 to
D1079.
M1002: When the PLC runs, the command will be triggered once and will set
K4M400 = K1
Afterwards, each time M1066 is 1, it will switch to a different message.
16-126
API
CANTX S1 S2 S3 S4 Write CANopen slave station data
264 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D CANTX Continuous CANTXP Pulse
S1 ＊＊ execution type execution type
S2 ＊＊＊＊＊
32-bit command
S3 ＊＊
－－－－
S4 ＊＊
Notes on operand usage: none Flag signal
 S1 : Slave station number. S2 : Address to be written. S3 : Main index.

S4 : Subindex+bit length.
 The CANTX command can write a value to the index of the corresponding slave
station. When it is executed, it will send the SDO message format to the slave
station. M1066 and M1067 will both be 0 at that time, and M1066 will be set as 1
after reading. If the slave station gives the correct response, it will write the value
to the preset register, and set M1067 as 1. If the slave station has a response
error, M1067 will be set as 0, and an error message will be recorded to D1076 to
D1079.
API
CANFLS D Refresh special D corresponding to CANopen
265 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D CANFLS Continuous CANFLSP Pulse
32-bit command
－－－－
Flag signal
 D : Special D to be refreshed.
 The CANFLS command can refresh special D commands. When is a read only
attribute, executing this command will send a message equivalent to that of CANRX
to the slave station, and the number of the slave station will be transmitted back and
refreshed to this special D. When there is a read/write attribute, executing this
command will send a message equivalent to that of CANTX to the slave station, and
the value of this special D will be written to the corresponding slave station.
 When M1066 and M1067 are both 0, and M1066 is set as 1 after reading, if the slave
station gives a correct response, the value will be written to the designated register,
and M1067 will be set as 1. If the slave station's response contains an error, then
M1067 will be set as 0, and an error message will be recorded to D1076-D1079.
API
ICOMR D Internal communications read
320 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ICOMR Continuous ICOMRP Pulse
S2 ＊＊＊
S3 ＊＊＊ DICOMR Continuous DICOMRP Pulse
D ＊＊＊ execution type execution
Notes on operand usage: none type
Flag signal: M1077 M1078 M1079
S1 : Selection of slave device. S2 : Device selection (0: converter, 1: internal
PLC). S3 : Read address. D : Saving target.

 The ICOMR command can obtain the slave station's converter and the internal
PLC's register value.
16-127
API
ICOMW D Internal communications write
321 D P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D ICOMW Continuous ICOMW Pulse
S1 ＊＊＊ execution type P execution type
S2 ＊＊＊
S3 ＊＊＊ DICOM Continuous DICOM Pulse
D ＊＊＊ W execution type WP execution type
Flag signal: M1077 M1078 M1079
S1 : Selection of slave device. S2 : Device selection (0: converter, 1: internal
PLC). S3 : Read address. D : Saving target.

 The ICOMW command write a value to the slave station's converter and the
internal PLC's register.
Please refer to the following example:
16-128
API
WPRA S1 S2 Drive parameters write-in
323 P
X Y M K H KnX KnY KnM T C D WORA Continuous WORAP Pulse
S1 ＊＊＊
S2 ＊＊＊ 32-bit command
－－－－
Flag signal: none
S1 : Data that is going to write in S2 : Parameter address of the write-in data
 Read the data of CP2000 drive’s parameter H01.00 and write into D0, read data
of H01.01 and write into D1.
 When M0 is ON, write the content of D10 into CP2000 drive’s Pr.04-00 (1st step
speed frequency).
 When parameter writes-in successfully, M1017 is ON.
 The WPR command does not support the write-in of 20XX address, but the RPR
command supports the read-out of 21XX and 22XX.
 When WPRA executes, the data is only written into the RAM area, and will get
back to previous record when the power is off.
16-129
16-7 Error display and handling

Code ID Description Recommended handling approach
Turn power on and off when resetting the
PLrA 47 RTC time check
keypad time
Turn power on and off after making sure
PLrt 49 incorrect RTC mode
that the keypad is securely connected
Check whether the program has an error
PLod 50 Data writing memory error
and download the program again
Data write memory error during Restart power and download the program
PLSv 51
program execution again
Try uploading again; if the error persists,
PLdA 52 Program transmission error
sent to the manufacturer for service
Command error while downloading Check whether the program has an error
PLFn 53
program and download the program again
Program exceeds memory capacity Restart power and download the program
PLor 54
or no program again
Command error during program Check whether the program has an error
PLFF 55
execution and download the program again
PLSn 56 Check code error
and download the program again
Program has no END stop Check whether the program has an error
PLEd 57
command and download the program again
MC command has been used Check whether the program has an error
PLCr 58
continuously more than nine times and download the program again
PLdF 59 Download program error
and download again
Check whether the program code has a
PLSF 60 PLC scan time excessively long
writing error and download again
16-130
16-8 CANopen Master control applications

Control of a simple multi-axis application is required in certain situations. If the device supports the
CANopen protocol, a CP2000 can serve as the master in implementing simple control (speed
control). The setting method comprises the following seven steps:
Step 1: Activating CANopen Master functions

1. Pr.09-45 = 1 (initiates Master functions); restart power after completing setting, the status
bar on the KPC-CC01 digital keypad will display "CAN Master".
2. Pr.00-02 = 6 reset PLC (please note that this action will reset the program and PLC
registers to the default values)
3. Turn power off and on again.
4. Use the KPC-CC01 digital keypad to set the PLC control mode as "PLC Stop" (if a
newly-introduced driver is used, the blank internal PLC program will cause a PLFF warning
code to be issued).
Step 2: Master memory settings

1. After connecting the 485 communications cable, use WPL Soft to set the PLC status as
Stop (if the PLC mode has been switched to the "PLC Stop" mode, the PLC status should
already be Stop)
2. Set the address and corresponding station number of the slave station to be controlled. For
instance, if it is wished to control two slave stations (a maximum of 8 stations can be
controlled simultaneously), and the station numbers are 21 and 22, it is only necessary to
set D2000 and D2100 as 20 and 21, and then set D2200, D2300, D2400, D2500, D2600,
and D2700 as 0. The setting method involves use of the PLC's WPL editing software WPL
as follows:
 Open WPL and implement communications > register edit (T C D) function
16-131
 After leaving the PLC register window, the register setting screen will appear, as shown
below:
If there is a new PLC program and no settings have yet been made, you can read default data
from the converter, and merely edit it to suit the current application. If settings have already been
made, however, the special D in the CANopen area will display the saved status (the CANopen
D area is located at D1090 to D1099 and D2000 to D2799). Assuming it is a new program, we
will first read the default data from the converter; check the communications format if there is no
communications link (the default PLC station number is 2, 9600, 7N2, ASCII). Perform the
following steps: 1. Switch the PLC to Stop status; 2. Press the transmit button; 3. click on read
memory after exiting the window; 4. Ignore D0-D399; and 5. click on the confirm button.)
16-132
After reading the data, it is necessary to perform some special D settings. Before proceeding, we
will first introduce the special D implications and setting range. The CANopen Master's special
D range is currently D1070 to D1099 and D2000 to D2799; this range is divided into 3 blocks:
The first block is used to display CANopen's current status, and has a range of D1070 to D1089;
the second block is used for CANopen's basic settings, and has a range of D1090 to D1099;
the third block is the slave station mapping and control area, and has a range of D2000 to
D2799;
These areas are therefore introduced as follows:
The first contains the current CANopen status display:

When the master initializes a slave station, we can find out from D1070 whether configuration of
the slave device has been completed; we can find out whether an error occurred in the
configuration process from D1071 and whether the configuration is inappropriate from D1074.
After entering normal control, we can find out whether the slave device is offline from D1073. In
addition, we can check the slave device's read/write information using the CANRX, CANTX, and
CANFLS commands; error information can be obtained from D1076 to D1079 if there has been a
read/write failure.
Special D Description of Function R/W
Channel opened by CANopen initialization (bit0=Machine
D1070 R
code0 …….)
Error channel occurring in CANopen initialization process
D1071 R
(bit0=Machine code0 …….)
D1072 Reserved -
16-133

D1073 CANopen break channel (bit0=Machine code0 …….) R
Error code of master error
0: No error
D1074 R
1: Slave station setting error
2: Synchronizing cycle setting error (too small)
D1075 Reserved -
D1076 SDO error message (main index value) R
D1077 SDO error message (secondary index value) R
D1078 SDO error message (error code L) R
D1079 SDO error message (error code H) R
The second area is for basic CANopen settings: (the PLC must have stopped when
this area is used to make settings)
We must set the information exchange time for the master and slave station,
D1090 Synchronizing cycle setting 4 RW
Use D1090 to perform settings; setting time relationships include:
For instance, when communications speed is 500Kbps, TXPDO + RXPDO have 8 sets,
and synchronizing time will require more than 4 ms
We must also define how many slave stations will be open. D1091 is the channel for
defining station opening, and D2000+100 × n is the station number defining this channel. See
the detailed explanation below.
Slave station number n = 0-7
Sets slave station On or Off (bit0–bit 7 correspond to
D1091 RW
slave stations number 0–7)
D2000+100*n Slave station number RW
16-134
If slave devices have a slow start-up, the master can delay for a short time before performing
slave station configuration; this time delay can be set via D1092.
D1092 Delay before start of initialization 0 RW
With regard to slave device initialization, a delay time can be set to judge whether failure has
occurred. If the communications speed is relatively slow, the delay time can be adjusted to judge
whether initialization has been completed, which will ensure that there is time to perform slave
device initialization.
Initialization completion delay time
D1099 15 sec. RW
Setting range: 1 to 60000 sec
After communication is successful, the system must detect whether there is a break in
communications with the slave station. D1093 is used to set detection time, and D1094 sets the
number of consecutive errors that will trigger a break error.
D1093 Break time detection 1000ms RW
D1094 Break number detection 3 RW
The packet type transmitted by PDO is set before establishing normal communications and
generally does not require adjustment.
Corresponding real-time transmission type
D1097 (PDO) 1 RW
Corresponding real-time receiving type (PDO)
D1098 1 RW
The third block is the slave station mapping and control area.
CANopen provides a PDO method to perform mapping of the master and slave station memory,
and enables the master to directly access read/write data in a certain memory area. The master
will automatically perform data exchange with the corresponding slave device, and the
read/write values can be seen directly from the special D area after real-time exchange (M1034
= 1 time) has been established. The CP2000 currently supports real-time mapping of four PDOs,
and there are two types of PDO RXPDO (reads slave device information) and TXPDO (writes to
slave device). In addition, in order to facilitate control, the CP2000 cannot perform mapping of
commonly used registers; the following is an overview of the current PDO mapping situation:
TX PDO
PDO2 (Remote I/O) PDO1 (Speed)
Description Special D Description Special D
Slave device DO D2027 + 100 × n Controller word D2008 + 100 × n
Slave device AO1 D2031 + 100 × n Target speed D2012 + 100 × n
Slave device AO2 D2032 + 100 × n

Slave device AO3 D2033 + 100 × n
16-135
RXPDO
PDO2 (Remote I/O) PDO1 (Speed)
Slave device DI D2026 + 100 × n Mode word D2009 + 100 × n
Slave device AI1 D2028 + 100 × n Actual frequency D2013 + 100 × n
Slave device AI2 D2029 + 100 × n
Slave device AI3 D2030 + 100 × n
Because usage requires only simple to open the corresponding PDO, where TXPDO
employs D2034+100*n settings and RXPDO employs D2067+100*n settings.
These two special D areas are defined as follows:

PDO2 PDO1
Default definition Remote I/O Speed
bit 7 6–4 3 2–0
Definition En Length: En Length:
En: indicates whether PDO is used
Length: indicates mapping of several variables
In a simple example, if we wish to control a CP2000 slave device and cause it to operate in
speed mode, we only have to make the following settings:
D2034+100*n =000Ah
TX PDO
Length PDO2 PDO1
1 Slave device DO D2027 + 100 × n Controller word D2008 + 100 × n
2 Slave device AO1 D2031 + 100 × n Target speed D2012 + 100 × n
3 Slave device AO2 D2032 + 100 × n

4 Slave device AO3 D2033 + 100 × n
PDO2 PDO1
Definition Remote I/O Speed
bit 7 6–4 3 2–0
Definition 0 0 1 2
D2067+100*n =000Ah
TX PDO
Length PDO2 PDO1
1 Slave device DI D2026 + 100 × n Controller word D2009 + 100 × n
2 Slave device AI1 D2028 + 100 × n Actual frequency D2013 + 100 × n
3 Slave device AI2 D2029 + 100 × n
4 Slave device AI3 D2030 + 100 × n
PDO2 PDO1
Definition Remote I/O Speed
bit 7 6–4 3 2–0
Definition 0 0 1 2
Switch the PLC to Run after completing settings. Now wait for successful initialization of
CANopen (M1059 = 1 and M1061 = 0), and then initiate CANopen memory mapping (M1034 = 1).
The control word and frequency command will now automatically refresh to the corresponding
slave device (D2008 + n × 100 and D2012 + n ×100), and the slave device's status word and
currently frequency will also be automatically sent back to the master station (D2009 + n × 100 and
16-136
D2013 + n × 100). This also illustrates how the master can handle these tasks through read/write
operations in the special D area.
Furthermore, it should be noted that the remote I/O of PDO2 can obtain the slave device's
current DI and AI status, and can also control the slave device's DO and AO status. Nevertheless,
after introducing a fully automatic mapping special D, the CP2000 CANopen master also provides
additional information refreshes. For instance, while in speed mode, acceleration/deceleration
settings may have been refreshed. The special D therefore also stores some seldom-used
real-time information, and these commands can be refreshed using the CANFLS command. The
following is the CP2000's current CANopen master data conversion area, which has a range of
D2001 + 100 × n - D2033 + 100 × n, as shown below:
1. The range of n is 0-7
2. ●Indicates PDOTX, ▲Indicates PDORX; unmarked special D can be refreshed using the
CANFLS command
PDO Default
Special D Description of Function Default R/W
1 2
D2000 + 100 × n Setting range: 0–127 0 RW
D2002 + 100 × n Manufacturer code of slave station number n (L) 0 R
D2003 + 100 × n Manufacturer code of slave station number n (H) 0 R

Manufacturer's product code of slave station
D2004 + 100 × n 0 R
number n (L)
Manufacturer's product code of slave station
D2005 + 100 × n 0 R
number n (H)
Basic definitions
PDO Default
1 2
Communications break handling method of slave
D2006 + 100 × n 0 RW
station number n
D2007 + 100 × n Error code of slave station number n error 0 R
D2008 + 100 × n Control word of slave station number n 0 ● RW
D2009 + 100 × n Status word of slave station number n 0 ▲ R
D2010 + 100 × n Control mode of slave station number n 2 RW
D2011 + 100 × n Actual mode of slave station number n 2 R
Velocity Control
PDO
Special D Description of Function Default Default R/W
1 2
D2001 + 100 × n Torque restriction on slave station number n 0 RW
D2012 + 100 × n Target speed of slave station number n (rpm) 0 ● RW
D2013 + 100 × n Actual speed of slave station number n (rpm) 0 ▲ R
D2014 + 100 × n Error speed of slave station number n (rpm) 0 R
D2015 + 100 × n Acceleration time of slave station number n (ms) 1000 RW
D2016 + 100 × n Deceleration time of slave station number n (ms) 1000 RW
16-137
Remote I/O
PDO Default
1 2
D2026 + 100 × n MI status of slave station number n 0 ▲ R
D2027 + 100 × n MO setting of slave station number n 0 ● RW
D2028 + 100 × n AI1 status of slave station number n 0 ▲ R
RW
D2031 + 100 × n AO1 setting of slave station number n 0 ●
RW
RW
After gaining an understanding of special D definitions, we return to setting steps. After

entering the values corresponding to D1090 to D1099, D2000+100*n, D2034+100*n and
D2067+100*n, we cannot begin to perform downloading, which is performed in accordance with
the following steps: (1. D2000 and D2100 are set as 20 and 21, and D2200, D2300, D2400, D2500,
D2600, and D2700 are set as 0; if a setting of 0 causes problems, D1091 can be set as 3, and
slave stations 2 to 7 can be closed. 2. Switch PLC to Stop status. 3. Press the transmit button. 4.
Click on write memory after exiting the window. 5. Ignore D0–D399. 6. Change the second range to
D1090–D1099. 7. Click on Confirm.)
16-138
 Another method can be used to set D1091: Determine which of slave stations 0 to 7 will not be
needed, and set the corresponding bits to 0. For instance, if it is not necessary to control slave
stations 2, 6 and 7, merely set D1091 = 003B, and the setting method is the same as
described above: Use WPL to initiate communications > use register edit (T C D) function
to perform settings.
Step 3: Set the master's communications station number and communications speed
 When setting the master's station number (Pr.09-46, default is set as 100), make sure
not to use the same number as a slave station.
 Set the CANopen communications speed (Pr.09-37); regardless of whether the driver
is defined as a master or slave station, the communications speed is set via this
parameter.
Step 4: Write program code

Real-time access: Can directly read/write to or from the corresponding D area.
Non real-time access:
Read command:
Use the CANRX command for reading. M1066 will be 1 when reading is complete; M1067
will be 1 if reading is successful, and M1067 will be 0 if an error has occurred.
Write command:
Use the CANTX command for writing. M1066 will be 1 when writing is complete; M1067 will
be 1 if writing is successful, and M1067 will be 0 if an error has occurred.
Refresh command:
Use CANFLS command to refresh (if there are RW attributes, the master will write to the
slave station; if there are RO attributes, the slave station will return the read values to the
master); M1066 will be 1 if refresh has been completed; M1067 will be 1 if refresh is
successful, and M1067 will be 0 if an error has occurred.
NOTE
When using CANRX, CANTX or CANFLS, internal implementation commands will wait until M1066 is
completed before executing the next CANRX, CANTX or CANFLS.
Afterwards, download program to the driver (Please note that the PLC's default communications
format is ASCII 7N2 9600, and the station number is 2. The WPL must therefore be modified,
and the WPL setting pathway is settings > communications settings)
Step 5: Set the slave stations' station numbers, communications speed, control source, and
command source
Delta's CP2000 and EC series devices currently support the CANopen communications
interface driver, and the corresponding slave station numbers and communications speed
parameters are as follows:
16-139
Corresponding device
parameters Value Definition
CP2000 E-C
Slave station 0 Disable CANopen hardware interface
09-36 09-20
address 1–127 CANopen Communication address
0 1 Mbps
1 500 Kbps
Communication 2 250 Kbps
09-37 09-21
speed 3 125 Kbps
4 100 Kbps
5 50 Kbps
Delta's A2 Servo currently supports the CANopen communications interface, and the
corresponding slave station numbers and communications speed parameters are as follows:
Corresponding device
parameters Value Definition
A2
Slave station
Pr.03-00 1–127 CANopen Communication address
address
R= 0 125 Kbps
R= 1 250 Kbps
Communication
Pr.03-01 bit8–11 XRXX R= 2 500 Kbps
speed
R= 3 750 Kbps
R= 4 1 Mbps
Control/command
Pr.01-01 B
source
Step 6: Connect hardware wiring

When performing wiring, note the head and tail terminal resistance; connection methods
are as follows:
Terminal Terminal
Resistor Resistor
16-140
Step 7: Initiate control

After a program has been written and downloaded, switch the PLC mode to Run. Merely turn power
to master and slave stations off and then on again.
Refer to CANMasterTest 1 vs. 2 driver.dvp
Example:
CP2000 driver one-to-two control
Step 1: Activating CANopen Master functions
 Pr.09-45 = 1 (initiates Master functions); restart power after completing setting, the
status bar on the KPC-CC01 digital keypad will display "CAN Master".
 Pr.00-02 = 6 reset PLC (please note that this action will reset the program and PLC
registers to the default values)
 Turn power off and on again.
 Use the KPC-CC01 digital keypad to set the PLC control mode as "PLC Stop" (if a
newly-introduced driver is used, the blank internal PLC program will cause a PLFF
warning code to be issued).
Step 2: Master memory correspondences

 Enable WPL
 Use keypad set PLC mode as Stop (PLC 2)
 WPL read D1070 to D1099, D2000 to D2799
 Set D2000 = 10 D2100 = 11
 Set D2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 2600 2700 = 0
 Download D2000 to D2799 settings
Step 3: Set the master's communications station number and communications speed
 When setting the master's station number (Pr.09-46, default is set as 100), make sure
not to use the same number as a slave station.
 Set the CANopen communications speed as 1M (Pr.09-37 = 0); regardless of whether
the driver is defined as a master or slave station, the communications speed is set
via this parameter.
Step 4: Write program code

Real-time access: Can directly read/write to or from the corresponding D area.
Non real-time access:
Read command:
Use the CANRX command for reading. M1066 will be 1 when reading is complete;
M1067 will be 1 if reading is successful, and M1067 will be 0 if an error has occurred.
Write command:
Use the CANTX command for writing. M1066 will be 1 when writing is complete;
M1067 will be 1 if writing is successful, and M1067 will be 0 if an error has occurred.
16-141
Refresh command:
Use CANFLS command to refresh (if there are RW attributes, the master will write to
the slave station; if there are RO attributes, the slave station will return the read values
to the master); M1066 will be 1 if refresh has been completed; M1067 will be 1 if
refresh is successful, and M1067 will be 0 if an error has occurred.
NOTE
When using CANRX, CANTX or CANFLS, internal implementation commands will wait until
M1066 is completed before executing the next CANRX, CANTX or CANFLS.
Afterwards, download program to the driver (Please note that the PLC's default
communications format is ASCII 7N2 9600, and the station number is 2. The WPL must
therefore be modified, and the WPL setting pathway is settings > communications
settings)
Step 5: Set the slave stations' station numbers and communications speed
Slave station no. 1: Pr.09-37 = 0 (Speed 1M) Pr.09-36 = 10 (Node ID 10)
Slave station no. 2: Pr.09-37 = 0 (Speed 1M) Pr.09-36 = 10 (Node ID 11)
Step 6: Connect hardware wiring

When performing wiring, note the head and tail terminal resistance; connection methods are
as follows:
Terminal Terminal
resistor resistor
Step 7: Initiate control

After a program has been written and downloaded, switch the PLC mode to Run. Merely
turn power to master and slave stations off and then on again.
Refer to CANMasterTest 1 vs. 2 driver.dvp
16-142
16-9 Explanation of various PLC speed mode controls

Speed mode supports SVC control. Under the speed mode of SVC control, it cannot be
performed successfully unless finish motor parameter auto tuning ahead of time.
Control methods and settings are explained as follows:
Speed control:
Register table for speed mode:
Control special M
Special M Description of Function Attributes
M1025 Driver frequency = set frequency (ON)/driver frequency =0 (OFF) RW
M1026 Driver operating direction FWD(OFF)/REV(ON) RW
M1040 Hardware power (Servo On) RW
M1042 Quick stop RW
M1044 Pause (Halt) RW
M1052 Lock frequency (lock, frequency locked at the current operating frequency) RW
Status special M
M1015 Frequency attained (when used together with M1025) RO
M1056 Servo On Ready RO
M1058 On Quick Stopping RO
Control special D
Special D Description of Function Attributes
D1060 Mode setting (speed mode is 0) RW
Status special D
D1037 Converter output frequency (0.00–600.00) RO
D1050 Actual operating mode (speed mode is 0) RO
Speed mode control commands:

FREQ (P) S1 S2 S3
Target speed The first acceleration time setting The first deceleration time setting
Example of speed mode control:

Before performing speed control, if the SVC control method is used, setting of electromechanical
parameters must first be completed.
1. Setting D1060 = 0 will shift the converter to the speed mode (default).
2. Use the FREQ command to control frequency, acceleration time, and deceleration time.
3. Set M1040 = 1, the driver will now be excited, but the frequency will be 0.
4. Set M1025 = 1, the driver frequency command will now jump to the frequency designated
by FREQ, and acceleration/deceleration will be controlled on the basis of the acceleration
time and deceleration time specified by FREQ.
5. M1052 can be used to lock the current operating frequency.
6. M1044 can be used to temporarily pause operation, and the deceleration method will comply
with deceleration settings.
16-143
7. M1042 can be used to perform quick stop, and deceleration will be as quick as possible
without giving rise to an error. (There may still be a jump error if the load is too large.)
8. Control user rights: M1040(Servo ON) > M1042(Quick Stop) >M1044(Halt) >M1052(LOCK)
16-144
16-10 Internal communications main node control

The protocol has been developed in order to facilitate the use of 485 instead of CANopen in
certain application situations. The 485 protocol offers similar real-time characteristics as CANopen;
this protocol can only be used on the CP2000 and CT2000 devices. The maximum number of slave
devices is 8.
Internal communications have a master-slave structure. The initiation method is very simple:
Slave device:
Set Pr.09-31 = -1 to -8 in order to access 8 nodes, and set Pr.00-20 = 1 to define the control
source as 485 and access the reference sources that must be controlled, namely speed command
(Pr.00-21 = 2). This will complete slave device settings. (PLC functions do not need to be activated)
System:
Setting the master is even simpler; it is only necessary to set Pr.09-31 = -10, and enable the PLC.
Hardware wiring:
The master and slave stations are connected via the 485 serial port. The CP2000 provide two types
of 485 serial port interfaces, see the figure below: (please refer to Section 06 Control terminals
concerning detailed terminal connections)
16-145
Master programming: In a program, D1110 can be used to define a slave station to be

controlled (1–8, if set as 0, can jump between 8 stations). Afterwards, M1035 is set as 1, and the
memory positions of the master and slave stations will correspond. At this time, it is only necessary to
send commands to the correlation slave station address to control that station. The following is a
register table connected with internal communications:
Control special M
M1035 Initiates internal communications control RW
Control special D
Internal node communications number 1–8 (set the station number of the slave
D1110 RW
station to be controlled)
Description of Function Attributes

Special D User
Definition bit Speed mode
rights
0 4 Command functions
Reverse rotation
1 4
requirements
2 4 -
3 3 Temporary pause
4 4 Frequency locking
D1120 + 10 × NInternal node N control command 5 4 JOG RW
6 2 Quick Stop
7 1 Servo ON
11–8 4 Speed interval switching
13–12 4 Deceleration time change
14 4 Enable bit13–8
15 4 Clear error code
D1121 + 10 × NInternal node N control mode 0 RW
Speed command
D1122 + 10 × NInternal node N reference command L RW
(no number)
D1123 + 10 × NInternal node N reference command H - RW

※ N = 0–7
Status special D
D1115 Internal node synchronizing cycle (ms) RO
Internal node error (bit0 = slave device 1, bit1 = slave device 2,…bit7 = slave
D1116 RO
device 8)
Internal node online correspondence (bit0 = slave device 1, bit1 = slave device
D1117 RO
2,…bit7 = slave device 8)
16-146
Description of Function Attributes

Special D
bit Speed mode
0 Frequency command arrival
Clockwise
1
Counterclockwise:
2 Warning
D1126 + 10 × N RO
3 Error
5 JOG
6 Quick Stop
7 Servo ON
D1127 + 10 × N Actual frequency
RO
D1128 + 10 × N -
※ N = 0–7
Example: Assume it is desired to control slave station 1 operation at frequencies of 30.00 Hz and
60.00 Hz, status, and online node correspondences:
When it is judged that slave station 1 is online, delay 3 sec. and begin control
16-147
It is required slave station 1 maintain forward rotation at 30.00 Hz for 1 sec., and maintain reverse
rotation at 60.00 Hz for 1 sec., and repeat this cycle continuously.
16-148
16-11 Modbus remote IO control applications (use MODRW)

The CP2000's internal PLC supports 485 read/write functions, which can be realized using the
MODRW command. However, the 485 serial port must be defined as available for the PLC's 485 use
before writing a program, and the Pr.09-31 must be set as -12. After completing settings, the
standard functions defined by 485 can be used to implement read/write commands at other stations.
Communications speed is defined by Pr.09-01, the communications format is defined by Pr.09-04,
and the PLC's current station number is defined by Pr.09-35. The CP2000 currently supports the
functions read coil (0x01), read input (0x02), read register (0x03), write to single register (0x06), write
to several coils (0x0F), and write to several registers (0x10). Explanations and the usage of these
functions are provided as follows:
MODRW command
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 General Slave device is Delta's PLC Slave device is Delta's
Node Return: meaning meaning converter meaning
Command Address Length:
ID D area
Read 18 bits of data corresponding to
Read coil slave station 3 PLC Y0 to Y21. This
K3 H01 H500 D0 K18 Does not support this function
(Bit) data is stored by bit 0 to 15 of this
station's D0 and bit 0 to bit 3 of D1.
Read 10 bits of data corresponding to
Read input slave station 3 PLC X0 to X11. This
K3 H02 H400 D10 K10 Does not support this function
(Bit) data is stored by bit 0 to 9 of this
station's D10.
Read 3 words of data
Read 3 words of data corresponding corresponding to slave station
Read register
K3 H03 H600 D20 K3 to slave station 3 PLC T0 to T2. This 3 converter parameters 06-00
(word)
data is stored by D20 to D22. to 06-02. This data is stored by
D20 to D22
Write slave station 3 converter
Write to single Write slave station 3 PLC's T16 to this
K3 H06 H610 D30 XX 06 to 16 parameter to this
register (word) station's D30 value
station's D30 value
Write to
Write slave station 3 PLC's Y11 to
K3 H0F H509 D40 K10 multiple coils Does not support this function
Y22 to bit 0 to 9 of D40.
(Bit)
Write to
Write slave station 3 converter
multiple Write slave station 3 PLC's T2 to T5 to
K3 H10 H602 D50 K4 06-02 to 06-05 parameters to
registers D50 to D53
this station's D50 to D53
(word)
※ XX indicates doesn't matter
After implementing MODRW, the status will be displayed in M1077 (485 read/write complete), M1078
(485 read/write error), and M1079 (485 read/write time out). M1077 is defined so as to immediately
revert to 0 after the MODRW command has been implemented. However, any of three situations—a
report of no error, a data error report, or time out with no report—will cause the status of M1077 to
change to On.
Example program: Testing of various functions

At the start, will cause the transmitted time sequence to switch to the first data unit.
0 M1002
MOV K1 K4M0
On only for 1 scan a
16-149
When the reported message indicates no error, it will switch to the next transmitted command
6 M1077 M1078 M1079

ROLP K4M0 K1
485 R/W 485 R/W 485 R/W
rite is co rite is fail rite is time 0
If time out occurs or an error is reported, the M1077 will change to ON. At this time, after a delay of 30
scanning cycles, it will re-issue the original command once
14 M1077
ADD D30 K1 D30
485 R/W rite is co
D30 K40 MOV K0 D30
( M200 )
Delay cycle
33 M1002
( M100 )
ON only for 1 scan a ReqTXOnce
M200
Delay cycle
36 M100 M0
MODRW K2 H1 H500 D200
ReqTXOnce M1
MODRW K2 HF H500 D100
M2
M3
M4
It will repeat after sending all commands
102 M5
MOV K1 K4M0
INC D1
D30 K40 MOV K1 K4M0
121
END
Practical applications:
Actual use to control the RTU-485 module.
Step 1: Set the communications format. Assume that the communications format is 115200, 8,N,2,
RTU
CP2000：The default PLC station number is set as 2 (Pr.09-35)
Pr.09-31 = -12 (COM1 is controlled by the PLC), Pr.09-01 = 115.2 (The communications speed is
115200)
Pr.09-04 = 13 (The format is 8,N,2, RTU)
16-150
RTU485: The station number = 8 (give example)
ID7 ID6 ID5 ID4 ID3 ID2 ID1 ID0 PA3 PA2 PA1 PA0 DR2 DR1 DR0 A/R
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
Communication station #:
ID0~ ID7 are defined as 2 0 , 2 1, 2 2 ...2 6, 2 7
Communication protocol
Communication Protocol
Communicaton Speed
Step 2: Install control equipment. We sequentially connect a DVP16-SP (8 IN 8 OUT), DVP-04AD (4

channels AD), DVP02DA (2 channels DA), and DVP-08ST (8 switches) to the RTU485.
The following corresponding locations can be obtained from the RTU485's configuration definitions:
Module Terminals 485 Address

X0–X7 0400H–0407H
DVP16-SP
Y0–Y7 0500H–0507H
DVP-04AD AD0–AD3 1600H–1603H
DVP02DA DA0–DA1 1640H–1641H
DVP-08ST Switch 0–7 0408H–040FH
16-151
Step 3: Physical configuration
CP200 0
Step 4: Write to PLC program
16-152
16-153
Step 5: Actual testing situation:

I/O testing: When the switch is activated, it can be discovered that the display corresponds to M115 -
M108. Furthermore, it can be seen that one output point light is added every 1 sec. (the
display uses a binary format)
This light signal increase

by 1number per second.
WPL will be modified
when pressing this Switch
AD DA testing: It can be discovered that D200 and D201 are roughly twice of the D300, and continue
to increase progressively. For their part, the D202 and D203 are roughly twice of the
D301, and continue to decrease progressively.
16-154
16-155
16-12 Calendar functions

Keypad (KPC-CC01) should be connected, or the CP2000 cannot be used. Currently-support
commands include TCMP (comparison of calendar data), TZCP (calendar data range comparison),
TADD (calendar data addition), TSUB (calendar data subtraction), and TRD (calendar reading). Please
refer to the explanation of relevant commands and functions for the usage of these commands.
In real applications, the internal PLC can judge whether calendar function have been activated; if they
have been activated, calendar warning codes may be displayed in some situations. The basis for whether
a calendar function has been activated is whether the program has written the calendar time (D1063 to
D1069) in connection with the foregoing calendar commands or programs.
The calendar's time display is currently assigned to D1063 to D1069, and is defined as follows:
Special D Item Content Attributes
Year
D1063 20xx (2000–2099) RO
(Western)
D1064 Weeks 1–7 RO
D1065 Month 1–12 RO
D1066 Day 1–31 RO
D1067 Hour 0–23 RO
D1068 Minute 0–59 RO
D1069 Second 0–59 RO
Calendar-related special M items are defined as follows:
Special D Item Attributes
M1068 Calendar time error RO
M1076 Calendar time error or refresh time out RO
M1036 Ignore calendar warning RW
*When a program writes to the commands TCMP, TZCP, TADD, or TSUB, if it is discovered that a
value exceeds the reasonable range, M1026 will be 1.
*When the keypad display is PLra (RTC correction warning) or PLrt (RTC time out warning), M1076
will be ON.
*When M1036 is 1, the PLC will ignore the calendar warning.
Calendar trigger warning code is defined as follows:
Reset Whether it affects PLC
Warning Description
approach operation
Requires Will not have any effect
PLra Calendar time correction
power restart
Requires Will not have any effect
PLrt Calendar time refresh time out
power restart
*When the PLC's calendar functions are operating, if the keypad is replaced with another keypad, it
will jump to PLra.
*When it is discovered at startup that the keypad has not been powered for more than 7 days, or the
time is wrong, PLra will be triggered.
*When it is discovered that the CP2000 has no keypad in 10 sec. after start up, PLrt will be triggered.
*If the keypad is suddenly pulled out while the calendar is operating normally, and is not reconnected
in 1 minute, PLrt will be triggered.
16-156
Practical applications:
We will perform a demo of simple applications.
We first correct the keypad time. After pressing Menu on the keypad, select the 9th time setting
option. After selection, set the current time.
Menu Time Setup

7.Quick Start 2020/09/01
8.Displ Setup 02:16:21
9.Time Setup
We set converter on during the period of 8:00–17:20, which allows us to write the following example
At K16
Normally open
contact of
operation
At K16
monitoring (a)
Servo on
Motor drive
Run (ON)/ Stop(OFF)
Normally open
contact of
operation
monitoring (a)
16-157
16-158
Chapter 17 Introduction to BACnet │CP2000
Chapter 17 Introduction to BACnet
1. About BACnet:
BACnet is an ASHRAE communication protocol for building automation and control networks.
(ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.).
CP2000’s BACnet is based on version 2004.
BACnet’s regulations are related to several kinds of physical layers’ interfaces. The physical layer built
inside CP2000 is achieved via MS/TP interface.
The BACnet of CP2000 supports a device type called B-ASC. B-ASC supports six types of services such
as DS-RP-B, DS-RPM-B, DS-WP-B, DM-DDB-B, DM-DOB-B and DM-DCC-B.
2. CP2000 BACnet-Object and Property:

In CP2000, BACnet supports 3 object types: Device, AnalogValue (AV) and BinaryValue (BV). In each
object type, we have the following table to show the Properties list:
Object Type
Property ID
Device Analog Value Binary Value
#4 ACTIVE TEXT V
#11 APDU_TIMEOUT V
#12 APPLICATION_SOFTWARE_VERSION V
#28 DESCRIPTION V V V
#30 DEVICE ADDRESS BINDING V V
#36 EVENT STATE V V
#44 FIRMWARE_REVISION V
#46 INACTIVE TEXT V
#62 MAX_APDU_LENGTH_ACCEPTED V
#63 MAX_INFO_FRAMES V
#64 MAX_MASTER V
#70 MODEL_NAME V
#73 NUMBER_OF_APDU_RETRIES V
#75 OBJECT_IDENTIFIER V *1 V V
#76 OBJECT_LIST V
#77 OBJECT_NAME V *1 V V
#79 OBJECT_TYPE V V V
#81 OUT OF SERVICE V V
#85 PRESENT VALUE V *2 V *2
#87 PRIORITY ARRAY V *3 V *3
#96 PROTOCOL_OBJECT_TYPES_SUPPORTED V
#97 PROTOCOL_SERVICES_SUPPORTED V
#98 PROTOCOL_VERSION V
17-1
Object Type
Property ID
#104 RELINQUISH DEFAULT V *3 V *3
#107 SEGMENTATION_SUPPORTED V
#111 STATUS FLAGS V V
#112 SYSTEM_STATUS V
#117 UNITS V
#120 VENDOR_IDENTIFIER V
#121 VENDOR_NAME V
#139 PROTOCOL_REVISION V
#155 DATABASE_REVISION V
*1. The Object_ID and Object_Name Properties of Device are writeable.
*2. The Present_Value Property of some AV and BV objects is commandable.
*3. Only Commandable objects support Priority_Array and Relinquish_Default.
The AV objects, we have commandable and read-only cases.
 Commendable case: We can use Write_Service to access the Present_Value property of commandable
AV objects. Thus, the commandable AV objects are linking to the Control_Word and Pr_Word in CP2000.
 Readonly case: We can use Read_Service to access the Present_Value property of readonly AV objects.
Thus, these readonly AV objects are linking to the Status_Word in CP2000.
The BV objects, we also have commandable and readonly cases.
 Commandable case: We can use Write_Service to access the Present_Value property of commendable
BV objects. Thus, the commandable BV objects are linking to the Control_Bit in CP2000.
 Readonly case: We can use Read_Service to access the Present_Value property of readonly BV objects.
Thus, these readonly BV objects are linking to the Status_Bit in CP2000.
2.1 Commandable Analog Value Object

In CP2000, we have AV_000–AV_026 supporting commandable Present_Value property. For these
AV_Objects, we also can use (Multi) Read_Service to access Priority_Array and Relinquish_Default
properties.
Object
R/W Object Name Object Description Unit
Number
AV 000 RW Reserved Reserved UNITS_NO_UNITS
AV 001 RW FreqRefValue Frequency Reference Value UNITS_HERTZ
17-2
Object
Number
AV 011 RW (P9-11 map set) AV11 will modify data which is P9-11 mapping to Depends
2.2 Status (Readonly) Analog Value Object

In CP2000, we have AV_027–AV_068 with read-only Present_Value property. For these AV_Objects, we
do NOT have Priority_Array and Relinquish_Default properties.
Object
Number
AV 027 R Reserved Reserved UNITS_NO_UNITS
AV 031 R Output frequency Display output frequency(Hz) UNITS_HERTZ
AV 035 R Output torque (%) Display output torque (%) UNITS_PERCENT
AV 039 R Status word Display status word,made from BV16~BV31 UNITS_NO_UNITS
AV 041 R Driver type code Driver type code UNITS_NO_UNITS
AV 042 R Warn code Warn code UNITS_NO_UNITS
17-3
Object
Number
AV 043 R Error code Error code UNITS_NO_UNITS
AV 044 R Output current Display output current (Amp) UNITS_AMPERES
AV 045 R DC bus voltage Display DC bus voltage (Volt) UNITS_VOLTS
AV 046 R Output Voltage Display output voltage of U, V, W (Volt) UNITS_VOLTS
AV 047 R Count Value Display counter value of TRG terminal UNITS_NO_UNITS
UNITS_POWER_FA
AV 048 R Power Angle Display output power angle of U, V, W
CTOR
AV 049 R Output Power Display actual output power of U, V, W (kw) UNITS_KILOWATTS
UNITS_DEGREES_
AV 050 R IGBT temperature Display the IGBT temperature
CELSIUS
Temperature of UNITS_DEGREES_
AV 051 R Display the temperature of capacitance
driver CELSIUS
Real carry
AV 052 R Display real carrier frequency of the drive (kHz) UNITS_KILOHERTZ
frequency
PID feedback
AV 053 R Display PID feedback value (%) UNITS_PERCENT
value
AV 054 R Overload rate Display overload condition (%) UNITS_PERCENT
Ground fail detect
AV 055 R Display GND fail detect level (%) UNITS_PERCENT
level
AV 056 R DC bus ripple Display DC bus voltage ripples (Volt) UNITS_VOLTS
AV 057 R Fan Speed Fan speed of the drive (%) UNITS_PERCENT
Output UNITS_REVOLUTIO
AV 058 R Output speed(rpm)
speed(rpm) NS_PER_MINUTE
AV 059 R kW per Hour kW per Hour UNITS_KILOWATTS
AV 060 R Multi-speed switch Real multi-speed switch UNITS_NO_UNITS
AV 061 R AVI1 input value 0–10 V corresponds to 0–100% UNITS_PERCENT
AV 062 R ACI input value 4–20 mA/0–10 V corresponds to 0–100% UNITS_PERCENT
AV 063 R AVI2 input value 0–10 V corresponds to 0–100% UNITS_PERCENT
AV 064 R Digital input status Refer to Pr.02-12 UNITS_NO_UNITS
Digital output
AV 065 R Refer to Pr.02-18 UNITS_NO_UNITS
status
CPU pin status of
AV 066 R Corresponding CPU pin status of digital input UNITS_NO_UNITS
DI
CPU pin status of
AV 067 R Corresponding CPU pin status of digital output UNITS_NO_UNITS
DO
AV 068 R PLC D1043 value PLC D1043 value UNITS_NO_UNITS
17-4
2.3 Commandable Binary Value Object

In CP2000, we have BV_000–BV_015 supporting commandable Present_Value property. For these
BV_Objects, we also can use (Multi) Read_Service to access Priority_Array and Relinquish_Default
properties.
Object
R/W Object Name Object Description
Number
BV 000 RW ACTIVE CMD (0)FreqCmd=0;(1)FreqCmd=FreqRefValue
BV 001 RW FWD/REV CMD (0)Forward; (1)Reverse
BV 002 RW Reserved Reserved
BV 003 RW HALT CMD (0)None;(1)Ramp Down to 0 Hz.
BV 004 RW LOCK CMD (0)None;(1)OutputFreq stays at current frequency
BV 006 RW QSTOP CMD (0)None;(1)Force driver quick stop
BV 007 RW ServoPower CMD (0)PowerOff(free run to stop);(1)PowerOn
BV 015 RW RESET RESET:(0)Do nothing;(1)Reset fault
2.4 Status (Readonly) Binary Value Object

In CP2000, we have BV_016–BV_031 with read-only Present_Value property. For these BV_Objects,
we do NOT have Priority_Array and Relinquish_Default properties.
Object
Number
BV 016 R ARRIVE STATE (0)Not yet;(1)Arrive (OutputFreq=FreqCmd)
BV 017 R FWD/REV STATE (0)Forward;(1)Reverse
BV 018 R WARN STATE (0)No Warn;(1)Occur Warn
BV 019 R ERROR STATE (0)No Error;(1)Occur Error
BV 020 R Reserved Reserved
BV 022 R QSTOP STATE (0)No QSTOP;(1)Occur QSTOP
BV 023 R Servo Power STATE (0)PowerOff(free run to stop);(1)PowerOn
17-5
Object
Number
17-6
3. Steps to setup the Pr about BACnet in CP2000

Related to BACnet function in CP2000, We have to configure 2 parts of Parameters
Part1. Setup parameters related to Communication at Pr_Group9.
Part2. Setup parameters related to System_Parameter at Pr_Group0.
Part1. Pr_Group9, Communication.

1-1. Set Pr.09-31 =1, BACnet is enabled, then the COM1_Port will be accessed by BACnet. When this
is set, the COM1_Port communication format will be changed to RTU 8, N, 1.
(Note: The HW Pins of COM1_Port are shared by RJ45 and RS-485. When BACnet is enabled,
BACnet will access the COM1_Port, that also means we can NOT have Modbus, PLC connections,
VFDSoft and VFD Explorer by COM1_Port).
1-2. Set Pr.09-50, Default = 10, BACnet’s MS/TP station number 0–127
1-3. Set Pr.09-51, Default = 38400, BACnet communication baud rate, 9600, 19200, 38400 or 76800
bps.
1-4. Set Pr.09-52 and Pr.09-53, The default setting of Device Object_Identifier is 0x000A (Pr.09-52=10,
Pr.09-53=00). Device Object_Identifier is the combination of Pr.09-52 and Pr.09-53, thus the
setting range can be 0–4194303.
For example, Pr.09-53=12(0x0C) and Pr.09-52 =3456(0x0D80), then the device Identifier’s value
=12*65536+3456 =789888(0x0C0D80).
1-5. Set Pr.09-55, Default =127, the highest allowable address for master nodes on the same MS/TP
network. CP2000 base on this setting to know the Max search range.
1-6. Set Pr.09-56, setup the BACnet password. If setup is successful, the keypad will display 8888.
Part2. Pr_Group0, System Parameter.

2-1. Set Pr.00-20 =1, That means the source of the Frequency command is from RS-485 Interface
(accessed by BACnet).
2-2. Set Pr.00-21 =2, That means the source of the Operation command is from RS-485 Interface
(accessed by BACnet).
Here is a simple example:

After setting up the 2 parts of Pr, we can enable the BACnet function in CP2000. Thus, we can access
some BACnet objects to make the CP2000 driving motor Run or Stop.
Step1. Write_Service on AV_001, Present_Value =60.0  Setup Frequency Reference Value.
Step2. Write_Service on BV_007, Present_Value =Active.  Setup Servo Power CMD.
Step3. Write_Service on BV_000, Present_Value =Active.  Setup Active CMD.
Step4. Read_Service on AV_031, Present_Value  User can know the Output frequency.
PS. In CP2000, base on different Pr setting or IO setting, we can make FreqCmd with different source of Reference Value.
Please check the usage of Keypad, Pr and IO setting for more detail information.
17-7
 Connection of the communication cable as shown in the below diagram.

Please note that HW Pins of COM1_Port are shared by RJ45 and RS-485. That means user can use
RJ45_cable or RS-485_lines to access the COM1_Port.
When BACnet is enabled, COM1_Port will be dominated by BACnet function. Under this condition,
user will not be able to have Modbus VFD Soft, VFD Explorer or PLC function on COM1_Port.
17-8
BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement

Date：July 24, 2014
Vendor Name: Delta Electronics, Inc.
Product Name: CP2000
Product Model Number: VFD-CP2000
Applications Software Version: Ver 01.04- yyyymm Firmware Revision: Ver 01.04 BACnet Protocol
Revision: 7
Product Description:
Delta VFD-CP2000 is a Variable Frequency AC motor Drive with BACnet embedded.
In VFD-CP2000, the BACnet connection is by MS/TP, RS-485-based. VFD-CP2000 provides a BACnet

communication function that permits it as a server and supports BIBBs defined by the BACnet B-ASC.
VFD-CP2000 BACnet provides the capability to control and monitor the VFD-CP2000 machine.
BACnet Standardized Device Profile (Annex L):

 BACnet Operator Workstation (B-OWS)
 BACnet Building Controller (B-BC)
 BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC)
 BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC)
 BACnet Smart Sensor (B-SS)
 BACnet Smart Actuator (B-SA)
List all BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks Supported (Annex K):
Data Sharing BIBBs

Data Sharing-ReadProperty-B (DS-RP-B)
Data Sharing-WriteProperty-B (DS-WP-B)
Data Sharing-ReadPropertyMultiple-B (DS-RPM-B)
Device and Network Management BIBBs

Device Management-Dynamic Device Binding-B (DM-DDB-B)
Device Management-Dynamic Object Binding-B (DM-DOB-B)
Device Management-DeviceCommunicationControl-B (DM-DCC-B)
Segmentation Capability:
 Segmented requests supported Window Size
 Segmented responses supported Window Size
Standard Object Types Supported:

Analog Value
Binary Value
Device
Object instantiation is static. Refer to table at end of this document for object details.
17-9
Data Link Layer Options:

 BACnet IP, (Annex J)
 BACnet IP, (Annex J), Foreign Device
 ISO 8802-3, Ethernet (Clause 7)
 ANSI/ATA 878.1, 2.5 Mb. ARCNET (Clause 8)
 ANSI/ATA 878.1, RS-485 ARCNET (Clause 8), baud rate(s) ____________
 MS/TP master (Clause 9), baud rate(s): 9600, 19200, 38400, 76800
 MS/TP slave (Clause 9), baud rate(s): ________
 Point-To-Point, EIA 232 (Clause 10), baud rate(s):
 Point-To-Point, modem, (Clause 10), baud rate(s):
 LonTalk, (Clause 11), medium: __________
 Other:
Device Address Binding:

Is static device binding supported? (This is currently necessary for two-way communication with MS/TP slaves and
certain other devices.) Yes No
Networking Options:
 Router, Clause 6 - List all routing configurations, e.g., ARCNET-Ethernet, Ethernet-MS/TP, etc.
 Annex H, BACnet Tunneling Router over IP
 BACnet/IP Broadcast Management Device (BBMD)
Does the BBMD support registrations by Foreign Devices?  Yes  No
Character Sets Supported:

Indicating support for multiple character sets does not imply that they can all be supported simultaneously.
 ANSI X3.4  IBM/Microsoft DBCS  ISO 8859-1
 ISO 10646 (UCS-2)  ISO 10646 (UCS-4)  JIS C 6226
If this product is a communication gateway, describe the types of non-BACnet equipment/networks(s) that
the gateway supports:
___________________________________________________________________________________________
____
___________________________________________________________________________________________
____
17-10
The Properties of Objects

Object Type
Property ID
#4 ACTIVE TEXT V
#11 APDU_TIMEOUT V
#12 APPLICATION_SOFTWARE_VERSION V
#28 DESCRIPTION V V V
#30 DEVICE ADDRESS BINDING V V
#36 EVENT STATE V V
#44 FIRMWARE_REVISION V
#46 INACTIVE TEXT V
#62 MAX_APDU_LENGTH_ACCEPTED V
#63 MAX_INFO_FRAMES V
#64 MAX_MASTER V
#70 MODEL_NAME V
#73 NUMBER_OF_APDU_RETRIES V
#75 OBJECT_IDENTIFIER V *1 V V
#76 OBJECT_LIST V
#77 OBJECT_NAME V *1 V V
#79 OBJECT_TYPE V V V
#81 OUT OF SERVICE V V
#85 PRESENT VALUE V *2 V *2
#87 PRIORITY ARRAY V *3 V *3
#96 PROTOCOL_OBJECT_TYPES_SUPPORTED V
#97 PROTOCOL_SERVICES_SUPPORTED V
#98 PROTOCOL_VERSION V
#104 RELINQUISH DEFAULT V *3 V *3
#107 SEGMENTATION_SUPPORTED V
#111 STATUS FLAGS V V
#112 SYSTEM_STATUS V
#117 UNITS V
#120 VENDOR_IDENTIFIER V
#121 VENDOR_NAME V
#139 PROTOCOL_REVISION V
#155 DATABASE_REVISION V
*1. The Object_ID and Object_Name Properties of Device are writeable.
*2. The Present_Value Property of some AV and BV objects are commandable.
*3. Only Commandable objects support Priority_Array and Relinquish_Default.
17-11
 Commandable Analog Value Object

In VFD-CP2000, we have AV_000–AV_026 supporting commandable Present_Value property. In
these AV_Objects, we also can use (Multi) Read_Service to access Priority_Array and
Relinquish_Default properties.
Object
Number
AV 000 RW AV_000_Reserved Reserved UNITS_NO_UNITS
AV 001 RW AV_001_FreqRefValue Frequency Reference Value UNITS_HERTZ
AV 011 RW AV_011_P9-11 map set= ----- AV11 will modify data which is P9-11 mapping to Depends
17-12
 Status (Readonly) Analog Value Object

In VFD-CP2000, we have AV_027–AV_068 with read-only Present_Value property. In these
AV_Objects, we do NOT have Priority_Array and Relinquish_Default properties.
Object
Number
AV 027 R AV_027_Reserved Reserved UNITS_NO_UNITS
AV 031 R AV_031_Output frequency Display output frequency(Hz) UNITS_HERTZ
AV 035 R AV_035_Output torque (%) Display output torque (%) UNITS_PERCENT
AV 039 R AV_039_Status word Display status word,made from BV16~BV31 UNITS_NO_UNITS
AV 041 R AV_041_Driver type code Driver type code UNITS_NO_UNITS
AV 042 R AV_042_Warn code Warn code UNITS_NO_UNITS
AV 043 R AV_043_Error code Error code UNITS_NO_UNITS
AV 044 R AV_044_Output current Display output current(Amp) UNITS_AMPERES
AV 045 R AV_045_DC-bus voltage Display DC-BUS voltage(Volt) UNITS_VOLTS
AV 046 R AV_046_Output Voltage Display output voltage of U, V, W(Volt) UNITS_VOLTS
AV 047 R AV_047_Count Value Display counter value of TRG terminal UNITS_NO_UNITS
UNITS_POWER_FACT
AV 048 R AV_048_Power Angle Display output power angle of U, V, W
OR
AV 049 R AV_049_Output Power Display actual output power of U, V, W(kw) UNITS_KILOWATTS
UNITS_DEGREES_CE
AV 050 R AV_050_IGBT temperature Display the IGBT temperature
LSIUS
UNITS_DEGREES_CE
AV 051 R AV_051_Temperature of driver Display the temperature of capacitance
LSIUS
AV 052 R AV_052_Real carry frequency Display real carrier frequency of the drive(KHz) UNITS_KILOHERTZ
AV 053 R AV_053_PID feedback value Display PID feedback value (%) UNITS_PERCENT
AV 054 R AV_054_Overload rate Display overload condition (%) UNITS_PERCENT
AV 055 R AV_055_Ground fail detect level Display GND fail detect level (%) UNITS_PERCENT
AV 056 R AV_056_DC bus ripple Display DCbus voltage ripples(Volt) UNITS_VOLTS
AV 057 R AV_057_Fan Speed Fan speed of the drive (%) UNITS_PERCENT
UNITS_REVOLUTION
AV 058 R AV_058_Output speed(rpm) Output speed(rpm)
S_PER_MINUTE
17-13
Object
Number
AV 059 R AV_059_KW per Hour KW per Hour UNITS_KILOWATTS
AV 060 R AV_060_Multi-speed switch Real multi-speed switch UNITS_NO_UNITS
AV 061 R AV_061_AVI1 input value 0~10V corresponds to 0~100% UNITS_PERCENT
AV 062 R AV_062_ACI input value 4~20mA/0~10V corresponds to 0~100% UNITS_PERCENT
AV 063 R AV_063_AVI2 input value 0V~10V corresponds to 0~100% UNITS_PERCENT
AV 064 R AV_064_Digital input status Refer to P2-12 UNITS_NO_UNITS
AV 065 R AV_065_Digital output status Refer to P2-18 UNITS_NO_UNITS
AV 066 R AV_066_CPU pin status of DI Corresponding CPU pin status of digital input UNITS_NO_UNITS
AV 067 R AV_067_CPU pin status of DO Corresponding CPU pin status of digital output UNITS_NO_UNITS
AV 068 R AV_068_PLC D1043 value PLC D1043 value UNITS_NO_UNITS
 Commandable Binary Value Object

In VFD-CP2000, we have BV_000–BV_015 supporting commandable Present_Value property. In
these BV_Objects, we also can use (Multi) Read_Service to access Priority_Array and
Relinquish_Default properties.
Object
Number
BV 000 RW BV_000_ACTIVE CMD (0)FreqCmd=0;(1)FreqCmd=FreqRefValue
BV 001 RW BV_001_FWD/REV CMD (0)Forward; (1)Reverse
BV 002 RW BV_002_Reserved Reserved
BV 003 RW BV_003_HALT CMD (0)None;(1)RampDown to 0Hz.
BV 004 RW BV_004_LOCK CMD (0)None;(1)OutputFreq stays at current frequency
BV 006 RW BV_006_QSTOP CMD (0)None;(1)Force driver quick stop
BV 007 RW BV_007_ServoPower CMD (0)PowerOff(free run to stop);(1)PowerOn
BV 015 RW BV_015_RESET RESET:(0)Do nothing;(1)Reset fault
17-14
 Status (Readonly) Binary Value Object

In VFD-CP2000, we have BV_016–BV_031 with read-only Present_Value property. In these
BV_Objects, we do NOT have Priority_Array and Relinquish_Default properties.
Object
Number
BV 016 R BV_016_ARRIVE STATE (0)Not yet;(1)Arrive (OutputFreq=FreqCmd)
BV 017 R BV_017_FWD/REV STATE (0)Forward;(1)Reverse
BV 018 R BV_018_WARN STATE (0)No Warn;(1)Occur Warn
BV 019 R BV_019_ERROR STATE (0)No Error;(1)Occur Error
BV 020 R BV_020_Reserved Reserved
BV 022 R BV_022_QSTOP STATE (0)No QSTOP;(1)Occur QSTOP
BV 023 R BV_023_ServoPower STATE (0)PowerOff(free run to stop);(1)PowerOn
17-15
17-16
Chapter 18 Safe Torque Off Function │CP2000
Chapter 18 Safe Torque Off Function
18-1 The Drive Safety Function Failure Rate
18-2 Safe Torque Off Terminal Function Description
18-3 Wiring Diagram
18-4 Parameter
18-5 Operating Sequence Description
18-6 New Error Code for STO Function
18-1
Chapter 18 Safe Torque Off Function│CP2000
18-1 The Drive Safety Function Failure Rate
Item Definition Standard Performance

Channel 1: 80.08%
STO Safe Torque Off IEC61508
Channel 2: 68.91%
HFT
Hardware Fault Tolerance IEC61508 1
(Type A subsystem)
IEC61508 SIL 2
SIL Safety Integrity Level
IEC62061 SILCL 2
Average frequency of dangerous
PFH IEC61508 9.56×10-10
failure [h-1]
Probability of Dangerous Failure
PFDav IEC61508 4.18×10-6
on Demand
Category Category ISO13849-1 Category 3
PL Performance level ISO13849-1 d
MTTFd Mean time to dangerous failure ISO13849-1 High
DC Diagnostic coverage ISO13849-1 Low
18-2 Safe Torque Off Terminal Function Description

The Safe Torque Off function is to cut off the power supply to motor through the hardware, thereby
the motor could not produce torque.
The STO function controls the motor current driving signal through two hardware circuits respectively,
and thus cut off the inverter power module output in order to achieve the status of safety stop.
Operation Principle Description as following table 1:

Table 1: Terminal operation description
Signal Channel Photo-coupler status
STO1–SCM1 ON (High) ON (High) OFF (Low) OFF (Low)

STO signal
STO2–SCM2 ON (High) OFF (Low) ON (High) OFF (Low)
STL2 mode STL1 mode STO mode

Driver Output status Ready (Torque output (Torque output (Torque output
off) off) off)
 STO means Safe Torque Off

 STL1–STL3 means Safe Torque Off hardware abnormal.
 STL3 means STO1–SCM1 and STO2–SCM2 internal circuit detected abnormal.
 STO1–SCM1 ON (High): means STO1–SCM1 has connected to a +24 VDC power supply.
 STO2–SCM2 ON (High): means STO2–SCM2 has connected to a +24 VDC power supply.
 STO1–SCM1 OFF (Low): means STO1–SCM1 has not connected to a +24 VDC power supply.
 STO2–SCM2 OFF (Low): means STO2–SCM2 has not connected to a +24 VDC power supply.
18-2
18-3 Wiring diagram

18-3-1Internal STO circuit as below:
18-3-2 In the figure below, the default setting for +24V-STO1-STO2 and SCM1-SCM2-DCM is short
circuit:
18-3
18-3-3 The control loop wiring diagram:

1. Remove the shot-circuit of +24V-STO1-STO2 and DCM-SCM1-SCM2.
2. The wiring as below diagram. The ESTOP switch must at Close status in normal situation and drive
will be able to Run.
3. STO mode, switch ESTOP open. Drive output stop and keypad display STO.
18-4
18-4 Parameter
 STO Alarm Latch
Default: 0
Settings 0：STO Alarm Latch
1：STO Alarm no Latch
 Pr.06-44 = 0 STO Alarm Latch: after the reason of STO Alarm is cleared, you need a Reset
command to clear STO Alarm.
 Pr.06-44 = 1 STO Alarm no Latch: after the reason of STO Alarm is cleared, the STO Alarm will
be cleared automatically.
 The STL1–STL3 error are all “Alarm latch” mode (in STL1–STL3 mode, the Pr.06-44 function is
no effective).
 Multi-function Output 1 (Relay1)
Default: 11
Default: 1
Default: 66
Settings
66: SO N.O. logic A output
68: SO N.C. logic B output

66 SO Logic A output Safety Output Normal Open
68 SO Logic B output Safety Output Normal Close
 CP2000 default Pr.02-15 (Relay3) = 66 (N.O.) and Multi-function Output setting item adds two
new functions: 66 and 68.
Safety Output status
Drive status N.O. N.C.
(MOx = 66) (MOx = 68)
Normal run Open Close
STO Close Open
STL1~STL3 Close Open
 Content of Multi-function Display

Default: 3
Settings 45: Hardware version
18-5
18-5 Operating Sequence Description

18-5-1 Normal operation status
As shown in Figure 1: When the STO1–SCM1 and STO2–SCM2 = ON (no STO function is needed),
the drive executes “Operating” or “Output Stop” according to the RUN/STOP command.
Figure 1
18-5-2-1 STO, Pr.06-44 = 0, Pr.02-35 = 0

As shown in Figure 4: When both of STO1–SCM1 and STO2–SCM2 channel have turned off during
operating, the STO function enables and the drive stops output regardless of Run command is ON or
OFF status.
Figure 2
18-5-2-2 STO, Pr.06-44 = 0, Pr.02-35 = 1
As shown in Figure 3: the same as figure 2. However, due to the setting for Pr.02-35 is 1, if the
operating command still exists after the Reset command, the drive will immediately execute the run
command again.
Figure 3
18-6
18-5-3 STO, Pr.06-44 = 1 STO Alarm no latch
Figure 4
18-5-4 STL1
Figure 5
18-5-4 STL2
Figure 6
18-7
18-6 New Error Code for STO Function

Fault Record 1
Fault Record 2
Fault Record 3
Fault Record 4
Fault Record 5
Fault Record 6
Settings
72: Channel 1 (STO1–SCM1) safety loop error (STL1)
76: Safe torque off (STO)
77: Channel 2 (STO2–SCM2) safety loop error (STL2)
78: Internal loop error (STL3)
Error code Name Description

76 STO Safe Torque Off function active
STL1
72 STO1–SCM1 internal hardware detect error
(STO1–SCM1)
STL2
77 STO2–SCM2 internal hardware detect error
(STO2–SCM2)
STO1–SCM1 and STO2–SCM2 internal
78 STL3
hardware detect error
The Old/New control board and Old/New I/O card:
CP2000 v1.20 firmware v1.21 firmware

v1.20 control board + old I/O card (no STO function) OK OK
v1.20 control board + new I/O card (with STO function) Error Error
v1.21 control board + old I/O card (no STO function) Error Error
v1.21 control board + new I/O card (with STO function) Error OK
18-8
Appendix A. Revision HistoryCP2000
Appendix A. Revision History

New information
Description Related part
Add 200 kW and 250 kW models to 460V series Whole manual
Add consumption data to AC input / output reactor Chapter 07
Add option card eZVFD-CC Chapter 08
Add SynRM Sensorless control mode and PM Sensorless control mode Whole manual
Add keypad languages: Polski, Deutsch, Italiano and Svenska Chapter 10
SynRM parameters:
 Parameter group 00: 00-11, 00-17
 Parameter group 05: 05-00, 05-33, 05-34~05-41
Other new parameters:
 Parameter group 00: 00-37
Chapter 11
Section 12-1
 Parameter group 07: 07-21, 07-41–07-45
 Parameter group 10: 10-08–10-15, 10-33, 10-35, 10-36, 10-54–10-58
 Parameter group 11: 11-00–11-23
Add Adjustment for SynRM Section 12-2
Add Warning code of CKx Chapter 13
Add CANopen built-in PLC register D indexes Chapter 15
Add PLC special M register: M1019 Motor drive warning indicator
Chapter 16
Add PLC special D register: D1560 Motor drive warning code
A-1
Appendix A. Revision History CP2000
Updated information
Description Related part
Update specification of main circuit terminals, and add operation conditions
Chapter 05
under ambient termperature 50°C
Update the motor cable length for 230V models Chapter 07
Update the part number of zero phase reactors Chapter 07
Update information of option card EMC-A22A Chapter 07
Correct the HP value of 630 kW and 560kW models for 690V Chapter 09
Update derating curve for ambient temperature, altitude and carrier frequency
Chapter 09
Update efficiency curve
Update certification Chapter 09
Update information of keypad function, Start Wizard and Warning / Fault
Chapter 10
codes
Update parameter settings and descriptions:
 Parameter group 00: 00-00, 00-04, 00-06, 00-11, 00-17, 00-20, 00-30
 Parameter group 01: 01-01, 01-02, 01-10, 01-11, 01-23, 01-35, 01-36,
01-49
 Parameter group 02: 02-01–02-08, 02-26–02-31, 02-10–02-15,
02-36–02-46, 02-50, 02-51, 02-53, 02-73
 Parameter group 03: 03-20–03-25, 03-29
 Parameter group 05: 05-24, 05-28–05-30 Chapter 11
 Parameter group 06: 06-03, 06-04, 06-16, 06-17–06-22, 06-23–06-26, Section 12-1
06-29, 06-46–06-48, 06-49, 06-53, 06-55, 06-73, 06-80–06-87
 Parameter group 07: 07-08, 07-12, 07-19, 07-26, 07-27
 Parameter group 08: 08-00, 08-06, 08-10, 08-11, 08-15 (Reserve)
 Parameter group 09: 09-02, 09-04, 09-11–09-26, 09-30
 Parameter group 12: 12-00, 12-04, 12-09
 Parameter group 14: 14-10, 14-11, 14-16, 14-17
Update DO terminals Chapter 15
Delete setting 4: Torque Profile Mode from 6060h Chapter 15
Update the fault codes for CANopen Chapter 15
Correct the STO operating diagram Chapter 18
A-2

Delta Ia-Mds CP2000 Um en 20200901

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Delta Ia-Mds CP2000 Um en 20200901

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Delta Ia-Mds CP2000 Um en 20200901

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Delta Fan / Pump Vector Control Drive - CP2000 Series User Manual

Industrial Automation Headquarters

DACH: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.

1-1 Nameplate Information…..................................................................................................1-2

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION ..................................................................................................................2-1

2-1 Mounting Clearance..........................................................................................................2-2

CHAPTER 3 UNPACKING ........................................................................................................................3-1

CHAPTER 4 WIRING ................................................................................................................................4-1

4-1 System Wiring Diagram...................................................................................................4-3

CHAPTER 5 MAIN CIRCUIT TERMINALS .............................................................................................5-1

5-1 Main Circuit Diagram.........................................................................................................5-4

CHPATER 6 CONTROL TERMINALS ......................................................................................................6-1

6-1 Remove the Cover for Wiring…………………………………………………………………6-4

CHAPTER 7 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ................................................................................................7-1

CHAPTER 8 OPTION CARDS ..................................................................................................................8-1

8-1 Option Card Installation......................................................................................................8-2

CHAPTER 9 SPECIFICATION ..................................................................................................................9-1

9-1 230V Models…………………………………...........................................................................9-2

CHAPTER 10 DIGITAL KEYPAD ...........................................................................................................10-1

10-1 Descriptions of Digital Keypad ………………………………….............................................10-2

CHAPTER 11 SUMMARY OF PARAMETERS ....................................................................................... 11-1

12-1 Description of Parameter Settings ……................................................................... 12.1-00-1

CHAPTER 13 WARNING CODES ..........................................................................................................13-1

CHAPTER 14 FAULT CODES AND DESCRIPTIONS............................................................................14-1

CHAPTER 15 CANOPEN OVERVIEW ...................................................................................................15-1

15-1 CANopen Overview……………………............................................................................15-3

CHAPTER 16 PLC FUNCTION APPLICATIONS ...................................................................................16-1

16-1 PLC Summary……………………....................................................................................16-2

CHAPTER 17 INTRODUCTION TO BACnet…………………………………………………….….17-1

CHAPTER 18 SAFE TORQUE OFF FUNCTION……………………………………………………….18-1

18-1 The Drive Safety Function Failure Rate……………………………………………………………18-2

APPENDIX A. REVISION HISTORY…………………………………………………..………………………..A-1

1-1 Nameplate Information

1-2 Model Name

1-3 Serial Number

1-4 Apply After Service by Mobile Device

1-5 RFI Jumper

Receiving and Inspection

1-1 Nameplate Information:

1-2 Model Name:

1-3 Serial Number:

1-4 Apply After Service by Mobile Device

1-4-2 Service Link Label

Scan QR Code to apply

1-5 RFI Jumper

Figure 1-4 Figure 1-5

Isolating main power from ground:

Important points regarding ground connection

Figure 1-7 Figure 1-8

Pay particular attention to the following points:

Floating Ground System (IT Systems)

Asymmetric Ground System (Corner Grounded TN Systems)

Figure 1-11 Figure 1-12

system, you can use the RFI jumper to maintain

VFD007CP23A-21; VFD015CP23A-21; VFD022CP23A-21; VFD037CP23A-21; VFD055CP23A-21;

Detail A (Mounting Hole)

Detail B (Mounting Hole)

VFD075CP23A-21; VFD110CP23A-21; VFD150CP23A-21; VFD110CP43B-21; VFD150CP43B-21;

VFD185CP23A-21; VFD220CP23A-21; VFD300CP23A-21; VFD220CP43A-21; VFD300CP43B-21;